Loading...
The URL can be used to link to this page
Your browser does not support the video tag.
31B-244 (7)
Project No. 01091 Proposed Renovations March 6, 2009 Park House Smith College, Northampton, MA 3.9 CONNECTIONS A. Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties. B. Connect low elevations of subdrainage system to building's solid-wall-piping storm drainage system. 3.10 IDENTIFICATION A. Materials and their installation are specified in Division 31 Section "Earth Moving." Arrange for installation of green warning tapes directly over piping. 1 . Install detectable warning tape over nonferrous piping and over edges of underground structures. 3.11 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Testing: After installing drainage course to top of piping, test drain piping with water to ensure free flow before backfilling. Remove obstructions, replace damaged components, and repeat test until results are satisfactory. 3.12 CLEANING A. Clear interior of installed piping and structures of dirt and other superfluous material as work progresses. Maintain swab or drag in piping and pull past each joint as it is completed. Place plugs in ends of uncompleted pipe at end of each day or when work stops. END OF SECTION 334600 334600 SUBDRAINAGE Page 6 of 6 Project No. 01091 Proposed Renovations March 6, 2009 Park House Smith College, Northampton, MA 3. Excavate recesses in trench bottom for bell ends of pipe. Lay pipe with bells facing upslope and with spigot end entered fully into adjacent bell. B. Use increasers, reducers, and couplings made for different sizes or materials of pipes and fittings being connected. Reduction of pipe size in direction of flow is prohibited. C. Install PVC piping according to ASTM D 2321 . 3.7 PIPE JOINT CONSTRUCTION A. Join PVC pipe and fittings according to ASTM D 3034 with elastomeric seal gaskets according to ASTM D 2321 . B. Join perforated PVC pipe and fittings according to ASTM D 2729, with loose bell-and-spigot joints. C. Special Pipe Couplings: Join piping made of different materials and dimensions with special couplings made for this application. Use couplings that are compatible with and fit materials and dimensions of both pipes. 3.8 CLEANOUT INSTALLATION A. Cleanouts for Landscaping Subdrainage: 1 . Install cleanouts from piping to grade. Locate cleanouts at beginning of piping run and at changes in direction. Install fittings so cleanouts open in direction of flow in piping. 2. In vehicular-traffic areas, use NPS 4 (DN 100) cast-iron soil pipe and fittings for piping branch fittings and riser extensions to cleanout. Set cleanout frames and covers in a cast-in-place concrete anchor, 18 by 18 by 12 inches (450 by 450 by 300 mm) in depth. Set top of cleanout flush with grade. Cast-iron pipe may also be used for cleanouts in nonvehicular-traffic areas. 3. In nonvehicular-traffic areas, use NPS 4 (DN 100) PVC pipe and fittings for piping branch fittings and riser extensions to cleanout. Set cleanout frames and covers in a cast-in-place concrete anchor, 12 by 12 by 4 inches (300 by 300 by 100 mm) in depth. Set top of cleanout plug 1 inch (25 mm) above grade. 334600 SUBDRAINAGE Page 5 of 6 Project No. 01091 Proposed Renovations March 6, 2009 Park House Smith College, Northampton, MA 3.5 LANDSCAPING DRAINAGE INSTALLATION A. Provide trench width to allow installation of drainage conduit. Grade bottom of trench excavations to required slope, and compact to firm, solid bed for drainage system. B. Lay flat-style geotextile filter fabric in trench and overlap trench sides. C. Place supporting layer of drainage course over compacted subgrade and geotextile filter fabric, to compacted depth of not less than 4 inches (100 mm). D. Install drainage conduits as indicated in Part 3 "Piping Installation" Article for landscaping subdrainage with horizontal distance of at least 6 inches (150 mm) between conduit and trench walls. Wrap drainage conduits without integral geotextile filter fabric with flat-style geotextile filter fabric before installation. E. Add drainage course to top of drainage conduits. F. After satisfactory testing, cover drainage conduit to within 12 inches (300 mm) of finish grade. G. Install drainage course and wrap top of drainage course with flat-style geotextile filter fabric. H. Fill to Grade: Place satisfactory soil fill material over drainage course. Place material in loose-depth layers not exceeding 6 inches (150 mm). Thoroughly compact each layer. Fill to finish grade. 3.6 PIPING INSTALLATION A. Install piping beginning at low points of system, true to grades and alignment indicated, with unbroken continuity of invert. Bed piping with full bearing in filtering material. Install gaskets, seals, sleeves, and couplings according to manufacturer's written instructions and other requirements indicated. 1 . Landscaping Subdrainage: Install piping pitched down in direction of flow, at a minimum slope of 0.5 percent and with a minimum cover of 36 inches (915 mm), unless otherwise indicated. 2. Lay perforated pipe with perforations down. 334600 SUBDRAINAGE Page 4 of 6 Project No. 01091 Proposed Renovations March 6, 2009 Park House Smith College, Northampton, MA PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine surfaces and areas for suitable conditions where subdrainage systems are to be installed. B. If subdrainage is required for landscaping, locate and mark existing utilities, underground structures, and aboveground obstructions before beginning installation and avoid disruption and damage of services. C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 EARTHWORK A. Excavating, trenching, and backfilling are specified in Division 31 Section "Earth Moving." 3.3 PIPING APPLICATIONS A. Underground Subdrainage Piping: 1 . Perforated PVC sewer pipe and fittings for loose, bell-and-spigot joints. B. Header Piping: 1 . PVC sewer pipe and fittings, couplings, and coupled joints. 3.4 CLEANOUT APPLICATIONS A. In Underground Subdrainage Piping: 1 . At Grade in Earth: PVC cleanouts. 2. At Grade in Paved Areas: Cast-iron cleanouts. 334600 SUBDRAINAGE Page 3 of 6 Project No. 01 091 Proposed Renovations March 6, 2009 Park House Smith College, Northampton, MA 2.2 SOLID-WALL PIPES AND FITTINGS A. PVC Sewer Pipe and Fittings: ASTM D 3034, SDR 35, bell-and-spigot ends, for gasketed joints. 1 . Gaskets: ASTM F 477, elastomeric seal. 2.3 SPECIAL PIPE COUPLINGS A. Comply with ASTM C 1173, elastomeric, sleeve-type, reducing or transition coupling, for joining underground nonpressure piping. Include ends of same sizes as piping to be joined and corrosion-resistant metal tension band and tightening mechanism on each end. 1 . Sleeve Materials: a. For Plastic Pipes: ASTM F 477, elastomeric seal or ASTM D 5926, PVC. b. For Dissimilar Pipes: ASTM D 5926, PVC or other material compatible with pipe materials being joined. 2. Shielded Flexible Couplings: ASTM C 1460, elastomeric or rubber sleeve with full-length, corrosion-resistant outer shield and corrosion- resistant metal tension band and tightening mechanism on each end. 2.4 CLEANOUTS A. PVC Cleanouts: ASTM D 3034, PVC cleanout threaded plug and threaded pipe hub. 2.5 SOIL MATERIALS A. Backfill, drainage course, impervious fill, and satisfactory soil materials are specified in Division 31 Section "Earth Moving." 334600 SUBDRAINAGE Page 2 of 6 Project No. 01091 Proposed Renovations March 6, 2009 Park House Smith College, Northampton, MA SECTION 334600 - SUBDRAINAGE PART 1 - GENERAL 1 .1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1 .2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes subdrainage systems for the following: 1 . Landscaped areas. 1 .3 DEFINITIONS A. PVC: Polyvinyl chloride plastic. B. Subdrainage: Drainage system that collects and removes subsurface or seepage water. 1 .4 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For the following: 1 . Perforated-wall pipe and fittings. 2. Solid-wall pipe and fittings. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PERFORATED-WALL PIPES AND FITTINGS A. Perforated PVC Sewer Pipe and Fittings: ASTM D 2729, bell-and-spigot ends, for loose joints. 334600 SUBDRAINAGE Page 1 of 6 Project No. 01091 Proposed Renovations March 6, 2009 Park House Smith College, Northampton, MA 3.3 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Do not use unit curbs with cracks, voids, discolorations, and other defects that might be visible in finished work. B. Tolerances: Do not exceed 1 /8 inch in 10 feet (3 mm in 3 m) from level, or indicated slope, for finished surface of paving. C. Provide steps made of stone curbs as indicated. Install stone steps before installing adjacent paving. 3.4 REPAIRING, POINTING, AND CLEANING A. Remove and replace unit pavers that are loose, chipped, broken, stained, or otherwise damaged or that do not match adjoining units. Provide new units to match adjoining units and install in same manner as original units, with same joint treatment and with no evidence of replacement. AVW B. Pointing: During tooling of joints, enlarge voids or holes and completely fill with grout. Point up joints at sealant joints to provide a neat, uniform appearance, properly prepared for sealant application. C. Cleaning: Remove excess grout from exposed curb surfaces; wash and scrub clean. END OF SECTION 321400 321400 UNIT PAVING Page 3 of 3 Project No. 01091 Proposed Renovations March 6, 2009 Park House Smith College, Northampton, MA 5. Top Finish: Sawed. 6. Face Finish: Split. 2.2 GROUT MATERIALS A. Sand-Portland Cement Grout: ANSI Al 08.10, composed of white or gray cement, unfading mineral pigments and colored sand as required to produce required color. B. Grout Colors: Gray. C. Water: Potable. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine areas indicated to receive curbing, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance. 1 . Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Remove substances from concrete substrates that could impair mortar bond, including curing and sealing compounds, form oil, and laitance. B. Clean concrete substrates to remove dirt, dust, debris, and loose particles. C. Proof-roll prepared subgrade according to . requirements in Division 31 Section "Earth Moving" to identify soft pockets and areas of excess yielding. Proceed with unit paver installation only after deficient subgrades have been corrected. 321400 UNIT PAVING Page 2 of 3 Project No. 01091 Proposed Renovations March 6, 2009 Park House Smith College, Northampton, MA SECTION 321400 - UNIT PAVING PART 1 - GENERAL 1 .1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1 .2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1 . Stone curbs. B. Related Sections include the following: 1 . Division 32 Section "Asphalt Paving" for asphalt base under unit pavers. 1 .3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of unit paver, joint material, and setting material from one source with resources to provide materials and products of consistent quality in appearance and physical properties. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 STONE CURBS A. Stone Curbs: Granite curbing, with face battered 1 inch per foot (1 :12), produced in random lengths not less than 36 inches (900 mm) from granite complying with ASTM C 615. 1 . Granite Color and Grain: Light gray with medium grain. 2. Top Width: 6 inches (152 mm). 3. Face Height: 8 inches (203 mm). 4. Total Height: 16 inches (406 mm). 321400 UNIT PAVING Page 1 of 3 Project No. 01091 Proposed Renovations March 6, 2009 Park House Smith College, Northampton, MA 2. Surface Course: 1 /8 inch (3 mm). "'wk 3. Crowned Surfaces: Test with crowned template centered and at right angle to crown. Maximum allowable variance from template is 1 /4 inch (6 mm). 3.8 DISPOSAL A. Except for material indicated to be recycled, remove excavated materials from Project site and legally dispose of them in an EPA-approved landfill. 1 . Do not allow milled materials to accumulate on-site. END OF SECTION 321216 -s 321216 ASPHALT PAVING Page 8 of 8 Project No. 01091 Proposed Renovations March 6, 2009 Park House Smith College, Northampton, MA Continue rolling until hot-mix asphalt course has been uniformly compacted to the following density: 1 . Average Density: 96 percent of reference laboratory density according to ASTM D 6927, but not less than 94 percent nor greater than 100 percent. 2. Average Density: 92 percent of reference maximum theoretical density according to ASTM D 2041 , but not less than 90 percent nor greater than 96 percent. D. Finish Rolling: Finish roll paved surfaces to remove roller marks while hot- mix asphalt is still warm. E. Edge Shaping: While surface is being compacted and finished, trim edges of pavement to proper alignment. Bevel edges while asphalt is still hot; compact thoroughly. F. Repairs: Remove paved areas that are defective or contaminated with foreign materials and replace with fresh, hot-mix asphalt. Compact by rolling to specified density and surface smoothness. G. Protection: After final rolling, do not permit vehicular traffic on pavement until it has cooled and hardened. H. Erect barricades to protect paving from traffic until mixture has cooled enough not to become marked. 3.7 INSTALLATION TOLERANCES A. Pavement Thickness: Compact each course to produce the thickness indicated within the following tolerances: 1 . Base Course: Plus or minus 1 /2 inch (13 mm). 2. Surface Course: Plus 1 /4 inch (6 mm), no.minus. B. Pavement Surface Smoothness: Compact each course to produce a surface smoothness within the following tolerances as determined by using a 10-foot (3-m) straightedge applied transversely or longitudinally to paved areas: 1 . Base Course: 1 /4 inch (6 mm). 321216 ASPHALT PAVING Page 7 of 8 Project No. 01 091 Proposed Renovations March 6, 2009 Park House Smith College, Northampton, MA B. Promptly correct surface irregularities in paving course behind p 9 paver. Use suitable hand tools to remove excess material forming high spots. Fill depressions with hot-mix asphalt to prevent segregation of mix; use suitable hand tools to smooth surface. 3.5 JOINTS A. Construct joints to ensure a continuous bond between adjoining paving sections. Construct joints free of depressions, with same texture and smoothness as other sections of hot-mix asphalt course. 1 . Clean contact surfaces and apply tack coat to joints. 2. Offset longitudinal joints, in successive courses, a minimum of 6 inches (150 mm). 3. Offset transverse joints, in successive courses, a minimum of 24 inches (600 mm). 4. Compact joints as soon as hot-mix asphalt will bear roller weight without excessive displacement. 5. Compact asphalt at joints to a density within 2 percent of specified course density. 3.6 COMPACTION A. General: Begin compaction as soon as placed hot-mix paving will bear roller weight without excessive displacement. Compact hot-mix paving with hot, hand tampers or with vibratory-plate compactors in areas inaccessible to rollers. 1 . Complete compaction before mix temperature cools to 185 deg F (85 deg Q. B. Breakdown Rolling: Complete breakdown or initial rolling immediately after rolling joints and outside edge. Examine surface immediately after breakdown rolling for indicated crown, grade, and smoothness. Correct laydown and rolling operations to comply with requirements. C. Intermediate Rolling: Begin intermediate rolling immediately after breakdown rolling while hot-mix asphalt is still hot enough to achieve specified density. 321216 ASPHALT PAVING Page 6 of 8 Project No. 01091 Proposed Renovations March 6, 2009 Park House Smith College, Northampton, MA A^ 2. Avoid smearing or staining adjoining surfaces, appurtenances, and surroundings. Remove spillages and clean affected surfaces. C. Patching: Fill excavated pavements with hot-mix asphalt base mix for full thickness of patch and, while still hot, compact flush with adjacent surface. D. Patching: Partially fill excavated pavements with hot-mix asphalt base mix and, while still hot, compact. Cover asphalt base course with compacted, hot-mix surface layer finished flush with adjacent surfaces. 3.3 SURFACE PREPARATION A. General: Immediately before placing asphalt materials, remove loose and deleterious material from substrate surfaces. Ensure that prepared subgrade is ready to receive paving. B. Tack Coat: Apply uniformly to surfaces of existing pavement at a rate of 0.05 to 0.15 gal./sq. yd. (0.2 to 0.7 L/sq. m). 1 . Allow tack coat to cure undisturbed before applying hot-mix asphalt paving. 2. Avoid smearing or staining adjoining surfaces, appurtenances, and surroundings. Remove spillages and clean affected surfaces. 3.4 HOT-MIX ASPHALT PLACING A. Place hot-mix asphalt on prepared surface, spread uniformly, and strike off, Place asphalt mix by hand in a manner that prevents segregation of mix„ Place each course to required grade, cross section, and thickness when compacted. 1 . Place hot-mix asphalt base course in number of lifts and thicknesses. indicated. 2. Place hot-mix asphalt surface course in single lift. 3. Spread mix at minimum temperature of 250 deg F (121 deg Q. 4. Begin applying mix along centerline of crown for crowned sections and on high side of one-way slopes unless otherwise indicated. Awk 321216 ASPHALT PAVING Page 5 of 8 Project No. 01091 Proposed Renovations March 6, 2009 Park House Smith College, Northampton, MA PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify that subgrade is dry and in suitable condition to begin paving. B. Proof-roll subgrade below pavements with heavy pneumatic-tired equipment to identify soft pockets and areas of excess yielding. Do not proof-roll wet or saturated subgrades. 1 . Completely proof-roll subgrade in one direction. Limit vehicle speed to 3 mph (5 km/h). 2. Excavate soft spots, unsatisfactory soils, and areas of excessive pumping or rutting, as determined by Architect, and replace with compacted backfill or fill as directed. C. Proceed with paving only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. D. Verify that utilities, traffic loop detectors, and other items requiring a cut and installation beneath the asphalt surface have been completed and that asphalt surface has been repaired flush with adjacent asphalt prior to beginning installation of imprinted asphalt. 3.2 PATCHING A. Hot-Mix Asphalt Pavement: Saw cut perimeter of patch and excavate existing pavement section to sound base. Excavate rectangular or trapezoidal patches, extending 12 inches (300 mm) into adjacent sound pavement, unless otherwise indicated. Cut excavation faces vertically. Remove excavated material. Recompact existing unbound-aggregate base course to form new subgrade. B. Tack Coat: Apply uniformly to vertical surfaces abutting or projecting into new, hot-mix asphalt paving at a rate of 0.05 to 0.15 gal./sq. yd. (0.2 to 0.7 L/sq. m). 1 . Allow tack coat to cure undisturbed before applying hot-mix asphalt paving. 321216 ASPHALT PAVING Page 4 of 8 Project No. 01091 Proposed Renovations March 6, 2009 Park House Smith College, Northampton, MA D. Mineral Filler: ASTM D 242, rock or slag dust, hydraulic cement, or other inert material. 2.2 ASPHALT MATERIALS A. Asphalt Binder: AASHTO M 320 or AASHTO MP 1 a, PG 64-22. B. Asphalt Cement: ASTM D 3381 for viscosity-graded material. C. Prime Coat: Asphalt emulsion prime coat complying with MDPW requirements. D. Tack Coat: ASTM D 977 emulsified asphalt, or ASTM D 2397 cationic emulsified asphalt, slow setting, diluted in water, of suitable grade and consistency for application. E. Water: Potable. F. Undersealing Asphalt: ASTM D 3141 , pumping consistency. 2.3 AUXILIARY MATERIALS A. Sand: ASTM D 1073, Grade Nos. 2 or 3. 2.4 MIXES A. Hot-Mix Asphalt: Dense, hot-laid, hot-mix asphalt plant mixes approved by authorities having jurisdiction; designed according to procedures in Al MS-2, "Mix Design Methods for Asphalt Concrete and Other Hot-Mix Types"; Massachusetts Standard Specifications for Highways, Bridges and Waterways; and complying with the following requirements: 1 . Provide mixes with a history of satisfactory performance in geographical area where Project is located. 2. Base Course: MDPW Section 420, Class I, Type 1-1 . 3. Surface Course: MDPW Section 460, Class 1 , Type 1-1 . 321216 ASPHALT PAVING Page 3 of 8 Project No. 01091 Proposed Renovations March 6, 2009 Park House Smith College, Northampton, MA B. Installer Qualifications: Imprinted-asphalt manufacturer's authorized installer who is trained and approved for installation of imprinted asphalt required for this Project. C. Testing Agency Qualifications: Qualified according to ASTM D 3666 for testing indicated. D. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with materials, workmanship, and other applicable requirements of Massachusetts DPW for asphalt paving work. 1 .5 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Limitations: Do not apply asphalt materials if subgrade is wet or excessively damp, if rain is imminent or expected before time required for adequate cure, or if the following conditions are not met: 1 . Prime Coat: Minimum surface temperature of 60 deg F (15.6 deg C). 2. Tack Coat: Minimum surface temperature of 60 deg F (15.6 deg C). 3. Asphalt Base Course: Minimum surface temperature of 40 deg F (4.4 deg C) and rising at time of placement. "°'' 4. Asphalt Surface Course: Minimum surface temperature of 60 deg F (15.6 deg C) at time of placement. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 AGGREGATES A. General: Use materials and gradations that have performed satisfactorily in previous installations. B. Coarse Aggregate: ASTM D 692, sound; angular crushed stone, crushed gravel, or cured, crushed blast-furnace slag. C. Fine Aggregate: ASTM D 1073, sharp-edged natural sand or sand prepared from stone, gravel, cured blast-furnace slag, or combinations thereof. 1 . For hot-mix asphalt, limit natural sand to a maximum of 20 percent by weight of the total aggregate mass. , 321216 ASPHALT PAVING Page 2 of 8 Project No. 01091 Proposed Renovations March 6, 2009 Park House Smith College, Northampton, MA SECTION 321216 - ASPHALT PAVING PART 1 - GENERAL 1 .1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1 .2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1 . Hot-mix asphalt patching. 2. Hot-mix asphalt paving. 3. Hot-mix asphalt paving overlay. B. Related Sections: 1 . Division 02 Section "Structure Demolition" for demolition, removal, and recycling of existing asphalt pavements, and for geotextiles that are not embedded within courses of asphalt paving. 2. Division 31 Section "Earth Moving" for aggregate subbase and base courses and for aggregate pavement shoulders. 1 .3 DEFINITION A. Hot-Mix Asphalt Paving Terminology: Refer to ASTM D 8 for definitions of terms. 1 .4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer Qualifications: A paving-mix manufacturer registered with and approved by authorities having jurisdiction or the DOT of state in which Project is located. 321216 ASPHALT PAVING Page 1 of 8 Project No. 01091 Proposed Renovations March 6, 2009 Park House Smith College, Northampton, MA lose compaction due to subsequent construction operations or weather conditions. 1 . Scarify or remove and replace soil material to depth as directed by Architect; reshape and recompact. C. Where settling occurs before Project correction period elapses, remove finished surfacing, backfill with additional soil material, compact, and reconstruct surfacing. 1 . Restore appearance, quality, and condition of finished surfacing to match adjacent work, and eliminate evidence of restoration to greatest extent possible. 3.22 DISPOSAL OF SURPLUS AND WASTE MATERIALS A. Disposal: Remove surplus satisfactory soil and waste material, including unsatisfactory soil, trash, and debris, and legally dispose of it off Owner's property. B. Disposal: Transport surplus satisfactory soil to designated storage areas on Owner's property. Stockpile or spread soil as directed by Architect. 1 . Remove waste material, including unsatisfactory soil, trash, and debris, and legally dispose of it off Owner's property. END OF SECTION 312000 312000 EARTH MOVING Page 17 of 17 Project No. 01 091 Proposed Renovations March 6, 2009 Park House Smith College, Northampton, MA 4. Compact each layer of drainage course to required cross sections and -- thicknesses to not less than 95 percent of maximum dry unit weight according to ASTM D 698. 3.20 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Testing Agency: Owner will engage a qualified independent geotechnical engineering testing agency to perform field quality-control testing. B. Allow testing agency to inspect and test subgrades and each fill or backfill layer. Proceed with subsequent earthwork only after test results for previously completed work comply with requirements. C. Footing Subgrade: At footing subgrades, at least one test of each soil stratum will be performed to verify design bearing capacities. Subsequent verification and approval of other footing subgrades may be based on a visual comparison of subgrade with tested subgrade when approved by Architect. D. Testing agency will test compaction of soils in place according to ASTM D 1556, ASTM D 2167, ASTM D 2922, and ASTM D 2937, as applicable. Tests will be performed at the following locations and frequencies: 1 . Paved and Building Slab Areas: At subgrade and at each compacted fill and backfill layer, at least 1 test for every 2000 sq. ft. (186 sq. m) or less of paved area or building slab, but in no case fewer than 3 tests. E. When testing agency reports that subgrades, fills, or backfills have not achieved degree of compaction specified, scarify and moisten or aerate, or remove and replace soil to depth required; recompact and retest until specified compaction is obtained. 3.21 PROTECTION A. Protecting Graded Areas: Protect newly graded areas from traffic, freezing, and erosion. Keep free of trash and debris. B. Repair and reestablish grades to specified tolerances where completed or partially completed surfaces become eroded, rutted, settled, or where they 312000 EARTH MOVING Page 16 of 17 Project No. 01091 Proposed Renovations March 6, 2009 Park House Smith College, Northampton, MA 3.18 SUBBASE AND BASE COURSES A. Place subbase and base course on subgrades free of mud, frost, snow, or ice. B. On prepared subgrade, place subbase course under pavements and walks as follows: 1 . Shape subbase course to required crown elevations and cross-slope grades. 2. Place subbase course 6 inches (150 mm) or less in compacted thickness in a single layer. 3. Place subbase course that exceeds 6 inches 0 50 mm) in compacted thickness in layers of equal thickness, with no compacted layer more than 6 inches (150 mm) thick or less than 3 inches (75 mm) thick. 4. Compact subbase course at optimum moisture content to required grades, lines, cross sections, and thickness to not less than 95 percent of maximum dry unit weight according to ASTM D 698. C. Pavement Shoulders: Place shoulders along edges of subbase and base course to prevent lateral movement. Construct shoulders, at least 12 inches (300 mm) wide, of satisfactory soil materials and compact simultaneously with each subbase and base layer to not less than 95 percent of maximum dry unit weight according to ASTM D 698. 3.19 DRAINAGE COURSE A. Place drainage course on subgrades free of mud, frost, snow, or ice. B. On prepared subgrade, place and compact drainage course under cast-in- place concrete slabs-on-grade as follows: 1 . Install subdrainage geotextile on prepared subgrade according to manufacturer's written instructions, overlapping sides and ends. 2. Place drainage course 6 inches (150 mm) or less in compacted thickness in a single layer. 3. Place drainage course that exceeds 6 inches (150 mm) in compacted thickness in layers of equal thickness, with no compacted layer more than 6 inches 0 50 mm) thick or less than 3 inches (75 mm) thick. 312000 EARTH MOVING Page 15 of 17 Project No. 01091 Proposed Renovations March 6, 2009 Park House Smith College, Northampton, MA 2. Cut out soft spots, fill low spots, and trim high spots to comply with required surface tolerances. B. Site Grading: Slope grades to direct water away from buildings and to prevent ponding. Finish subgrades to required elevations within the following tolerances: 1 . Lawn or Unpaved Areas: Plus or minus 1 inch (25 mm). 2. Walks: Plus or minus 1 inch (25 mm). 3. Pavements: Plus or minus 1 /2 inch (13 mm). C. Grading inside Building Lines: Finish subgrade to a tolerance of 1 /2 inch (13 mm) when tested with a 10-foot (3-m) straightedge. 3.17 SUBSURFACE DRAINAGE A. Subdrainage Pipe: Specified in Division 33 Section "Subdrainage." B. Subsurface Drain: Place subsurface drainage geotextile around perimeter of subdrainage trench. Place a 6-inch (150-mm) course of filter material on subsurface drainage geotextile to support subdrainage pipe. Encase subdrainage pipe in a minimum of 12 inches (300 mm) of filter material, placed in compacted layers 6 inches (150 mm) thick, and wrap in subsurface drainage geotextile, overlapping sides and ends at least 6 inches (150 mm). 1 . Compact each filter material layer to 85 percent of maximum dry unit weight according to ASTM D 698. C. Drainage Backfill: Place and compact filter material over subsurface drain, in width indicated, to within 12 inches (300 mm) of final subgrade, in compacted layers 6 inches (150 mm) thick. Overlay drainage backfill with 1 layer of subsurface drainage geotextile, overlapping sides and ends at least 6 inches (1 50 mm). 1 . Compact each filter material layer to 85 percent of maximum dry unit weight according to ASTM D 698. 2. Place and compact impervious fill over drainage backfill in 6-inch- (150-mm-) thick compacted layers to final subgrade. 312000 EARTH MOVING Page 14 of 17 Project No. 01091 Proposed Renovations March 6, 2009 Park House Smith College, Northampton, MA 2. Remove and replace, or scarify and air dry otherwise satisfactory soil material that exceeds optimum moisture content by 2 percent and is too wet to compact to specified dry unit weight. 3.15 COMPACTION OF SOIL BACKFILLS AND FILLS A. Place backfill and fill soil materials in layers not more than 8 inches (200 mm) in loose depth for material compacted by heavy compaction equipment, and not more than 4 inches (100 mm) in loose depth for material compacted by hand-operated tampers. B. Place backfill and fill soil materials evenly on all sides of structures to required elevations, and uniformly along the full length of each structure. C. Compact soil materials to not less than the following percentages of maximum density according to ASTM D 698: 1 . Under structures, building slabs, steps, and pavements, scarify and recompact top 12 inches (300 mm) of existing subgrade and each layer of backfill or fill soil material at 95 percent. 2. Under walkways, scarify and recompact top 6 inches (150 mm) below subgrade and compact each layer of backfill or fill soil material at 92 percent. 3. Under lawn or unpaved areas, scarify and recompact top 6 inches (150 mm) below subgrade and compact each layer of backfill or fill soil material at 85 percent. 4. For utility trenches, compact each layer of initial and final backfill soil material at 85 percent. 3.16 GRADING A. General: Uniformly grade areas to a smooth surface, free of irregular surface: changes. Comply with compaction requirements and grade to cross sections, lines, and elevations indicated. 1 . Provide a smooth transition between adjacent existing grades and new grades. 312000 EARTH MOVING Page 13 of 17 Project No. 01091 Proposed Renovations March 6, 2009 Park House Smith College, Northampton, MA 1 . Carefully compact initial backfill under pipe haunches and compact evenly up on both sides and along the full length of utility piping or conduit to avoid damage or displacement of piping or conduit. Coordinate backfilling with utilities testing. F. Backfill voids with satisfactory soil while installing and removing shoring and bracing. G. Place and compact final backfill of satisfactory soil to final subgrade elevation. H. Install warning tape directly above utilities, 12 inches (300 mm) below finished grade, except 6 inches (150 mm) below subgrade under pavements and slabs. 3.13 SOIL FILL A. Plow, scarify, bench, or break up sloped surfaces steeper than 1 vertical to 4 horizontal so fill material will bond with existing material. B. Place and compact fill material in layers to required elevations as follows: 1 . Under grass and planted areas, use satisfactory soil material. 2. Under walks and pavements, use satisfactory soil material. 3. Under steps and ramps, use engineered fill. 4. Under building slabs, use engineered fill. S. Under footings and foundations, use engineered fill. C. Place soil fill on subgrades free of mud, frost, snow, or ice. 3.14 SOIL MOISTURE CONTROL A. Uniformly moisten or aerate subgrade and each subsequent fill or backfill soil layer before compaction to within 2 percent of optimum moisture content. 1 . Do not place backfill or fill soil material on surfaces that are muddy, frozen, or contain frost or ice. 312000 EARTH MOVING Page 12 of 17 Project No. 01091 Proposed Renovations March 6, 2009 Park House Smith College, Northampton, MA 3.11 BACKFILL A. Place and compact backfill in excavations promptly, but not before completing the following: 1 . Construction below finish grade including, where applicable, subdrainage, dampproofing, waterproofing, and perimeter insulation. 2. Surveying locations of underground utilities for Record Documents. 3. Testing and inspecting underground utilities. 4. Removing concrete formwork. 5. Removing trash and debris. 6. Removing temporary shoring and bracing, and sheeting. 7. Installing permanent or temporary horizontal bracing on horizontally supported walls. B. Place backfill on subgrades free of mud, frost, snow, or ice. 3.12 UTILITY TRENCH BACKFILL A. Place backfill on subgrades free of mud, frost, snow, or ice. B. Place and compact bedding course on trench bottoms and where indicated. Shape bedding course to provide continuous support for bells, joints, and barrels of pipes and for joints, fittings, and bodies of conduits. C. Backfill trenches excavated under footings and within 18 inches (450 mm) of bottom of footings with satisfactory soil; fill with concrete to elevation of bottom of footings. Concrete is specified in Division 03 Section "Cast-in-- Place Concrete." D. Provide 4-inch- (100-mm-) thick, concrete-base slab support for piping or conduit less than 30 inches (750 mm) below surface of roadways. After installing and testing, completely encase piping or conduit in a minimum of 4 inches (100 mm) of concrete before backfilling or placing roadway subbase. E. Place and compact initial backfill of subbase material or satisfactory soil, free of particles larger than 1 inch (25 mm) in any dimension, to a height of 12 inches (300 mm) over the utility pipe or conduit. 312000 EARTH MOVING Page 11 of 17 Project No. 01091 Proposed Renovations March 6, 2009 Park House Smith College, Northampton, MA B. If Architect determines that unsatisfactory soil is present, continue excavation and replace with compacted backfill or fill material as directed. C. Proof-roll subgrade below the building slabs and pavements with heavy pneumatic-tired equipment to identify soft pockets and areas of excess yielding. Do not proof-roll wet or saturated subgrades. 1 . Excavate soft spots, unsatisfactory soils, and areas of excessive pumping or rutting, as determined by Architect, and replace with compacted backfill or fill as directed. D. Authorized additional excavation and replacement material will be paid for according to Contract provisions for changes in the Work. E. Reconstruct subgrades damaged by freezing temperatures, frost, rain, accumulated water, or construction activities, as directed by Architect, without additional compensation. 3.9 UNAUTHORIZED EXCAVATION A. Fill unauthorized excavation under foundations or wall footings by extending bottom elevation of concrete foundation or footing to excavation bottom, without altering top elevation. Lean concrete fill, with 28-day compressive strength of 2500 psi (17.2 MPa), may be used when approved by Architect. 1 . Fill unauthorized excavations under other construction or utility pipe as directed by Architect. 3.10 STORAGE OF SOIL MATERIALS A. Stockpile borrow soil materials and excavated satisfactory soil materials without intermixing. Place, grade, and shape stockpiles to drain surface water. Cover to prevent windblown dust. 1 . Stockpile soil materials away from edge of excavations. Do not store within drip line of remaining trees. 312000 EARTH MOVING Page 10 of 17 Project No. 01091 Proposed Renovations March 6, 2009 Park House Smith College, Northampton, MA from structures for placing and removing concrete formwork, for installing services and other construction, and for inspections. 1 . Excavations for Footings and Foundations: Do not disturb bottom of excavation. Excavate by hand to final grade just before placing concrete reinforcement. Trim bottoms to required lines and grades to leave solid base to receive other work. 3.6 EXCAVATION FOR WALKS AND PAVEMENTS A. Excavate surfaces under walks and pavements to indicated lines, cross sections, elevations, and subgrades. 3.7 EXCAVATION FOR UTILITY TRENCHES A. Excavate trenches to indicated gradients, lines, depths, and elevations. 1 . Beyond building perimeter, excavate trenches to allow installation of top of pipe below frost line. B. Excavate trenches to uniform widths to provide the following clearance on each side of pipe or conduit. Excavate trench walls vertically from trench bottom to 12 inches (300 mm) higher than top of pipe or conduit, unless otherwise indicated. 1 . Clearance: 12 inches (300 mm) each side of pipe or conduit. C. Trench Bottoms: Excavate and shape trench bottoms to provide uniform bearing and support of pipes and conduit. Shape subgrade to provide continuous support for bells, joints, and barrels of pipes and for joints, fittings, and bodies of conduits. Remove projecting stones and sharp objects along trench subgrade. 1 . Excavate trenches 6 inches (1 50 mm) deeper than elevation required in rock or other unyielding bearing material to allow for bedding course. 3.8 SUBGRADE INSPECTION ,d A. Notify Architect when excavations have reached required subgrade. 312000 EARTH MOVING Page 9 of 17 Project No. 01091 Proposed Renovations March 6, 2009 Park House Smith College, Northampton, MA 2. Install a dewatering system to keep subgrades dry and convey ground water away from excavations. Maintain until dewatering is no longer required. 3.3 EXPLOSIVES A. Explosives: Do not use explosives. 3.4 EXCAVATION, GENERAL A. Unclassified Excavation: Excavate to subgrade elevations regardless of the character of surface and subsurface conditions encountered. Unclassified excavated materials may include rock, soil materials, and obstructions. No changes in the Contract Sum or the Contract Time will be authorized for rock excavation or removal of obstructions. 1 . If excavated materials intended for fill and backfill include unsatisfactory soil materials and rock, replace with satisfactory soil materials. B. Classified Excavation: Excavate to subgrade elevations. Material to be excavated will be classified as earth and rock. Do not excavate rock until it has been classified and cross sectioned by Architect. 1 . Earth excavation includes excavating pavements and obstructions visible on surface; underground structures, utilities, and other items indicated to be removed; together with soil, boulders, and other materials not classified as rock or unauthorized excavation. 2. Rock excavation includes removal and disposal of rock. Remove rock to lines and subgrade elevations indicated to permit installation of permanent construction. 3.5 EXCAVATION FOR STRUCTURES A. Excavate to indicated elevations and dimensions within a tolerance of plus or minus 1 inch (25 mm). If applicable, extend excavations a sufficient distance 312000 EARTH MOVING Page 8 of 17 Project No. 01091 Proposed Renovations March 6, 2009 Park House Smith College, Northampton, MA detector when tape is buried up to 30 inches (750 mm) deep; colored as follows: 1 . Red: Electric. 2. Yellow: Gas, oil, steam, and dangerous materials. 3. Orange: Telephone and other communications. 4. Blue: Water systems. 5. Green: Sewer systems. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A. Protect structures, utilities, sidewalks, pavements, and other facilities from damage caused by settlement, lateral movement, undermining, washout, and other hazards created by earthwork operations. B. Preparation of subgrade for earthwork operations including removal of vegetation, topsoil, debris, obstructions, and deleterious materials frorn ground surface is specified in Division 31 Section "Site Clearing." C. Protect and maintain erosion and sedimentation controls, which are specified in Division 31 Section "Site Clearing," during earthwork operations. 3.2 DEWATERING A. Prevent surface water and ground water from entering excavations, from ponding on prepared subgrades, and from flooding Project site and surrounding area. B. Protect subgrades from softening, undermining, washout, and damage by rain or water accumulation. 1 . Reroute surface water runoff away from excavated areas. Do not allow water to accumulate in excavations. Do not use excavated trenches as temporary drainage ditches. 312000 EARTH MOVING Page 7 of 17 Project No. 01091 Proposed Renovations March 6, 2009 Park House Smith College, Northampton, MA Size 57; with 100 percent passing a 1 -1 /2-inch (37.5-mm) sieve and 0 to 5 percent passing a No. 8 (2.36-mm) sieve. I. Filter Material: Narrowly graded mixture of natural or crushed gravel, or crushed stone and natural sand; ASTM D 448; coarse-aggregate grading Size 67; with 100 percent passing a 1 -inch (25-mm) sieve and 0 to 5 percent passing a No. 4 (4.75-mm) sieve. J. Sand: ASTM C 33; fine aggregate, natural, or manufactured sand. K. Impervious Fill: Clayey gravel and sand mixture capable of compacting to a dense state. 2.2 GEOTEXTILES A. Subsurface Drainage Geotextile: Nonwoven needle-punched geotextile, manufactured for subsurface drainage applications, made from polyolefins or polyesters; with elongation greater than 50 percent; complying with AASHTO M 288 and the following, measured per test methods referenced: 1 . Survivability: Class 2; AASHTO M 288. 2. Grab Tensile Strength: 157 Ibf (700 N); ASTM D 4632. 3. Sewn Seam Strength: 142 Ibf (630 N); ASTM D 4632. 4. Tear Strength: 56 Ibf (250 N); ASTM D 4533. 5. Puncture Strength: 56 Ibf (250 N); ASTM D 4833. 6. Apparent Opening Size: No. 40 (0.425-mm) sieve, maximum; ASTM D 4751 . 7. Permittivity: 0.5 per second, minimum; ASTM D 4491 . 8. UV Stability: 50 percent after 500 hours' exposure; ASTM D 4355. 2.3 ACCESSORIES A. Detectable Warning Tape: Acid- and alkali-resistant polyethylene film warning tape manufactured for marking and identifying underground utilities, a minimum of 6 inches (150 mm) wide and 4 mils (0.1 mm) thick, continuously inscribed with a description of the utility, with metallic core encased in a protective jacket for corrosion protection, detectable by metal 312000 EARTH MOVING Page 6 of 17 Project No. 01091 Proposed Renovations March 6, 2009 Park House Smith College, Northampton, MA PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 SOIL MATERIALS A. General: Provide borrow soil materials when sufficient satisfactory sob materials are not available from excavations. B. Satisfactory Soils: ASTM D 2487 Soil Classification Groups GW, GP, GM, SW, SP, and SM, or a combination of these groups; free of rock or gravel larger than 3 inches (75 mm) in any dimension, debris, waste, frozen materials„ vegetation, and other deleterious matter. C. Unsatisfactory Soils: Soil Classification Groups GC, SC, CL, ML, OL, CH, MH„ OH, and PT according to ASTM D 2487, or a combination of these groups. 1 . Unsatisfactory soils also include satisfactory soils not maintained within 2 percent of optimum moisture content at time of compaction. D. Subbase Material: Naturally or artificially graded mixture of natural or crushed gravel, crushed stone, and natural or crushed sand; ASTM D 2940" with at least 90 percent passing a 1 -1 /2-inch (37.5-mm) sieve and not more than 12 percent passing a No. 200 (0.075-mm) sieve. E. Base Course: Naturally or artificially graded mixture of natural or crushed gravel, crushed stone, and natural or crushed sand; ASTM D 2940; with at least 95 percent passing a 1 -1 /2-inch (37.5-mm) sieve and not more than 8 percent passing a No. 200 (0.075-mm) sieve. F. Engineered Fill: Naturally or artificially graded mixture of natural or crushed gravel, crushed stone, and natural or crushed sand; ASTM D 2940; with at least 90 percent passing a 1-1 /2-inch (37.5-mm) sieve and not more than 12 percent passing a No. 200 (0.075-mm) sieve. G. Bedding Course: Naturally or artificially graded mixture of natural or crushed gravel, crushed stone, and natural or crushed sand; ASTM D 2940; except with 100 percent passing a 1 -inch (25-mm) sieve and not more than 8 percent passing a No. 200 (0.075-mm) sieve. H. Drainage Course: Narrowly graded mixture of washed crushed stone, or crushed or uncrushed gravel; ASTM D 448; coarse-aggregate grading 312000 EARTH MOVING Page 5 of 17 Project No. 01091 Proposed Renovations March 6, 2009 Park House Smith College, Northampton, MA 1 . Classification according to ASTM D 2487 of each borrow soil material ` proposed for fill and backfill. C. Preexcavation Photographs or Videotape: Show existing conditions of adjoining construction and site improvements, including finish surfaces, that might be misconstrued as damage caused by earthwork operations. Submit before earthwork begins. 1 .5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Geotechnical Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent testing agency qualified according to ASTM E 329 to conduct soil materials and rock- definition testing, as documented according to ASTM D 3740 and ASTM E 548. B. Preexcavation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements in Division 01 Section "Project Management and Coordination." 1 .6 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Existing Utilities: Do not interrupt utilities serving facilities occupied by Owner or others unless permitted in writing by Architect and then only after arranging to provide temporary utility services according to requirements indicated. 1 . Notify Owner not less than two days in advance of proposed utility interruptions. 2. Do not proceed with utility interruptions without Owner's written permission. 3. Contact utility-locator service for area where Project is located before excavating. 312000 EARTH MOVING Page 4 of 17 Project No. 01091 Proposed Renovations March 6, 2009 Park House Smith College, Northampton, MA H. Rock: Rock material in beds, ledges, unstratified masses, conglomerate deposits, and boulders of rock material that exceed 1 cu. yd. (0.76 cu. m) for footing, trench, and pit excavation that cannot be removed by rock excavating equipment equivalent to the following in size and performance ratings, without systematic drilling, ram hammering, ripping, or blasting, when permitted: 1 . Excavation of Footings, Trenches, and Pits: Late-model, track-mounted hydraulic excavator; equipped with a 42-inch- (1065-mm-) wide, maximum, short-tip-radius rock bucket; rated at not less than 138-hp (103-kW) flywheel power with bucket-curling force of not less than 28,090 Ibf (125 kN) and stick-crowd force of not less than 18,650 Ibf (83 kN); measured according to SAE J-1 179. I. Structures: Buildings, footings, foundations, retaining walls, slabs, tanks, curbs, mechanical and electrical appurtenances, or other man-made stationary features constructed above or below the ground surface. J. Subbase Course: Course placed between the subgrade and base course for hot-mix asphalt pavement, or course placed between the subgrade and a cement concrete pavement or a cement concrete or hot-mix asphalt walk. K. Subgrade: Surface or elevation remaining after completing excavation, or top surface of a fill or backfill immediately below subbase, drainage fill, or topsoil materials. L. Utilities: On-site underground pipes, conduits, ducts, and cables, as well as underground services within buildings. 1 .4 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For the following: 1 . Each type of plastic warning tape. 2. Geotextile. B. Material Test Reports: From a qualified testing agency indicating and interpreting test results for compliance of the following with requirements. indicated: 312000 EARTH MOVING Page 3 of 17 Project No. 01091 Proposed Renovations March 6, 2009 Park House Smith College, Northampton, MA 5. Division 32 Section "Turf and Grasses" for finish grading, including preparing and placing topsoil and planting soil for lawns. 6. Division 33 Section "Subdrainage" for drainage of landscaped areas. 1 .3 DEFINITIONS A. Backfill: Soil material or controlled low-strength material used to fill an excavation. 1 . Initial Backfill: Backfill placed beside and over pipe in a trench, including haunches to support sides of pipe. 2. Final Backfill: Backfill placed over initial backfill to fill a trench. B. Base Course: Course placed between the subbase course and hot-mix asphalt paving. C. Bedding Course: Course placed over the excavated subgrade in a trench before laying pipe. D. Borrow Soil: Satisfactory soil imported from off-site for use as fill or backfill. E. Drainage Course: Course supporting the slab-on-grade that also minimizes upward capillary flow of pore water. F. Excavation: Removal of material encountered above subgrade elevations and to lines and dimensions indicated. 1 . Authorized Additional Excavation: Excavation below subgrade elevations or beyond indicated lines and dimensions as directed by Architect. Authorized additional excavation and replacement material will be paid for according to Contract provisions for changes in the Work. 2. Unauthorized Excavation: Excavation below subgrade elevations or beyond indicated lines and dimensions without direction by Architect. Unauthorized excavation, as well as remedial work directed by Architect, shall be without additional compensation. G. Fill: Soil materials used to raise existing grades. 312000 EARTH MOVING Page 2 of 17 Project No. 01091 Proposed Renovations March 6, 2009 Park House Smith College, Northampton, MA SECTION 312000 - EARTH MOVING PART 1 - GENERAL 1 .1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1 .2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1 . Preparing subgrades for slabs-on-grade, walks, pavements, lawns and grasses. 2. Excavating and backfilling for buildings and structures. 3. Drainage course for slabs-on-grade. 4. Subbase course for concrete walks. 5. Subbase and base course for asphalt paving. 6. Subsurface drainage backfill for walls and trenches. 7. Excavating and backfilling for utility trenches. 8. Excavating and backfilling trenches for buried mechanical and electricall utilities and pits for buried utility structures. B. Related Sections include the following: 1 . Division 01 Section "Temporary Facilities and Controls" for temporary controls, utilities, and support facilities. 2. Division 01 Section "Temporary Tree and Plant Protection" for protecting and trimming trees to remain. 3. Division 03 Section "Cast-in-Place Concrete" for granular course if placed over vapor retarder and beneath the slab-on-grade. 4. Division 31 Section "Site Clearing" for temporary erosion and sedimentation control measures, site stripping, grubbing, stripping and stockpiling topsoil, and removal of above- and below-grade improvements and utilities. 312000 EARTH MOVING Page 1 of 17 Project No. 01091 Proposed Renovations March 6, 2009 Park House Smith College, Northampton, MA B. Remove slabs, paving, curbs, gutters, and aggregate base as indicated. 1 . Unless existing full-depth joints coincide with line of demolition, neatly saw-cut length of existing pavement to remain before removing existing pavement. Saw-cut faces vertically. 2. Paint cut ends of steel reinforcement in concrete to remain to prevent corrosion. 3.8 DISPOSAL A. Disposal: Remove surplus soil material, unsuitable topsoil, obstructions, demolished materials, and waste materials including trash and debris, and legally dispose of them off Owner's property. 1 . Separate recyclable materials produced during site clearing from other nonrecyclable materials. Store or stockpile without intermixing with other materials and transport them to recycling facilities. END OF SECTION 311000 311000 SITE CLEARING Page 7 of 7 Project No. 01091 Proposed Renovations March 6, 2009 Park House Smith College, Northampton, MA 2. Cut minor roots and branches of trees indicated to remain in a clean and careful manner where such roots and branches obstruct installation of new construction. 3. Grind stumps and remove roots, obstructions, and debris extending to a depth of 18 inches (450 mm) below exposed subgrade. 4. Use only hand methods for grubbing within tree protection zone. 5. Chip removed tree branches and dispose of off-site. B. Fill depressions caused by clearing and grubbing operations with satisfactory soil material unless further excavation or earthwork is indicated. 1 . Place fill material in horizontal layers not exceeding a loose depth of 8 inches (200 mm), and compact each layer to a density equal to adjacent original ground. 3.6 TOPSOIL STRIPPING A. Remove sod and grass before stripping topsoil. B. Strip topsoil to whatever depths are encountered in a manner to prevent intermingling with underlying subsoil or other waste materials. 1 . Remove subsoil and nonsoil materials from topsoil, including trash, debris, weeds, roots, and other waste materials. C. Stockpile topsoil materials away from edge of excavations without intermixing with subsoil. Grade and shape stockpiles to drain surface water. Cover to prevent windblown dust. 1 . Limit height of topsoil stockpiles to 72 inches (1800 mm). 2. Do not stockpile topsoil within tree protection zones. 3. Dispose of excess topsoil as specified for waste material disposal. 4. Stockpile surplus topsoil to allow for respreading deeper topsoil. 3.7 SITE IMPROVEMENTS A. Remove existing above- and below-grade improvements as indicated and as necessary to facilitate new construction. 311000 SITE CLEARING Page 6 of 7 Project No. 01091 Proposed Renovations March 6, 2009 Park House Smith College, Northampton, MA 4. Backfill with soil as soon as possible. D. Repair or replace trees and vegetation indicated to remain that are damaged by construction operations, in a manner approved by Architect. 1 . Employ an arborist, licensed in jurisdiction where Project is located, to submit details of proposed repairs and to repair damage to trees and shrubs. 2. Replace trees that cannot be repaired and restored to full-growth status, as determined by Architect. 3.4 UTI LITI ES A. Locate, identify, disconnect, and seal or cap off utilities indicated to be removed. 1 . Arrange with utility companies to shut off indicated utilities. 2. Owner will arrange to shut off indicated utilities when requested by Contractor. B. Existing Utilities: Do not interrupt utilities serving facilities occupied by Owner or others unless permitted under the following conditions and then only after arranging to provide temporary utility services according to requirements indicated: 1 . Notify Architect not less than two days in advance of proposed utility interruptions. 2. Do not proceed with utility interruptions without Architect's written permission. C. Excavate for and remove underground utilities indicated to be removed. 3.5 CLEARING AND GRUBBING A. Remove obstructions, trees, shrubs, grass, and other vegetation to permit installation of new construction. 1 . Do not remove trees, shrubs, and other vegetation indicated to remain or to be relocated. 311000 SITE CLEARING Page 5 of 7 Project No. 01091 Proposed Renovations March 6, 2009 Park House Smith College, Northampton, MA 1 . Restore damaged improvements to their original condition, as acceptable to Owner. 3.2 TEMPORARY EROSION AND SEDIMENTATION CONTROL A. Provide temporary erosion and sedimentation control measures to prevent soil erosion and discharge of soil-bearing water runoff or airborne dust to adjacent properties and walkways, according to requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. B. Inspect, repair, and maintain erosion and sedimentation control measures during construction until permanent vegetation has been established. C. Remove erosion and sedimentation controls and restore and stabilize areas disturbed during removal. 3.3 TREE PROTECTION A. Erect and maintain temporary fencing around tree protection zones before starting site clearing. Remove fence when construction is complete. 1 . Do not store construction materials, debris, or excavated material within fenced area. 2. Do not permit vehicles, equipment, or foot traffic within fenced area. 3. Maintain fenced area free of weeds and trash. B. Do not excavate within tree protection zones, unless otherwise indicated. C. Where excavation for new construction is required within tree protection zones, hand clear and excavate to minimize damage to root systems. Use narrow-tine spading forks, comb soil to expose roots, and cleanly cut roots as close to excavation as possible. 1 . Cover exposed roots with burlap and water regularly. 2. Temporarily support and protect roots from damage until they are permanently redirected and covered with soil. 3. Coat cut faces of roots more than 1 -1 /2 inches (38 mm) in diameter with an emulsified asphalt or other approved coating formulated for use on damaged plant tissues. 311000 SITE CLEARING Page 4 of 7 Project No. 01091 Proposed Renovations March 6, 2009 Park House Smith College, Northampton, MA OW 1 . Do not close or obstruct streets, walks, or other adjacent occupied or used facilities without permission from Owner and authorities having jurisdiction. 2. Provide alternate routes around closed or obstructed traffic ways if required by authorities having jurisdiction. B. Salvable Improvements: Carefully remove items indicated to be salvaged and store on Owner's premises where indicated. C. Utility Locator Service: Notify utility locator service for area where Project is located before site clearing. D. Do not commence site clearing operations until temporary erosion and sedimentation control measures are in place. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 SOIL MATERIALS A. Satisfactory Soil Materials: Requirements for satisfactory soil materials are specified in Division 31 Section "Earth Moving." 1 . Obtain approved borrow soil materials off-site when satisfactory soil materials are not available on-site. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A. Protect and maintain benchmarks and survey control points from disturbance during construction. B. Locate and clearly flag trees and vegetation to remain or to be relocated. C. Protect existing site improvements to remain from damage during construction. AOW 311000 SITE CLEARING Page 3 of 7 Project No. 01091 Proposed Renovations March 6, 2009 Park House Smith College, Northampton, MA 1 .3 DEFINITIONS A. Topsoil: Natural or cultivated surface-soil layer containing organic matter and sand, silt, and clay particles; friable, pervious, and black or a darker shade of brown, gray, or red than underlying subsoil; reasonably free of subsoil, clay lumps, gravel, and other objects more than 2 inches (50 mm) in diameter; and free of subsoil and weeds, roots, toxic materials, or other nonsoil materials. B. Tree Protection Zone: Area surrounding individual trees or groups of trees to be protected during construction, and defined by the drip line of individual trees or the perimeter drip line of groups of trees, unless otherwise indicated. 1 .4 MATERIAL OWNERSHIP A. Except for stripped topsoil or other materials indicated to remain Owner's property, cleared materials shall become Contractor's property and shall be removed from Project site. 1 .5 SUBMITTALS A. Photographs sufficiently detailed, of existing conditions of trees and plantings, adjoining construction, and site improvements that might be misconstrued as damage caused by site clearing. B. Record drawings, according to Division 01 Section "Project Record Documents," identifying and accurately locating capped utilities and other subsurface structural, electrical, and mechanical conditions. 1 .6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements in Division 01 Section "Project Management and Coordination." 1 .7 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Traffic: Minimize interference with adjoining roads, streets, walks, and other adjacent occupied or used facilities during site-clearing operations. 311000 SITE CLEARING Page 2 of 7 Project No. 01091 Proposed Renovations March 6, 2009 Park House Smith College, Northampton, MA SECTION 311000 - SITE CLEARING PART 1 - GENERAL 1 .1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1 .2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1 . Protecting existing trees shrubs groundcovers plants and grass to remain. 2. Removing existing trees shrubs groundcovers plants and grass. mow► 3. Clearing and grubbing. 4. Stripping and stockpiling topsoil. 5. Removing above- and below-grade site improvements. 6. Temporary erosion and sedimentation control measures. B. Related Sections include the following: 1 . Division 01 Section "Temporary Facilities and Controls" for temporary utilities, temporary construction and support facilities, temporary security and protection facilities. 2. Division 01 Section "Execution" for verifying utility locations and for recording field measurements. 3. Division 02 Section "Selective Structure Demolition" for partial demolition of buildings or structures undergoing alterations. 4. Division 31 Section "Earth Moving" for soil materials, excavating„ backfilling, and site grading. 5. Division 23 Section "Turf and Grasses" for finish grading including preparing and placing planting soil mixes and testing of topsoil material. 311000 SITE CLEARING Page 1 of 7 Project No. 01091 Proposed Renovations March 6, 2009 Park House Smith College, Northampton, MA B. Safing Insulation 1 . Fire safing insulation shall be Thermafiber as manufactured by USG Interiors, Inc. or Architect-Engineer approved equal, 4" minimum thickness by the required full length and width, or as indicated on the Drawings. 2. Provide incidental galvanized steel clip anchors. C. Seal Compound: At "poke-through" openings, apply "Firecode" seal compound as manufactured by USG Interiors, Inc., or approved equal, over Thermafiber fire safing. D. Preparation 1 . At all fire rated assemblies, prepare all penetrations for pipes. E. Application 1 . Install approved fire safing insulation of proper size leaving no voids. Compress and friction fit fire safing and use attachment clips where necessary. 2. Seal completely around all openings and over the fire safing insulation with sealing compound. END OF SECTION 266100 266100 ELECTRICAL Page 44 of 44 Project No. 01091 Proposed Renovations March 6, 2009 Park House Smith College, Northampton, MA C. Pull boxes shall be adequate size to accommodate the conductors installed therein without excessive bending of the conductors, which would damage the conductor insulation. D. All outlet boxes installed in masonry shall be so set that their outer edges are 1 /4" back of finished surface. E. Outlet boxes shall not be supported by the conduit. Suitable means shall be provided to support the outlet box to take the weight of the fixture. F. Fixture outlet boxes used as junction boxes or outlets not used, shall be provided with covers. 3.5 EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION A. All equipment furnished under this Section shall be installed in accordance with its manufacturer's printed installation instructions, whether so shown on the Drawings or not, and all labor and materials required to accomplish this shall be furnished by the Electrical Contractor and be included in his bid. 3.6 TESTING A. Balancing Loads: 1 . Circuits shall be connected to the panelboards so that the total load is distributed equally between each line and neutral to within ten percent. Branch circuits shall be balanced on their own panelboards, and feeder loads balanced on the main distribution panel. Reasonable load testing shall be arranged for verification if requested by the Public Works Department. 3.7 FIRE SAFING A. Work Included: Provide labor, materials, and equipment necessary to complete the work including, but not limited to the following: 1 . Fire safing at all penetrations through fire barriers. 2. Fire safing at all penetrations through smoke barriers. 3. Extent of fire and smoke barriers as indicated on the Architectural Drawings. 4. Fire safing at all penetrations through floors, shafts, corridor walls, stairway walls, mechanical rooms, electrical rooms, vaults, storage rooms, kitchen, machine rooms, outdoor storage rooms, and receiving rooms. AOW 266100 ELECTRICAL Page 43 of 44 Project No. 01091 Proposed Renovations March 6, 2009 Park House Smith College, Northampton, MA conforming with the latest Massachusetts Electrical Code and other ,.w,,, applicable specification standards. D. A #12 AWG insulated equipment ground conductor shall be installed in each length of flexible metallic conduit connection to motors, recessed lighting fixtures and other equipment components for continuity. Positive ground connections with the ground wire shall be made at each outlet box, lighting fixture, motor and other equipment components by means of positively secured ground clamp in each. 3.3 CONDUIT AND FITTINGS A. All conduit shall be installed so as to provide the straightest possible run with not more than the equivalent of three 90() bends in a single run. Where more bends are necessary, the Electrical Contractor shall provide suitable pull boxes. B. Conduit shall be fished and cleaned and dry before pulling wires and shall be suitably protected against entrance of dirt and moisture during construction. C. Ends of all conduits shall be reamed and all joints made waterproof. Connections to junction boxes shall be double locknut and bushing, using insulated bushings on conduit 1 -1 /4" or larger. Grounding bushings shall be provided at all panel connections. D. Conduit connections to motor frames shall have minimum of 18" of flexible steel conduit to eliminate vibrations and noise being transferred to other parts of the building, with cable jumper across greenfield and fittings. This flexible conduit shall also be installed at ceiling mounted lighting fixtures to facilitate alignment of fixtures. 3.4 OUTLET AND JUNCTION BOXES A. Receptacle boxes, unless otherwise noted, shall be approximately 18" above finished floor, aligned above or below closest block course, except at locations where wall mounted equipment precludes this mounting height. At such locations, receptacle height shall be as directed by the Architect. Switch outlets shall be 48" above finished floor, unless aligned above or below closest block course. The Electrical Contractor shall check with the Architectural and Structural Plans for interferences. B. Junction and outlet boxes, where exposed to the weather and wet locations, shall be of the threaded hub type and provided with watertight screw-on cover and gasket. 266100 ELECTRICAL Page 42 of 44 Project No. 01091 Proposed Renovations March 6, 2009 Park House Smith College, Northampton, MA acceptable if a passing shaking table test approved by the using agency is conducted and will withstand without failure a force of not less than four times its own weight. PART 3 - INSTALLATION 3.1 GENERAL INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS A. The Electrical Contractor shall endeavor to layout and perform his work in such a manner as to cause no delay in the construction by other trades. B. The Electrical Contractor shall verify all measurements and shall be responsible for the correctness of same. No allowance will be made for differences between actual measurements and those shown on plans. C. If, in laying out his work, the Electrical Contractor finds that the work of other trades might interfere with his, the Architect shall be notified. D. The locations of outlets, apparatus, and equipment are approximate only and the runs of feeders, mains, and branches are not necessarily to be made exactly as shown on the plans. The exact locations of such work shall be determined after full consideration has been given to work of other trades and without changes in the design of the systems. The entire installation shall conform to the latest issue of the Massachusetts Electrical * Code and local inspection authorities. E. Electrical equipment, such as junction and pull boxes, control, and apparatus, shall be made accessible. F. All wiring shall be concealed in finished spaces, except as otherwise specified. 3.2 GROUNDING A. Except where specifically indicated otherwise, all exposed non-current carrying metallic parts of electrical equipment, metallic raceway systems, grounding conductor in non-metallic raceways and neutral conductor of the wiring system shall be grounded. The ground connection shall be made at the main service equipment. B. The Electrical Contractor shall furnish and install all material required for the grounding and/or bonding in the building of all equipment, power and lighting systems installed under this Contract. C. The Electrical Contractor shall make tight and proper all metallic: components and equipment to one another and to ground, using a positive foolproof system of connections. Provide and install bonding and grounding conductors with approved termination where required, 266100 ELECTRICAL Page 41 of 44 Project No. 01091 Proposed Renovations March 6, 2009 Park House Smith College, Northampton, MA manufactured by Mason Industries or equal. 16. Housekeeping pad anchors shall consist of a ductile iron casting that is tapered and hexagonal, smaller at its base than at its top. The upper portion shall have holes for rebar to pass through. The anchor shall be continuously threaded from top to bottom for the attachment of soleplates. Housekeeping pad anchors shall be attached to the structural slab using a stud wedge anchor. Housekeeping pad anchors shall be type HPA and stud wedge anchor shall be type SAS both as manufactured by Mason Industries or equal. Lighting Fixtures: a. Lighting fixtures and supports shall conform to the Standard for Safety UL-57. b. Provide a lateral bracing system. c. Fixture supports will employ materials, which are suitable for the purpose. d. Loop and hook or swivel hanger assemblies for pendant fixtures shall be filled with a restraining device to hold the stem in the support position during earthquake motions. e. Pendant supported fluorescent fixtures shall also be provided with a flexible hanger device at the attachment to the fixture channel to preclude breaking of the support. The motion of swivels or hinged joints shall not cause sharp bends in ... conductors or damage to insulation. f. Each recessed fluorescent individual or continuous row of fixtures shall be supported by a seismic resistant suspended ceiling support system, and shall be fastened thereto at each corner of the fixture; or shall be provided with fixture support wired attached to the building structural members using two wires for individual fixtures and one wire per unit of continuous row fixtures. These support wires (min. No. 12 ga wire) will be capable of supporting four times the support load. g. A supporting assembly, which is intended to be mounted on an outlet box, will be designed to accommodate mounting features on four-inch boxes, three inch plaster rings, and fixture studs. h. Each surface mounted fluorescent individual or continuous row of fixtures shall be attached to a seismic resistant ceiling support system. Fixture support devices shall be locking type scissor clamp, or a full loop band, which will securely attach to the ceiling support. i. Fixtures attached to the underside of a structural slab shall be properly anchored to the slab at each corner of the fixture. j. Each wall mounted emergency light unit shall be secured in a manner to hold the unit in place during a seismic disturbance. k. Suspension systems for lighting fixtures that are free to swing a minimum of 450 from the vertical in all directions are 266100 ELECTRICAL Page 40 of 44 Project No. 01091 Proposed Renovations March 6, 2009 Park House Smith College, Northampton, MA precompressed and locked at the rated deflection by means of a resilient seismic upstop to keep the piping or equipment at a fixed elevation during installation. The hangers shall be designed with a release mechanism to free the spring after the installation is complete and the hanger is subjected to its full load. Deflection shall be clearly indicated by means of a scale. Submittals shall include a Drawing of the hanger showing the 30 degree capability. Hangers shall be Type PC30N as manufactured by Mason Industries, Inc. 12. Seismic Cable Restraints shall consist of galvanized steel aircraft cables sized to resist seismic loads with a minimum safety factor of two (2) and arranged to provide all-directional restraint. Cable end connections shall be steel assemblies that swivel to final installation angle and utilize two (2) clamping bolts to provide proper cable engagement. Cables must not be allowed to bend across sharp edges. Cable assemblies shall have an Anchorage Pre-approval "R" Number from OSHPD in the State of California verifying the maximum certified load ratings. Cable assemblies shall be Type SCB at the ceiling and at the clevis bolt, SCBH between the hanger rod nut and the clevis or SCBV if clamped to a beam all as manufactured by Mason Industries, Inc. 13. Seismic solid braces shall consist of steel angles or channels to resist seismic loads with a minimum safety factor of 2 and arranged to provide all directional restraint. Seismic solid brace end connectors shall be steel assemblies that swivel to the final installation angle and utilize two through bolts to provide proper attachment. Seismic solid brace assembly shall have anchorage pre-approval "R" Number from OSHPD in the state of California verifying the maximum certified load ratings. Solid seismic brace assemblies shall be Type SSB as manufactured by Mason Industries, Inc. 14. Stud wedge anchors shall be manufactured from full diameter wire, not from undersized wire that is "rolled up" to create the thread. The stud anchor shall also have a safety shoulder, which fully supports the wedge ring under load. The stud anchors shall have an evaluation report number from the I.C.B.O Evaluation Service, Inc. verifying its allowable loads. Drill-in stud wedge anchors shall be type SAS as manufactured by Mason Industries or' equal. 15. Female wedge anchors are preferred in floor locations so isolators or equipment can be slid into place after the anchors are installed. Anchors shall be manufactured from full diameter wire, and shall have a safety shoulder to fully support the wedge ring under load. Female wedge anchors shall have an evaluation report number from the I.C.B.O Evaluation Service, Inc. verifying to its allowable! Avft loads. Drill-in female wedge anchors shall be type SAB as 266100 ELECTRICAL Page 39 of 44 Project No. 01091 Proposed Renovations March 6, 2009 Park House Smith College, Northampton, MA shall be SLR as manufactured by Mason Industries, Inc. 7. Spring mountings as in Specification 5 built into a ductile iron or steel housing to provide all directional seismic snubbing. The snubber shall be adjustable vertically and allow a maximum if 1 /4 in. travel in all directions before contacting the resilient snubbing collars. Mountings shall have an Anchorage Pre-approval "R" Number from OSHPD in the State of California verifying the maximum certified horizontal and vertical load ratings. Mountings shall be SSLFH as manufactured by Mason Industries, Inc. 8. Air Springs shall be manufactured with upper and lower steel sections connected by a replaceable flexible nylon reinforced neoprene element. Air spring configuration shall be multiple bellows to achieve a maximum natural frequency of 3 Hz. Air Springs shall be designed for a burst pressure that is a minimum of three times the published maximum operating pressure. All air spring systems shall be connected to either the building control air or a supplementary air supply and equipped with three (3)- leveling valves to maintain leveling within plus or minus 1 /8 in. Submittals shall include natural frequency, load and damping tests performed by an independent lab or acoustician. Air Springs shall be Type MT and leveling valves Type LV as manufactured by Mason Industries, Inc. 9. Restrained air spring mountings shall have an MT air spring as described in Specification 8, within a rigid housing that includes vertical limit stops to prevent air spring extension when weight is removed. The housing shall serve as blocking during erection. A steel spacer shall be removed after adjustment. Installed and operating heights are equal. A minimum clearance of 1 .2 in. shall be maintained around restraining bolts and between the housing and the air spring action. Limit stops shall be out of contact during normal operation. Housing shall be designed to resist all seismic forces. Mountings shall be SLR-MT as manufactured by Mason Industries, Inc. 10. Hangers shall consist of rigid steel frames containing minimum 1 - 1 /4 in. thick neoprene elements at the top and a steel spring with general characteristics as in Specification 5 seated in a steel washer reinforced neoprene cup on the bottom. The neoprene element and the cup shall have neoprene bushings projecting through the steel box. To maintain stability the boxes shall not be articulated as clevis hangers nor the neoprene element stacked on top of the spring. Spring diameters and hanger box lower hole sizes shall be large enough to permit the hanger rod to swing through a 30° arc from side to side before contacting the rod bushing and short circuiting the spring. Submittals shall include a hanger Drawing showing the 300 capability. Hangers shall be Type 30N as manufactured by Mason Industries, Inc. 11 . Hangers shall be as described in 10, but they shall be 266100 ELECTRICAL Page 38 of 44 Project No. 01091 Proposed Renovations March 6, 2009 Park House Smith College, Northampton, MA contacting the casting during normal operation. The shock absorbing neoprene materials shall be compounded to bridge- bearing Specifications. Mountings shall have an Anchorage Pre- approval "R" Number from OSHPD in the State of California verifying the maximum certified horizontal and vertical load ratings. Mountings shall be Type BR as manufactured by Mason Industries, Inc. 3. Sheet metal panels shall be bolted to the walls or supporting structure by assemblies consisting of a neoprene bushing cushioned between 2 steel sleeves. The outer sleeve prevents the sheet metal from cutting into the neoprene. Enlarge panel holes as required. Neoprene elements pass over the bushing to cushion the back panel horizontally. A steel disc covers the inside neoprene element and the inner steel sleeve is elongated to act as a stop so tightening the anchor bolts does not interfere with panel isolation in three (3) planes. Bushing assemblies can be applied to the ends of steel cross members where applicable. All assemblies shall be Type PB as manufactured by Mason Industries, Inc. 4. A one piece molded bridge bearing neoprene washer/bushing. The bushing shall surround the anchor bolt and have a flat face to avoid metal to metal contact. Neoprene bushings shall be Type HG as manufactured by Mason Industries, Inc. 5. Spring isolators shall be free standing and laterally stable without any housing and complete with a molded neoprene cup or 1 /4 in. neoprene acoustical friction pad between the baseplate and the support. All mountings shall have leveling bolts that must be rigidly bolted to the equipment. Spring diameters shall be no less than 0.8 if the compressed height of the spring at rated load. Springs shall have a minimum additional travel to solid equal to 50% of the rated deflection. Submittals shall include spring diameters, deflection, compressed spring height and solid spring height. Mountings shall be Type SLF as manufactured by Mason Industries, Inc. 6. Restrained spring mountings shall have an SLF mounting as described in Specification 5, within a rigid housing that includes, vertical limit stops to prevent spring extension when weight is removed. The housing shall serve as blocking during erection. A steel spacer shall be removed after adjustment. Installed and operating heights are equal. A minimum clearance of 1 /2 in. shall be maintained around restraining bolts and between the housing and the spring so as not to interfere with the spring action. Limit stops shall be out of contact during normal operation. Since housings will be bolted or welded in position there must be an internal isolation pad. Housing shall be designed to resist all seismic forces. Mountings shall have Anchorage Pre-approval "R" Number from OSHPD in the state of California certifying the maximum certified horizontal and vertical load ratings. Mountings 266100 ELECTRICAL Page 37 of 44 Project No. 01091 Proposed Renovations March 6, 2009 Park House Smith College, Northampton, MA 1 . The following force levels will be used on this project. ,. Minimum "G" Forces Equal to or Exceeding Building Code Listed in E. Building "G" Force "G" Force "G" Force "G" Force For Code for all pipes, Duct for Rigidity for Flexibility Life Safety & Conduit Mounted Mounted Equipment Either Equipment Equipment Rigidity or Flexibility Mounted Zon Horiz. Vert. Horiz. Vert. Horiz. Vert. Horiz. Vert. e UBC LlBOCA .25 .08 0.4 0.15 0.1 0.15 0.6 0.2 SBCCI I. Product Intent: 1 . All vibration isolators and seismic restraints described in this section shall be the product of a single manufacturer. Mason industry's products are the basis of these Specifications; products of other manufacturers are acceptable provided their systems strictly comply with the Specifications and have the approval of the specifying engineer. Submittals and certification sheets shall be in accordance with Section D. 2. For the purposes of this project, failure is defined as the discontinuance of any attachment point between equipment or structure, vertical permanent deformation greater than 1 /8 in. and/or horizontal permanent deformation greater than 1 /4 in. j. Product Description: Vibration Isolators and Seismic Restraints: 1 . Two (2) layers of 3/4 in. thick neoprene pad consisting of 2 in. square waffle modules separated horizontally by a 16 gauge galvanized shim. Load distribution plates shall be used as required. Pads shall be Type Super "W" as manufactured by Mason Industries, Inc. 2. Bridge-bearing neoprene mountings shall have a minimum static deflection of 0.2 in. and all directional seismic capability. The mount shall consist of a ductile iron casting containing two separated and opposing molded neoprene elements. The elements shall prevent the central threaded sleeve and attachment bolt from 266100 ELECTRICAL Page 36 of 44 Project No. 01091 Proposed Renovations March 6, 2009 Park House Smith College, Northampton, MA code: a. Massachusetts State Building Code. b. BOCA Massachusetts Electrical Code. C. NFPA-13, 14, 20, and 90A. d. Massachusetts State Plumbing and Gas Code. e. Massachusetts Electrical Code. F. Manufacture's Responsibility: 1 . Manufacturer of vibration isolation and seismic control equipment shall have the following responsibilities: a. Determine vibration isolation and seismic restraint sizes and locations. b. Provide vibration isolation and seismic restraints as scheduled or specified. C. Provide calculations and materials if required for restraint of un-insolated equipment. d. Provide installation instructions, drawings and trained field supervision to insure proper installation and performance. G. Related Work: 1 . Housekeeping Pads: a. Housekeeping pad reinforcement and monolithic pad attachment to the structure details and design shall be prepared by the restraint vendor if not already indicated on the Drawings. b. Housekeeping pads shall be coordinated with restraint vendor and sized to provide a minimum edge distance of ten (10) bolt diameters all around the outermost anchor bolt to allow development of full drill-in wedge anchor ratings. If cast-in anchors are to be used, the housekeeping pads shall be sized to accommodate the ACI requirements for bolt coverage and embedment. 2. Supplementary Support Steel: Contractor shall supply supplementary support steel for all equipment, piping, ductwork, etc. including roof mounted equipment, as required or specified. 3. Attachments:Contractor shall supply restraint attachments plates cast into housekeeping pads, concrete inserts, double sided beam clamps, etc. in accordance with the requirements of the vibration vendor's calculations. H. Seismic Force Levels: 266100 ELECTRICAL Page 35 of 44 Project No. 01091 Proposed Renovations March 6, 2009 Park House Smith College, Northampton, MA including dimensions, structural member sizes and support point locations. 2. Provide all details of suspension and support for ceiling hung equipment. 3. Where walls, floors, slabs, or supplementary steelwork are used for seismic restraint locations, details of acceptable attachment methods for ducts, conduit and pipe must be included and approved before the condition is accepted for installation. Restraint manufacture's submittals must include spacing, static loads and seismic loads at all attachment and support points. 4. Provide specific details of seismic restraints and anchors; include number, size and locations for each piece of equipment. C. Seismic Certification and Analysis: 1 . Seismic restraint calculations must be provided for all connections of equipment to the structure. Calculations must be stamped by a registered professional engineer with at least five (5) years of seismic design experience, licensed in the state of the job location. 2. All restraining devices shall have a pre-approval number form California OSHPD or some other recognized government agency showing maximum restraint ratings. Pre-approvals based on independent testing are preferred pre-approvals based on calculations. Where pre-approved devices are not available, submittals based on independent testing are preferred. Calculations (including the combing of tensile and shear loading) to support seismic restraint designs must be stamped by a registered professional engineer with at least five (5) years of seismic design experience and licensed in the state of the job location. Testing and calculations must include both shear and tensile loads as well as one test or analysis at 45 degrees to the weakest mode. 3. Analysis must indicate calculated dead loads, static seismic loads and capacity of materials utilized for connections to equipment and structure. Analysis must detail anchoring methods, bolt diameter, emdbedment and/or welded length. All seismic restraint devices shall be designed to accept, without failure, the forces detailed in Section H acting through the equipment center of gravity. Overturning moments may exceed forces at ground level. E. Code and Standards Requirement: 1 . Typical Applicable Codes and Standards - most recent or enforced 266100 ELECTRICAL Page 34 of 44 Project No. 01091 Proposed Renovations March 6, 2009 Park House Smith College, Northampton, MA B. Definitions 1 . Life Safety Systems: a. All systems involved with fire protection including sprinkler piping, fire pumps, jockey pumps, fire pump control panels, service water supply piping, water tanks, fire dampers and smoke exhaust systems. b. All systems involved with and/or connected to emergency power supply including all generators, transfer switches, transformers and all flowpaths to fire protection and/or emergency lighting systems. C. All medical and life support systems. d. Fresh air relief systems on emergency control sequence including air handlers, conduit, duct, dampers, etc. e. All life safety equipment has an asterisk on the equipment schedule. 2. Positive Attachment: A positive attachment is defined as a cast-in-anchor, a drill-in wedge anchor, a double sided beam clamp loaded perpendicular to a beam, or a welded "C" type beam clamps for support rods of electrical conduit, bus duct, or cable trays, or any other equipment are not acceptable on this project as seismic anchor points. 3. Transverse Bracing: Restraint (s) applied to limit motion perpendicular to the centerline of the pipe, duct or conduit. 4. Longitudinal Bracing: Restraint (s) applied to limit motion parallel to the centerline of the pipe. D. Manufacturer's Data: 1 . The manufacturer of vibration isolation and seismic restraints shall provide submittals for products as follows: a. Descriptive Data: 1 . Catalog cuts or data sheets on vibration isolators and specific restraints detailing compliance with the Specification. 2. Detailed schedules of flexible and rigidly mounted equipment, showing vibration isolators and seismic restraints by referencing numbered descriptive Drawings. b. Shop Drawings: 1 . Submit fabrication details for equipment bases 266100 ELECTRICAL Page 33 of 44. Project No. 01091 Proposed Renovations March 6, 2009 Park House Smith College, Northampton, MA and mechanically transmitted sound to the building structure. Vibration .. isolators shall be selected in accordance with the weight distribution so as to produce reasonably uniform deflections. 3. All isolators and isolation materials shall be of the same manufacturer and shall be certified by the manufacturer. 4. All such systems must be installed in strict accordance with seismic codes, component manufactures and building construction standards. Whenever a conflict occurs between the manufactures or construction standards, the most stringent shall apply. S. The Specification is considered to be minimum requirements for seismic consideration and is not intended as a substitute for legislated, more stringent, national, state or local construction requirements (i.e. California Title 24, California OSHPD, Canadian Building Codes, or other requirements). 6. Any variance or non-compliance with these Specification requirements shall be corrected by the Contractor in an approved manner. 7. Seismic restraints shall be designed in accordance with seismic force levels as detailed in Section H. A. The work in this Section includes, but is not limited to, the following: 1 . Vibration isolation for equipment. 2. Seismic restraints for isolated equipment. 3. Seismic restraints for non-isolated equipment. 4. Certification of seismic restraint designs and installation supervision. 5. Certification of seismic attachment of housekeeping pads. 6. All electrical systems. Equipment buried underground is excluded but entry of services through the foundation wall is included. Equipment referred to below is typical. (Equipment not listed is still included in this Specification.) Battery Packs Generators Bus Ducts Light Fixtures Cable Trays Comp. Room Units Switching Gear Conduit Transformers Electrical Panels Unit Substitutions 266100 ELECTRICAL Page 32 of 44 Project No. 01091 Proposed Renovations March 6, 2009 Park House Smith College, Northampton, MA provide circuit and conductor identification at least once in each enclosure. 7. Provide ample service loops at each termination so that plates, panels, and equipment can be unmounted for service and inspection. 0. Acceptance Testing 1 . Acceptance testing shall be performed by the Architect/Engineer and Owner during a period designated by the Owner. The period of time required for acceptance testing is one (1) working day. Contractor shall furnish a minimum of one (1) technician for the acceptance testing period. This area shall be completed with all furnishings ready for occupancy. 2. Make additional mechanical and electrical adjustments within the scope of the work and which are deemed necessary by the Architect or Owner as a result of the acceptance tests. P. System Documentation: 1 . Prepare and submit four (4) copies of operation and maintenance manuals, neatly bound as outlined in this Specification. 2. Manual to include: a. A listing of the As-built cabling and components installed. b. A record of the test results. C. Formalized As-built Drawings indicating the physical cable plant, component and node locations. d. A topology diagram depicting the network configuration for' Owner's reference when additions, changes, or modifications are made to the original design. Q. Removal of Existing CAN lines. 1 . The contractor shall remove Cable Television outlets from each of the existing dormitory rooms existing in areas under demolition. 2. The contractor shall remove the entire home run from outlet: location to the head end equipment where existing CAN outlet are removed. 2.13 VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROL 1 . It is the intent of the seismic portion of this Specification to keep all electrical building system components in place during a seismic event. 2. All electrical equipment and conduit, as noted on the equipment: schedule or in the Specification, shall be mounted on vibration isolators and with flexible connections to prevent the transmission of vibration 266100 ELECTRICAL Page 31 of 44 Project No. 01091 Proposed Renovations March 6, 2009 Park House Smith College, Northampton, MA l . Employ a job Superintendent or Project Manager during the course of the installation to provide co-ordination of the work of the Division and of other trades and to provide technical information when requested by other trades. This person shall be responsible for all quality control during installation, equipment set-up and testing. M. General Co-ordination 1 . Entire system shall conform completely with pertinent codes, laws, ordinances, regulations, standards, criteria, or other requirements, including, but not limited to, structural support, fire rating and health/safety requirements regarding all items. Such conformity shall have precedence over this Specification. 2. Secure equipment firmly in place, including boxes, conduit, and cables. Provide fastenings and supports adequate to support loads. 3. Install work neatly, with boxes, equipment, etc., plumb and square. Adjust layout as necessary to preserve symmetry and aesthetics. Install equipment to provide maximum safety to future operators. 4. Clearly, logically, and permanently mark connectors, jacks, cables, and cable terminations. N. Wiring 1 . Provide wire, conduits, and raceways according to standard broadcast practices. Do not exceed 30% fill in conduit. 2. Exercise care in wiring to avoid damage to cables and equipment. 3. Wiring shall not rest on ceiling material nor touch any heat sources. Conduits exposed to physical abuse shall be run in RSC, 3/4" minimum. 4. Install all cable to ensure proper. . a. Pulling tensions. b. Quantities. C. Types. d. Lengths. e. Routing. f. Wire group separation. g. Identification. h. Bend radius 5. Splicing of cables is not permitted between terminations at specified equipment. 6. Form, in a neat and orderly manner, all conductors in enclosures and boxes, wireways and wiring troughs, providing circuit and conductor identification. Tie as required using TO "Ty-Raps" of appropriate size and type. Limit spacing between ties to 1 ', and 266100 ELECTRICAL Page 30 of 44 Project No. 01091 Proposed Renovations March 6, 2009 Park House Smith College, Northampton, MA industry standards applicable to the work and as shown on approved Shop Drawings. a. Contractor shall rigidly adhere to manufacturer's published specifications for pulling tension, minimum bend radii, and sidewall pressure when installing all cables. 2. Arrange and mount all equipment and materials in a manner acceptable to the Architect/Engineer and Owner. 3. Installation shall conform to the following basic guidelines: a. Use of approved wire, cable, and wiring devices. b. Neat and uncluttered wire termination. 4. Provide fire stopping for electrical penetrations through fire rated floors, walls, and other partitions of building construction. 5. Connectors installed onto the cable shall be irreversible crimp type meeting industry standards. J. Grounding 1 . All equipment racks, housings, and raceways shall be grounded. 2. CATV system equipment shall contain a single point ground. All cabinets, racks, etc. shall be connected to a single point ground which, in turn, will be connected to the grounding systems conductors in that area. 3. Grounding shall conform to ANSI/TIA/EIA-607(A) - Commercial Building Grounding and Bonding Requirements for Telecommunications, 2008 Massachusetts Electrical Code®, ANSI/NECA/BICSI-568 and manufacturer's grounding requirements as minimum. K. Labeling 1 . Labeling shall conform to ANSI/TIA/EIA-606-A standards. 2. Label each cable with permanent self-adhesive label with minimum, 1 /8 in. high charactersin the following locations: a. Inside catv outlet box on the jacket of the wire. b. Inside the Tele/data room on the jacket of the wiring before the connection to the head end equipment. 5. Labels shall be machine-printed (p-touch or equal),. Hand-lettered labels shall not be acceptable. 6. Label cables, outlets, with room number in which outlet is located, i.e., 007, 001 . L. Field Quality Control 266100 ELECTRICAL Page 29 of 44 Project No. 01091 Proposed Renovations March 6, 2009 Park House Smith College, Northampton, MA 1 . The contractor shall remove telecommunication outlets from existing locations in area under demolition. 2. The contractor shall remove the entire home run from outlet location to the head end equipment where existing tele/data jacks are to be removed. 2.12 CABLE TELEVISION SYSTEM A. The building's internal cable television system service is existing, and will be modified to accommodate the new building layout as shown on the Drawings and directed by the Owner. Cable jack locations exist in each dormitory bedroom throughout the building and in select common areas. B. Existing head end equipment is mounted on existing backboard in basement and shall be sealed off with plastic covering during construction to avoid dust intrusion as much as practicable. Equipment shall be dismounted from wall during construction and reinstalled into new data closet where shown on the drawings. New closet location does not require significant rewiring of equipment, but contractor will route and secure existing and new conductors for a neat and workman like finish appearance. C. New cable television outlet locations, where shown on Drawings, shall consist of standard size outlet box, and cover plates (smooth phenolic ivory), with 1 port for CATV. D. The work in this Section shall be performed by a Contractor who has been pre-qualified by the College. E. Work of this Section shall include the installation, termination, and testing of all CATV wiring from the outlets indicated on the Contract Drawings to the Basement Data/Telephone Room as indicated on the Drawings. F. Each CATV outlet drop shall consist of one (1) run from each outlet location to the Head end equipment located in the Telephone/Data Closet. G. All CATV cable runs must be installed without cross-connects between wall jack and head end equipment terminations in Tele/data Room. H. CATV wire shall be Type RG6, standard 75 ohm Coaxial type cable, with a black outer sheath. I. Installation of Data and Telephone Cabling 1 . Install materials and equipment in accordance with manufacturer's printed instructions to comply with governing regulations and 1" 266100 ELECTRICAL Page 28 of 44 Project No. 01091 Proposed Renovations March 6, 2009 Park House Smith College, Northampton, MA C. Types. d. Lengths. e. Routing. f. Wire group separation. g. Identification. h. Bend radius 5. Splicing of cables is not permitted between terminations at specified equipment. 6. Form, in a neat and orderly manner, all conductors in enclosures and boxes, wireways and wiring troughs, providing circuit and conductor identification. Tie as required using Velcro wraps of appropriate size and type. Limit spacing between ties to 1 ', and provide circuit and conductor identification at least once in each enclosure. 7. Provide ample service loops at each termination so that plates, panels, and equipment can be unmounted for service and inspection. Q. Acceptance Testing 1 . Acceptance testing shall be performed by the Architect/Engineer and Owner during a period designated by the Owner. The period of time required for acceptance testing is two (2) working days. Contractor shall furnish a minimum of one (1) technician for the acceptance testing period. This area shall be completed with all furnishings ready for occupancy. 2. Make additional mechanical and electrical adjustments within the scope of the work and which are deemed necessary by the Architect: or Owner as a result of the acceptance tests. R. System Documentation: 1 . Prepare and submit four (4) copies of operation and maintenance manuals, neatly bound as outlined in this Specification. 2. Manual to include: a. A system block diagram with all input/output terminations and patch points identified. b. A listing of the As-built cabling and components installed. C. A record of the test results. d. Formalized As-built Drawings indicating the physical cable plant, component and node locations. e. A topology diagram depicting the network configuration for Owner's reference when additions, changes, or modifications are made to the original design. S. Removal of Existing Communication lines. 266100 ELECTRICAL Page 27 of 44 Project No. 01091 Proposed Renovations March 6, 2009 Park House Smith College, Northampton, MA 3. Use labels on face of data patch panels. Provide facility assignment records in a protective cover at each telecommunications closet location that is specific to the facilities terminated therein. 4. Use color-coded labels for each termination field that conforms to ANSI/TIA/EIA-606-A standard color codes for termination blocks. 5. Labels shall be machine-printed. Hand-lettered labels shall not be acceptable. 6. Label cables, outlets, patch panels, and punch blocks with room number in which outlet is located, followed by a single letter suffix to indicate particular outlet within room, i.e., 52107A, 521076. Indicate riser cables by an R then pair or cable number. N. Field Quality Control 1 . Employ a Job Superintendent or Project Manager during the course of the installation to provide co-ordination of the work of the Division and of other trades and to provide technical information when requested by other trades. This person shall be responsible for all quality control during installation, equipment set-up and testing. 0. General Co-ordination (Date and Telephone Wiring) 1 . Entire system shall conform completely with pertinent codes, laws, ordinances, regulations, standards, criteria, or other requirements, including, but not limited to, structural support, fire rating and health/safety requirements regarding all items. Such conformity shall have precedence over this Specification. 2. Secure equipment firmly in place, including boxes, conduit, and cables. Provide fastenings and supports adequate to support loads. 3. Install work neatly, with boxes, equipment, etc., plumb and square. Adjust layout as necessary to preserve symmetry and aesthetics. Install equipment to provide maximum safety to future operators. 4. Clearly, logically, and permanently mark connectors, jacks, cables, and cable terminations. P. Wiring 1 . Provide wire, conduits, and raceways according to standard broadcast practices. Do not exceed 30% fill in conduit. 2. Exercise care in wiring to avoid damage to cables and equipment. 3. Wiring shall not rest on ceiling material nor touch any heat sources. Conduits exposed to physical abuse shall be run in RSC, 3/4" minimum. 4. Install all data wire and cable. Ensure proper. . a. Pulling tensions. b. Quantities. 266100 ELECTRICAL Page 26 of 44 Project No. 01091 Proposed Renovations March 6, 2009 Park House Smith College, Northampton, MA 3. Installation shall conform to the following basic guidelines: a. Use of approved wire, cable, and wiring devices. b. Neat and uncluttered wire termination. 4. Provide fire stopping for electrical penetrations through fire rated floors, walls, and other partitions of building construction. 5. Where existing cables (outlets) are being relocated to an adjacent wall, Contractor shall cut off connector and pull cable to new outlet box location. Pull and label as specified. K. Testing of Data Cables 1 . Every cabling link in the installation shall be tested in accordance with the field test specifications defined in ANSI/TIA/EIA-568-B.2-1 "Transmission Performance Specifications for 4-pair 1 0052 Category 6 Cabling". 2. The installed twisted-pair horizontal links shall be tested from the OF in the telecommunications room to the telecommunication wall outlet in the work area against the "Permanent Link" performance limits specification as defined in the ANSI/TIA/EIA-568-B.2-1 standard. 3. Any failing link must be diagnosed and corrected. The corrective action shall be followed with a new test to prove that the corrected link meets the performance requirements. L. Grounding 1 . All equipment racks, housings, and raceways shall be grounded. 2. Data system shall contain a single point ground. All cabinets, racks, etc. shall be connected to a single point ground which, in turn, will be connected to the grounding systems conductors in that area. 3. Grounding shall conform to ANSI/TIA/EIA-607(A) - Commercial Building Grounding and Bonding Requirements for Telecommunications, 2008 Massachusetts Electrical Code®, ANSI/NECA/BICSI-568 and manufacturer's grounding requirements, as minimum. M. Labeling 1 . Labeling shall conform to ANSI/TIA/EIA-606-A standards. 2. Label each cable with permanent self-adhesive label with minimum, 1 /8 in. high characters, in the following locations: a. Inside receptacle box at the work area. b. Behind the communication closet patch panel or punch block. 266100 ELECTRICAL Page 25 of 44 Project No. 01091 Proposed Renovations March 6, 2009 Park House Smith College, Northampton, MA G. All data runs must be installed without cross-connects between wall jack and patch panel terminations in Telephone Room. H. Voice runs may be cross connected on 1 10 blocks. I. Data cabling shall be Category 6, unshielded twisted pair, (UTP), with a blue sheath as described in ANSI/TIA/EIA-606-A 1 . Solid copper, 24 AWG, 100 ohm balanced twisted-pair (UTP) Category 6 cables with four individually twisted-pairs, which meet or exceed the mechanical and transmission performance specifications in ANSI/TIA/EIA-568-B.2-1 up to 250 MHz. 2. Wall Plates and Connectors a. Single-gang faceplate with two openings containing the following devices: 1 . Data Outlet - 8-pin modular, category 6, unkeyed, black, pinned to either T568 (A or B) standards. 2. Voice Outlet - 8-pin modular, category 3, unkeyed, ivory, pinned to either T568 (A or B) standards. 3. Data Jack Modules a. Eight g position modules shall be used in all work areas and modular patch panels and shall meet the TIA/EIA-568-B.2-1 Category 6 standard. Modules shall be tested and approved for Category 6 ETL component compliance. The module termination to 4 pair 24 - 22 AWG 100 ohm solid unshielded twisted pair cable shall be accomplished by use of a forward motion termination cap and shall not require the use of a punchdown tool. All modules shall be 100% tested for NEXT performance. The termination cap shall be color coded for T568A and T568B wiring schemes. J. Installation of Data and Telephone Cabling 1 . Install materials and equipment in accordance with manufacturer's printed instructions to comply with governing regulations and industry standards applicable to the work and as shown on approved Shop Drawings. a. Contractor shall rigidly adhere to manufacturer's published specifications for pulling tension, minimum bend radii, and sidewall pressure when installing all cables. 2. Arrange and mount all equipment and materials in a manner acceptable to the Architect/Engineer and Owner. 266100 ELECTRICAL Page 24 of 44 Project No. 01091 Proposed Renovations March 6, 2009 Park House Smith College, Northampton, MA numbers shall be used in sequence down the right-hand side. F. A circuit directory frame and card with a clear plastic covering shall be provided on the inside of the door. The directory card shall provide a space at least 1 /4" high by 3" long or equivalent for each circuit. The directory shall be typed to identify the load fed by each circuit. Hand written directories will not be acceptable. G. Each panelboard, as a complete unit, shall have a short circuit current rating equal to or greater than the rating shown on the panelboard schedule on the plans. H. Panelboards shall be listed by Underwriters' Laboratories and bear the UL label. Panelboards shall be Square D, Type NQOD for 208Y/120 volts, or equal by General Electric, Westinghouse, or ITE. 2.11 TELECOMMUNICATIONS SYSTEM A. The building's internal telephone/data system service is existing, and will be modified to accommodate the new building layout as shown on the Drawings and directed by the Owner. B. Existing head end equipment, including fiber optic data and telephone equipment mounted on existing backboard in basement, shall be sealed off with plastic covering during construction to avoid dust intrusion as much as practicable. Equipment shall be dismounted from wall during construction and reinstalled into new data closet where shown on the drawings. New closet location does not require significant rewiring of equipment, but contractor will route and secure existing and new conductors for a neat and workman like finish appearance. C. New tele/data outlet locations, where shown on Drawings, shall consist of standard size outlet box, and cover plates (smooth phenolic ivory), with 3 ports; (1) for data, (1) for telephone, and (1) for future expansion. D. The work in this Section shall be performed by a Contractor who has been pre-qualified by the College. E. Work of this Section shall include the installation, termination, and testing of all data and telephone wiring from the outlets indicated on the Contract Drawings to the Basement Data/Telephone Room as indicated on the Drawings. F. Each Telephone/Data outlet drop shall consist of one (1) data and one (1) voice drop, run from each outlet location to the Head end equipment located in the Telephone/Data Closet. 266100 ELECTRICAL Page 23 of 44 Project No. 01091 Proposed Renovations March 6, 2009 Park House Smith College, Northampton, MA if the thermal unit is removed. Iow- a. All three phase magnetic starters shall have "Hand-Off- Auto" selector switch, Square D, Class 8536, Form C, three- pole, three-phase of NEMA size applicable, with three melting alloy overload relays and three-position H-O-A switch in cover of general purpose enclosure. b. All single phase magnetic starters shall be single pole magnetic contactor without overload protection, with "Hand-Off-Auto" selector switch in cover of general purpose enclosure, Square D, Class 8502. C. A control transformer shall be furnished and installed in each starter, fused, with 24 volt secondary. Starter coils shall be 24 volt. d. Furnish a minimum of one auxiliary contact in each starter for use by others for interlocking purposes. 4. Starters for two speed motors shall be for single winding or two winding as required for the service. E. Equivalent equipment by Cutler-Hammer, General Electric, or Westinghouse will be considered. 2.10 PANELBOARDS A. Furnish and install circuit breaker lighting and receptacle panelboards as indicated on the panelboard schedule and where shown on the plans. Panelboards shall be equipped with thermal-magnetic molded case circuit breakers with frame and trip ratings as shown on the schedule. B. Circuit breakers shall be quick-make, quick-break, thermal-magnetic, trip indicating, and have common trip on all multi-pole breakers. Trip indication shall be clearly shown by the breaker handle taking position between "ON" and "OFF" when the breaker is tripped. Connections to the bus shall be bolt-on. C. Bus bar connections to the branch circuit breaker shall be the "distributed phase" or "phase sequence" type. All current-carrying parts of the bus assembly shall be plated. Main ratings shall be as shown on the panelboard schedule. D. Terminals for feeder conductors to the panelboard mains and neutral shall be UL listed as suitable for the type of conductor specified. Terminals for branch circuit wiring, both breaker and neutral, shall be UL listed as suitable for the type of conductor specified. E. Panelboard circuit numbering shall be such that starting at the top, odd numbers shall be used in sequence down the left-hand side and even 266100 ELECTRICAL Page 22 of 44 Project No. 01091 Proposed Renovations March 6, 2009 Park House Smith College, Northampton, MA corresponding letter on Drawings. Manufacturers' names and catalogue numbers are listed to show type and standard of quality. Complete schedule of lighting fixtures shall be submitted to and approved by the Architect. 2.9 MOTOR STARTERS AND DISCONNECT SWITCHES A. Furnish and install motor starting, protecting, and controlling devices for motors where shown on the Drawings. B. Furnish and install heavy duty fused safety switches as indicated on plans and specifications. 1 . All switches shall have switch blades which are fully visible in the OFF position with the door open. All current-carrying parts shall be plated to resist corrosion and promote cool operation. 2. Switches shall be quick-made and quick-break such that, during normal operation of the switch, the operation of the contacts shall not be capable of being restrained by the operating handle after the closing or opening action of the contacts has started. The handle and mechanism shall be an integral part of the box, not the cover, with positive pad-locking provisions in the "OFF" position. 3. Switches shall be furnished in NEMA 1 general purpose enclosures unless NEMA 3R (rainproof - WP) is specified on the plans. Enclosures shall have gray enamel, electro-deposited on cleaned phosphatized steel. 4. Switches shall be horsepower rated for 240 volts AC, as shown. 5. Fuses shall be as indicated on the Drawings. 6. Switches shall be Square D Heavy Duty type in NEMA 1 or NEMA 3R. enclosures, or equal. C. Disconnect switches for 120 volt, single phase motors shall be single or double pole toggle switches as specified, unless shown otherwise on the Drawings. D. Motor starters shall be across-the-line magnetic type rated in accordance with NEMA Standards, sizes and horsepower ratings. Starters shall be mounted in general purpose enclosures unless otherwise indicated on the plans. 1 . Across-the-line magnetic starters shall be equipped with double break silver alloy contacts. All contacts shall be replaceable without removing power wiring or removing starter from panel. 2. Coils shall be of molded construction, replaceable from the front: without removing the starter from the panel. 3. Overload relays shall be the melting alloy type with a replaceable control circuit module. Thermal units shall be of one-piece construction and interchangeable. The starter shall be inoperative 266100 ELECTRICAL Page 21 of 44 Project No. 01091 Proposed Renovations March 6, 2009 Park House Smith College, Northampton, MA 3. Final Tests / Warranty a. The system shall be fully tested by the contractor and NICET certified technicians in accordance with UL guidelines and NFPA standards. Each and every device shall be tested. b. A copy of the final test report shall be submitted indicating proper functioning of the system and conformance to the specifications. The test shall be performed by factory- trained qualified technicians. Each and every device shall be tested, and standalone operation of remote panels shall be verified. Final testing shall be performed by the same company that will hold and execute the Test and Inspection contract. C. The manufacturer shall guarantee all system equipment for a period of one (1) year from the date of final acceptance. d. The contractor shall guarantee all raceways and wiring to be free from inherent mechanical or electrical defects for one (1) year from the date of final acceptance of the system. 4. Training a. The contractor shall provide the services of the manufacturer's representative for a period of 4 hours, during normal business hours, to instruct the owner's designated personnel and fire department response teams on the operation of the system. ,. 2.8 LIGHTING FIXTURES A. Furnish and install lighting fixtures on all light outlets shown on plans unless otherwise noted. All lighting fixtures to have label of Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. Fixtures to be complete in all respects with all required glassware and lamps. All lamps to be new. Furnish and install all required hardware to fit in all type ceilings. Fixtures are to be cleaned after lamps and diffusers are installed. Any chipped, cracked or otherwise defective material shall be replaced. B. Fluorescent ballasts shall be solid state electronic type. Fixtures with electronic ballasts shall be high power factor (greater than .9 pf), low harmonic (less than 10% thd), energy efficient, complete with automatic reset thermal protector, integral connectectors for easy replacement and shall be UL listed. C. All fixtures shall be installed complete with lamps of the stated type and size; T8 lamps shall be 3500 K. D. All fixtures to be independently supported from building structure. E. Fixtures are identified by letter on the fixture schedule and by 266100 ELECTRICAL Page 20 of 44 Project No. 01091 Proposed Renovations March 6, 2009 Park House Smith College, Northampton, MA AOW Provide carbon monoxide detector for use with alarm control panels. Detector shall be equipped with test switch, and single-pole double-throw relay for use with addressable interface module. Detector shall feature local 85 dBA buzzer (@ 10') and led visual display for occupant notification. Devices shall be listed to UL standard 2075 and tested to UL standard 2034. Install Carbon Monoxide Detector by Macurco model CM-15A or approved equal. F. Single and Multi Station Components 1 . Single and Multi station Smoke detection devices. Unless otherwise indicated on the plans, provide single and multi station smoke detection in dormitory rooms as indicated on the plans. Smoke detectors shall feature local 85 dBA horn, test switch, and lighted power/alarm LED indicator. Unit shall be designed to mount to any single gang or 4" octagon box. Each smoke detector shall be powered from both Local AC source as well as internal 9 volt DC source. Install Single and multi station Photoelectric type Smoke Detection devices by Firex, model 4580 or approved equal. G. Installation 1 . Installation shall be performed b Licensed installers in a workmanlike manner. The work shall be performed by skilled technicians under the direction of experienced engineers, all of whom are properly trained and qualified. 2. Wiring a. All wiring for the system shall be in accordance with Articles 760, 725, and 800 of the Massachusetts Electrical Code and local electrical codes. b. Provide complete wiring and conduit between all equipment. All devices shall be mounted upon and splices made in UL. listed boxes. Wiring splices and transposing or changing of' colors will not be permitted. C. All junction boxes shall be painted red and labeled as 'Fire Alarm System' with decal or approved markings d. Fire Alarm control systems and equipment shall be connected to separate dedicated branch circuits, sized as required for proper service. Circuits shall be labeled 'FIRE. ALARM'. e. Fire alarm system wiring located above lay in tile ceilings or fished in stud partitions or ceilings may be Type MC cable listed for such uses. Home runs shall be raceway and wire as. specified. 266100 ELECTRICAL Page 19 of 44 Project No. 01091 Proposed Renovations March 6, 2009 Park House Smith College, Northampton, MA e. Manual Station - Double Action Single Stage Provide analog/addressable double action, single stage fire alarm stations at the locations shown on the drawings. The fire alarm station shall be of polycarbonate construction and incorporate an internal toggle switch. A locked test feature shall be provided. The station shall be suitable for mounting on North American 2 %Z (64mm) deep 1-gang boxes and 1 %z (38mm) deep 4 square boxes with 1-gang covers. Manual station shall be keyed alike with Control Panel. f. Notification Appliances Provide low profile wall mount horn/strobes at the locations shown on the drawings. The low profile horn/strobe shall produce a high level db output an offer a full line of A.D.A. compliant strobes. The horn/strobe shall mount to a standard one-gang electrical box and with an optional trim plate accommodate two-gang, octagonal or four inch square electrical boxes. g. Initiation & Control Modules 1 . Relay Module Provide addressable control relay circuit modules at the locations shown on the drawings. The module shall provide one (1) form C dry relay contacts rated at 24Vdc @ 2 amps (pilot duty) to control external appliances or equipment. The position of the relay contact shall be confirmed by the system firmware. 2. Monitor Module Provide addressable single input monitor modules as shown on plans for monitoring of all waterflow, tamper, Carbon Monoxide detection and other supervisory devices. Addressable modules shall mount to single gang electrical boxes. 3. Addressable Zone module Provide addressable single input monitor modules as required to accommodate existing zone wiring at fire alarm control panel locations. Addressable modules shall mount to single gang electrical boxes. h. Carbon Monoxide Detection 266100 ELECTRICAL Page 18 of 44 Project No. 01091 Proposed Renovations March 6, 2009 Park House Smith College, Northampton, MA Provide smoke detector duct housing assemblies to mount an analog/ addressable detector along with a standard, relay or isolator detector mounting base. The housing shall also protect the measuring chamber from damage and insects. The housing shall utilize an air exhaust tube and an air sampling inlet tube that extends into the duct air stream up to ten feet. Drilling templates and gaskets to facilitate locating and mounting the housing shall also be provided. The housing shall be finished in baked red enamel. Remote alarm LED indicators and remote test stations shall be provided. b. Smoke Detector - Photoelectric Provide analog/addressable photoelectric smoke detectors at the locations shown on the drawings. The detector shall have the ability to set the sensitivity and alarm verification of each of the individual detectors on the circuit. It shall be possible to automatically change the sensitivity of individual analog/addressable detectors for the day and night periods. Each smoke detector shall be capable of transmitting pre- alarm and alarm signals in addition to the normal, trouble and need cleaning information. It shall be possible to program control panel activity to each level. Each smoke detector may be individually programmed to operate at any one of five (5) sensitivity settings. Each detector microprocessor shall contain an environmental compensation algorithm that identifies and sets ambient environmental thresholds approximately six times an hour. The microprocessor shall monitor the environmental compensation value and alert the system operator when the detector approaches 75% and 100% of the allowable environmental compensation value. C. Heat Detectors - Fixed Temperature - ROR Heat Detector Provide analog/addressable combination fixed temperature / rate-of- rise detectors at the locations shown on the drawings. The heat detector shall have a nominal fixed temperature alarm point rating of 135°F (57°C) and a rate of rise alarm point of 15°F (9°C) per minute. The heat detector shall be rated for ceiling installation at a minimum of 70 ft (21 .3m) centers and be suitable for wall mount applications. d. Detector Base - Standard Provide standard detector mounting bases suitable for mounting on either North American 1-gang, 3 %Z or 4 inch octagon box and 4 inch square box, or European BESA or 1 gang box. The base shall, contain no electronics and support all series detector types. 266100 ELECTRICAL Page 17 of 44 Project No. 01091 Proposed Renovations March 6, 2009 Park House Smith College, Northampton, MA a silencing of the audible signal. E. Field Mounted System Components 1 . Power Supply System power supply(s) shall provide multiple power limited 24 VDC output circuits as required by the panel. Upon failure of normal (AC) power, the effected portion(s) of the system shall automatically switch over to secondary power without losing any system functions. Each system power supply shall be individually supervised. Power supply trouble signals shall identify the specific supply and the nature of the trouble condition. All standby batteries shall be continuously monitored by the power supply. Low battery and disconnection of battery power supply conditions shall immediately annunciated as battery trouble and identify the specific power supply affected. All system power supplies shall be capable of recharging their associated batteries, from a fully discharged condition to a capacity sufficient to allow the system to perform consistent with the requirements of this section, in 48 hours maximum. -* ► All AC power connections shall be to the buildings designated emergency electrical power circuit and shall meet the requirements of NFPA 72 - The AC power circuit shall be installed in conduit raceway. The power circuit disconnect means shall be clearly labeled FIRE ALARM CIRCUIT CONTROL and shall have a red marking. The location of the circuit disconnect shall be labeled permanently inside the each control panel the disconnect serves. 2. Fire Initiating Devices Intelligent System Devices: Provide intelligent analog devices where shown and required. Each device shall retain operating characteristics in non-volatile memory and conduct algorithms to distinguish real fire conditions from unwanted nuisance alarms. All analog devices shall provide dual LED indicators, a green LED shall flash to denote active communication, and a red LED shall flash to denote an alarm condition. Devices shall be interchangeable with twist-lock bases which will provide a supervised remote LED output, fault isolation circuitry, or an auxiliary relay contact. In the event of an addressable loop communications failure, devices shall remain capable of initiating an alarm sequence. a. Duct Detector Housing 266100 ELECTRICAL Page 16 of 44 Project No. 01091 Proposed Renovations March 6, 2009 Park House Smith College, Northampton, MA Public Safety. D. General Requirements 1 . The fire alarm system shall be designed and UL and FM approved for Fire, Audio Evacuation and Security applications. The system operational characteristics shall be stored in non-volatile EEPROM memory, shall be field programmable and capable of being edited with no factory involvement. 2. The system shall utilize broadcast polling techniques and microprocessor-based detectors to minimize the required response time and possible false alarms. Individual initiating and control devices shall retain pre-programmed response characteristics, history logging, and support electronic addressing. A system-wide response (alarm sequence) to an alarm condition shall take place within 3 seconds. 3. The system shall support analog sensing techniques to monitor individual devices which enable the user to set sensitivity parameters. All inputs shall be subject to multi-level alarm verification. The system shall be capable of reporting the status and sensitivity of each device and vectoring this information to a printer. The system shall automatically identify any detector which becomes dirty (maintenance alert), prior to false alarming. 4. The system shall be supported by standby batteries. In the event of a loss of primary power, batteries shall support 24 hours of full supervisory operation followed by 15 minutes of alarm. 5. The system shall be capable of nine levels of alarm prioritization, and allow control by event, and may include cross zoning, stepping, and/or logic statement inputs. 6. All equipment shall be new and unused. All components and systems shall be designed for uninterrupted duty. All equipment, materials and accessories covered by these requirements shall be provided by a single manufacturer, or if provided by different manufacturers recognized as compatible by both manufacturers. 7. Circuiting Guidelines. Each initiating device and indicating circuit: shall be electronically supervised and individually addressable. All wiring shall be as follows: a. Individual addressable modules shall be used to monitor waterflow, tamper, and status conditions from any related systems or conventional devices. b. Addressable interface modules or relays shall provide auxiliary control functions. C. Addressable loop wiring shall support all devices shown and allow for a minimum of 25% spare capacity and be wired in a Class B, Style 4 fashion. d. As a minimum, power supplies and notification appliance circuits shall operate all devices shown plus 25% spare capacity, and be wired in a Class B, Style Y fashion. e. Audible and visual signals shall be circuited separately to AM allow continued operation of the visual signal in the event of 266100 ELECTRICAL Page 15 of 44 now Project No. 01091 Proposed Renovations March 6, 2009 Park House Smith College, Northampton, MA a. All of the information submitted in the shop drawings. b. As-built documentation which incorporates all modifications to the system, whether made as a field change or by a change order. C. Include a copy of the final test report, UL certificate and test contract. 14. Three 100% test are to preformed (Vendor, Vendor and Engineer, and Vendor,Engineer and Fire Department). Test areas will be coordinated with the Fire Department to determine initial layout will perform. 15. Signage and labels shall comply with MEC, NFPA 72, and the NFD checklist. 16. CO Detection shall be interlocked with the Fire Alarm Control panel and designed to activate in accordance with requirements set forth by authority having jurisdiction. Additional data line shall be provided by Smith College to accommodate signaling requirements of CO detection alarm. C. Sequence of Operation 1 . The operation of a manual station or activation of any automatic alarm initiating device (system smoke, heat, water flow, Duct Smoke) shall automatically: a. Initiate the transmission of the alarm to Smith College Public , Safety via data transmission to Campus monitoring system. b. Sound evacuation signal over all audio circuits. C. Flash all visual signals throughout the building in a synchronized manner. d. Flash an alarm LED and sound an audible signal at the FACP. Upon Acknowledgment, the alarm LED shall light steadily and the audible shall silence. Subsequent alarms shall re-initiate this sequence. e. Visually indicate the alarm initiating device type and location via the LCD display located at the FACP and at any remote annunciators. f. Automatically shut down or control HVAC equipment to initiate smoke control functions as required. Manual override controls and programmable relays shall serve as an interface to the Building Automation System. g. Operate prioritized outputs to release all magnetically held smoke doors and magnetically locked doors throughout the building. h. Activate the red exterior weatherproof beacon. i. Activation of a Duct-smoke will shut-down the corresponding HVAC unit where applicable. j. Activation of a Tamper Switch will send a Supervisory Trouble to Public Safety. k. Activation of Carbon Monoxide detection shall ring locally, in addition, activation will send a Supervisory Trouble to 266100 ELECTRICAL Page 14 of 44 Project No. 0 109 1 Proposed Renovations March 6, 2009 Park House Smith College, Northampton, MA quality and performance of the equipment and matches campus standard. Equal system in all respects and fully integratable to the campus system as provided by Edwards System Technologies may be considered. 9. The system design and installation shall conform to the following standards: a. All equipment shall be UL listed for it's intended purpose. b. NFPA standards 70, 72, 90A, 92A, and 101 . C. Current State Building Code. d. The Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA). e. All requirements of all local authorities having jurisdiction. f. Contractor will adhere to the requirements of the Northampton Fire Departments checklist and guidelines. 10. Submit 8 complete sets of shop drawings to include: a. Complete point-to-point riser diagram showing all equipment and size, type and number of all conductors and devices. b. Large scale drawings of each panel showing module placement and spare capacity allowances. C. Address listing of all field devices shown on floor plans for coordination of LCD message text assignments. d. Original catalog data sheets for all items to assure compliance with these specifications. This equipment shall be subject to approval, and no equipment shall be ordered without prior approval. e. Provide calculations to support the size of standby batteries notification circuits and power supplies submitted. Calculations shall demonstrate proper current draw, voltage drop, wire size considerations, and spare capacity allowances. f. Confirmation that the equipment supplier, Simplex, will provide on-site project management and supervision during system installation, and perform system testing and instruction as well as interface to existing Campus system. g. Contractor will adhere to the requirements of the Northampton Fire Departments checklist and guidelines. 11 . Conform to all UL standards for testing and provide certification of the completed installation. Provide the services of a factory trained technician for proper testing and operation of the inter-connect for Campus monitoring. 12. The equipment supplier shall conduct the initial programming of the system and a complete rack/test of hardware panels prior to delivery to the installing contractor. 13. Provide copies of Operating & Maintenance manuals with the request for final inspection. 0 & M Manuals shall include the following: 266100 ELECTRICAL Page 13 of 44 Project No. 01091 Proposed Renovations March 6, 2009 Park House Smith College, Northampton, MA PDT-V with passive infrared detection and Microphonic detection or approved equal. Wall type shall be Sensor Switch WSD-PDT-SA-V where semi-automatic is specified. 14. Ceiling type, single control, single pole, line voltage Occupancy Sensors to be Sensor Switch CMR-PDT with passive infrared detection and Microphonic detection or approved equal. 15. Ceiling type, multiple location, low voltage Occupancy Sensors to be Sensor Switch CM-PDT with passive infrared detection and Microphonic detection or approved equal. Power pack to be Sensor Switch PP-20 or approved equal. 16. Wall plates shall be smooth Type 302 satin finish stainless steel with matching screws. 2.7 FIRE ALARM SYSTEM A. Scope 1 . Install new analog/addressable fire detection, alarm and control system in compliance with the specifications and drawings. The system shall interface to other building systems to conduct monitoring and control functions as described herein. 2. The fire alarm control panel shall be a microprocessor based fire alarm system. New peripheral devices shall be integrated to utilize the existing digital communication lines. Add addressable interface modules as required to accommodate existing devices to remain. 3. Each initiating device shall have full analog detection capabilities; will maintain operating characteristics stored in dedicated EEPROM memory, identify its' exact location, and shall operate as described elsewhere in these specifications. 4. Work in this section, as shown or specified, shall be in accordance with the related contract documents. 5. All exceptions, variances and substitutions of operating capabilities or equipment called for in these specifications shall be listed in writing and forwarded to the Engineer at the time of bid. 6. Provide automatic and manual, closed circuit, multiplex fire alarm communications according to the contract documents, wired, connected and left in first class operating condition. 7. Final connections, testing, and adjusting of the system shall be done under the direct supervision of the system supplier. Provide NICET certified and factory trained technicians to demonstrate the system to the satisfaction of the Owner's Representative, and make all additional adjustments to the system operation as required by the Owner's Representative. a. Provide a NICET certified technician factory trained on Simplex's systems for proper operation and interconnect to Campus monitoring system. 8. Provide equipment manufactured by Simplex. This constitutes the 266100 ELECTRICAL Page 12 of 44 Project No. 01091 Proposed Renovations March 6, 2009 Park House Smith College, Northampton, MA 1. Outlet boxes and covers shall be as manufactured by Steel City electrical Company, General Electric Company, Raco, or approved equal. 2.5 NAMEPLATES A. Furnish and install nameplates identifying all apparatus, controls, panels and safety switches. The nameplates shall be Seton style 2060 engraved plastic, or equal, screw attached. Submit schedule of nameplate lettering for approval. 2.6 WIRING DEVICES A. The Electrical Contractor shall install devices where shown on the plans. Where two or more devices occur at one location, they shall be provided with a gang plate. All unused boxes to be furnished with blank plates. 1 . Duplex Receptacles - 20 amp, 125 volt with grounding screw, side and back wired. To be Leviton Cat. No. 53521, or equal. 2. Ground fault interrupting receptacles shall be Leviton Cat. No. 6898HG1, or equal. 3. Weatherproof cover for receptacles shall be lockable, vertical, UL Listed, with Lexan base and lid, 4 screw attachment, Tay Mac Cat, No. 20350, or equal. 4. Duplex receptacles, isolated ground - 20 A, 125 V, side and back wired, Leviton Cat. No. 53621G, or equal. 5. Light Switches, Single Pole - 20 amp, 120/277 volt, back and side wired, Leviton Cat. No. 12212, or equal. 6. Light Switches, 3 Way - 20 amp, 120/277 volt, back and side wired;, Leviton Cat. No. 12232, or equal. 7. Light Switches, 4 Way - 20 amp, 120/277 volt, back and side wired„ Leviton Cat. No. 12242, or equal. 8. Switch and Pilot Light - 20 amp, 120 volt, side and back wired, red handle, Leviton Cat. No. 1221 PLR, or equal. 9. Double pole switch - 20 amp, 120/277 volt, back and side wired, Leviton Cat. No. 12222, or equal. 10. Key operated switches shall be of the same grade and rating as specified for toggle switches. 11 . Power receptacles shall be flush type, of NEMA configuration shown, with matching cord and cap, Leviton, or equal, as follows: a. Type "50" - 50 amp, 125/250 volt, 3 pole, 4 wire, Leviton Cat. No. 279. b. Type "30" - 30 amp, 125/250 volt, 3 pole, 4 wire, Leviton Cat. No. 278. 12. Carbon Monoxide detectors shall be Macurco CM-1 5A SPDT alarm relay for F/A system interconnection and visual and audiable alarm. 13. Wall type single pole Occupancy sensors to be Sensor Switch WSD-- 266100 ELECTRICAL Page 1 1 of 44 Project No. 01091 Proposed Renovations March 6, 2009 Park House Smith College, Northampton, MA B. Conductors #10 AWG and smaller, Type THWN, solid. ' C. Conductors #4 AWG through #8 AWG, Type THWN, stranded. D. Conductors #3 AWG and larger, Type THW, stranded. E. Branch circuit wiring located above lay in tile ceilings or fished in stud partitions and ceilings may be Type MC cable; single and multi-circuit home runs shall be raceway and wire as specified. F. Wire and cable for special systems shall be as specified in those specification sections. G. Wire and Cable to be by Cerro, Southwire, Triangle/PWC, or equal. 2.4 OUTLET AND JUNCTION BOXES A. Outlet boxes and covers shall be galvanized or sheradized pressed steel unless otherwise noted or required by the Massachusetts Electrical Code, and shall be as required for their use. B. Junction and outlet boxes, where exposed to weather and wet locations shall be of the cast aluminum, threaded hub type and provided with watertight screw-on cover and gasket. C. Outlet boxes shall be of sizes and types to accommodate: I . structural conditions. 2. size and number of raceways and conductors or cables entering. 3. device of fixture for which required. D. Boxes occurring at plastered surfaces shall have a suitable plaster ring installed. E. Where multiple devices are located at one point, gang type boxes shall be used. F. Pull and junction boxes, whether surface or flush, shall be galvanized code gauge. G. Pull boxes and wireways shall be standard NEMA-1 enclosures with cover plates and screws, bonderized paint finished. H. Pull and splice boxes not indicated on the Drawings shall be provided as required by the Massachusetts Electrical Codes. 266100 ELECTRICAL Page 10 of 44 Project No. 01091 Proposed Renovations March 6, 2009 Park House Smith College, Northampton, MA 4. ALTERNATE NUMBER 4: Reduce the work of replacing all existing sprinkler heads. 5. ALTERNATE NUMBER 5: Furnish and install a new solar domestic hot water heating system. PART 2 - MATERIALS 2.1 RACEWAYS A. Rigid galvanized steel or intermediate steel conduit shall be used for all raceway runs concealed in concrete, run under slabs, run in trenches or pits, exposed below 6' above floor, and for service entrance conductor sweeps. Conduit shall comply with the latest applicable Federal Specifications. B. Electrical metallic tubing may be used for all raceways run in walls or partitions, run exposed inside the building, or run concealed in or above furred spaces unless otherwise specified above. Electrical metallic tubing shall comply with the latest applicable requirements of the National Electrical Manufacturers Association. Couplings, connectors, and fittings for electrical metallic tubing shall be of steel construction, set screw type. C. Raceways for site communications and site power and light shall be Schedule 40 PVC with solvent welded fittings, or Type EB where shown to be encased in concrete. Use steel sweeps on conduit 3" and larger. D. Flexible Steel Conduit shall be used for final connections to motors or other removable equipment to facilitate removal and connections. 2.2 WIREWAYS A. Wireways shall be made to accommodate conductors as required in accordance with applicable rules of the Massachusetts Electrical Code. To be of code gauge steel and supported as required by Code. Wireways shall be furnished and installed complete with the necessary complement of fittings, connectors, and accessory parts. Wireways shall be of the "lay-in" type with standard knockouts and with screw covers for full channel access. All sheet metal parts shall be coated with a rust inhibitor and finished in grey baked enamel. All hardware shall be plated to prevent corrosion. 2.3 CONDUCTORS A. Conductors shall be 98% conductivity copper, with 600 volt insulation, and shall be of types indicated below unless otherwise shown on the plans. l"' Aluminum conductors shall not be used. 266100 ELECTRICAL Page 9 of 44 Project No. 01091 Proposed Renovations March 6, 2009 Park House Smith College, Northampton, MA Cutting and/or drilling of structural supports (ie. beams or joists) is not allowed without written approval by the Architect. Location for openings, etc. shall be checked by the Electrical Contractor, and error due to failure to co-ordinate work with other divisions shall be the responsibility of the Electrical Contractor failing to co-ordinate, who shall make the corrections at his own expense. B. Work shall include furnishing and locating sleeves or inserts required before the new walls are built, or be responsible for the cost of cutting and patching required for conduit and equipment where sleeves were not installed or where incorrectly located. The Electrical Contractor shall do all drilling required for the installation of hangers. C. Patching of all holes, after installation of piping or equipment, shall be performed by the General Contractor or appropriate tradesmen. D. All pipe cutting or threading shall be done in a location approved by the Owner. E. No pipe cutting or threading shall be done in areas where completed concrete floor slab is to remain in finishes or be painted later. Should this area be necessary, the Electrical Contractor shall cover the entire working area with canvas tarpaulins in an approved manner. 1 .18 RECORD DRAWINGS A. Submit Record Drawings as specified in Division 1 . 1 .19 ALTERNATE BIDS A. See Section 01230 for a general description of the Base and Alternate Bids. Work of the Electrical Subcontractor is more specifically described below. B. The Base Bid shall be the lump sum price for all labor and materials necessary for and reasonably incidental to providing all Electrical work specified and shown on the Drawings, less the cost of all extra work described in the Alternates. C. Schedule of Alternates 1 . ALTERNATE NUMBER 1 : Deduct the Work of the Contract to construct the new handicapped ramp at the front entrance 2. ALTERNATE NUMBER 2: Deduct the Work of the Contract to furnish and install the makeup air unit MAU-1 and all associated piping, controls, power, wire, and sheet metal. 3. ALTERNATE NUMBER 3: Reduce the work required to construct Room 313, maintain the heat, and sprinkler protection. 266100 ELECTRICAL Page 8 of 44 Project No. 01091 Proposed Renovations March 6, 2009 Park House Smith College, Northampton, MA length of time to assure that Owner's representative is properly qualified to take over operation and maintenance procedures. B. Furnish the Architect, for his approval, three (3) copies of an Operation and Maintenance Manual. Inscribe the following identification on the cover: the words, "Operation and Maintenance Manual", the name and location of the equipment or the building, the name of the Contractor, and the Contract number. The manual shall have a Table of Contents with tab sheets placed before each Section. The instructions shall be legible and easily read, with large sheets of Drawings folded in. The manuals shall be bound in hard binders or an approved equivalent. C. The manual shall include the following information: 1 Description of systems. 2. Description of start up, operation, and shutdown procedures for each item of equipment. 3. Schedule of adjustment, care, and routine maintenance for each item of equipment. 4. Wiring and control diagrams with data to explain detailed operation and control of each item of equipment. 5. Panel schedules 6. List of recommended spare parts. 7. Copies of all service contracts. 8. List of all names, addresses, and phone numbers of all Contractors as well as the local representative for each item of equipment. 1 .16 GUARANTEE A. The Electrical Contractor shall guarantee the satisfactory operation of his work in all parts for a period of one (1) year after date of final acceptance, and shall agree to promptly repair or replace any items of his, work which are found to be defective during this period. B. The Electrical Contractor shall pay for repair of damage to the building caused by defects in his work and for repair to plaster, wood, and other materials or equipment caused by replacement or repairs to the entire satisfaction of the Architect. C. Any part of the work installed under this Contract requiring excessive maintenance shall be considered as being defective. 1 .17 CUTTING AND PATCHING A. Cutting and/or drilling of all openings and holes required for the installation of electrical apparatus in the building, shall be performed by the General Contractor. All work and materials shall be installed in such a manner and at such time to keep cutting and patching to a minimum. 266100 ELECTRICAL Page 7 of 44 Project No. 01091 Proposed Renovations March 6, 2009 Park House Smith College, Northampton, MA implied thereon is to be considered a part of the Contract requirements. B. The Specifications are complementary and anything called for, or reasonably implied, in the Plans and not in the Specifications, or vice versa, shall be considered as called for or reasonably implied in both. C. The Electrical Contractor shall not scale the Drawings. D. Because of the small scale of the Drawings, it is not possible to indicate all offsets, fittings and accessories that may be required. The Electrical Contractor shall carefully investigate the structural and finish conditions affecting all his work and shall arrange such work accordingly, furnishing such accessories as may be required to meet such conditions, at no additional cost. 1 .12 PRODUCT HANDLING A. The Electrical Contractor shall provide for the delivery of all his materials and fixtures to the building site when required, so as to carry on his work efficiently and to avoid delaying his work and that of other trades. 1 .13 ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS A. All necessary tools machinery, scaffolding, and transportation for completion of his Contract shall be provided by the individual Contractor. ` B. The Electrical Contractor shall provide his own portable extension lines and obtain 120 volt, 60 cycle, single phase electric energy from the General Contractor to drive his machines and light his work. He shall provide his own light bulbs, plugs, sockets, etc. C. All broken or waste material, rags, packing, etc., resulting from his work shall be removed by the individual Contractor. 1 .14 WORK CONCEALED A. All piping, duct work, cable, and raceway shall be installed concealed in all areas except storage rooms, closets, and mechanical or electrical equipment rooms. B. Exposed runs shall be run straight and level, parallel or perpendicular to the lines of the building. 1 .15 OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS A. After all final tests and adjustments have been completed, fully instruct the proper Owner's representative in all details of operation for equipment installed. Supply qualified personnel to operate equipment for sufficient 266100 ELECTRICAL Page 6 of 44 Project No. 01091 Proposed Renovations March 6, 2009 Park House Smith College, Northampton, MA submit to the Architect six (6) sets of catalogue cuts, manufacturers' data AVW sheets, or Shop Drawings, giving all details, dimensions, capacities, etc. of all materials to be furnished. B. The Electrical Contractor shall check the Shop Drawings thoroughly for compliance with the Plans and Specifications before submitting them to the Architect for review, making any and all changes which may be required. C. The review of Shop Drawings by the Architect shall not relieve the Electrical Contractor from any obligation to perform the work strictly in accordance with the Contract Drawings and Specifications. The responsibility for errors in Shop Drawings shall remain with the Contractor. D. In the event that materials are being delivered to or installed on the job for which Shop Drawings or samples have not been approved and/or which are not in accordance with the Specifications, the Electrical Contractor will be required to remove such materials and substitute approved materials at his own expense and as directed by the Architect. 1 .8 PERMITS, FEES, AND INSPECTIONS A. The Electrical Contractor shall secure all permits and pay all fees required for his work. He shall be required to secure all other permits and pay all other fees and charges incidental to the proper carrying out of the Contract. He is to assume all responsibility regarding the observance of the rules and regulations so far as they relate to his part of the work. B. The Electrical Contractor shall arrange and pay for all required inspections of his work. 1 .9 TEMPORARY HOOK-UPS A. The General Contractor will provide any temporary hook-ups required for the use of water or sanitary for construction purposes and testing out apparatus as specified in Division 1 . 1 .10 TEMPORARY LIGHT AND POWER A. The General Contractor will furnish and install temporary light and power as specified in Division 1 . 1 .11 PLANS AND SPECIFICATIONS A. The Electrical Contractor shall refer to the Architectural Drawings of interior details, plans, elevations, and structural layout in preparing his estimate. These documents are intended to supplement the Mechanical AVW and Electrical Plans and Specifications and any applicable work indicated or 266100 ELECTRICAL Page 5 of 44 Project No. 01091 Proposed Renovations March 6, 2009 Park House Smith College, Northampton, MA G. The Electrical Contractor shall be responsible for the proper protection of his work and materials from injury or loss at the hands of others and shall make good such loss or injury at his own expense. All pipes left open during the progress of the work shall be capped or plugged at all times. All instruments and operating apparatus shall be protected by suitable means. H. The Electrical Contractor shall be responsible for all equipment and materials installed under this Section until the final acceptance of the project by the Owner. I. Before submitting his bid, the Electrical Contractor shall visit the site with the Drawings and Specifications and shall become thoroughly familiar with all conditions affecting his work since the Electrical Contractor will be held responsible for any assumption he may make in regard thereto. I The Electrical Contractor shall check the Architectural Plans and Specifications before ordering any materials and the installation of work. Any discrepancies shall be called to the attention of the Architect before proceeding with the work. 1 .5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Equality of materials or articles other than those named or described in this Section will be determined in accordance with the provisions of the General Requirements, except that substitutions will only be considered for items where the words, "or equal" appear in product specifications and as approved by the Architect and Owner. B. The Electrical Contractor shall agree to accept as final the results of tests secured by a qualified testing laboratory engaged by the Owner. Tests will be conducted in accordance with the General Requirements. 1 .6 PRODUCTS A. With the exception of items specifically noted other-wise, all materials used shall be U.S. made, new, full weight, and first class in every respect, without defects, and designed to function properly in that portion of the work for which they are intended, and with the same brand of manufacturers for each class of material or equipment. Electrical materials and equipment of types for which there are Underwriters Laboratories standard requirements, listings, or labels shall conform to their requirements and be so labeled. 1 .7 SUBMITTALS A. Before ordering materials shipped to the job, the Electrical Contractor shall 266100 ELECTRICAL Page 4 of 44 Project No. 01091 Proposed Renovations March 6, 2009 Park House Smith College, Northampton, MA B. The Electrical Contractor shall comply with the Local Code Enforcement Officials' instructions at no additional cost to the Owner. 1 .4 INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS A. The Electrical Contractor shall employ only competent and experienced workmen at a regular schedule in harmony with the other tradesmen on the job. He shall also exercise care and supervision of his employees in regard to proper and expeditious laying out of his work. B. The Electrical Contractor shall have a Foreman or Superintendent assigned to the Project who shall be authorized to make decisions and receive instructions exactly as if the Electrical Contractor himself were present. The Foreman or Superintendent shall not be removed or replaced without the express approval of the Architect after construction work begins. C. The Electrical Contractor shall be held responsible for any injuries or damage done to the building premises or adjoining property or to other Contractors' work resulting from the execution of his part of the work in any manner whatsoever; and in case of dispute arising as to the extent or share of responsibility incurred by the Electrical Contractor, it is agreed between the Owner and the Electrical Contractor that such liability and extent of damage shall be finally determined by the Architect whose decision shall be final and binding on both parties to the Contract for the work in question. D. The Electrical Contractor shall co-operate to the fullest extent with all other trades in order to expedite the progress of the work. He shall furnish all information pertaining to his materials as to sizes, locations, and means of support, to all other trades requiring such information. The Electrical Contractor shall also furnish all sleeves, frames, beams, supports, inserts, etc., hereinafter specified so that the General Contractor may build them in place. In case of failure on the part of the Electrical Contractor to give proper information as above, he will be required to bear the extra expense involved due to such failure. E. The arrangement of all piping, duct work, conduit, wire and cable indicated on the Drawings is diagrammatic only, and indicates the minimum requirements of this work. Conditions at the building shall determine the actual arrangement of runs, bends, offsets, etc. The Electrical Contractor shall lay out all his work and be responsible for the accuracy thereof. Conditions at the building shall be the determining factor for all measurements. F. All work shall be laid out and installed so as to require the least amount of cutting and patching. Drilling of all holes required for the installation of pipes, conduit, and cable runs shall be performed by the Electrical Contractor installing such items. 266100 ELECTRICAL Page 3 of 44 Project No. 01091 Proposed Renovations March 6, 2009 Park House Smith College, Northampton, MA SECTION 266100 - ELECTRICAL PART 1 - GENERAL 1 .1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Include General Conditions, Supplementary General Conditions, and applicable parts of Division 1 , as part of this Section. B. Examine all other Sections of the Specifications for requirements which affect work under this Section whether or not such work is specifically mentioned in this Section. C. Co-ordinate work with that of all other trades affecting, or affected by the work of this Section. Co-operate with such trades to assure steady progress of all work under the Contract. 1 .2 SCOPE OF WORK A. Furnish all labor, materials, plant, equipment and services necessary for and reasonably incidental to the complete installation of all electrical work specified herein and/or indicated on the Drawings, including, but not limited to, the following: 1 . Complete Upgrade of the Fire Alarm System & Multi-station detectors 2. Branch Circuit Wiring and Conduit. 3. Wiring devices and plates. 4. Power wiring to motors and equipment furnished by other trades or Owner including final connections to equipment. 5. Interface system with Campus fire alarm system. 6. Lighting fixtures, including exterior lights. 7. Egress Lighting & exit signs. 8. Siesmic. 9. Telecommunications systems remove and reinstallation. 10.Feeders 11 .New Panelboard 1 .3 CODES, ORDINANCES AND INSPECTIONS A. All materials and the installation thereof shall conform to the requirements of the Massachusetts State Building Code, Massachusetts Electrical Code, and local laws, rules, regulations, and codes pertaining thereto. Where provisions of the Contract Documents conflict with any codes, rules or regulations, the latter shall govern. Where the Contract requirements are in excess of applicable codes, rules or regulations, the Contract provisions shall govern unless the Architect rules otherwise. 266100 ELECTRICAL Page 2 of 44 Project No. 01091 Proposed Renovations March 6, 2009 Park House Smith College, Northampton, MA � INDEX SECT/ON 2667 00 - ELECTR ICAL PART 1 - GENERAL PART 3 - INSTALLATION 1 .1 RELATED DOCUMENTS 3.1 GENERAL INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS 1 .2 SCOPE OF WORK 3.2 GROUNDING 1 .3 CODES, ORDINANCES AND 3.3 CONDUIT AND FITTINGS INSPECTIONS 3.4 OUTLET AND JUNCTION BOXES 1 .4 INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS 3.5 EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION 1 .5 QUALITY ASSURANCE 3.6 TESTING 1 .6 PRODUCTS 3.7 FIRE SAFING 1 .7 SUBMITTALS 1 .8 PERMITS, FEES AND INSPECTIONS 1 .9 TEMPORARY HOOK-UPS 1 .10 TEMPORARY LIGHT AND POWER 1 .11 PLANS AND SPECIFICATIONS 1 .12 PRODUCT HANDLING 1 .13 ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS 1 .14 WORK CONCEALED 1 .15 OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS 1 .16 GUARANTEE 1 .17 CUTTING AND PATCHING 1 .18 RECORD DRAWINGS 1 .19 ALTERNATE BIDS PART 2 - MATERIALS 2.1 RACEWAYS 2.2 W I REWAYS 2.3 CONDUCTORS 2.4 OUTLET AND JUNCTION BOXES 2.5 NAMEPLATES 2.6 WIRING DEVICES 2.7 FIRE ALARM SYSTEM 2.8 LIGHTING FIXTURES 2.9 MOTOR STARTERS AND DISCONNECT SWITCHES 2.10 PANEL BOARDS 2.11 TELECOM UNICATIONS SYSTEM 2.12 CABLE TELEVISION SYSTEM 2.13 VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROL 266100 ELECTRICAL Page 1 of 44 Project No. 01091 Proposed Renovations March 6, 2009 Park House Smith College, Northampton, MA A. Work Included: Provide labor, materials, and equipment necessary to complete the work including, but not limited to the following: 1 . Fire safing at all penetrations through fire barriers. 2. Fire safing at all penetrations through smoke barriers. 3. Extent of fire and smoke barriers as indicated on the Architectural Drawings. 4. Fire safing at all penetrations through floors, shafts, corridor walls, stairway walls, mechanical rooms, electrical rooms, vaults, storage rooms, kitchen, machine rooms, outdoor storage rooms, and receiving rooms. B. Safing Insulation 1 . Fire safing insulation shall be Thermafiber as manufactured by USG Interiors, Inc. or Architect-Engineer approved equal, 4" minimum thickness by the required full length and width, or as indicated on the Drawings. 2. Provide incidental galvanized steel clip anchors. C. Seal Compound: At "poke-through" openings, apply "Firecode" seal compound as manufactured by USG Interiors, Inc., or approved equal, over Thermafiber fire safing. D. Preparation 1 . At all fire rated assemblies, prepare all penetrations for pipes. E. Application 1 . Install approved fire safing insulation of proper size leaving no voids. Compress and friction fit fire safing and use attachment clips where necessary. 2. Seal completely around all openings and over the fire safing insulation with sealing compound. END OF SECTION 235500 HEATING AND VENTILATING 72 of 72 Project No. 01091 Proposed Renovations March 6, 2009 Park House Smith College, Northampton, MA A. All piping, valves, controls and equipment on the project shall be identified as specified herein. All marks of identification shall be easily visible from the floor or usual point of vision. B. All piping shall be identified as to the service of the pipe and the normal direction of flow. The letters shall be 1" high and the flow arrows shall be at least 6" long. The letters and flow arrows shall be made by precut stencils and black oil base paint with aerosol can or snap-on, pre-printed plastic labels. Install identification in each room and, additionally, so that markers are not over 50 feet on center. C. Each valve, except run out valves, but including control valves, shall be tagged with a brass disc 1 -1 /2" in diameter. The disc shall contain a number, and a valve list shall be provided under glass in the Boiler Room showing the location of the valve, the service and the valve and any pertinent remarks regarding the operation of the valve. Securely fasten the discs to the valves with brass "S" hooks or chains. D. All panel mounted controls and instruments, and all equipment shall be identified by engraved nameplates mounted just under the control or instrument. The engraved nameplates shall be engraved on "Lamacoid", or approved equal plastic, which will be black and show white letters when engraved. Letters shall be 1 /2" high. E. No identification shall be done until all painting required under the Architectural section of these Specifications has been accomplished. 3.11 SPARE PARTS A. Filters: Each air handling unit and cabinet type unit heaters shall be provided with three (3) extra sets of filters for each unit. One (1) set shall be installed by this Contractor after substantial completion is issued and the two (2) remaining sets shall be delivered to the Owner. B. Cabinet Unit Motors: This Contractor shall provide one (1) spare fan coil unit motor for each size installed on the project. Spare motors shall be delivered to the Owner. C. Fan Belts: This Contractor shall provide one (1) spare fan belt of each size furnished. D. Furnish a typewritten certificate confirming the above and stating the Owner designated location to which the spare parts have been delivered. Delivery of parts shall be confirmed by the Owner's representative, who shall countersign the Certificate. 3.12 FIRE SAFING 235500 HEATING AND VENTILATING 71 of 72 Project No. 01091 Proposed Renovations March 6, 2009 Park House Smith College, Northampton, MA A. All pipe and duct insulation shall be installed by an independent insulation ` contractor regularly engaged in that business. B. Insulation shall not be omitted on piping in walls nor on branches running through radiator covers. Longitudinal seams on jackets shall be located so that they are not visible from the floor. Remove all stickers from covering. C. Insulation shall be applied over clean pipe with all joints butted firmly together and sealed with butt strips. Insulation shall run through all hangers, sleeves, and have an 18 gauge sheet metal saddle equal to three times the pipe diameter in length. All pipes over 2" in diameter shall be supported through insulation by fitting a protection saddle to the thickness of the insulation inside the vapor barrier jacket. D. All fittings, valves, etc. shall be insulated with the proper factory pre-cut insulation. The ends of the insulation shall be tucked snugly into the throat of the fitting and the edge adjacent to the pipe covering tufted and tucked into fully insulated pipe fitting. The one piece PVC fitting cover shall then be secured by taping the ends of the adjacent pipe covering. 3.8 EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION A. All equipment furnished under this Section shall be installed in accordance with its manufacturer's printed installation instructions, whether so shown .•�, on the Drawings or not, and all labor and materials required to accomplish this shall be furnished by the HVAC Contractor and be included in his bid. 3.9 SYSTEM TESTS AND CLEAN-UP A. The entire Heating and Ventilating system shall be tested at completion of the building, and it shall be established that all controls are calibrated accurately and performing satisfactorily and that all units are heating and ventilating satisfactorily. The systems shall be checked for vibration and excessive noise and all such conditions corrected. B. At the completion of all work, all equipment on the project shall be checked and thoroughly cleaned including coils, plenums, under equipment and any and all other areas around or in equipment provided under this Section. Any filters used during construction shall be replaced with new filters during final clean-up. C. At the completion of all work, all equipment on the project shall be checked for painting damage, and any factory finished paint that has been damaged shall be repaired to match the adjacent areas. D. Any metal or especially covered areas that have been deformed shall be replaced with new material and repainted to match the adjacent areas. 3.10 IDENTIFICATION 235500 HEATING AND VENTILATING 70 of 72 Project No. 01091 Proposed Renovations March 6, 2009 Park House Smith College, Northampton, MA valve, fitting, joint, or section that is leaking and reinstalling new material with joints as specified herein before. 3.5 CLEANING AND FLUSHING A. All water circulating systems for the project shall be thoroughly cleaned before placing in operation to rid the system of dirt, piping compound, m0l scale, oil, and any and all other material foreign to the water being circulated. Clean all strainers. B. Extreme care shall be exercised during construction to prevent all dirt and other foreign matter from entering the pipe or other parts of the system. Pipe stored on the project shall have the open ends capped and equipment shall have all openings fully protected. Before erection, each piece of pipe, fitting, or valve shall be visually examined and all dirt removed. C. After system is complete, the Heating & Ventilating Contractor shall add trisodium phosphate in an aqueous solution to the system at the proportion of one pound per fifty gallons of water in the system. After the system is filled with this solution, the system shall be brought up to temperature and allowed to circulate for two hours. The system shall then be drained completely and refilled with fresh water. The Engineer shall be given notice of this cleaning operation and he or his representative shall be present to observe the cleaning operation, and, if he deems it necessary, the cleaning operation shall be repeated. D. After the system has been completely cleaned as specified herein, it shall be tested by litmus paper or other dependable method and shall be left on the slightly alkaline side (ph = 7.5 plus or minus). If the system is found to be still on the acid side, the cleaning by the use of trisodium phosphate shall be repeated. E. The HVAC Contractor shall not add any water treatment chemicals, or at any time "stop-leak" compounds to the system. 3.6 WATER AND AIR FLOW BALANCE AND TESTS A. After completion of the installation of the heating, ventilating, and exhaust systems, and prior to acceptance by the Owner, all systems and appurtenances applicable to the above systems shall be adjusted and balanced to deliver the water and air quantities as specified, indicated on the Drawings, or as directed. B. Balancing shall be performed by an independent contractor hired directly by the Owner. 3.7 INSULATION 235500 HEATING AND VENTILATING 69 of 72 Project No. 01091 Proposed Renovations March 6, 2009 Park House Smith College, Northampton, MA F. Before any part of the various piping systems is placed in operation, blow out piping with compressed air and/or water to remove all chips and scale and flush and drain until all traces of dirt, scale and other foreign matter have disappeared. Refer to other sections for additional requirements. G. Vent all high points and drain all low points throughout the system. H. Connections and tie-ins to existing piping systems shall be coordinated with the Owner. The HVAC Contractor is responsible for draining, flushing, re-filling (adding glycol if required) and air removal of the existing system. System shall be fully restored and operational. 3.4 PIPING SYSTEM TESTS A. All piping installed on the project, unless specifically shown otherwise, shall be hydraulically tested as specified herein. The HVAC Contractor shall provide all equipment required to make the tests specified herein. Piping may be tested a section at a time in order to facilitate the construction. B. The HVAC Contractor shall fill the section of pipe to be tested with water and bring the section up to pressure with a test pump. These tests shall be conducted before any insulation is installed and any insulation installed prior to these tests shall be removed. Gauges used in the tests shall have been recently calibrated with a dead weight tester. C. Subject piping system to a hydrostatic test pressure which at every point in the system is not less than 1 .5 times the design pressure. The test pressure shall not exceed the maximum pressure for any vessel, pump, valve, or other component in the system under test. Make a check to verify that the stress due to pressure at the bottom of vertical runs does not exceed either 90% of specified minimum yield strength, or 1 .7 times the "SE" value in Appendix A of ASME B31 .9, Code for Pressure Piping, Building Services Piping. D. After the hydrostatic test pressure has been applied for at least 10 minutes, examine piping, joints, and connections for leakage. Eliminate leaks by tightening, repairing, or replacing components as appropriate, and repeat hydrostatic test until there are no leaks. E. After system has been determined to be leak-free, the Engineer shall be notified and the test shall be repeated in his or his representative's presence. F. When delicate control mechanisms are installed in the piping system, they shall be removed during the tests to prevent shock damage. This does not apply to control valves. G. Leaks developing subsequent to these tests shall not be repaired by mastic or other temporary means. All leaks shall be repaired by removal of the 235500 HEATING AND VENTILATING 68 of 72 Project No. 01091 Proposed Renovations March 6, 2009 Park House Smith College, Northampton, MA Air Handling Units and Centrifugal 1 , 4, 19 Internal Exhaust Fans Isolation Pumps - In-Line 23 PART 3 - INSTALLATION 3.1 CLEANING AIR SYSTEM A. No air handling units shall be run for temporary heating, ventilating, testing, or otherwise without filters in place and permission from the Owner. B. Upon completion of construction and before testing, the interior of all air handling units and plenums shall be vacuum cleaned to remove all construction dirt, dust, etc. before the units are turned on, and clean filters shall be installed. 3.2 CUTTING, PATCHING AND DRILLING A. All cutting, patching and drilling shall be by the General Contractor. 3.3 PIPE INSTALLATION A. All piping shall be run true and straight at proper pitch without strain and shall be firmly supported throughout. Provision for expansion and contraction shall be made with offsets or expansion loops. All pipe shall be cut off clean and threaded with sharp dies, reamed and burrs removed. B. Where screwed fittings are used, bushings shall not be used from branch connections or reducers. Connections to equipment shall be full size of tappings. Reductions in the run of pipe shall be made with eccentric or concentric reducers as required for draining and venting. C. All piping shall be run concealed throughout finished spaces either in furred spaces, shafts, chases, or above hung ceilings. D. Special care must be taken throughout the equipment rooms, vertical pipe shafts, above hung ceilings, and elsewhere throughout all floors to maintain maximum headroom and clearances for access to other equipment and to avoid conflict with electrical conduits, lighting fixtures, other piping, ducts, and equipment of other trades. E. Connections to equipment shall be made with unions or flanges to permit future replacement, removal and servicing of equipment. Flexible connections where required to isolate movement of equipment from piping system or of piping system from equipment, shall be as specified. 235500 HEATING AND VENTILATING 67 of 72 Project No. 01091 Proposed Renovations March 6, 2009 Park House Smith College, Northampton, MA equal to the maximum weight and dimensions of the duct for which bracing details are selected. 6. Walls, including gypsum board non-bearing partitions, which have ducts running through them, may replace a typical transverse brace. Provide channel framing around ducts and solid blocking between the duct and frame. P. All mechanical equipment shall be vibration isolated and seismically restrained as per the schedules in paragraph S of this Specification. Q. Seismic Restraint Exclusions: 1 . Piping: a. All piping less than 2-1 /2 in. in diameter except those listed below. b. All gas piping and medical gas piping less than 1 in. I.D. C. All piping in mechanical equipment rooms less than 1 -1 /4 in. 1.D. d. All clevis or trapeze supported piping suspended from hanger rods where the point of attachment is less than the 12 in. in length from the structure to the structural connection of the clevis or trapeze. e. All PVC and fiberglass suspended waste or vent pipe 6 in. in diameter and smaller. 2. Ductwork: a. Rectangular, square or oval ducts less than 6 sq. ft. in cross sectional area. b. Round duct less than 28 in. in diameter. C. Duct supported by hanger rods where the point of attachment is less than 12 in. in length from the structure to the structural connection of the duct work. R. Suspended Equipment: 1 . VAV boxes and fan powered equipment weighing less than 50 lbs. and rigidly connected to the supply side of the duct system and supported with a minimum of 4 hanger rods. S. Schedules: Vibration Isolation and / or Seismic Restraint Equipment Schedule Specification Static Deflection 235500 HEATING AND VENTILATING 66 of 72 Project No. 01091 Proposed Renovations March 6, 2009 Park House Smith College, Northampton, MA 7. Hold down clamps must be used to attach pipe to all trapeze members before applying restraints in a manner similar to clevis supports. 8. Branch lines may not be used to restrain main lines. 9. Cast-iron pipe of all types, glass pipe and any other pipes joined with a four band shield and clamp assembly in Zones 213, 3 and 4 shall be braced as in sections 3.02.C.2 and 3. For Zones 0, 1 and 2A, 2 band clamps may be used with reduced spacings of 1 /2 of those listed in sections 3.02.C2 and 3. N. Vibration Isolation of Ductwork: 1 . All discharge runs for a distance of 50' from the connected equipment shall be isolated from the building structure by means of Specification 10 hangers or Specification 5 floor isolators. Spring deflection shall be a minimum 0.75 in. 2. All duct runs having air velocity of 1000 fpm or more shall be isolated from the building structure by Specification 11 hangers or 5 floor supports. Spring deflection shall be a minimum of 0.75 in. O. Seismic Restraint of Ductwork: OOK 1 . Seismically restrain all duct work with Specification 12 or 13 restraints as listed below: a. Restrain rectangular ducts with cross sectional area of 6 sq. ft. or larger. b. Restrain round ducts with diameters of 28 in. or larger. C. Restrain flat oval ducts the same way as rectangular ducts of the same nominal size. 2. Transverse restraints shall occur at 30' intervals or at both ends of the duct run if less than the specified interval. Transverse restraints shall be installed at each duct turn and at each end of a duct run. 3. Longitudinal restraints shall occur at 60' intervals with at least one restraint per duct run. Transverse restraints for one duct section connected perpendicular to it if the restraints are installed within 4' of the intersection of the ducts and if the restraints are sized for the larger duct. Duct joints shall conform to SMACNA duct construction standards. 4. The ductwork must be reinforced at the restraint locations. Reinforcement shall consist of an additional angle on top of the ductwork that is attached to the support hanger rods. Ductwork is to be attached to both upper angle and lower trapeze. 5. A group of ducts may be combined in a larger frame so that the combined weights and dimensions of the ducts are less than or 235500 HEATING AND VENTILATING 65 of 72 Project No. 01091 Proposed Renovations March 6, 2009 Park House Smith College, Northampton, MA Specification 24 stainless steel hoses is 23 is not suitable for the service. 2. Riser Isolation: Risers shall be suspended from Specification 10 hangers or supported by Specification 5 mountings, anchored with Specification 25 anchors, and guided with Specification 26 sliding guides. Steel springs shall be a minimum of 0.75 in. except in those expansion locations where additional deflection is required to limit load changes to ± 25% of the initial load. Submittals must include riser diagrams and calculations showing anticipated expansion and contraction at each support point, initial and final changes and seismic loads. Submittal data shall include certification that the riser system has been examined for excessive stresses and that none will exist in the proposed design. M. Seismic Restraint of Piping: 1 . Seismically restrain all piping listed as a, b or c below. Use Specification 12 cables if isolated. Specification 12 or 13 restraints may be used on unisolated piping. a. Fuel oil piping, gas piping, medical gas piping, and compressed air piping that is 1 in. I.D. or larger. b. Piping located in Mechanical Rooms, mechanical equipment (fan) rooms, and refrigeration equipment rooms that are 1 -1 /4" I.D. and larger. C. All other piping 2-1 /2" diameter and larger. 2. Transverse piping restraints shall be at 40' maximum spacing for all pipe sizes, except where lesser spacing is required to limit anchorage loads. 3. Longitudinal restraints shall be at 80' maximum spacing for all pipe sizes, except where lesser spacing is required to limit anchorage loads. 4. Where thermal expansion is a consideration, guides and anchors may be used as transverse and longitudinal restraints provided they have a capacity equal to or greater than the restraint loads in addition to the loads induced by expansion or contraction. 5. For fuel oil and all gas piping transverse restraints must be at 20 ft. maximum and longitudinal restraints at 40 ft. maximum spacing. 6. Transverse restraint for one (1) pipe section may also act as a longitudinal restraint for a pipe section of the same size connected perpendicular to it if the restraint is installed within allowable limits at longer distances. 235500 HEATING AND VENTILATING 64 of 72 Project No. 01091 Proposed Renovations March 6, 2009 Park House Smith College, Northampton, MA 12. At locations where Specification 12 or 13 restraints are located, the support rods must be braced when necessary to accept compressive loads with Specification 14 braces. 13. At all locations where Specification 12 or 13 restraints are located, the support rods must be braced when necessary to accept compressive loads with Specification 14 braces. 14. Drill-in concrete anchors for ceiling and wall installation shall be Specification type 18, and Specification type 19 female wedge type for floor mounted equipment. 15. Vibration isolation manufacturer shall furnish integral structural steel bases as required. Independent steel rails are not permitted on this project. 16. Hand built elastomeric expansion joints may be used when pipe sizes exceed 24 in. or specified movements exceed Specification 23 capabilities. 17. Where piping passes through walls, floors or ceilings the vibration isolation manufacturer shall provide Specification 27 wall seals. 18. Air handling equipment and centrifugal fans shall be protected against excessive displacement which results from high air throughst in relation to the equipment weight:. Horizontal throughst restraint shall be Specification type 28 (see selection guide). 19. Locate isolation hangers as near to the overhead support structure as possible. L. Vibration Isolation of Piping: 1 . Horizontal Pipe Isolation: The first three (3) pipe hangers in the main lines near the mechanical equipment shall be as described in Specification 11 . Specification 11 hangers must also be used in all transverse braced isolated locations. Brace hanger rods with SRC clamps Specification 14. Horizontal runs in all other locations throughout the building shall be isolated by hangers as described in Specification 10. Floor supported piping shall rest on isolators as described in Specification 6. Heat exchangers and expansion tanks are considered part of the piping run. The first three (3) isolators from the isolated equipment will have the same static deflection as specified for the mountings under the connected equipment. If piping is connected to equipment located in basements and hangs from ceilings under occupied spaces the first three hangers shall have 0.75 in. deflection for pipe sizes up to and including 3 in., 1 -1 /2 in. deflection for pipe sizes up to and including 6 in., and 2-1 /2 in. deflection thereafter. Hangers shall be located as close to the overhead structure as practical. Where piping connects to mechanical equipment install Specification 23 flexible piping connection or 235500 HEATING AND VENTILATING 63 of 72 Project No. 01 091 Proposed Renovations March 6, 2009 Park House Smith College, Northampton, MA 1 . All vibration isolators and seismic restraint systems must be installed in strict accordance with the manufacturers written instruction and all certified submittal data. 2. Installation of vibration isolators and seismic restraints must not cause any change of position of equipment, piping or duct work resulting in stresses or misalignment. 3. No rigid connections between equipment and the building structure shall be made that degrades the noise and vibration control system herein specified. 4. The Contractor shall not install any equipment, piping, duct or conduit which makes rigid connections with the building unless isolation is not specified. "Building" includes, but is not limited to, slabs, beams, columns, studs and walls. 5. Coordinate work with other trades to avoid rigid contact with the building. 6. Any conflicts with other trades which will result in rigid contact with equipment or piping due to inadequate space or other unforeseen conditions should be brought to the architects/engineers attention prior to installation. Corrective work necessitated by conflicts after installation shall be at the responsible Contractor's expense. 7. Bring to the architects/engineers attention any discrepancies between the Specifications and the field conditions or changes required due to specific equipment selection, prior to installation. Corrective work necessitated by discrepancies after installation shall be at the responsible Contractor's expense. S. Correct, at no additional cost, all installations which are deemed defective in workmanship and materials at the Contractor's expense. 9. Overstressing of the building structure must not occur because of overhead support of equipment. Contractor must submit loads to the structural engineer of record for approval. Generally bracing may occur from: a. Flanges of structural beams. b. Upper truss cords in bar joist construction. C. Cast in place inserts or wedge type drill-in concrete anchors. 10. Specification 12 cable restraints shall be installed slightly slack to avoid short circuiting the isolated suspended equipment, piping or conduit. 11 . Specification 12 cable assemblies are installed taut on non- isolated systems. Specification 13 seismic solid braces may be used in place of cables on rigidly attached systems only. 235500 HEATING AND VENTILATING 62 of 72 Project No. 01091 Proposed Renovations March 6, 2009 Park House Smith College, Northampton, MA Hoses shall be installed on the equipment side of the shut- off valves horizontally and parallel to the equipment shafts wherever possible. Hoses shall be Type BSS as manufactured by Mason Industries, Inc. 24. All-directional acoustical pipe anchor, consisting of two sizes of steel tubing separated by a minimum 1 /2 in. thick 60 durometer neoprene. Vertical restraint shall be provided by similar material arranged to prevent vertical travel in either direction. Allowable loads on the isolation material should not exceed 500 psi and the design shall be balanced for equal resistance in any direction. All-directional anchors shall be Type ADA as manufactured by Mason Industries, Inc:. 25. Pipe guides shall consist of a telescopic arrangement of two sizes of steel tubing separated by a minimum 1 /2 in. thickness of 60 durometer neoprene. The height of the guides shall be preset with a shear pin to allow vertical motion due to pipe expansion or contraction. Shear pin shall be removable and reinsertable to allow for selection of pipe movement. Guides shall be capable of ± 1 -5/8 in. motion, or to meet location requirements. Pipe guides shall be Type VSG as manufactured by Mason Industries, Inc. 26. Split Wall Seals consists of two bolted pipe halves with minimum 3/4 in. thick neoprene sponge bonded to the inner faces. The seal shall be tightened around the pipe to eliminate clearance between the inner sponge face and the piping. Concrete may be packed around the seal to make it integral with the floor, wall or ceiling if the seal is not already in place around the pipe prior to the construction of the building member. Seals shall project a minimum of 1 in. past either face of the wall. Where temperatures exceed 240 dig. F., 10 lb. density fiberglass may be used in lieu of the sponge. Seals shall be Type SWS as manufactured by Mason Industries, Inc. 27. The horizontal throughst restraint shall consist of a spring element in series with a neoprene molded cup as described in Specification 5 with the same deflection as specified for the mountings or hangers. The spring element shall be designed so it can be preset for throughst at the factory and adjusted in the field to allow for a maximum of 1 /4 in. movement at start and stop. The assembly shall be furnished with one (1) rod and angle brackets for attachment to both the equipment and the duct work or the equipment and structure. Horizontal restraints shall be attached at the centerline of throughst and symmetrical on either side of the unit. Horizontal throughst restraints shall be Type WBI/WBD as manufactured by Mason Industries, Inc. K. Execution - General: 235500 HEATING AND VENTILATING 61 of 72 Project No. 01091 Proposed Renovations March 6, 2009 Park House Smith College, Northampton, MA spheres reinforced with a ring between spheres to maintain shape and complete with split ductile iron or steel flanges with hooked or similar interlocks. Sizes 16 in. to 24 in. may be single sphere. Sizes 3/4 in. to 1 -1 /2 in. may have threaded bolted flange assemblies, one sphere and cable retention. 14 in. and smaller connectors shall be rated at 250 psi up to 190° F with a uniform drop in allowable pressure to 190 psi at 250° F. 16 in. and larger connectors are rated 180 psi at 190° F and 135 psi at 250° F. Safety factors to burst and flange pullout shall be a minimum of 3/1 . All joints must have permanent markings verifying a 5 minute factory test at twice the rated pressure. Concentric reducers to the above Specifications may be substituted for equal ended expansion joints. Pipe connectors shall be installed in piping gaps equal to the length of the expansion joints under pressure. Control rods need only be used in unanchored piping locations where the manufacturer determines the installation exceeds the pressure requirement without control rods, as control rods are not desirable in seismic work. If control rods are used, they must have 1 /2 in. thick Neoprene washer bushings large enough in area to take the throughst at 1000 psi maximum on the washer area. Expansion joints shall be installed on the equipment side of the shut off valves. Submittals shall include two (2) test reports by independent consultants showing minimum reductions of 20 DB in vibration accelerations and 10 DB in sound pressure levels at typical blade passage frequencies on this or a similar product by the same manufacturer. All expansion joints shall be installed on the equipment side of the shut off valves. Expansion joints shall be SAFEFLEX SFDEj, SFEJ, SFDCR or SFU and Control Rods CR as manufactured by Mason Industries, Inc. 23. Flexible stainless steel hose shall have stainless steel braid and carbon steel fittings. Sizes 3 in. and larger shall be flanged. Smaller sizes shall have male nipples. Minimum lengths shall be as tabulated: Flanged Male Nipples 3x 14 10x26 1 /2x9 1 -1 /2x 13 4x 1512x28 3/4x10 2x14 5x1914x30 1 x11 2-1 /2x18 6x2016x32 1 /4x12 235500 HEATING AND VENTILATING 60 of 72 Project No. 01091 Proposed Renovations March 6, 2009 Park House Smith College, Northampton, MA in female wedge anchors shall be Type SAB as manufactured by Mason Industries, Inc. 20. Vibration isolation manufacturer shall furnish rectangular steel concrete pouring forms for floating and inertia foundations. Bases for split case pumps shall be large enough to provide for suction and discharge of elbows. Bases shall be a minimum of 1 /12 of the longest dimension of the base but not less than 6in. The base depth need not exceed 12 in. unless specifically recommended by the base manufacturer for mass or rigidity. Forms shall include minimum concrete reinforcing consisting of 1 /2 in. bars welded in place on 6 in. centers running both ways in a layer 1 -1 /2 in. above the bottom. Forms shall be furnished with steel templates to hold the anchor bolt sleeves and anchors while concrete is being poured. Height saving brackets shall be employed in all mounting locations to maintain a 1 in. clearance below the base. Wooden formed bases leaving a concrete rather than a steel finish are not acceptable. Base shall be Type BMK o K as manufactured by Mason Industries, Inc. 21 . Curb mounted rooftop equipment shall be mounted on spring isolation curbs. The lower member shall consist of a sheet metal Z section containing adjustable and removable steel springs that support the upper floating section. The upper frame must provide continuous support for the equipment and must be captive so as to resiliently resist wind and seismic forces. All directional neoprene snubber bushings shall be a minimum of 1 /4 in. thick. Steel springs shall be laterally stable and rest on 1 /4 in. thick neoprene acoustical pads. Hardware must be plated and the springs provided with a rust resistant finish. The curbs waterproofing shall consist of a continuous galvanized flexible counter flashing nailed over the lower curbs waterproofing and joined at the corners by EPDM bellows. All spring locations shall have access ports with removable waterproof covers. Lower curbs shall have provision for 2 in. of insulation. The roof curbs shall be built to seismically contain the rooftop unit. The unit must be solidly fastened to the top floating rail, and the lower Z section anchored to the roof structure. Curb shall have anchorage pre-approval "R" from OSHPD in the State of California attesting to the maximum certified horizontal and vertical load ratings. Curb shall be Type RSC as manufactured by Mason Industries, Inc. 22. Flexible spherical piping connectors shall employ peroxide cured EPDM in the covers, liners and Dacron tire cord frictioning. Solid steel rings shall be used within the raised face rubber ends to prevent pullout. Flexible cable bead wire is not acceptable. Sizes 2 in. and larger shall have two 235500 HEATING AND VENTILATING 59 of 72 Project No. 01091 Proposed Renovations March 6, 2009 Park House Smith College, Northampton, MA Clevis cross brace shall be Type CCB as manufactured by Mason Industries, Inc. 16. All-directional seismic snubbers shall consist of interlocking steel members restrained by a one-piece molded neoprene bushing of bridge bearing neoprene. Bushing shall be replaceable and a minimum of 1 /4 in. thick. Rated loadings shall not exceed 1000 psi. A minimum air gap of 1 /8 in. shall be incorporated in the snubber design in all directions before contact is made between the rigid and resilient surfaces. Snubber end caps shall be removable t allow inspection of internal clearances. Neoprene bushings shall be rotated to insure no short circuits exist before systems are activated. Snubbers shall have an Anchorage Pre- approval "R" Number from OSHPD in the State of California verifying the maximum certified horizontal and vertical load ratings. Snubber shall be Type Z-1225 as manufactured by Mason Industries, Inc. 17. All directional seismic snubbers shall consist of interlocking steel members restrained by shock absorbent rubber materials compounded to bridge bearing Specifications. Elastomeric materials shall be replaceable and a minimum of 3/4 in. thick. Rated loadings shall not exceed 1000 psi. Snubbers shall be manufactured with air gap between hard and resilient material of nor less than 1 /8 in. nor more than . 1 /4 in. Snubbers shall be installed with factory set clearances. The capacity of the seismic snubber at 3/8 in. deflection shall be equal or greater than the load assigned to the mounting grouping controlled by the snubber multiplied by the applicable "G" force. Submittals shall include the load deflection in the x, y and z planes. Snubbers shall have an anchorage pre-approval "R"Number from OSHPD in the State of California verifying the maximum certified horizontal and vertical load ratings. Snubbers shall be series Z-1011 as manufactured by Mason Industries, Inc. 18. Stud wedge anchors shall be manufactured from full diameter wire, not from undersized wire that is "rolled up" to create the thread. The stud anchor shall also have a safety shoulder which fully supports the wedge ring under load. The stud anchors shall have an evaluation report number from the I.C.B.O. Evaluation Service, Inc. verifying its allowable loads. Drill-in stud edge anchors shall be Type SAS as manufactured by Mason Industries, Inc. 19. Female wedge anchors are preferred in floor locations so isolators or equipment can be slid into place after the anchors are installed. Anchors shall be manufactured from full diameter wire, and shall have a safety shoulder to fully support the wedge ring under load. Female wedge anchors shall have an evaluation report number from I.C.B.O. Evaluation Service, Inc. verifying to its allowable loads. Drill- 235500 HEATING AND VENTILATING 58 of 72 Project No. 01091 Proposed Renovations March 6, 2009 Park House Smith College, Northampton, MA Hangers shall be Type 30N as manufactured by Mason Industries, Inc. 11 . Hangers shall be as described in 10, but they shall be pre- compressed and locked at the rated deflection by means of a resilient seismic upstop to keep the piping or equipment at a fixed elevation during installation. The hangers shall be designed with a release mechanism to free the spring after the installation is complete and the hanger is subjected to its full load. Deflection shall be clearly indicated by means of a scale. Submittals shall include a Drawing of the hanger showing the 30 degree capability. Hangers shall be Type PC30N as manufactured by Mason Industries, Inc. 12. Seismic Cable Restraints shall consist of galvanized steel aircraft cables sized to resist seismic loads with a minimum safety factor of two (2) and arranged to provide all- directional restraint. Cable end connections shall be steel assemblies that swivel to final installation angle and utilize two (2) clamping bolts to provide proper cable engagement. Cables must not be allowed to bend across sharp edges. Cable assemblies shall have an Anchorage Pre-approval "R" Number from OSHPD in the State of California verifying the maximum certified load ratings. Cable assemblies shall be Type SCB at the ceiling and at the clevis bolt, SCBH between the hanger rod nut and the clevis or SCBV if clamped to a beam all as manufactured by Mason Industries, Inc. 13. Seismic solid braces shall consist of steel angles or channels to resist seismic loads with a minimum safety factor of 2 and arranged to provide all directional restraint. Seismic solid brace end connectors shall be steel assemblies that swivel to the final installation angle and utilize two through bolts to provide proper attachment. Seismic solid brace assembly shall have anchorage pre-approval "R" Number from OSHPD in the state of California verifying the maximum certified load ratings. Solid seismic brace assemblies shall be Type SSB as manufactured by Mason Industries, Inc. 14. Steel angles, sized to pre-vent buckling, shall be clamped to pipe or equipment rods utilizing a minimum of three ductile iron clamps at each restraint location when required. Welding of support rods is not acceptable. Rod clamp assemblies shall have an Anchorage Pre-approval "R" Number from OSHPD in the State of California. Rod clamp assemblies shall be Type SRC as manufactured by Mason Industries, Inc. 15. Pipe clevis cross bolt braces are required in all restraint locations. They shall be special purpose performed channels deep enough to be held in place by bolts passing over the cross bolt. Clevis cross braces shall have an Anchorage Pre- 00W. approval "R"Number from OSHPD in the State of California. 235500 HEATING AND VENTILATING 57 of 72 Project No. 01091 Proposed Renovations March 6, 2009 Park House Smith College, Northampton, MA 7. Spring mountings as in Specification 5 built into a ductile iron or steel housing to provide all directional seismic snubbing. The snubber shall be adjustable vertically and allow a maximum if 1 /4 in. travel in all directions before contacting the resilient snubbing collars. Mountings shall have an Anchorage Pre-approval "R" Number from OSHPD in the State of California verifying the maximum certified horizontal and vertical load ratings. Mountings shall be SSLFH as manufactured by Mason Industries, Inc. 8. Air Springs shall be manufactured with upper and lower steel sections connected by a replaceable flexible nylon reinforced neoprene element. Air spring configuration shall be multiple bellows to achieve a maximum natural frequency of 3 Hz. Air Springs shall be designed for a burst pressure that is a minimum of three times the published maximum operating pressure. All air spring systems shall be connected to either the building control air or a supplementary air supply and equipped with three (3) leveling valves to maintain leveling within plus or minus 1 /8in. Submittals shall include natural frequency, load, and damping tests performed by an independent lab or acoustician. Air Springs shall be Type MT and leveling valves Type LV as manufactured by Mason Industries, Inc. 9. Restrained air spring mountings shall have a MT air spring as described in Specification 8, within a rigid housing that includes vertical limit stops to prevent air spring extension when weight is removed. The housing shall serve as blocking during erection. A steel spacer shall be removed after adjustment. Installed and operating heights are equal. A minimum clearance of 1 .2 in. shall be maintained around restraining bolts and between the housing and the air spring action. Limit stops shall be out of contact during normal operation. Housing shall be designed to resist all seismic forces. Mountings shall be SLR-MT as manufactured by Mason Industries, Inc. 10. Hangers shall consist of rigid steel frames containing minimum 1 -1 /4 in. thick neoprene elements at the top and a steel spring with general characteristics as in Specification 5 seated in a steel washer reinforced neoprene cup on the bottom. The neoprene element and the cup shall have neoprene bushings projecting through the steel box. To maintain stability the boxes shall not be articulated as clevis hangers or the neoprene element stacked on top of the spring. Spring diameters and hanger box lower hole sizes shall be large enough to permit the hanger rod to swing through a 300 arc from side to side before contacting the rod bushing and short circuiting the spring. Submittals shall include a hanger Drawing showing the 30° capability. 235500 HEATING AND VENTILATING 56 of 72 Project No. 01091 Proposed Renovations March 6, 2009 Park House Smith College, Northampton, MA verifying the maximum certified horizontal and vertical load ratings. Mountings shall be Type BR as manufactured by Mason Industries, Inc. 3. Sheet metal panels shall be bolted to the walls or supporting structure by assemblies consisting of a neoprene bushing cushioned between 2 steel sleeves. The outer sleeve prevents the sheet metal from cutting into the neoprene. Enlarge panel holes as required. Neoprene elements pass over the bushing to cushion the back panel horizontally. A steel disc covers the inside neoprene element and the inner steel sleeve is elongated to act as a stop so tightening the anchor bolts does not interfere with panel isolation in three (3) planes. Bushing assemblies can be applied to the ends of steel cross members where applicable. All assemblies shall be Type PB as manufactured by Mason Industries, Inc. 4. A one piece molded bridge bearing neoprene washer/bushing. The bushing shall surround the anchor bolt and have a flat face to avoid metal to metal contact. Neoprene bushings shall be Type HG as manufactured by Mason Industries, Inc. 5. Spring isolators shall be free standing, laterally stable_ without any housing, and complete with a molded neoprene cup or 1 /4 in. neoprene acoustical friction pad between the baseplate and the support. All mountings shall have leveling bolts that must be rigidly bolted to the equipment. Spring diameters shall be no less than 0.8 if the compressed height of the spring at rated load. Springs shall have a minimum additional travel to solid equal to 50% of the rated deflection. Submittals shall include spring diameters, deflection, compressed spring height and solid spring height. Mountings shall be Type SLF as manufactured by Mason Industries, Inc. 6. Restrained spring mountings shall have an SLF mounting as described in Specification 5, within a rigid housing that includes vertical limit stops to prevent spring extension when weight is removed. The housing shall serve as blocking during erection. A steel spacer shall be removed after adjustment. Installed and operating heights are equal. A minimum clearance of 1 /2 in. shall be maintained around restraining bolts and between the housing and the spring so as not to interfere with the spring action. Limit stops shall be out of contact during normal operation. Since housings will be bolted or welded in position there must be an internal isolation pad. Housing shall be designed to resist all seismic forces. Mountings shall have Anchorage Pre-approval "R" Number from OSHPD in the state of California certifying the maximum certified horizontal and vertical load ratings. low Mountings shall be SLR as manufactured by Mason Industries, Inc. 235500 HEATING AND VENTILATING 55 of 72 Project No. 01091 Proposed Renovations March 6, 2009 Park House Smith College, Northampton, MA Equipment Equipment Rigidity or Flexibility Mounted Zon Horiz. Vert. Horiz. Vert. Horiz. Vert. Horiz. Vert. e UBC BOCA .25 .08 0.4 0.15 0.1 0.15 0.6 0.2 SBCCI I. Product Intent: 1 . All vibration isolators and seismic restraints described in this section shall be the product of a single manufacturer. Mason Industry's products are the basis of these Specifications; products of other manufacturers are acceptable provided their systems strictly comply with the Specifications and have the approval of the specifying engineer. Submittals and certification sheets shall be in accordance with Section D. 2. For the purposes of this project, failure is defined as the discontinuance of any attachment point between equipment or structure, vertical permanent deformation greater than 1 /8 in. and/or horizontal permanent deformation greater than 1 /4 in. J. Product Description: Vibration Isolators and Seismic Restraints: 1 . Two (2) layers of 3/4 in. thick neoprene pad consisting of 2 in. square waffle modules separated horizontally by a 16 gauge galvanized shim. Load distribution plates shall be used as required. Pads shall be Type Super "W" as manufactured by Mason Industries, Inc. 2. Bridge-bearing neoprene mountings shall have a minimum static deflection of 0.2 in. and all directional seismic capability. The mount shall consist of a ductile iron casting containing two separated and opposing molded neoprene elements. The elements shall prevent the central threaded sleeve and attachment bolt from contacting the casting during normal operation. The shock absorbing neoprene materials shall be compounded to bridge-bearing Specifications. Mountings shall have an Anchorage Pre- approval "R" Number from OSHPD in the State of California 235500 HEATING AND VENTILATING 54 of 72 Project No. 01091 Proposed Renovations March 6, 2009 Park House Smith College, Northampton, MA Ow C. Provide calculations and materials if required for restraint of un-isolated equipment. d. Provide installation instructions, drawings, and trained field supervision to insure proper installation and performance. G. Related Work: 1 . Housekeeping Pads: a. Housekeeping pad reinforcement and monolithic pad attachment to the structure details and design shall be prepares by the restraint vendor if not already indicated on the Drawings. b. Housekeeping pads shall be coordinated with restraint vendor and sized to provide a minimum edge distance of ten (10) bolt diameters all around the outermost anchor bolt to allow development of full drill-in wedge anchor ratings. If cast-in anchors are to be used, the housekeeping pads shall be sized to accommodate the ACI requirements for bolt coverage and embedment. 2. Supplementary Support Steel: a. Contractor shall supply supplementary support steel for all equipment, piping, ductwork, etc. including roof mounted equipment, as required or specified. 3. Attachments: a. Contractor shall supply restraint attachment plates cast into housekeeping pads, concrete inserts, double-sided beam clamps, etc. in accordance with the requirements of the vibration vendor's calculations. H. Seismic Force Levels 1 . The following force levels will be used on this project. Minimum "G" Forces Equal to or Exceeding Building Code Listed in E. Building "G" Force "G" Force "G" Force "G" Force For Code for all pipes, Duct for Rigidity for Flexibility Life Safety & Conduit Mounted Mounted Equipment Either 235500 HEATING AND VENTILATING 53 of 72 Project No. 01091 Proposed Renovations March 6, 2009 Park House Smith College, Northampton, MA five years of seismic design experience, licensed in the state of the job location. (2) All restraining devices shall have a pre- approval number from California OSHPD or some other recognized government agency showing maximum restraint ratings. Pre- approvals based on independent testing are preferred to approvals based on calculations. Where pre-approved devices are not available, submittals based on independent testing are preferred. Calculations (including the combining of tensile and shear loadings) to support seismic restraint designs must be stamped by a registered professional engineer with at least five years of seismic design experience and licensed in the state of the job location. Testing and calculations must include both shear and tensile loads as well as one test or analysis at 450 to the weakest mode. (3) Analysis must indicate calculated dead loads, static seismic loads, and capacity of materials utilized for connections to equipment and structure. Analysis must detail anchoring methods, bolt diameter, embedment, and/or welded length. All seismic restraint devices shall be designed to accept, without failure, the forces detailed in Section H acting through the equipment center of gravity. Overturning moments may exceed forces at ground level. E. Code and Standards Requirements: 1 . Typical Applicable Codes and Standards - most recent or enforced code: a. Massachusetts State Building Code. b. BOCA National Mechanical Code. C. NFPA 90A. F. Manufacturer's Responsibility: 1 . Manufacturer of vibration isolation and seismic control equipment shall have the following responsibilities: a. Determine vibration isolation and seismic restraint sizes and locations. b. Provide vibration isolation and seismic restraints as scheduled or specified. 235500 HEATING AND VENTILATING 52 of 72 Project No. 01091 Proposed Renovations March 6, 2009 Park House Smith College, Northampton, MA a. Restraint(s) applied to limit motion perpendicular to the centerline of the pipe, duct, or conduit. 4. Longitudinal Bracing: a. Restraint(s) applied to limit motion parallel to the centerline of the pipe, duct, or conduit. D. Manufacturer's Data: 1 . The manufacturer of vibration isolation and seismic restraints shall provide submittals for products as follows: a. Descriptive Data: (1) Catalog cuts or data sheets on vibration isolators and specific restraints detailing compliance with the Specification. (2) Detailed schedules of flexible and rigidly mounted equipment, showing vibration isolators and seismic restraints by referencing numbered descriptive Drawings. b. Shop Drawings: (1) Submit fabrication details for equipment bases including dimensions, structural member sizes and support point locations. , (2) Provide all details of suspension and support for ceiling hung equipment. (3) Where walls, floors, slabs or supplementary steel work are used for seismic restraint locations, details of acceptable attachment methods for ducts, conduit and pipe must be included and approved before the condition is accepted for installation. Restraint manufacturer's submittals must include spacing, static loads and seismic loads at all attachment and support points. (4) Provide specific details of seismic restraints and anchors; include number, size, and locations for each piece of equipment. C. Seismic Certification and Analysis: 0 Seismic restraint calculations must be provided for all connections of equipment to the structure. Calculations must be stamped by a registered professional engineer with at least 235500 HEATING AND VENTILATING 51 of 72 Project No. 01091 Proposed Renovations March 6, 2009 Park House Smith College, Northampton, MA 7. Certification of seismic attachment of housekeeping pads . ` 8. All mechanical systems: Equipment buried underground is excluded but entry of services through the foundation wall is included. Equipment referred to below is typical. (Equipment not listed is still included in this Specification). AC Units Condensing Units Air Distrib. Boxes Ductwork Air Handling Units Unit Heaters Air Separators Fans (all types) Boilers Heat Exchangers Cabinet Heaters Piping Chillers Pumps (all types) Compressors Rooftop Units Comp. Room Units Tanks (all types) Condensers C. Definitions: 1 . Life Safety Systems a. All systems involved with fire protection including sprinkler piping, fire pumps, jockey pumps, fire pump control panels, service water supply piping, water tanks, fire dampers and smoke systems. b. All systems involved with and/or connected to emergency power supply including all generators, transfer switches, transformers, and all flowpaths to fire protection and/or emergency lighting systems. C. All medical and life support systems. d. Fresh air relief systems on emergency control sequence including air handlers, conduit, duct, dampers, etc. e. All life safety equipment has an asterisk on the equipment schedule. 2. Positive Attachment: a. A positive attachment is defined as a cast-in anchor, a drill-in wedge anchor, a double-sided beam clamp loaded perpendicular to a beam, or a welded or bolted connection to structure. Single sided "C" type beam clamps for support rods of overhead piping, ductwork, or any other equipment are not acceptable on this project as seismic anchor points. 3. Transverse Bracing: 235500 HEATING AND VENTILATING 50 of 72 Project No. 01091 Proposed Renovations March 6, 2009 Park House Smith College, Northampton, MA H. Ribbed pipe cover trims, finished to match the radiators shall be provided with the radiation as required to suit construction. I. Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide flat tube panel radiation as manufactured by Runtal North America, Inc. Radson shall be considered an approved equal. 2.27 VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROL A. Intent: 1 . All mechanical equipment, piping and ductwork as noted on the equipment schedule or in the Specification shall be mounted on vibration isolators and with flexible connections to prevent the transmission of vibration and mechanically transmitted sound to the building structure. Vibration isolators shall be selected in accordance with the weight distribution so as to produce reasonably uniform deflections. 2. All isolators and isolation materials shall be of the same manufacturer and shall be certified by the manufacturer. 3. It is the intent of the seismic portion of Specification to keep all mechanical building system components in place during a seismic Oak event. 4. All such systems must be installed in strict accordance with seismic codes, component manufacturer's, and building construction standards. Whenever a conflict occurs between the manufacturers or construction standards, the most stringent shall apply. 5. This Specification is considered to be minimum requirements for seismic consideration and is not intended as a substitute for legislated, more stringent, national, state or local construction requirements (i.e. California Title 24, California OSHPD, Canadian Building Codes, or other requirements). 6. The Contractor shall correct any variance or non-compliance with these Specification requirements in an approved manner. 7. Seismic restraints shall be designed in accordance with seismic force levels as detailed in Section H. B. The work in this Section includes, but is not limited to, the following: 1 . Vibration isolation for piping, ductwork and equipment. 2. Equipment isolation bases. 3. Flexible piping connections. 4. Seismic restraints for isolated equipment. 5. Seismic restraints for non-isolated equipment. 6. Certification of seismic restraint designs and installation supervision. 235500 HEATING AND VENTILATING 49 of 72 Project No. 01091 Proposed Renovations March 6, 2009 Park House Smith College, Northampton, MA 2.26 PANEL RADIATORS A. General: Provide steel panel radiator elements of lengths, locations, capacities and style as indicated in the drawings and schedules. The wall hung heating panel radiation shall be of one-piece all-welded steel construction, consisting of flattened water tubes welded to headers at each end. The radiator shall include an integral heavy gauge (0.09" minimum) all-welded perforated top grille (for curved radiators the grille is omitted). RF models to have steel corrugated fins welded to the rear side of the water tubes to increase the convective output of the unit. There shall be no less than 32 fins per foot. Fins shall start within 1 " of the headers, and shall be spot-welded three times per tube. B. The headers shall include all necessary inlet, outlet and vent connections as required. Standard connection sizes are %z" NPT tapered thread for supply and return piping, and 1 /8" for the vent connection. Internal baffling is provided where required for proper water flow. C. The radiant heating panels shall be available in lengths from 2'-0" to 29'- 6" in two inch even increments without the need for splicing. The panel radiation shall be capable of being mounted to typical stud wall construction without additional blocking or strapping. Appropriate wall mounting brackets or optional pedestals shall be provided with the radiation as required. D. Pressure ratings for the radiation, as indicated in the HVAC schedules, shall be as follows: 1 . STANDARD: Working pressure-56 PSI maximum, Test Pressure-74 PSI maximum 2. MEDIUM: Working pressure-85 PSI maximum, Test Pressure-110 PSI maximum 3. HIGH: Working pressure-128 PSI maximum, Test Pressure 184 PSI maximum E. Panel radiation expansion shall not exceed 1 /64" per foot of radiation at 215°F. The installer shall provide adequate expansion compensation for each radiator. F. The panel radiation shall be cleaned and phosphatized in preparation for the powder coat finish. The radiation is then finish painted with a gloss powder coat finish, for a total paint thickness of 2-3 mils (0.002" - 0.003"). The color shall be selected from Runtal's standard color table. G. The radiator manufacturer shall provide a sample of the radiator with grille for evaluation by the Architect/Engineer. 235500 HEATING AND VENTILATING 48 of 72 Project No. 01091 Proposed Renovations March 6, 2009 Park House Smith College, Northampton, MA thermostats, valves, damper motors, and relays provided under his contract and be present for functional tests on systems. The Building Management System shall be completely checked, test run, and adjusted. 2. Before the Engineer is asked to witness the functional tests, the entire control and management system must be complete, controls calibrated. The controlled devices will be physically inspected and checked to assure that these terminal devices are, in fact, under proper control and working smoothly over their entire range of operation. 3. The adjustment procedure shall include the following steps: a. Preliminary set up and calibration per Specifications and Shop Drawings. b. Physical checkout of all components for completeness and accuracy, simultaneously with mechanical system balancing. C. Review of system with Engineer. d. Functional test for Owner's benefit, instruction, and acceptance. e. Not less than 30 or more than 60 days after systems have been in full operation, review problems with Owner, recheck all adjustments, and recalibrate as required. 4. The Control Manufacturer shall provide a complete instructional manual covering the function and operation of all control and management system components on the job, which shall include a trouble-shooting and operating procedure. This manual shall be furnished to the Owner's operating personnel and shall show the total integrated control system. Competent technicians shall be provided for instruction purposes. The Control Manufacturer shall furnish schematic systems control diagrams to be delivered to the Owner on AutoCAD disks. 5. Control and management systems shall neither be considered complete nor acceptable until all conditions of the Sequence of Operation have been attained, all temperatures are maintained within specified limits of all operating conditions, and all systems damper leakage of controlled within specified limits. J. Service and Guarantee: 1 . The complete installation, including all equipment, shall be guaranteed free from defects in workmanship and material for a period of 12 months from date of acceptance in writing by the Owner. Provide at no cost to the Owner, all necessary service, adjusting, and checking during the 12 month guarantee period. 2. During warranty period, the ATC Contractor shall update and implement all latest revisions of software offered by the Contractor that applies to this Project. 235500 HEATING AND VENTILATING 47 of 72 Project No. 01091 Proposed Renovations March 6, 2009 Park House Smith College, Northampton, MA 14. Hot Water Valve Command AO 15. Freeze Protection Pump S/S DO 16. Freeze Protection Pump Status DI 17. Low Temperature Thermostat Shutdown DI 18. Fire Alarm Shutdown (as required) DI (as required) 19. Filter Differential Pressure (3) DI (2) 20. Enthalpy Wheel Intake Temp. Al 21 . Enthalpy Wheel Discharge Temp. Al 4. TYPICAL PANEL RADIATOR (PR) CONTROL a. The space DDC temperature sensor shall cycle the 2- position hot water control valve to maintain space temperature setpoint (70 degrees F, adjustable). b. Space temperature shall be capable of being set-back during the unoccupied period. C. Typical Points List: 1 . Space Temperature Al 2. Hot Water Valve Command DO 5. TYPICAL HOT WATER UNIT HEATER (UH) CONTROL a. The space DDC temperature sensor shall cycle the 2- position hot water control valve to maintain space temperature setpoint (70 degrees F, adjustable). b. A strap-on aquastat shall prevent the fan from operating if there is no hot water available. C. Space temperature shall be capable of being set-back during the unoccupied period. d. Typical Points List: 1 . Space Temperature Al 2. Hot Water Valve Command DO 3. Fan S/S DO 6. PROTECTIVE COVERS: 1 . Furnish and install concealed sensors located in the following areas: a. Toilets, Halls, Corridors, Lobbies, Entries. I. Adjustment and Calibration: 1 . On completion of the job, the ATC Contractor shall completely calibrate, test, and adjust, ready for use, all electronic controls, 235500 HEATING AND VENTILATING 46 of 72 Project No. 01091 Proposed Renovations March 6, 2009 Park House Smith College, Northampton, MA falls below 38 degrees F (adjustable). A critical alarm shall be indicated at the BAS. i. Smoke control: 1 . Smoke detectors are located in the supply duct of the air handling unit as indicated on the plans. 2. A hardwire auxilliary contact on the fire alarm control panel, upon detection of smoke in the airstream and/or upon a signal from fire alarm in the event of alarm within the zone, stops air handling unit supply and exhaust fans and closes the outside air and exhaust dampers. All shutdowns shall be hardwired interlocked and shall not rely on control system programming. j. BAS shall monitor the intake damper open and closed positions through damper end switches. In the event the damper closes in a non-alarm condition, stop supply fan, close outdoor air damper and initiate an alarm at the BAS. ' k. Filter bank differential pressure: 1 . The AHU is equipped with three filter banks: 30% supply pre-filters, 90% supply bag final-filters and 30% exhaust pre-filters. A pressure differential indicating sensor across the filter banks shall indicate an alarm at the BAS for high or low pressure conditions. Provide independent transmitters for each individual filter bank. I. Points List: 1 . Supply Fan S/S DO 2. Supply Fan Status DI 3. Exhaust Fan S/S DO 4. Exhaust Fan Status DI 5. Outside Air Damper Command DO 6. Outside Air Damper Position DI 7. Exhaust Damper Command DO 8. Exhaust Damper Position DI 9. Enthalpy Wheel Drive Motor S/S DO 10. Enthalpy Wheel Drive Motor Status DI 11 . Discharge Air Temperature Al 12. Outside Air Temperature (common) Al 13. Outdoor Air Relative Humidity (common) Al 235500 HEATING AND VENTILATING 45 of 72 Project No. 01091 Proposed Renovations March 6, 2009 Park House Smith College, Northampton, MA handling unit an outside air damper interlocked with the supply fan. Fan is allowed to start damper shall be fully open as proven by end switches. Whenever the fans stop all dampers shall close. 4. If a fan failure occurs at the supply fan, exhaust fan or enthalpy wheel drive motor, as detected by a current switches at each motor, the fans are stopped, outside air and exhaust air dampers shall close, and as alarm is generated at the BAS. This interlock is disabled for 30 seconds (adjustable) after the unit is initially commanded to start. Fans are locked out until manually reset through the BAS. f. System volume control: 1 . System operates at a constant speed/constant volume. g. AHU discharge air temperature is controlled through the BAS with temperature sensors. h. Heating coil temperature control: 1 . The air handling unit has a hot water heating coil with a dedicated freeze pump. Coil discharge air temperature controller, with averaging type sensor, modulates the fail-open 3-way modulating control valve to maintain discharge air temperature setpoint (70 degrees F summer, adjustable/65 degrees F winter, adjustable). 2. Hot water coil freeze protection pump control: a. During the occupied mode, enable freeze protection pump whenever the outdoor air temperature is below 45 degree F (adjustable). b. During the unoccupied mode, enable freeze protection pump whenever the outdoor air temperature is below 40 degrees F (adjustable). C. Freeze protection pump status: BAS shall monitor freeze protection pump status via differential pressure switch. if the pump fails, generate a critical alarm at the BAS and fully open the water coil 3-way control valve. 3. Temperature low limit switch at entering side of supply fan de-energizes unit supply and exhaust fans, closes outside air and exhaust dampers, de- energized the enthalpy wheel drive motor opens 100% ^` the water control valve to coil when air temperature 235500 HEATING AND VENTILATING 44 of 72 Project No. 01091 Proposed Renovations March 6, 2009 Park House Smith College, Northampton, MA ' that pressure sensor/transmitter signal is locked out of control sequence and an alarm is indicated at the BAS. e. Points List: 1 . Exhaust Fan S/S DO 2. Exhaust Fan Status DI 3. Exhaust Fan VFD Command AO 4. Exhaust Fan VFD Fault DI 5. Exhaust Air Damper Command AO 6. Exhaust Air Damper Position DI 7. Space Air Relative Humidity (3) Al (3) 8. Exhaust Suction Static Pressure AI 3. TYPICAL MAKE-UP AIR UNIT CONTROL a. Make-up air unit is a modular air handling unit with a 100% outside air damper. The system is designed as heating/cooling, single duct, constant air volume, constant discharge air temperature system utilizing 100% outside air. The air handling unit includes a supply fan and motor/drive assembly. b. The unit shall operate either in the Occupied Mode or Unoccupied Mode. C. Occupied Mode: 1 . During the occupied mode of operation the unit's supply fan and motor shall run to provide conditioned air to the occupied zone. 2. Discharge air temperature control shall come under control of the BAS. d. Unoccupied Mode: 1 . The Unoccupied Mode shall commence at the pre- programmed unoccupied start time. During the unoccupied mode, the unit's supply fan, return fan and enthalpy wheel drive motor shall de-energize and the outdoor air and exhaust air dampers shall close. e. Unit operation: 1 . The BAS shall index the unit between modes of operation (occupied/unoccupied) by a time schedule. 2. Unit start/stop shall also be manually selectable through the BAS. 3. Once the unit is indexed into the occupied mode of operation the supply fan shall be enabled and the enthalpy wheel drive motor shall energize. Air 235500 HEATING AND VENTILATING 43 of 72 Project No. 01091 Proposed Renovations March 6, 2009 Park House Smith College, Northampton, MA the VFD, or on a failure of a fan, the VFD's ramp down to the minimum pre-programmed speed at the programmed ramp rate and stops. 3. The VFD starts at minimum speed setting and ramps to the control point. The VFD is controlled off a single, common control point. Unless otherwise noted, the VFD's ramp up and down full scale over 15 seconds. VFD's do not operate at less than 6 hz (adjustable). The VFD is not allowed to operate if its disconnect is open. On a failure of the VFD, as defined by an output from the VFD, an alarm is generated at the BAS, and the fan is disabled. d. System volume control: 1 . System volume control is accomplished by a VFD. Rate of change of fan speed is adjustable through the BAS. 2. Exhaust fan shall modulate between its minimum and maximum speed in response to the three (3) space humidistats, one per floor. At initial start-up the fan shall index to the minimum speed position. If any of the space relative humidity sensors rises above 50% RH the exhaust fan speed shall be increased on a time proportioned basis until the respective space relative humidity falls below setpoint. Once all space relative humidity settings fall below setpoint the exhaust fan speed shall be decreased on a time proportioned basis until it reached its minimum speed setting. 3. Minimum and maximum VFD speed settings for the exhaust fan shall be determined in the field by the BAS Contractor and balancing Contractor. 4. High limit pressure control: 1 . The exhaust air suction plenum has a static pressure sensor/transmitter. If the static pressure falls to -1 .25" w.c. (adjustable), a critical alarm is indicated at the BAS, the fan speed control is overridden, and the VFD's is modulated to maintain an average suction pressure of 0.75" w.c. (adjustable). 2. Alarm indication and override control remain in force until manually reset through the BAS. 3. The BAS continuously monitors and compares pressure signals from each pressure sensor/transmitter. Whenever the output from any pressure sensor/transmitter drops below 10% or rises above 90% of calibrated range, 235500 HEATING AND VENTILATING 42 of 72 Project No. 01091 Proposed Renovations March 6, 2009 Park House Smith College, Northampton, MA e. Points list: 1 . Hot Water Pump P-1 S/S DO 2. Hot Water Pump P-1 Status DI 3. Hot Water Pump P-1 VFD Command AO 4. Hot Water Pump P-1 VFD Fault DI 5. Hot Water Pump P-2 DO 6. Hot Water Pump P-2 Status DI 7. Hot Water Pump P-2 VFD Command AO 8. Hot Water Pump P-2 VFD Fault DI 9. System Differential Pressure Al 10. Hot Water Flow DI 11 . Hot Water Pump Selector DO 12. Hot Water Supply Temperature Al 13. Hot Water Return Temperature Al 14. Outside Air Temperature Al 15. HX-1 -1 /3 Steam Valve AO 16. HX-1 - 2/3 Steam Valve AO 2. TOILET EXHAUST FAN and MUA-1 CONTROL a. Toilet exhaust fan on EF-1 is a centrifugal exhaust fan controlled by a VFD and space humidistats. b. Unit operation: 1 . Exhaust fan shall be indexed on by a time schedule from the BAS. 2. Fan start/stop shall also be manually selectable through the BAS. 3. If a fan failure occurs at the supply fan, as detected by a current switch on the exhaust fan, the failed fan is stopped, exhaust air damper shall close, and an alarm is generated at the BAS. This interlock is disabled for 30 seconds (adjustable) after the fan is initially commanded to start. Fan is locked out until manually reset through the BAS. 4. Exhaust fan has an exhaust air damper interlocked with the exhaust fan. Before the exhaust fan is allowed to start the damper shall be fully open as proven by end switches. Whenever the fans stop all dampers shall close. C. Exhaust fan control: 1 . If the dampers open position switch has not been energized within 20 seconds (adjustable) of the fan start signal, the fan is stopped, exhaust damper is closed and an alarm is indicated at the BAS. 2. Whenever the exhaust fan is signaled to stop, on a failure of the fan speed control signal, on failure of 235500 HEATING AND VENTILATING 41 of 72 Project No. 01091 Proposed Renovations March 6, 2009 Park House Smith College, Northampton, MA equipment; start/stop, status, etc. Each specific control sequence will require appropriate 1/0 points, which are scheduled on the Drawings. 1 . PARK HEATING HOT WATER HEAT EXCHANGER HX-1 AND HOT WATER PUMPS P-1 AND P-2 CONTROL. a. The heating hot water system shall be enabled whenever the outdoor air temperature falls below 60 degrees F (adjustable). The lead hot water pump shall energize and come under control of its VFD. b. The heating hot water system differential pressure shall be monitored at the end of the longest run. The DDC controller shall modulate the pump VFD to maintain a differential pressure of 12 psig (adjustable) at the end of the longest run. Differential pressure setting and sensor location shall be coordinated in the field with the Balancing Contractor and BAS Contractor. Hot water supply and return water temperature as well as pump status (via differential pressure switches on each pump) shall be monitored at the BAS. Upon a failure of the lead pump the BAS shall start the standby pump, stop the lead pump and alarm at the BAS. The standby pump shall come under control of the DDC controller differential pressure sequence. The hot water pumps shall operate on a run/standby arrangement and shall be duty-cycled based on equal run time. C. The DDC controller shall reset the hot water supply temperature inversely proportional to outside air temperature, as follows: I . Outdoor air temperature 0°F (adjustable): hot water supply temperature: 160° F (adjustable). 2. Outdoor air temperature 60°F (adjustable): How water supply temperature 120°F (adjustable). d. The heat exchanger has 1 /3-2/3 steam valve control. The steam heat exchanger 1 /3 and 2/3 steam control valves shall be modulated as follows to maintain the required hot water supply temperature to the system: 1 . The 1 /3 control valve shall modulate open as required to maintain hot water supply temperature. When the 1 /3 valve reaches full open position, and there is a call for additional heating capacity, the 2/3 valve shall modulate open and the 1 /3 valve shall close fully. The 2/3 valve shall modulate as required. If additional heating capacity is required, the 1 /3 valve shall again modulate open with the 2/3 valve remaining fully open. 2. As the demand for heating capacity decreases, the valves shall modulate and be staged in reverse sequence. 235500 HEATING AND VENTILATING 40 of 72 Project No. 01091 Proposed Renovations March 6, 2009 Park House Smith College, Northampton, MA C. Graphics of each system as shown on the 1/0 Summary Tables. d. Alarm limits and alarm messages for all critical and non- critical alarms. e. Configuration of all reports and point summaries indicated. G. Systems Software 1 . The central site shall display graphically, in up to 256 different colors, the following system information: General area maps shall show locations of controlled buildings in relation to local landmarks. Floor plan maps shall show heating and cooling zones throughout the buildings in a range of colors which provide a visual display of temperature relative to their respective setpoints. The colors shall be updated dynamically as zones' comfort condition change. Locations of space sensors shall also be shown for each zone. Setpoint adjustment and color band displays shall be provided. Mechanical system graphics shall show the type of mechanical system components serving any zone through the use of a pictorial representation of components. It shall also provide a current status of all 1/0 points being controlled and applicable to each piece of equipment including analog readouts in appropriate engineering units at appropriate locations on the graphic representation. 2. Each category of software shall consist of interactive software modules. Each module shall have an associated priority level and shall execute as determined by the program controller as defined in the real time operating system. 3. The central site shall allow receipt of alarms and messages while in a functional mode other than energy management, i.e., incoming alarms shall be displayed while the operator is in a word processing, spreadsheet, or other operating mode. The system must automatically switch from a non-energy management mode, respond to an alarm, and return to the exact position left in the previous functional mode. 4. The building operator shall be able to communicate and direct all control functions through the use of a 2-button "mouse" operator interface to monitor and control all functions and sequences within the system. H. Sequences of Operation: Following are the typical sequences of operation for HVAC equipment provided by Automated Logic's System 20/20. Within each section, each paragraph describes a specific control sequence for a component of the 235500 HEATING AND VENTILATING 39 of 72 Project No. 01091 Proposed Renovations March 6, 2009 Park House Smith College, Northampton, MA g. Current Sensing Relays: Relays shall monitor status of motor loads. Switch shall have self-wiping, snap-acting Form C contacts rated for the application. The setpoint of the contact operation shall be field adjustable. h. Control Relays: Control relay contacts shall be rated for 150% of the loading application, with self-wiping, snap-acting Form C contacts, enclosed in dustproof enclosure. Relays shall have silver cadmium contacts with a minimum life span rating of one million operations. Relays shall be equipped with coil transient suppression devices. i. Solid State Relays (SSR): Input/output isolation shall be greater than 10 billion ohms with a breakdown voltage of 15 V root mean square, or greater, at 60 Hz. The contact operating life shall be 10 million operations or greater. The ambient temperature range of SSRs shall be 20°F-140 0F. Input impedance shall be greater than 500 ohms. Relays shall be rated for the application. Operating and release time shall be 10 milliseconds or less. Transient suppression shall be provided as an integral part of the relays. j. Freezestat shall be capillary type equal to .Johnson Control, Model A70HA-1 C. k. Control valves shall be DDC modulating type. All two-way valves shall be Spartan two position valves. All three-way valves shall be Barber Colman with Belimo Actuators, Model AF24-S. 1. All control dampers shall be opposed blade type with edge and jam seals and internal linkage. Damper operators shall be provided for all dampers equal to Belimo AF24-S with AV10-18 or 2G JSA shaft extensions where required. S. Local Site Communication Network a. The modules shall communicate within their respective network with a token passing technique. This network shall be consistent with the IEEE RS-485 standard, including a minimum baud rate of 9,600 BPS maintained at a minimum of 10,000 feet. The Contractor shall provide all wiring required for the local site network. F. Software 1 . The Contractor shall provide all software required for efficient operation of all the functions required by this specification. Software shall be modular in design for flexibility in expansion or revision of the system. The software shall, as a minimum, include: a. Complete database entry. b. Configuration of all application programs to provide the sequence of operation indicated. 235500 HEATING AND VENTILATING 38 of 72 Project No. 01091 Proposed Renovations March 6, 2009 Park House Smith College, Northampton, MA 3) Room temperature sensors shall have an accuracy of + 0.25°F in the range of 45°F to 96°F, ALC Model BA- 1OK-2-RSO-RLC Type 3 with network connector, warm/cool adjustment, override switch and LED Occupied/Unoccupied indicator. 4) Chilled water sensors shall have an accuracy of +0.25°F in their range of application. 5) Hot water temperature sensors shall have an accuracy of + 0.75°F over the range of their application. b. Pressure Instruments 1) Differential Pressure and Pressure Sensors. Sensors shall have a 4-20 MA output proportional signal with provisions for field checking. Sensors shall withstand up to 150% of rated pressure, without damaging the device. Accuracy shall be within +2% of full scale. Sensors shall be manufactured by MAMAC No. PR-272- 2-XX-B-1-2-2. 2) Pressure Switches. Pressure switches shall have a repetitive accuracy of + 2% of range and withstand up to 150% of rated pressure. Sensors shall be diaphragm or bourdon tube design. Switch operation shall be adjustable over the operating pressure range. The switch shall have an application rated Form C, snap- acting, self-wiping contact of platinum alloy, silver alloy, or gold plating. Switches shall be manufactured by.Johnson Controls, Model P-74FA-5-C. C. Flow Switches: Flow switches shall have a repetitive accuracy of + 1% of their operating range. Switch actuation shall be adjustable over the operating flow range. Switches shall have snap-acting Form C contacts rated for the specific electrical application. d. Watt-hour Transducers: Watt-hour transducers shall have an accuracy of +0.25% for kW and kWh outputs from full lag to full lead power factor. Input ranges for kW and kWh transducers shall be selectable without requiring the changing of current or potential transformers, and shall have dry contact pulse accumulation. e. Voltage-to-Digital Alarm Relays: Relays shall monitor status of boiler or chiller safeties and overloads and shall be sized and connected so as not to impede the function of the monitored contacts. Switch shall have self-wiping, snap- acting Form C contacts rated for the application, equal to Veris Industries, Inc. Hawkeye 735. f. Humidity Sensors: Sensors shall have an accuracy of +5% over a range of 20% to 95% RH, Visala Mod. HMW-40U. 235500 HEATING AND VENTILATING 37 of 72 Project No. 01091 Proposed Renovations March 6, 2009 Park House Smith College, Northampton, MA the space temperature until communication with the TNI is restored. d. Each TNI shall execute application programs, calculations, and commands via a microcomputer resident in the TNI. The database and all application programs for each T-Line shall be stored in read/writable non-volatile memory within the TNI. All non-volatile memory shall have a battery backup of at least five years. e. The TNI shall contain both software and hardware to perform full DDC/PID control loops. T-Line shall be able to provide normal binary type output. f. Each T-Line shall be able to support various type of zone temperature sensors, such as: temperature sensor only, temperature sensor with built-in local override switch, with setpoint adjustment switch. g. Each T-Line for VAV application shall have a built-in air flow transducer for accurate air flow measurement in order to provide the Pressure Independent VAV operation. h. Each T-Line and TNI shall have LED indication for visual status of communication, power, and all outputs. i. Each TNI shall be software programmable for communicating at 9600 baud to 38.4 Kbps. Circuits shall be optically isolated. 3. Terminal Control Devices - T-Line a. Digital outputs: These outputs shall be 24VAC or VDC maximum, 3 amp maximum current. Each configurable as normally open or normally closed, and either dry contact or bussed. b. Universal inputs: Thermistor, dry contacts or 0-5VDC with 0- 1 OOK Ohm input impedance. C. Enhanced Zone Sensor Input: The input shall provide one thermistor input, one local setpoint adjustment, one timed local override switch and an occupancy LED indicator. 4. Instrumentation and Control a. Temperature Sensors: Sensors shall be of the type and have accuracy ratings as indicated and/or required for the application and shall permit accuracy rating of within 1% of the temperature range of their intended use. 1) Sensors used for mixed air application shall be the averaging type and have an accuracy of +10F. Kele Precon Model ST-FZ. 2) OA temperature sensors shall have a minimum range of -52°F to 152°F and an accuracy of within +1°F in this temperature range. Kele Precon Model ST-O. 235500 HEATING AND VENTILATING 36 of 72 Project No. 01091 Proposed Renovations March 6, 2009 Park House Smith College, Northampton, MA E. Field Hardware: Field hardware must be of a modular design to ensure reliability and system performance. 1 . Global Network Controller - LANgate a. The LANgate shall be a microprocessor-based communications device which acts as a gateway between the System Control Module Network (CMnet) and the Global Network (Lgnet). b. Both the Cmnet and the Lgnet shall be "peer-to-peer" networks which allow all control modules to communicate with equal authority. C. Each LANgate shall support a Cmnet on which may reside any combination of up to 100 zone controllers, rooftop unit controllers, and/or Control Modules. d. The LANgate shall be responsible for routing global information from the various Cmnets which may be installed throughout a building. e. The Lgnet may configure as RS485 (38.4 Kbps), ARCnet (2.5 Mbps), or Ethernet (10 Mbps), or Token Ring (16Mbps) all of which may be implemented over fiber optic, twisted pair, or coaxial cable. f. Each Cmnet shall support up to 100 controllers. g. Multiple LANgates can be added to the Lgnet if the projects require more than 100 controllers. h. Up to a total of 60 LANgates can be added to the Lgnet, each supporting up to 100 controllers (total capacity exceeds 500,000 points per Lgnet). i. The LANgate shall provide two RS232 ports which can be connected to Central Site Workstations, portable computers, or modems. j. LANgate shall provide full arbitration between multiple users, whether they are communicating through the same LANgate or different ones. 2. Terminal Control Modules - T-Line a. Terminal Control Modules shall be capable of providing the Direct Digital Control of single zone terminal HVAC units; air handling units, fan coil units, exhaust fans, unit ventilators, etc. b. Each T-Line controller shall communicate with the Cmnet through the Tnet Interface Module (TNI). The TNI shall provide one RS485 port for a Cmnet connection and one RS485 port for the Tnet connection. In addition, a direct connect RS485 port shall also be provided for connection of a laptop computer. C. In the event of a loss of communication with the TNI, each T- Line controller shall store a default algorithm which maintains 235500 HEATING AND VENTILATING 35 of 72 Project No. 01091 Proposed Renovations March 6, 2009 Park House Smith College, Northampton, MA 5. Provide an accurate graphic flow diagram for each software program proposed to be used on the project as part of the submittal process. Revisions made as a result of the submittal process, during the installation, start-up or acceptance portion of the project, shall be accurately reflected in the "as-built" graphic software flow diagrams herein required by this specification. 6. The Contractor shall be able to simulate the operation of all software application programs to ensure they are free from design errors and that they accurately accomplish the application sequence of operations. The simulation must show each output value and how it varies in relation to an artificial time clock. The time clock may run at normal time increments, increased increments (fast motion) or decreased increments (slow motion). D. Wiring: All temperature control wiring will be installed and terminated by the ATC Contractor. Control wiring shall be as follows: 1 . All circuits which are activated or deactivated by temperature control system components, such as, but not limited to, PE's and high and low limit protective devices. 2. All circuits which activate or deactivate temperature control system components, such as solenoid air valve. 3. All temperature control panel wiring to terminal strips and field wiring from terminal strips to field mounted devices. 4. All wiring to the "Auto" side of hand-off auto switches on units being controlled by the ATC Contractor. 5. Wiring of all electro-mechanical devices required to be located on or in temperature control panels. 6. All wiring to the temperature control panels shall be by the ATC subcontractor from sources provided by the Electrical Contractor specifically for that purpose. 7. All wiring shall comply with national, state, and local electrical codes. All power wiring will be installed and terminated by the Electrical Contractor. Power wiring shall be defined as follows: a. Wiring of all devices and circuits carrying voltages greater than 120 volt (except for power to the temperature control panels). b. Wiring of power feeds to disconnects, starters, and electric motors. C. Wiring of 120V AC power feeds to all temperature control panels where required. d. Installation of and wiring of line power to fused disconnects for each air compressor. e. Power wiring to 120V single phase motors. f. Wiring from disconnects to compressor motor starters and from compressor motor starters to compressor motor. 235500 HEATING AND VENTILATING 34 of 72 Project No. 01091 Proposed Renovations March 6, 2009 Park House Smith College, Northampton, MA 8. The system as specified shall monitor, control, and calculate all of the points and perform all the function as listed in 1/0 Summary Tables attached to the end of this specification. 9. Codes and Regulations. All electrical equipment and material and its installation shall conform to the current requirements of the following authorities: a. Occupational Safety and Health Act (OSHA) b. National Electric Code (NEC) C. National Fire Code d. Uniform Building Code e. Uniform Mechanical Code f. Uniform Plumbing Code g. UL916 h. Note: Where two or more codes conflict, the most restrictive shall apply. Nothing in these plans and specifications shall be construed to permit work not conforming to applicable codes. C. Submittals, Documentation and Acceptance 1 . Shop Drawings. A minimum of six (6) copies of Shop Drawings shall be submitted and shall consist of a complete list of equipment and materials, including manufacturer's descriptive and technical literature, catalog cuts, and installation instructions. Shop Drawings shall also contain complete wiring, routing, schematic diagrams, tag number of devices, software descriptions, calculations, and any other details required to demonstrate that the system will function properly. Drawings shall show proposed layout and installation of all equipment and the relationship to other parts of the work. 2. Shop Drawings shall be approved by the Engineer and the College before any equipment is installed. Therefore, Shop Drawings must be submitted in time for review so that all installations can be completed per the project's completion schedule. 3. All Drawings shall be reviewed after the final system checkout and updated or corrected to provide "as-built" Drawings to show exact installation. The system will not be considered complete until the "as-built" Drawings have received their final approval. The Contractor shall deliver three (3) sets of"as-built" Drawings, and one (1) CADD disk of these Drawings. 4. Before final configuration, the Contractor shall provide 1/0 Summary forms that include: a. Description of all points. b. Listing of binary and analog hardware required to interface to the equipment for each function. C. Listing of all application programs associated with each piece of equipment. d. Failure modes for control functions to be performed in case of failure 235500 HEATING AND VENTILATING 33 of 72 Project No. 01 091 Proposed Renovations March 6, 2009 Park House Smith College, Northampton, MA remaining reused controls where specified, all connected and properly integrated to the control system. 5. The temperature control system shall be DDC and shall utilize electric/electronic power for the control dampers and valves. The control systems Lans connection shall be extended from the existing system. 6. All wiring, conduit, junction boxes, fittings, etc., necessary for the temperature control system shall be furnished and installed by the ATC Contractor and shall conform to all standards and codes as described under Section 16000 - Electrical Work. Wiring shall be in metal raceways where required by prevailing codes. 7. Provide nameplates for all control devices. Devices on panels to have "Lamicoid" nameplates, isolated control valves, relays, etc. to be marked with stamped tape. B. Scope of Work 1 . All temperature control work shall be performed by Yankee Technology, Inc. of Ludlow, MA. It is the responsibility of this Contractor to co-ordinate all HVAC work with the Temperature Control Contractor prior to submitting a bid. 2. The Contractor shall furnish and install all necessary hardware, wiring, pneumatic tubing, computing equipment and software as defined in this specification. 3. All material and equipment used shall be standard components, regularly manufactured and available and not custom designed especially for this project. All systems and components, except site specific software, shall have previously been thoroughly tested and proven in actual use prior to installation on this project. 4. The system architecture shall be fully modular permitting expansion of application software, system peripherals, and field hardware. 5. The system, upon completion of the installation and prior to acceptance of the project, shall perform all operating functions as detailed in this Specification. 6. Provide the following system hardware: a. Central Site(s) and Control Modules b. All sensing devices and necessary transducers to perform the functions listed in 1/0 Summary Tables. C. All relays, switches, indicating devices, and transducers required to perform the functions listed in 1/0 Summary Tables. d. All monitoring and control wiring and air tubing. e. All modems and accessories. 7. Provide all software identified in Part 3 of this Specification. The database required for implementation of these specifications shall be provided by the Contractor, including: point descriptor, alarm limits, 10"k calibration variables, graphics, reports and point summaries. 235500 HEATING AND VENTILATING 32 of 72 Project No. 01091 Proposed Renovations March 6, 2009 Park House Smith College, Northampton, MA F. Provide, where noted on schedules, internal face and bypass dampers with full size coils. G. High capacity mixing section shall be furnished with properly located access doors equipped with handles. Internal slides shall be provided for filter racks. Filters shall be removable from either end of Section. H. Bag filter and pre-filter sections shall be provided with all units. Each unit shall be furnished with three (3) sets of pre and final filters. I. All sections with access doors shall have factory wired convenience receptacles and factory wired marine type light fixtures with guard and switch. 2.23 ACCESS PANELS A. Furnish and install access panels at all valves, volume dampers, tec. installed above plastered ceilings, in walls, and all other non-accessible spaces. Access panels in plastered ceilings shall be Karp Type DSC-214 PI_ (12" x 12"); access panels in walls shall be Karp type DSC-211 "Universal" (12" x 12"). 2.24 AUTOMATIC TEMPERATURE CONTROL A. General Requirements 1 . All components of the system shall be furnished and installed by Yankee Technology. 2. The controls shall be a direct expansion of the Campus' existing Automated Logic (ALC) WebCTRL BAS operating platform. All system points will be networked using Lan Gate Routers (LGR) tied into the Camps Ethernet, sharing all new existing points in real time date. It will be the Contactors responsibility to develop site specific operating parameters, building name, general area maps, floor plans, mechanical system graphics, and thermal graphs, all to be displayed graphically at the central site (CS) via the existing software programs 3. All components of the direct digital controllers shall be manufactured by Automated Logic, or equal, with peripheral electric/electronic devices manufactured by Barber Colman. 4. All components of the system shall be furnished and installed by Automated Logic, i.e. Yankee Technology, Inc., of Ludlow, MA. The system shall be a properly integrated system installed by competent mechanics regularly employed in the profession of temperature control. Unless specified to the contrary, all equipment shall be fully proportioning. The control system shall be complete in all respects, including room thermostats, immersion thermostats, switches, owk relays, valves, cabinets and other accessory equipment, and a complete system of control wiring for integration into existing 235500 HEATING AND VENTILATING 31 of 72 Project No. 01091 Proposed Renovations March 6, 2009 Park House Smith College, Northampton, MA 2.22 AIR HANDLING UNITS (AHU) A. Furnish and install, where shown on the Drawings, central station draw-through units of the types, sizes, and capacities as scheduled on the Drawings. All units shall be factory-assembled and tested and shall be as manufactured by the Trane Company, York International or McQuay. No substitutions will be allowed. B. Units shall consist of modular fan and coil sections, filter section, internal face and bypass sections where called for, adjustable motor bases for high efficiency, totally enclosed NEMA frame motors, and OSHA approved belt guards. Casing shall be of complete frame with removable panels, modular, flush mounted into the unit framework with properly located access panels. Casing shall be double wall insulated with a 1" minimum thickness fiberglass insulation with a density of not less than 1 -1 /2 lbs. accordance with NFPA Bulletin No. 90A. Insulation shall be secured to casing with waterproof adhesive and permanent fasteners. All cabinet surfaces shall be galvanized. C. Fans shall be centrifugal type, double inlet, double width. They shall be of the forward curved, low speed type on all sizes. Fan housing shall be equipped with adjustable cut-off. All fans shall be statically and dynamically balanced and tested at rated speed after being installed in factory assembled units. Bearings shall be self-aligning, grease lubricated ball bearings sized to provide minimum average bearing life of 200,000 hours. Lubrication fittings shall be extended to the exterior cabinet. Fan shafts shall be solid, cold finish steel, turned, grout ground, and polished to insure trouble-free operation and tolerances within the recommendations of bearing manufacturers. Fan motors shall be mounted to an adjustable pivot base in optional position external to the unit. Fan V-belt drive shall be of the variable pitch type. Fan belt guard shall be furnished by the unit manufacturer, easily removable, and made of solid steel with tachometer openings. Inlet vanes shall be furnished where so called for on the schedule. D. Coil sections shall be constructed of heavy gauge steel with removable panels and shall be arranged for the removal of the coil from either end of the unit. Hot water coils shall consist of 5/8 in. o.d. copper tubing on 1- 1 12 centers arranged in a staggered pattern with respect to circulation of airflow. They shall be bonded to the tubes by hydraulic expansion of tubes and the coils tested with 300-lbs. pneumatic pressure under water. E. The heating coil shall be of the continuous aluminum plate fin and copper tubes type, assembled in a zinc-coated steel frame. The coil shall be pitched in the unit casing for proper drainage the coil shall be tested at 250 If psig air pressure under water. Coils shall be of the steam distributing, non-freeze type. 235500 HEATING AND VENTILATING 30 of 72 Project No. 01091 Proposed Renovations March 6, 2009 Park House Smith College, Northampton, MA 20. Gaskets for Flanged Joints: ANSI B16.21 ; full-faced for cast-iron flanges; raised-face for steel flanges, unless otherwise indicated. 21 . Note: Grooved piping will NOT be allowed. 2.20 PACKLES EXPANSION JOINTS A. General: Provide packless expansion joints where indicated for piping systems, with materials and pressure/temperature ratings selected by Installer to suit intended service. Select packless expansion joints to provide 200% absorption capacity of piping expansion between anchors. B. Expansion Compensators: Pressure rated for 60 psi for low pressure systems, 2-ply phosphor bronze bellows, brass shrouds and end fittings for copper piping systems, or 2-ply stainless steel bellows, carbon steel shrouds and end fittings for steel piping systems. Provide internal guides and anti-torque devices, and removable end clip for proper positioning. C. Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide expansion compensators of one of the following: Flexonics Div.; UOP, Inc. Hyspan Precision Products, Inc. Keflex, Inc. 40*1 Metraflex Co. Vibration Mountings and Controls, Inc. D. Provide pipe alignment guides on both sides of expansion joints, and elsewhere as indicated. Construct with 4-finger spider traveling inside guiding sleeve, with provision for anchoring to building substrate. 1 . Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide pipe alignment guides of the following: Hyspan Precision Products, Inc. Metraflex Co. 2.21 STRAINERS A. Pipeline strainers shall be full size, iron body, "Y" pattern and shall be installed on the inlet side of each steam trap, and elsewhere as indicated on the Drawings. Strainers 2" and smaller shall have screwed ends; 2-1 /2" and larger shall have flanged ends. B. Strainers for steam and condensate systems over 50 psig. shall be 250 lb. class. Strainers for other systems shall be 125 lb. class. Strainers shall be Illinois, Barnes and Jones, Armstrong, or equal, and shall be so installed as to permit ready removal of basket. Each strainer 2-1 /2" and larger shall be AW provided with hose end globe valve on blow-off. 235500 HEATING AND VENTILATING 29 of 72 Project No. 01091 Proposed Renovations March 6, 2009 Park House Smith College, Northampton, MA may be used in fan room equipment and connection to existing lines. C. Materials 1 . Black Steel Pipe : ASTM A53, A106 or A120; except comply with ASTM A53 or Al 06 where close coiling or bending is required. 2. Malleable-Iron Threaded Fittings: ANSI 1316.3; plain or galvanized as indicated. Class 150 for Schedule 40 piping, Class 300 for Schedule 80. 3. Yoloy Steel Pipe: ASTM A714; Class 4; Grade IV. 4. Steel Flanges/Fittings: ANSI B16.5, including bolting and gasketing of the following material group, end connection and facing except as otherwise indicated, Class 150 for Schedule 40 piping, Class 300 for Schedule 80. a. Material Group: Group 1 .1 b. End Connections: Buttwelding C. Facings: Raised-face 5. Wrought-Steel Buttwelding Fittings: ANSI B16.9, except ANSI B16.28 for short-radius elbows and returns; rated to match connected pipe. 6. Yoloy Steel Buttwelding Fittings: ASTM A714. 7. Forged Branch Connection Fittings: Except as otherwise indicated, provide type as determined by Installer to comply with installation . ,► requirements, Bonney "Weldolets" or "Th reado lets", or equal. 8. Pipe Nipples: Fabricated from same pipe as used for connected pipe; except do not use less than Schedule 80 pipe where length remaining unthreaded is less than 1 -1 /2" and where pipe size is less than 1-1 12", and do not thread nipples full length (no close-nipples). 9. Copper Tube: ASTM B88; Type as indicated for each service; hard- drawn temper for water piping; soft temper for oil piping. 10. DWV Copper Tube: ASTM B306. 11 . ACR Copper Tube: ASTM B280. 12. Wrought-Copper Solder-joint Fittings: ANSI B16.22. 13. Cast-Copper Solder-joint Drainage Fittings: ANSI B16.23. 14. Wrought-Copper Solder-joint Drainage Fittings: ANSI 1316.29. 15. Red Brass Pipe: ASTM B43. 16. Cast-Bronze Threaded Fittings: ANSI B16.15. 17. Welding Materials: Except as otherwise indicated, provide welding materials as determined by Installer to comply with installation requirements. Comply with Section II, Part C, ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code for welding materials. 18. Soldering Materials: Except as otherwise indicated, provide soldering materials as determined by Installer to comply with installation requirements. 19. Brazing Materials: Except as otherwise indicated, provide brazing materials as determined by Installer to comply with installation requirements. Comply with SFA-5.8, Section II, ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code for brazing filler metal materials. 235500 HEATING AND VENTILATING 28 of 72 Project No. 01091 Proposed Renovations March 6, 2009 Park House Smith College, Northampton, MA AOW* 7. All hot water, steam, condensate return, condensate drains, refrigerant piping, and make up water piping shall be insulated with Fiberglass pipe insulation, or approved equal. The insulation shall have an average thermal conductivity not to exceed .25 BTU in. per sq. ft. per F. per hour at a mean temperature of 75 degrees F. Thickness of the insulation shall be as scheduled below. The insulation shall be applied over clean dry pipe with all joints firmly together. Longitudinal jacket laps and the butt strips shall be smoothly secured with Benjamin Foster 85-20 adhesive. All Pex tubing run in walls shall be insulated with %z" Armaflex insulation. F. Insulation thickness shall be as follows: Minimum Pipe Insulation Required: 1 . Hot Water/Steam and Condensate Return: a. Runouts up to 2 in.: 1 -1 /2 in. b. Runouts 1 in. and less: 1-1 /2 in. C. Runouts 1 -1 /4 in. to 2 in.: 2 in. d. Runouts 2-1 /2 in. to 4 in.: 2 in. 2.19 PIPE AND FITTINGS A. General 1 . Reference is made to specifications of recognized authorities to establish quality. Latest editions of their publications at time of bidding shall be in force. 2. All piping shall have manufacturer's name or trademark rolled into each and every length of pipe. 3. All threads for screwed joints shall be National Taper Pipe Thread conforming to ANSI B2.1-1968. 4. Qualify welding procedures, welders and operators in accordance with ASME B31 .1 , or ASME B31 .9, as applicable, for shop and project site welding of piping work. B. Application 1 . Hot and Dual Temperature Water Supply and Return and Stearn Supply and Condensate Return: Black steel pipe, Schedule 40, size 2" and smaller threaded, 2-1 /2" and larger welded, or Type "I_" copper for hot and dual temperature water. 2. Boiler Trim: Brass Pipe, Schedule 40, threaded, cast bronze fittings. 3. Refrigerant: Type ACR copper, wrought copper fittings, AWS class BAgl silver solder. 4. Condensate Drain (from cooling coils): Type M or DWV copper tube with cast or wrought drainage fittings in lieu of copper PVC drains 235500 HEATING AND VENTILATING 27 of 72 Project No. 01091 Proposed Renovations March 6, 2009 Park House Smith College, Northampton, MA duct insulation shall be tied 18 in. o.c. with 18 gauge aluminum or copper wire where ducts exceed 24 in. in width. B. All concealed air ducts from the fresh air intakes to the air handling units shall be insulated in the same manner as for the ductwork for concealed supply ducts. C. All exposed fresh air ducts from the fresh air intakes to the air handling units and all exposed supply and return air ducts, or where so noted, shall be insulated with 1 in. thick, 6 pound density, rigid glass fiberboard with Manville Type EAF vaporseal facing. Attach board to ducts with double prong stick clips. Seal at joints to maintain vapor barrier. All edges and angles shall be reinforced with corner beads. Finish shall consist of tackboard of Benjamin Foster No. 30-36 Sealfas, embedded Manville Duramesh 205, and a heavy finish coat of Benjamin Foster No. 30-35 Sealfas, all applied according to manufacturer's recommendations. D. Acoustical Insulation: Duct lining acoustical insulation shall be shop installed by the Sheet Metal Contractor. Liner shall be 1-in. thick, 3-pound density, non-combustible glass fiber with U.L. approved neoprene coating on air side. Acoustical lining shall be installed where shown on Drawings. All lined ductwork shall be insulated as listed above unless otherwise noted. E. Pipe Insulation 1 . All insulation including covering shall be fire resistant and fire retardant and shall have a flame spread rating not exceeding 25, smoke developed rating not exceeding 50, all complying with NFPA 225 and/or U.L. 723. Adhesives used for applying and sealing jackets shall also conform to these same fire retardant and smoke ratings. 2. On exposed insulation, all longitudinal seams shall be kept at the top of the pipe and circumferential joints shall be kept to a minimum. Raw ends of insulation shall be concealed by neatly folding in the ends of the jackets. Fittings, valve bodies, and flanges shall be furnished with the same jacket materials used on adjoining insulation. 3. Covering shall not be applied until all parts of the work have been tested by the Contractor and approved by the Engineer. 4. A vapor barrier shall be installed on all new hot water/chilled water piping. It shall be applied in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions to maintain the integrity of the vapor barrier. 5. Attention is called for to the fact that on all hot water/chilled water, refrigerant, and condensate drain piping, oversized pipe hangers shall be furnished and pipe insulation shall be applied continuous along the pipe passing inside the hanger. 6. Pipe insulation shall be closed cell Armaflex insulation as manufactured by Gustin-Bacon, Manville, or other approved equal. 235500 HEATING AND VENTILATING 26 of 72 Project No. 01091 Proposed Renovations March 6, 2009 Park House Smith College, Northampton, MA C. Heat exchanger shall be as manufactured by ITT Bell & Gossett or approved equal. 2.16 STEAM TRAPS A. Furnish and install float and thermostatic steam traps where indicated on the Drawings. B. The trap shall be of the mechanical lever ball float type having a ductile iron body with horizontal inline screwed connections and shall incorporate a balanced pressure thermostatic air vent. Valve mechanism shall be stainless steel and attached to a removable cover for easy maintenance. The cover shall be 180 degrees reversible to permit flow in either direction. C. Steam traps shall be as manufactured by Tunstall Associates. No substitutions will be allowed. 2.17 HANGERS A. Hangers shall be as manufactured by Grinnell Company, Carpenter & Paterson, Fee & Mason, or equal. B. For all pipe 2-1 /2" and larger - Grinnell Figure No. 20, at 10' intervals. C. For all other suspended piping - Grinnell Figure 70 at 6' intervals for tubing 1 -1 /4" or less, 10' intervals for piping at 1-1 /2" and larger. D. All hangers directly in contact with non-ferrous pipe or tubing shall be copper plated or plastic coated. E. Hangers or supports shall be placed within 1' of each horizontal elbow. Vertical runs of pipe not over 5' in length shall be supported on hangers placed not over 12" from the elbow on the connecting horizontal run. F. Install Figure 167 insulation shield between hanger and insulation on all piping; hangers to be installed outside pipe insulation. G. Vertical risers shall be supported with Grinnell Figure CT-121C plastic coated riser clamp; to be installed immediately below a coupling. 2.18 INSULATION A. All air supply, return, and fresh air ducts shall be insulated. Insulation for concealed ducts shall be 1 -1 /2 in. thick, 1-pound density glass fiber (flexible) duct insulation with factory applied reinforced aluminum foil jacket equal to Manville Type FSK. Secure to duct with Benjamin Foster No. 85-20 adhesive. Lap jacket 2 in. at all seams and secure flaps with staples "* and adhesive to provide complete vapor barrier. In addition, this concealed 235500 HEATING AND VENTILATING 25 of 72 Project No. 01091 Proposed Renovations March 6, 2009 Park House Smith College, Northampton, MA A. Standard IPS steel or wrought iron sleeves shall be provided wherever exposed pipes pass through masonry walls or partitions. Pipe sleeves are to be two pipe sizes larger than line size. Insulated piping sleeves shall be sized to allow insulation to pass through the sleeve without gouging. 2.14 HOT WATER SPECIALTIES AND VALVES A. Expansion tanks shall be ASME pre-charged diaphragm tanks, stamped 125 psi working pressure. Tanks shall be supplied with a heavy-duty butyl diaphragm, ring base, lifting rings, and an NPT system connection. An air charging valve connection shall be provided to facilitate adjusting pre- charged pressure to meet system conditions. B. Air removal fitting shall be in-line type, welded steel, with internal circuiting causing entrained air to be separated from the water. To be Spiro Vent "Air Separator", line size, with drain valve and strainer. No substitutions will be allowed. C. Air Vents: Air vents shall be provided where shown and at all other high points, where shown or not. Vents shall be of the manual type and shall be full line size, but in no case shall they be less than 2 in steel pipe. Chambers shall be a minimum of 12 in. high. Drain tubing shall be extended in such a manner that the globe valve and end of drain line are readily accessible. Air vents for radiation shall be installed in the return side of each loop of radiation before piping drops down to return main. These vents to be key or screw type equal to Dole or Taco. D. Automatic Make-Up Water Valve: Provide with three valve bypass for water system shall be Bell & Gossett, Cash, Taco, or Watts equal to Bell & Gossett No. B-3 Reducing Valve set for approximately 60 psig inlet and 21 psig outlet, field adjustable. Install backflow preventer piped to drain in inlet to automatic valve. Bypass to be 1 in. size with globe valve and one check valve in series. Strainers shall be as specified in other paragraphs of this Section of the Specifications. E. Furnish and install all temperature - pressure relief valves for all hot water heater systems. All to be ASME rated and similar to that manufactured by WATTS. 2.15 STEAM TO WATER HEAT EXCHANGERS A. Furnish and install where shown on the Drawings, steam to water, shell and tube U-bend removable tube bundle, steam in shell, water in tube exchangers. The heat exchanger shall include a cast iron bonnet, copper tubes, steel shell and baffles and be ASME stamped. B. HX-1 Park House - Shall be capable of heating 45 gpm from 140°F. to 160°F with 5 ibs steam and a .0005 fouling factor. 235500 HEATING AND VENTILATING 24 of 72 Project No. 01091 Proposed Renovations March 6, 2009 Park House Smith College, Northampton, MA A. Thermometers shall be Moeller, Taylor, or Trerice, equal to Taylor 30EJ31009 with aluminum case, industrial glass, red reading mercury, 9" scale length, 2-F subdivisions. Stem length shall be sufficient to assure accurate and fast response but in no case less than 3-1 /2" nor less than one-third of pipe diameter in which installed. Each thermometer shall be provided with a brass, monel, or stainless steel separable socket of matching length, and with lagging extension when installed in insulated pipe. Thermometers shall be adjustable angle type, positioned as required to be easily seen and read from normal operator's position. B. Ranges shall be manufacturer's standard closest to the following: 1 . Hot water heating system: 25-240oF 2.11 PRESSURE GAUGES A. Gauges shall be Ashcroft, Marsh, U.S. Gauge Company or Trerice equal to Ashcroft "Quality" line gauges, Grade A, 1% accuracy. Each gauge shall be installed with a pulsation damper (Ashcroft #110613) and a brass lever handle gauge cock (Ashcroft #1095). B. Model number, size and range to be as follows: 1 . Ashcroft - #1018, 3-1 /2" dial, red tipped pointer with scale range such that normal operating pressure is approximately at mid-scale. 2.12 UNIONS A. Unions shall be of the same class and material as the pipe and fittings of the system in which they are installed. In black steel piping systems, they shall be 200 lb. black malleable iron with brass ground joint equal to Dart Figures 0832, 0834, 0835, 0836 or 0838. In copper and brass piping, they shall be 125 lb. bronze or brass with ground joint. B. Flanged unions for welded pipe shall be weld neck, 150 lb. raised face. Flanged joints shall be packed with impregnated asbestos gaskets placed inside the bolt circle with graphite applied to both faces. C. Dielectric unions shall be provided between ferrous and non-ferrous piping to prevent galvanic corrosion. The dielectric unions shall meet the requirements for tensile strength of pipe fittings in accordance with Federal Specification WW-U-531 and shall be suitable for temperatures and pressures encountered. The ends shall be threaded, flanged, brazed, or soldered to match adjacent piping. The metal parts of the union shall be separated so that the electrical current is below I percent of the galvanic current, which would exist with metal to metal contact. 2.13 PIPE SLEEVES 235500 HEATING AND VENTILATING 23 of 72 Project No. 01091 Proposed Renovations March 6, 2009 Park House Smith College, Northampton, MA 4. Drain Valves - Watts No. B-6000 ball valve with hose adapter, cap and chain. 5. Ball Valves - Watts Series B-6001 -SS-XH. D. Screw end and flanged valves shall be as follows: 1 . Gate: 2-112 in. and smaller - Stockham Figure B-120; 3 in. and larger - Stockham Figure G-620 or G-623. 2. Globe: 2-1 /2 in. and smaller - Stockham Figure B-120 or 752; 3 in. and larger - Stockham Figure G-609 or G-613. 3. Check: 2-1 /2 in. and smaller - Stockham Figure B-319; 3 in. and larger - Stockham Figure G-931 . 4. Ball Valves: Watts Series 600-SS-SH. E. All shut-off valves 2-1 /2 in. and larger shall be Watts Series G-4000, cast iron body, 316, steel disc and shaft, Nordel EPT seat, designed for bubbletight shutoff. Valves to be fitted with lever operator for two position operation. F. Gate and/or globe valves shall not be used as substitutes for the following valves when used as balance valves. G. Balance and/or shut-off valves 4 in. and larger - Tour & Anderson Series STAF or Macon STVL, neoprene seat, semi-steel body, with stainless steel or bronze top and bottom bushings, 150 psig working pressure, 125 pound ANSI flanges, Figure 101 F or 1 18F, G6-H12. Provide open position stop on all valves. Provide hand operators for all valves which are 6 ft. or more above the floor. H. Balance and/or shut-off valves 2-1 /2 in. and 3 in. sizes - Tour & Anderson Series STAF or Macon STVL, lever operated, faced plug, neoprene seat, semi-steel body with stainless steel or bronze top and bottom bushings, 150 psig working pressure, Figure 118. Provide open position stops for all valves. I. For 2 in. and smaller - Balancing valves shall be Tour & Anderson Figure STAD or STA-D or Macon STVL, semi-steel body, bronze plug with neoprene or Teflon resilient face, bronze top and bottom bushings, complete with lever. Provide open position stop and plastic cap on all valves, which are labeled "Balance Valves" on the Drawings. All valves at fan coil unit shall be furnished with drain kit. J. Pump discharge check valves shall be Muessco, Williams & Hager, or Smolensky equal to Muessco 105-DT silent type, steel body, stainless steel trim and spring, renewable seat, 150 psig ASME rated. 2.10 THERMOMETERS Aftk 235500 HEATING AND VENTILATING 22 of 72 Project No. 01091 Proposed Renovations March 6, 2009 Park House Smith College, Northampton, MA 2.8 CIRCULATING PUMPS A. The pumps shall be of the centrifugal in-line coupled type, especially designed and constructed for quiet operation. Capacity shall be as shown on the Drawings. B. Pump end shall be of the in-line, single stage design with close-coupled motor. The pump models shall be furnished as shown on the plans and installed in accordance with the manufacture's recommendations. The pump shall be capable of operating continuously at temperatures from 5°F to 2500 (-15°C to 121°C) and working pressures of 175 PSI (12 Bars). Pump flanges shall be ANSI B16.1 , 125-lb. flat face. C. The pump housing, motor stool, and shaft coupling shall be constructed of close-grained cast iron. The impeller, impeller seal ring, and pump shaft shall be constructed of stainless steel. The impeller shall be secured to the splined pump shaft end by means of a stainless steel lock nut and locking washer. The seal faces shall be of tungsten carbide/carbon with other mechanical seal parts constructed of stainless steel. D. Motor shall be nominal integrated variable frequency drive totally enclosed fan cooled 1750 rpm and shall be especially selected for quiet operation. The horse power of the motor shall be of such size as to insure non- overloading of the motor throughout the pump curve without the use of motor service factor. Pump motors shall be premium efficiency. Provide steel base. E. Pumps shall be Grundfos Series L. No substitutions will be allowed. 2.9 VALVES A. All valves shall be of the same make except as noted below for special valves and shall be Crane, Watts, Walworth, or Tour & Anderson manufacture based on the following Stockham valves. All ball valves shall be Watts, and all balancing valves shall be Tour and Anderson. No substitutions will be allowed. B. All water valves installed in copper tube piping shall be, in general, solder end pattern, all bronze with iron hand wheel, rated for not less than 200 pounds non-shock water pressure. In general, all line service valves are to be gate valves; manual vents are to be globe type. C. Solder end valves are as follows: 1 . Gate Valves - Stockham Figure B-109. 2. Globe Valves - Stockham B-1 4T. 3. Check Valves - Stockham B-309. 235500 HEATING AND VENTILATING 21 of 72 Project No. 01091 Proposed Renovations March 6, 2009 Park House Smith College, Northampton, MA tubes from loosening or pulling out by continued expansion. No soldered or welded joints or compression couplings shall be permitted. C. All cabinets shall be reinforced where necessary to provide stiffness. Cabinets shall be constructed of 16 gage quality steel. Fronts shall be secured in place by quick opening fasteners with vandal proof heads. Cabinets and fronts shall be phosphatized and painted inside and outside with one coat of grey primer. Complete cabinets and convector elements are to be manufactured by the same company. A horizontal channel stiffener shall be installed on the inside of the front panel of all units' 36" or longer. D. The convectors shall be securely attached to the building structure and shall be set dead level in both directions. All convectors shall be mounted one block course (8") above finished floor. E. The convectors shall be finished with factory baked enamel finish in color to be selected by the Architect from manufacturer's standard colors. All fasteners shall be tamper-proof. F. Convector A - Type SW-A: Type SW-A cabinets shall be constructed from not less than 14 gauge CRS front and top and No. 16 gauge CRS back and sides. The front shall wrap around the sides of the cabinet and shall fasten at sides with vandal proof screws. Air outlet louvers of venetian type shall be in slope top. Type SW-A air inlet shall be through open bottom. Back shall be provided with holes for mounting on wall. G. Dampers: Provide factory installed Allen Head operated dampers for all convectors. The damper operator shall have two free wheeling clutches for automatic engagement at the beginning (closing or opening) position and shall position the damper blade at any intermediate point between full closed and full open; at the full open and full closed position, the clutch shall disengage allowing the die-formed, unbreakable nylon damper knob to be turned beyond the full closed or open position without jamming or distorting the damper assembly. The operator is to be 5/8 in. machined aluminum screw and zinc die-cast iron and escutcheon plate. The escutcheon plate shall be fastened through the enclosure to a 3/32 in. back-up plate with countersunk sheet metal screws. H. Access Doors: Convectors shall be provided with one access door. Access door shall be 5-1 /8 in. by 4-1 /8 in. and shall be located in the inlet louver area. Access doors shall be hinged on side with straight shaft type hinge and shall fasten with cam-type locking device with Allen Head operator. I. End Pockets: Where noted, convectors shall be provided with 4 in. end pockets, both ends. End pocket shall consist of the cabinet extended in length as noted with No. 20 gauge CRS baffle spot welded to back of cabinet extruding from heating element to air outlet louvers. 235500 HEATING AND VENTILATING 20 of 72 Project No. 01091 Proposed Renovations March 6, 2009 Park House Smith College, Northampton, MA A. The utility vent set shall be of the centrifugal fan type completely assembled with fan, fan scroll, motor, belt drive, motor mount and motor housing. The capacity shall be as shown on the Drawings and certified performance tests by AMCA shall be submitted with the Shop Drawings. B. The fan shall be mounted and supported as shown by the detail on the Drawings. The mounting shall be complete with vibration isolators as recommended by the manufacturer. The unit shall be provided with weather protection. C. Fan housing shall be constructed of steel sheet and all parts shall be bonderized and then coated with baked primer-finisher especially formulated to meet stringent corrosion resistance standards. The fan scroll shall be attached to the side plates by means of continuous lock seam or welded seam construction. Intermittent spot welded type construction will not be acceptable. D. The fan wheels shall be of the backwardly inclined non-overloading type. E. The shaft shall be constructed of C1040 ground and polished steel. F. The bearings shall be of the ball bearing concentric lock type and shall be especially constructed for quiet operation. Bearings shall be of the self- aligning grease pack, pillow block type, selected for a minimum L50 life in excess of 200,000 hours. G. Motor and drive shall be belt drive with adjustable motor sheave. Motor nameplate horsepower shall exceed brake horsepower by a minimum of 5%. Belts shall be of the oil resistant type. Motor shall be especially designed for quiet operation. H. A factory wired non-fused disconnect switch shall be located under the housing of the unit. Provide spring vibration isolators for each fan. I. Fan shall be Loren-Cook Model CPV or equal by Greenheck. 2.7 CONVECTORS A. Convectors shall be of the wall mounted or semi-recessed type as shown on Drawings for heating with hot water. Unit shall have a capacity as shown on the drawings and shall be rated in accordance with Code CS140-47 of the National Bureau of Standards. B. Convector elements shall be of suitable type for use with hot water and shall consist of round seamless copper tubes, non-ferrous fins, cast iron headers, steel element end supports and fin tube supports all suitably protected against corrosion. All tubes shall be mechanically expanded into fin collars. Tubes shall be expanded and rolled into headers with contact strengthened by tapered brass bushings so inserted as to prevent 235500 HEATING AND VENTILATING 19 of 72 Project No. 01091 Proposed Renovations March 6, 2009 Park House Smith College, Northampton, MA a. Fitting Composition: Brass compression fittings consisting of nut, ferrule and insert with a ring for connecting PEX or copper tubing to manifold. b. Fitting Types:Manifold to PEX tubing sizes 3/8", 112", 5/8" 34" Manifold to 1 /2"/ copper tubing Hose Bib Manifold Cap C. Required Features: Well fitting, easily installed. Copper tubing should not require soldering. D. System Requirements 1 . Installations: Radiant tubing systems shall be installed in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions and recommendations. All relevant information shall be included relating to the following: a. tube handling b. tube measuring C. tube cutting d. tube bending e. tube repairing f. tube connections g. tube solvent sensitivity h. tube UV light sensitivity i. tube capacity and pressure drop j. tube loop layout patterns k. tube fastening procedures I. manifold assembly instructions M. manifold location n. fitting assembly instructions o. insulation practices P. installation method by construction type q_ control applications r. system start-up procedures 2. Drawings: All drawings or design plans of the radiant tubing system shall be in accordance with manufacturer recommended procedures for the products utilized. 3. Components: All product components of the radiant tubing system shall be supplied by one company, including: PEX tubing, fittings, manifolds, and other recommended and required hardware to assure a compatible and a complete radiant tubing system. 2.6 UTILITY FAN 235500 HEATING AND VENTILATING 18 of 72 Project No. 01091 Proposed Renovations March 6, 2009 Park House Smith College, Northampton, MA 4. Pressure rating for water and temperature for which the pressure rating is valid. 5. ASTM designation, ASTM F876. 6. Manufacturer's name and production code. Additional Marking 1 . Date of manufacturing. 2. Oxygen diffusion protection to DIN4726. 3. Length indications in five (5) foot intervals, for ease of measuring the tubing. 2. Manifolds: Manifolds used in PEX tubing installation shall consist of individual loop control and adaptation utilizing modular Polyacrylamide thermoplastic components ready for assembly. The manifold should also include the following features: a. Modular Design: This eliminates the need for multiple manifold configurations and allows for future expansion. b. Venting: Each supply and return vent/temperature module shall have an automatic integrated air vent. C. Temperature Measurements: Each supply and return manifold shall have a thermometer integrated to indicate supply and return water temperatures. Temperature readouts will assist in the diagnostics and set up of a radiant heating system. d. Flow Measurements: Each loop return block shall have incremental adjustment and flow rate indication. Temperature and flow readouts will assist in the diagnostics and set up of a radiant heating system. e. Balancing Valves: Each return block will provide a balancing valve and a visual flow meter for proper balancing of the radiant heating system allowing different loop lengths and tube sizes to be connected to the same manifold. Each valve shall be able to fully close to allow complete loop isolation. f. Supply/Return Indication: Each loop supply module shall be red to indicate incoming hot water, and each return loop module shall be blue to indicate cooler return water. g. Loop Isolation: Each loop supply and return module shall have a means of fully isolating the loop from the rest of the system. h. Piping Inlet/Outlet Size: All manifold inlets/outlets shall be 1 -1 /4" NPT female, to fit maximum size plumbing and greater system adaptability. 3. Fittings 235500 HEATING AND VENTILATING 17 of 72 Project No. 01091 Proposed Renovations March 6, 2009 Park House Smith College, Northampton, MA Nominal Tube Minimum Burst PressureMinimum Burst Pressure Size psi @ 180oF psi @ 1 80o 3/8" 250 210 1 /2" 195 165 5/8" 190 165 3/4" 190 165 i. Burst Pressure: The minimum burst pressure for PEX plastic tubing shall be as given. Nominal Tube Minimum Burst Minimum Burst Size Pressure Pressure psi @ 1 80o psi @ 1 80o 3/8" 275 235 112" 215 185 5/8" 210 180 3/4" 210 180 j. Environmental Stress Cracking: "There shall be no loss of pressure in the tubing when tested in accordance with 7.9" (paragraph of ASTM F876). k. Degree of Crosslinking: "When tested in accordance with 7.9, (paragraph of ASTM F876), the degree of crosslinking for PEX tubing material shall be within the range of 65% to 89% inclusive." I. Stabilizer Migration Resistance: "When tested in accordance with 7.10 (paragraph of ASTM F876), the time t2 (t2 = time to failure of boiled sample) shall be at least 50% of the time, t," (t, = time to failure of unboiled sample). M. Bend Radius: The minimum bend radius for cold bending of the tube shall not be more than six (6) times the outside diameter for up to a 90 degree bend. For 180 degree bends, the minimum bend radius shall be as follows: 3/8" tubing 3.0" radius 112" tubing 3.75" radius 5/8" tubing 4.5" radius 3/4" tubing 5.75" radius n. Marking: All PEX tubing shall be marked at intervals of not more than five (5) feet in accordance with ASTM F876 as follows: 1 . Nominal tubing size. 2. Type of plastic tubing material. 3. Standard dimension Ratio, SDR9. 235500 HEATING AND VENTILATING 16 of 72 Project No. 01091 Proposed Renovations March 6, 2009 Park House Smith College, Northampton, MA 1 . American Society of Testing and Materials, Standard Specification F876, entitled "Crosslinked Polyethylene (PEX) Tubing". 2. American Society of Testing and Materials, Standard Specification F877 entitled, "Crosslinked Polyethylene (PEX) Plastic Hot and Cold Water Distribution Systems". 3. German Standard DIN 4726, "Pipelines of plastic materials used in warm water floor heating systems". C. Materials 1 . Tube a. Tube Composition: Crosslinked Polyethylene (PEX) in accordance with ASTM F876. b. Manufacturing Method: All PEX tubing shall be manufactured using the "electron beam method of crosslinking, performed at ambient temperature and pressure. C. Working Pressure/Temperature: The minimum continuous working pressure rating of the PEX tubing shall be 100 psi @ 180 F working temperature and 80 psi @ 200 F working temperature. d. Physical Properties: As supplied by Embassy Industries, Inc., all PEX tubing shall conform to ASTM F876 "American Society of Testing and materials, Standard Specification F876 entitled, "Crosslinked Polyethylene (PEX) Tubing", and German Standard DIN 4726 for "Oxygen Permeation" as related to the following paragraphs: e. Tubing: The tubing shall be homogeneous throughout and essentially uniform in color, opacity, density, and other properties. The inside and outside surfaces shall be matte or glossy in appearance. the tubing walls shall be free of cracks, holes, blisters, voids, foreign inclusion, or other defects that are visible to the naked eye and that may affect the wall integrity. f. Dimensions and Tolerances Nominal Average Outside Minimum Tubing Size Diameter Wall Thickness 3/8" 0.5 00" 0.070" 1 /2" 0.625" 0.070" 5/8" 0.750" 0.083" 3/4" 0.875" 0.097" g. Density: The crosslinked polyethylene tubing material shall have a density in the range from 0.926 to 0.949 Mg/m3. h. Sustained Pressure: 235500 HEATING AND VENTILATING 15 of 72 Project No. 01091 Proposed Renovations March 6, 2009 Park House Smith College, Northampton, MA B. The Drawings shall not be submitted to the Engineer for approval until the ductwork has been coordinated with all other trades. The Sheet Metal Contractor shall assume the responsibility for and bear the cost of any alterations required after approval because of inaccurate Shop Drawings or lack of proper coordination, and also for any changes in sheet metal erected prior to approval of Shop Drawings. 2.3 AIR DIFFUSERS, GRILLES, AND REGISTERS A. Diffusers, grilles, and registers shall be Anemostat-Waterloo, Titus, or Barber Colman, equal to those specified in the Following paragraphs. See Drawings for sizes, cfm's, locations, and qualities of various types. In general, all units shall be installed with face bars parallel to floor or nearest wall. All volume control dampers shall be key operated. Finish for all diffusers, grilles, and registers to be factory finished with color selected by the Engineer. B. Ceiling Exhaust Register (CER) - Titus Model 350FL/AG-15 aluminum deflected blade register, off-white finish, with opposed blade damper. C. Top Exhaust Register (TER) - Titus Model 350FL/AG-15 aluminum deflected blade register, off-white finish, with opposed blade damper. D. Top Supply Registers (TSR) - Titus Model 271 FL/AG-15 aluminum construction, double deflection, white finish, with opposed blade damper. E. Ceiling Diffuser (CD) - Titus Model TDCA steel construction, adjustable discharge diffuser, with opposed blade damper. 2.4 LOUVERS A. All wall louvers shall be extruded aluminum construction, equal to the following Ruskin Mfg. Co. model. 1 . Type "A" - No. ELF375D with box frame, extended sill, 1 /2" aluminum mesh bird screen, and custom color Kynar 500 finish. Color selection by Architect. 2.5 RADIANT HEATING DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM A. Scope of Work 1 . This Specification is to provide relevant product data for a radiant tubing system consisting of PEX tubing with oxygen permeation protection, distribution manifolds and associated fittings. B. References 235500 HEATING AND VENTILATING 14 of 72 Project No. 01091 Proposed Renovations March 6, 2009 Park House Smith College, Northampton, MA shall completely close the wall opening and provide anchorage to the dampers. Damper blade stack shall not reduce duct free area. P. Where called for on Drawings, final connections to diffusers and registers shall be made with flexible ductwork, UL listed, Class 1 ; to be Thermaflex S-LP-10 for exhaust/return, M-KA for supply, or equal. ,Joints shall be sealed with duct tape and Thermaflex duct straps. Connection to rigid ductwork shall be made with spun conical taps. Q. Flexible Air Duct: 1 . Flexible air duct shall be Wiremold, Thermoflex, Cleveflex, or equal, and shall be equal to Wiremold Type CRK Vanguard Duct. 2. Flexible duct shall be manufactured from fully annealed aluminum and formed into a multiple corrugated construction, then encased with 1 inch, 3/4 lb. density fiberglass blanket and sheathed with a vinyl vapor barrier. The duct shall have an inside-bending radius of not more than 3/4 inch I.D. It must comply with the latest NFPA Bulletin 90A and be listed as Class 1 air duct, UL Standard 181 . Ducat shall have published pressure ratings of not less than 10 ft. S.A. positive pressure, .5 inch W.A. negative pressure. Duct shall also be UL rated for velocities up to 6,500 F.P.M.E. R. Flexible Connections: Provide, in each duct connection to every air handling unit and fan, 30 ounce double neoprene coated woven glass fabric flexible connection not less than 4" long securely held to retaining clamps. S. All exhaust ducts serving shower shall be aluminum. T. Install duct-type smoke detectors furnished by the Electrical Subcontractor. U. Fabricate kitchen hood exhaust ducts and supports, used for smoke and vapor removal from cooking equipment, of 16 ga. Minimum stainless steel where concealed, and of 18 ga. Minimum stainless steel where exposed. For duct construction, comply with SMACNA, "HVAC" duct Construction Standards", and NFPA 96, "Removal of Smoke and Grease Laden Vapors from Commercial Cooking Equipment". All joints shall have leak-proof continuous welded seams. Provide accessible gasketed, bolted cleanouts at each change of direction. 2.2 DUCTWORK SHOP DRAWINGS A. Layout and details shall clearly indicate compliance with the above Specifications. Any variations in design details, fittings, or accessory items for which approval is requested shall be specifically marked on the Drawings, as shall any major variations from the Drawing (minor variations are assumed to be field conditions). Drawings for Fan Room shall be at 3/8 in. = 1 ft. 0 in. scale. 235500 HEATING AND VENTILATING 13 of 72 Project No. 01091 Proposed Renovations March 6, 2009 Park House Smith College, Northampton, MA construction with cast type rotary latches. Where space limitations do not allow for full swing of the access door, two rotary type latches shall be used. Doors located in insulated ducts shall be furnished with extended frames to serve as a stop for insulation. Insulate doors located in insulated ductwork. All doors shall be gasketed. Door shall be 12" by 12" minimum except where limited by duct width and shall be larger where necessary for access to fire damper fusible links or other devices. J. Hangers for all rectangular ducts 4 sq. ft. in area or above shall be round bar type fastened to 1 -1 /4" x 1-1 /4" x 1 /8" angles under the ducts. Ducts less than 4 sq. ft. in area shall be hung with black 1" x 1 /16" strap iron bent 1 " under bottom side of the duct and fastened to the duct with sheet metal screws, using not less than two screws per side and as many more so that they are not greater than 6" centers. K. Hangers are to be placed on not greater than 8'-0" centers or closer where required so that the ductwork can support the weight of a man at any point. L. Wherever sound insulation lining is called for, the sheet metal duct size shown on the Drawings must be increased to provide the clear inside dimensions or cross sectional area shown on the Drawings. M. Duct joint sealing, reinforcing, flanges, etc. for rectangular sheet metal ducts shall be based on maintaining airtight ducts at 2" WG Maximum static pressure with maximum leakage of 5% of total fan capacity; 112 of 1% for round and oval ducts. All joints in ductwork shall be sealed with U.L. classified United Duct Sealer, or equal. N. Duct systems shall have sufficient volume dampers, whether or not shown, to control and adjust the total volume of each system, each zone, in each branch and at each diffuser or grille. The HVAC Contractor shall consult with the College's Balancing Contractor for the proper placement of volume dampers prior to installation. Volume dampers shall be of the butterfly type with 18 gauge galvanized iron blade. All dampers shall be equipped with Duro-Dyne Type UNXLD locking quadrant. All dampers shall be provided with damper bearings on each end of shaft mounted on a 2" x 3" x 1 /8" plate held to duct with sheet metal screws. Maximum width of single blades shall be 14". Splitter dampers shall not be used. 0. Provide where shown or indicated on the Drawings fire and/or smoke dampers with a UL label for not less than 1 -1 /2 hour fire protection rating in accordance with UL-555 continuing inspection service. Blades and frame shall be galvanized steel construction with blades of an interlocking design, having two folded guides which serve as stops. Fusible links shall be equal to Grinnell Fig. 1351 , 20 pounds, issue A. Dampers shall be installed according to latest edition of NFPA-90A, mounted with 1-1 /2" x 1 -1 /2" x 1 /8" returning angles on both sides of partition, wall, or floor, and sleeves as per the UL test under which the damper fire rating was obtained. Angles 235500 HEATING AND VENTILATING 12 of 72 Project No. 01091 Proposed Renovations March 6, 2009 Park House Smith College, Northampton, MA B. All sheet metal ducts shall be constructed of galvanized steel sheet of bend forming quality. C. Duct construction shall be in accordance with best practices and latest ASHRAE or SMACNA requirements for metal gauges, joints, reinforcing and supports. All exposed ductwork shall be constructed and hung to provide a neat, smooth, finished appearance. Cadmium plated sheet metal screws shall be used on all exposed ductwork. Ducts shall be free from thumping or rattling when fans are turned on or off. D. Duct sizes shall be strictly followed and no changes in shape or dimensions shall be made by the HVAC Contractor without first obtaining approval from the Engineer, except that duct shall be offset as required to clear structural members and to co-ordinate with other trades and any duct changes must meet the latest ASHRAE and SMACNA standards. E. The center line radius of all duct elbows where shown on the Drawings shall be at least one and one-half times the width of the duct. Where building conditions do not allow for this radius or where square turns are shown, manufactured double walled duct turns equal to Aero-Dyne or Tuttle 0Y Bailey shall be used in the supply or exhaust air ducts and "Sonotru" acoustical attenuating turns as manufactured by South Control Products Co. shall be used in any air ducts where acoustical insulation is included. F. Duct sections V-6" wide or less shall be butted together and jointed with flat drive cleats 2-1 /8" wide. Top and bottom cleats shall be cut flush with duct and side cleats bent over to make a tight joint. Standing bar slips as specified for ducts over 18" may be used at the HVAC Contractor's option. G. Ducts from 18" to 30" wide shall be jointed with 1 /2" standing bar slips made of metal the same as or heavier than duct sheets. joints in ducts with either dimension over 30" shall have 1" standing bar slips on those sides over 30". Where sides are over 42", the standing bar slips will be reinforced with 1 -1 /2" x 1 -1 /2" x 1 /8" angles. Additional angle stiffeners not over 60" apart shall be provided between joints. Ducts over 60" in width shall be jointed with 1 -1 /2" x 1 /8" angle irons riveted to ductwork on all sides with 1 /8" rivets at not more than 4-1 /2" on centers, sections bolted with 3/16" stove bolts at not over 6" centers, sheets turned over angles into joint at least 1 /4". H. Sheet metal screws 3/4" #10 may be used to attach stiffener angles to ductwork to secure seams, spaced not over 12" on centers and not less than two per side of 12" or more, except where specified otherwise. Button punching shall not be used except for pre-erection attachment of fittings. I. Provide hinged galvanized steel access and inspection doors opposite each manual damper, reheat coil, at each fire damper, and at every duct mounted control device. Doors shall be equal to Buensod-Stacey Type S-2 of rigid 235500 HEATING AND VENTILATING 11 of 72 Project No. 01091 Proposed Renovations March 6, 2009 Park House Smith College, Northampton, MA Awk area be necessary, the HVAC Contractor shall cover the entire working area with canvas tarpaulins in an approved manner. 1 .19 RECORD DRAWINGS A. Submit Record Drawings as specified in Division 1 . B. Record Drawings shall reflect all changes from the Contract Drawings whether by change order or by field conditions. Principal dimensions of concealed work, fire dampers, volume dampers, control dampers and control valves, and for piping installation, valve numbers shall be added to these Drawings prior to submittal to the Engineer. In addition to the above all revised areas shall be clearly marked with a revision bubble. 1 .20 ALTERNATE BIDS A. See Section 01230 for a general description of the Base and Alternate Bids. Work of the HVAC Subcontractor is more specifically described below. B. The Base Bid shall be the lump sum price for all labor and materials necessary for and reasonably incidental to providing all HVAC work specified and shown on the Drawings, less the cost of all extra work described in the Alternates. C. Schedule of Alternates 1 . ALTERNATE NUMBER 1 : Deduct the Work of the Contract to construct the new handicapped ramp at the front entrance 2. ALTERNATE NUMBER 2: Deduct the Work of the Contract to furnish and install the makeup air unit MAU-1 and all associated piping, controls, power, wire, and sheet metal. 3. ALTERNATE NUMBER 3: Reduce the work required to construct Room 313, maintain the heat, and sprinkler protection. 4. ALTERNATE NUMBER 4: Reduce the work of replacing all existing sprinkler heads. 5. ALTERNATE NUMBER 5: Furnish and install a new solar domestic hot water heating system. PART 2 - MATERIALS 2.1 SHEET METAL WORK A. All duct runs shall be checked for clearances before installation of any ductwork. Above hung ceilings, duct locations and elevations must be co- ordinated with work of other trades to avoid conflicts with structure, piping, conduit and light fixtures. 235500 HEATING AND VENTILATING 10 of 72 Project No. 01091 Proposed Renovations March 6, 2009 Park House Smith College, Northampton, MA ` A. The Contractor shall thoroughly clean and flush all piping, ducts, and equipment of all foreign substances inside and out before being placed in operation. Thoroughly flush all piping of any oils, burrs, solder, and flux. Replace strainers and filters at completion of cleaning. B. If any part of a system should be stopped or damaged by any foreign matter after being placed in operation, the system shall be disconnected, cleaned, and reconnected at no additional cost to the Owner. C. During the course of construction, all ducts and pipes shall be capped to insure adequate protection against the entrance of foreign matter. D. Keep the job site free from the accumulation of waste material and rubbish. Upon completion of all work under the Contract, the Contractor shall remove from the premises all rubbish, debris, and excess materials left over from his work. Any oil or grease stains on floor areas caused by the Contractor shall be removed and floor areas left clean. 1 .18 CUTTING AND PATCHING A. Cutting and/or drilling of all openings and holes 4" in diameter or smaller, required for the installation of HVAC in the building, shall be performed by the HVAC Contractor. All work and materials shall be installed in such a manner and at such time to keep cutting and patching to a minimum. Cutting and/or drilling of structural supports (ie. beams or joists) is not allowed without written approval by the Engineer. Location for openings, etc. shall be checked by the HVAC Contractor, and error due to failure to co-ordinate work with other divisions shall be the responsibility of the HVAC Contractor failing to co-ordinate, who shall make the corrections at his own expense. B. All holes larger than 4" in diameter shall be provided by the General Contractor. C. Work shall include furnishing and locating sleeves or inserts required before the new walls are built, or be responsible for the cost of cutting and patching required for pipes where sleeves were not installed or where incorrectly located. The HVAC Contractor shall do all drilling required for the installation of hangers. D. Patching of all holes, after installation of piping or equipment, shall be performed by the General Contractor or appropriate tradesmen. E. All pipe cutting or threading shall be done in a location approved by the Owner. F. No pipe cutting or threading shall be done in areas where completed concrete floor slab is to remain in finishes or be painted later. Should this 235500 HEATING AND VENTILATING 9 of 72 Project No. 01091 Proposed Renovations March 6, 2009 Park House Smith College, Northampton, MA C. The manual shall include the following information: 1 . Description of systems. 2. Description of start up, operation, and shutdown procedures for each item of equipment. 3. Winter/summer changeover procedures. 4. Schedule of adjustment, care, and routine maintenance for each item of equipment. 5. Lubrication chart. 6. Wiring and control diagrams with data to explain detailed operation and control of each item of equipment. 7. Valve chart. 8. List of recommended spare parts. 9. Copies of all service contracts. 10. Performance curves for pumps, fans, etc. 11 . List of all names, addresses, and phone numbers of all Contractors as well as the local representative for each item of equipment. D. See the "Automatic Temperature Control" paragraphs of this Section for additional requirements. 1 .16 PROTECTION A. Work under each Section shall include protecting the work and material of all other Sections from damage by work or workmen, and shall include making good all damage thus caused. B. The Contractor shall be responsible for work and equipment until finally inspected, tested, and accepted; protect work against theft, injury, or damage; and carefully store material and equipment received on site which is not immediately installed. Close open ends of work with temporary covers or plugs during construction to prevent entry of obstructing or foreign material. C. Work under each Section includes receiving, unloading, uncrating, storing, protecting, setting in place, and connecting-up completely any equipment supplied under each Section. Work under each Section shall also include exercising special care in handling and protecting equipment and fixtures, and shall include the cost of replacing any of the equipment and fixtures which are missing or damaged by reason of mishandling or failure to protect on the part of the HVAC Contractor. D. Equipment and material stored on the job site shall be protected from the weather, vehicles, dirt, and/or damage by workmen or machinery. Insure that all electrical or absorbent equipment or material is protected from moisture during storage. 1 .17 CLEANING ,awl*� 235500 HEATING AND VENTILATING 8 of 72 Project No. 01091 Proposed Renovations March 6, 2009 Park House Smith College, Northampton, MA Contractor to drive his machines and light his work. He shall provide his own light bulbs, plugs, sockets, etc. C. All broken or waste material, rags, packing, etc., resulting from his work shall be removed by the HVAC Contractor. 1 .13 WORK CONCEALED A. All piping and ductwork shall be installed concealed in all areas except storage rooms, closets, and mechanical or electrical equipment rooms, unless specifically noted otherwise on the Drawings. B. Piping containing water shall not be installed concealed in walls having an exterior exposure above grade. 1 .14 GUARANTEE A. The HVAC Contractor shall guarantee the satisfactory operation of his work. in all parts for a period of one (1) year after date of substantial completion, and shall agree to promptly repair or replace any items of his work which are found to be defective during this period. B. The HVAC Contractor shall pay for repair of damage to the building caused A"k, by defects in his work and for repair to plaster, wood, and other materials or equipment caused by replacement or repairs to the entire satisfaction of the Engineer. C. Any part of the work installed under this Contract requiring excessive maintenance shall be considered as being defective. 1 .15 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS A. After all final tests and adjustments have been completed, fully instruct the proper Owner's representative in all details of operation for equipment installed. Supply qualified personnel to operate equipment for sufficient length of time to assure that Owner's representative is properly qualified to take over operation and maintenance procedures. This Contractor shall video tape the instruction procedures and deliver three (3) copies of the tape with the Operation and Maintenance Manuals. B. Furnish the Engineer, for approval, three (3) copies of an Operation and Maintenance Manual. Inscribe the following identification on the cover: the words OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL, the name and location of the equipment or the building, the name of the Contractor, and the Contract number. The manual shall have a Table of Contents with tab sheets placed before each section. The instructions shall be legible and easily read, with large sheets of drawings folded in. The manuals shall be bound in hard binders or an approved equivalent. 235500 HEATING AND VENTILATING 7 of 72 Project No. 01091 Proposed Renovations March 6, 2009 Park House Smith College, Northampton, MA A. The HVAC Contractor shall refer to all the Drawings of interior details, plans, elevations, and structural layout in preparing his estimate. These documents are intended to supplement the Mechanical and Electrical Plans and Specifications and any applicable work indicated or implied thereon is to be considered a part of the Subcontract requirements. B. The Plans and Specifications are complementary and anything called for, or reasonably implied, in the Plans and not in the Specifications, or vice versa, shall be considered as called for or reasonably implied in both. C. The HVAC Contractor shall assume all responsibility in scaling measurements from the Drawings. D. Because of the small scale of the Drawings, it is not possible to indicate all offsets, fittings and accessories that may be required. The HVAC Contractor shall carefully investigate the structural and finish conditions affecting all his work and shall arrange such work accordingly, furnishing such fittings, traps, offsets, valves, and accessories as may be required to meet such conditions, at no additional cost. E. The HVAC Contractor shall consult the College's Temperature Control and Balancing Contractor to co-ordinate work of these trades and to have a full comprehension of the work to be done as well as to determine the conditions affecting the location and placement of all equipment and materials. 1 .11 PRODUCT HANDLING A. Delivery: The HVAC Contractor shall provide for the delivery of all his materials and fixtures to the building site when required so as to carry on his work efficiently and to avoid delaying his work and that of other trades. Delivery and storage of materials and equipment must be coordinated with the Smith College Physical Plant, and is limited to areas designated by the College. B. Storage and Handling: The HVAC Contractor shall, at all times, fully protect his work and materials from injury or loss by others. Any injury or loss, which may occur, shall be made good without expense to the Owner. The HVAC Contractor shall be responsible for the proper protection of all his materials until the building is accepted by the Owner. 1 .12 ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS A. All necessary tools machinery, scaffolding, and transportation for completion of his Subcontract shall be provided by the HVAC Contractor. B. The HVAC Contractor shall provide his own portable extension lines and obtain 120 volt, 60 cycle, single phase electric power from the General 235500 HEATING AND VENTILATING 6 of 72 Project No. 01091 Proposed Renovations March 6, 2009 Park House Smith College, Northampton, MA designed to function properly in that portion of the work for which they are intended, and with the same brand of manufacturer for each class or category of material or equipment. Electrical materials and equipment of types for which there are Underwriters Laboratories standard requirements, listings, or labels shall conform to their requirements and be so labeled. 1 .7 SUBMITTALS A. Before ordering materials shipped to the job, the HVAC Contractor shall submit to the Engineer six (6) sets of catalogue cuts, manufacturers' data sheets, or Shop Drawings, giving all details, dimensions, capacities, etc. of all materials to be furnished on the project. In addition to the above, one (1) set of Shop Drawings shall be submitted to the College's HVAC Department for review and approval. B. The HVAC Contractor shall check the Shop Drawings thoroughly for compliance with the Plans and Specifications before submitting them to the Engineer for review, making any and all changes which may be required. C. The review of Shop Drawings by the Engineer shall not relieve the Contractor from any obligation to perform the work strictly in accordance with the Contract Drawings and Specifications. The responsibility for errors in Shop Drawings shall remain with the HVAC Contractor. D. In the event that materials are being delivered to or installed on the job for which Shop Drawings or samples have not been approved and/or which are not in accordance with the Specifications, the Contractor will be required to remove such materials and substitute approved materials at his own expense and as directed by the Engineer. 1 .8 PERMITS, FEES AND INSPECTIONS A. The HVAC Contractor shall secure all permits and pay all fees required for his work. He shall be required to secure all other permits and pay all other fees and charges incidental to the proper carrying out of the Contract. He is to assume all responsibility regarding the observance of the rules and regulations so far as they relate to his part of the work. B. The HVAC Contractor shall arrange and pay for all required inspections of his work. 1 .9 TEMPORARY HOOK-UPS A. The General Contractor will provide any temporary hook-ups required for the use of water or sanitary for construction purposes and testing out apparatus as specified in Division 1. 1 .10 PLANS AND SPECIFICATIONS 235500 HEATING AND VENTILATING 5 of 72 Project No. 01091 Proposed Renovations March 6, 2009 Park House Smith College, Northampton, MA E. The arrangement of all piping, ductwork, conduit, wire and cable indicated on the Drawings is diagrammatic only, and indicates the minimum requirements of this work. Conditions at the building shall determine the actual arrangement of runs, bends, offsets, etc. The HVAC Contractor shall lay out all his work at the site and be responsible for the accuracy thereof. Conditions at the building shall be the determining factor for all measurements. F. All work shall be laid out and installed so as to require the least amount of cutting and patching. Drilling of all holes required for the installation of pipes, conduit, and cable runs shall be performed by the Contractor installing such items. G. The HVAC Contractor shall be responsible for the proper protection of his work and materials from injury or loss at the hands of others and shall make good such loss or injury at his own expense. All pipes left open during the progress of the work shall be capped or plugged at all times. All instruments and operating apparatus shall be protected by suitable means. H. The HVAC Contractor shall be responsible for all equipment and materials installed under this Section until the final acceptance of the project by the Owner. I. The HVAC Contractor shall check the Plans and Specifications before ordering any materials and the installation of work. Any discrepancies shall be called to the attention of the Engineer before proceeding with the work. J. Before submitting his bid, the HVAC Contractor shall visit the site with the Drawings and Specifications and shall become thoroughly familiar with all conditions affecting his work since the HVAC Contractor will be held responsible for any assumption he may make in regard thereto. 1 .5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Equality of materials or articles other than those named or described in this Section will be determined in accordance with the provisions of the General Requirements. No substitution will be allowed for the Trane, York, or McQuay air handling units and condensing unit, Trane, McQuay or International fan coil units, Watts ball valves, Grundfos pumps, Tour and Anderson balancing valves, Tunstall steam traps. B. The HVAC Contractor shall agree to accept as final the results of tests secured by a qualified testing laboratory engaged by the Owner. Tests will be conducted in accordance with the General Requirements. 1 .6 PRODUCTS A. With the exception of items specifically noted otherwise, all materials shall be new, full weight, and first class in every respect, without defects, and 235500 HEATING AND VENTILATING 4 of 72 Project No. 01091 Proposed Renovations March 6, 2009 Park House Smith College, Northampton, MA the College and shall be delivered to such places designated by the College. 1 .3 CODES, ORDINANCES, AND INSPECTIONS A. All materials and the installation thereof shall conform to the requirements of the Massachusetts State Building Code, Electrical Code, Fuel Gas and Plumbing Code and local laws, rules, regulations, and codes pertaining thereto. Where provisions of the Contract Documents conflict with any codes, rules or regulations, the latter shall govern. Where the Contract requirements are in excess of applicable codes, rules or regulations, the Contract provisions shall govern unless the Engineer rules otherwise. B. The HVAC Contractor shall comply with the Local Code Enforcement Officials' instructions at no additional cost to the Owner. 1 .4 INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS A. The HVAC Contractor shall employ only competent and experienced workmen at a regular schedule in harmony with the other tradesmen on the job. He shall also exercise care and supervision of his employees in regard to proper and expeditious laying out of his work. B. The HVAC Contractor shall have a Foreman or Superintendent assigned to the Project who shall be authorized to make decisions and receive instructions exactly as if the HVAC Contractor himself were present. The Foreman or Superintendent shall not be removed or replaced without the express approval of the Engineer after construction work begins. C. The HVAC Contractor shall be held responsible for any injuries or damage done to the building premises or adjoining property or to other Contractors' work resulting from the execution of his part of the work in any manner whatsoever; and in case of dispute arising as to the extent or share of responsibility incurred by the HVAC Contractor, it is agreed between the Owner and the HVAC Contractor that such liability and extent of damage shall be finally determined by the Engineer whose decision shall be final and binding on both parties to the Contract for the work in question. D. The HVAC Contractor shall co-operate to the fullest extent with all other trades in order to expedite the progress of the work. He shall furnish all information pertaining to his materials as to sizes, locations, and means of support, to all other trades requiring such information. The HVAC Contractor shall also furnish all sleeves, frames, beams, supports, inserts, etc., hereinafter specified so that the General Contractor may build them in place. In case of failure on the part of the HVAC Contractor to give proper information as above, he will be required to bear the extra expense involved due to such failure. 235500 HEATING AND VENTILATING 3 of 72 Project No. 01091 Proposed Renovations March 6, 2009 Park House Smith College, Northampton, MA SECTION 235500 - HEATING, VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING (HVAC) PART 1 - GENERAL 1 .1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Include General Conditions, Supplementary General Conditions, applicable parts of Division 1 , and conditions of the Contract as part of this Section. B. Examine all other Sections of the Specifications for requirements, which affect work under this, Section whether or not, such work is specifically mentioned in this Section. C. Co-ordinate work with that of all other trades affecting, or affected by the work of this Section. Co-operate with such trades to assure steady progress of all work under the Contract. 1 .2 SCOPE OF WORK A. Furnish all labor, materials, plant, equipment and services necessary for and reasonably incidental to the complete installation of all HVAC work specified herein and/or indicated on the Drawings, including, but not limited to, the following; 1 . Steam to water heat exchanger. 2. Unit heaters, cabinet heaters and radiators. 3. Pex tubing system and manifold. 4. Piping systems for hot water, steam supply and condensate return, including pumps, heat exchanger valves, and specialties. 5. Duct systems for make up air exhaust and air conditioning, including fire dampers, registers, louvers, and terminal boxes air handling units. 6. Exhaust fans. 7. Insulation for piping, ductwork, and equipment. 8. Air handling units 9. Energy management (building automation) system. All temperature control work shall be by Yankee Technology, Inc. 10. Installation of and connection to equipment furnished by others. 11 . Air and water balance, tests, start-up. All water and air testing and balancing shall be preformed by "Wings Testing and Balancing, Inc and billed directly to the College." 12. Guarantee. 13. Instructions. 14. Record Drawings. 15. Demolition, removal from site and legal disposal of all existing heating and ventilating systems and equipment, made obsolete by new construction. All piping and equipment shall be the property of 235500 HEATING AND VENTILATING 2 of 72 Project No. 01091 Proposed Renovations March 6, 2009 Park House Smith College, Northampton, MA INDEX SECTION 235500 - HVAC PART 1 - GENERAL PART 3 - INSTALLATION 1. 1 RELATED DOCUMENTS 3. 1 CLEANING AIR SYSTEM 1. 2 SCOPE OF WORK 3. 2 CUTTING, PATCHING AND DRILLING 1. 3 CODES, ORDINANCES AND INSPECTIONS 3. 3 PIPE INSTALLATION 1. 4 INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS 3. 4 PIPING SYSTEM TESTS 1. 5 QUALITY ASSURANCE 3. 5 CLEANING AND FLUSHING 1. 6 PRODUCTS 3. 6 WATER AND AIR FLOW BALANCE AND TESTS 1. 7 SUBMITTALS 3. 7 INSULATION 1. 8 PERMITS, FEES AND INSPECTIONS 3. 8 EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION 1. 9 TEMPORARY HOOK-UPS 3. 9 SYSTEM TESTS AND CLEAN-UP 1.10 PLANS AND SPECIFICATIONS 3.10 IDENTIFICATION 1.11 PRODUCT HANDLING 3.11 SPARE PARTS 1.12 ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS 3.12 FIRE SAFING 1.13 WORK CONCEALED 1.14 GUARANTEE 1.15 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS 1.16 PROTECTION 1.17 CLEANING 1.18 CUTTING AND PATCHING 1.19 RECORD DRAWINGS 1.20 ALTERNATE BIDS PART 2 - MATERIALS 2. 1 SHEET METAL WORK 2. 2 DUCTWORK SHOP DRAWINGS 2. 3 AIR DIFFUSERS, GRILLES, AND REGISTERS 2. 4 LOUVERS 2. 5 RADIANT HEATING DISTRIBUTION SYSTM 2. 6 UTILITY FANS 2. 7 CONVECTORS 2. 8 CIRCULATING PUMPS (In Line Type) 2. 9 VALVES 2.10 THERMOMETERS 2.11 PRESSURE GAUGES 2.12 UNIONS 2.13 PIPE SLEEVES 2.14 HOT WATER SPECIALTIES AND VALVES 2.15 STEAM TO WATER HEAT EXCHANGERS 2.16 STEAM TRAPS 2.17 HANGERS 2.18 INSULATION 2.19 PIPE AND FITTINGS 2.20 PACKLESS EXPANSION JOINTS 2.21 STRAINERS 2.22 AIR HANDLING UNITS (AHU) 2.23 ACCESS PANELS 2.24 AUTOMATIC TEMPERATURE CONTROL 2.25 PANEL RADIATORS APP""?.26 VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROL 235500 HEATING AND VENTILATING 1 of 72 Project No. 01091 Proposed Renovations March 6, 2009 Park House - Smith College, Northampton, MA D. Preparation 1 . At all fire rated assemblies, prepare all penetrations for pipes. E. Application 1 . Install approved fire safing insulation of proper size leaving no voids. Compress and friction fit fire safing and use attachment clips where necessary. 2. Seal completely around all openings and over the fire safing insulation with sealing compound. 3.12 GAS SERVICE A. This contractor shall arrange for the installation of a new gas service by Bay State Gas Company. All arrangements for this service shall be coordinated by the contractor and billed direct to the college. END OF SECTION 225400 PLUMBING Page 37 of 37 Project No. 01091 Proposed Renovations March 6, 2009 Park House - Smith College, Northampton, MA on the Drawings or not, and all labor and materials required to accomplish this shall be furnished by the Plumbing Contractor and be included in his Bid. 3.10 DISINFECTION A. Flush out entire system. B. Introduce chlorine or solution of calcium hypochlorite or sodium hypochlorite. Fill lines slowly and apply agent at rate which will produce 50 parts per million of chloride as determined by residual chlorine tests at end of lines. Open and close valves and hydrants while system is being chlorinated. C. After twenty-four (24) hours test for residual chlorine. If more than 5 ppm are present, flush out system until all traces are removed. D. After disinfection, flush treated water from system through its extremities. Continue flushing until samples of water are satisfactory to local authorities having jurisdiction. Repeat flushing if samples taken daily over next three (3) days indicate that quality of water is not being maintained. Do not draw samples from hydrants and undisinfected hose. E. Submit test results to Owner. 3.11 FIRE SAFING A. Work Included: Provide labor, materials, and equipment necessary to complete the work including, but not limited to the following: 1 . Fire safing at all penetrations through fire barriers. 2. Fire safing at all penetrations through smoke barriers. 3. Extent of fire and smoke barriers as indicated on the Architectural Drawings. 4. Fire safing at all penetrations through floors, shafts, corridor walls, stairway walls, mechanical rooms, electrical rooms, vaults, storage rooms, kitchen, machine rooms, outdoor storage rooms, and receiving rooms. B. Safing Insulation 1 . Fire safing insulation shall be Thermafiber as manufactured by USG Interiors, Inc. or Architect-Engineer approved equal, 4" minimum thickness by the required full length and width, or as indicated on the Drawings. 2. Provide incidental galvanized steel clip anchors. C. Seal Compound: At "poke-through" openings, apply "Firecode" seal compound as manufactured by USG Interiors, Inc., or approved equal, over Thermafiber fire safing. 225400 PLUMBING Page 36 of 37 Project No. 01091 Proposed Renovations March 6, 2009 Park House - Smith College, Northampton, MA B. Cutting of openings larger than those that can be drilled will be performed by the General Contractor. C. Patching of all holes, after installation of piping or equipment, will be performed by the General Contractor. 3.5 INSULATION A. Insulation shall be applied by an independent Insulation Contractor regularly engaged in that business. B. Insulation shall not be omitted on piping in walls. Covering shall be applied before masonry proceeds. C. Insulation shall be applied over clean pipe with all joints butted firmly together and sealed. 3.6 SLEEVES AND ESCUTCHEONS A. The Plumbing Contractor shall furnish and set all sleeves required. All water piping passing through masonry walls shall be provided with standard weight steel pipe, or Schedule 40 PVC pipe sleeves, inside diameter to be slightly larger than pipe passing through same. Center pipe in sleeve. B. Provide chromium plated escutcheons where un-insulated pipes pass through walls. 3.7 INSPECTION AND TESTS A. Tests for Plumbing Systems: Soil, waste, vent and water piping shall be tested by the Plumbing Contractor and approved before acceptance. Underground piping shall be tested prior to backfilling. Equipment: required for tests shall be furnished by the Plumbing Contractor at no additional cost to the Owner. All tests shall be witnessed and approved by the Local Plumbing Inspector, and shall be performed as required by the Plumbing Code. 3.8 CLEANING UP A. After all the fixtures have been set and ready for use, and before leaving the job, thoroughly clean all fixtures installed under this Contract, removing all plaster, stickers, rust stains, and any foreign matter or disco)-- oration of fixtures, leaving every part in perfect condition and ready for use. 3.9 EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION A. All equipment furnished under this Section shall be installed in accordance with its manufacturer's printed installation instructions, whether so shown 225400 PLUMBING Page 35 of 37 Project No. 01091 Proposed Renovations March 6, 2009 Park House - Smith College, Northampton, MA joints shall have American National taper pipe threads conforming to National Bureau of Standards Handbook H28, with graphite or inert filler and oil, with an approved graphite compound, or with polytetra- fluorethylene tape applied to the male threads. 3.2 INSTALLATION OF SEWER PIPE A. Bedding for the pipe shall provide full and stable support, with recesses excavated for pipe bells. All pipe shall be laid to the specified line and grade, with a firm bearing throughout each length and with the bell ends uphill. B. Pipe .Joints: The flexible water tight rubber gaskets shall be installed in accordance with the directions of the manufacturer. C. Plastic Pipe: Install plastic piping in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. At minimum, envelope all PVC pipe in 6" of screened gravel. Clear interior of conduit of dirt and debris as work progresses. Maintain swab or drag in line and pull past each joint as it is completed. D. Joint Adapters: Make joints between PVC pipe and other type of pipe with standard manufactured PVC adapters and fittings. E. Lay conduit beginning at low point of system, true to grades and alignment indicated with unbroken continuity of invert. , 3.3 WATER PIPE FITTINGS AND CONNECTIONS A. Mains, Branches and Runoffs: Piping shall be installed as indicated. Pipe shall be cut accurately to measurements established at the building by the Plumbing Contractor and shall be worked into place without springing or forcing. Care shall be taken not to weaken structural portions of the building. Above ground piping shall be run parallel with the lines of the building unless otherwise indicated. Branch pipes from service lines may be taken from top, bottom or side of main, using such crossover fittings as may be required by structural or installation conditions. Supply pipes, valves and fittings shall be kept a sufficient distance from other work and other services to permit not less than 1 /2" between finished covering on the different services. B. Expansion and Contraction of Pipe: Allowance shall be made throughout for expansion and contraction of pipe. 3.4 CUTTING AND PATCHING A. Drilling of all holes required for the installation of plumbing shall be performed by the Plumbing Contractor. All work and materials shall be installed in such a manner and at such time to keep cutting and patching to a minimum. 225400 PLUMBING Page 34 of 37 Project No. 01091 Proposed Renovations March 6, 2009 Park House - Smith College, Northampton, MA 12 in. in length from the structure to the structural connection of the clevis or trapeze. e. All PVC and fiberglass suspended waste or vent pipe 6 in. in diameter and smaller. P. Suspended Equipment: 1 . Suspended equipment weighing less than 50 lbs. and supported with a minimum of 4 hanger rods. Q. Schedules: Vibration Isolation and / or Seismic Restraint Equipment Schedule Specification Static Deflection Pumps - Base Mounted 1 , 4, 18, 23 Pumps - In-Line 23 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 SOIL, WASTE, DRAIN AND VENT PIPING A. Installation: 1 . Drainage and Vent Pipes: Horizontal soil, rain leaders and waste pipes shall have a minimum grade of 1 /4" per foot for piping 3" and less and 1 /8" per foot for piping larger than 3". Horizontal waste lines receiving the discharge from two or more fixtures shall be provided with end vents unless separate venting of fixtures is noted. 2. Fittings: Changes in pipe size on soil, waste, and drain lines shall be made with reducing fittings. Changes in direction shall be made by the appropriate use of 45o wyes, long or short sweep 1 /4 bends„ 1 /6, 1 /8, or 1 /16 bends, or by a combination of those or equivalent. fittings. Single and double sanitary tees and 1 /4 bends may be used in drainage lines only where the direction of flow is from horizontal to vertical. 3. Union Connections: Slip joints will be permitted only in trap seals or on the inlet side of the traps. Use of bushings will not be permit- ted. B. joints: Installation of pipe and fittings shall be made in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. Mitering of joints for elbows and notching of straight runs of pipe for tees will not be permitted. Threaded 225400 PLUMBING Page 33 of 37 Project No. 01091 Proposed Renovations March 6, 2009 Park House - Smith College, Northampton, MA a. Fuel oil piping, gas piping, medical gas piping, and compressed air piping that is 1 in. I.D. or larger. b. Piping located in boiler rooms, mechanical equipment (fan) rooms, and refrigeration equipment rooms that are 1 -1 /4 in. I.D. and larger. C. All other piping 2-1 /2 in. diameter and larger. 2. Transverse piping restraints shall be at 40' maximum spacing for all pipe sizes, except where lesser spacing is required to limit anchorage loads. 3. Longitudinal restraints shall be at 80' maximum spacing for all pipe sizes, except where lesser spacing is required to limit anchorage loads. 4. Where thermal expansion is a consideration, guides and anchors may be used as transverse and longitudinal restraints provided they have a capacity equal to or greater than the restraint loads in addition to the loads induced by expansion or contraction. 5. For fuel oil and all gas piping transverse restraints must be at 20- ft. maximum and longitudinal restraints at 40-ft. maximum spacing. 6. Transverse restraint for one (1) pipe section may also act as a longitudinal restraint for a pipe section of the same size connected perpendicular to it if the restraint is installed within allowable limits at longer distances. 7. Hold down clamps must be used to attach pipe to all trapeze +►. members before applying restraints in a manner similar to clevis supports. 8. Branch lines may not be used to restrain main lines. 9. Cast-iron pipe of all types, glass pipe and any other pipes joined with a four band shield and clamp assembly in Zones 213, 3 and 4 shall be braced as in sections 3.02.C.2 and 3. For Zones 0, 1 and 2A, 2 band clamps may be used with reduced spacing of 1 /2 of those listed in sections 3.02.C2 and 3. N. All mechanical equipment shall be vibration isolated and seismically restrained as per the schedules in paragraph S of this Specification. 0. Seismic Restraint Exclusions: 1 . Piping: a. All piping less than 2-112 in. in diameter except those listed below. b. All gas piping and medical gas piping less than 1 in. I.D. C. All piping in boiler and mechanical equipment rooms less than 1 -1 /4 in. I.D. d. All clevis or trapeze supported piping suspended from "* hanger rods where the point of attachment is less than the 225400 PLUMBING Page 32 of 37 Project No. 01091 Proposed Renovations March 6, 2009 Park House - Smith College, Northampton, MA 17. Where piping passes through walls, floors or ceilings the vibration isolation manufacturer shall provide Specification 27 wall seals. 18. Air handling equipment and centrifugal fans shall be protected against excessive displacement, which results from high air thrust in relation to the equipment weight. Horizontal thrust restraint shall be Specification type 28 (see selection guide). 19. Locate isolation hangers as near to the overhead support structure as possible. L. Vibration Isolation of Piping: 1 . Horizontal Pipe Isolation: The first three (3) pipe hangers in the main lines near the mechanical equipment shall be as described in Specification 11 . Specification 11 hangers must also be used in all transverse braced isolated locations. Brace hanger rods with SRC clamps Specification 14. Horizontal runs in all other locations throughout the building shall be isolated by hangers as described in Specification 10. Floor supported piping shall rest on isolators as described in Specification 6. Heat exchangers and expansion tanks are considered part of the piping run. The first three- (3) isolators from the isolated equipment will have the same static deflection as specified for the mountings under the connected equipment. If piping is connected to equipment located in basements and hangs from ceilings under occupied spaces the first three hangers shall have 0.75 in. deflection for pipe sizes up to and including 3 in., 1 -1 /2 in. deflection for pipe sizes up to and including 6 in., and 2-1 /2 in. deflection thereafter. Hangers shall be located as close to the overhead structure as practical. Where piping connects to mechanical equipment install Specification 23 flexible piping connection or Specification 24 stainless steel hoses is 23 is not suitable for the service. 2. Riser Isolation: Risers shall be suspended from Specification 10 hangers or supported by Specification 5 mountings, anchored with Specification 25 anchors, and guided with Specification 26 sliding guides. Steel springs shall be a minimum of 0.75 in. except in those expansion locations where additional deflection is required to limit load changes to ± 25% of the initial load. Submittals must include riser diagrams and calculations showing anticipated expansion and contraction at each support point, initial and final changes and seismic loads. Submittal data shall include certification that the riser system has been examined for excessive stresses and that none will exist in the proposed design. M. Seismic Restraint of Piping: 1 . Seismically restrain all piping listed as a, b or c below. Use! Specification 12 cables if isolated. Specification 12 or 13 restraints may be used on unisolated piping. 225400 PLUMBING Page 31 of 37 Project No. 01091 Proposed Renovations March 6, 2009 Park House - Smith College, Northampton, MA conduit which makes rigid connections with the building unless isolation is not specified. "Building" includes, but is not limited to, slabs, beams, columns, studs and walls. 5. Coordinate work with other trades to avoid rigid contact with the building. 6. Any conflicts with other trades which will result in rigid contact with equipment or piping due to inadequate space or other unforeseen conditions should be brought to the architects/engineers attention prior to installation. Corrective work necessitated by conflicts after installation shall be at the responsible Contractor's expense. 7. Bring to the architects/engineers attention any discrepancies between the Specifications and the field conditions or changes required due to specific equipment selection, prior to installation. Corrective work necessitated by discrepancies after installation shall be at the responsible Contractor's expense. 8. Correct, at no additional cost, all installations, which are deemed defective in workmanship and materials at the Contractor's expense. 9. Overstressing of the building structure must not occur because of overhead support of equipment. Contractor must submit loads to the structural engineer of record for approval. Generally bracing may occur from: a. Flanges of structural beams. b. Upper truss cords in bar joist construction. C. Cast in place inserts or wedge type drill-in concrete anchors. 10. Specification 12 cable restraints shall be installed slightly slack to avoid short circuiting the isolated suspended equipment, piping or conduit. 11 . Specification 12 cable assemblies are installed taut on non- isolated systems. Specification 13 seismic solid braces may be used in place of cables on rigidly attached systems only. 12. At locations where Specification 12 or 13 restraints are located, the support rods must be braced when necessary to accept compressive loads with Specification 14 braces. 13. At all locations where Specification 12 or 13 restraints are located, the support rods must be braced when necessary to accept compressive loads with Specification 14 braces. 14. Drill-in concrete anchors for ceiling and wall installation shall be Specification type 18, and Specification type 19 female wedge type for floor mounted equipment. 15. Vibration isolation manufacturer shall furnish integral structural steel bases as required. Independent steel rails are not permitted on this project. 16. Hand built elastomeric expansion joints may be used when pipe sizes exceed 24 in. or specified movements exceed Specification 23 capabilities. 225400 PLUMBING Page 30 of 37 Project No. 01091 Proposed Renovations March 6, 2009 Park House - Smith College, Northampton, MA arranged to prevent vertical travel in either direction. Allowable loads on the isolation material should not exceed 500 psi and the design shall be balanced for equal resistance in any direction. All- directional anchors shall be Type ADA as manufactured by Mason Industries, Inc. 25. Pipe guides shall consist of a telescopic arrangement of two sizes of steel tubing separated by a minimum 1 /2 in. thickness of 60 durometer neoprene. The height of the guides shall be preset with a shear pin to allow vertical motion due to pipe expansion or contraction. Shear pin shall be removable and reinsertable to allow for selection of pipe movement. Guides shall be capable of -+- 1 - 5/8 in. motion, or to meet location requirements. Pipe guides shall be Type VSG as manufactured by Mason Industries, Inc. 26. Split Wall Seals consists of two bolted pipe halves with minimum 3/4 in. thick neoprene sponge bonded to the inner faces. The seal shall be tightened around the pipe to eliminate clearance between the inner sponge face and the piping. Concrete may be packed around the seal to make it integral with the floor, wall or ceiling if the seal is not already in place around the pipe prior to the construction of the building member. Seals shall project a minimum of 1 in. past either face of the wall. Where temperatures exceed 240 dig. F., 10 lb. density fiberglass may be used in lieu of the sponge. Seals shall be Type SWS as manufactured by Mason Industries, Inc. 27. The horizontal thrust restraint shall consist of a spring element in series with a neoprene molded cup as described in Specification 5 with the same deflection as specified for the mountings or hangers. The spring element shall be designed so it can be preset for thrust at the factory and adjusted in the field to allow for a. maximum of 1 /4 in. movement at start and stop. The assembly shall be furnished with one (1) rod and angle brackets for attachment to both the equipment and the duct work or the equipment and structure. Horizontal restraints shall be attached at the centerline of thrust and symmetrical on either side of the unit„ Horizontal thrust restraints shall be Type WBI/WBD as, manufactured by Mason Industries, Inc. K. Execution - General: 1 . All vibration isolators and seismic restraint systems must be installed in strict accordance with the manufacturer's written instruction and all certified submittal data. 2. Installation of vibration isolators and seismic restraints must not cause any change of position of equipment, piping or duct work resulting in stresses or misalignment. 3. No rigid connections between equipment and the building structure shall be made that degrades the noise and vibration control system herein specified. 4. The Contractor shall not install any equipment, piping, duct or 225400 PLUMBING Page 29 of 37 Project No. 01091 Proposed Renovations March 6, 2009 Park House - Smith College, Northampton, MA to 24 in. may be single sphere. Sizes 3/4 in. to 1 -112 in. may have threaded bolted flange assemblies, one sphere and cable retention. 14 in. and smaller connectors shall be rated at 250 psi up to 190° F with a uniform drop in allowable pressure to 190 psi at 250° F. 16 in. and larger connectors are rated 180 psi at 190° F and 135 psi at 250° F. Safety factors to burst and flange pullout shall be a minimum of 3/1 . All joints must have permanent markings verifying a 5 minute factory test at twice the rated pressure. Concentric reducers to the above Specifications may be substituted for equal ended expansion joints. Pipe connectors shall be installed in piping gaps equal to the length of the expansion joints under pressure. Control rods need only be used in unanchored piping locations where the manufacturer determines the installation exceeds the pressure requirement without control rods, as control rods are not desirable in seismic work. If control rods are used, they must have 112 in. thick Neoprene washer bushings large enough in area to take the thrust at 1000 psi maximum on the washer area. Expansion joints shall be installed on the equipment side of the shut off valves. Submittals shall include two (2) test reports by independent consultants showing minimum reductions of 20 DB in vibration accelerations and 10 DB in sound pressure levels at typical blade passage frequencies on this or a similar product by the same manufacturer. All expansion joints shall be installed on the equipment side of the shut off valves. Expansion joints shall be SAFEFLEX SFDE), SFEJ, SFDCR or SFU and Control Rods CR as manufactured by Mason Industries, Inc. 23. Flexible stainless steel hose shall have stainless steel braid and carbon steel fittings. Sizes 3 in. and larger shall be flanged. Smaller sizes shall have male nipples. Minimum lengths shall be as tabulated: Flanged Male Nipples 3x 14 10x26 1 /2x9 1 -1 /2x 13 4x 1512x28 3/4x10 2x14 5x1914x30 1 x112-1 /2x18 6x2016x32 1 /4x12 Hoses shall be installed on the equipment side of the shut-off valves horizontally and parallel to the equipment shafts wherever possible. Hoses shall be Type BSS as manufactured by Mason Industries, Inc. 24. All-directional acoustical pipe anchor, consisting of two sizes of steel tubing separated by a minimum 1 /2 in. thick 60 durometer neoprene. Vertical restraint shall be provided by similar material 225400 PLUMBING Page 28 of 37 Project No. 01091 Proposed Renovations March 6, 2009 Park House - Smith College, Northampton, MA Anchors shall be manufactured from full diameter wire, and shall have a safety shoulder to fully support the wedge ring under load. Female wedge anchors shall have an evaluation report number from I.C.B.O. Evaluation Service, Inc. verifying to its allowable loads. Drill-in female wedge anchors shall be Type SAB as manufactured by Mason Industries, Inc. 20. Vibration isolation manufacturer shall furnish rectangular steel concrete pouring forms for floating and inertia foundations. Bases for split case pumps shall be large enough to provide for suction and discharge of elbows. Bases shall be a minimum of 1 /12 of the longest dimension of the base but not less than 6 in. The base depth need not exceed 12 in. unless specifically recommended by the base manufacturer for mass or rigidity. Forms shall include minimum concrete reinforcing consisting of 1 /2 in. bars welded in place on 6 in. centers running both ways in a layer 1 -1 /2 in. above the bottom. Forms shall be furnished with steel templates to hold the anchor bolt sleeves and anchors while concrete is being poured. Height saving brackets shall be employed in all mounting locations to maintain a 1 in. clearance below the base. Wooden formed bases leaving a concrete rather than a steel finish are not acceptable. Base shall be Type BMK o K as manufactured by Mason Industries, Inc. 21 . Curb mounted rooftop equipment shall be mounted on spring isolation curbs. The lower member shall consist of a sheet metal Z section containing adjustable and removable steel springs that support the upper floating section. The upper frame must provide continuous support for the equipment and must be captive so as to resiliently resist wind and seismic forces. All directional neoprene snubber bushings shall be a minimum of 1 /4 in. thick„ Steel springs shall be laterally stable and rest on 1 /4 in. thick: neoprene acoustical pads. Hardware must be plated and the springs provided with a rust resistant finish. The curbs; waterproofing shall consist of a continuous galvanized flexible counter flashing nailed over the lower curbs waterproofing and joined at the corners by EPDM bellows. All spring locations shall have access ports with removable waterproof covers. Lower curbs shall have provision for 2 in. of insulation. The roof curbs shall be built to seismically contain the rooftop unit. The unit must be solidly fastened to the top floating rail, and the lower Z section anchored to the roof structure. Curb shall have anchorage preapproval "R" from OSHPD in the State of California attesting to the maximum certified horizontal and vertical load ratings. Curb shall be Type RSC as manufactured by Mason Industries, Inc. 22. Flexible spherical piping connectors shall employ peroxide cured EPDM in the covers, liners and Dacron tire cord frictioning. Solid steel rings shall be used within the raised face rubber ends to prevent pullout. Flexible cable bead wire is not acceptable. Sizes 2 in. and larger shall have two spheres reinforced with a ring between spheres to maintain shape and complete with split ductile iron or steel flanges with hooked or similar interlocks. Sizes 16 in. 225400 PLUMBING Page 27 of 37 Project No. 01091 Proposed Renovations March 6, 2009 Park House - Smith College, Northampton, MA support rods is not acceptable. Rod clamp assemblies shall have an Anchorage Preapproval "R" Number from OSHPD in the State of California. Rod clamp assemblies shall be Type SRC as manufactured by Mason Industries, Inc. 15. Pipe clevis cross bolt braces are required in all restraint locations. They shall be special purpose performed channels deep enough to be held in place by bolts passing over the cross bolt. Clevis cross braces shall have an Anchorage Preapproval "R"Number from OSHPD in the State of California. Clevis cross brace shall be Type CCB as manufactured by Mason Industries, Inc. 16. All-directional seismic snubbers shall consist of interlocking steel members restrained by a one-piece molded neoprene bushing of bridge bearing neoprene. Bushing shall be replaceable and a minimum of 1 /4 in. thick. Rated loadings shall not exceed 1000 psi. A minimum air gap of 1 /8 in. shall be incorporated in the snubber design in all directions before contact is made between the rigid and resilient surfaces. Snubber end caps shall be removable t allow inspection of internal clearances. Neoprene bushings shall be rotated to insure no short circuits exist before systems are activated. Snubbers shall have an Anchorage Preapproval "R" Number from OSHPD in the State of California verifying the maximum certified horizontal and vertical load ratings. Snubber shall be Type Z-1225 as manufactured by Mason Industries, Inc. 17. All directional seismic snubbers shall consist of interlocking steel members restrained by shock absorbent rubber materials compounded to bridge bearing Specifications. Elastomeric materials shall be replaceable and a minimum of 3/4 in. thick. Rated loadings shall not exceed 1000 psi. Snubbers shall be manufactured with air gap between hard and resilient material of nor less than 1 /8 in. nor more than 1 /4 in. Snubbers shall be installed with factory set clearances. The capacity of the seismic snubber at 3/8 in. deflection shall be equal or greater than the load assigned to the mounting grouping controlled by the snubber multiplied by the applicable "G" force. Submittals shall include the load deflection in the x, y and z planes. Snubbers shall have an anchorage preapproval "R"Number from OSHPD in the State of California verifying the maximum certified horizontal and vertical load ratings. Snubbers shall be series Z-101 1 as manufactured by Mason Industries, Inc. 18. Stud wedge anchors shall be manufactured from full diameter wire, not from undersized wire that is "rolled up" to create the thread. The stud anchor shall also have a safety shoulder, which fully supports the wedge ring under load. The stud anchors shall have an evaluation report number from the I.C.B.O. Evaluation Service, Inc. verifying its allowable loads. Drill-in stud edge anchors shall be Type SAS as manufactured by Mason Industries, Inc. 19. Female wedge anchors are preferred in floor locations so isolators or equipment can be slid into place after the anchors are installed. 225400 PLUMBING Page 26 of 37 Project No. 01091 Proposed Renovations March 6, 2009 Park House - Smith College, Northampton, MA Mason Industries, Inc. 10. Hangers shall consist of rigid steel frames containing minimum 1 - 1 /4 in. thick neoprene elements at the top and a steel spring with general characteristics as in Specification 5 seated in a steel washer reinforced neoprene cup on the bottom. The neoprene element and the cup shall have neoprene bushings projecting through the steel box. To maintain stability the boxes shall not be articulated as clevis hangers or the neoprene element stacked on top of the spring. Spring diameters and hanger box lower hole sizes shall be large enough to permit the hanger rod to swing through a 300 arc from side to side before contacting the rod bushing and short circuiting the spring. Submittals shall include a hanger Drawing showing the 300 capability. Hangers shall be Type 30N as manufactured by Mason Industries, Inc. 11 . Hangers shall be as described in 10, but they shall be precompressed and locked at the rated deflection by means of a resilient seismic upstop to keep the piping or equipment at a fixed elevation during installation. The hangers shall be designed with a release mechanism to free the spring after the installation is complete and the hanger is subjected to its full load. Deflection shall be clearly indicated by means of a scale. Submittals shall include a Drawing of the hanger showing the 30 degree capability. Hangers shall be Type PC30N as manufactured by Mason Industries, Inc. 12. Seismic Cable Restraints shall consist of galvanized steel aircraft cables sized to resist seismic loads with a minimum safety factor of two (2) and arranged to provide all-directional restraint. Cable end connections shall be steel assemblies that swivel to final installation angle and utilize two (2) clamping bolts to provide proper cable engagement. Cables must not be allowed to bend across sharp edges. Cable assemblies shall have an Anchorage Preapproval "R" Number from OSHPD in the State of California verifying the maximum certified load ratings. Cable assemblies shall be Type SCB at the ceiling and at the clevis bolt, SCBH between the hanger rod nut and the clevis or SCBV if clamped to a beam all as manufactured by Mason Industries, Inc. 13. Seismic solid braces shall consist of steel angles or channels to resist seismic loads with a minimum safety factor of 2 and arranged to provide all directional restraint. Seismic solid brace end connectors shall be steel assemblies that swivel to the final installation angle and utilize two through bolts to provide proper attachment. Seismic solid brace assembly shall have anchorage preapproval "R" Number from OSHPD in the state of California verifying the maximum certified load ratings. Solid seismic brace assemblies shall be Type SSB as manufactured by Mason Industries, Inc. 14. Steel angles, sized to prevent buckling, shall be clamped to pipe or equipment rods utilizing a minimum of three ductile iron clamps at each restraint location when required. Welding of 225400 PLUMBING Page 25 of 37 Project No. 01091 Proposed Renovations March 6, 2009 Park House - Smith College, Northampton, MA 50% of the rated deflection. Submittals shall include spring diameters, deflection, compressed spring height and solid spring height. Mountings shall be Type SLF as manufactured by Mason Industries, Inc. 6. Restrained spring mountings shall have an SLF mounting as described in Specification 5, within a rigid housing that includes vertical limit stops to prevent spring extension when weight is removed. The housing shall serve as blocking during erection. A steel spacer shall be removed after adjustment. Installed and operating heights are equal. A minimum clearance of 112 in. shall be maintained around restraining bolts and between the housing and the spring so as not to interfere with the spring action. Limit stops shall be out of contact during normal operation. Since housings will be bolted or welded in position there must be an internal isolation pad. Housing shall be designed to resist all seismic forces. Mountings shall have Anchorage Preapproval "R" Number from OSHPD in the state of California certifying the maximum certified horizontal and vertical load ratings. Mountings shall be SLR as manufactured by Mason Industries, Inc. 7. Spring mountings as in Specification 5 built into a ductile iron or steel housing to provide all directional seismic snubbing. The snubber shall be adjustable vertically and allow a maximum of 1 /4 in. travel in all directions before contacting the resilient snubbing collars. Mountings shall have an Anchorage Preapproval "R" Number from OSHPD in the State of California verifying the maximum certified horizontal and vertical load ratings. Mountings shall be SSLFH as manufactured by Mason Industries, Inc. 8. Air Springs shall be manufactured with upper and lower steel sections connected by a replaceable flexible nylon reinforced neoprene element. Air spring configuration shall be multiple bellows to achieve a maximum natural frequency of 3 Hz. Air Springs shall be designed for a burst pressure that is a minimum of three times the published maximum operating pressure. All air spring systems shall be connected to either the building control air or a supplementary air supply and equipped with three (3) leveling valves to maintain leveling within plus or minus 1 /8 in. Submittals shall include natural frequency, load and damping tests performed by an independent lab or acoustician. Air Springs shall be Type MT and leveling valves Type LV as manufactured by Mason Industries, Inc. 9. Restrained air spring mountings shall have an MT air spring as described in Specification 8, within a rigid housing that includes vertical limit stops to prevent air spring extension when weight is removed. The housing shall serve as blocking during erection. A steel spacer shall be removed after adjustment. Installed and operating heights are equal. A minimum clearance of 1 .2 in. shall be maintained around restraining bolts and between the housing and the air spring action. Limit stops shall be out of contact during normal operation. Housing shall be designed to resist all 100"K seismic forces. Mountings shall be SLR-MT as manufactured by 225400 PLUMBING Page 24 of 37 Project No. 01091 Proposed Renovations March 6, 2009 Park House - Smith College, Northampton, MA strictly comply with the Specifications and have the approval of the specifying engineer. Submittals and certification sheets shall be in accordance with Section D. 2. For the purposes of this project, failure is defined as the discontinuance of any attachment point between equipment or structure, vertical permanent deformation greater than 1 /8 in. and/or horizontal permanent deformation greater than 1 /4 in. J. Product Description: Vibration Isolators and Seismic Restraints: 1 . Two (2) layers of 3/4 in. thick neoprene pad consisting of 2 in. square waffle modules separated horizontally by a 16 gauge galvanized shim. Load distribution plates shall be used as required. Pads shall be Type Super "W" as manufactured by Mason Industries, Inc. 2. Bridge-bearing neoprene mountings shall have a minimum static deflection of 0.2 in. and all directional seismic capability. The mount shall consist of a ductile iron casting containing two separated and opposing molded neoprene elements. The elements shall prevent the central threaded sleeve and attachment bolt from contacting the casting during normal operation. The shock. absorbing neoprene materials shall be compounded to bridge- bearing Specifications. Mountings shall have an Anchorage Preapproval "R" Number from OSHPD in the State of California. verifying the maximum certified horizontal and vertical load ratings. Mountings shall be Type BR as manufactured by Mason Industries, Inc. 3. Sheet metal panels shall be bolted to the walls or supporting structure by assemblies consisting of a neoprene bushing cushioned between 2 steel sleeves. The outer sleeve prevents the sheet metal from cutting into the neoprene. Enlarge panel holes as required. Neoprene elements pass over the bushing to cushion the back panel horizontally. A steel disc covers the inside neoprene element and the inner steel sleeve is elongated to act as a stop so tightening the anchor bolts does not interfere with panel isolation in three (3) planes. Bushing assemblies can be applied to the ends of steel cross members where applicable. All assemblies shall be Type PB as manufactured by Mason Industries, Inc. 4. A one piece molded bridge bearing neoprene washer/bushing. The bushing shall surround the anchor bolt and have a flat face to avoid metal to metal contact. Neoprene bushings shall be Type HG as manufactured by Mason Industries, Inc. 5. Spring isolators shall be free standing and laterally stable without any housing and complete with a molded neoprene cup or 1 /4 in. neoprene acoustical friction pad between the baseplate and the support. All mountings shall have leveling bolts that must be rigidly bolted to the equipment. Spring diameters shall be no less than 0.8 if the compressed height of the spring at rated load. Springs shall have a minimum additional travel to solid equal to 225400 PLUMBING Page 23 of 37 Project No. 01091 Proposed Renovations March 6, 2009 Park House - Smith College, Northampton, MA ratings. If cast-in anchors are to be used, the housekeeping pads shall be sized to accommodate the ACI requirements for bolt coverage and embedment. 2. Supplementary Support Steel: a. Contractor shall supply supplementary support steel for all equipment, piping, ductwork, etc. including roof mounted equipment, as required or specified. 3. Attachments: a. Contractor shall supply restraint attachment plates cast into housekeeping pads, concrete inserts, double sided beam clamps, etc. in accordance with the requirements of the vibration vendor's calculations. H. Seismic Force Levels 1 . The following force levels will be used on this project. Minimum "G" Forces Equal to or Exceeding Building Code Listed in E. Building "G" Force "G" Force "G" Force "G" Force For Code for all pipes, Duct for Rigidity for Life Safety & Conduit Mounted Flexibility Equipment Equipment Mounted Either Equipment Rigidity or Flexibility Mounted Zon Horiz. Vert. Horiz. Horiz. Horiz. Vert. e Vert. Vert. UBC BOCA .25 .08 0.4 0.1 0.6 0.2 0.15 0.15 SBCCI I. Product Intent: 1 . All vibration isolators and seismic restraints described in this section shall be the product of a single manufacturer. Mason Industry's products are the basis of these Specifications; products of other manufacturers are acceptable provided their systems 225400 PLUMBING Page 22 of 37 Project No. 01091 Proposed Renovations March 6, 2009 Park House - Smith College, Northampton, MA of the job location. Testing and calculations must include both shear and tensile loads as well as one test or analysis at 45° to the weakest mode. (3) Analysis must indicate calculated dead loads, static seismic loads and capacity of materials utilized for connections to equipment and structure. Analysis must detail anchoring methods, bolt diameter, embedment and/or welded length. All seismic restraint devices shall be designed to accept, without failure, the forces detailed in Section H acting through the equipment center of gravity. Overturning moments may exceed forces at ground level. E. Code and Standards Requirements: 1 . Typical Applicable Codes and Standards - most recent or enforced code: a. Massachusetts State Building Code. b. BOCA National Mechanical Code. C. NFPA 90A. F. Manufacturer's Responsibility: 1 . Manufacturer of vibration isolation and seismic control equipment shall have the following responsibilities: a. Determine vibration isolation and seismic restraint sizes and locations. b. Provide vibration isolation and seismic restraints as scheduled or specified. C. Provide calculations and materials if required for restraint of unisolated equipment. d. Provide installation instructions, drawings and trained field supervision to insure proper installation and performance. G. Related Work: 1 . Housekeeping Pads: a. Housekeeping pad reinforcement and monolithic pad attachment to the structure details and design shall be prepares by the restraint vendor if not already indicated on the Drawings. b. Housekeeping pads shall be coordinated with restraint vendor and sized to provide a minimum edge distance of ten (10) bolt diameters all around the outermost anchor bolt to allow development of full drill-in wedge anchor 225400 PLUMBING Page 21 of 37 Project No. 01091 Proposed Renovations March 6, 2009 Park House - Smith College, Northampton, MA a. Descriptive Data: (1) Catalog cuts or data sheets on vibration isolators and specific restraints detailing compliance with the Specification. (2) Detailed schedules of flexible and rigidly mounted equipment, showing vibration isolators and seismic restraints by referencing numbered descriptive Drawings. b. Shop Drawings: (1) Submit fabrication details for equipment bases including dimensions, structural member sizes and support point locations. (2) Provide all details of suspension and support for ceiling hung equipment. (3) Where walls, floors, slabs or supplementary steel work are used for seismic restraint locations, details of acceptable attachment methods for ducts, conduit and pipe must be included and approved before the condition is accepted for installation. Restraint manufacturer's submittals must include spacing, static loads and seismic loads at all attachment and support points. (4) Provide specific details of seismic restraints and anchors; include number, size and locations for each piece of equipment. C. Seismic Certification and Analysis: (1) Seismic restraint calculations must be provided for all connections of equipment to the structure. Calculations must be stamped by a registered professional engineer with at least five years of seismic design experience, licensed in the state of the job location. (2) All restraining devices shall have a preapproval number from California OSHPD or some other recognized government agency showing maximum restraint ratings. Preapprovals based on independent testing are preferred to preapprovals based on calculations. Where preapproved devices are not available, submittals based on independent testing are preferred. Calculations (including the combining of tensile and shear loadings) to support seismic restraint designs must be stamped by a registered professional engineer with at least five years of -owk seismic design experience and licensed in the state 225400 PLUMBING Page 20 of 37 Project No. 01091 Proposed Renovations March 6, 2009 Park House - Smith College, Northampton, MA • Battery Racks • Compressors • Comp. Room Units • Conduit • Electrical Panels • Piping • Pumps (All types) • Tanks (All types) C. Definitions: 1 . Life Safety Systems a. All systems involved with fire protection including sprinkler piping, fire pumps, jockey pumps, fire pump control panels, service water supply piping, water tanks, fire dampers and smoke systems. b. All systems involved with and/or connected to emergency power supply including all generators, transfer switches, transformers and all flowpaths to fire protection and/or emergency lighting systems. C. All medical and life support systems d. Fresh air relief systems on emergency control sequence including air handlers, conduit, duct, dampers, etc. e. All life safety equipment has an asterisk on the equipment schedule. 2. Positive Attachment: a. A positive attachment is defined as a cast-in anchor, a drill- in wedge anchor, a double sided beam clamp loaded perpendicular to a beam, or a welded or bolted connection to structure. Single sided "C" type beam clamps for support: rods of overhead piping, ductwork, or any other equipment: are not acceptable on this project as seismic anchor points. 3. Transverse Bracing: a. Restraint(s) applied to limit motion perpendicular to the centerline of the pipe, duct or conduit. 4. Longitudinal Bracing: a. Restraint(s) applied to limit motion parallel to the centerline of the pipe, duct or conduit. D. Manufacturer's Data: 1 . The manufacturer of vibration isolation and seismic restraints shall provide submittals for products as follows: 225400 PLUMBING Page 19 of 37 Project No. 01091 Proposed Renovations March 6, 2009 Park House - Smith College, Northampton, MA 2.15 VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROL A. Intent: 1 . All mechanical equipment, piping and ductwork as noted on the equipment schedule or in the Specification shall be mounted on vibration isolators and with flexible connections to prevent the transmission of vibration and mechanically transmitted sound to the building structure. Vibration isolators shall be selected in accordance with the weight distribution so as to produce reasonably uniform deflections. All fire protection vibration and seismic control shall meet NFPA requirements. 2. All isolators and isolation materials shall be of the same manufacturer and shall be certified by the manufacturer. 3. It is the intent of the seismic portion of Specification to keep all mechanical building system components in place during a seismic event. 4. All such systems must be installed in strict accordance with seismic codes, component manufacturer's and building construction standards. Whenever a conflict occurs between the manufacturers or construction standards, the most stringent shall apply. 5. This Specification is considered to be minimum requirements for seismic consideration and is not intended as a substitute for legislated, more stringent, national, state or local construction requirements (i.e. California Title 24, California OSHPD, Canadian Building Codes, or other requirements). 6. Any variance or non-compliance with these Specification requirements shall be corrected by the Contractor in an approved manner. 7. Seismic restraints shall be designed in accordance with seismic force levels as detailed in Section H. B. The work in this Section includes, but is not limited to, the following: 1 . Vibration isolation for piping, ductwork and equipment. 2. Equipment isolation bases. 3. Flexible piping connections. 4. Seismic restraints for isolated equipment. 5. Seismic restraints for non-isolated equipment. 6. Certification of seismic restraint designs and installation supervision. 7. Certification of seismic attachment of housekeeping pads. 8. All mechanical systems. Equipment buried underground is excluded but entry of services through the foundation wall is included. Equipment referred to below is typical. (Equipment not listed is still included in this Specification). • Air Separators 225400 PLUMBING Page 18 of 37 Project No. 0 109 1 Proposed Renovations March 6, 2009 Park House - Smith College, Northampton, MA 2.11 DEMOLITION A. Removal of all obsolete fixtures, drains, piping, etc., not to be re-used shall be removed by this Contractor and shall become the property of the Owner. The Plumbing Contractor shall be responsible for delivering and/or properly disposing of all obsolete equipment to such places as designated by the Owner. 2.12 TRAP PRIMER A. Furnish and install all brass automatic trap primers for all floor drains. Primer shall include automatic pressure activated brass valve with vacuum breaker, and copper duplex manifold distribution reservoir. Valve shall conform with A.S.S.E. Standard 1018. B. Valve shall be Precision Plumbing Products, Inc., or equal. 2.13 VACUUM BREAKERS A. Furnish and install vacuum breakers as manufactured by Watts or approved equal. B. Type "A" - pressure type to be Watts Model 800 QT with test cocks and ball valves. C. Type "B" - atmospheric type, Model 288A chrome plated, when supply is not under constant pressure. 2.14 BACKFLOW PREVENTERS A. Furnish and install the backflow preventers, as scheduled on the Drawings and as manufactured by Watts Regulator: B. This Subcontractor shall provide a spare parts repair kit for each 909 reduced pressure backflow preventer, to consist of a repair kit for the first check, second check, and relief valve. C. All backflow preventers shall be approved by the Massachusetts State Plumbing Examiners and shall be installed in strict accordance with manufacturer's recommendations and instructions, and in accordance with Regulation 310CMR 22.22. D. Units shall be Watts Regulator Co., Febco, 'Division of CMB, Ind., Hersey Products, Inc., or equal. E. The Plumbing Subcontractor shall file and prepare all applications for backflow preventer approval with the Department of Environmental Protection, and pay all fees and charges. F. All certificates of approval and test results shall be sent to the Architect. 225400 PLUMBING Page 17 of 37 Project No. 01091 Proposed Renovations March 6, 2009 Park House - Smith College, Northampton, MA Flo shower head with arm and flange, wall/hand shower with flexible metal hose and 30" slide bar. 3. Fittings - Gerber Model No. 41 -812 waste and overflow. H. Shower Stall & Drying Stall (P-4) 1 . Shower Stall - Provided by the owner with two (2) drains set in place and flashed by the General Contractor. This Contractor shall be responsible to furnish and install shower drains with perforated strainer and perform all piping. The shower drains shall be Kohler Model K-9132-CP. Note: This contractor shall protect shower basins throughout the course of construction and shall be responsible for all, or any, damage to showers. 2. Shower Valve - Symmons Safetymix Shower System Model 1 -100-X, pressure-balancing mixing valve with lever handle and adjustable screw stop to limit handle turn. I. Mop Receptor (P-5) 1 . Basin - Fiat No. 2424 molded stone, 24" x 24" x 10" high mop basin. 2. Faucet - T & S Brass Model No. B-0665-BSTR, 8" centers, with vacuum breaker spout, pail hook, rough chrome plated, built-in stops, heavy duty assembly with bottom brace. 3. Trim - Fiat No. 87A drain, No. 889CC mop hanger, No. 832AA hose and bracket, and No. 1453-BB strainer. J. Washing Machine Connection (P-6) 1 . Symmons Laundry-Mate No. W-602-X supply and drain unit with %" supplies and 2" drain with integral stops and recessed wall plate. K. Hose Bibb (P-7) 1 . Woodford Model No. 24P, with vacuum breaker and loose key. L. Laundry Tub (P-9) 1 . Basin- Fiat Model L-2 single tub with base unit. 2. Faucet- Chicago Model 895-317, 8" center with E-12 aerator. 3. Trim - Fiat Model 327A strainer and tail piece. M. Floor Drain (FD-1) 1 . Wade Model No. 1 100 w/ FC9 Strainer. 2. With Precision Plumbing Trap Primer. 225400 PLUMBING Page 16 of 37 Project No. 01091 Proposed Renovations March 6, 2009 Park House - Smith College, Northampton, MA breaker and angle stop. 3. Seat - Church Mode1295SSC white solid plastic, extra heavy, open front seat, less cover, with self-sustaining hinge. 4. Mounting to be floor mounted with bee's wax seal. D. Water Closet (P-1 A) Handicapped 1 . Closet - American Standard "Madera" 17"H Model 3043.102, elongated vitreous china, siphon jet action with 1 %z" top spud and 1.6 gallon flush. 2. Flush Valve - Toto Model No. TMT1 NNC-32, 1 .6 gpf, with vacuum breaker and angle stop. 3. Seat - Church Model 295SSC white solid plastic, extra heavy, open front seat, less over, with self-sustaining hinge. 4. Mounting to be floor mounted with bee's wax seal. E. Lavatory (P-2) 1 . Basin - laminated lavatories are to be furnished and installed by the General Contractor. Furnish and Install the supply and waste piping and fittings. 2. Faucet - American Standard "Monterrey" Model 5500.140, 4" centers with lever handles. 3. Fittings - Provide grid strainer and tailpiece, BrassCraft No. CS400A stops and risers, Sanitary Dash No. R370-17 polished chrome plated trap with cleanout plug. F. Lavatory (P-2A) Handicapped 1 . Basin - laminated lavatories are to be furnished and installed by the General Contractor. Furnish and Install the supply and waste piping and fittings. 2. Supply Fitting - Faucet-American Standard "Monterrey" Model No. 5500.140, 4" center, blade handle and grid strainer, Brass Craft: No. CS400A stops and risers. 3. Fittings - Provide chrome plated offset "P" trap with cleanout and tailpiece offset with loose key stops, and insulate all drains and stops with "Truebro Handi Lav-Guard" molded vinyl insulation. 4. Mounting height shall be no higher than 34" from top of front rim to finished floor. G. Bath Tub / Shower, Handicapped (P-3) 1 . Tub basin - American Standard "Americast" Princeton Model 2392.202 or 2393.202, recessed bath, white non-slip. 2. Control Valve - Symmons Temptrol Valve and Shower Head, Model No. S-96-600-B30-L-V, Pressure balancing mixing valve with combination integral diverter and volume control and adjustable stop screw to limit handle turn. Consisting of tub spout and Clear-- 225400 PLUMBING Page 15 of 37 Project No. 01091 Proposed Renovations March 6, 2009 Park House - Smith College, Northampton, MA B. Provide at water entrance, on both sides of pressure reducing valve. 2.8 WATER HAMMER ARRESTERS A. Where indicated on the Drawings, furnish and install Precision Plumbing Products, Inc. SC-Series type shock absorbers, sizes as shown on Drawings, or as required. No substitutions will be allowed 2.9 ACCESS PANELS A. Access panel doors for all concealed inaccessible valves, balancing fittings, or cleanouts in masonry walls, plastered or gypsum wallboard walls or ceilings, shall be furnished by the Plumbing Contractor and installed by tradesmen of wall or ceiling finish. Access panels in plastered ceilings shall be Karp Type DSC-214 PL (12" x 12" min.); in walls, shall be Karp type DSC-214M "Universal" (12" x 12"); for drywall ceilings, shall be Karp Sesame Slim Trim Access Hatches, Type KSTDW/CAD (12" x 12" min.) with screw driver type lock. B. Access panels shall be Karp Associates, Inc., Inryco, Inc., Milcor Division, Birmingham Ornamental Iron, or equal. C. Access panels shall be furnished and installed at all valves, cleanouts, shock absorbers and unions. , 2.10 PLUMBING FIXTURES AND FIXTURE TRIMMINGS A. General Requirements: Reference made herein to numbers of plumbing fixtures to establish type and quality of materials. Angle stops, straight stops, stops integral with the faucets, or concealed type of lock shield, loose key pattern stops for supplies shall be furnished and installed with fixtures. Exposed traps and supply pipes for all fixtures and equipment shall be chrome plated and connected to the rough piping systems at the wall. Wall escutcheons shall be chromium plated or nickel plated brass with polished, bright surfaces. B. The Plumbing Contractor shall furnish all supports, brackets, bolts, etc. for proper installation of all fixtures requiring support. They shall be in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations, and, if necessary, shall be built into place as the building progresses. This Contractor shall be held responsible for the stability and proper support of all plumbing fixtures. C. Water Closet (P-1) 1 . Closet - American Standard "Madera" Model 2234.015, elongated vitreous china, siphon jet action with 1 %z" top spud and 1 .6 gallon flush. 2. Flush Valve - Toto Model No. TMT1 NNC-32, 1 .6 gpf, with vacuum 225400 PLUMBING Page 14 of 37 Project No. 01091 Proposed Renovations March 6, 2009 Park House - Smith College, Northampton, MA ZN-1405-7 nickel-bronze recessed for resilient floors; Zurn ZN-1405-7 for ceramic tile floors; ZN-1405-14 for carpeted floors; or equal by J. R. Smith or Wade. 2.5 INSULATION A. All water piping shall be insulated with Armaflex closed cell pipe insulation with self-sealing lap, 1" thick for hot water, and return hot water 1 /2" thick. for cold water. Insulation shall be one piece snap-on type. All exposed piping within 10'-0" of finished floor shall be insulated as noted above and shall be fully jacketed with a PVC cover. B. Fittings shall be insulated with mitered cut insulation applied over fittings with joints taped. Cold water piping shall also have mastic applied to all:,, overlapping surfaces to form a vapor barrier. C. Insulation and fitting jackets shall be installed according to the manufacturer's recommendations. Any gaps or fishmouths shall be remade. D. Install a twelve (12") inch length of wood blocking at each hanger; insulation shall run continuous through the hanger. jacket shall match adjacent insulation jacket. E. All exposed drain and water piping at handicapped lavatories shall be insulated with Truebro "Nandi Lav-Guard", or equal, molded insulation kit. 2.6 THERMOMETERS A. Thermometers shall be Jay, Moeller, Palmer, Taylor, Trerice, or Weiss, equal to Trerice 80700 with aluminum case, industrial glass, dial type, 4-1 /2" diameter, 20 F subdivisions. Stem length shall be sufficient to assure accurate and fast response, but in no case less than 3-1 /2" nor less than one-third of pipe diameter in which installed. Each thermometer shall be provided with a brass, monel, or stainless steel separable socket of matching length, and with lagging extensions when installed in insulated pipe. Thermometers shall be adjustable angle type, positioned as required to be easily seen and read from normal operator's position. B. Ranges shall be manufacturer's standard closest to the following: 1 . Hot water: 30oF - 180oF. C. Provide at inlet and outlet hot water heater and at mixing valve. 2.7 PRESSURE GAUGES A. 4-1 /2" dial, double-spring with soft copper tubing loop and pet cock.. Operating range shall be in the center of the scale. To be U.S. Gage Co., or approved equal. 225400 PLUMBING Page 13 of 37 Project No. 01091 Proposed Renovations March 6, 2009 Park House - Smith College, Northampton, MA E. Balancing Valves: 1 . Where indicated on the Drawings, furnish and install balance circuit setter, with calibrated scale, with bronze body and disc and connections for differential pressure meter. 2. Balancing valves shall be Tour & Anderson. F. Check Valves 1 . Check valves shall be furnished and installed where indicated on the Drawings. Checks up to 2" shall be Class 125. Solder ends, body and caps shall be ASTM B62 cast bronze composition, swing type disc, Stockham Figure B-309. 2. Check valves 2-1 /2" and larger shall be iron body, bronze mounted with body and cap conforming to ASTM All 26, Class B cast iron, flanged, swing type disc, Stockham Figure G-931 . 3. Check valves shall be as manufactured by Stockham, Jenkins, Lunkenheimer, or equal. G. Vacuum relief valves shall be Watts Model 36A - 3/4". H. Globe valves shall be as manufactured by Hammond IB-418 or I13-440. I. Furnish and install, where indicated on the Drawings, Ametek/U.S. Gauge Co.'s Figure P500, 2" diameter, 0 lb. to 100 lbs. 2.3 HANGERS A. Hangers shall be as manufactured by Grinnell Company, Carpenter & Paterson, Fee & Mason, or equal. B. For cast iron pipe - Grinnell Fig. 260, one to each length of cast iron pipe; at twelve foot 0 2') intervals for threaded piping. C. For hot, cold, and return water piping - Grinnell Fig. 70 at six foot (6) intervals for copper tubing 1 -1 /4" or less; ten foot (10') intervals for piping at 1 -1 12" and larger. Install Fig. 167 insulation shield between hanger and insulation. Hangers to be installed outside the insulation. Hangers for gas piping shall be installed at eight foot (8) intervals. D. Hangers or supports shall be placed within one foot (1') of each horizontal elbow. Vertical runs of pipe not over five feet (5) in length shall be supported on hangers placed not over 1 /2" from the elbow on the connecting horizontal run. 2.4 CLEANOUTS A. Where cleanouts occur in finished floors throughout the building, they shall be Zurn ZN-1405-2, nickel-bronze for concrete finish floor; Zurn 225400 PLUMBING Page 12 of 37 Project No. 01091 Proposed Renovations March 6, 2009 Park House - Smith College, Northampton, MA solder joints. E. All gas piping shall be Schedule 40 black steel pipe with malleable pattern fittings, installed in strict compliance with the Massachusetts Fuel Gas Code and NFPA 54. All piping 2" and below shall be assembled with screwed malleable iron fittings; 2-1 /2" and above shall be welded. Provide necessary ball type gas shut-off valves or square head cocks on piping 2" and smaller and drips as required. Piping 2" and larger shall have plug valves. All high pressure gas piping shall be Schedule 40, all welded with flanged plug valves. All gas valves shall be rated for 125 psi working pressure. 1 . All welding shall be done in accordance with the welding procedures of the National Certified Pipe Welding Bureau, or any other approved procedure, conforming to the requirements of the ASA Code for Pressure Piping. No welder shall be employed on the work who has not been fully qualified under the above specified procedure and so certified as a member of the local chapter of the National Certified Pipe Welding Bureau or similar locally recognized testing authority. 2.2 BALL VALVES A. On water lines inside the building, ball valves shall be as manufactured by Watts Series B6001 with stainless steel balls. No substitutions will be AM allowed. Valves shall be provided with stainless steel ball, reinforced teflon seats and seals, bronze body, 400 psi wog, positive 100% shut-off. All valves to be furnished with valve handle extension sized to match pipe insulation thickness. B. Drain valves at all low points shall be 112" or 3/4" solder by 3/4" hose end with attached cap and chain. C. Provide gas cocks for sizes 1" and smaller, and provide gas rated ball valves on gas piping 1 -1 /4" and larger with tee handles. D. Gate Valves: 1 . Where indicated on the Drawings, all gate valves 4" and larger, shall be Class 125 iron body bronze mounted with body and bonnet conforming to 200 psi wog non-shock cast iron, flanged ends, with Teflon packing, two-piece packing gland assembly, Hammond Figure 1 R1 138, Stockman, or equal. 2. Valves 3" and smaller where indicated on the Drawings shall be Class 125. Body and bonnets shall be of ASTM B62 cast bronze composition, solid disc, copper silicone alloy stem, brass packing gland, Teflon packing, and malleable handwheel, solder end, Stockham Figure B-104, Hammond 1 R1 138, or equal. 3. Valves shall be as manufactured by Stockham, Hammond, American Valve, or equal. 225400 PLUMBING Page 11 of 37 Project No. 01091 Proposed Renovations March 6, 2009 Park House - Smith College, Northampton, MA of the Plumbing Subcontractor is more specifically described below. B. The Base Bid shall be the lump sum price for all labor and materials necessary for and reasonably incidental to providing all Plumbing work specified and shown on the Drawings, less the cost of all extra work described in the Alternates. C. Schedule of Alternates 1 . ALTERNATE NUMBER 1 : Deduct the Work of the Contract to construct the new handicapped ramp at the front entrance 2. ALTERNATE NUMBER 2: Deduct the Work of the Contract to furnish and install the makeup air unit MAU-1 and all associated piping, controls, power, wire, and sheet metal. 3. ALTERNATE NUMBER 3: Reduce the work required to construct Room 313, maintain the heat, and sprinkler protection. 4. ALTERNATE NUMBER 4: Reduce the work of replacing all existing sprinkler heads. 5. ALTERNATE NUMBER 5: Furnish and install a new solar domestic hot water heating system. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PIPING MATERIALS A. All soil, waste, and vent piping in accessible areas 2-1 /2" and larger, shall be cast iron "no hub", ASA Group 022 pipe and fittings, joined with cast iron clamps as manufactured by "Clamp-All". No substitutions will be allowed. All soil, waste, and vent below slab shall be service weight, cast iron pipe with oakum and lead, sealed gas and watertight. In lieu of lead and oakum joint piping, below slab may be service weight with push-on rubber rings. B. In lieu of cast iron piping, pipe sizes 3" and smaller shall be Type "L" copper pipe with solder fittings. C. All waste lines 2" and smaller shall be Type "L" copper. All vent lines 2" and smaller shall be type "M" copper. D. All hot, cold and recirculating hot water piping within the building shall be hard copper Type "L" seamless drawn tubing, assembled with sweat fittings. All solders used shall be lead free, cadmium free "Silberbrite- 100", or equal, complying with the latest issue of ANSI A-5.8�publications. All exposed runs to all toilet fixtures and sinks shall be chrome plated. All below slab trap primer feed piping shall be Type "K" soft rolled with silver 225400 PLUMBING Page 10 of 37 Project No. 01091 Proposed Renovations March 6, 2009 Park House - Smith College, Northampton, MA Apw A. The Plumbing Subcontractor shall give full cooperation to the Subcontractors of other trades, and shall furnish any information necessary to permit the work of all trades to be installed satisfactorily and with least possible interference or delay. The Plumbing Subcontractor shall cooperate with the other sub trades in preparing a complete set of co-ordination drawings. All co-ordination drawings for the plumbing work shall be prepared by this Subcontractor on backgrounds prepared by the HVAC Contractor. B. In areas where conflicts may occur, if so directed by the Architect, this Subcontractor shall prepare composite sketches, at a suitable scale, not less than %a"=1 ', clearly showing how his work is to be installed in relation to the work of other trades. C. Piping and other equipment shall not be installed in congested and possible problem areas by this Subcontractor without first coordinating the installation of same with other trades and the Architect. This Subcontractor, at his own expense, shall relocate all uncoordinated piping and other equipment installed should they interfere with the proper installation and mounting of electrical equipment, ductwork, piping, hung ceilings, and other structural finishes by the other trades. D. This Subcontractor shall co-ordinate the elevations of all piping and equipment in hung ceilings for the installation of recessed lighting fixtures, duct boxes, etc. Conflicts shall be brought to the attention of the Architect for a decision before piping and/or equipment of other trades is installed. E. In areas where, due to construction conditions, more than one trade is required to use common openings in chases, shafts and sleeves for the passage of conduits, raceways, piping, ductwork and other materials, this Subcontractor must plan and locate the positions of equipment to be furnished under this Section so that all items including piping and/or equipment of other trades may be accommodated within the space available. Location and positioning shall be done prior to installation of same and to the satisfaction of the Architect. F. This Subcontractor, before installing his work, shall see that it does not interfere with the clearances required for finished columns, pilasters„ partitions or walls, as shown on the Contract, Architectural, or Structural Drawings showing foundations, floor plans, roof plans, and details. G. Piping work that is installed under this Contract which interferes with the architectural design or building structure shall be changed as directed by the Architect, and all costs incidental to such changes shall be paid by this Subcontractor at no additional cost to the Owner. 1 .20 ALTERNATE BIDS A. See Section 01230 for a general description of the Base and Alternate Bids. Work 225400 PLUMBING Page 9 of 37 Project No. 01091 Proposed Renovations March 6, 2009 Park House - Smith College, Northampton, MA take over operation and maintenance procedures. This Subcontractor shall video tape the instruction procedures an deliver two (2) copies of the tape with the Operation and Maintenance Manuals. B. Furnish the Architect, for his approval, three (3) copies of an Operation and Maintenance Manual. Inscribe the following identification on the cover: the words, "Operation and Maintenance Manual", the name and location of the equipment or the building, the name of the Subcontractor, and the Contract number. The manual shall have a Table of Contents with tab sheets placed before each section. The instructions shall be legible and easily read, with large sheets of drawings folded in. the manuals shall be bound in hard binders or an approved equivalent. C. The Manual shall include the following information: 1 . Description of systems. 2. Description of start-up, operation, and shutdown. 3. Schedule of adjustment, care, and routine maintenance for each item of equipment. 4. Lubrication chart. 5. Wiring and control diagrams with data to explain detailed operation and control of each item of equipment. 6. Valve chart. 7. List of recommended spare parts. 8. Copies of all service contracts. 9. Performance curves for pumps, etc. 10. List of all names, addresses, and phone numbers of all Subcontractors as well as the local representative for each item of equipment. 1 .17 GUARANTEE A. The Plumbing Contractor shall guarantee the satisfactory operation of his work in all parts for a period of one (1) year after the date of final acceptance, and shall agree to promptly repair or replace any items of his work which are found to be defective during this period. B. The Plumbing Contractor shall pay for repair of damage to the building caused by defects in his work and for repair to plaster, wood, and other materials or equipment caused by replacement or repairs to the entire satisfaction of the Architect. C. Any part of the work installed under this Contract requiring excessive maintenance shall be considered as being defective. 1 .18 RECORD DRAWINGS A. Submit Record Drawings as specified in Project Closeout, Section 01700. 1 .19 CO-ORDINATION OF TRADES 225400 PLUMBING Page 8 of 37 Project No. 01091 Proposed Renovations March 6, 2009 Park House - Smith College, Northampton, MA A. Cutting and/or drilling of all openings and holes 4" in diameter or smaller, required for the installation of plumbing in the building, shall be performed by the Plumbing Contractor. All work and materials shall be installed in such a manner and at such time to keep cutting and patching to a minimum. Cutting and/or drilling of structural supports (ie. beams or joists) is not allowed without written approval by the Architect. Location for openings, etc. shall be checked by the Plumbing Contractor, and error due to failure to co-ordinate work with other divisions shall be the responsibility of the Plumbing Contractor failing to co-ordinate, who shall make the corrections at his own expense. B. All holes larger than 4" in diameter shall be provided by the General Contractor. C. Work shall include furnishing and locating sleeves or inserts required before the new walls are built, or be responsible for the cost of cutting and patching required for pipes where sleeves were not installed or where incorrectly located. The Plumbing Contractor shall do all drilling required for the installation of hangers. D. Patching of all holes, after installation of piping or equipment, shall be performed by the General Contractor or appropriate tradesmen. E. All pipe cutting or threading shall be done in a location approved by the Owner. F. No pipe cutting or threading shall be done in areas where completed concrete floor slab is to remain in finishes or be painted later. Should this area be necessary, the Plumbing Contractor shall cover the entire working area with canvas tarpaulins in an approved manner. 1 .15 WORK CONCEALED A. All piping, hangers and supports shall be installed concealed in all areas except storage rooms, closets, and mechanical or electrical equipment: rooms. B. Piping containing water shall not be installed concealed in walls having ar exterior exposure above grade, unless specifically so shown on the Drawings. When pipes are indicated to be installed in exterior walls, the Plumbing Contractor shall be responsible for ensuring that wall and pipe insulation is properly installed to protect them from freezing. 1 .16 OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS A. After all final tests and adjustments have been completed, fully instruct the proper Owner's representative in all details of operation of equipment installed. Supply qualified personnel to operate equipment for sufficient length of time to assure that Owner's representative is properly qualified to 225400 PLUMBING Page 7 of 37 Project No. 01091 Proposed Renovations March 6, 2009 Park House - Smith College, Northampton, MA C. The Plumbing Contractor shall not scale the Drawings. D. Because of the small scale of the Drawings, it is not possible to indicate all offsets, fittings and accessories that may be required. The Plumbing Contractor shall carefully investigate the structural and finish conditions affecting all his work and shall arrange such work accordingly, furnishing such fittings, traps, offsets, valves, and accessories as may be required to meet such conditions, at no additional cost. 1 .11 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Delivery: The Plumbing subcontractor shall provide for the delivery of all his materials and fixtures to the building site when required so as to carry on his work efficiently and to avoid delaying his work and that of other trades. All delivery and storage must be coordinated with the Smith College Facilities Management Department The Plumbing Contractor shall take delivery of all pre-purchased plumbing fixtures and equipment, and shall be responsible for the proper handling, storage, and protection of these materials from that point on. Any damage or loss of these materials after delivery shall be the responsibility of this Contractor. B. Storage and Handling: The Plumbing Contractor shall, at all times, fully protect his work and materials from injury or loss by others. Any injury or loss which may occur shall be made good without expense to the Owner. The Plumbing Contractor shall be responsible for the proper protection of all his materials until the building is accepted by the Owner. 1 .12 ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS A. All necessary tools machinery, scaffolding, and transportation for completion of his Contract shall be provided by the Plumbing Contractor. B. The Plumbing Contractor shall provide his own portable extension lines and obtain 120 volt, 60 cycle, single phase electric energy from the General Contractor to drive his machines and light his work. He shall provide his own light bulbs, plugs, sockets, etc. C. All broken or waste material, rags, packing, etc., resulting from his work shall be removed by the Plumbing Contractor. 1 .13 PROTECTION A. The Plumbing Contractor shall, at all times, fully protect his work and materials from injury or loss by others. Any injury or loss which may occur shall be made good without expense to the Owner. The Plumbing Contractor shall be responsible for the proper protection of all his materials until the building is accepted by the Owner. 1 .14 CUTTING AND PATCHING 225400 PLUMBING Page 6 of 37 Project No. 0 109 1 Proposed Renovations March 6, 2009 Park House - Smith College, Northampton, MA A. Before ordering materials shipped to the job, the Plumbing Contractor shall submit to the Architect six (6) sets of catalogue cuts, manufacturers' data sheets, or Shop Drawings, giving all details, dimensions, capacities, etc. of all materials to be furnished. B. The Plumbing Contractor shall check the Shop Drawings thoroughly for compliance with the Plans and Specifications before submitting them to the Architect for review, making any and all changes which may be required. C. The review of Shop Drawings by the Architect shall not relieve the Plumbing Contractor from any obligation to perform the work strictly in accordance with the Contract Drawings and Specifications. The respon- sibility for errors in Shop Drawings shall remain with the Plumbing Contractor. D. In the event that materials are being delivered to or installed on the job for which Shop Drawings or samples have not been approved and/or which are not in accordance with the Specifications, the Plumbing Contractor will be required to remove such materials and substitute approved materials at his own expense and as directed by the Architect. 1 .8 PERMITS, FEES AND INSPECTIONS A. The Plumbing Contractor shall secure all permits and pay all fees required for his work. He shall be required to secure all other permits and pay all other fees and charges incidental to the proper carrying out of the Contract. He is to assume all responsibility regarding the observance of the rules and regulations so far as they relate to his part of the work. B. The Plumbing Contractor shall arrange and pay for all required inspections of his work. 1 .9 TEMPORARY HOOK-UPS A. The General Contractor will provide any temporary hook-ups required for the use of water or sanitary for construction purposes and testing out apparatus as specified in Section 01500. 1 .10 PLANS AND SPECIFICATIONS A. The Plumbing Contractor shall refer to the Architectural Drawings of interior details, plans, elevations, and structural layout in preparing his estimate. These documents are intended to supplement the Mechanical) and Electrical Plans and Specifications and any applicable work indicated or implied thereon is to be considered a part of the Contract requirements. B. The Specifications complementary and anything called for, or reasonably implied, in the Plans and not in the Specifications, or vice versa, shall be considered as called for or reasonably implied in both. 225400 PLUMBING Page 5 of 37 Project No. 01091 Proposed Renovations March 6, 2009 Park House - Smith College, Northampton, MA shall lay out all his work and be responsible for the accuracy thereof. Conditions at the building shall be the determining factor for all measure- ments. F. All work shall be laid out and installed so as to require the least amount of cutting and patching. Drilling of all holes required for the installation of pipes, conduit, and cable runs shall be performed by the Subcontractor installing such items. G. The Plumbing Contractor shall be responsible for the proper protection of his work and materials from injury or loss at the hands of others and shall make good such loss or injury at his own expense. All pipes left open during the progress of the work shall be capped or plugged at all times. All instruments and operating apparatus shall be protected by suitable means. H. The Plumbing Contractor shall be responsible for all equipment and materials installed under this Section until the final acceptance of the project by the Owner. I. The Plumbing Contractor shall check all of the Architectural Plans and Specifications before ordering any materials and the installation of work. Any discrepancies shall be called to the attention of the Architect before proceeding with the work. 1 .5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Equality of materials or articles other than those named or described in this Section will be determined in accordance with the provisions of the General Requirements, except that substitutions will only be considered for items where the words, "or equal" appear in the product specification, and as approved by the Architect and Owner. B. The Plumbing Contractor shall agree to accept as final the results of tests secured by a qualified testing laboratory engaged by the Owner. Tests will be conducted in accordance with the General Requirements. 1 .6 PRODUCTS A. With the exception of items specifically noted otherwise, all materials used shall be U.S. made, new, full weight, and first class in every respect, without defects, and designed to function properly in that portion of the work for which they are intended, and with the same brand of manufacturer for each class of material or equipment. Electrical materials and equipment of types for which there are Underwriters Laboratories standard requirements, listings, or labels shall conform to their requirements and be so labeled. 1 .7 SUBMITTALS 100% 225400 PLUMBING Page 4 of 37 Project No. 01091 Proposed Renovations March 6, 2009 Park House - Smith College, Northampton, MA 1 .3 CODES, ORDINANCES AND INSPECTIONS A. All materials and the installation thereof shall conform to the requirements of the Massachusetts State Building Code, Electrical Code, Fuel Gas and Plumbing Code and local laws, rules, regulations, and codes pertaining thereto. Where provisions of the Contract Documents conflict with any codes, rules or regulations, the latter shall govern. Where the Contract requirements are in excess of applicable codes, rules or regulations, the Contract provisions shall govern unless the Architect rules otherwise. B. The Plumbing Contractor shall comply with the Local Code Enforcement Officials' instructions at no additional cost to the Owner. 1 .4 INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS A. The Plumbing Contractor shall employ only competent and experienced workmen at a regular schedule in harmony with the other tradesmen on the job. He shall also exercise care and supervision of his employees in regard to proper and expeditious laying out of his work. B. The Plumbing Contractor shall have a Foreman or Superintendent assigned to the Project who shall be authorized to make decisions and receive instructions exactly as if the Plumbing Contractor himself were present. The Foreman or Superintendent shall not be removed or replaced without the express approval of the Architect after construction work begins. C. The Plumbing Contractor shall be held responsible for any injuries or damage done to the building premises or adjoining property or to other Subcontractors' work resulting from the execution of his part of the work: in any manner whatsoever; and in case of dispute arising as to the extent or share of responsibility incurred by the Plumbing Contractor, it is agreed between the Owner and the Plumbing Contractor that such liability and extent of damage shall be finally determined by the Architect whose decision shall be final and binding on both parties to the Contract for the work in question. D. The Plumbing Contractor shall co-ordinate to the fullest extent with all other trades in order to expedite the progress of the work. He shall furnish all information pertaining to his materials as to sizes, locations, and means of support, to all other trades requiring such information. The Plumbing Contractor shall also furnish all sleeves, frames, beams, supports, inserts, etc., hereinafter specified so that the General Contractor may build them in place. In case of failure on the part of the Plumbing Contractor to give proper information as above, he will be required to bear the extra expense involved due to such failure. E. The arrangement of all piping, duct work, conduit, wire and cable indicated on the Drawings is diagrammatic only, and indicates the minimum requirements of this work. Conditions at the building shall determine the actual arrangement of runs, bends, offsets, etc. The Plumbing Contractor 225400 PLUMBING Page 3 of 37 Project No. 01091 Proposed Renovations March 6, 2009 Park House - Smith College, Northampton, MA SECTION 225400 - PLUMBING PART 1 - GENERAL 1 .1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Include General Conditions, Supplementary General Conditions, and applicable parts of Division 1 , as part of this Section. B. Examine all other Sections of the Specifications for requirements, which affect work under this Section whether or not such work is specifically mentioned in this Section. C. Co-ordinate work with that of all other trades affecting, or affected by the work of this Section. Co-operate with such trades to assure steady progress of all work under the Contract. 1 .2 SCOPE OF WORK A. Furnish all labor, materials, plant, equipment and services necessary for and reasonably incidental to the complete installation of all plumbing work specified herein and/or indicated on the Drawings, including, but not limited to, the following: 1 . Sanitary waste and venting systems inside the building, connecting ,. to drainage systems within the building or on the site. Furnish piping, traps, flanges, seals, cleanouts, fixtures, drains, supports, and roof terminals. 2. Existing water heating system shall remain and shall be protected during construction. 3. Hot, cold and return hot water distribution systems. Furnish piping, fittings, insulation, supports and valves. 4. Plumbing fixtures and supports. 5. Arrange for inspections and perform cleaning and testing. 6. Gas piping system connecting to water heater gas fired dryers and gas fireplace. 7. All final connections to all items of equipment furnished by others requiring water, gas, drain, and waste connections. 8. The disconnecting and removal of all existing piping systems, fixtures, and equipment interfering with, or made obsolete by, new construction. All piping, fixtures, and equipment (i.e. copper and brass piping, fittings and valves, flush valves, mixing valves, heat exchangers, and controls) to be removed is the property of the Owner and shall be delivered to such places designated by the Owner. Removal from the site of all obsolete material after the Owner's review shall be by this Contractor. B. Refer to appropriate Division - 2 Sections for trenching and backfill required in conjunction with plumbing piping; not work of this Section. 225400 PLUMBING Page 2 of 37 Project No. 01091 Proposed Renovations March 6, 2009 Park House - Smith College, Northampton, MA INDEX SECTION 225400 - PLUMBING PART 1 - GENERAL PART 3 - INSTALLATION 1 .1 RELATED DOCUMENTS 3.1 SOIL, WASTE, DRAIN AND VENT PIPING 1 .2 SCOPE OF WORK 3.2 INSTALLATION OF SEWER PIPE 1 .3 CODES, ORDINANCES AND INSPECTIONS 3.3 WATER PIPE, FITTINGS AND 1 .4 INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS CONNECTIONS 1 .5 QUALITY ASSURANCE 3.4 CUTTING AND PATCHING 1 .6 PRODUCTS 3.5 INSULATION 1 .7 SUBMITTALS 3.6 SLEEVES AND ESCUTCHEONS 1 .8 PERMITS, FEES AND INSPECTIONS 3.7 INSPECTION AND TESTS 1 .9 TEMPORARY HOOK-UPS 3.8 CLEANING UP 1 .10 PLANS AND SPECIFICATIONS 3.9 EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION 1 .11 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING 3.10 DISINFECTION 1 .12 ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS 3.11 FIRE SAFING 1 .13 PROTECTION 1 .14 CUTTING AND PATCHING 1 .15 WORK CONCEALED 1 .16 OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS 1 .17 GUARANTEE 1 .18 RECORD DRAWINGS 1 .19 COORDINATION OF TRADES 1 .20 ALTERNATE BIDS PART 2 - MATERIALS 2.1 PIPING MATERIALS 2.2 BALL VALVES 2.3 HANGERS 2.4 CLEANOUTS 2.5 INSULATION 2.6 THERMOMETERS 2.7 PRESSURE GAUGES 2.8 WATER HAMMER ARRESTERS 2.9 ACCESS PANELS 2.10 PLUMBING FIXTURES AND FIXTURE TRIMMINGS 2.11 DEMOLITION 2.12 TRAP PRIMER 2.13 VACUUM BREAKERS 2.14 BACKFLOW PREVENTERS 2.15 VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROL 225400 PLUMBING Page 1 of 37 Project No. 01091 Proposed Renovations March 6, 2009 Park House Smith College, Northampton, MA (non - text - page) 215300 FIRE PROTECTION Page 24 of 24 Project No. 01091 Proposed Renovations March 6, 2009 Park House Smith College, Northampton, MA 40W Tighten bolts gradually and uniformly to appropriate torque specified by the bolt manufacturer. Mechanical Grooved joints: Cut or roll grooves on pipe ends dimensionally compatible with the couplings. L. End Treatment: After cutting pipe lengths, remove burrs and fins from pipe ends. 3.4 VALVE INSTALLATIONS A. General: Install fire protection specialty valves, fittings, and specialties in accordance with the manufacturer's written instructions, NFPA 13 and 14, and the authority having jurisdiction. B. Gate Valves: Install supervised open gate valves so located to control all sources of water supply except fire department connections. Where there is more than one control valve, provide permanently marked identification signs indicating the portion of the system controlled by each valve. C. Alarm Check Valves: Install valves in the vertical position in proper direction of flow including the bypass check valve and retard chamber drain line connection. Install valve trim in accordance with the valve manufacturer's appropriate trim diagram. Test valve for proper operation. 3.5 FINAL CLOSEOUT A. Identification: Apply signs to control, drain, test, and alarm valves identifying there purpose and function. Provide lettering size and style selected by Architect/Engineer from NFPA's suggested styles. B. Adjustments: Place the system in operation with controls functioning. Adjust controls and apparatus for proper operation. Test thermometers and gauges for accuracy over the entire range. Remove and replace items found defective. END OF SECTION 215300 FIRE PROTECTION Page 23 of 24 Project No. 0 109 1 Proposed Renovations March 6, 2009 Park House Smith College, Northampton, MA where necessary. 2. Seal completely around all openings and over the fire safing insulation with sealing compound. 3. Install fire safing around all pipe penetrations and sleeves passing through fire walls, ceilings, floors, etc. 3.3 INTERIOR PIPING INSTALLATION A. Install sprinkler piping to provide for system drainage in accordance with NFPA 13. B. Use approved fittings to make all changes in direction, branch takeoffs from mains, and reductions in pipe sizes. C. Install unions in pipes 2" and smaller adjacent to each valve. Unions are not required on flanged devices or in piping installations using grooved mechanical couplings. D. Install flanges or flange adapters on valves, apparatus, and equipment having 2-112 and larger connections. E. Hangers and Supports: Comply with the requirements of NFPA 13 and NFPA 14. Hanger and support spacing and locations for piping joined with grooved mechanical couplings shall be in accordance with the grooved mechanical coupling manufacturer's written instructions for rigid systems. look F. Make connections between underground and above ground piping using an approved transition piece strapped or fastened to prevent separation. G. Install sleeve at pipe penetrations in basement and foundation walls. Refer to Division 15 Section, "Basic Materials and Methods". H. Install test connections sized and located in accordance with NFPA 13 complete with shutoff valve. Test connections may also serve as drain pipes. I. Install pressure gauge on the riser or feed main at or near each test connection. Provide gauge with a connection not less than 1 /4" and having a soft metal seated globe valve arranged for draining pipe between gauge and valve. Install gauges to permit removal and where they will not be subject to freezing. J. Threaded Joints: Conform to ANSI B1 .20.1 , tapered pipe threads for field cut threads. Join pipe, fittings, and valves as follows. K. Flanged Joints: Align flanged surfaces parallel. Assemble joints by sequencing bolt tightening to make initial contact of flanges and gaskets as flat and parallel as possible. Use suitable lubricants on bolt threads. 215300 FIRE PROTECTION Page 22 of 24 Project No. 01091 Proposed Renovations March 6, 2009 Park House Smith College, Northampton, MA static pressure when maximum static pressure is in excess of 150 psi. Check system for leakage of joints. Measure hydrostatic pressure at low point of each system of zone being tested. Test dry-pipe hydrostatically except, in freezing conditions, test with air at pressures not less than 50 psi, for period of 2 hours. Check system for leakage. Leave differential dry-valve clappers open during test, to prevent damage. C. Repair or replace piping system as required to eliminate leakage in accordance with ANSI/NFPA standards for "little or no leakage", and retest as specified to demonstrate compliance. Do not use chemicals, stop-leak compounds, mastics, or other temporary repair methods. 3.2 FIRE SAFING A. Work Included: Provide labor, materials, and equipment necessary to complete the work including, but not limited to the following: 1 . Fire safing at all penetrations through fire barriers, including all penetrations through existing plaster ceiling for the installation of Attic sprinklers. 2. Fire safing at all penetrations through smoke barriers. 3. Extent of fire and smoke barriers as indicated on the Architectural Drawings. 4. Fire safing at all penetrations through floors, shafts, corridor walls, stairway walls, mechanical rooms, electrical rooms, vaults, storage rooms, kitchen, and machine rooms. B. Safing Insulation 1 . Fire safing insulation shall be Thermafiber as manufactured by USG Interiors, Inc. or Architect-Engineer approved equal, 4" minimum thickness by the required full length and width, or as indicated on the Drawings. 2. Provide incidental galvanized steel clip anchors. C. Seal Compound: At "poke-through" openings, apply "Firecode" seal compound as manufactured by USG Interiors, Inc., or approved equal, over Thermafiber fire safing. D. Preparation 1 . At all fire rated assemblies, prepare all penetrations for pipes and perimeters. E. Application 1 . Install approved fire safing insulation of proper size leaving no voids. Compress and friction fit fire safing and use attachment clips 215300 FIRE PROTECTION Page 21 of 24 Project No. 01091 Proposed Renovations March 6, 2009 Park House Smith College, Northampton, MA rating 165oF or as required by the insurance underwriter. b. Semi-recessed dry pendant sprinkler heads shall be Viking Model "M" chrome plated head with Type 7-1" recessed escutcheon, rated at 165oF unless otherwise noted; to be installed in all occupied spaces. C. Spare sprinklers shall be provided in one 12-head cabinet equal to Viking, Model A-1 cabinet. Each cabinet shall have an assortment of heads as used on the job and also an approved type sprinkler head wrench; mount cabinet in alarm check valve area. d. Head guards shall be equal to Reliable Model 1 for upright sprinklers in areas specified on drawings. e. Drain and test connections shall be equal to AGF Model 1000 with sight glass, and test orifice. f. Horizontal sidewall sprinkler heads shall be Star Model "E". g. Dry horizontal sidewall shall be equal to Viking Model H-1 , 1" NPT, 165oF. h. Dry pendent sprinkler shall be equal to Viking Model A-1 recessed type with white cover, extended dry pendent, 1" NPT, 165oF. i. Tamper switches shall be equal to Potter Electrical Signal Company, Model OSYS-B, small case, and shall be installed on all control valves for the sprinkler system. j. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide fire protection specialties of the following Grinnell Fire Protection Systems, Co., Inc., Viking Corporation, or equal. k. Existing dry pipe alarm valve shall remain. Furnish and install new 3/4 H.P. air compressor, and air maintenance device accelerator and air maintenance compressor mounted on riser. I. Existing double check valve assembly shall remain. Provide test kits Model TK-7-BFP, and two repair kits. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 CLEANING AND TESTING A. Prior to connecting sprinkler risers for flushing, flush water feed mains, lead-in connections and control portions of sprinkler piping. After fire sprinkler-piping installation has been completed and before piping is placed in service, flush entire sprinkler system, as required to remove foreign substances, under pressure as specified in ANSI/NFPA 13. Continue flushing until water is clear, and check to ensure that debris has not clogged sprinklers. B. After flushing system, test fire sprinkler piping hydrostatically, for period of 2 hours, at not less than 200 psi or at 50 psi in excess of maximum _awhk 215300 FIRE PROTECTION Page 20 of 24 Project No. 01091 Proposed Renovations March 6, 2009 Park House Smith College, Northampton, MA a. Threaded End, 2" and Smaller: FM, UL-listed, 175 psi, bronze body, solid wedge, outside screw and yoke, rising stem. Crane: 459 Fairbanks: 0222 Hammond: IB681 Jenkins: 2750 Stockham: B-133 Walworth: 904 b. Flanged End, 2-1 /2" and Larger: FM, UL listed, 175 psi, iron body bronze mounted, solid wedge, outside screw and yoke, rising stem. Crane: 467 Fairbanks: 0412 Hammond: IR1154 ,Jenkins: 825-A Stockham: G-634 Walworth: 8713-F 3. Check Valves a. 2-1 /2" and Larger: FM, 175 psi, iron body bronze mounted., renewable composition disc and bronze seat ring, bolted cover, flanged ends. Fairbanks: 0711 Jenkins: 729 Stockham: G-940 Walworth: 8883-LT 4. Install valves where required for proper operation of piping and equipment, including valves in branch lines where necessary to isolate sections of piping. Locate valves so as to be accessible and so that separate support can be provided when necessary. 5. Install valves with stems pointed up, in vertical position where possible, but in no case with stems pointed downward from horizontal plane unless unavoidable. M. Fire Protection Specialties 1 . Provide fire protection specialties, UL listed, in accordance with the following listing. Provide sizes and types, which mate and match piping and equipment connections. a. Upright sprinkler heads shall be Viking Corp., Model "M" standard upright sprinkler head, rough brass. Temperature 215300 FIRE PROTECTION Page 19 of 2.4 Project No. 01091 Proposed Renovations March 6, 2009 Park House Smith College, Northampton, MA Elcen Metal Products Co. ►„ Fee & Mason Mfg. Co. ITT Grinnell Corp. 5. Install building attachments at required locations on structural steel or wood structural members for proper piping support. Space attachments within maximum piping span length indicated on MSS SP-69. Install additional building attachments where support is required for additional concentrated loads, including valves, flanges, guides, strainers, expansion joints, and at changes in direction of piping. 6. Install hangers, supports, clamps and attachments to support piping properly from building structure; comply with MSS SP-69. Arrange for grouping of parallel runs of horizontal piping to be supported together on trapeze type hangers where possible. Install supports with maximum spacing complying with MSS SP-69. Where piping of various sizes is to be supported together by trapeze hangers, space hangers for smallest pipe size or install intermediate supports for smaller diameter pipe. Do not use wire or perforated metal to support piping, and do not support piping from other piping. 7. Support sprinkler piping independently of other piping. 8. Install hangers and supports to allow controlled movement of piping systems and to permit freedom of movement between pipe anchors and to facilitate action of expansion joints, expansion loops, expansion bends and similar units. 9. Pipe Slopes: Install hangers and supports to provide pipe slopes and so that maximum pipe deflections allowed to ANSI B31 Pressure Piping Codes are not exceeded. 10. Hanger Adjustments: Adjust hangers so as to distribute loads equally on attachments. L. Valves 1 . Provide factory-fabricated valves recommended by manufacturer for use in service indicated. Provide valves of types and pressure ratings indicated; provide proper selection as determined by Installer to comply with installation requirements. Provide end connections, which properly mate with pipe, tube, and equipment connections. Where more than one type is indicated, selection is Installer's option. a. Unless otherwise indicated, provide valves of same size as upstream pipe size. b. Provide handwheels, fastened to valve stem, for valves other than quarter-turn. 2. Gate Valves 215300 FIRE PROTECTION Page 18 of 24 Project No. 01091 Proposed Renovations March 6, 2009 Park House Smith College, Northampton, MA K. Supports, Anchors, and Seals 1 . Provide factory-fabricated piping hangers and supports complying with MSS SP-58, of one of the following MSS types listed, selected by Installer to suit piping systems, in accordance with MSS SP-69 and manufacturer's published product information. Use only one type by one manufacturer for each piping service. Select size of hangers and supports to exactly fit pipe size. a. Adjustable Steel Clevis Hangers: MSS Type 1, for piping larger than 4". b. Adjustable Steel Band Hangers: MSS Type 7, for piping 4"' and less. C. Two-Bolt Riser Clamps: MSS Type 8. 2. Provide factory-fabricated hanger-rod attachments complying with MSS SP-58, of one of the following MSS types listed, selected by Installer to suit horizontal piping hangers and building attachments, in accordance with MSS SP-69 and manufacturers published product information. Use only one type by one manufacturer for each piping service. Select size of hanger-rod attachments to suit hanger rods. a. Steel Turnbuckles: MSS Type 13. b. Swivel Turnbuckles: MSS Type 15. C. Malleable Iron Sockets: MSS Type 16. d. Steel Weldless Eye Nuts: MSS Type 17. 3. Provide factory-fabricated building attachments complying with MSS SP-58, of one of the following types listed, selected by Installer to suit building substrate conditions, in accordance with MSS SP-69 and manufacturer's published product information. Select size of building attachments to suit hanger rods. a. Top Beam C-Clamps: MSS Type 19. b. Side Beam or Channel Clamps: MSS Type 20. C. C-Clamps: MSS Type 23. d. Side Beam Clamps: MSS Type 27. e. Malleable Beam Clamps: MSS Type 30. 4. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide hangers and supports of one of the following: B-Line Systems Inc. Carpenter and Patterson, Inc. Corner & Lada Co., Inc. 215300 FIRE PROTECTION Page 17 of 24 Project No. 01091 Proposed Renovations March 6, 2009 Park House Smith College, Northampton, MA pressure and time. 1 . Pipe Sleeves: Provide pipe sleeves of one of the following: a. Steel Pipe: Fabricate from schedule 40 galvanized steel pipe; remove burrs. b. Sleeve Seals: Provide sleeve seals for sleeves located in foundation walls below grade, or in exterior walls, caulked between sleeve and pipe. C. Install pipe sleeves of types indicated where piping passes through walls, floors, ceilings and roofs. Do not install sleeves through structural members of work, except as detailed on drawings, or as reviewed by Architect. Install sleeves so that piping will have free movement in sleeve, including allowance for thermal expansion; but not less than 2 pipe sizes larger than piping run. Install length of sleeve equal to thickness of surface; except floor sleeves. Extend floor sleeves 1 /4" above level floor finish, and 3/4" above floor finish sloped to drain. Provide temporary support of sleeves during placement of concrete and other work around sleeves, and provide temporary closure to prevent concrete and other materials from entering sleeves. d. Sleeve Seals: Install in accordance with the following: Fill and pack annular space between sleeve and pipe with oakum, caulk with lead, on both sides. 2. Provide pipe escutcheons as specified herein with inside diameter closely fitting pipe outside diameter or outside of pipe insulation where pipe is insulated. Select outside diameter of escutcheon to completely cover pipe sleeve and extension, if any. Furnish pipe escutcheons with nickel or chrome finish for occupied areas; prime paint finish for unoccupied areas. a. Pipe Escutcheons for all areas: Provide chrome plated sheet steel escutcheons, solid or split hinged. b. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide pipe escutcheons of one of the following: Chicago Specialty Mfg. Co. Producers Specialty & Mfg. Co. Sanitary-Dash Mfg. Co. . C. Install pipe escutcheons on each pipe penetration through floors, walls, partitions, and ceilings where penetration is exposed to view; and on exterior of building. Secure escutcheon to pipe so escutcheon covers penetration hole, and is flush with adjoining surface. 215300 FIRE PROTECTION Page 16 of 24 Project No. 01091 Proposed Renovations March 6, 2009 Park House Smith College, Northampton, MA each run with minimum joints and couplings, but with adequate and accessible unions for disassembly and maintenance/replacement of valves and equipment. Reduce sizes (where indicated) by use of reducing fittings. Align piping accurately at connections, within 1 /16" misalignment tolerance. Comply with ANSI B31 Code for Pressure Piping. D. Locate piping runs, except as otherwise indicated, vertically and horizontally (pitched to drain) and avoid diagonal runs wherever possible. Orient horizontal runs parallel with walls and column lines. Locate runs as shown or described by diagrams, details and notations or, if not otherwise indicated, run piping in shortest route which does not obstruct usable space or block access for servicing building and its equipment. Hold piping close to walls, overhead construction, columns and other structural and permanent-enclosure elements of building. Wherever possible in finished and occupied spaces, conceal piping from view, by locating in column enclosures, in hollow wall construction or above suspended ceilings; do not encase horizontal runs in solid partitions, except as indicated. E. Electrical Equipment Spaces: Do not run piping through transformer vaults, Elevator Machine Room, and other electrical or electronic equipment spa- ces and enclosures unless unavoidable. Install drip pan under piping that must be run through electrical spaces. Any piping intended to be run through electrical spaces shall be reviewed by the Architect prior to installation. F. Thread pipe in accordance with ANSI B2.1 ; cut threads full and clean using sharp dies. Ream threaded ends to remove burrs and restore full inside diameter. Apply pipe joint compounder pipe joint tape (Teflon) where recommended by pipe/fitting manufacturer, on male threads at each joint and tighten joint to leave not more than 3 threads exposed. G. Flanged ,Joints: Match flanges within piping system, and at connections with valves and equipment. Clean flange faces and install gaskets.. Tighten bolts to provide uniform compression of gaskets. H. Grooved Pipe ,Joints: Comply with fitting manufacturer's instructions for making grooves in pipe ends. Remove burrs and ream pipe ends. Assemble joints in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. I. Clean exterior surfaces of installed piping systems of superfluous materials, and prepare for application of specified coatings (if any). J. Provide temporary equipment for testing, including pump and gages. Test each natural section of each piping system independently, but do not use piping system valves to isolate sections where test pressures exceed valve pressure rating. Fill each section with water and pressurize for indicated 215300 FIRE PROTECTION Page 15 of 24 Project No. 01091 Proposed Renovations March 6, 2009 Park House Smith College, Northampton, MA pipe outside diameter around hole, and lower housing with positioning lugs, secured together during assembly with nuts and bolts. (7) Fittings: Grooved or shouldered end design to accept grooved mechanical couplings. Malleable Iron: ASTM A 47. Ductile Iron: ASTM A 536. (8) Flanges: Conform to Class 125 cast iron and Class 150 steel bolt hole alignment. Malleable Iron: ASTM 47. Ductile Iron: ASTM A 536. (9) Grooves: Conform to the following: Standard Steel: Square cut. Lightweight Steel: Roll grooved. (10) Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with re- quirements, provide grooved piping products of the following: ITT Grinnell Corp. Victaulic Co. B. Piping above ground and within the building shall conform to all requirements of NFPA 13 and shall be as follows: 1 . Exposed sprinkler piping, subject to vandalism (stair halls and similar areas), shall be Schedule 40 galvanized steel pipe, welded, suitable for 175 psi. working water pressure. 2. All concealed piping and all exposed sprinkler piping in Mechanical Equipment Rooms 1-1 /2" and smaller, shall be at the option of the Fire Protection Subcontractor, either Schedule 40 galvanized steel pipe with screwed fittings or standard weight roll grooved pipe with grooved fittings. 3. All exposed sprinkler piping, 1 -1 /2" and smaller, shall be Schedule 40 galvanized steel pipe with screwed fittings. 4. Schedule 40 seamless red brass pipe with brass screwed fittings suitable for 175 psi. working water pressure. 5. Type "L" seamless drawn hard copper tubing with solder-joint pressure fittings, where noted on the drawings. C. Install pipes and pipe fittings in accordance with recognized industry practices which will achieve permanently leak proof piping systems, capable of performing each indicated service without piping failure. Install 215300 FIRE PROTECTION Page 14 of 24 Project No. 01091 Proposed Renovations March 6, 2009 Park House Smith College, Northampton, MA extra copies of the chart to the Architect. g. Furnish and install a laminated red phenolic plate with engraved white lettering for each zone control flow switch and isolation valve. Nameplates shall be located adjacent to all exposed and concealed valves, approximately 12" below finished ceiling. 2.2 PIPE, TUBE, AND FITTINGS A. Interior Piping 1 . Black Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53, A 106 or A 120: except comply with ASTM A 53 or A 106 where close coiling or bending is required. 2. Galvanized black steel pipe: ASTM A53. a. Pipe Weight: Schedule 40. b. Fittings: Class 125, cast-iron threaded, ANSI B16.4, or flanged, ANSI B16.1 . C. Fittings: Mechanical grooved pipe couplings and fittings; cut-groove type for piping 2-1 /2" and larger only. (1) Electric-Resistance-Welded Steel Pipe: ASTM A 135. (2) Pipe Weight: Schedule 10 for 5" and smaller; 0.134" wall thickness for 6". (3) Fittings: Mechanical grooved pipe couplings and fittings; roll-groove or mechanical locking type. d. Grooved Piping Products (for use on pipes 2-1 /2" and larger) (1) Coupling Housings: Malleable iron conforming to ASTM A 47. (2) Coupling Housing: Ductile iron conforming to ASTM A 536. (3) Coupling Housings Description: Grooved mechanical type, which engages grooved or shouldered pipe ends, encasing an elastomeric gasket which bridges pipe ends to create seal. Cast in two or more parts, secure together during assembly with nuts and bolts. Permit degree of contraction and expansion as specified in manufacturer's latest published literature. (4) Gaskets: Mechanical grooved coupling design, pressure responsive so that internal pressure serves to increase seal's tightness, constructed of elastomers having properties as designated by ASTM D 2000. (5) Bolts and Nuts: Heat-treated carbon steel, ASTM A 183, minimum tensile 1 10,000-psi. (6) Branch Stub-Ins: Upper housing with full locating collar for rigid positioning engaging machine-cut hole in pipe, encasing elastomeric gasket conforming to 215300 FIRE PROTECTION Page 13 of 24 Project No. 01091 Proposed Renovations March 6, 2009 Park House Smith College, Northampton, MA a. For external diameters less than 6", provide full-band pipe markers, extending 3600 around pipe at each location, fastened as follows: Snap-on application of pre-tensioned, semi-rigid plastic pipe marker. b. Lettering: Manufacturer's standard pre-printed no- menclature, which best describes piping system in each instance, as selected by Architect. C. Locate pipe markers as follows: (1) Near each valve and control device. (2) Spaced intermediately at maximum spacing of 50' along each piping run, except reduce spacing to 25' in congested areas of piping and equipment. (3) Branch piping need not be marked. 3. Provide manufacturer's standard solid brass valve tags with printed enamel lettering, with piping system abbreviation in approximately 3/16" high letters and sequenced valve numbers approximately 3/8" high, and with 5/32" hole for fastener. Provide tags on all valves and control devices. a. Provide 1 -1 /8" sq. brass tags with black lettering. b. Provide manufacturer's standard solid brass chain (wire link or beaded type), or solid brass S-hooks of the sizes required for proper attachment of tags to valves, and manufactured specifically for that purpose. C. Submit valve schedule for piping system, typewritten and reproduced on 8-1 /2" x 11 " bond paper. Tabulate valve number, piping system, system abbreviation (as shown on tag), location of valve (room or space), and variations for identification (if any). Mark valves, which are intended for emergency shut-off and similar special uses, by special "flags", in margin of schedule. In addition to mounted copies, furnish extra copies for Maintenance Manuals as specified in Division 1 . d. For each page of valve schedule, provide glazed display frame, with screws for removable mounting on masonry walls. Provide frames of finished hardwood or extruded alu- minum, with SSB-grade sheet glass. e. Mount valve schedule frames and schedules in rooms where indicated or, if not otherwise. indicated, where directed by Architect. f. Furnish complete chart and flow diagram of entire system listing the valve number, fluid controlled, and zone reference location for all valves corresponding to the tag numbers. The chart shall be framed under glass and hung in the Fire Protection Equipment Room where directed. Furnish two (2) Mk 215300 FIRE PROTECTION Page 12 of 24 Project No. 01091 Proposed Renovations March 6, 2009 Park House Smith College, Northampton, MA and reasonably incidental to providing all Fire Protection work specified and shown on the Drawings, less the cost of all extra work described in the Alternates. C. Schedule of Alternates 1 . ALTERNATE NUMBER 1 : Deduct the Work of the Contract to construct the new handicapped ramp at the front entrance 2. ALTERNATE NUMBER 2: Deduct the Work of the Contract to furnish and install the makeup air unit MAU-1 and all associated piping, controls, power, wire, and sheet metal. 3. ALTERNATE NUMBER 3: Reduce the work required to construct Room 313, maintain the heat, and sprinkler protection. 4. ALTERNATE NUMBER 4: Reduce the work of replacing all existing sprinkler heads. 5. ALTERNATE NUMBER 5: Furnish and install a new solar domestic hot water heating system. PART 2 - MATERIALS 2.1 FIRE PROTECTION PIPING MATERIALS AND PRODUCTS A. Provide piping materials and factory-fabricated piping products of sizes, types, pressure ratings, temperature ratings, and capacities as indicated. Where not indicated, provide proper selection as determined by Installer to comply with installation requirements. Provide sizes and types matching piping and equipment connections; provide fittings of materials, which match pipe materials used in fire protection piping systems. Where more than one type of material or product is indicated, selection is Installer's option. B. Basic Identification 1 . Subject to compliance with requirements, provide mechanical identification materials of one of the following: Allen Systems, Inc. Brady (W. H.) Co.; Signmark Div. Industrial Safety Supply Co., Inc. Seton Name Plate Corp. 2. Provide manufacturer's standard pre-printed, semi-rigid, snap-on, color-coded pipe markers, complying with ANSI Al 3.1 . 215300 FIRE PROTECTION Page 11 of 24 Project No. 01091 Proposed Renovations March 6, 2009 Park House Smith College, Northampton, MA 1 . The Fire Protection Subcontractor shall give full co-operation to the Subcontractors of other trades, and shall furnish any information necessary to permit the work of all trades to be installed satisfactorily and with least possible interference or delay. 2. In areas where conflicts may occur, if so directed by the Architect, this Subcontractor shall prepare composite sketches at a suitable scale, not less than 1 /4" = V-0", clearly showing how his work is to be installed in relation to the work of other trades. 3. Piping and other equipment shall not be installed in congested and possible problem areas by this Subcontractor without first coordinating the installation of same with other trades and the Architect. This Subcontractor, at his own expense, shall relocate all uncoordinated piping and other equipment installed should they interfere with the proper installation and mounting of electrical equipment, ductwork, piping, hung ceilings, and other structural finishes installed by other trades. 4. This Subcontractor shall co-ordinate the elevations of ail piping and equipment in hung ceilings for the installation of recessed lighting fixtures, duct boxes, etc. Conflicts shall be brought to the attention of the Architect for a decision before the piping and/or equipment of other trades is installed. 5. In areas where, due to construction conditions, more than one trade is required to use common openings in chases, shafts and sleeves for the assa a of conduits, raceways, p g y , piping, ductwork and other materials, this Subcontractor must plan and locate the positions of equipment to be furnished under this Section so that all items in- cluding piping and/or equipment of other trades may be accommodated within the space available. Location and positioning shall be done prior to installation of same and to the satisfaction of the Architect. 6. This Subcontractor, before installing his work, shall see that it does not interfere with the clearances required for finished columns, pi- lasters, partitions or walls, as shown on the Contract Architectural or Structural Drawings showing foundations, floor plans, roof plans, and details. 7. Piping work that is installed under this Contract which interferes with the architectural design or building structure, shall be changed as directed by the Architect, and all costs incidental to such changes shall be paid by this Subcontractor at no additional cost to the Owner. 1 .18 ALTERNATE BIDS A. See Section 01230 for a general description of the Base and Alternate Bids. Work of the Fire Protection Subcontractor is more specifically described below. B. The Base Bid shall be the lump sum price for all labor and materials necessary for 215300 FIRE PROTECTION Page 10 of 24 Project No. 01091 Proposed Renovations March 6, 2009 Park House Smith College, Northampton, MA sheets placed before each section. The instructions shall be legible and easily read, with large sheets of drawings folded in. The manuals shall be bound in hard binders or an approved equivalent. C. The Manual shall include the following information: 1 . Description of systems. 2. Description of start-up, operation, and shutdown. 3. Schedule of adjustment, care, and routine maintenance for each item of equipment. 4. Lubrication chart. 5. Wiring and control diagrams with data to explain detailed operation and control of each item of equipment. 6. Valve chart. 7. List of recommended spare parts. 8. Copies of all service contracts. 9. Performance curves for pumps, etc. 10. Lists of all names, addresses, and phone numbers of all Subcon- tractors as well as the local representative for each item of equip- ment. 1 .16 GUARANTEE A. The Fire Protection Subcontractor shall guarantee the satisfactory operation of his work in all parts for a period of one (1) year after the date of final acceptance, and shall agree to promptly repair or replace any items of his work which are found to be defective during this period. B. The Fire Protection Subcontractor shall pay for repair of damage to the building caused by defects in his work and for repair to plaster, wood, and other materials or equipment caused by replacement or repairs to the entire satisfaction of the Architect. C. Any part of the work installed under this Contract requiring excessive maintenance shall be considered as being defective. 1 .17 RECORD DRAWINGS A. Refer to Division 1 for Record Drawings. B. Record Drawings shall reflect all changes. from the Contract Drawings whether by change order or by field conditions. Principal dimensions shall be indicated of concealed work, fire protection lines, valves, and zone flow switches. All changes must be clearly marked with a bubble drawn around the area of work effected by the change. C. Co-ordination of Trades 215300 FIRE PROTECTION Page 9 of 24 Project No. 01091 Proposed Renovations March 6, 2009 Park House Smith College, Northampton, MA offsets, fittings and accessories that may be required. The Fire Protection Subcontractor shall carefully investigate the structural and finish conditions affecting all his work and shall arrange such work accordingly, furnishing such fittings, traps, offsets, valves, and accessories as may be required to meet such conditions, at no additional cost. 1 .12 PRODUCT HANDLING A. The Fire Protection Subcontractor shall provide for the delivery of all his materials and equipment to the building site when required, so as to carry on his work efficiently and to avoid delaying his work and that of other trades. 1 .1 3 ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS A. All necessary tools machinery, scaffolding, and transportation for completion of his Contract shall be provided by the Fire Protection Sub- contractor. B. The Fire Protection Subcontractor shall provide his own portable extension lines and obtain 120 volt, 60 cycle, single phase electric energy from the General Contractor to drive his machines and light his work. He shall provide his own light bulbs, plugs, sockets, etc. C. All broken or waste material, rags, packing, etc., resulting from his work A"k, shall be removed by the individual Subcontractor. 1 .14 WORK CONCEALED A. All piping shall be installed exposed except where piping is to be installed above new acoustic ceilings. Where ceilings are installed sprinklers shall be installed above and below the ceiling. B. Piping containing water shall not be installed concealed in walls having an exterior exposure above grade. 1 .15 OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS A. After all final tests and adjustments have been completed, fully instruct the proper Owner's representative in all details of operation of equipment installed. Supply qualified personnel to operate equipment for sufficient length of time to assure that Owner's representative is properly qualified to take over operation and maintenance procedures. B. Furnish the Architect, for his approval, three (3) copies of an Operation and Maintenance Manual. Inscribe the following identification on the cover: the words, "Operation and Maintenance Manual", the name and location of the equipment or the building, the name of the Subcontractor, and the Contract number. The manual shall have a Table of Contents with tab 215300 FIRE PROTECTION Page 8 of 24 Project No. 01091 Proposed Renovations March 6, 2009 Park House Smith College, Northampton, MA 3. The review of shop drawings by the Architect shall not relieve the Fire Protection Subcontractor from any obligation to perform the work strictly in accordance with the Contract Drawings and Spec- ifications. The responsibility for errors in shop drawings shall remain with the individual Subcontractor. 4. in the event that materials are being delivered to or installed on the job for which shop drawings or samples have not been approved and/or which are not in accordance with the Specifications, the Fire Protection Subcontractor will be required to remove such materials and substitute approved materials at his own expense and as directed by the Architect. 5. Submit certificate upon completion of fire protection piping work, which indicates that work has been tested in accordance with ANSI/NFPA 13, and also that system is operational, complete, and has no defects. 1 .9 PERMITS, FEES AND INSPECTIONS A. The Fire Protection Subcontractor shall secure all permits and pay all fees required for his work. He shall be required to secure all other permits and pay all other fees and charges incidental to the proper carrying out of the Contract. He is to assume all responsibility regarding the observance of the rules and regulations so far as they relate to his part of the work. B. The Fire Protection Subcontractor shall arrange and pay for all required inspections of his work. 1 .10 TEMPORARY HOOK-UPS A. The General Contractor will provide any temporary hook-ups required for the use of water or sanitary for construction purposes and testing out ap- paratus as specified in Division 1 . 1 .1 1 PLANS AND SPECIFICATIONS A. The Fire Protection Subcontractor shall refer to the Architectural Drawings of interior details, plans, elevations, and structural layout in preparing his Bid. These documents are intended to supplement the Mechanical and Electrical Plans and Specifications and any applicable work indicated or implied thereon is to be considered a part of the Contract requirements. B. The Specifications and Plans are complementary and anything called for, or reasonably implied, in the Plans and not in the Specifications, or vice versa, shall be considered as called for or reasonably implied in both. C. The Fire Protection Subcontractor shall not scale the drawings. D. Because of the small scale of the drawings, it is not possible to indicate all 215300 FIRE PROTECTION Page 7 of 24 Project No. 01091 Proposed Renovations March 6, 2009 Park House Smith College, Northampton, MA protection of his work and materials from injury or loss at the hands of others and shall make good such loss or injury at his own expense. All pipes left open during the progress of the work shall be capped or plugged at all times. All instruments and operating apparatus shall be protected by suitable means. I. The Fire Protection Subcontractor shall be responsible for all equipment and materials installed under this Section until the final acceptance of the project by the Owner. J. The Fire Protection Subcontractor shall check all of the Architectural Plans and Specifications and shall field verify all existing conditions before ordering any materials and the installation of work. Any discrepancies shall be called to the attention of the Architect before proceeding with the work. 1 .7 PRODUCTS A. With the exception of items specifically noted otherwise, all materials used shall be U.S. made, new, full weight, and first class in every respect, without defects, and designed to function properly in that portion of the work for which they are intended, and with the same brand of manufacturers for each class of material or equipment. Electrical materials and equipment of types for which there are Underwriters Laboratories standard requirements, listings, or labels shall conform to their ""p' requirements and be so labeled. 1 .8 SUBMITTALS A. Before ordering materials shipped to the job, the Fire Protection Subcontractor shall submit to the Architect eight (8) sets of catalogue cuts or manufacturers' data sheets, giving all details, dimensions, capacities, etc. of all materials to be furnished. B. Submit hydraulic calculations and scaled layout drawings for fire protection pipe and fittings including, but not necessarily limited to, pipe and tube sizes, locations, elevations and slopes of horizontal runs, wall and floor penetrations, and connections. Show interface and spatial re- lationship between piping and proximate equipment. 1 . Shop Drawings are subject to review and will require approval by Owner's insurer's rating organization (IRI Incorporated) and the Northampton Fire Department prior to submitting to the Architect for approval. 2. The Fire Protection Subcontractor shall check the shop drawings thoroughly for compliance with the Plans and Specifications before submitting them to the Architect for review, making any and all changes, which may be required. 110%k- 215300 FIRE PROTECTION Page 6 of 24 Project No. 01091 Proposed Renovations March 6, 2009 Park House Smith College, Northampton, MA experienced workmen at a regular schedule in harmony with the other tradesmen on the job. He shall also exercise care and supervision of his employees in regard to proper and expeditious laying out of his work. B. The Fire Protection Subcontractor shall have a Foreman or Superintendent assigned to the Project who shall be authorized to make decisions and receive instructions exactly as if the Fire Protection Subcontractor himself were present. The Foreman or Superintendent shall not be removed or replaced without the express approval of the Architect after construction work begins. C. The Fire Protection Subcontractor shall be held responsible for any injuries or damage done to the building premises or adjoining property or to other Subcontractors' work resulting from the execution of his part of the work in any manner whatsoever; and in case of dispute arising as to the extent or share of responsibility incurred by the Fire Protection Subcontractor, it is agreed between the Owner and the Fire Protection Subcontractor that such liability and extent of damage shall be finally determined by the Architect whose decision shall be final and binding on both parties to the Contract for the work in question. D. The Fire Protection Subcontractor shall co-operate to the fullest extent with all other trades in order to expedite the progress of the work. He shall furnish all information pertaining to his materials as to sizes, locations, and means of support, to all other trades requiring such infor- mation. The Fire Protection Subcontractor shall also furnish all sleeves, frames, beams, supports, inserts, etc., hereinafter specified so that the General Contractor may build them in place. In case of failure on the part of the Fire Protection Subcontractor to give proper information, as above, he will be required to bear the extra expense involved due to such failure. E. The arrangement of all piping, ductwork, conduit, wire and cable indicated on the drawings is diagrammatic only, and indicates the minimum require- ments of this work. Conditions at the building shall determine the actual arrangement of runs, bends, offsets, etc. F. The Fire Protection Subcontractor shall lay out ail his work and be responsible for the accuracy thereof. Conditions at the building shall be the determining factor for all measurements. In no case shall piping be installed laterally in thickness of slab or deck. G. All work shall be laid out and installed so as,to require the least amount of cutting and patching. Drilling of all holes required for the installation of pipes, conduit, and cable runs shall be performed by the Subcontractor installing such items. All piping shall be installed concealed in finished spaces. H. The Fire Protection Subcontractor shall be responsible for the proper 215300 FIRE PROTECTION Page 5 of 24 Project No. 01091 Proposed Renovations March 6, 2009 Park House Smith College, Northampton, MA piping systems products, of types, materials, and sizes required, whose products have been in satisfactory use in similar service for not less than five (5) years. B. NFPA Code: Comply with ANSI/NFPA 13, "Installation of Sprinkler System". C. FM Compliance: Comply with Factory Mutual "Approval Guide". D. FM Labels: Provide sprinkler products bearing FM approval labels. E. UL Labels: Provide fire sprinkler piping products, which have been approved and labeled by Underwriters Laboratories. F. Local Fire Department/Marshall Regulations: Comply with governing regulations pertaining to fire sprinkler piping. Review proposed system with said officials prior to commencing work. G. Final installation of system is subject to approval by Owner's insurer's rating organization and local Fire Department. H. Equality of materials or articles other than those named or described in this Section will be determined in accordance with the provisions of the General Requirements, except that substitutions will only be considered for items where the words, "or equal" appear in the product specification. I. The Fire Protection Subcontractor shall agree to accept as final the results of tests secured by a qualified testing laboratory engaged by the Owner. Tests will be conducted in accordance with the General Requirements. 1 .5 CODES, ORDINANCES AND INSPECTIONS A. All materials and the installation thereof shall conform to the requirements of the Massachusetts State Building Code, Electrical Code, Fuel Gas and Plumbing Code and local laws, rules, regulations, and codes pertaining thereto. Where provisions of the Contract Documents conflict with any codes, rules or regulations, the latter shall govern. Where the Contract requirements are in excess of applicable codes, rules or regulations, the Contract provisions shall govern unless the Architect rules otherwise. B. The Fire Protection Subcontractor shall comply with the Local Code Enforcement Officials' instructions at no additional cost to the Owner. Review proposed system with said officials prior to commencing work. 1 .6 INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS A. The Fire Protection Subcontractor shall employ only competent and ,,,k 215300 FIRE PROTECTION Page 4 of 24 Project No. 01091 Proposed Renovations March 6, 2009 Park House Smith College, Northampton, MA B. Related work, to be performed under other sections of his Specification shall include the following: 1 . Wiring of flow switches, tamper switches, electric bell and control panel back to the fire alarm panel shall be by the Electrical Sub- contractor, coordinated and as directed by the Fire Protection Subcontractor. 2. Cutting and patching. 1 .3 SYSTEM DESIGN A. The Fire Protection Subcontractor shall perform a water flow test, and with this information, shall calculate pipe sizes and sprinkler head configura- tion and orifice sizes in accordance with NFPA 13. B. Sprinkler head and pipe run locations, as shown on the drawings, are to be interpreted as diagrammatic only. The Fire Protection Subcontractor shall produce a design based on actual available water pressure and submit it to the Architect for approval before beginning fabrication and installation. C. Design Criteria: Pipe sizing and sprinkler head layout shown on the drawings is provided to indicate a suggested pipe routing, zoning, and sprinkler head location, and shall not be used for estimating purposes. Location of piping and heads shall be coordinated with all other trades. Actual pipe sizing, types of heads, and layout shall be based on a hydraulically designed system in accordance with the requirements of NFPA 13, the Northampton Fire Department, and the Insurance Underwriter (I.R.Q. Location of sprinkler heads, in relation to the ceiling light hazard occupancy. The Fire Protection Subcontractor shall prepare working drawings and hydraulic calculations per NFPA 13 and shall obtain Northampton Fire Department and the Colleges Insurance Underwriter approval prior to start of work. The Fire Protection Subcontractor shall perform water flow tests or obtain water flow data in writing from local authority. Co-ordinate work of this Section with all trades to avoid inter- ference with ductwork, HVAC and plumbing, piping, electrical work, structure, etc. Final sprinkler head locations shall be subject to Architect's approval. The number of heads and pipe sizes may be increased or reduced due to hydraulic calculations or the installation of revised heads, provided the revised heads are UL listed and F.M. approved and meet NFPA 13, Northampton Fire Department, and (IRI) Insurance Underwriter's criteria. Additionally, all heads shall be in accordance with NFPA '13 recommendations. 1 .4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturers: Firms regularly engaged in manufacture of fire protection AW 215300 FIRE PROTECTION Page 3 of 24 Project No. 01091 Proposed Renovations March 6, 2009 Park House Smith College, Northampton, MA SECTION 215300 - FIRE PROTECTION PART 1 - GENERAL 1 .1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Include General Conditions, Supplementary General Conditions, applicable parts of Division 1 , and conditions of the Contract as part of this Section. B. Examine all other Sections of the Specifications for requirements, which affect work under this, Section whether or not, such work is specifically mentioned in this Section. C. Co-ordinate work with that of all other trades affecting, or affected by the work of this Section. Co-operate with such trades to assure steady prog- ress of all work under the Contract. 1 .2 SCOPE OF WORK A. Furnish all labor, materials, appurtenances and services necessary for, and reasonably incidental to, the complete installation of all fire protection work specified herein and/or indicated on the drawings, including, but not limited to, the following: 1 . Fire protection service piping from the existing service line located in the existing basement of Park House. 2. Complete dry pipe automatic sprinkler system. System shall be installed in all spaces, unless otherwise noted, including renovation to existing building sprinkler system located in the crawl space and attic. 3. The Fire Protection Subcontractor shall furnish all labor and materials required for his own hoisting, rigging, and scaffolding during the entire course of the project. 4. Existing double check valve backflow preventer assembly on the existing service line shall remain and be rebuilt. 5. Existing dry pipe alarm check valve station shall remain. Replace existing air compressor. 6. Disconnect and remove all existing sprinkler heads and piping made obsolete by or interfering with new construction. 7. Disconnect and remove all existing heads and install new chrome plated, quick responses heads in all spaces (Alternate Bid No. 1). 8. Submit plans and calculations to the colleges Insurance Underwriter (St. Paul Travelers Insurance Company c/o One Tower Square, 7GS, Hartford, CT. (Attn: Mr. David M. Goush) 1 -860-954-6171 for review and approval. 215300 FIRE PROTECTION Page 2 of 24 Project No. 01091 Proposed Renovations March 6, 2009 Park House Smith College, Northampton, MA INDEX SECTION 215300 - FIRE PROTECTION PART 1 - GENERAL PART 3 - INSTALLATION 1 .1 RELATED DOCUMENTS 3.1 CLEANING AND TESTING 1 .2 SCOPE OF WORK 3.2 FIRE SAFINGS 1 .3 SYSTEMS DESIGN 3.3 INTERIOR PIPING INSTALLATION 1 .4 QUALITY ASSURANCE 3.4 FINAL CLOSEOUT 1 .5 CODES, ORDINANCES AND INSPECTIONS 1 .6 INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS 1 .7 PRODUCTS 1 .8 SUBMITTALS 1 .9 PERMITS, FEES AND INSPECTIONS 1 .10 TEMPORARY HOOK-UPS 1 .11 PLANS AND SPECIFICATIONS 1 .12 PRODUCT HANDLING 1 .13 ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS 1 .14 WORK CONCEALED 1 .15 OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS 1 .16 GUARANTEE 1 .17 RECORD DRAWINGS 1 .18 ALTERNATE BIDS PART 2 - MATERIALS 2.1 FIRE PROTECTION PIPING MATERIALS AND PRODUCTS 2.2 PIPE, TUBE, AND FITTINGS 215300 FIRE PROTECTION Page 1 of 24 Project No. 01091 Proposed Renovations March 6, 2009 Park House Smith College, Northampton, MA 3.3 PROTECTION A. After completing frame installation and concrete work, provide temporary filler of plywood or fiberboard in recesses and cover frames with plywood protective flooring. Maintain protection until construction traffic has ended and Project is near Substantial Completion. END OF SECTION 124813 124813 ENTRANCE FLOOR MATS AND FRAMES Page 3 of 3 Project No. 01091 Proposed Renovations March 6, 2009 Park House Smith College, Northampton, MA 1 .5 COORDINATION A. Coordinate size and location of recesses in concrete with installation of finish floors to receive floor mats. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 ENTRANCE TILES A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the following: 1 . Blueridge, Inc. B. Carpet-Type Tiles: Polypropylene carpet bonded to 1 /8- to 1 /4-inch- (3- to 6-mm-) thick, flexible vinyl backing to form mats 3/8 or 7/16 inch (9.5 or 1 1 mm) thick with nonraveling edges. 1 . Colors, Textures, and Patterns: Modular Clean Step Texture (Class 1) C21 OT - Tiles a. Color: Charcoal. 2. Installation: Quarter-turn PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates and floor conditions for compliance with requirements for location, sizes, and other conditions affecting installation of floor mats and frames. 1 . Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Install surface-type units to comply with manufacturer's written instructions at locations indicated; coordinate with entrance locations and traffic patterns. 124813 ENTRANCE FLOOR MATS AND FRAMES Page 2 of 3 Project No. 01091 Proposed Renovations March 6, 2009 Park House Smith College, Northampton, MA SECTION 124813 - ENTRANCE FLOOR MATS AND FRAMES PART 1 - GENERAL 1 .1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1 .2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1 . Direct-glue tiles. B. Related Sections include the following: 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes. B. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of product indicated. C. Maintenance Data: For floor mats to include in maintenance manuals. 1 .4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Source Limitations: Obtain floor mats through one source from a single manufacturer. B. Accessibility Requirements: Provide installed floor mats that comply with Section 4.5 in the U.S. Architectural & Transportation Barriers Compliance Board's "Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA), Accessibility Guidelines for Buildings and Facilities (ADAAG)." AVW 124813 ENTRANCE FLOOR MATS AND FRAMES Page 1 of 3 Project No. 0 109 1 Proposed Renovations March 6, 2009 Park House Smith College, Northampton, MA closer than 2 inches to interior face of glass. Allow clearances for window operation hardware. 3.3 ADJUSTING A. Adjust and balance roller shades to operate smoothly, easily, safely, and free from binding or malfunction throughout entire operational range. 3.4 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Clean roller shade surfaces after installation, according to manufacturer's written instructions. B. Provide final protection and maintain conditions, in a manner acceptable to manufacturer and Installer, that ensure that roller shades are without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion. C. Replace damaged roller shades that cannot be repaired, in a manner approved by Architect, before time of Substantial Completion. END OF SECTION 122413 122413 ROLLER WINDOW SHADES Page 4 of 4 Project No. 01091 Proposed Renovations March 6, 2009 Park House Smith College, Northampton, MA 2.2 ROLLER SHADE FABRICATION A. Product Description: Roller shade consisting of a roller, a means of supporting the roller, a flexible sheet or band of material carried by the roller, a means of attaching the material to the roller, a bottom bar, and an operating mechanism that lifts and lowers the shade. B. Unit Sizes: Obtain units fabricated in sizes to fill window and other openings as follows, measured at 74 deg F: 1 . Shade Units Installed between (inside) jambs: Edge of shade not more than 1 /4 inch from face of jamb. Length equal to head to sill dimension of opening in which each shade is installed. C. Installation Brackets: Designed for easy removal and reinstallation of shade, for supporting roller, and operating hardware and for hardware position and shade mounting method indicated. D. Installation Fasteners: No fewer than two fasteners per bracket, fabricated from metal noncorrosive to shade hardware and adjoining construction; type designed for securing to supporting substrate; and supporting shades and accessories under conditions of normal use. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances, operational clearances, and other conditions affecting performance. 1 . Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 ROLLER SHADE INSTALLATION A. Install roller shades level, plumb, and aligned with adjacent units according to manufacturer's written instructions, and located so shade band is not 122413 ROLLER WINDOW SHADES Page 3 of 4 Project No. 01091 Proposed Renovations March 6, 2009 Park House Smith College, Northampton, MA 1 .5 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Limitations: Do not install roller shades until construction and wet and dirty finish work in spaces, including painting, is complete and ambient temperature and humidity conditions are maintained at the levels indicated for Project when occupied for its intended use. B. Field Measurements: Where roller shades are indicated to fit to other construction, verify dimensions of other construction by field measurements before fabrication and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings. Allow clearances for operable glazed units' operation hardware throughout the entire operating range. Notify Architect of discrepancies. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid delaying the Work. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 ROLLER SHADES A. Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the following: 1 . Andrew Dutton Company, Avon, MA. B. Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the following: 1 . Panta 1202. C. Shade Band Material: 4 ply PVC-coated fiberglass. 1 . Width: As required for window size. 2. Colors: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range 3. Material Solar-Optical Properties: Room darkening 4. Bottom Hem: Straight. D. Shade Operation: Manual; with spring roller lift operator. I . Pull: Manufacturer's standard finger-ring engaged pull. 122413 ROLLER WINDOW SHADES Page 2 of 4 Project No. 01091 Proposed Renovations March 6, 2009 Park House Smith College, Northampton, MA SECTION 122413 - ROLLER WINDOW SHADES PART 1 - GENERAL 1 .1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1 .2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes roller shades. 1 .3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include styles, material descriptions, construction details, dimensions of individual components and profiles, features, finishes, and operating instructions. B. Samples for Initial Selection: For each colored component of each type of shade indicated. 1 . Include similar Samples of accessories involving color selection. a. Shade Material: Not less than 3 inches square, with specified treatments applied. Mark face of material. C. Product Test Reports: For each type of roller shade. 1 .4 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver shades in factory packages, marked with manufacturer and product name, and location of installation using same designations indicated on Drawings and in a window treatment schedule. 122413 ROLLER WINDOW SHADES Page 1 of 4 Project No. 01091 Proposed Renovations March 6, 2009 Park House Smith College, Northampton, MA 6. Mop/Broom Holders: Three, spring-loaded, rubber hat, cam type. _4 7. Material and Finish: Stainless steel, No. 4 finish (satin). a. Shelf: Not less than nominal 0.05-inch- thick stainless steel. 2.6 FABRICATION A. General: Fabricate units with tight seams and joints, and exposed edges rolled. Hang doors and access panels with full-length, continuous hinges. Equip units for concealed anchorage and with corrosion-resistant backing plates. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Install accessories according to manufacturers' written instructions, using fasteners appropriate to substrate indicated and recommended by unit Awk manufacturer. Install units level, plumb, and firmly anchored in locations and at heights indicated. B. Grab Bars: Install to withstand a downward load of at least 250 Ibf, when tested according to method in ASTM F 446. 3.2 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Adjust accessories for unencumbered, smooth operation. Replace damaged or defective items. B. Remove temporary labels and protective coatings. C. Clean and polish exposed surfaces according to manufacturer's written recommendations. END OF SECTION 102800 102800 TOILET, BATH, AND LAUNDRY ACCESSORIES Page 6 of 6 Project No. 01091 Proposed Renovations March 6, 2009 Park House Smith College, Northampton, MA 1 . Size: Minimum 12 inches wider than opening by 72 inches high. 2. Material: Nylon-reinforced vinyl, minimum 10-oz. or 0.008-inch- thick vinyl, with integral antibacterial agent. 3. Color: As selected from manufacturer's full range. 4. Grommets: Corrosion resistant at minimum 6 inches o.c. through top hem. 5. Shower Curtain Hooks: Chrome-plated or stainless-steel, spring wire curtain hooks with snap fasteners, sized to accommodate specified curtain rod. Provide one hook per curtain grommet. D. Robe Hooks: 1 . Product: Ives 583 2. Description: Stainless-steel, double pronged 3. Mounting: Surface mounted. 4. Material and Finish: Stainless Steel, MB26D 2.4 SHOWER DOORS A. Supplier: F.W. Webb 1 . Product: Owner's standard unit with opal glass. 2.5 CUSTODIAL ACCESSORIES A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1 . Bobrick Washroom Equipment, Inc. B. Mop and Broom Holder: 1 . Product: B-224 2. Location: Provide 1 per floor. 3. Description: Unit with shelf, hooks, holders, and rag hooks beneath shelf. OW 4. Length: 24 inches. 5. Hooks: Three. 102800 TOILET, BATH, AND LAUNDRY ACCESSORIES Page 5 of 6 Project No. 0 109 1 Proposed Renovations March 6, 2009 Park House Smith College, Northampton, MA -0►, 1) Provide one per Shower. C. Grab Bars: Straight, length as indicated. 1) Provide where indicated. C. Sanitary-Napkin Disposal Unit (SND): 1 . Product: Rubbermaid 2. Mounting: Surface mounted. 3. Door or Cover: Self-closing disposal-opening cover. 4. Receptacle: Removable. 5. Material and Finish: Molded plastic, ivory. D. Mirror Unit: 1 . Frame: Stainless-steel channel. a. Corners: Welded and ground smooth. 2. Mounting: a. Wall bracket of galvanized steel, for concealed mounting flush with wall. 3. Size: As indicated on Drawings. 2.3 PUBLIC-USE SHOWER ROOM ACCESSORIES A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1 . Bobrick Washroom Equipment, Inc. B. Shower Curtain Rod: 1 . Product: B-6047 2. Description: 1 -1 /4-inch OD; fabricated from nominal 0.05-inch- thick stainless steel. 3. Mounting Flanges: Stainless-steel flanges designed for exposed fasteners. 4. Finish: No. 4 (satin). C. Shower Curtain: 102800 TOILET, BATH, AND LAUNDRY ACCESSORIES Page 4 of 6 Project No. 01091 Proposed Renovations March 6, 2009 Park House Smith College, Northampton, MA * C. Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1008/A 1008M, Designation CS (cold rolled, commercial steel), 0.0359-inch minimum nominal thickness. D. Galvanized Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M, with G60 hot-dip zinc coating. E. Galvanized Steel Mounting Devices: ASTM A 153/A 153M, hot-dip galvanized after fabrication. F. Fasteners: Screws, bolts, and other devices of same material as accessory unit and tamper-and-theft resistant where exposed, and of galvanized steel where concealed. G. Chrome Plating: ASTM B 456, Service Condition Number SC 2 (moderate service). H. Mirrors: ASTM C 1503, Mirror Glazing Quality, clear-glass mirrors, nominal 6.0 mm thick. I. ABS Plastic: Acrylonitrile-butadiene-styrene resin formulation. 2.2 PUBLIC-USE WASHROOM ACCESSORIES A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1 . Bobrick Washroom Equipment, Inc. 2. Rubbermaid, Inc. B. Grab Bar including Towel Bars: I . Mounting: Flanges with exposed fasteners. 2. Material: Stainless steel, 0.05 inch thick. a. Finish: Smooth, No. 4, satin finish. 3. Outside Diameter: a. Towel Bars and Shaving Bars: 1 -1 /4 inches b. Grab Bars: 1 -1 /2 inches. 4. Configuration and Length: a. Towel Bars: Straight, 28 inches long. 1) Provide one per Shower / Bathtub b. Shaving Bars: Straight, 12 inches long. 102800 TOILET, BATH, AND LAUNDRY ACCESSORIES Page 3 of 6 Project No. 01091 Proposed Renovations March 6, 2009 Park House Smith College, Northampton, MA B. Product Schedule: Indicating types, quantities, sizes, and installation locations by room of each accessory required. 1 . Identify locations using room designations indicated on Drawings. 2. Identify products using designations indicated on Drawings. C. Maintenance Data: For toilet and bath accessories to include in maintenance manuals. 1 .4 QUALITY ASSURANCE 1 .5 COORDINATION A. Coordinate accessory locations with other work to prevent interference with clearances required for access by people with disabilities, and for proper installation, adjustment, operation, cleaning, and servicing of accessories. B. Deliver inserts and anchoring devices set into concrete or masonry as required to prevent delaying the Work. 1 .6 WARRANTY A. Special Mirror Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to replace mirrors that develop visible silver spoilage defects and that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 1 . Warranty Period: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Stainless Steel: ASTM A 666, Type 304, 0.0312-inch minimum nominal thickness, unless otherwise indicated. B. Brass: ASTM B 19 flat products; ASTM B 16, rods, shapes, forgings, and flat products with finished edges; or ASTM B 30, castings. 102800 TOILET, BATH, AND LAUNDRY ACCESSORIES Page 2 of 6 Project No. 01091 Proposed Renovations March 6, 2009 Park House Smith College, Northampton, MA SECTION 102800 - TOILET, BATH, AND LAUNDRY ACCESSORIES PART 1 - GENERAL 1 .1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1 .2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1 . Public-use washroom accessories. 2. Public-use shower room accessories. 3. Shower Doors 4. Custodial accessories. B. Owner-Furnished Material: 1 . Paper Towel Dispensers. 2. Soap Dispensers. 3. Toilet Tissue Dispensers C. Related Sections include the following: 1 .3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include the following: 1 . Construction details and dimensions. 2. Anchoring and mounting requirements, including requirements for cutouts in other work and substrate preparation. 3. Material and finish descriptions. 4. Features that will be included for Project. 5. Manufacturer's warranty. Awk 102800 TOILET, BATH, AND LAUNDRY ACCESSORIES Page 1 of 6 Project No. 01091 Proposed Renovations March 6, 2009 Park House Smith College, Northampton, MA PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. General: Comply with manufacturer's written installation instructions. Install units rigid, straight, level, and plumb. Secure units in position with manufacturer's recommended anchoring devices. 1 . Maximum Clearances: a. Pilasters and Panels: 1 /2 inch. b. Panels and Walls: 1 inch. 2. Stirrup Brackets: Secure panels to walls and to pilasters with not less than two brackets attached near top and bottom of panel. a. Locate wall brackets so holes for wall anchors occur in masonry or tile joints. b. Align brackets at pilasters with brackets at walls. B. Overhead-Braced Units: Secure pilasters to floor and level, plumb, and tighten. Secure continuous head rail to each pilaster with not less than two fasteners. Hang doors to align tops of doors with tops of panels and adjust so tops of doors are parallel with overhead brace when doors are in closed position. 3.2 ADJUSTING A. Hardware Adjustment: Adjust and lubricate hardware according to manufacturer's written instructions for proper operation. Set hinges on in- swinging doors to hold doors open approximately 30 degrees from closed position when unlatched. Set hinges on out-swinging doors to return doors to fully closed position. END OF SECTION 102113 A 102113 TOILET COMPARTMENTS Page 5 of 5 Project No. 01091 Proposed Renovations March 6, 2009 Park House Smith College, Northampton, MA C. Ceiling-Hung Units: Provide manufacturer's standard corrosion-resistant anchoring assemblies complete with threaded rods, lock washers, and leveling adjustment nuts at pilasters for connection to structural support above finished ceiling. Provide assemblies that support pilasters from structure without transmitting load to finished ceiling. Provide sleeves (caps) at tops of pilasters to conceal anchorage. D. Floor-and-Ceiling-Anchored Units: Provide manufacturer's standard corrosion-resistant anchoring assemblies complete with leveling adjustment at tops and bottoms of pilasters. Provide shoes and sleeves (caps) at pilasters to conceal anchorage. E. Doors: Unless otherwise indicated, provide 24-inch- wide in-swinging doors for standard toilet compartments and 36-inch- wide out-swinging doors with a minimum 32-inch- wide clear opening for compartments indicated to be accessible to people with disabilities. 1 . Hinges: Manufacturer's standard self-closing type that can be adjusted to hold doors open at any angle up to 90 degrees. 2. Latch and Keeper: Manufacturer's standard latch unit designed for AM* emergency access and with combination rubber-faced door strike and keeper. Provide units that comply with accessibility requirements of authorities having jurisdiction at compartments indicated to be accessible to people with disabilities. 3. Coat Hook: Manufacturer's standard combination hook and rubber- tipped bumper, sized to prevent door from hitting compartment- mounted accessories. 4. Door Bumper: Manufacturer's standard rubber-tipped bumper at out- swinging doors. S. Door Pull: Manufacturer's standard unit at out-swinging doors that complies with accessibility requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. Provide units on both sides of doors at compartments indicated to be accessible to people with disabilities. 102113 TOILET COMPARTMENTS Page 4 of 5 Project No. 01091 Proposed Renovations March 6, 2009 Park House Smith College, Northampton, MA a. Polymer Color and Pattern: Matching Panel. E. Heat-Sink Strip: Manufacturer's standard continuous, extruded-aluminum strip fastened to exposed bottom edges of solid-polymer components to prevent burning. F. Overhead Cross Bracing for Ceiling-Hung Units: As recommended by manufacturer and fabricated from solid polymer. 2.2 ACCESSORIES A. Hardware and Accessories: Manufacturer's standard design, heavy-duty operating hardware and accessories. 1 . Material: Chrome-plated, nonferrous, cast zinc alloy (zamac) or clear anodized aluminum or Stainless steel. B. Overhead Bracing: Manufacturer's standard continuous, extruded-aluminum head rail with antigrip profile and in manufacturer's standard finish. C. Anchorages and Fasteners: Manufacturer's standard exposed fasteners of stainless steel or chrome-plated steel or brass, finished to match hardware, with theft-resistant-type heads. Provide sex-type bolts for through-bolt applications. For concealed anchors, use hot-dip galvanized or other rust- resistant, protective-coated steel. 2.3 FABRICATION A. Overhead-Braced Units: Provide manufacturer's standard corrosion-resistant supports, leveling mechanism, fasteners, and anchors at pilasters to suit floor conditions. Make provisions for setting and securing continuous head rail at top of each pilaster. Provide shoes at pilasters to conceal supports and leveling mechanism. B. Floor-Anchored Units: Provide manufacturer's standard corrosion-resistant anchoring assemblies complete with threaded rods, lock washers, and leveling adjustment nuts at pilasters for structural connection to floor. Provide shoes at pilasters to conceal anchorage. 102113 TOILET COMPARTMENTS Page 3 of 5 Project No. 01091 Proposed Renovations March 6, 2009 Park House Smith College, Northampton, MA 1 .5 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Field Measurements: Verify actual locations of walls, columns, ceilings, and other construction contiguous with toilet compartments by field measurements before fabrication and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings. 1 . Established Dimensions: Where field measurements cannot be made without delaying the Work, establish dimensions and proceed with fabricating toilet compartments without field measurements. Coordinate wall, floor, ceilings, and other contiguous construction to ensure that actual dimensions correspond to established dimensions. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 SOLID-POLYMER UNITS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1 . Comtec Industries. 2. General Partitions Mfg. Corp. 3. Santana Products, Inc. B. Door, Panel, and Pilaster Construction: Solid, high-density polyethylene (HDPE) or polypropylene (PP) panel material, not less than 1 inch thick, seamless, with eased edges, and with homogenous color and pattern throughout thickness of material. 1 . Color and Pattern: Two colors and patterns in each room as selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range of colors and patterns. C. Pilaster Shoes and Sleeves (Caps): Manufacturer's standard design; stainless steel. D. Brackets (Fittings): 1 . Stirrup Type: Ear or U-brackets, stainless steel. 2. Full-Height (Continuous) Type: Manufacturer's standard design; polymer, extruded aluminum or stainless steel. 102113 TOILET COMPARTMENTS Page 2 of S Project No. 01091 Proposed Renovations March 6, 2009 Park House Smith College, Northampton, MA SECTION 102113 - TOILET COMPARTMENTS PART 1 - GENERAL 1 .1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1 .2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes solid-polymer units as follows: 1 . Toilet Enclosures: Overhead braced. B. Related Sections include the following: 1 . Division 10 "Toilet, Bath, and Laundry Accessories" for toilet tissue dispensers, grab bars, purse shelves, and similar accessories. 1 .3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes. B. Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work. 1 . Show locations of cutouts for compartment-mounted toilet accessories. 2. Show locations of reinforcements for compartment-mounted grab bars. C. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of unit indicated. 1 .4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Comply with requirements in CID-A-A-60003, "Partitions, Toilets, Complete." 102113 TOILET COMPARTMENTS Page 1 of 5 Project No. 01091 Proposed Renovations March 6, 2009 Park House Smith College, Northampton, MA a. Prime Coat: Interior latex primer/sealer. b. Intermediate Coat: Institutional low-odor/VOC interior latex matching topcoat. C. Topcoat: Institutional low-odor/VOC interior latex (eggshell). E. Gypsum Substrates (Walls) to receive Vinyl Wall Covering: 1 . Institutional Low-Odor/VOC Latex System: MPI INT 9.2M. a. Prime Coat: Interior latex primer/sealer. END OF SECTION 099123 099123 INTERIOR PAINTING Page 9 of 9 Project No. 01091 Proposed Renovations March 6, 2009 Park House Smith College, Northampton, MA B. After completing paint application, clean spattered surfaces. Remove spattered paints by washing, scraping, or other methods. Do not scratch or damage adjacent finished surfaces. C. Protect work of other trades against damage from paint application. Correct damage to work of other trades by cleaning, repairing, replacing, and refinishing, as approved by Architect, and leave in an undamaged condition. D. At completion of construction activities of other trades, touch up and restore damaged or defaced painted surfaces. 3.5 INTERIOR PAINTING SCHEDULE A. Steel Substrates: 1 . Alkyd System: MPI INT 5.1 E. a. Prime Coat: Quick-drying alkyd metal primer. b. Intermediate Coat: Interior alkyd matching topcoat. C. Topcoat: Interior alkyd (semigloss). B. Dressed Lumber Substrates: Including architectural woodwork and doors. 1 . Latex System: MPI INT 6.3T. a. Prime Coat: Interior latex-based wood primer. b. Intermediate Coat: Interior latex matching topcoat. C. Topcoat: Interior latex (semigloss). C. Plaster Substrates (Ceilings): 1 . Institutional Low-Odor/VOC Latex System: MPI INT 9.2M. a. Prime Coat: Interior latex primer/sealer. b. Intermediate Coat: Institutional low-odor/VOC interior latex matching topcoat. C. Topcoat: Institutional low-odor/VOC interior latex (flat). D. Plaster Substrates (Walls): 1 . Institutional Low-Odor/VOC Latex System: MPI INT 9.2M. 099123 INTERIOR PAINTING Page 8 of 9 Project No. 01091 Proposed Renovations March 6, 2009 Park House Smith College, Northampton, MA 2. Paint surfaces behind movable equipment and furniture same as similar exposed surfaces. Before final installation, paint surfaces behind permanently fixed equipment or furniture with prime coat only. 3. Paint front and backsides of access panels, removable or hinged covers, and similar hinged items to match exposed surfaces. B. Tint each undercoat a lighter shade to facilitate identification of each coat if multiple coats of same material are to be applied. Tint undercoats to match color of topcoat, but provide sufficient difference in shade of undercoats to distinguish each separate coat. C. If undercoats or other conditions show through topcoat, apply additional coats until cured film has a uniform paint finish, color, and appearance. D. Apply paints to produce surface films without cloudiness, spotting, holidays, laps, brush marks, roller tracking, runs, sags, ropiness, or other surface imperfections. Cut in sharp lines and color breaks. E. Painting Mechanical and Electrical Work: Paint items exposed in equipment , . rooms and occupied spaces including, but not limited to, the following: I . Mechanical Work: a. Uninsulated metal piping. b. Pipe hangers and supports. C. Visible portions of internal surfaces of metal ducts, without liner, behind air inlets and outlets. d. Duct, equipment, and pipe insulation having cotton or canvas insulation covering or other paintable jacket material. 2. Electrical Work: a. Panelboards. b. Electrical equipment with a factory-primed finish for field painting. 3.4 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. At end of each workday, remove rubbish, empty cans, rags, and other discarded materials from Project site. 099123 INTERIOR PAINTING Page 7 of 9 MW Project No. 01091 Proposed Renovations March 6, 2009 Park House Smith College, Northampton, MA B. Remove plates, machined surfaces, and similar items already in place that are ` not to be painted. If removal is impractical or impossible because of size or weight of item, provide surface-applied protection before surface preparation and painting. 1 . After completing painting operations, use workers skilled in the trades involved to reinstall items that were removed. Remove surface-applied protection if any. 2. Do not paint over labels of independent testing agencies or equipment name, identification, performance rating, or nomenclature plates. C. Clean substrates of substances that could impair bond of paints, including dirt, oil, grease, and incompatible paints and encapsulants. 1 . Remove incompatible primers and reprime substrate with compatible primers as required to produce paint systems indicated. D. Steel Substrates: Remove rust and loose mill scale. Clean using methods recommended in writing by paint manufacturer. E. Wood Substrates: 1 . Scrape and clean knots, and apply coat of knot sealer before applying primer. 2. Sand surfaces that will be exposed to view, and dust off. 3. Prime edges, ends, faces, undersides, and backsides of wood. 4. After priming, fill holes and imperfections in the finish surfaces with putty or plastic wood filler. Sand smooth when dried. F. Plaster Substrates: Do not begin paint application until plaster is fully cured and dry. G. Gypsum Substrates: Do not begin painting until compound is cured. 3.3 APPLICATION A. Apply paints according to manufacturer's written instructions. 1 . Use applicators and techniques suited for paint and substrate indicated. 099123 INTERIOR PAINTING Page 6 of 9 Project No. 01091 Proposed Renovations March 6, 2009 Park House Smith College, Northampton, MA 1 . VOC Content: E Range of E3. 2. Environmental Performance Rating: EPR 3. 2.7 ALKYD PAINTS A. Interior Alkyd (Semigloss): MPI #47 (Gloss Level 5). 1 . VOC Content: E Range of E2. 2. Environmental Performance Rating: EPR 2. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates and conditions, with Applicator present, for compliance with requirements for maximum moisture content and other conditions affecting performance of work. B. Maximum Moisture Content of Substrates: When measured with an electronic moisture meter as follows: 1 . Wood: 15 percent. 2. Plaster: 12 percent. C. Verify suitability of substrates, including surface conditions and compatibility with existing finishes and primers. D. Begin coating application only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected and surfaces are dry. 1. Beginning coating application constitutes Contractor's acceptance of substrates and conditions. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations in "MPI Architectural Painting Specification Manual" applicable to substrates indicated. 099123 INTERIOR PAINTING Page 5 of 9 Project No. 01091 Proposed Renovations March 6, 2009 Park House Smith College, Northampton, MA 2.3 PRIMERS/SEALERS ` A. Interior Latex Primer/Sealer: MPI #50. 1 . VOC Content: E Range of E1 . 2. Environmental Performance Rating: EPR 1 . B. Interior Alkyd Primer/Sealer: MPI #45. 1 . VOC Content: E Range of El . C. Wood-Knot Sealer: Sealer recommended in writing by topcoat manufacturer for use in paint systems indicated. 2.4 METAL PRIMERS A. Quick-Drying Alkyd Metal Primer: MPI #76. 1 . VOC Content: E Range of E2. omot 2.5 WOOD PRIMERS A. Interior Latex-Based Wood Primer: MPI #39. 1 . VOC Content: E Range of E1 . 2. Environmental Performance Rating: EPR 1 . 2.6 LATEX PAINTS A. Institutional Low-Odor/VOC Latex (Flat): MPI #143 (Gloss Level 1). 1 . VOC Content: E Range of E3. 2. Environmental Performance Rating: EPR 4. B. Institutional Low-Odor/VOC Latex (Eggshell): MPI #145 (Gloss Level 3). 1 . VOC Content: E Range of E3. 2. Environmental Performance Rating: EPR 4.5. C. Institutional Low-Odor/VOC Latex (Semigloss): MPI #147 (Gloss Level 5). 099123 INTERIOR PAINTING Page 4 of 9 Project No. 01091 Proposed Renovations March 6, 2009 Park House Smith College, Northampton, MA PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1 . Benjamin Moore & Co. 2.2 PAINT, GENERAL A. Material Compatibility: 1 . Provide materials for use within each paint system that are compatible with one another and substrates indicated, under conditions of service and application as demonstrated by manufacturer, based on testing and field experience. 2. For each coat in a paint system, provide products recommended in writing by manufacturers of topcoat for use in paint system and on substrate indicated. B. Chemical Components of Field-Applied Interior Paints and Coatings: Provide products that comply with the following limits for VOC content, exclusive of colorants added to a tint base, when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24) and the following chemical restrictions; these requirements do not apply to primers or finishes that are applied in a fabrication or finishing shop: 1 . Flat Paints and Coatings: VOC content of not more than 50 g/L. 2. Nonflat Paints and Coatings: VOC content of not more than 150 g/L. 3. Aromatic Compounds: Paints and coatings shall not contain more than 1 .0 percent by weight of total aromatic compounds (hydrocarbon compounds containing one or more benzene rings). C. Colors: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. 099123 INTERIOR PAINTING Page 3 of 9 Project No. 01091 Proposed Renovations March 6, 2009 Park House Smith College, Northampton, MA C. Samples for Verification: For each type of paint system and in each color and gloss of topcoat indicated. 1 . 12 inch by 12 inch sample on actual substrate. 2. Label each Sample for location and application area. D. Product List: For each product indicated, include the following: 1 . Cross-reference to paint system and locations of application areas. Use same designations indicated on Drawings and in schedules. 1 .4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. MPI Standards: 1 . Products: Complying with MPI standards indicated and listed in "MPI Approved Products List." 2. Preparation and Workmanship: Comply with requirements in "MPI Architectural Painting Specification Manual" for products and paint systems indicated. 1 .5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Store materials not in use in tightly covered containers in well-ventilated areas with ambient temperatures continuously maintained at not less than 45 deg F. 1 . Maintain containers in clean condition, free of foreign materials and residue. 2. Remove rags and waste from storage areas daily. 1 .6 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Apply paints only when temperature of surfaces to be painted and ambient air temperatures are between 50 and 95 deg F. B. Do not apply paints when relative humidity exceeds 85 percent; at temperatures less than 5 deg F above the dew point; or to damp or wet surfaces. 099123 INTERIOR PAINTING Page 2 of 9 Project No. 01091 Proposed Renovations March 6, 2009 Park House Smith College, Northampton, MA SECTION 099123 - INTERIOR PAINTING PART 1 - GENERAL 1 .1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1 .2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes surface preparation and the application of paint systems on the following interior substrates: 1 . Steel. 2. Wood. 3. Plaster. 4. Gypsum Wallboard B. Related Sections include the following: 1 . Division 05 Sections for shop priming of metal substrates with primers specified in this Section. 2. Division 08 Sections for factory priming windows and doors with primers specified in this Section. 3. Division 09 Section "Staining and Transparent Finishing" for surface preparation and the application of wood stains and transparent finishes on interior wood substrates. 1 .3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. B. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of topcoat product indicated. 1 . Submit full color wheel of manufacturers formulated colors. 2. Submit ready mix color charts for each product, 099123 INTERIOR PAINTING Page 1 of 9 Project No. 01091 Proposed Renovations March 6, 2009 Park House Smith College, Northampton, MA B. Dimension Lumber Substrates, Nontraffic Surfaces: Including board siding and wood ceilings. 1 . Latex System: MPI EXT 6.2M. a. Prime Coat: Exterior latex wood primer. b. Intermediate Coat: Exterior latex matching topcoat. C. Topcoat: Exterior latex (flat). C. Dimension Lumber Substrates, Traffic Surfaces: Including lumber decking and stairs. 1 . Latex System: MPI EXT 6.5E. a. Prime Coat: Exterior latex wood primer. b. Intermediate Coat: Interior/exterior latex floor and porch (low gloss). C. Topcoat: Interior/exterior latex floor and porch (low gloss). 1) With additive to increase skid resistance of painted surface. END OF SECTION 099113 099113 EXTERIOR PAINTING Page 7 of 7 Project No. 01091 Proposed Renovations March 6, 2009 Park House Smith College, Northampton, MA B. Tint each undercoat a lighter shade to facilitate identification of each coat if multiple coats of same material are to be applied. Tint undercoats to match color of topcoat, but provide sufficient difference in shade of undercoats to distinguish each separate coat. C. If undercoats or other conditions show through topcoat, apply additional coats until cured film has a uniform paint finish, color, and appearance. D. Apply paints to produce surface films without cloudiness, spotting, holidays, laps, brush marks, roller tracking, runs, sags, ropiness, or other surface imperfections. Cut in sharp lines and color breaks. 3.4 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. At end of each workday, remove rubbish, empty cans, rags, and other discarded materials from Project site. B. After completing paint application, clean spattered surfaces. Remove spattered paints by washing, scraping, or other methods. Do not scratch or damage adjacent finished surfaces. ` C. Protect work of other trades against damage from paint application. Correct damage to work of other trades by cleaning, repairing, replacing, and refinishing, as approved by Architect, and leave in an undamaged condition. D. At completion of construction activities of other trades, touch up and restore damaged or defaced painted surfaces. 3.5 EXTERIOR PAINTING SCHEDULE A. Dressed Lumber Substrates: Including architectural woodwork, trim and doors. 1 . Latex System: MPI EXT 6.3L. a. Prime Coat: Exterior latex wood primer. b. Intermediate Coat: Exterior latex matching topcoat. C. Topcoat: Exterior latex (gloss). 099113 EXTERIOR PAINTING Page 6 of 7 Project No. 01091 Proposed Renovations March 6, 2009 Park House Smith College, Northampton, MA 3.2 PREPARATION A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations in "MPI Architectural Painting Specification Manual" applicable to substrates and paint systems indicated. B. Remove plates, machined surfaces, and similar items already in place that are not to be painted. If removal is impractical or impossible because of size or weight of item, provide surface-applied protection before surface preparation and painting. 1 . After completing painting operations, use workers skilled in the trades involved to reinstall items that were removed. Remove surface-applied protection if any. 2. Do not paint over labels of independent testing agencies or equipment name, identification, performance rating, or nomenclature plates. C. Clean substrates of substances that could impair bond of paints, including dirt, oil, grease, and incompatible paints and encapsulants. 1 . Remove incompatible primers and reprime substrate with compatible primers as required to produce paint systems indicated. D. Wood Substrates: 1 . Scrape and clean knots, and apply coat of knot sealer before applying primer. 2. Sand surfaces that will be exposed to view, and dust off. 3. Prime edges, ends, faces, undersides, and backsides of wood. 4. After priming, fill holes and imperfections in the finish surfaces with putty or plastic wood filler. Sand smooth when dried. 3.3 APPLICATION A. Apply paints according to manufacturer's written instructions. 1 . Use applicators and techniques suited for paint and substrate indicated. 2. Paint surfaces behind movable items same as similar exposed surfaces. 04W Before final installation, paint surfaces behind permanently fixed items with prime coat only. 099113 EXTERIOR PAINTING Page 5 of 7 Project No. 01091 Proposed Renovations March 6, 2009 Park House Smith College, Northampton, MA 1 . VOC Content: E Range of E2. B. Exterior Latex (Gloss): MPI #119 (Gloss Level 6, except minimum gloss of 65 units at 60 deg). 1 . VOC Content: E Range of E1 . 2.6 FLOOR COATINGS A. Interior/Exterior Latex Floor and Porch Paint (Low Gloss): MPI #60 (maximum Gloss Level 3). 1 . VOC Content: E Range of E2. 2. Environmental Performance Rating: EPR 3. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates and conditions, with Applicator present, for compliance with requirements for maximum moisture content and other conditions affecting performance of work. B. Maximum Moisture Content of Substrates: When measured with an electronic moisture meter as follows: 1 . Wood: 15 percent. C. Verify suitability of substrates, including surface conditions and compatibility with existing finishes and primers. D. Begin coating application only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected and surfaces are dry. 1 . Beginning coating application constitutes Contractor's acceptance of substrates and conditions. 099113 EXTERIOR PAINTING Page 4 of 7 Project No. 01091 Proposed Renovations March 6, 2009 Park House Smith College, Northampton, MA PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1 . Benjamin Moore & Co. 2. PPG Architectural Finishes, Inc. 2.2 PAINT, GENERAL A. Material Compatibility: 1 . Provide materials for use within each paint system that are compatible with one another and substrates indicated, under conditions of service and application as demonstrated by manufacturer, based on testing and field experience. 2. For each coat in a paint system, provide products recommended in writing by manufacturers of topcoat for use in paint system and on substrate indicated. B. Colors: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. 2.3 PRIMERS/SEALERS A. Wood-Knot Sealer: Sealer recommended in writing by topcoat manufacturer for use in paint system indicated. 2.4 WOOD PRIMERS A. Exterior Latex Wood Primer: MPI #6. 1 . VOC Content: E Range of E2. 2.5 EXTERIOR LATEX PAINTS A. Exterior Latex (Flat): MPI #10 (Gloss Level 1). 099113 EXTERIOR PAINTING Page 3 of 7 Project No. 01091 Proposed Renovations March 6, 2009 Park House Smith College, Northampton, MA 1 . Cross-reference to paint system and locations of application areas. Use same designations indicated on Drawings and in schedules. 2. Printout of current "MPI Approved Products List" for each product category specified in Part 2, with the proposed product highlighted. 1 .4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. MPI Standards: 1 . Products: Complying with MPI standards indicated and listed in "MPI Approved Products List." 2. Preparation and Workmanship: Comply with requirements in "MPl Architectural Painting Specification Manual" for products and paint systems indicated. 1 .5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Store materials not in use in tightly covered containers in well-ventilated areas with ambient temperatures continuously maintained at not less than 45 '' deg F. 1 . Maintain containers in clean condition, free of foreign materials and residue. 2. Remove rags and waste from storage areas daily. 1 .6 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Apply paints only when temperature of surfaces to be painted and ambient air temperatures are between 50 and 95 deg F. B. Do not apply paints in snow, rain, fog, or mist; when relative humidity exceeds 85 percent; at temperatures less than 5 deg F above the dew point; or to damp or wet surfaces. 099113 EXTERIOR PAINTING Page 2 of 7 Project No. 01091 Proposed Renovations March 6, 2009 Park House Smith College, Northampton, MA SECTION 099113 - EXTERIOR PAINTING PART 1 - GENERAL 1 .1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1 .2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes surface preparation and the application of paint systems on the following exterior substrates: 1 . Wood. B. Related Sections include the following: 1 . Division 06 Sections for shop priming carpentry with primers specified in this Section. 2. Division 09 Section "Interior Painting" for surface preparation and the application of paint systems on interior substrates. 1 .3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. B. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of topcoat product indicated. C. Samples for Verification: For each type of paint system and each color and gloss of topcoat indicated. 1 . Submit Samples on rigid backing, 8 inches square. 2. Step coats on Samples to show each coat required for system. 3. Label each coat of each Sample. 4. Label each Sample for location and application area. D. Product List: For each product indicated, include the following: 099113 EXTERIOR PAINTING Page 1 of 7 Project No. 01091 Proposed Renovations March 6, 2009 Park House Smith College, Northampton, MA E. Install accessories in locations indicated. '""'" F. Fully bond wall covering to substrate. Remove air bubbles, blisters, and other defects. G. Trim edges and seams for color uniformity, pattern match, and tight closure. H. Clean and prime all surfaces with silicone primer. Apply sealant to all seams, joints, plumbing trim and accessories. Where panels terminate against substrates to receive paint finish, apply paintable sealant. 3.4 CLEANING A. Remove excess adhesive at finished seams, perimeter edges, and adjacent surfaces. B. Use cleaning methods recommended in writing by wall-covering manufacturer. C. Reinstall hardware and hardware accessories, fixture trims, and similar items. D. Remove all excess and waste materials. END OF SECTION 097500 097500 PVC WALL COVERINGS Page 4 of 4 Project No. 01091 Proposed Renovations March 6, 2009 Park House Smith College, Northampton, MA "" PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for levelness, wall plumbness, maximum moisture content, and other conditions affecting performance of work. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for surface preparation. B. Clean substrates of substances that could impair wall covering's bond, including mold, mildew, oil, grease, incompatible primers, dirt, and dust. C. Prepare substrates to achieve a smooth, dry, clean, structurally sound surface free of flaking, unsound coatings, cracks, and defects. 1 . Moisture Content: Maximum of 5 percent on new plaster, concrete, and concrete masonry units when tested with an electronic moisture meter. 2. Plaster: Allow new plaster to cure. Neutralize areas of high alkalinity. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. General: Comply with wall-covering manufacturers' written installation instructions applicable to products and applications indicated, except where more stringent requirements apply. B. Cut, scribe and fit PVC wall-covering sheets to heights indicated. Provide trim pieces at outside corners and wall caps. C. Where panels extend full height of partition between adjoining spaces, extend wall covering over top of wall and finish with trim piece. D. Lap adjacent panels a minimum of 2 inches (50 mm). Construct horizontal joints to shed water. 097500 PVC WALL COVERINGS Page 3 of 4 Project No. 01091 Proposed Renovations March 6, 2009 Park House Smith College, Northampton, MA are maintained at the levels indicated for Project when occupied for its intended use. B. Lighting: Do not install wall covering until a lighting level of not less than 15 fc is provided on the surfaces to receive wall covering. C. Ventilation: Provide continuous ventilation during installation and for not less than the time recommended by wall-covering manufacturer for full drying or curing. PART 2 — PRODUCTS 2.1 PVC WALL-COVERING PRODUCTS A. PVC Wall Covering: 1 . Manufacturer: Universal Bath Products. a. Product: High-molecular poly-vinyl chloride sheets 0.090 inches thick. , b. Color: Bone C. Accessories: 1) Trim shapes: Standard trim for outside and inside corners. 2) Shampoo / Soap shelf. 2.2 ACCESSORIES A. Adhesive: Mildew-resistant, nonstaining adhesive, for use with specific wall covering and substrate application, as recommended in writing by wall- covering manufacturer. B. Sealant: Mildew-resistant Silicone. 1 . Product: Dow Corning 784, 786 or GE-SCS-1702 097500 PVC WALL COVERINGS Page 2 of 4 Project No. 01091 Proposed Renovations March 6, 2009 Park House Smith College, Northampton, MA SECTION 097500 - PVC WALL COVERINGS PART 1 - GENERAL 1 .1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1 .2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1 . PVC wall covering. 2. PVC Accessories. 1 .3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. include data on physical characteristics, durability, fade resistance, and flame-resistance characteristics. B. Shop Drawings: Show location and extent of PVC wall-covering. Indicate seams and termination points for each type of shower and bathtub surround. C. Samples for Coordination with other Finishes: 4 inch by 4 inch samples of sheet product. D. Maintenance Data: For wall coverings to include in maintenance manuals. 1 .4 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Limitations: Do not install wall coverings until spaces are enclosed and weatherproof, wet work in spaces is complete and dry, work above ceilings is complete, and ambient temperature and humidity conditions 097500 PVC WALL COVERINGS Page 1 of 4 Project No. 01091 Proposed Renovations March 6, 2009 Park House Smith College, Northampton, MA B. Use cleaning methods recommended in writing by wall-covering manufacturer. C. Replace strips that cannot be cleaned. D. Reinstall hardware and hardware accessories, electrical plates and covers, light fixture trims, and similar items. END OF SECTION 097200 097200 WALL COVERINGS Page 5 of 5 Project No. 01091 Proposed Renovations March 6, 2009 Park House Smith College, Northampton, MA D. Check painted surfaces for pigment bleeding. Sand gloss, semigloss, and eggshell finishes with fine sandpaper. E. Remove hardware and hardware accessories, electrical plates and covers, light fixture trims, and similar items. F. Acclimatize wall-covering materials by removing them from packaging in the installation areas not less than 24 hours before installation. 3.3 1 NSTALLATION A. General: Comply with wall-covering manufacturers' written installation instructions applicable to products and applications indicated, except where more stringent requirements apply. B. Cut wall-covering strips in roll number sequence. Change roll numbers at partition breaks and corners. C. Install strips in same order as cut from roll. D. Install reversing every other strip. E. Install wall covering with no gaps or overlaps, no lifted or curling edges, and no visible shrinkage. F. Install seams vertical and plumb at least 6 inches from outside corners and 6 inches from inside corners unless a change of pattern or color exists at corner. No horizontal seams are permitted. G. Fully bond wall covering to substrate. Remove air bubbles, wrinkles, blisters, and other defects. H. Trim edges and seams for color uniformity, pattern match, and tight closure. Butt seams without any overlay or spacing between strips. 3.4 CLEANING A. Remove excess adhesive at finished seams, perimeter edges, and adjacent surfaces. 097200 WALL COVERINGS Page 4 of 5 Project No. 01091 Proposed Renovations March 6, 2009 Park House Smith College, Northampton, MA 2.2 ACCESSORIES A. Adhesive: Mildew-resistant, nonstaining, strippable adhesive, for use with specific wall covering and substrate application, as recommended in writing by wall-covering manufacturer, and with a VOC content of 50 g/L or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24). B. Primer/Sealer: Mildew-resistant primer/sealer complying with requirements in Division 09 Section "InteriorPainting"and recommended in writing by wall- covering manufacturer for intended substrate. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for levelness, wall plumbness, maximum moisture content, and other conditions affecting performance of work. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for surface preparation. B. Clean substrates of substances that could impair wall covering's bond, including mold, mildew, oil, grease, incompatible primers, dirt, and dust. C. Prepare substrates to achieve a smooth, dry, clean, structurally sound surface free of flaking, unsound coatings, cracks, and defects. 1 . Moisture Content: Maximum of 5 percent on new plaster, concrete, and concrete masonry units when tested with an electronic moisture meter. 2. Gypsum Board: Prime with primer recommended by wall-covering manufacturer. 3. Painted Surfaces: Treat areas susceptible to pigment bleeding. 097200 WALL COVERINGS Page 3 of 5 Project No. 01091 Proposed Renovations March 6, 2009 Park House Smith College, Northampton, MA 1 . Surface-Burning Characteristics: As follows, per ASTM E 84: a. Flame-Spread Index: 25 or less. 1 .5 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Limitations: Do not install wall coverings until spaces are enclosed and weatherproof, wet work in spaces is complete and dry, work above ceilings is complete, and ambient temperature and humidity conditions are maintained at the levels indicated for Project when occupied for its intended use. B. Lighting: Do not install wall covering until a lighting level of not less than 15 fc is provided on the surfaces to receive wall covering. C. Ventilation: Provide continuous ventilation during installation and for not less than the time recommended by wall-covering manufacturer for full drying or curing. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 WALL-COVERING PRODUCTS A. General: Provide rolls of each type of wall covering from the same run number or dye lot. B. Vinyl Wall Coverings (WCA & WCB): Owner will furnish wall coverings for contractor to install. 1 . Vinyl Wall-Covering Standards: Provide products complying with the following: a. CFFA-W-101 for Type II, Medium -Duty products. 2. Width: 54 inches. 3. Repeat: Random. 4. Colors, Textures, and Patterns: Match Architect's samples. 097200 WALL COVERINGS Page 2 of 5 Project No. 01091 Proposed Renovations March 6, 2009 Park House Smith College, Northampton, MA SECTION 097200 - WALL COVERINGS PART 1 - GENERAL 1 .1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1 .2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1 . Vinyl wall covering. B. Related Sections include the following: 1 . Division 09 Section "Interior Painting"for priming wall surfaces. 1 .3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include data on physical characteristics, durability, fade resistance, and flame-resistance characteristics. B. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of wall covering indicated. C. Maintenance Data: For wall coverings to include in maintenance manuals. 1 .4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Provide wall coverings and adhesives with the following fire-test-response characteristics as determined by testing identical products applied with identical adhesives to substrates per test method indicated below by UL or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 097200 WALL COVERINGS Page 1 of 5 Project No. 01091 Proposed Renovations March 6, 2009 Park House Smith College, Northampton, MA .► protection methods indicated or recommended in writing by carpet manufacturer and carpet adhesive manufacturer. END OF SECTION 096816 096816 SHEET CARPETING Page 7 of 7 Project No. 0 109 1 Proposed Renovations March 6, 2009 Park House Smith College, Northampton, MA 3.3 INSTALLATION A. Comply with CRI 104 and carpet manufacturer's written installation instructions for the following: 1 . Direct-Glue-Down Installation: Comply with CRI 104, Section 9, "Direct Glue-Down Installation." 2. Carpet with Attached-Cushion Installation: Comply with CRI 104, Section 11 , "Attached-Cushion Installations." B. Comply with carpet manufacturer's written recommendations and Shop Drawings for seam locations and direction of carpet; maintain uniformity of carpet direction and lay of pile. At doorways, center seams under the door in closed position. C. Cut and fit carpet to butt tightly to vertical surfaces, permanent fixtures, and built-in furniture including cabinets, pipes, outlets, edgings, thresholds, and nosings. Bind or seal cut edges as recommended by carpet manufacturer. D. Extend carpet into toe spaces, door reveals, closets, open-bottomed obstructions, removable flanges, alcoves, and similar openings. E. Maintain reference markers, holes, and openings that are in place or marked for future cutting by repeating on finish flooring as marked on subfloor. Use nonpermanent, nonstaining marking device. 3.4 CLEANING AND PROTECTING A. Perform the following operations immediately after installing carpet: 1 . Remove excess adhesive, seam sealer, and other surface blemishes using cleaner recommended by carpet manufacturer. 2. Remove yarns that protrude from carpet surface. 3. Vacuum carpet using commercial machine.with face-beater element. B. Protect installed carpet to comply with CRI 104, Section 16, "Protection of Indoor Installations." C. Protect carpet against damage from construction operations and placement of equipment and fixtures during the remainder of construction period. Use 096816 SHEET CARPETING Page 6 of 7 Project No. 01091 Proposed Renovations March 6, 2009 Park House Smith College, Northampton, MA PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for maximum moisture content, alkalinity range, installation tolerances, and other conditions affecting carpet performance. Examine carpet for type, color, pattern, and potential defects. B. For wood subfloors, verify the following: 1 . Underlayment over subfloor complies with requirements specified in Division 06 Section "Rough Carpentry." 2. Underlayment surface is free of irregularities and substances that may interfere with adhesive bond or show through surface. C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. General: Comply with CRI 104, Section 7.3, "Site Conditions; Floor Preparation," and with carpet manufacturer's written installation instructions for preparing substrates. B. Use trowelable leveling and patching compounds, according to manufacturer's written instructions, to fill cracks, holes, depressions, and protrusions in substrates. Fill or level cracks, holes and depressions 1 /8 inch wide or wider, and protrusions more than 1 /32 inch, unless more stringent requirements are required by manufacturer's written instructions. C. Remove coatings, including curing compounds, and other substances that are incompatible with adhesives and that contain soap, wax, oil, or silicone, without using solvents. Use mechanical methods recommended in writing by carpet manufacturer. D. Broom and vacuum clean substrates to be covered immediately before installing carpet. 096816 SHEET CARPETING Page 5 of 7 Project No. 01091 Proposed Renovations March 6, 2009 Park House Smith College, Northampton, MA 5. Weight: 34 oz. 6. Installation: Double stick using Dura "Protector" 54 oz. Class I cushion. B. Carpet CPT-B: 1 . Location: Corridors 2. Product: Cambridge, Founder 3. Color: Skyscraper#35212 4. Construction: Textured patterned loop 5. Fiber: Diatron SD/BCF Nylon, Class I, Broadloom 6. Weight: 26 oz. with standard `Action Bac.' 7. Installation: Direct Glue. 2.2 INSTALLATION ACCESSORIES A. Trowelable Leveling and Patching Compounds: Latex-modified, hydraulic- cement-based formulation provided or recommended by carpet manufacturer. B. Adhesives: Water-resistant, mildew-resistant, nonstaining type to suit , products and subfloor conditions indicated, that complies with flammability requirements for installed carpet and is recommended or provided by carpet manufacturer. 1 . VOC Limits: Provide adhesives that comply with the following limits for VOC content when tested according to ASTM D 5116: a. Total VOCs: 10.00 mg/sq. m x h. b. Formaldehyde: 0.05 mg/sq. m x h. C. 2-Ethyl-1 -Hexanol: 3.00 mg/sq. m x h. C. Seam Adhesive: Hot-melt adhesive tape or similar product recommended by carpet manufacturer for sealing and taping seams and butting cut edges at backing to form secure seams and to prevent pile loss at seams. D. Underlayment: Multiply underlayment as Specified in Division 6. 096816 SHEET CARPETING Page 4 of 7 Project No. 0 109 1 Proposed Renovations March 6, 2009 Park House Smith College, Northampton, MA "* D. Where demountable partitions or other items are indicated for installation on top of carpet, install carpet before installing these items. 1 .7 WARRANTY A. Special Warranty for Carpet: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of carpet installation that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 1 . Warranty does not include deterioration or failure of carpet due to unusual traffic, failure of substrate, vandalism, or abuse. 2. Failures include, but are not limited to, more than 10 percent loss of face fiber, edge raveling, snags, runs, loss of tuft bind strength, excess static discharge, and delamination. 3. Warranty Period: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion. B. Special Warranty for Carpet Cushion: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of carpet cushion installation that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 1 . Warranty includes consequent removal and replacement of carpet and accessories. 2. Warranty does not include deterioration or failure of carpet cushion due to unusual traffic, failure of substrate, vandalism, or abuse. 3. Failure includes, but is not limited to, permanent indentation or compression. 4. Warranty Period: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS: A. Carpet CPT-A: 1 . Location: Living Room and Parlor. 2. Product: Bentley, Urban Scene 3. Color: As selected by Architect OOW 4. Fiber: Antron Legacy Nylon, Class I, Broadloom 096816 SHEET CARPETING Page 3 of 7 Project No. 01091 Proposed Renovations March 6, 2009 Park House Smith College, Northampton, MA 1 . Methods for maintaining carpet, including cleaning and stain-removal products and procedures and manufacturer's recommended maintenance schedule. 2. Precautions for cleaning materials and methods that could be detrimental to carpet and carpet cushion. D. Warranties: Special warranties specified in this Section. 1 .4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: An experienced installer who is certified by the Floor Covering Installation Board or who can demonstrate compliance with its certification program requirements. B. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Provide products with the critical radiant flux classification indicated in Part 2, as determined by testing identical products per ASTM E 648 by an independent testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 1 .5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Comply with CRI 104, Section 5, "Storage and Handling." 1 .6 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Comply with CRI 104, Section 7.2, "Site Conditions; Temperature and Humidity" and Section 7.12, "Ventilation." B. Environmental Limitations: Do not install carpet until wet work in spaces is complete and dry, and ambient temperature and humidity conditions are maintained at the levels indicated for Project when occupied for its intended use. C. Do not install carpet and carpet cushion over concrete slabs until slabs have cured, are sufficiently dry to bond with adhesive, and have pH range recommended by carpet manufacturer. 096816 SHEET CARPETING Page 2 of 7 Project No. 01091 Proposed Renovations March 6, 2009 Park House Smith College, Northampton, MA SECTION 096816 - SHEET CARPETING PART 1 - GENERAL 1 .1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1 .2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1 . Carpet with integral cushion for direct-glue application. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For the following, including installation recommendations for each type of substrate: 1 . Carpet: For each type indicated. Include manufacturer's written data on physical characteristics, durability, and fade resistance. 2. Carpet Cushion: For each type indicated. Include manufacturer's written data on physical characteristics and durability. B. Samples for verification: For each of the following products and for each color and texture required. Label each Sample with manufacturer's name, material description, color, pattern, and designation indicated on Drawings and in schedules. 1 . Carpet: 12-inch- square Sample. C. Maintenance Data: For carpet to include in maintenance manuals. Include the following: 096816 SHEET CARPETING Page 1 of 7 Project No. 01091 Proposed Renovations March 6, 2009 Park House Smith College, Northampton, MA F. Maintain reference markers, holes, and openings that are in place or marked for future cutting by repeating on floor tiles as marked on substrates. Use chalk or other nonpermanent, nonstaining marking device. G. Install floor tiles on covers for telephone and electrical ducts, building expansion-joint covers, and similar items in finished floor areas. Maintain overall continuity of color and pattern between pieces of tile installed on covers and adjoining tiles. Tightly adhere tile edges to substrates that abut covers and to cover perimeters. H. Adhere floor tiles to flooring substrates using a full spread of adhesive applied to substrate to produce a completed installation without open cracks, voids, raising and puckering at joints, telegraphing of adhesive spreader marks, and other surface imperfections. 3.4 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for cleaning and protection of floor tile. B. Perform the following operations immediately after completing floor tile installation: 1 . Remove adhesive and other blemishes from exposed surfaces. 2. Sweep and vacuum surfaces thoroughly. 3. Damp-mop surfaces to remove marks and soil. C. Protect floor tile products from mars, marks, indentations, and other damage from construction operations and placement of equipment and fixtures during remainder of construction period. D. Cover floor tile until Substantial Completion. END OF SECTION 096519 096519 RESILIENT TILE FLOORING Page 6 of 6 Project No. 01091 Proposed Renovations March 6, 2009 Park House Smith College, Northampton, MA b. Perform relative humidity test using in situ probes, ASTM F 2170. Proceed with installation only after substrates have a maximum 75% relative humidity level measurement. C. Fill cracks, holes, and depressions in substrates with trowelable leveling and patching compound and remove bumps and ridges to produce a uniform and smooth substrate. D. Do not install floor tiles until they are same temperature as space where they are to be installed. 1 . Move resilient products and installation materials into spaces where they will be installed at least 48 hours in advance of installation. E. Sweep and vacuum clean substrates to be covered by resilient products immediately before installation. 3.3 FLOOR TILE INSTALLATION +, A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for installing floor tile. B. Lay out floor tiles from center marks established with principal walls, discounting minor offsets, so tiles at opposite edges of room are of equal width. Adjust as necessary to avoid using cut widths that equal less than one-half tile at perimeter. 1 . Lay tiles in pattern indicated. C. Match floor tiles for color and pattern by selecting tiles from cartons in the same sequence as manufactured and packaged, if so numbered. Discard broken, cracked, chipped, or deformed tiles. 1 . Lay tiles in pattern of colors and sizes indicated. D. Scribe, cut, and fit floor tiles to butt neatly and tightly to vertical surfaces and permanent fixtures including built-in furniture, cabinets, pipes, outlets, and door frames. E. Extend floor tiles into toe spaces, door reveals, closets, and similar openings. Extend floor tiles to center of door openings. 096519 RESILIENT TILE FLOORING Page 5 of 6 Project No. 01091 Proposed Renovations March 6, 2009 Park House Smith College, Northampton, MA PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for maximum moisture content and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. B. Verify that finishes of substrates comply with tolerances and other requirements specified in other Sections and that substrates are free of cracks, ridges, depressions, scale, and foreign deposits that might interfere with adhesion of floor tile. C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Prepare substrates according to manufacturer's written instructions to ensure adhesion of resilient products. B. Concrete Substrates: Prepare according to ASTM F 710. 1 . Verify that substrates are dry and free of curing compounds, sealers, and hardeners. 2. Remove substrate coatings and other substances that are incompatible with adhesives and that contain soap, wax, oil, or silicone, using mechanical methods recommended by manufacturer. Do not use solvents. 3. Alkalinity and Adhesion Testing: Perform tests recommended by manufacturer. Proceed with installation only after substrates pass testing. 4. Moisture Testing: Perform tests recommended by manufacturer. Proceed with installation only after substrates pass testing. a. Perform anhydrous calcium chloride test, ASTM F 1869. Proceed with installation only after substrates have maximum moisture- vapor-emission rate of 3 lb of water/1000 sq. ft. in 24 hours. 096519 RESILIENT TILE FLOORING Page 4 of 6 Project No. 01091 Proposed Renovations March 6, 2009 Park House Smith College, Northampton, MA PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 RUBBER FLOOR TILE A. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: 1 . Endura Rubber Flooring, a division of Burke Industries Inc.;. 2. Nora Rubber Flooring, Freudenberg Building Systems, Inc.;. B. Hardness: Manufacturer's standard hardness. C. Wearing Surface: Textured. D. Thickness: 0.125 inch. E. Size: 12 by 12 inches. F. Stair Treads & Risers: Manufacturers matching integral tread and riser to flooring the for waterfall stairs and treads only for existing stairs with nosing. G. Seaming Method: Standard. H. Colors and Patterns: As selected by Architect from full range of industry colors. 2.2 INSTALLATION MATERIALS A. Trowelable Leveling and Patching Compounds: Latex-modified, portland cement based or blended hydraulic-cement-based formulation provided or approved by manufacturer for applications indicated. B. Adhesives: Water-resistant type recommended by manufacturer to suit floor tile and substrate conditions indicated. 1 . Use adhesives that comply with the following limits for VOC content when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24): a. Rubber Floor Tile Adhesives: Not more than 60 g/L. 096519 RESILIENT TILE FLOORING Page 3 of 6 Project No. 01091 Proposed Renovations March 6, 2009 Park House Smith College, Northampton, MA 1 . Engage an installer who employs workers for this Project who are "" trained or certified by manufacturer for installation techniques required. B. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: As determined by testing identical products according to ASTM E 648 or NFPA 253 by a qualified testing agency. 1 . Critical Radiant Flux Classification: Class I, not less than 0.45 W/sq. cm. 1 .5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Store floor tile and installation materials in dry spaces protected from the weather, with ambient temperatures maintained within range recommended by manufacturer, but not less than 50 deg F or more than 90 deg F. Store floor tiles on flat surfaces. 1 .6 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Maintain ambient temperatures within range recommended by manufacturer, but not less than 70 deg F or more than 95 deg F, in spaces to receive floor , tile during the following time periods: 1 . 48 hours before installation. 2. During installation. 3. 48 hours after installation. B. Until Substantial Completion, maintain ambient temperatures within range recommended by manufacturer, but not less than 55 deg F or more than 95 deg F. C. Close spaces to traffic during floor tile installation. D. Close spaces to traffic for 48 hours after floor tile installation. E. Install floor tile after other finishing operations; including painting, have been completed. 096519 RESILIENT TILE FLOORING Page 2 of 6 Project No. 01091 Proposed Renovations March 6, 2009 Park House Smith College, Northampton, MA SECTION 096519 - RESILIENT TILE FLOORING PART 1 - GENERAL 1 .1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1 .2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1 . Rubber floor tile. B. Related Sections: 1 . Division 09 Section "Resilient Base and Accessories" for resilient base, reducer strips, and other accessories installed with resilient floor coverings. 2. Division 09 Section "Resilient Sheet Flooring" for resilient sheet floor coverings. 3. Division 09 Section "Linoleum Flooring" for linoleum floor coverings. 1 .3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. B. Qualification Data: For qualified Installer. C. Maintenance Data: For each type of floor tile to include in maintenance manuals. 1 .4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: A qualified installer who employs workers for this Project who are competent in techniques required by manufacturer for floor tile installation indicated. 096519 RESILIENT TILE FLOORING Page 1 of 6 Project No. 01091 Proposed Renovations March 6, 2009 Park House Smith College, Northampton, MA 5. Eliminate deformations that result from hanging method used during drying process (stove bar marks). C. Integral-Flash-Cove Base: Cove linoleum floor covering 4 inches up vertical surfaces. Support floor covering at horizontal and vertical junction with cove strip. Butt at top against cap strip. 3.5 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for cleaning and protection of floor coverings. B. Perform the following operations immediately after completing floor covering installation: 1 . Remove adhesive and other blemishes from exposed surfaces. 2. Sweep and vacuum surfaces thoroughly. 3. Damp-mop surfaces to remove marks and soil. C. Protect floor coverings from mars, marks, indentations, and other damage from construction operations and placement of equipment and fixtures during remainder of construction period. D. Floor Polish: Remove soil, visible adhesive, and surface blemishes from floor coverings before applying liquid floor polish. 1 . Apply two coat(s). E. After allowing drying room film (yellow film caused by linseed oil oxidation) to disappear, cover floor coverings until Substantial Completion. END OF SECTION 096516.13 096516.13 LINOLEUM FLOORING Page 7 of 7 Project No. 01 091 Proposed Renovations March 6, 2009 Park House Smith College, Northampton, MA B. Scribe and cut floor coverings to butt neatly and tightly to vertical surfaces, permanent fixtures, and built-in furniture including cabinets, pipes, outlets, edgings, thresholds, and nosings. C. Extend floor coverings into toe spaces, door reveals, closets, and similar openings. D. Maintain reference markers, holes, or openings that are in place or marked for future cutting by repeating on floor coverings as marked on subfloor. Use chalk or other nonpermanent marking device. E. Install floor coverings on covers for telephone and electrical ducts and similar items in finished floor areas. Maintain overall continuity of color and pattern between pieces of floor covering installed on covers and adjoining floor covering. Tightly adhere floor covering edges to substrates that abut covers and to cover perimeters. F. Adhere floor coverings to substrates using a full spread of adhesive applied to substrate to produce a completed installation without open cracks, voids, raising and puckering at joints, telegraphing of adhesive spreader marks, and other surface imperfections. G. Heat-Welded Seams: Comply with ASTM F 1516. Rout joints and use welding bead to permanently fuse sections into a seamless floor covering. Prepare, weld, and finish seams to produce surfaces flush with adjoining floor covering surfaces. 3.4 LINOLEUM SHEET FLOORING INSTALLATION A. Unroll sheet floorings and allow them to stabilize before cutting and fitting. B. Lay out sheet floorings as follows: 1 . Maintain uniformity of floor covering direction. 2. Minimize number of seams; place seams in inconspicuous and low- traffic areas, at least 6 inches away from parallel joints in floor covering substrates. 3. Match edges of floor coverings for color shading at seams. 4. Avoid cross seams. 096516.13 LINOLEUM FLOORING Page 6 of 7 Project No. 01091 Proposed Renovations March 6, 2009 Park House Smith College, Northampton, MA PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for maximum moisture content and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. B. Verify that finishes of substrates comply with tolerances and other requirements specified in other Sections and that substrates are free of cracks, ridges, depressions, scale, and foreign deposits that might interfere with adhesion of floor coverings. C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Prepare substrates according to manufacturer's written instructions to ensure adhesion of floor coverings. B. Fill cracks, holes, and depressions in substrates with trowelable leveling and patching compound and remove bumps and ridges to produce a uniform and smooth substrate. C. Do not install floor coverings until they are same temperature as space where they are to be installed. 1 . Move floor coverings and installation materials into spaces where they will be installed at least 72 hours in advance of installation. D. Sweep and vacuum clean substrates to be covered by floor coverings immediately before installation. 3.3 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for installing floor coverings. 096516-13 LINOLEUM FLOORING Page 5 of 7 Project No. 01091 Proposed Renovations March 6, 2009 Park House Smith College, Northampton, MA 1 . Roll Size: In manufacturer's standard length by not less than 78 inches wide. B. Seaming Method: Heat welded. C. Thickness: 0.10 inch. D. Colors and Patterns: As selected by Architect from full range of industry colors. 2.3 INSTALLATION MATERIALS A. Trowelable Leveling and Patching Compounds: Latex-modified, portland cement based or blended hydraulic-cement-based formulation provided or approved by manufacturer for applications indicated. B. Adhesives: Water-resistant type recommended by manufacturer to suit products and substrate conditions indicated. 1 . Use adhesives that have a VOC content of not more than 50 g/L when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24). C. Heat-Welding Bead: Solid-strand product of linoleum floor covering manufacturer. 1 . Match linoleum floor covering. D. Integral-Flash-Cove-Base Accessories: 1 . Cove Strip: 1 -inch radius provided or approved by manufacturer. 2. Cove-Base Cap Strip: Square metal, vinyl, or rubber cap provided or approved by manufacturer. E. Floor Polish: Provide protective liquid floor polish products as recommended by manufacturer. 096516.13 LINOLEUM FLOORING Page 4 of 7 Project No. 01091 Proposed Renovations March 6, 2009 Park House Smith College, Northampton, MA recommended by manufacturer, but not less than 65 deg F or more than 90 deg F. 1 . Floor Tile: Store on flat surfaces. 2. Sheet Flooring: Store rolls upright. 1 .6 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Maintain ambient temperatures within range recommended by manufacturer, but not less than 70 deg F or more than 95 deg F, in spaces to receive floor coverings during the following time periods: 1 . 72 hours before installation. 2. During installation. 3. 72 hours after installation. B. Until Substantial Completion, maintain ambient temperatures within range recommended by manufacturer. C. Close spaces to traffic during floor covering installation. D. Close spaces to traffic for 24 hours after floor covering installation. E. Provide protective cover for floors subject to traffic until Substantial Completion F. Install floor coverings after other finishing operations, including painting, have been completed. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the following: 1 . Forbo Flooring, Inc.; Dual or Real, as selected by Architect. 2.2 LINOLEUM FLOOR COVERING A. Sheet Flooring: ASTM F 2034, Type I, linoleum sheet with backing. 096516.13 LINOLEUM FLOORING Page 3 of 7 Project No. 01091 Proposed Renovations March 6, 2009 Park House Smith College, Northampton, MA 1 . Show details of special patterns. D. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of floor covering indicated. 1 . Include similar Samples of installation accessories involving color selection. E. Samples for Verification: In manufacturer's standard size, but not less than 6-by-9-inch sections of each color and pattern of floor covering required. 1 . Heat-Welding Bead: Include manufacturer's standard-size Samples, but not less than 9 inches long, of each color required. F. Heat-Welded Seam Samples: For each floor covering product and welding bead color and pattern combination required; with seam running lengthwise and in center of 6-by-9-inch Sample applied to rigid backing and prepared by Installer for this Project. G. Maintenance Data: For each type of floor covering to include in maintenance manuals. 1 .4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: A qualified installer who employs workers for this Project who are competent in techniques required by manufacturer for floor covering installation. 1 . Engage an installer who employs workers for this Project who are trained or certified by manufacturer for installation techniques required. B. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: As determined by testing identical products according to ASTM E 648 or NFPA 253 by a qualified testing agency. 1 . Critical Radiant Flux Classification: Class I, not less than 0.45 WJsq. cm. 1 .5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Store floor coverings and installation materials in dry spaces protected from the weather, with ambient temperatures maintained within range 096516.13 LINOLEUM FLOORING Page 2 of 7 Project No. 01091 Proposed Renovations March 6, 2009 Park House Smith College, Northampton, MA SECTION 096516.13 - LINOLEUM FLOORING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1 .2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1 . Linoleum sheet flooring. B. Related Sections: 1 . Division 09 Section "Resilient Base and Accessories" for resilient base, reducer strips, and other accessories installed with linoleum floor covering. 2. Division 09 Section "Static-Control Resilient Flooring" for resilient floor coverings designed to control electrostatic discharge. 1 .3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. B. LEED Submittals: 1 . Product Data for Credit MR 6.0: For linoleum flooring, including printed statement of costs for each rapidly renewable material. 2. Product Data for Credit EQ 4.1 : For adhesives, including printed statement of VOC content. C. Shop Drawings: For each type of floor covering. Include floor covering layouts, locations of seams, edges, columns, doorways, enclosing partitions, built-in furniture, cabinets, and cutouts. 096516.13 LINOLEUM FLOORING Page 1 of 7 Project No. 01091 Proposed Renovations March 6, 2009 Park House Smith College, Northampton, MA E. Cover floor coverings until Substantial Completion. END OF SECTION 096516 096516 RESILIENT SHEET FLOORING Page 7 of 7 Project No. 01091 Proposed Renovations March 6, 2009 Park House Smith College, Northampton, MA F. Maintain reference markers, holes, or openings that are in place or marked for future cutting by repeating on floor coverings as marked on substrates. Use chalk or other nonpermanent marking device. G. Adhere floor coverings to substrates using a full spread of adhesive applied to substrate to produce a completed installation without open cracks, voids, raising and puckering at joints, telegraphing of adhesive spreader marks, and other surface imperfections. H. Seamless Installation: 1 . Heat-Welded Seams: Comply with ASTM F 1516. Rout joints and use welding bead to permanently fuse sections into a seamless floor covering. Prepare, weld, and finish seams to produce surfaces flush with adjoining floor covering surfaces. I. Integral-Flash-Cove Base: Cove floor coverings 4 inches up vertical surfaces. Support floor coverings at horizontal and vertical junction by cove strip. Butt at top against cap strip. 3.4 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for cleaning and protection of floor coverings. B. Perform the following operations immediately after completing floor covering installation: 1 . Remove adhesive and other blemishes from floor covering surfaces. 2. Sweep and vacuum floor coverings thoroughly. 3. Damp-mop floor coverings to remove marks and soil. C. Protect floor coverings from mars, marks, indentations, and other damage from construction operations and placement of equipment and fixtures during remainder of construction period. D. Floor Polish: Remove soil, visible adhesive, and surface blemishes from floor covering before applying liquid floor polish. 1 . Apply one coat. '"` 096516 RESILIENT SHEET FLOORING Page 6 of 7 Project No. 01091 Proposed Renovations March 6, 2009 Park House Smith College, Northampton, MA C. Fill cracks, holes, and depressions in substrates with trowelable leveling and patching compound and remove bumps and ridges to produce a uniform and smooth substrate. D. Install underlayment with minimum number of joints. Avoid using sheets less than two feet wide. E. Do not install floor coverings until they are same temperature as space where they are to be installed. 1 . Move floor coverings and installation materials into spaces where they will be installed at least 48 hours in advance of installation. F. Sweep and vacuum clean substrates to be covered by floor coverings immediately before installation. 3.3 FLOOR COVERING INSTALLATION A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for installing floor coverings. B. Unroll floor coverings and allow them to stabilize before cutting and fitting. C. Lay out floor coverings as follows: 1 . Maintain uniformity of floor covering direction. 2. Minimize number of seams; place seams in inconspicuous and low- traffic areas, at least 6 inches away from parallel joints in floor covering substrates. 3. Match edges of floor coverings for color shading at seams. 4. Avoid cross seams. D. Scribe and cut floor coverings to butt neatly and tightly to vertical surfaces, permanent fixtures, and built-in furniture including cabinets, pipes, outlets, and door frames. E. Extend floor coverings into toe spaces, door reveals, closets, and similar openings. 096516 RESILIENT SHEET FLOORING Page 5 of 7 Project No. 01091 Proposed Renovations March 6, 2009 Park House Smith College, Northampton, MA F. Floor Polish: Provide protective liquid floor polish products as recommended by manufacturer and approved by Owner. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for maximum moisture content and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. B. Verify that finishes of substrates comply with tolerances and other requirements specified in other Sections and that substrates are free of cracks, ridges, depressions, scale, and foreign deposits that might interfere with adhesion of floor coverings. C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Prepare substrates according to manufacturer's written instructions to ensure adhesion of floor coverings. B. Concrete Substrates: Prepare according to ASTM F 710. 1 . Verify that substrates are dry and free of curing compounds, sealers, and hardeners. 2. Remove substrate coatings and other substances that are incompatible with adhesives and that contain soap, wax, oil, or silicone, using mechanical methods recommended by manufacturer. Do not use solvents. 3. Alkalinity and Adhesion Testing: Perform tests recommended by manufacturer. Proceed with installation only after substrates pass testing. 096516 RESILIENT SHEET FLOORING Page 4 of 7 Project No. 01091 Proposed Renovations March 6, 2009 Park House Smith College, Northampton, MA C. Color B: Suite bathrooms. B. Unbacked Vinyl Sheet Floor Covering: ASTM F 1913, 0.080 inch thick. C. Wearing Surface: Smooth. D. Sheet Width: As standard with manufacturer. E. Seaming Method: Heat welded. F. Colors and Patterns: As selected by Architect from full range of industry colors. 2.2 INSTALLATION MATERIALS A. Trowelable Leveling and Patching Compounds: Latex-modified, portland cement based or blended hydraulic-cement-based formulation provided or approved by manufacturer for applications indicated. B. Wood Underlayment: Multi-ply plywood underlayment 1 . Thickness: 1 /4 inch. C. Adhesives: Water-resistant type recommended by manufacturer to suit floor covering and substrate conditions indicated. D. Seamless-Installation Accessories: 1 . Heat-Welding Bead: Manufacturer's solid-strand product for heat welding seams. a. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range to contrast with floor covering. E. integral-Flash-Cove-Base Accessories: 1 . Cove Strip: 1-inch radius provided or approved by manufacturer. 2. Retention strip: Metal clip designed to hold sheet in place at top of cove base 096516 RESILIENT SHEET FLOORING Page 3 of 7 Project No. 01091 Proposed Renovations March 6, 2009 Park House Smith College, Northampton, MA B. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: As determined by testing identical products according to ASTM E 648 or NFPA 253 by a qualified testing agency. 1 . Critical Radiant Flux Classification: Class I, not less than 0.45 W/sq. cm. 1 .5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Store floor coverings and installation materials in dry spaces protected from the weather, with ambient temperatures maintained within range recommended by manufacturer, but not less than 50 deg F or more than 90 deg F. Store rolls upright. 1 .6 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Maintain ambient temperatures within range recommended by manufacturer, but not less than 70 deg F or more than 85 deg F, in spaces to receive floor coverings during the following time periods: 1 . 48 hours before installation. 2. During installation. 3. 48 hours after installation. B. Close spaces to traffic during floor covering installation. C. Close spaces to traffic for 48 hours after floor covering installation. D. Install floor coverings after other finishing operations, including painting, have been completed. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 VINYL SHEET FLOOR COVERING A. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the following: 1 . Forbo Flooring, Inc.: Smaragd. a. Provide two colors, as selected by Architect. b. Color A: Public bathrooms. 096516 RESILIENT SHEET FLOORING Page 2 of 7 Project No. 01091 Proposed Renovations March 6, 2009 Park House Smith College, Northampton, MA SECTION 096516 - RESILIENT SHEET FLOORING PART 1 - GENERAL 1 .1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1 .2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1 . Vinyl sheet floor covering, without backing. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. B. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of floor covering indicated. 1 . For heat-welding bead, manufacturer's standard-size Samples, of each color. C. Maintenance Data: For each type of floor covering to include in maintenance manuals. 1 .4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: A qualified installer who employs workers for this Project who are competent in techniques required by manufacturer for floor covering installation and seaming method indicated. 1 . Engage an installer who employs workers for this Project who are trained or certified by floor covering manufacturer for installation techniques required. 096516 RESILIENT SHEET FLOORING Page 1 of 7 Project No. 01091 Proposed Renovations March 6, 2009 Park House Smith College, Northampton, MA D. Solid-Wood, Strip Flooring: Blind nail or staple flooring to substrate. 3.4 FIELD FINISHING A. Machine-sand flooring to remove offsets, ridges, cups, and sanding-machine marks that would be noticeable after finishing. Vacuum and tack with a clean cloth immediately before applying finish. 1 . Comply with applicable recommendations in NWFA's "Installation Guidelines: Wood Flooring." B. Fill and repair wood flooring seams and defects. C. Apply floor-finish materials in number of coats recommended by finish manufacturer for application indicated, but not less than one coat of floor sealer and three finish coats. 1 . Apply stains to achieve an even color distribution matching approved Samples. ** 2. For water-based finishes, use finishing methods recommended by finish manufacturer to minimize grain raise. D. Cover wood flooring before finishing. E. Do not cover wood flooring after finishing until finish reaches full cure, and not before seven days after applying last finish coat. 3.5 PROTECTION A. Protect installed wood flooring during remainder of construction period with covering of heavy kraft paper or other suitable material. Do not use plastic sheet or film that might cause condensation. 1 . Do not move heavy and sharp objects directly over kraft-paper-covered wood flooring. Protect flooring with plywood or hardboard panels to prevent damage from storing or moving objects over flooring. END OF SECTION 096400 096400 WOOD FLOORING Page 5 of 5 Project No. 01091 Proposed Renovations March 6, 2009 Park House Smith College, Northampton, MA PART 3 — EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates, areas and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for maximum moisture content, installation tolerances, and other conditions affecting performance of wood flooring. 1 . Verify that substrates comply with tolerances and other requirements specified in other Sections. 2. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Grind high spots and fill low spots on substrates to produce a maximum 1 /8- inch deviation in any direction when checked with a 10-foot straight edge. 1 . Use trowelable leveling and patching compounds, according to ,. manufacturer's written instructions, to fill cracks, holes, and depressions in substrates. B. Broom or vacuum clean substrates to be covered immediately before product installation. After cleaning, examine substrates for moisture, alkaline salts, carbonation, or dust. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. Comply with flooring manufacturer's written installation instructions, but not less than applicable recommendations in NWFA's "Installation Guidelines: Wood Flooring." B. Provide expansion space at walls and other obstructions and terminations of flooring of not less than 1 /4 inch. C. Asphalt-Saturated Felt: Where strip or plank flooring is nailed to solid-wood subfloor, install flooring over a layer of asphalt-saturated felt. 096400 WOOD FLOORING Page 4 of 5 Project No. 01091 Proposed Renovations March 6, 2009 Park House Smith College, Northampton, MA PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 FIELD-FINISHED WOOD FLOORING A. Solid-Wood, Strip Flooring: Kiln dried to 6 to 9 percent maximum moisture content, tongue and groove and end matched, and with backs channeled (kerfed) for stress relief. 1 . Species and Grade: MFMA-RL Second and Better Grade hard maple. 2. Cut: Plain sawn. 3. Thickness: 3/4 inch. 4. Face Width: 2-1 /4 inches. 5. Lengths: Random-length strips complying with applicable grading rules. B. Finish System: Hillyard Chemical; `Tip-Off' water-based floor finish. 2.2 ACCESSORY MATERIALS A. Asphalt-Saturated Felt: ASTM D 4869, Type II. B. Trowelable Leveling and Patching Compound: Latex-modified, hydraulic- cement-based formulation approved by wood flooring manufacturer. C. Fasteners: As recommended by manufacturer, but not less than that recommended in NWFA's "Installation Guidelines: Wood Flooring." D. Trim: In same species and grade as wood flooring, unless otherwise indicated. 1 . Saddles: 1 /2" high, tapered on each side and routed at bottom of one side to accommodate wood flooring and adjacent material. 096400 WOOD FLOORING Page 3 of 5 _on MIN I Project No. 01091 Proposed Renovations March 6, 2009 Park House Smith College, Northampton, MA C. Maple Flooring: Comply with applicable MFMA grading rules for species, grade, and cut. 1 . Certification: Provide flooring that carries MFMA mark on each bundle or piece. 1 .5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver wood flooring materials in unopened cartons or bundles. B. Protect wood flooring from exposure to moisture. Do not deliver wood flooring until after concrete, masonry, plaster, ceramic tile, and similar wet work is complete and dry. C. Store wood flooring materials in a dry, warm, ventilated, weathertight location. 1 .6 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Conditioning period begins not less than seven days before wood flooring installation, is continuous through installation, and continues not less than seven days after wood flooring installation. 1 . Environmental Conditioning: Maintain an ambient temperature between 65 and 75 deg F and relative humidity planned for building occupants in spaces to receive wood flooring during the conditioning period. 2. Wood Flooring Conditioning: Move wood flooring into spaces where it will be installed, no later than the beginning of the conditioning period. a. Do not install flooring until it adjusts to relative humidity of, and is at same temperature as, space where it is to be installed. b. Open sealed packages to allow wood flooring to acclimatize immediately on moving flooring into spaces in which it will be installed. B. After conditioning period, maintain relative humidity and ambient temperature planned for building occupants. 096400 WOOD FLOORING Page 2 of 5 Project No. 01091 Proposed Renovations March 6, 2009 Park House Smith College, Northampton, MA SECTION 096400 - WOOD FLOORING PART 1 - GENERAL 1 .1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1 .2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes field-finished wood flooring. B. Related Sections include the following: 1 .3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. B. Samples for Verification: For each type of wood flooring and accessory, with stain color and finish required, approximately 12 inches long and of same thickness and material indicated for the Work and showing the full range of normal color and texture variations expected. 1 .4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Source Limitations: For field-finished wood flooring, obtain each species, grade, and cut of wood from one source with resources to provide materials and products of consistent quality in appearance and physical properties. B. Hardwood Flooring: Comply with NOFMA's "Official Flooring Grading Rules" for species, grade, and cut. 1 . Certification: Provide flooring that carries NOFMA grade stamp on each bundle or piece. Awk 096400 WOOD FLOORING Page 1 of 5 Project No. 0 109 1 Proposed Renovations March 6, 2009 Park House Smith College, Northampton, MA 3.4 CLEANING NOW A. Clean exposed surfaces of acoustical panel ceilings, including trim, edge moldings, and suspension system members. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for cleaning and touchup of minor finish damage. Remove and replace ceiling components that cannot be successfully cleaned and repaired to permanently eliminate evidence of damage. END OF SECTION 095113 095113 ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS Page 10 of 10 Project No. 01091 Proposed Renovations March 6, 2009 Park House Smith College, Northampton, MA install supplemental suspension members and hangers in form of trapezes or equivalent devices. 4. Secure wire hangers to ceiling suspension members and to supports above with a minimum of three tight turns. Connect hangers directly either to structures or to inserts, eye screws, or other devices that are secure and appropriate for substrate and that will not deteriorate or otherwise fail due to age, corrosion, or elevated temperatures. 5. Space hangers not more than 48 inches o.c. along each member supported directly from hangers, unless otherwise indicated; provide hangers not more than 8 inches from ends of each member. C. Install edge moldings and trim of type indicated at perimeter of acoustical ceiling area and where necessary to conceal edges of acoustical panels. 1 . Screw attach moldings to substrate at intervals not more than 16 inches o.c. and not more than 3 inches from ends, leveling with ceiling suspension system to a tolerance of 1 /8 inch in 12 feet. Miter corners accurately and connect securely. 2. Do not use exposed fasteners, including pop rivets, on moldings arid trim. D. Install suspension system runners so they are square and securely interlocked with one another. Remove and replace dented, bent, or kinked members. E. Install acoustical panels with undamaged edges and fit accurately into suspension system runners and edge moldings. Scribe and cut panels at borders and penetrations to provide a neat, precise fit. 1 . Arrange directionally patterned acoustical panels as follows: a. As indicated on reflected ceiling plans. b. Install panels with pattern running in one direction parallel to short axis of space. 2. For square-edged panels, install panels with edges fully hidden from view by flanges of suspension system runners and moldings. 095113 ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS Page 9 of' 10 Project No. 01091 Proposed Renovations March 6, 2009 Park House Smith College, Northampton, MA PART 3 - EXECUTION " 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, including structural framing to which acoustical panel ceilings attach or abut, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements specified in this and other Sections that affect ceiling installation and anchorage and with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of acoustical panel ceilings. 1 . Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Measure each ceiling area and establish layout of acoustical panels to balance border widths at opposite edges of each ceiling. Avoid using less-than-half- width panels at borders, and comply with layout shown on reflected ceiling plans. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. General: Install acoustical panel ceilings to comply with ASTM C 636 and per manufacturer's written instructions and CISCA's "Ceiling Systems Handbook." B. Suspend ceiling hangers from building's structural members and as follows: 1 . Install hangers plumb and free from contact with insulation or other objects within ceiling plenum that are not part of supporting structure or of ceiling suspension system. 2. Splay hangers only where required to miss obstructions; offset resulting horizontal forces by bracing, countersplaying, or other equally effective means. 3. Where width of ducts and other construction within ceiling plenum produces hanger spacings that interfere with location of hangers at spacings required to support standard suspension system members, 095113 ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS Page 8 of 10 Project No. 01091 Proposed Renovations March 6, 2009 Park House Smith College, Northampton, MA 2. Size: Select wire diameter so its stress at 3 times hanger design load (ASTM C 635, Table 1 , "Direct Hung") will be less than yield stress of wire, but provide not less than 0.106-inch- diameter wire. 2.5 METAL SUSPENSION SYSTEM FOR ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILING A. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: 1 . Armstrong World Industries, Inc. 2. Chicago Metallic Corporation 3. USG Interiors, Inc. B. Wide-Face, Capped, Double-Web, Hot-Dip Galvanized, G60, Steel Suspension System: Main and cross runners roll formed from cold-rolled steel sheet, hot-dip galvanized according to ASTM A 653/A 653M, G60 coating designation, with prefinished, cold-rolled, 15/16-inch- wide, aluminum caps on flanges. 1 . Structural Classification: Intermediate-duty system. 2. Face Design: Flat, flush. 3. Face Finish: Painted white. 2.6 METAL EDGE MOLDINGS AND TRIM A. Roll-Formed, Sheet-Metal Edge Moldings and Trim: Type and profile indicated or, if not indicated, manufacturer's standard moldings for edges and penetrations; formed from sheet metal of same material, finish, and color as that used for exposed flanges of suspension system runners. 1 . Provide manufacturer's standard edge moldings that fit acoustical panel edge details and suspension systems indicated and that match width and configuration of exposed runners, unless otherwise indicated. 095113 ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS Page 7 of 10 Project No. 01091 Proposed Renovations March 6, 2009 Park House Smith College, Northampton, MA C. Color: White. D. LR: Not less than 0.80. E. NRC: Not less than 0.55. F. CAC: Not less than 38. G. Edge/joint Detail: Square. H. Thickness: 5/8 inch. I. Modular Size: 24 by 24 inches. J. Antimicrobial Treatment: Broad spectrum fungicide and bactericide based 2.4 METAL SUSPENSION SYSTEMS, GENERAL A. Metal Suspension System Standard: Provide manufacturer's standard direct- hung metal suspension systems of types, structural classifications, and finishes indicated that comply with applicable requirements in ASTM C 635. B. Finishes and Colors, General: Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for recommendations for applying and designating finishes. Provide manufacturer's standard factory-applied finish for type of system indicated. 1 . High-Humidity Finish: Comply with ASTM C 635 requirements for "Coating Classification for Severe Environment Performance" where high-humidity finishes are indicated. C. Attachment Devices: Size for five times the design load indicated in ASTM C 635, Table 1 , "Direct Hung," unless otherwise indicated. Comply with seismic design requirements. D. Wire Hangers, Braces, and Ties: Provide wires complying with the following requirements: 1 . Stainless-Steel Wire: ASTM A 580/A 580M, Type 304, nonmagnetic. 095113 ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS Page 6 of 10 Project No. 01091 Proposed Renovations March 6, 2009 Park House Smith College, Northampton, MA 1 . Armstrong World Industries, Inc.; Cirrus. B. Classification: Provide panels complying with ASTM E 1264 for type, form, and pattern as follows: 1 . Type and Form: Type III, mineral base with painted finish; Form 11 , nodular. 2. Pattern: E (lightly textured). C. Color: White. D. LR: Not less than 0.85. E. NRC: Not less than 0.70. F. CAC: Not less than 35. G. Edge/Joint Detail: Beveled, kerfed and rabbeted long edges and square, butt- on short edges. H. Thickness: 7/8 inch. I. Modular Size: 24 by 24 inches. J. Antimicrobial Treatment: Broad spectrum fungicide and bactericide based. 2.3 ACOUSTICAL PANELS FOR BATHROOMS (ACP-B) A. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1 . Armstrong World Industries, Inc.; Ceramaguard. B. Classification: Provide panels complying with ASTM E 1264 for type, form, and pattern as follows: 1 . Type and Form: Type XX, other types; described as high-density, ceramic- and mineral-base panels with scrubbable finish, resistant to heat, moisture, and corrosive fumes. 2. Pattern: CE (perforated, small holes and lightly textured). ovwk 095113 ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS Page 5 of 10 Project No. 01091 Proposed Renovations March 6, 2009 Park House Smith College, Northampton, MA PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 ACOUSTICAL PANELS, GENERAL A. Acoustical Panel Standard: Provide manufacturer's standard panels of configuration indicated that comply with ASTM E 1264 classifications as designated by types, patterns, acoustical ratings, and light reflectances, unless otherwise indicated. B. Acoustical Panel Colors and Patterns: Match appearance characteristics indicated for each product type. 1 . Where appearance characteristics of acoustical panels are indicated by referencing pattern designations in ASTM E 1264 and not manufacturers' proprietary product designations, provide products selected by Architect from each manufacturer's full range that comply with requirements indicated for type, pattern, color, light reflectance, acoustical performance, edge detail, and size. C. Broad Spectrum Antimicrobial Fungicide and Bactericide Treatment: Provide acoustical panels treated with manufacturer's standard antimicrobial formulation that inhibits fungus, mold, mildew, and gram-positive and gram- negative bacteria and showing no mold, mildew, or bacterial growth when tested according to ASTM D 3273 and evaluated according to ASTM D 3274 or ASTM G 21 . D. Antimicrobial Fungicide Treatment: Provide acoustical panels with face and back surfaces coated with antimicrobial treatment consisting of manufacturer's standard formulation with fungicide added to inhibit growth of mold and mildew and showing no mold or mildew growth when tested according to ASTM D 3273 and evaluated according to ASTM D 3274 or ASTM G 21 . 2.2 ACOUSTICAL PANELS FOR PUBLIC SPACES (ACP-A) A. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 095113 ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS Page 4 of 10 Project No. 01091 Proposed Renovations March 6, 2009 Park House Smith College, Northampton, MA 1 .6 WARRANTY A. Provide Manufacturers standard warranty for panel applications in humid environments including anti-microbial treatment and resistance to mildew and sag in humid environments. 1 . Warranty period: 10 years 1 .7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver acoustical panels, suspension system components, and accessories to Project site in original, unopened packages and store them in a fully enclosed, conditioned space where they will be protected against damage from moisture, humidity, temperature extremes, direct sunlight, surface contamination, and other causes. B. Before installing acoustical panels, permit them to reach room temperature and a stabilized moisture content. C. Handle acoustical panels carefully to avoid chipping edges or damaging units in any way. 1 .8 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Limitations: Do not install acoustical panel ceilings until spaces are enclosed and weatherproof, wet work in spaces is complete and dry, work above ceilings is complete, and ambient temperature and humidity conditions are maintained at the levels indicated for Project when occupied for its intended use. 1 .9 COORDINATION A. Coordinate layout and installation of acoustical panels and suspension system with other construction that penetrates ceilings or is supported by them, including light fixtures, HVAC equipment, fire-suppression system, and partition assemblies. 095113 ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS Page 3 of' 10 WNW Project No. 01091 Proposed Renovations March 6, 2009 Park House Smith College, Northampton, MA 2. Exposed Suspension System Members, Moldings, and Trim: Set of 12- inch- long Samples of each type, finish, and color. B. Research/Evaluation Reports: For each acoustical panel ceiling and components. C. Maintenance Data: For finishes to include in maintenance manuals. 1 .5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Acoustical Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent testing laboratory, or an NVLAP-accredited laboratory, with the experience and capability to conduct the testing indicated. NVLAP-accredited laboratories must document accreditation, based on a "Certificate of Accreditation" and a "Scope of Accreditation" listing the test methods specified. B. Source Limitations: 1 . Acoustical Ceiling Panel: Obtain each type through one source from a single manufacturer. 2. Suspension System: Obtain each type through one source from a single manufacturer. C. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of acoustical ceiling panel and supporting suspension system through one source from a single manufacturer. D. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Provide acoustical panel ceilings that comply with the following requirements: 1 . Surface-Burning Characteristics: Provide acoustical panels with the following surface-burning characteristics complying with ASTM E 1264 for Class A materials as determined by testing identical products per ASTM E 84: 095113 ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS Page 2 of 10 Project No. 01091 Proposed Renovations March 6, 2009 Park House Smith College, Northampton, MA SECTION 095113 - ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS PART 1 - GENERAL 1 .1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1 .2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes acoustical panels and exposed suspension systems for ceilings. B. Related Sections include the following: 1 . Division 09 Section "Acoustical Tile Ceilings" for ceilings consisting of mineral-base acoustical tiles used with concealed suspension systems, stapling, or adhesive bonding. 1 .3 DEFINITIONS A. AC: Articulation Class. B. CAC: Ceiling Attenuation Class. C. LR: Light Reflectance coefficient. D. NRC: Noise Reduction Coefficient. 1 .4 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. 1 . Acoustical Panel: Set of 6-inch- square Samples of each type, color, pattern, and texture. AOW 095113 ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS Page 1 of 10 Project No. 01 091 Proposed Renovations March 6, 2009 Park House Smith College, Northampton, MA C. Gypsum Veneer Plaster Finish: Smooth-troweled finish, unless otherwise indicated. 3.7 PROTECTION A. Protect installed gypsum veneer plaster from damage from weather, condensation, construction, and other causes during remainder of the construction period. B. Remove and replace gypsum veneer plaster and gypsum base panels that are wet, moisture damaged, or mold damaged. 1 . Indications that gypsum base panels are wet or moisture damaged include, but are not limited to, discoloration, sagging, and irregular shape. 2. Indications that gypsum base panels are mold damaged include, but are not limited to, fuzzy or splotchy surface contamination and discoloration. END OF SECTION 092613 092613 GYPSUM VENEER PLASTERING Page 10 of 10 Project No. 01091 Proposed Renovations March 6, 2009 Park House Smith College, Northampton, MA 1 . Cornerbead: Use at outside corners. 2. LC-Bead: Use at exposed panel edges. 3. Curved-Edge Cornerbead: Use at curved soffits and openings. 3.5 INSTALLING JOINT REINFORCEMENT A. Gypsum Base for Veneer Plaster: Reinforce interior angles and flat joints with joint tape and embedding material to comply with ASTM C 843 and with gypsum veneer plaster manufacturer's written recommendations. B. Moisture- and Mold-Resistant Base: Reinforce joints between moisture- and mold-resistant panels with joint tape and embedding material according to panel manufacturer's written recommendations. 3.6 GYPSUM VENEER PLASTERING A. Gypsum Veneer Plaster Application: Comply with ASTM C 843 and with veneer plaster manufacturer's written recommendations. 1 . One-Component Gypsum Veneer Plaster: Trowel apply base coat over substrate to uniform thickness of 1 /16 to 3/32 inch. Fill all voids and imperfections. 2. Where gypsum veneer plaster abuts only metal door frames, windows, and other units, groove finish coat to eliminate spalling. 3. Do not apply veneer plaster to gypsum base if paper facing has degraded from exposure to sunlight. Before applying veneer plaster, use remedial methods to restore bonding capability to degraded paper facing according to manufacturer's written recommendations and as approved by Architect. B. Concealed Surfaces: Do not omit gypsum veneer plaster behind cabinets, furniture, furnishings, and similar removable items. Omit veneer plaster in the following areas where it will be concealed from view in the completed Work unless otherwise indicated or required to maintain fire-resistance and STC ratings: 1 . Soffit walls above suspended ceilings. 092613 GYPSUM VENEER PLASTERING Page 9 of' 10 Project No. 01091 Proposed Renovations March 6, 2009 Park House Smith College, Northampton, MA 3.3 INSTALLING PANELS A. Install gypsum base panels for veneer plaster in the following locations: 1 . Regular Type: All surfaces, unless otherwise indicated. 2. Type X: Where required for fire-resistance-rated assembly. 3. Moisture- and Mold-Resistant Base: At shower and tub walls. B. Single-Layer Application: 1 . On ceilings, apply gypsum base panels before wall panels, to the greatest extent possible and at right angles to framing, unless otherwise indicated. 2. On walls, apply gypsum base panels vertically and parallel to framing, unless otherwise indicated or required by fire-resistance-rated assembly, and minimize end joints. a. Stagger abutting end joints not less than one framing member in alternate courses of panels. b. At stairwells and other walls higher than 30 feet, install gypsum base panels horizontally unless otherwise indicated or required by fire-resistance-rated assembly. 3. On Z-furring, apply gypsum base panels vertically (parallel to framing) with no end joints. Locate edge joints over furring members. C. Single-Layer Fastening Methods: Apply gypsum base panels to supports with steel drill screws. D. Curved Partitions: Comply with gypsum base manufacturer's written installation recommendations. 3.4 INSTALLING TRIM ACCESSORIES A. General: For trim with back flanges intended for fasteners, attach to framing with same fasteners used for panels. Otherwise, attach trim according to manufacturer's written instructions. B. Trim: Install in the following locations: 092613 GYPSUM VENEER PLASTERING Page 8 of 10 Project No. 01091 Proposed Renovations March 6, 2009 Park House Smith College, Northampton, MA E. Locate edge and end joints over supports except in ceiling applications where intermediate supports or back-blocking is provided behind end joints. Do not place tapered edges against cut edges or ends. Stagger vertical joints on opposite sides of partitions. Do not make joints, other than control joints, at corners of framed openings. F. Attach panels to steel studs so leading edge or end of each panel is attached to open (unsupported) edges of stud flanges first. G. Attach panels to framing provided at openings and cutouts. H. Cover both sides of steel stud partition framing with panels in concealed spaces, including above ceilings, except in internally braced soffits 1 . Unless concealed application is indicated or required for sound, fire, air, or smoke ratings, coverage may be accomplished with scraps of not less than 8 sq. ft. in area. 2. Fit panels around ducts, pipes, and conduits. I. Wood Framing: Install panels over wood framing, with "floating" internal corner construction. Do not attach panels across the flat grain of wide- dimension lumber, including floor joists and headers. "Float" panels over these members or provide control joints to counteract wood shrinkage. J. STC-Rated Assemblies: Seal construction at perimeters, behind control joints, and at openings and penetrations with a continuous bead of acoustical sealant. Install acoustical sealant at both faces of partitions at perimeters and through penetrations. Comply with ASTM C 919 and with manufacturer's written recommendations for locating edge trim and closing off sound- flanking paths around or through assemblies, including sealing partitions above acoustical ceilings. K. Fastener Spacing: Comply with ASTM C 844, manufacturer's written recommendations, and fire-resistance-rating requirements. 1 . Space screws a maximum of 12 inches o.c. along framing members for wall or ceiling application. 092613 GYPSUM VENEER PLASTERING Page 7 of 10 Project No. 01091 Proposed Renovations March 6, 2009 Park House Smith College, Northampton, MA PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance. B. Examine panels before installation. Reject panels that are wet, moisture damaged, or mold damaged. C. Verify that mortar joints are struck flush. D. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 INSTALLING PANELS, GENERAL A. Gypsum Base for Veneer Plaster: Apply according to ASTM C 844 unless manufacturer's written recommendations are more stringent. 1 . Do not allow gypsum base to degrade from exposure to sunlight as evidenced by fading of paper facing. 2. Erection Tolerance: No more than 1 /16-inch offsets between planes of gypsum base panels, and 1 /8 inch in 8 feet noncumulative, for level, plumb, warp, and bow. B. Install sound attenuation blankets before installing gypsum base for veneer plaster unless blankets are readily installed after panels have been installed on one side. C. Install ceiling panels across framing to minimize the number of abutting end joints and to avoid abutting end joints in the central area of each ceiling. Stagger abutting end joints of adjacent panels not less than one framing member. D. Install panels with face side out. Butt panels together for a light contact at edges and ends with not more than 1 /16 inch of open space between panels. Do not force into place. •• 092613 GYPSUM VENEER PLASTERING Page 6 of 10 Project No. 01091 Proposed Renovations March 6, 2009 Park House Smith College, Northampton, MA 2.5 AUXILIARY MATERIALS A. General: Provide auxiliary materials that comply with referenced product standards and manufacturer's written recommendations. B. Bonding Agent: ASTM C 631 , polyvinyl acetate. C. Laminating Adhesive: Adhesive or joint compound recommended by manufacturer for directly adhering gypsum base face-layer panels to backing-layer panels in multilayer construction. 1 . Use adhesives that have a VOC content of 50 g/L or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24). D. Steel Drill Screws: ASTM C 1002, unless otherwise indicated. 1 . Use screws complying with ASTM C 954 for fastening panels to steel members from 0.033 to 0.112 inch thick. E. For fastening cementitious backer units, use screws of type and size recommended by panel manufacturer. F. Sound Attenuation Blankets: ASTM C 665, Type I (blankets without membrane facing), produced by combining thermosetting resins with mineral fibers manufactured from glass, slag wool, or rock wool. 1 . Fire-Resistance-Rated Assemblies: Comply with mineral-fiber requirements of assembly. G. Acoustical Sealant: As specified in Division 07 Section "Joint Sealants." H. Patching Mortar: Dry-pack patching mortar, consisting of 1 part portland cement to 2-1 /2 parts fine aggregate passing a No. 16 sieve, using only enough water for handling and placing. 2.6 GYPSUM VENEER PLASTER MIXES A. Mechanically mix gypsum veneer plaster materials to comply with ASTM C 843 and with gypsum veneer plaster manufacturer's written recommendations. 092613 GYPSUM VENEER PLASTERING Page 5 of 10 Project No. 01091 Proposed Renovations March 6, 2009 Park House Smith College, Northampton, MA Aawk a. Mold Resistance: ASTM D 3273; no mold growth after four weeks' ` exposure. 2.3 TRIM ACCESSORIES A. Standard Trim: ASTM C 1047, provided or approved by manufacturer for use in gypsum veneer plaster applications indicated. 1 . Material: Aluminum-coated steel sheet or rolled zinc, except Plastic at Bathrooms. 2. Shapes: a. Cornerbead. b. LC-Bead: .J-shaped; exposed long flange receives joint compound. C. Curved-Edge Cornerbead: With notched or flexible flanges. 2.4 JOINT REINFORCING MATERIALS A. General: Comply with joint strength requirements in ASTM C 587 and with gypsum veneer plaster manufacturer's written recommendations for each application indicated. B. .Joint Tape: 1 . Gypsum Base for Veneer Plaster: As recommended by gypsum veneer plaster manufacturer for applications indicated. 2. Cementitious Backer Units: As recommended by cementitious backer unit manufacturer. C. Embedding Material for,Joint Tape: 1 . Gypsum Base for Veneer Plaster: As recommended by gypsum veneer plaster manufacturer for use with joint-tape material and gypsum veneer plaster applications indicated. 2. Cementitious Backer Units: As recommended by cementitious backer unit manufacturer for applications indicated. 092613 GYPSUM VENEER PLASTERING Page 4 of 10 Project No. 01091 Proposed Renovations March 6, 2009 Park House Smith College, Northampton, MA 2. Ventilate building spaces in a manner that prevents drafts of air from contacting surfaces during veneer plaster application until it is dry. D. Do not install panels that are wet, moisture damaged, or mold damaged. 1 . Indications that panels are wet or moisture damaged include, but are not limited to, discoloration, sagging, and irregular shape. 2. Indications that panels are mold damaged include, but are not limited to, fuzzy or splotchy surface contamination and discoloration. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 GYPSUM VENEER PLASTER MATERIALS A. One-Component Gypsum Veneer Plaster: ASTM C 587, formulated for application directly over substrate without use of separate base-coat material. 1 . Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: a. G-P Gypsum; Cameo Veneer Plaster. b. National Gypsum Company; Uni-Kal Plaster. C. USG Corporation; Diamond Interior Finish Plaster. 2.2 PANEL PRODUCTS A. Panel Size: Provide in maximum lengths and widths available that will minimize joints in each area and that correspond with support system indicated. B. Gypsum Base for Veneer Plaster: ASTM C 588/C 588M. I . Regular Type: 1 /2 inch thick, unless otherwise indicated. 2. Type X: 5/8 inch thick, at fire rated partitions. 3. Moisture- and Mold-Resistant Base: With moisture- and mold-resistant core, glass-mat facing on both sides of panel. Provide at all shower and opft� bath enclosures. 092613 GYPSUM VENEER PLASTERING Page 3 of 10 Project No. 01091 Proposed Renovations March 6, 2009 Park House Smith College, Northampton, MA 1 .4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Source Limitations: Obtain gypsum veneer plaster products, including gypsum base for veneer plaster, joint reinforcing tape, and embedding material, from a single manufacturer. B. Fire-Resistance-Rated Assemblies: Provide materials and construction identical to those tested in assembly indicated according to ASTM E 119 by a testing and inspecting agency. C. STC-Rated Assemblies: Provide materials and construction identical to those tested in assembly indicated according to ASTM E 90 and classified according to ASTM E 413 by a testing and inspecting agency. 1 .5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver materials in original packages, containers, and bundles bearing brand name and identification of manufacturer or supplier. B. Store materials inside under cover and keep them dry and protected against damage from weather, direct sunlight, surface contamination, corrosion, construction traffic, and other causes. C. Stack panels flat on leveled supports off floor or slab to prevent sagging. 1 .6 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Limitations: Comply with ASTM C 843 requirements or gypsum veneer plaster manufacturer's written recommendations, whichever are more stringent. B. Room Temperatures: Maintain not less than 55 deg F or more than 80 deg F for 7 days before application of gypsum base and gypsum veneer plaster, continuously during application, and after application until veneer plaster is d ry. C. Avoid conditions that result in gypsum veneer plaster drying too rapidly. 1 . Maintain relative humidity levels, for prevailing ambient temperature, that produce normal drying conditions. 092613 GYPSUM VENEER PLASTERING Page 2 of 10 Project No. 01091 Proposed Renovations March 6, 2009 Park House Smith College, Northampton, MA SECTION 092613 - GYPSUM VENEER PLASTERING PART 1 - GENERAL 1 .1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1 .2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1 . Gypsum veneer plaster and gypsum base for veneer plaster. B. Related Sections include the following: 1 . Division 06 Section "Rough Carpentry"for wood framing and furring. 2. Division 07 Section "Thermal Insulation" for insulation installed in gypsum veneer plaster assemblies. 3. Division 09 Section "Non-Structural Metal Framing" for non-load- bearing steel framing and other components of gypsum veneer plaster assemblies. 4. Division 09 Section "Gypsum Board Shaft Wall Assemblies" for non- load-bearing steel framing, gypsum liner panels, gypsum board, and other components of shaft-wall assemblies. 1 .3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. B. Samples: For the following products: 1 . Trim Accessories: Full-size Sample in 12-inch length for each trim accessory. A 092613 GYPSUM VENEER PLASTERING Page 1 of 10 Project No. 01091 Proposed Renovations March 6, 2009 Park House Smith College, Northampton, MA 3.3 PROTECTION A. A. Protect installed products from damage from weather, condensation, direct sunlight, construction, and other causes during remainder of the construction period. B. Remove and replace panels that are wet, moisture damaged, or mold damaged. 1 . Indications that panels are wet or moisture damaged include, but are not limited to, discoloration, sagging, and irregular shape. 2. Indications that panels are mold damaged include, but are not limited to, fuzzy or splotchy surface contamination and discoloration. END OF SECTION 0921 16.23 0921 16.23 GYPSUM BOARD SHAFT WALL ASSEMBLIES Page 6 of 6 Project No. 01091 Proposed Renovations March 6, 2009 Park House Smith College, Northampton, MA PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates to which gypsum board shaft-wall assemblies attach or abut, with Installer present. Examine for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance. B. Examine panels before installation. Reject panels that are wet, moisture damaged, or mold damaged. C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. General: Install gypsum board shaft-wall assemblies to comply with requirements of fire-resistance-rated assemblies indicated, manufacturer's written installation instructions, and the following: 1 . ASTM C 754 for installing steel framing except comply with framing spacing indicated. 2. Division 09 Section "Gypsum Veneer Plastering" for applying and finishing panels. B. At penetrations in shaft wall, maintain fire-resistance rating of shaft-wall assembly by installing supplementary steel framing around perimeter of penetration and fire protection behind boxes containing wiring devices, elevator call buttons, elevator floor indicators, and similar items. C. Installation Tolerance: Install each framing member so fastening surfaces vary not more than 1 /8 inch from the plane formed by faces of adjacent framing. 0921 16.23 GYPSUM BOARD SHAFT WALL ASSEMBLIES Page 5 of 6 Project No. 01091 Proposed Renovations March 6, 2009 Park House Smith College, Northampton, MA comply with gypsum board shaft-wall assembly manufacturer's written ` recommendations for application indicated. C. Gypsum Base .Joint-Reinforcing Materials: As specified in Division 09 Section "Gypsum Veneer Plastering." D. Gypsum Veneer Plaster: As specified in Division 09 Section "Gypsum Veneer Plastering." E. Track Fasteners: Power-driven fasteners of size and material required to withstand loading conditions imposed on shaft-wall assemblies without exceeding allowable design stress of track, fasteners, or structural substrates in which anchors are embedded. 2.6 GYPSUM BOARD SHAFT-WALL ASSEMBLIES A. Fire-Resistance Rating: As indicated. B. Studs: Manufacturer's standard profile for repetitive members, corner and end members, and fire-resistance-rated assembly indicated. 1 . Depth: 2-112 inches. 2. Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: 0.0220 inch. C. Runner Tracks: Manufacturer's standard )-profile track with long-leg length as standard with manufacturer, but at least 2 inches long and in depth matching studs. 1 . Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: Matching steel studs. D. Room-Side Finish: 1 . Fire tape gypsum board at walls furred for shower enclosures. 2. Gypsum Veneer Plaster over base layer at finished walls. E. Shaft-Side Finish: As indicated by fire-resistance-rated assembly design designation. F. Insulation: Sound attenuation blankets. 0921 16.23 GYPSUM BOARD SHAFT WALL ASSEMBLIES Page 4 of 6 Project No. 01091 Proposed Renovations March 6, 2009 Park House Smith College, Northampton, MA 2.2 GYPSUM BOARD SHAFT-WALL ASSEMBLIES, GENERAL A. Provide materials and components complying with requirements of fire- resistance-rated assemblies indicated. 1 . Provide panels in maximum lengths available to eliminate or minimize end-to-end butt joints. 2. Provide auxiliary materials complying with gypsum board shaft-wall assembly manufacturer's written recommendations. 2.3 PANEL PRODUCTS A. Gypsum Liner Panels: Comply with ASTM C 442/C 442M. 1 . Type X: Manufacturer's proprietary liner panels with moisture-resistant paper faces. a. Core: 1 inch thick. b. Long Edges: Double bevel. B. Gypsum Board: 5/8" Type-X 2.4 NON-LOAD-BEARING STEEL FRAMING A. Framing Members: Comply with ASTM C 754 for conditions indicated. B. Steel Sheet Components: Comply with ASTM C 645 requirements for metal, unless otherwise indicated. 1 . Protective Coating: ASTM A 653/A 653M, G40, hot-dip galvanized, unless otherwise indicated. 2.5 AUXILIARY MATERIALS A. General: Provide auxiliary materials that comply with referenced product standards and manufacturer's written recommendations. B. Trim Accessories: Cornerbead, edge trim, and control joints of material and , ,, shapes specified in Division 09 Section "Gypsum Veneer Plastering" that 0921 16.23 GYPSUM BOARD SHAFT WALL ASSEMBLIES Page 3 of 6 Project No. 01091 Proposed Renovations March 6, 2009 Park House Smith College, Northampton, MA 1 .5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver materials in original packages, containers, and bundles bearing brand name and identification of manufacturer or supplier. B. Store materials inside under cover and keep them dry and protected against damage from weather, direct sunlight, surface contamination, corrosion, construction traffic, and other causes. C. Stack panels flat on leveled supports off floor or slab to prevent sagging. 1 .6 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Limitations: Comply with ASTM C 840 requirements or with gypsum board manufacturer's written recommendations, whichever are more stringent. B. Do not install interior products until installation areas are enclosed and conditioned. C. Do not install panels that are wet, moisture damaged, or mold damaged. 1 . Indications that panels are wet or moisture damaged include, but are not limited to, discoloration, sagging, and irregular shape. 2. Indications that panels are mold damaged include, but are not limited to, fuzzy or splotchy surface contamination and discoloration. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1 . American Gypsum Company. 2. G-P Gypsum. 3. National Gypsum Company. 4. USG Corporation. 0921 16.23 GYPSUM BOARD SHAFT WALL ASSEMBLIES Page 2 of 6 Project No. 01091 Proposed Renovations March 6, 2009 Park House Smith College, Northampton, MA SECTION 0921 16.23 - GYPSUM BOARD SHAFT WALL ASSEMBLIES PART 1 - GENERAL 1 .1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1 .2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes gypsum board shaft-wall assemblies for the following: 1 . Shaft-wall enclosures. 2. Chase enclosures. 3. Horizontal enclosures. 1 .3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each gypsum board shaft-wall assembly indicated. 1 .4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Fire-Resistance Ratings: Provide materials and construction identical to those of assemblies with fire-resistance ratings determined according -to ASTM E 119 by a testing and inspecting agency. B. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements in Division 01 Section "Project Management and Coordination." Review methods and procedures for installing gypsum board shaft-wall assemblies including, but not limited to, the following: 1 . Fasteners proposed for anchoring nonstructural steel framing to building structure. 2. Items supported by shaft-wall-assembly framing. 3. Mechanical work enclosed within shaft-wall assemblies. 0921 16.23 GYPSUM BOARD SHAFT WALL ASSEMBLIES Page 1 of 6 Project No. 01091 Proposed Renovations March 6, 2009 Park House Smith College, Northampton, MA Heading 5 & 5a (Student Rooms) 1 MR/ML2065 Lockset 1 %z pr FBB 199 Butts 1 Closer 1 Ives 447/448 Stop 1 8" Kickplate @ a Note: Closer not required @ Doors 006, 008, 115 & 304 Provide FBB 223 Butts @ Door 115. Heading 6 & 6a (Student Closets) 1 MR/ML2024 Passage Set 1 Dead Lock 4011 1 %z pr FBB 179 Butts Heading 7 (Store room & Mech Rms) Aopk 1 MR/ML2051 1 %z pr FBB 179 Butts (FBB 168 @ a) 1 Closer 1 10" kickplate Heading 8 (Stair Doors) 1 ML2010 Passage Set 1 Closer 1 Magnetic Hold-Open Device 2898 1 %z pr FBB 199 Butts Heading 9 (Cage Enclosures) 1 DL 4011 Deadlock 1 %z pr 8" strap hinges 1 Ives 410 pull 01w END OF SECTION 087100 087100 DOOR HARDWARE Page 19 of 19 Project No. 01091 Proposed Renovations March 6, 2009 Park House Smith College, Northampton, MA Heading 2 (Student Access Exterior Doors) 1 Exit Device CD99NL 1 Cylinder 3080 1 Cylinder 100-118-A02 1 Closer 41 1 1 -696 1 %z pr FBB 223 Butts 1 set Weatherstripping 45041 DP 1 Sweep 18100 1 Threshold 271 AK 1 10" kickplate 1 Ives 447/448 Stop Heading 3 (Public Bathrooms) AAW 1 ML2010 Passage Set 1 Closer 1 %z pr FBB 199 Butts 1 Ives 449 stop w/holder 1 10" kickplate @ a Heading 4 (Single-User Accessible Bathroom) 1 MR/ML2030 Lockset 1 %z pr FBB 191 Butts 1 Ives 447/448 Stop 1 Closer 1 8" Kickplate 087100 DOOR HARDWARE Page 18 of 19 Project No. 01091 Proposed Renovations March 6, 2009 Park House Smith College, Northampton, MA "* B. Occupancy Adjustment: Approximately three months after date of Substantial Completion, Installer's Architectural Hardware Consultant shall examine and readjust, including adjusting operating forces, each item of door hardware as necessary to ensure function of doors, door hardware, and electrified door hardware. 3.5 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Clean adjacent surfaces soiled by door hardware installation. B. Clean operating items as necessary to restore proper function and finish. C. Provide final protection and maintain conditions that ensure that door hardware is without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion. 3.6 DOOR HARDWARE SETS Heading 1 (Main Entry) 1 Exit Device SD-LX-RX-EL 99NL 1 Power Supply PS 873K-2 AO 1 Power Transfer EPT 10-SP313 1 Door Position Switch 678-05 1 Cylinder 3080 1 Cylinder 100-1 14-A02 1 Door Operator 710 Duro 1 I/S Switch 59H Blue 1 0/S Switch 730B (momentary less cylinder) 1 Cylinder 1080 (US26D) 1 %z pr FBB 223 Butts 1 set Weatherstripping 45041 DP 1 Sweep 18100 1 Threshold 271 AK 1 10" kickplate 087100 DOOR HARDWARE Page 17 of 19 Project No. 01091 Proposed Renovations March 6, 2009 Park House Smith College, Northampton, MA 1 . Standard Steel Doors and Frames: DHI's "Recommended Locations for Architectural Hardware for Standard Steel Doors and Frames." 2. Wood Doors: DHI WDHS.3, "Recommended Locations for Architectural Hardware for Wood Flush Doors." B. install each door hardware item to comply with manufacturer's written instructions. Where cutting and fitting are required to install door hardware onto or into surfaces that are later to be painted or finished in another way, coordinate removal, storage, and reinstallation of surface protective trim units with finishing work specified in Division 09 Sections. Do not install surface-mounted items until finishes have been completed on substrates involved. 1 . Set units level, plumb, and true to line and location. Adjust and reinforce attachment substrates as necessary for proper installation and operation. 2. Drill and countersink units that are not factory prepared for anchorage fasteners. Space fasteners and anchors according to industry standards. C. Thresholds: Set thresholds for exterior and acoustical doors in full bed of sealant complying with requirements specified in Division 07 Section ".Joint Sealants." 3.4 ADJUSTING A. Initial Adjustment: Adjust and check each operating item of door hardware and each door to ensure proper operation or function of every unit. Replace units that cannot be adjusted to operate as intended. Adjust door control devices to compensate for final operation of heating and ventilating equipment and to comply with referenced accessibility requirements. 1 . Electric Strikes: Adjust horizontal and vertical alignment of keeper to properly engage lock bolt. 2. Door Closers: Unless otherwise required by authorities having jurisdiction, adjust sweep period so that, from an open position of 70 degrees, the door will take at least 3 seconds to move to a point 3 inches from the latch, measured to the leading edge of the door. 087100 DOOR HARDWARE Page 16 of 19 Project No. 01091 Proposed Renovations March 6, 2009 Park House Smith College, Northampton, MA B. Protect mechanical finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a strippable, temporary protective covering before shipping. C. Appearance of Finished Work: Variations in appearance of abutting or adjacent pieces are acceptable if they are within one-half of the range of approved Samples. Noticeable variations in the same piece are not acceptable. Variations in appearance of other components are acceptable if they are within the range of approved Samples and are assembled or installed to minimize contrast. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine doors and frames, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances, labeled fire door assembly construction, wall and floor construction, and other conditions affecting performance. B. Examine roughing-in for electrical power systems to verify actual locations of wiring connections before electrified door hardware installation. C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Steel Doors and Frames: Comply with DHI Al 15 Series. 1 . Surface-Applied Door Hardware: Drill and tap doors and frames according to ANSI A250.6. B. Wood Doors: Comply with DHI Al 15-W Series. . 3.3 INSTALLATION A. Mounting Heights: Mount door hardware units at heights indicated as follows "" unless otherwise indicated or required to comply with governing regulations. 087100 DOOR HARDWARE Page 15 of 19 Project No. 01091 Proposed Renovations March 6, 2009 Park House Smith College, Northampton, MA 2.15 FABRICATION A. Manufacturer's Nameplate: Do not provide products that have manufacturer's name or trade name displayed in a visible location except in conjunction with required fire-rated labels and as otherwise approved by Architect. 1 . Manufacturer's identification is permitted on rim of lock cylinders only. B. Base Metals: Produce door hardware units of base metal, fabricated by forming method indicated, using manufacturer's standard metal alloy, composition, temper, and hardness. Furnish metals of a quality equal to or greater than that of specified door hardware units and BHMA A156.18. Do not furnish manufacturer's standard materials or forming methods if different from specified standard. C. Fasteners: Provide door hardware manufactured to comply with published templates generally prepared for machine, wood, and sheet metal screws. Provide screws according to commercially recognized industry standards for application intended, except aluminum fasteners are not permitted. Provide Phillips flat-head screws with finished heads to match surface of door hardware, unless otherwise indicated. 1 . Concealed Fasteners: For door hardware units that are exposed when door is closed, except for units already specified with concealed fasteners. Do not use through bolts for installation where bolt head or nut on opposite face is exposed unless it is the only means of securely attaching the door hardware. Where through bolts are used on hollow door and frame construction, provide sleeves for each through bolt. 2. Steel Machine or Wood Screws: For the following fire-rated applications: a. Mortise hinges to doors. b. Strike plates to frames. C. Closers to doors and frames. 3. Fasteners for Wood Doors: Comply with requirements in DHI WDHS.2, "Recommended Fasteners for Wood Doors." 2.16 FINISHES A. Standard: BHMA Al 56.18, as indicated in door hardware sets. 087100 DOOR HARDWARE Page 14 of 19 Project No. 01091 Proposed Renovations March 6, 2009 Park House Smith College, Northampton, MA Avk having jurisdiction, for fire ratings indicated, based on testing according to NFPA 252. E. Gasketing Materials: ASTM D 2000 and AAMA 701 /702. F. Available Manufacturers: 1 . Hager Companies (HAG). 2. National Guard Products (NGP). 3. Pemko Manufacturing Co. (PEM). 4. Reese Enterprises (RE). 5. Zero International (ZRO). 2.14 THRESHOLDS A. Standard: BHMA A156.21 . B. Accessibility Requirements: Where thresholds are indicated to comply with accessibility requirements, comply with the U.S. Architectural & ,ate Transportation Barriers Compliance Board's "Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA), Accessibility Guidelines for Buildings and Facilities (ADAAG)." 1 . Bevel raised thresholds with a slope of not more than 1 :2. Provide thresholds not more than 1 /2 inch high. C. Thresholds for Means of Egress Doors: Comply with NFPA 101 . Maximum 1 /2 inch high. D. Available Manufacturers: 1 . Hager Companies (HAG). 2. National Guard Products (NGP). 3. Pemko Manufacturing Co. (PEM). 4. Reese Enterprises (RE). 5. Zero International (ZRO). 087100 DOOR HARDWARE Page 13 of 19 Project No. 01091 Proposed Renovations March 6, 2009 Park House Smith College, Northampton, MA d. Rockwood Manufacturing Company (RM). 2.12 STOPS AND HOLDERS A. Stops and Bumpers: BHMA Al 56.16. 1 . Provide floor stops for doors unless wall or other type stops are scheduled or indicated. Do not mount floor stops where they will impede traffic. Where floor or wall stops are not appropriate, provide overhead holders. B. Available Manufacturers: 1 . Hager Companies (HAG). 2. Hiawatha, Inc. (HIA). 3. IVES Hardware; an Ingersoll-Rand Company (IVS). 4. Rockwood Manufacturing Company (RM). 2.13 DOOR GASKETING A. Standard: BHMA Al 56.22. B. General: Provide continuous weather-strip gasketing on exterior doors and provide smoke, light, or sound gasketing on interior doors where indicated or scheduled. Provide noncorrosive fasteners for exterior applications and elsewhere as indicated. 1 . Perimeter Gasketing: Apply to head and jamb, forming seal between door and frame. 2. Meeting Stile Gasketing: Fasten to meeting stiles, forming seal when doors are closed. 3. Door Bottoms: Apply to bottom of door, forming seal with threshold when door is closed. C. Air Leakage: Not to exceed 0.50 cfm per foot of crack length for gasketing other than for smoke control, as tested according to ASTM E 283. D. Fire-Labeled Gasketing: Assemblies complying with NFPA 80 that are listed and labeled by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities 087100 DOOR HARDWARE Page 12 of 19 Project No. 01091 Proposed Renovations March 6, 2009 Park House Smith College, Northampton, MA B. Door Closers for Means of Egress Doors: Comply with NFPA 101 . Door closers shall not require more than 30 Ibf to set door in motion and not more than 15 Ibf to open door to minimum required width. C. Power-Assist Closers: As specified in Division 08 Section "Automatic Door Operators" for access doors for people with disabilities or where listed in the door hardware sets. D. Size of Units: Unless otherwise indicated, comply with manufacturer's written recommendations for size of door closers depending on size of door, exposure to weather, and anticipated frequency of use. Provide factory-sized closers, adjustable to meet field conditions and requirements for opening force. E. Surface Closers: BHMA Al 56.4, Grade 1 unless Grade 2 is indicated. Provide type of arm required for closer to be located on non-public side of door, unless otherwise indicated. 1 . Manufacturers: a. LCN Closers; an Ingersoll-Rand Company (LCN). 1) General Use: 4010 2) Barrier-free: 4030 3) Exterior Doors: 4020 2.11 PROTECTIVE TRIM UNITS A. Size: 1 -1 /2 inches less than door width on push side and 1 /2 inch less than door width on pull side, by height specified in door hardware sets. B. Fasteners: Manufacturer's standard machine or self-tapping screws. C. Metal Protective Trim Units: BHMA Al 56.6; beveled top and 2 sides; fabricated from the following material: 1 . Material: 0.050-inch- thick bronze. 2. Manufacturers: a. Hager Companies (HAG). b. Hiawatha, Inc. (HIA). C. IVES Hardware; an Ingersoll-Rand Company (IVS). 087100 DOOR HARDWARE Page 1 1 of 19 Project No. 01 091 Proposed Renovations March 6, 2009 Park House Smith College, Northampton, MA 1 . Existing System: Master key or grand master key locks to Owner's master ring existing system. 2. Stamping: Permanently inscribe each key with a visual key control number that matches the Owner's registration number and include the following notation: a. Notation: Do Not Duplicate. 3. Quantity: In addition to one extra key blank for each lock, provide the following: a. Cylinder Change Keys: Five. b. Master Keys: Six. C. Grand Master Keys: Six. d. Great-Grand Master Keys: Six. 2.9 ELECTRIC STRIKES A. Standard: BHMA Al 56.3 1 , Grade 1 unless Grade 2 is indicated. B. Manufacturers: 1 . HES, Inc.; an ASSA ABLOY Group company (HES). 2.10 CLOSERS A. Accessibility Requirements: Where handles, pulls, latches, locks, and other operating devices are indicated to comply with accessibility requirements, comply with the U.S. Architectural & Transportation Barriers Compliance Board's "Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA), Accessibility Guidelines for Buildings and Facilities (ADAAG)." 1 . Comply with the following maximum opening-force requirements: a. Interior, Non-Fire-Rated Hinged Doors: 5 lbf applied perpendicular to door. b. Fire Doors: Minimum opening force allowable by authorities having jurisdiction. 087100 DOOR HARDWARE Page 10 of 19 Project No. 01091 Proposed Renovations March 6, 2009 Park House Smith College, Northampton, MA F. Manufacturers: 1 . Corbin Russwin Architectural Hardware; an ASSA ABLOY Group company (CR). 2. Von Duprin; an Ingersoll-Rand Company (VD). 2.7 LOCK CYLINDERS A. Standard Lock Cylinders: BHMA Al 56.5, Grade 1 unless Grade 1 A is indicated. B. Cylinders: Manufacturer's standard tumbler type, constructed from brass or bronze, stainless steel, or nickel silver, and complying with the following: 1 . Number of Pins: Seven. C. Permanent Cores: Manufacturer's standard; finish face to match lockset; complying with the following: 1 . Removable Cores: Core insert, removable by use of a special key; for use only with core manufacturer's cylinder and door hardware. D. Construction Keying: Comply with the following: 1 . Construction Master Keys: Provide cylinders with feature that permits voiding of construction keys without cylinder removal. Provide 10 construction master keys. 2. Construction Cores: Provide construction cores that are replaceable by permanent cores. Provide 10 construction master keys. a. Replace construction cores with permanent cores as directed by Owner. E. Manufacturer: Same manufacturer as for locks and latches. 2.8 KEYING A. Keying System: Factory registered, complying with guidelines in BHMA Al 56.28, Appendix A. Incorporate decisions made in keying conference, and as follows: 087100 DOOR HARDWARE Page 9 of 19 Project No. 01091 Proposed Renovations March 6, 2009 Park House Smith College, Northampton, MA 3. Flat-Lip Strikes: For locks with three-piece antifriction latchbolts, as recommended by manufacturer. 4. Extra-Long-Lip Strikes: For locks used on frames with applied wood casing trim. 2.5 MECHANICAL LOCKS AND LATCHES A. Mortise Locks: Stamped steel case with steel or brass parts; BHMA Al 56.13. 1 . Manufacturers: a. Corbin Russwin Architectural Hardware; an ASSA ABLOY Group company (CR). 2.6 EXIT DEVICES A. Exit Devices: BHMA Al 56.3, Grade 1 . B. Accessibility Requirements: Where handles, pulls, latches, locks, and other operating devices are indicated to comply with accessibility requirements, .. comply with the U.S. Architectural & Transportation Barriers Compliance Board's "Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA), Accessibility Guidelines for Buildings and Facilities (ADAAG)." 1 . Provide operating devices that do not require tight grasping, pinching, or twisting of the wrist and that operate with a force of not more than 5 Ibf. C. Exit Devices for Means of Egress Doors: Comply with NFPA 101 . Exit devices shall not require more than 15 Ibf to release the latch. Locks shall not require use of a key, tool, or special knowledge for operation. D. Panic Exit Devices: Listed and labeled by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, for panic protection, based on testing according to UL 305. E. Outside Trim: Lever with cylinder; material and finish to match locksets, unless otherwise indicated. 1 . Match design for locksets and latchsets, unless otherwise indicated. 087100 DOOR HARDWARE Page 8 of 19 Project No. 01091 Proposed Renovations March 6, 2009 Park House Smith College, Northampton, MA C. Available Manufacturers: 1 . Stanley Commercial Hardware; Div. of The Stanley Works (STH). 2.4 LOCKS AND LATCHES, GENERAL A. Accessibility Requirements: Where indicated to comply with accessibility requirements, comply with the U.S. Architectural & Transportation Barriers Compliance Board's "Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA), Accessibility Guidelines for Buildings and Facilities (ADAAG)." 1 . Provide operating devices that do not require tight grasping, pinching, or twisting of the wrist and that operate with a force of not more than 5 I bf. B. Latches and Locks for Means of Egress Doors: Comply with NFPA 101 . Latches shall not require more than 15 Ibf to release the latch. Locks shah not require use of a key, tool, or special knowledge for operation. C. Electrified Locking Devices: BHMA Al 56.25. OOW D. Lock Trim: 1 . Levers: a. Newport NSA, except NSM where indicated 2. Dummy Trim: Match lever lock trim and escutcheons. E. Lock Throw: Comply with testing requirements for length of bolts required for labeled fire doors, and as follows: 1 . Mortise Locks: Minimum 3/4-inch latchbolt throw. 2. Deadbolts: Minimum 1-inch bolt throw. F. Backset: 2-3/4 inches, unless otherwise indicated. G. Strikes: Manufacturer's standard strike with strike box for each latchbolt or lock bolt, with curved lip extended to protect frame, finished to match door hardware set, and as follows: 1 . Strikes for Mortise Locks and Latches: BHMA Al 56.13. 2. Strikes for Auxiliary Deadlocks: BHMA Al 56.5. 087100 DOOR HARDWARE Page 7 of 19 Project No. 01091 Proposed Renovations March 6, 2009 Park House Smith College, Northampton, MA 2.2 HINGES, GENERAL A. Quantity: Provide the following, unless otherwise indicated: 1 . Two Hinges: For doors with heights up to 60 inches. 2. Three Hinges: For doors with heights 61 to 90 inches. B. Template Requirements: Except for hinges and pivots to be installed entirely (both leaves) into wood doors and frames, provide only template-produced units. C. Hinge Weight: Unless otherwise indicated, provide the following: 1 . Entrance Doors: Heavy-weight hinges. 2. Doors with Closers: Antifriction-bearing hinges. 3. Interior Doors: Standard-weight hinges. D. Hinge Options: Where indicated in door hardware sets or on Drawings: 1 . Nonremovable Pins: Provide set screw in hinge barrel that, when tightened into a groove in hinge pin, prevents removal of pin while door is closed; for outswinging exterior doors and outswinging corridor '" doors with locks. 2. Corners: Square. E. Fasteners: Comply with the following: 1 . Machine Screws: For metal doors and frames. Install into drilled and tapped holes. 2. Wood Screws: For wood doors and frames. 3. Threaded-to-the-Head Wood Screws: For fire-rated wood doors. 4. Screws: Phillips flat-head; machine screws (drilled and tapped holes) for metal doors wood screws for wood doors and frames. Finish screw heads to match surface of hinges. 2.3 HINGES A. Butts and Hinges: BHMA A156.1 . B. Template Hinge Dimensions: BHMA A156.7. 087100 DOOR HARDWARE Page 6 of 19 Project No. 01091 Proposed Renovations March 6, 2009 Park House Smith College, Northampton, MA C. Existing Openings: Where new hardware components are scheduled for application to existing construction or where modifications to existing door hardware are required, field verify existing conditions and coordinate installation of door hardware to suit opening conditions and to provide for proper operation. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 SCHEDULED DOOR HARDWARE A. General: Provide door hardware for each door to comply with requirements in this Section and door hardware sets indicated in door and frame schedule and door hardware sets indicated in Part 3 "Door Hardware Sets" Article. 1 . Door Hardware Sets: Provide quantity, item, size, finish or color indicated, and named manufacturers' products. 2. Sequence of Operation: Provide electrified door hardware function, sequence of operation, and interface with other building control systems indicated. B. Designations: Requirements for design, grade, function, finish, size, and other distinctive qualities of each type of door hardware are indicated in Part 3 "Door Hardware Sets" Article. Products are identified by using door hardware designations, as follows: 1 . Named Manufacturers' Products: Manufacturer and product designation are listed for each door hardware type required for the purpose of establishing minimum requirements. Manufacturers' names are abbreviated in Part 3 "Door Hardware Sets" Article. 2. References to BHMA Standards: Provide products complying with these standards and requirements for description, quality, and function. C. In other Part 2 articles where titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply to product selection: 1 . Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the manufacturers specified. 087100 DOOR HARDWARE Page 5 of 19 loll Project No. 01091 Proposed Renovations March 6, 2009 Park House Smith College, Northampton, MA D. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements in Division 01 Section "Project Management and Coordination." Review methods and procedures related to electrified door hardware including, but not limited to, the following: 1 . Inspect and discuss electrical roughing-in and other preparatory work performed by other trades. 2. Review and finalize construction schedule and verify availability of materials, Installer's personnel, equipment, and facilities needed to make progress and avoid delays. 1 .5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Inventory door hardware on receipt and provide secure lock-up for door hardware delivered to Project site. B. Tag each item or package separately with identification related to the final door hardware sets, and include basic installation instructions, templates, and necessary fasteners with each item or package. C. Deliver keys to manufacturer of key control system for subsequent delivery to Owner. D. Deliver keys and permanent cores to Owner by registered mail or overnight package service. 1 . Owner's Representative: Don Saltmarsh. 1 .6 COORDINATION A. Templates: Distribute door hardware templates for doors, frames, and other work specified to be factory prepared for installing door hardware. Check Shop Drawings of other work to confirm that adequate provisions are made for locating and installing door hardware to comply with indicated requirements. B. Electrical System Roughing-in: Coordinate layout and installation of electrified door hardware with connections to power supplies access control system. 087100 DOOR HARDWARE Page 4 of 19 Project No. 01091 Proposed Renovations March 6, 2009 Park House Smith College, Northampton, MA 6) Explanation of abbreviations, symbols, and codes contained in schedule. 7) Mounting locations for door hardware. 8) Door and frame sizes and materials. 9) Description of each electrified door hardware function, including location, sequence of operation, and interface with other building control systems. 10) List of related door devices specified in other Sections for each door and frame. C. Submittal Sequence: Submit the final door hardware sets at earliest possible date, particularly where approval of the door hardware sets must precede fabrication of other work that is critical in Project construction schedule. Include Product Data., Samples, Shop Drawings of other work affected by door hardware, and other information essential to the coordinated review of the door hardware sets. 1 .4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: An employer of workers trained and approved by lock manufacturer. 1 . Installer's responsibilities include supplying and installing door hardware and providing a qualified Architectural Hardware Consultant available during the course of the Work to consult with Contractor, Architect, and Owner about door hardware and keying. 2. Scheduling Responsibility: Preparation of door hardware and keying schedules. B. Source Limitations: Obtain each type and variety of door hardware from a single manufacturer, unless otherwise indicated. C. Fire-Rated Door Assemblies: Assemblies complying with NFPA 80 that are listed and labeled by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable -to authorities having jurisdiction, for fire ratings indicated, based on testing according to NFPA 252. 087100 DOOR HARDWARE Page 3 of 19 Project No. 01091 Proposed Renovations March 6, 2009 Park House Smith College, Northampton, MA a. System schematic. b. Point-to-point wiring diagram. C. Riser diagram. d. Elevation of each door. 2. Detail interface between electrified door hardware and access control system. C. Samples for Verification: For exposed door hardware of each type, in specified finish, full size. Tag with full description for coordination with the door hardware sets. Submit Samples before, or concurrent with, submission of the final door hardware sets. 1 . Samples will be returned to Contractor. Units that are acceptable and remain undamaged through submittal and review process may, after final check of operation, be incorporated into the Work, within limitations of keying requirements. D. Other Action Submittals: 1 . Door Hardware Sets: Prepared by or under the supervision of Architectural Hardware Consultant, detailing fabrication and assembly of door hardware, as well as procedures and diagrams. Coordinate the final door hardware sets with doors, frames, and related work to ensure proper size, thickness, hand, function, and finish of door hardware. a. Format: Use same scheduling sequence and format and use same door numbers as in the Contract Documents. b. Content: Include the following information: 1) Identification number, location, hand, fire rating, and material of each door and frame. 2) Type, style, function, size, quantity, and finish of each door hardware item. 3) Complete designations of every item required for each door or opening including name and manufacturer. 4) Fastenings and other pertinent information. 5) Location of each door hardware set, cross-referenced to Drawings, both on floor plans and in door and frame schedule. 087100 DOOR HARDWARE Page 2 of 19 Project No. 01091 Proposed Renovations March 6, 2009 Park House Smith College, Northampton, MA SECTION 087100 - DOOR HARDWARE PART 1 - GENERAL 1 .1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1 .2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1 . Commercial door hardware for the following: a. Swinging doors. 2. Cylinders for doors specified in other Sections. 3. Electrified door hardware. 4. Power assisted door openers/ B. Related Sections include the following: 1 . Division 08 Section "Hollow Metal Doors and Frames" for door silencers provided as part of hollow-metal frames. 2. Division 26 Sections for connections to electrical power system and for low-voltage wiring work. 1 .3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Include construction and installation details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes. B. Shop Drawings: Details of electrified door hardware, indicating the following: 1 . Wiring Diagrams: Power, signal, and control wiring. Include the 00%, following: 087100 DOOR HARDWARE Page 1 of 19 Project No. 01091 Proposed Renovations March 6, 2009 Park House Smith College, Northampton, MA D. Remove and replace glass that has been broken, chipped, cracked, abraded, or damaged during construction period. E. Protect window surfaces from contact with contaminating substances resulting from construction operations. In addition, monitor window surfaces adjacent to and below exterior concrete and masonry surfaces during construction for presence of dirt, scum, alkaline deposits, stains, or other contaminants. If contaminating substances do contact window surfaces, remove contaminants immediately according to manufacturer's written recommendations. END OF SECTION 085200 085200 WOOD WINDOWS Page 13 of 13 Project No. 01091 Proposed Renovations March 6, 2009 Park House Smith College, Northampton, MA 3.2 INSTALLATION -Oak. A. Comply with Drawings, Shop Drawings, and manufacturer's written instructions for installing windows, hardware, accessories, and other components. B. Fill sash weight pockets with loose fill insulation for full height of pocket. Drill additional holes to ensure cavity is completely filled. C. Install windows level, plumb, square, true to line, without distortion or impeding thermal movement, anchored securely in place to structural support, and in proper relation to wall flashing and other adjacent construction. D. Set sill members in bed of sealant or with gaskets, as indicated, for weathertight construction. E. Fill voids around frame with tightly packed loose fill insulation. Do not distort frame. F. Install wood trim around perimeter of window that does not project beyond existing casings. Scribe trim pieces to jamb, head and sill. Apply interior bed of paintable latex caulking to perimeter of trim. G. Separate aluminum trim and other corrodible surfaces from sources of corrosion or electrolytic action at points of contact with other materials. 3.3 ADJUSTING, CLEANING, AND PROTECTION A. Adjust operating sashes and ventilators, screens, hardware, and accessories for a tight fit at contact points and weather stripping for smooth operation and weathertight closure. Lubricate hardware and moving parts. B. Clean exposed surfaces immediately after installing windows. Avoid damaging protective coatings and finishes. Remove excess sealants, glazing materials, dirt, and other substances. C. Clean factory-glazed glass immediately after installing windows. Comply with manufacturer's written recommendations for final cleaning and maintenance. Remove nonpermanent labels, and clean surfaces. 085200 WOOD WINDOWS Page 12 of 13 Project No. 01091 Proposed Renovations March 6, 2009 Park House Smith College, Northampton, MA "* E. Factory-Glazed Fabrication: Glaze wood windows in the factory where practical and possible for applications indicated. Comply with requirements in AAMA/WDMA 101 /I.S.2/NAFS. F. Complete fabrication, assembly, finishing, hardware application, and other work in the factory to greatest extent possible. Disassemble components only as necessary for shipment and installation. Allow for scribing, trimming, and fitting at Project site. 2.10 WOOD FINISHES A. Factory-Primed Interiors: Provide manufacturer's standard factory-prime coat complying with WDMA T.M. 11 on exposed wood surfaces. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine openings, substrates structural support, anchorage, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of work. Verify rough opening dimensions, levelness of sill plate, and operational clearances. Examine wall flashings, vapor retarders, water and weather barriers, and other built-in components to ensure a coordinated, weathertight window installation. 1 . Masonry Openings: Visibly dry and free of excess mortar, sand, and other construction debris. 2. Wood Frame Openings: Dry, clean, sound, free of voids, and without offsets at joints. Ensure that nail heads are driven flush with surfaces in opening and within 3 inches of opening. 3. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 085200 WOOD WINDOWS Page 1 1 of 13 Project No. 01091 Proposed Renovations March 6, 2009 Park House Smith College, Northampton, MA 2.7 STORM PANELS A. Provide interior installed aluminum framed storm panels for full size of the opening complete with gaskets and tamper resistant hardware for each opening. 1 . Finish: Dark Bronze. 2.8 ACCESSORIES A. Simulated Divided Lites (SDL): Provide permanent dividers in designs indicated for each sash lite, with dividers on both exterior and interior with glazing bar located between glazing liter in the airspace. 1 . Material: Match exterior and interior frame materials. 2. Design: Match existing. 2.9 FABRICATION A. Fabricate wood windows in sizes indicated. Include a complete system for Oa assembling components and anchoring windows. B. Weather Stripping: Provide full-perimeter weather stripping for each operable sash and ventilator, unless otherwise indicated. 1 . Double-Hung Windows: Provide weather stripping only at horizontal rails of operable sash. C. Factory machine windows for openings and for hardware that is not surface applied. D. Mullions: Provide mullions and cover plates as shown, matching window units, complete with anchors for support to structure and installation of window units. Allow for erection tolerances and provide for movement of window units due to thermal expansion and building deflections, as indicated. Provide mullions and cover plates capable of withstanding design loads of window units. 085200 WOOD WINDOWS Page 10 of 13 Project No. 01091 Proposed Renovations March 6, 2009 Park House Smith College, Northampton, MA k 1 . Operation Function: All ventilators move simultaneously and securely close at both jambs without using additional manually controlled locking devices. D. Four- or Six-Bar Friction Hinges: Comply with AAMA 904. 1 . Locking mechanism and handles for manual operation. 2. Friction Shoes: Provide friction shoes of nylon or other nonabrasive, nonstaining, noncorrosive, durable material. 2.6 INSECT SCREENS A. General: Design windows and hardware to accommodate screens in a tight- fitting, removable arrangement, with a minimum of exposed fasteners and latches. Fabricate insect screens to fully integrate with window frame. Locate screens on inside or outside of window depending on operation and provide for each operable exterior sash or ventilator. 1 . Aluminum Tubular Frame Screens: Comply with SMA 1004, "Specifications for Aluminum Tubular Frame Screens for Windows," Architectural C-24 class. B. Aluminum Insect Screen Frames: Manufacturer's standard aluminum alloy complying with SMA 1004. Fabricate frames with mitered or coped joints or corner extrusions, concealed fasteners, and removable PVC spline/anchor concealing edge of frame. 1 . Aluminum Tubular Framing Sections and Cross Braces: Roll formed from aluminum sheet with minimum wall thickness as required for class indicated. 2. Finish: Baked-on organic coating in manufacturer's standard color. C. Glass-Fiber Mesh Fabric: 18-by-14 or 18-by-16 mesh of PVC-coated, glass- fiber threads; woven and fused to form a fabric mesh resistant to corrosion, shrinkage, stretch, impact damage, and weather deterioration; in the following color. Comply with ASTM D 3656. 1 . Mesh Color: Charcoal gray. 085200 WOOD WINDOWS Page 9 of 13 Project No. 01 091 Proposed Renovations March 6, 2009 Park House Smith College, Northampton, MA 1 . Test Pressure: 15 percent of positive design pressure, but not less than 2.86 Ibf/sq. ft. or more than 15 Ibf/sq. ft.. G. Operating Force and Auxiliary (Durability) Tests: Comply with AAMA/WDMA 101 /I.S.2/NAFS for operating window types indicated. 2.4 GLAZING A. Glass and Glazing Materials: B. Glass: Clear, insulating-glass units, argon gas filled, with low-E coating pyrolytic on second surface or sputtered on second or third surface. 1 . Special Glazing: Provide units with "white" translucent glazing where indicated. 2. Provide tempered glass where indicated or where require by location by Massachusetts State Building Code, Seventh Edition. C. Glazing System: Manufacturer's standard factory-glazing system that produces weathertight seal. Awk 2.5 HARDWARE A. General: Provide manufacturer's standard hardware fabricated from aluminum, stainless steel, carbon steel complying with AAMA 907, or other corrosion-resistant material compatible with wood and aluminum cladding; designed to smoothly operate, tightly close, and securely lock wood windows, and sized to accommodate sash or ventilator weight and dimensions. Do not use aluminum in frictional contact with other metals. Where exposed, provide extruded, cast, or wrought aluminum. B. Counterbalancing Mechanism: Comply with AAMA 902. 1 . Sash-Balance Type: Concealed type, of size and capacity to hold sash stationary at any open position. C. Gear-Type Rotary Operators: Comply with AAMA 901 when tested according to ASTM E 405, Method A. 085200 WOOD WINDOWS Page 8 of 13 Project No. 01091 Proposed Renovations March 6, 2009 Park House Smith College, Northampton, MA 1 . Weather-Stripping Material: Manufacturer's standard system and materials complying with AAMA/WDMA 101 /I.S.2/NAFS. I. Sliding-Type Weather Stripping: Provide woven-pile weather stripping of wool, polypropylene, or nylon pile and resin-impregnated backing fabric. Comply with AAMA 701 /702. 1 . Weather Seals: Provide weather stripping with integral barrier fin or fins of semirigid, polypropylene sheet or polypropylene-coated material. Comply with AAMA 701 /702. J. Replaceable Weather Seals: Comply with AAMA 701 /702. 2.3 WINDOWS A. Window Type: As indicated on Drawings. B. AAMA/WDMA Performance Requirements: Provide wood windows of performance indicated that comply with AAMA/WDMA 101 /I.S.2/NAFS unless more stringent performance requirements are indicated. 1 . Performance Class and Grade: HC 30. C. Thermal Transmittance: Provide wood windows with a whole-window, U- factor maximum indicated at 15-mph exterior wind velocity and winter condition temperatures when tested according to AAMA 1503. 1 . U-Factor: 0.35 Btu/sq. ft. x h x deg F or less. D. Solar Heat-Gain Coefficient (SHGC): Provide wood windows with a whole- window SHGC maximum of 0.30, determined according to NFRC 200 procedures. E. Air Infiltration: Maximum rate not more than indicated when tested according to AAMA/WDMA 101 /I.S.2/NAFS, Air Infiltration Test. 1 . Maximum Rate: 0.3 cfm/sq. ft. of area at an inward test pressure of 6.24 Ibf/sq. ft.. F. Water Resistance: No water leakage as defined in AAMA/WDMA referenced test methods at a water test pressure equaling that indicated, when tested according to AAMA/WDMA 101 /I.S.2/NAFS, Water Resistance Test. 085200 WOOD WINDOWS Page 7 of 13 Project No. 01091 Proposed Renovations March 6, 2009 Park House Smith College, Northampton, MA 1 . General: Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for recommendations for applying and designating finishes. 2. Finish designations prefixed by AA comply with the system established by the Aluminum Association for designating aluminum finishes. 3. Baked-Enamel Finish for Extrusions and Sheet: Manufacturer's standard baked enamel complying with AAMA 2603 and paint manufacturer's written specifications for cleaning, conversion coating, and painting. a. Color: Provide separate color for sash and frame as selected by Architect from manufacturer's standard colors. C. Wood Trim and Glazing Stops: Material and finish to match frame members. D. Clad Trim and Glazing Stops: Hollow extrusions and finish to match clad frame members. E. Fasteners: Aluminum, nonmagnetic stainless steel, epoxy adhesive, or other materials warranted by manufacturer to be noncorrosive and compatible with wood window members, cladding, trim, hardware, anchors, and other components. 1 . Exposed Fasteners: Unless unavoidable for applying hardware, do not use exposed fasteners. For application of hardware, use fasteners that match finish of member or hardware being fastened, as appropriate. F. Anchors, Clips, and Accessories: Aluminum, nonmagnetic stainless steel, or zinc-coated steel or iron complying with ASTM B 633 for SC 3 severe service conditions; provide sufficient strength to withstand design pressure indicated. G. Reinforcing Members: Aluminum, or nonmagnetic stainless steel, or nickel/chrome-plated steel complying with ASTM B 456 for Type SC 3 severe service conditions, or zinc-coated steel or iron complying with ASTM B 633 for SC 3 severe service conditions; provide sufficient strength to withstand design pressure indicated. H. Compression-Type Weather Stripping: Provide compressible weather stripping designed for permanently resilient sealing under bumper or wiper action and for complete concealment when wood window is closed. 085200 WOOD WINDOWS Page 6 of 13 Project No. 01091 Proposed Renovations March 6, 2009 Park House Smith College, Northampton, MA d. Deterioration of wood, metals, vinyl, other materials, and finishes beyond normal weathering. e. Failure of insulating glass. 2. Warranty Period: a. Window: Two years from date of Substantial Completion. b. Glazing: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion. C. Metal Finish: Ten years from date of Substantial Completion. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1 . Aluminum-Clad Wood Windows: low a. EAGLE Window & Door, Inc.; an American Architectural Products Corporation Company. 2.2 MATERIALS A. Wood: Clear ponderosa pine or another suitable fine-grained lumber; kiln dried to a moisture content of 6 to 12 percent at time of fabrication; free of visible finger joints, blue stain, knots, pitch pockets, and surface checks larger than 1 /32 inch deep by 2 inches wide; water-repellent preservative treated. B. Aluminum Extrusions for Cladding: Manufacturer's standard extruded- aluminum cladding, mechanically bonded to exterior exposed wood members. Provide aluminum alloy and temper recommended by wood window manufacturer for strength, corrosion resistance, and application of required finish, but not less than 22,000-psi ultimate tensile strength, and not less than 16,000-psi minimum yield strength. 085200 WOOD WINDOWS Page 5 of' 13 Project No. 01091 Proposed Renovations March 6, 2009 Park House Smith College, Northampton, MA E. Fenestration Standard: Comply with AAMA/WDMA 101 /I.S.2/NAFS, "North American Fenestration Standard Voluntary Performance Specification for Windows, Skylights and Glass Doors," for definitions and minimum standards of performance, materials, components, accessories, and fabrication unless more stringent requirements are indicated. 1 . Provide WDMA-certified wood windows with an attached label. F. Glazing Publications: Comply with published recommendations of glass manufacturers and with GANA's "Glazing Manual" unless more stringent requirements are indicated. G. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements in Division 01 Section "Project Management and Coordination." 1 .7 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Field Measurements: Verify wood window openings by field measurements before fabrication and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings. 1 . Established Dimensions: Where field measurements cannot be made without delaying the Work, establish opening dimensions and proceed with fabricating wood windows without field measurements. Coordinate wall construction to ensure that actual opening dimensions correspond to established dimensions. 1 .8 WARRANTY A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace wood windows that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 1 . Failures include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Failure to meet performance requirements. b. Structural failures including excessive deflection, water leakage, air infiltration, or condensation. C. Faulty operation of movable sash and hardware. 085200 WOOD WINDOWS Page 4 of 13 Project No. 01091 Proposed Renovations March 6, 2009 Park House Smith College, Northampton, MA 4. Interior trim modifications necessary for window replacement. 5. Installation details for new windows. C. Samples for Initial Selection: For units with factory-applied color finishes. 1 . Include similar Samples of hardware and accessories involving color selection. D. Product Schedule: For wood windows. Use same designations indicated on Drawings. E. Maintenance Data: For operable window sash operating hardware weather stripping and finishes to include in maintenance manuals. F. Warranty: Special warranty specified in this Section. 1 .6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: An installer acceptable to wood window manufacturer for installation of units required for this Project. B. Manufacturer Qualifications: A manufacturer capable of fabricating wood windows that meet or exceed performance requirements indicated and of documenting this performance by inclusion in lists and by labels, test reports, and calculations. C. Source Limitations: Obtain wood windows through one source from a single manufacturer. D. Product Options: Existing conditions establish requirements for wood windows' aesthetic effects. Aesthetic effects are indicated by dimensions, arrangements, alignment, and profiles of components and assemblies as they relate to sightlines, to one another, and to adjoining construction. Performance characteristics are indicated by criteria in the specifications and are subject to verification by one or more methods including preconstruction testing, field testing, and in-service performance. 1 . Do not modify intended aesthetic effects, as judged solely by Architect, except with Architect's approval. If modifications are proposed, submit comprehensive explanatory data to Architect for review. 085200 WOOD WINDOWS Page 3 of 13 Project No. 01091 Proposed Renovations March 6, 2009 Park House Smith College, Northampton, MA B. Performance grade number according to AAMA/WDMA 101 /I.S.2/NAFS: 1 . Design pressure number in pounds force per square foot used to determine the structural test pressure and water test pressure. C. Structural Test Pressure: For uniform load structural test, is equivalent to 150 percent of the design pressure. D. Minimum Test Size: Smallest size permitted for performance class (gateway test size). Products must be tested at minimum test size or at a size larger than minimum test size to comply with requirements for performance class. 1 .4 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. General: Provide wood windows capable of complying with performance requirements indicated, based on testing manufacturer's windows that are representative of those specified, and that are of test size indicated below: 1 . Size required by AAMA/WDMA 101 /I.S.2/NAFS for gateway performance for both gateway performance and optional performance grade. *. B. Structural Performance: Provide wood windows capable of withstanding the effects of the following loads based on testing units representative of those indicated for Project that pass AAMA/WDMA 101 /I.S.2/NAFS, Uniform Load Structural Test: 1 .5 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Include construction details, material descriptions, fabrication methods, dimensions of individual components and profiles, hardware, finishes, and operating instructions for each type of wood window indicated. B. Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, sections, details, hardware, attachments to other work, operational clearances, installation details, and the following: 1 . Mullion details, including reinforcement and stiffeners. 2. joinery details. 3. Expansion provisions. 085200 WOOD WINDOWS Page 2 of 13 Project No. 01091 Proposed Renovations March 6, 2009 Park House Smith College, Northampton, MA SECTION 085200 - WOOD WINDOWS PART 1 - GENERAL 1 .1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. B. Allowances: See Division 01 Section "Allowances" for values to be carried by the Contractor for delivery and installation that applies to this section. C. Modification to existing openings, relocation of existing frames and preparation of new openings is specified in Division 06 Section "Exterior Finish Carpentry." D. Field finishing of interiors of Wood and Aluminum Clad unit and exterior of Wood Units is specified in Division 09 Sections. 1 .2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes fixed and operable wood-framed windows of the following type: 1 . Aluminum clad wood windows. 2. Wood Windows 3. Aluminum Windows 1 .3 DEFINITIONS A. Performance class designations according to AAMA/WDMA 101 /I.S.2/NAFS: 1 . AW: Architectural. 2. HC: Heavy Commercial. 3. C: Commercial. 4. LC: Light Commercial. 5. R: Residential. 085200 WOOD WINDOWS Page 1 of 13 Project No. 01091 Proposed Renovations March 6, 2009 Park House Smith College, Northampton, MA 3.3 ADJUSTING AND PROTECTING Awk A. Operation: Rehang or replace doors that do not swing or operate freely. END OF SECTION 081433 081433 STILE AND RAIL WOOD DOORS Page 8 of 8 Project No. 01091 Proposed Renovations March 6, 2009 Park House Smith College, Northampton, MA 2. Reject doors with defects. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Install fire-rated wood door frames level, plumb, true, and aligned with adjacent materials. Use concealed shims where necessary for alignment. 1 . Countersink fasteners, fill surface flush, and sand smooth. B. Hardware: For installation, see Division 08 Section "Door Hardware." C. Install wood doors to comply with manufacturer's written instructions and with referenced quality standard, and as indicated. 1 . Install fire-rated doors in corresponding fire-rated frames according to NFPA 80. ' D. job-Fitted Doors: Align and fit doors in frames with uniform clearances and bevels as indicated below; do not trim stiles and rails in excess of limits set by manufacturer or permitted with fire-rated doors. Machine doors for hardware. Seal cut surfaces after fitting and machining. 1 . Clearances: Provide 1 /8 inch at heads, jambs, and between pairs of doors. Provide 1 /8 inch from bottom of door to top of decorative floor finish or covering. Where threshold is shown or scheduled, provide 1 /4 inch from bottom of door to top of threshold. a. Comply with NFPA 80 for fire-rated doors. 2. Bevel non-fire-rated doors 1 /8 inch in 2 inches at lock and hinge edges. 3. Bevel fire-rated doors 1 /8 inch in 2 inches on lock edge; trim stiles and rails only to extent permitted by labeling agency. E. Factory-Fitted Doors: Align in frames for uniform clearance at each edge. 081433 STILE AND RAIL WOOD DOORS Page 7 of 8 Project No. 01091 Proposed Renovations March 6, 2009 Park House Smith College, Northampton, MA 2.5 FABRICATION A. Fabricate stile and rail wood doors in sizes indicated for Project-site fitting. B. Factory fit doors to suit frame-opening sizes indicated, with the following uniform clearances and bevels, unless otherwise indicated: 1 . Clearances: Provide 1 /8 inch at heads, jambs, and between pairs of doors. Provide 112 inch from bottom of door to top of decorative floor finish or covering. Where threshold is shown or scheduled, provide 3/8 inch from bottom of door to top of threshold. a. Comply with NFPA 80 for fire-rated doors. 2. Bevel non-fire-rated doors 1 /8 inch in 2 inches at lock and hinge edges. 3. Bevel fire-rated doors 1 /8 inch in 2 inches on lock edge; trim stiles and rails only to extent permitted by labeling agency. C. Factory machine doors for hardware that is not surface applied. Locate hardware to comply with DHI-WDHS-3. Comply with final hardware schedules, door frame Shop Drawings, DHI Al 15-W Series standards, and '' hardware templates. 1 . Coordinate measurements of hardware mortises in metal frames to verify dimensions and alignment before factory machining. D. Exterior Doors: Factory treat exterior doors after fabrication with water- repellent preservative to comply with WDMA I.S.4. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine doors and substrates, with Installer present, for suitable conditions where wood stile and rail doors will be installed. 1 . Verify that installed frames comply with indicated requirements for type, size, location, and swing characteristics and have been installed with plumb jambs and level heads. ,,W* 081433 STILE AND RAIL WOOD DOORS Page 6 of 8 Project No. 01091 Proposed Renovations March 6, 2009 Park House Smith College, Northampton, MA 1 . Grade for Opaque Finish: Premium or Select. 2. Wood Species for Opaque Finish: Any closed grain hardwood. 3. Flat-Panel Thickness: Manufacturer's standard, but not less than that required by WDMA I.S.6 for design group indicated. 4. Interior Door Types: a. Interior French Doors: Single full height glazing panel. b. Interior Panel Door Type B: Five panel design to match existing doors in rear of the house. C. Interior Panel Door Type C: Four panel design to match existing doors in front of the house. C. Interior Fire-Rated Doors (20-Minute Rating): Fire-rated doors with 1-3/4- inch- thick stiles and rails and veneered flat panels not less than 5/8 inch thick, complying with requirements indicated for interior doors. 2.4 STILE AND RAIL DOORS OF SPECIAL DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION A. Construction, General: 1 . Grade of Doors for Transparent Finish: Premium. 2. Wood Species and Cut for Transparent Finish: Match existing species 3. Panel Designs: Match existing panel designs. Do not modify intended aesthetic effects, as judged solely by Architect, except with Architect's approval. B. Door Construction for Transparent Finish: 1 . Stile and Rail Construction: Clear lumber; may be edge glued for width. Select lumber for similarity of grain and color, and arrange for optimum match between adjacent pieces. 2. Flat-Panel Construction: Veneered, wood-based panel product. C. Exterior Doors: 1 . Stile and Rail Widths: Not less than the following: a. Stiles, Top and Intermediate Rails: 5-3/8 inches. b. Bottom Rails: 11-3/8 inches. 2. Molding Profile: Match existing. 081433 STILE AND RAIL WOOD DOORS Page 5 of 8 Project No. 01091 Proposed Renovations March 6, 2009 Park House Smith College, Northampton, MA 2. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the manufacturers specified. 2.2 MATERIALS A. General: Use only materials that comply with referenced quality standards unless more stringent requirements are specified. 1 . Assemble exterior doors including components, with wet-use adhesives complying with ASTM D 5572 for finger joints and ASTM D 5751 for joints other than finger joints. 2. Assemble interior doors, including components, with either dry-use or wet-use adhesives complying with ASTM D 5572 for finger joints and ASTM D 5751 for joints other than finger joints. B. Low-Emitting Materials: 1 . Provide doors made with adhesives and composite wood products that do not contain urea-formaldehyde resins. C. Panel Products: Any of the following: 1 . Particleboard made from wood particles, with binder containing no urea-formaldehyde resin, complying with ANSI A208.1 , Grade M-2. 2. Medium-density fiberboard made from wood fiber, with binder containing no urea-formaldehyde resin, complying with ANSI A208.2, Grade MD. 3. Veneer core plywood, made with adhesive containing no urea- formaldehyde resin. 2.3 STILE AND RAIL DOORS OF STOCK DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION A. Manufacturers: 1 . Eggers Industries; Architectural Door Division. 2. ,JELD-WEN, inc. 3. Simpson Door Company. 4. Woodharbor Door Company. B. Interior Doors: 081433 STILE AND RAIL WOOD DOORS Page 4 of 8 Project No. 01091 Proposed Renovations March 6, 2009 Park House Smith College, Northampton, MA 1 .5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Comply with requirements of referenced standard and manufacturer's written instructions. B. Package doors individually in opaque plastic bags or cardboard cartons. C. Mark each door on top and bottom edge with opening number used on Shop Drawings. 1 .6 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install doors until building is enclosed, wet work is complete, and HVAC system is operating and maintaining temperature and relative humidity at occupancy levels during the remainder of the construction period. 1 .7 WARRANTY ' A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form, signed by manufacturer, Installer, and Contractor, in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace doors that are defective in materials or workmanship, and have warped (bow, cup, or twist) more than 1 /4 inch in a 42-by-84-inch section. 1 . Warranty shall be in effect during the following period of time from date of Substantial Completion: a. Exterior Doors: One year. b. Interior Doors: Five years. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. In other Part 2 articles where titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply to product selection: 1 . Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the products specified. 081433 STILE AND RAIL WOOD DOORS Page 3 of 8 Project No. 01091 Proposed Renovations March 6, 2009 Park House Smith College, Northampton, MA those for stiles, rails, panels, and moldings (sticking); and other pertinent data. 1 . Indicate dimensions. 2. Indicate doors to be factory finished and finish requirements. 3. Indicate fire ratings for fire doors. C. Samples for Initial Selection: For factory-finished doors. 1 . Provide samples on species of wood specified. D. Warranty: Special warranty specified in this Section. 1 .4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Source Limitations: Obtain stile and rail wood doors through one source from a single manufacturer. B. Quality Standard for Doors of Stock Design and Construction: Comply with WDMA I.S.6, "Industry Standard for Wood Stile and Rail Doors," unless more stringent requirements are specified. 1 . Mark, label, or otherwise identify stile and rail wood doors as complying with WDMA I.S.6, and include panel design number if applicable. C. Quality Standard for Doors of Special Design and Construction: Comply with AWI's "Architectural Woodwork Quality Standards" unless more stringent requirements are specified. 1 . Provide AWI Quality Certification Labels or an AWI letter of licensing for Project indicating that doors comply with requirements of grades specified. D. Fire-Rated Wood Doors: Doors complying with NFPA 80 that are listed and labeled by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, for fire-protection ratings indicated, based on testing according to NFPA 252. 081433 STILE AND RAIL WOOD DOORS Page 2 of 8 Project No. 01091 Proposed Renovations March 6, 2009 Park House Smith College, Northampton, MA SECTION 081433 - STILE AND RAIL WOOD DOORS PART 1 - GENERAL 1 .1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1 .2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1 . Exterior stile and rail wood doors. 2. Interior stile and rail wood doors. 3. Interior fire-rated stile and rail wood doors. 4. Contractors Options: a. Factory fitting stile and rail wood doors to frames and factory machining for hardware. b. Factory priming stile and rail doors for field finish. B. Related Sections include the following: 1 . Division 06 Section " Exterior Architectural Woodwork" for wood door frames. 1 .3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of door. Include details of construction and glazing. 1 . Include factory-finishing specifications. B. Shop Drawings: Indicate location, size, and hand of each door; elevation of each kind of door; construction details not covered in Product Data, including 081433 STILE AND RAIL WOOD DOORS Page 1 of 8 Project No. 01091 Proposed Renovations March 6, 2009 Park House Smith College, Northampton, MA B. Finished Doors: Replace doors that are damaged or that do not comply with requirements. Doors may be repaired or refinished if work complies with requirements and shows no evidence of repair or refinishing. END OF SECTION 081416 081416 FLUSH WOOD DOORS Page 7 of 7 Project No. 01091 Proposed Renovations March 6, 2009 Park House Smith College, Northampton, MA 1 . Verify that frames comply with indicated requirements for type, size, location, and swing characteristics and have been installed with level heads and plumb jambs. 2. Reject doors with defects. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 2.7 INSTALLATION A. Hardware: For installation, see Division 08 Section "Door Hardware." B. Installation Instructions: Install doors to comply with manufacturer's written instructions and the referenced quality standard, and as indicated. 1 . Install fire-rated doors in corresponding fire-rated frames according to NFPA 80. C. Job-Fitted Doors: Align and fit doors in frames with uniform clearances and bevels as indicated below; do not trim stiles and rails in excess of limits set by manufacturer or permitted for fire-rated doors. Machine doors for hardware. Seal edges of doors, edges of cutouts, and mortises after fitting and machining. 1 . Clearances: Provide 1 /8 inch (3.2 mm) at heads, jambs, and between pairs of doors. Provide 1 /8 inch (3.2 mm) from bottom of door to top of decorative floor finish or covering unless otherwise indicated. Where threshold is shown or scheduled, provide 1 /4 inch (6.4 mm) from bottom of door to top of threshold unless otherwise indicated. D. Factory-Finished Doors: Restore finish before installation if fitting or machining is required at Project site. 2.8 ADJUSTING A. Operation: Rehang or replace doors that do not swing or operate freely. 081416 FLUSH WOOD DOORS Page 6 of 7 Project No. 01091 Proposed Renovations March 6, 2009 Park House Smith College, Northampton, MA 2.4 FABRICATION A. Factory fit doors to suit frame-opening sizes indicated. Comply with clearance requirements of referenced quality standard for fitting unless otherwise indicated. 1 . Comply with requirements in NFPA 80 for fire-rated doors. B. Factory machine doors for hardware that is not surface applied. Locate hardware to comply with DHI-WDHS-3. Comply with final hardware schedules, door frame Shop Drawings, DHI Al 15-W series standards, and hardware templates. 1 . Coordinate with hardware mortises in metal frames to verify dimensions and alignment before factory machining. 2.5 FACTORY FINISHING A. General: Comply with referenced quality standard for factory finishing. '** Complete fabrication, including fitting doors for openings and machining for hardware that is not surface applied, before finishing. 1 . Finish faces, all four edges, edges of cutouts, and mortises. Stains and fillers may be omitted on top and bottom edges, edges of cutouts, and mortises. B. Finish doors at factory. C. Transparent Finish: 1 . Grade: Premium. 2. Finish: AWI conversion varnish or catalyzed polyurethane system. 3. Staining: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. 4. Sheen: Satin. 2.6 EXAMINATION A. Examine doors and installed door frames before hanging doors. 081416 FLUSH WOOD DOORS Page 5 of 7 Project No. 01091 Proposed Renovations March 6, 2009 Park House Smith College, Northampton, MA 2.2 DOOR CONSTRUCTION, GENERAL A. Low-Emitting Materials: Provide doors made with adhesives and composite wood products that do not contain urea formaldehyde. B. WDMA I.S.1 -A Performance Grade: 1 . Heavy Duty. C. Particleboard-Core Doors: 1 . Particleboard: ANSI A208.1 , Grade LD-1 or Grade LD-2. 2. Blocking: Provide wood blocking in particleboard-core doors as needed to eliminate through-bolting hardware. D. Fire-Protection-Rated Doors: Provide core specified or mineral core as needed to provide fire-protection rating indicated. 1 . Edge Construction: Provide edge construction with intumescent seals concealed by outer stile. Comply with specified requirements for exposed edges. 2.3 VENEERED-FACED DOORS FOR TRANSPARENT FINISH A. Interior Solid-Core Doors: 1 . Grade: Premium, with Grade AA faces. 2. Species: Select white maple. 3. Cut: Rotary cut. 4. Match between Veneer Leaves: Book match. 5. Assembly of Veneer Leaves on Door Faces: Center-balance match. 6. Room Match: Provide door faces of compatible color and grain within each separate room or area of building. 7. Exposed Vertical and Top Edges: Same species as faces or a compatible species. 8. Core: Particleboard. 9. Construction: Seven plies, either bonded or nonbonded construction. 10. WDMA I.S.1 -A Performance Grade: Heavy Duty. 'look. 081416 FLUSH WOOD DOORS Page 4 of 7 Project No. 01091 Proposed Renovations March 6, 2009 Park House Smith College, Northampton, MA 1 .7 WARRANTY A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace doors that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 1 . Failures include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Warping (bow, cup, or twist) more than 1 /4 inch (6.4 mm) in a 42- by-84-inch (1067-by-2134-mm) section. b. Telegraphing of core construction in face veneers exceeding 0.01 inch in a 3-inch (0.25 mm in a 76.2-mm) span. 2. Warranty shall also include installation and finishing that may be required due to repair or replacement of defective doors. 3. Warranty Period for Solid-Core Exterior Doors: Five years from date of Substantial Completion. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1 . Algoma Hardwoods, Inc. 2. Eggers Industries. 3. Ideal Architectural Doors & Plywood. 4. Ipik Door Company. 5. Lambton Doors. 6. Marlite. 7. Mohawk Flush Doors, Inc.; a Masonite company. 8. Vancouver Door Company. 9. VT Industries Inc. 081416 FLUSH WOOD DOORS Page 3 of 7 Project No. 01091 Proposed Renovations March 6, 2009 Park House Smith College, Northampton, MA C. Samples for Initial Selection: For factory-finished doors. D. Warranty: Sample of special warranty. 1 .4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer Qualifications: A qualified manufacturer that is certified for chain of custody by an FSC-accredited certification body. B. Source Limitations: Obtain flush wood doors from single manufacturer. C. Quality Standard: In addition to requirements specified, comply with AWI's "Architectural Woodwork Quality Standards Illustrated." D. Fire-Rated Wood Doors: Doors complying with NFPA 80 that are listed and labeled by a qualified testing agency, for fire-protection ratings indicated, based on testing at according to NFPA 252. 1 .5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Comply with requirements of referenced standard and manufacturer's written instructions. B. Package doors individually in cardboard cartons and wrap bundles of doors in plastic sheeting. C. Mark each door on bottom rail with opening number used on Shop Drawings. 1 .6 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install doors until spaces are enclosed and weathertight, wet work in spaces is complete and dry, and HVAC system is operating and maintaining ambient temperature and humidity conditions at occupancy levels during the remainder of the construction period. 081416 FLUSH WOOD DOORS Page 2 of 7 Project No. 01091 Proposed Renovations March 6, 2009 Park House Smith College, Northampton, MA SECTION 081416 - FLUSH WOOD DOORS PART 1 - GENERAL 1 .1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1 .2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1 . Solid-core doors with wood-veneer faces. 2. Factory finishing flush wood doors. 3. Factory fitting flush wood doors to frames and factory machining for hardware. B. Related Sections: 1 . Division 08 Section " Hollow Metal Doors and Frames" for hollow metal door frames. 1 .3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of door indicated. Include details of core and edge construction. Include factory-finishing specifications. B. Shop Drawings: Indicate location, size, and hand of each door; elevation of each kind of door; construction details not covered in Product Data; location and extent of hardware blocking; and other pertinent data. 1 . Indicate dimensions and locations of mortises and holes for hardware. 2. Indicate dimensions and locations of cutouts. 3. Indicate requirements for veneer matching. 4. Indicate doors to be factory finished and finish requirements. 4"" 5. Indicate fire-protection ratings for fire-rated doors. 081416 FLUSH WOOD DOORS Page 1 of 7 Project No. 01091 Proposed Renovations March 6, 2009 Park House Smith College, Northampton, MA a. Squareness: Plus or minus 1 /16 inch, measured at door rabbet on a line 90 degrees from jamb perpendicular to frame head. b. Alignment: Plus or minus 1 /16 inch, measured at jambs on a horizontal line parallel to plane of wall. C. Twist: Plus or minus 1 /16 inch, measured at opposite face corners of jambs on parallel lines, and perpendicular to plane of wall. d. Plumbness: Plus or minus 1 /16 inch, measured at jambs at floor. 3.3 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Final Adjustments: Check and readjust operating hardware items immediately before final inspection. Leave work in complete and proper operating condition. Remove and replace defective work, including hollow metal work that is warped, bowed, or otherwise unacceptable. B. Prime-Coat Touchup: Immediately after erection, sand smooth rusted or damaged areas of prime coat and apply touchup of compatible air-drying, rust-inhibitive primer. END OF SECTION 081 1 13 081113 HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES Page 8 of 8 Project No. 01091 Proposed Renovations March 6, 2009 Park House Smith College, Northampton, MA 3. Twist: Plus or minus 1 /16 inch, measured at opposite face corners of jambs on parallel lines, and perpendicular to plane of wall. 4. Plumbness: Plus or minus 1 /16 inch, measured at jambs on a perpendicular line from head to floor. C. Drill and tap frames to receive nontemplated, mortised, and surface-mounted door hardware. D. Hollow Metal Frames: Install hollow metal frames of size and profile indicated. Comply with ANSI/SDI A250.1 1 . 1 . Set frames accurately in position, plumbed, aligned, and braced securely until permanent anchors are set. After wall construction is complete, remove temporary braces, leaving surfaces smooth and undamaged. a. At fire-protection-rated openings, install frames according to NFPA 80. b. Where frames are fabricated in sections because of shipping or handling limitations, field splice at approved locations by welding face joint continuously; grind, fill, dress, and make splice smooth, flush, and invisible on exposed faces. C. Install door silencers in frames before grouting. d. Remove temporary braces necessary for installation only after frames have been properly set and secured. e. Check plumbness, squareness, and twist of frames as walls are constructed. Shim as necessary to comply with installation tolerances. 2. In-Place Concrete or Masonry Construction: Secure frames in place with postinstalled expansion anchors. Countersink anchors, and fill and make smooth, flush, and invisible on exposed faces. 3. In-Place Gypsum Board Partitions: Secure frames in place with postinstalled expansion anchors through floor anchors at each jamb. Countersink anchors, and fill and make smooth, flush, and invisible on exposed faces. 4. Installation Tolerances: Adjust hollow metal door frames for squareness, alignment, twist, and plumb to the following tolerances: 081113 HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES Page 7 of 8 Project No. 01091 Proposed Renovations March 6, 2009 Park House Smith College, Northampton, MA 1 . Locate hardware as indicated, or if not indicated, according to ANSI/SDI A250.8. 2. Reinforce frames to receive nontemplated, mortised and surface- mounted door hardware. 3. Comply with applicable requirements in ANSI/SDI A250.6 and ANSI/DHI Al 15 Series specifications for preparation of hollow metal work for hardware. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. B. Examine roughing-in for embedded and built-in anchors to verify actual locations before frame installation. C. For the record, prepare written report, endorsed by Installer, listing conditions detrimental to performance of the Work. D. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. General: Install hollow metal work plumb, rigid, properly aligned, and securely fastened in place; comply with Drawings and manufacturer's written instructions. B. Comply with the following tolerances for hollow metal frames for squareness, alignment, twist, and plumbness: 1 . Squareness: Plus or minus 1 /16 inch, measured at door rabbet on a line 90 degrees from jamb perpendicular to frame head. 2. Alignment: Plus or minus l /16 inch, measured at jambs on a horizontal line parallel to plane of wall. 081113 HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES Page 6 of 8 Project No. 01091 Proposed Renovations March 6, 2009 Park House Smith College, Northampton, MA 2.5 FABRICATION A. Fabricate hollow metal work to be rigid and free of defects, warp, or buckle. Accurately form metal to required sizes and profiles, with minimum radius for thickness of metal. Where practical, fit and assemble units in manufacturer's plant. To ensure proper assembly at Project site, clearly identify work that cannot be permanently factory assembled before shipment. B. Tolerances: Fabricate hollow metal work to tolerances indicated in SDI 117. C. Hollow Metal Frames: Where frames are fabricated in sections due to shipping or handling limitations, provide alignment plates or angles at each joint, fabricated of same thickness metal as frames. 1 . Knock-down Frames: Prepare face joints to make smooth, flush, and hairline joints after installation 2. Provide countersunk, flat- or oval-head exposed screws and bolts for exposed fasteners unless otherwise indicated. a. Fill heads with two component metal filler and sand smooth after installation. 3. jamb Anchors: Provide number and spacing of anchors as follows: a. Postinstalled Expansion Type: Locate anchors not more than 6 inches from top and bottom of frame. Space anchors not more than 26 inches o.c. 4. Door Silencers: Except on weather-stripped doors, drill stops to receive door silencers as follows. Keep holes clear during construction. a. Single-Door Frames: Drill stop in strike jamb to receive three door silencers. D. Fabricate concealed stiffeners, edge channels, and hardware reinforcement from either cold- or hot-rolled steel sheet. E. Hardware Preparation: Factory prepare hollow metal work to receive templated mortised hardware; include cutouts, reinforcement, mortising, drilling, and tapping according to the Door Hardware Schedule and templates furnished as specified in Division 08 Section "Door Hardware." 081113 HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES Page 5 of 8 Project No. 0 109 1 Proposed Renovations March 6, 2009 Park House Smith College, Northampton, MA B. Hot-Rolled Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1011 /A 1011 M, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B; free of scale, pitting, or surface defects; pickled and oiled. C. Frame Anchors: ASTM A 591 /A 591 M, Commercial Steel (CS), 40Z coating designation; mill phosphatized. D. Inserts, Bolts, and Fasteners: Hot-dip galvanized according to ASTM A 153/A 153M. E. Mineral-Fiber Insulation: ASTM C 665, Type I (blankets without membrane facing); consisting of fibers manufactured from slag or rock wool with 6- to 12-lb/cu. ft. density; with maximum flame-spread and smoke-development indexes of 25 and 50, respectively; passing ASTM E 136 for combustion characteristics. 2.3 STANDARD HOLLOW METAL FRAMES A. General: Comply with ANSI/SDI A250.8 and with details indicated for type and profile. B. Interior Frames: Fabricated from cold-rolled steel sheet. 1 . Fabricate frames with mitered or coped corners. 2. Frames for Level 2 Steel Doors: 0.053-inch- thick steel sheet. 3. Frames for Wood Doors: 0.042-inch- thick steel sheet. C. Hardware Reinforcement: Fabricate according to ANSI/SDI A250.6 with reinforcement plates from same material as frames. 2.4 FRAME ANCHORS A. jamb Anchors: 1 . Postinstalled Expansion Type for In-Place Concrete or Masonry: Minimum 3/8-inch- diameter bolts with expansion shields or inserts. Provide pipe spacer from frame to wall, with throat reinforcement plate, welded to frame at each anchor location. 081113 HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES Page 4 of 8 Project No. 01091 Proposed Renovations March 6, 2009 Park House Smith College, Northampton, MA minimum 4-inch- high wood blocking. Do not store in a manner that traps excess humidity. 1 . Provide minimum 1 /4-inch space between each stacked door to permit air circulation. 1 .7 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Field Measurements: Verify actual dimensions of openings by field measurements before fabrication. 1 .8 COORDINATION A. Coordinate installation of anchorages for hollow metal frames. Furnish setting drawings, templates, and directions for installing anchorages, including sleeves, concrete inserts, anchor bolts, and items with integral anchors. Deliver such items to Project site in time for installation. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1 . Amweld Building Products, LLC. 2. Benchmark; a division of Therma-Tru Corporation. 3. Ceco Door Products; an Assa Abloy Group company. 4. Curries Company; an Assa Abloy Group company. 5. Pioneer Industries, Inc. 6. Steelcraft; an Ingersoll-Rand company. 7. Windsor Republic Doors. 2.2 MATERIALS A. Cold-Rolled Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1008/A 1008M, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B; suitable for exposed applications. 081113 HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES Page 3 of 8 Project No. 01091 Proposed Renovations March 6, 2009 Park House Smith College, Northampton, MA 2. Locations of reinforcement and preparations for hardware. 3. Details of each different wall opening condition. 4. Details of anchorages, joints, field splices, and connections. C. Other Action Submittals: 1 . Schedule: Provide a schedule of hollow metal work prepared by or under the supervision of supplier, using same reference numbers for details and openings as those on Drawings. Coordinate with door hardware schedule. D. Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by a qualified testing agency, for each type of hollow metal door and frame assembly. 1 .5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Source Limitations: Obtain hollow metal work from single source from single manufacturer. B. Fire-Rated Door Assemblies: Assemblies complying with NFPA 80 that are listed and labeled by a qualified testing agency, for fire-protection ratings indicated, based on testing at positive pressure according to NFPA 252. 1 .6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver hollow metal work palletized, wrapped, or crated to provide protection during transit and Project-site storage. Do not use nonvented plastic. 1 . Provide additional protection to prevent damage to finish of factory- finished units. B. Deliver welded frames with two removable spreader bars across bottom of frames, tack welded to jambs and mullions. C. Store hollow metal work under cover at Project site. Place in stacks of five units maximum in a vertical position with heads up, spaced by blocking, on 081113 HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES Page 2 of 8 Project No. 01091 Proposed Renovations March 6, 2009 Park House Smith College, Northampton, MA SECTION 081113 - HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES PART 1 - GENERAL 1 .1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1 .2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1 . Standard hollow metal frames. B. Related Sections: 1 . Division 08 Section "Door Hardware" for door hardware for hollow metal doors. 2. Division 09 Sections "Interior Painting" for field painting hollow metal doors and frames. 1 .3 DEFINITIONS A. Minimum Thickness: Minimum thickness of base metal without coatings. B. Standard Hollow Metal Work: Hollow metal work fabricated according to ANSI/SDI A250.8. 1 .4 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include construction details, material descriptions, core descriptions and fire-resistance rating. B. Shop Drawings: Include the following: 1 . Frame details for each frame type, including dimensioned profiles and metal thicknesses. 081113 HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES Page 1 of 8 Project No. 01091 Proposed Renovations March 6, 2009 Park House Smith College, Northampton, MA below to form smooth, uniform beads of configuration indicated; to eliminate air pockets; and to ensure contact and adhesion of sealant with sides of joint. 1 . Remove excess sealant from surfaces adjacent to joints. 2. Use tooling agents that are approved in writing by sealant manufacturer and that do not discolor sealants or adjacent surfaces. 3. Provide concave joint configuration per Figure 5A in ASTM C 1193, unless otherwise indicated. 3.4 CLEANING A. Clean off excess sealant or sealant smears adjacent to joints as the Work progresses by methods and with cleaning materials approved in writing by manufacturers of joint sealants and of products in which joints occur. 3.5 PROTECTION A. Protect joint sealants during and after curing period from contact with contaminating substances and from damage resulting from construction operations or other causes so sealants are without deterioration or damage at time of Substantial Completion. If, despite such protection, damage or deterioration occurs, cut out and remove damaged or deteriorated joint sealants immediately so installations with repaired areas are indistinguishable from original work. END OF SECTION 079200 079200 JOINT SEALANTS Page 9 of 9 Project No. 01091 Proposed Renovations March 6, 2009 Park House Smith College, Northampton, MA sealant smears. Remove tape immediately after tooling without disturbing joint seal. 3.3 INSTALLATION OF JOINT SEALANTS A. General: Comply with joint-sealant manufacturer's written installation instructions for products and applications indicated, unless more stringent requirements apply. B. Sealant Installation Standard: Comply with recommendations in ASTM C 1 193 for use of joint sealants as applicable to materials, applications, and conditions indicated. C. Acoustical Sealant Application Standard: Comply with recommendations in ASTM C 919 for use of joint sealants in acoustical applications as applicable to materials, applications, and conditions indicated. D. Install sealant backings of type indicated to support sealants during application and at position required to produce cross-sectional shapes and depths of installed sealants relative to joint widths that allow optimum sealant movement capability. 1 . Do not leave gaps between ends of sealant backings. 2. Do not stretch, twist, puncture, or tear sealant backings. 3. Remove absorbent sealant backings that have become wet before sealant application and replace them with dry materials. E. Install bond-breaker tape behind sealants where sealant backings are not used between sealants and backs of joints. F. Install sealants using proven techniques that comply with the following and at the same time backings are installed: 1 . Place sealants so they directly contact and.fully wet joint substrates. 2. Completely fill recesses in each joint configuration. 3. Produce uniform, cross-sectional shapes and depths relative to joint widths that allow optimum sealant movement capability. G. Tooling of Nonsag Sealants: Immediately after sealant application and before skinning or curing begins, tool sealants according to requirements specified 079200 .JOINT SEALANTS Page 8 of 9 Project No. 01091 Proposed Renovations March 6, 2009 Park House Smith College, Northampton, MA 3.2 PREPARATION A. Surface Cleaning of Joints: Clean out joints immediately before installing joint sealants to comply with joint-sealant manufacturer's written instructions and the following requirements: 1 . Remove all foreign material from joint substrates that could interfere with adhesion of joint sealant, including dust, paints (except for permanent, protective coatings tested and approved for sealant adhesion and compatibility by sealant manufacturer), old joint sealants, oil, grease, waterproofing, water repellents, water, surface dirt, and frost. 2. Clean porous joint substrate surfaces by brushing, grinding, blast cleaning, mechanical abrading, or a combination of these methods to produce a clean, sound substrate capable of developing optimum bond with joint sealants. Remove loose particles remaining after cleaning operations above by vacuuming or blowing out joints with oil-free compressed air. Porous joint substrates include the following: a. Concrete. b. Masonry. 3. Clean nonporous surfaces with chemical cleaners or other means that do not stain, harm substrates, or leave residues capable of interfering with adhesion of joint sealants. Nonporous joint substrates include the following: a. Metal. b. Glass. B. Joint Priming: Prime joint substrates, where recommended in writing by joint-sealant manufacturer, based on preconstruction joint-sealant-substrate tests or prior experience. Apply primer to comply with joint-sealant manufacturer's written instructions. Confine primers to areas of joint-sealant bond; do not allow spillage or migration onto adjoining surfaces. C. Masking Tape: Use masking tape where required to prevent contact of sealant with adjoining surfaces that otherwise would be permanently stained or damaged by such contact or by cleaning methods required to remove 079200 JOINT SEALANTS Page 7 of 9 Project No. 01091 Proposed Renovations March 6, 2009 Park House Smith College, Northampton, MA capable of remaining resilient at temperatures down to minus 26 deg F. Provide products with low compression set and of size and shape to provide a secondary seal, to control sealant depth, and to otherwise contribute to optimum sealant performance. D. Bond-Breaker Tape: Polyethylene tape or other plastic tape recommended by sealant manufacturer for preventing sealant from adhering to rigid, inflexible joint-filler materials or joint surfaces at back of joint where such adhesion would result in sealant failure. Provide self-adhesive tape where applicable. 2.6 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Primer: Material recommended by joint-sealant manufacturer where required for adhesion of sealant to joint substrates indicated, as determined from preconstruction joint-sealant-substrate tests and field tests. B. Cleaners for Nonporous Surfaces: Chemical cleaners acceptable to manufacturers of sealants and sealant backing materials, free of oily residues or other substances capable of staining or harming joint substrates and adjacent nonporous surfaces in any way, and formulated to promote optimum adhesion of sealants to joint substrates. C. Masking Tape: Nonstaining, nonabsorbent material compatible with joint sealants and surfaces adjacent to joints. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine joints indicated to receive joint sealants, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for joint configuration, installation tolerances, and other conditions affecting joint-sealant performance. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 079200 JOINT SEALANTS Page 6 of 9 Project No. 01091 Proposed Renovations March 6, 2009 Park House Smith College, Northampton, MA b. Pecora Corporation; Urexpan NR-201 . C. Polymeric Systems Inc.; Flexiprene 952. d. Schnee-Morehead, Inc.; Permathane SM7101 . e. Tremco; Tremflex S/L. f. Tremco; Vulkem 45. 2. Type and Grade: S (single component) and P (pourable). 3. Class: 25. 4. Use Related to Exposure: T (traffic). 5. Uses Related to Joint Substrates: M, A, and, as applicable to joint substrates indicated, O. a. Use O Joint Substrates: galvanized steel, brick and wood. 2.4 LATEX JOINT SEALANTS A. Latex Sealant: Comply with ASTM C 834, Type P, Grade NF. B. Products: 1 . Bostik Findley; Chem-Calk 600. 2. Pecora Corporation; AC-20+. 3. Schnee-Morehead, Inc.; SM 8200. 4. Sonneborn, Division of ChemRex Inc.; Sonolac. 5. Tremco; Tremflex 834. 2.5 JOINT-SEALANT BACKING A. General: Provide sealant backings of material and type that are nonstaining; are compatible with joint substrates, sealants, primers, and other joint fillers; and are approved for applications indicated by sealant manufacturer based on field experience and laboratory testing. B. Cylindrical Sealant Backings: ASTM C 1330, Type C (closed-cell material with a surface skin), and of size and density to control sealant depth and otherwise contribute to producing optimum sealant performance: C. Elastomeric Tubing Sealant Backings: Neoprene, butyl, EPDM, or silicone tubing complying with ASTM D 1056, nonabsorbent to water and gas, and 079200 JOINT SEALANTS Page 5 of 9 Project No. 01091 Proposed Renovations March 6, 2009 Park House Smith College, Northampton, MA 2.3 ELASTOMERIC JOINT SEALANTS A. Elastomeric Sealants: Comply with ASTM C 920 and other requirements indicated for each liquid-applied chemically curing sealant specified, including those referencing ASTM C 920 classifications for type, grade, class, and uses related to exposure and joint substrates. B. Stain-Test-Response Characteristics: Where elastomeric sealants are specified to be nonstaining to porous substrates, provide products that have undergone testing according to ASTM C 1248 and have not stained porous joint substrates indicated for Project. C. Suitability for Immersion in Liquids. Where elastomeric sealants are indicated for Use I for joints that will be continuously immersed in liquids, provide products that have undergone testing according to ASTM C 1247 and qualify for the length of exposure indicated by reference to ASTM C 920 for Class 1 or 2. Liquid used for testing sealants is deionized water, unless otherwise indicated. D. Suitability for Contact with Food: Where elastomeric sealants are indicated Awk for joints that will come in repeated contact with food, provide products that comply with 21 CFR 177.2600. E. Single-Component Nonsag Polysulfide Sealant: 1 . Available Products: a. Pacific Polymers, Inc.; Elastoseal 230 Type I (Gun Grade). b. Polymeric Systems Inc.; PSI-7000. 2. Type and Grade: S (single component) and NS (nonsag). 3. Class: 25. 4. Use Related to Exposure: NT (nontraffic). 5. Uses Related to joint Substrates: M, G, A, and, as applicable to joint substrates indicated, 0. F. Single-Component Pourable Urethane Sealant: 1 . Products: a. Bostik Findley; Chem-Calk 950. 079200 JOINT SEALANTS Page 4 of 9 Project No. 01091 Proposed Renovations March 6, 2009 Park House Smith College, Northampton, MA 1 .6 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Do not proceed with installation of joint sealants under the following conditions: 1 . When ambient and substrate temperature conditions are outside limits permitted by joint-sealant manufacturer. 2. When joint substrates are wet. 3. Where joint widths are less than those allowed by joint-sealant manufacturer for applications indicated. 4. Contaminants capable of interfering with adhesion have not yet been removed from joint substrates. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, products listed in other Part 2 articles. 2.2 MATERIALS, GENERAL A. Compatibility: Provide joint sealants, backings, and other related materials that are compatible with one another and with joint substrates under conditions of service and application, as demonstrated by sealant manufacturer, based on testing and field experience. B. VOC Content of Interior Sealants: Provide interior sealants and sealant primers that comply with the following limits for VOC content when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24): 1 . Sealants: 250 g/L. 2. Sealant Primers for Nonporous Substrates: 250 g/L. 3. Sealant Primers for Porous Substrates: 775 g/L. C. Colors of Exposed joint Sealants: . 079200 JOINT SEALANTS Page 3 of 9 Project No. 01091 Proposed Renovations March 6, 2009 Park House Smith College, Northampton, MA 1 .3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Provide elastomeric joint sealants that establish and maintain watertight and airtight continuous joint seals without staining or deteriorating joint substrates. B. Provide joint sealants for interior applications that establish and maintain airtight and water-resistant continuous joint seals without staining or deteriorating joint substrates. 1 .4 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each joint-sealant product indicated. B. Samples for Initial Selection: Manufacturer's color charts consisting of strips of cured sealants showing the full range of colors available for each product exposed to view. C. Samples for Verification: For each type and color of joint sealant required, provide Samples with joint sealants in 1 /2-inch- wide joints formed between two 6-inch- long strips of material matching the appearance of exposed surfaces adjacent to joint sealants. D. Product Certificates: For each type of joint sealant and accessory, signed by product manufacturer. E. Product Test Reports: Based on comprehensive testing of product formulations performed by a qualified testing agency, indicating that sealants comply with requirements. F. Warranties: Special warranties specified in this Section. 1 .5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: Manufacturer's authorized Installer who is approved or licensed for installation of elastomeric sealants required for this Project. B. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of joint sealant through one source from a single manufacturer. 079200 JOINT SEALANTS Page 2 of 9 Project No. 01091 Proposed Renovations March 6, 2009 Park House Smith College, Northampton, MA SECTION 079200 -JOINT SEALANTS PART 1 - GENERAL 1 .1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1 .2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes joint sealants for the following applications: 1 . Exterior joints in the following vertical surfaces and horizontal nontraffic surfaces: a. Perimeter joints between materials listed above and frames of doors, windows and louvers. 2. Exterior joints in the following horizontal traffic surfaces: a. joints between different materials. 3. Interior joints in the following vertical surfaces and horizontal nontraffic surfaces: a. Perimeter joints of exterior openings where indicated. b. joints between plumbing fixtures and adjoining walls, floors, and counters. C. Other joints as indicated. B. Related Sections include the following: 1 . Division 09 Section "Gypsum Veneer Plastering" for sealing perimeter joints of gypsum veneer plaster partitions to reduce sound transmission. 2. Division 09 Section "Gypsum Board" for sealing perimeter joints of gypsum board partitions to reduce sound transmission. 3. Division 09 Section "Acoustical Panel Ceilings" for sealing edge moldings at perimeters of acoustical ceilings. 079200 JOINT SEALANTS Page 1 of 9 Project No. 01091 Proposed Renovations March 6, 2009 Park House Smith College, Northampton, MA 2. Install gutter with expansion joints at locations indicated but not exceeding 50 feet apart. Install expansion joint caps. C. Downspouts: ,Join sections with manufacturer's standard telescoping joints. Provide fasteners designed to hold downspouts securely 1 inch away from walls; locate fasteners at top and bottom and at approximately 60 inches o.c. in between. 1 . For small roof areas provide elbows and pre-cast splash blocks at base of downspouts to direct water away from building where direct connection to underground storm drainage system is not possible. 2. Connect downspouts to underground drainage system indicated. 3.5 COUNTERFLASHING AND REGLET INSTALLATION A. Counterflashings: Coordinate installation of counterflashings with installation of base flashings. Insert counterflashings in reglets or receivers and fit tightly to base flashings. Extend counterflashings 4 inches over base flashings. Lap counterflashing joints a minimum of 4 inches and bed with butyl sealant. 3.6 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Clean exposed metal surfaces of substances that interfere with uniform oxidation and weathering. B. Clean and neutralize flux materials. Clean off excess solder and sealants. END OF SECTION 077100 077100 ROOF SPECIALTIES Page 7 of 7 Project No. 01091 Proposed Renovations March 6, 2009 Park House Smith College, Northampton, MA C. Install manufactured roof specialties level, plumb, true to line and elevation, and without warping, jogs in alignment, excessive oil-canning, buckling, or tool marks. D. Install manufactured roof specialties to fit substrates and to result in watertight performance. Verify shapes and dimensions of surfaces to be covered before manufacture. E. Expansion Provisions: Provide for thermal expansion of exposed manufactured roof specialties. Space movement joints at a maximum of 12 feet with no unplanned joints within 18 inches of corners or intersections. F. Fasteners: Use fasteners of type and size recommended by manufacturer but of sizes that will penetrate substrate not less than 1 -1 /4 inches for nails and not less than 3/4 inch for wood screws. G. Seal joints with elastomeric or butyl sealant as required by manufacturer of roofing specialties. 3.3 CHIMNEY CAP INSTALLATION A. Install cleats and other anchoring and attachment accessories and devices with concealed fasteners. B. Anchor chimney caps to resist uplift and outward forces according to performance requirements. 3.4 ROOF EDGE DRAINAGE SYSTEM INSTALLATION A. General: Install gutters and downspouts to produce a complete roof drainage system according to manufacturer's written instructions. Coordinate installation of roof perimeter flashing with installation of roof drainage system. B. Gutters: join and seal gutter lengths. Attach gutters to firmly anchored gutter brackets spaced not more than 36 inches apart. Slope gutters to downspouts. 1 . Install gutters with outer edge located at least 1 inch below projected plane of roof slope at high point. 077100 ROOF SPECIALTIES Page 6 of 7 Project No. 01091 Proposed Renovations March 6, 2009 Park House Smith College, Northampton, MA 2. Type: For masonry application, with offset top flange for embedment in masonry mortar joint. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, to verify actual locations, dimensions, and other conditions affecting performance of work. 1 . Examine walls, roofs and roof edges for suitable conditions for manufactured roof specialties. 2. Verify that substrate is sound, dry, smooth, clean, sloped for drainage, and securely anchored. 3. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. General: Anchor manufactured roof specialties securely in place and capable of resisting forces specified in performance requirements. Use fasteners, separators, sealants, and other miscellaneous items as required to complete manufactured roof specialty systems. 1 . Install manufactured roof specialties with provisions for thermal and structural movement. 2. Torch cutting of manufactured roof specialties is not permitted. B. Metal Protection: Where dissimilar metals will contact each other or corrosive substrates, protect against galvanic action by painting contact surfaces with bituminous coating or by other permanent separation as recommended by manufacturer. 1 . Bed flanges in thick coat of asphalt roofing cement where required by manufacturers of roof specialties for waterproof performance. 077100 ROOF SPECIALTIES Page 5 of 7 Project No. 01091 Proposed Renovations March 6, 2009 Park House Smith College, Northampton, MA 2.3 CHIMNEY CAPS A. 26 oz. copper sheet fabricated to cover masonry chimney cap and extend down face on all four sides a minimum of 4 inches with hemmed drip edge. 2.4 ROOF EDGE DRAINAGE SYSTEMS A. Gutters and Downspouts: Manufactured formed gutter in uniform section lengths not exceeding 16 feet, with mitered and welded or soldered corner units, end caps, outlet tubes, and other accessories. Elevate back edge at least 1 inch above front gutter rim. Furnish with spike and ferrule gutter support brackets and expansion joints and expansion-joint covers fabricated from same metal as gutters. 1 . Fabricate gutter from the following exposed metal: a. Copper: 24 oz./sq. ft. 2. Gutter Style: Half round according to SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual." 3. Gutter Accessories: Bronze wire ball downspout strainer. 4. Downspouts: Round with formed elbows, manufactured from the following exposed metal. Furnish wall brackets, from same material and finish as downspouts, with anchors. a. Copper: 16 oz./sq. ft. 2.5 COUNTERFLASHINGS AND REGLETS A. Counterflashings: Manufactured units in lengths designed to snap into reglets and compress against base flashings with joints lapped, from the following exposed metal in thickness indicated: 1 . Copper: 24 oz./sq. ft. B. Reglets: Manufactured units formed to provide secure interlocking of separate reglet and counterflashing pieces, and compatible with flashings indicated, from the following exposed metal in thickness indicated: 1 . Copper: 16 oz./sq. ft. 077100 ROOF SPECIALTIES Page 4 of 7 Project No. 01091 Proposed Renovations March 6, 2009 Park House Smith College, Northampton, MA 1 . Do not modify intended aesthetic effects, as judged solely by Architect., except with Architect's approval. If modifications are proposed, submit comprehensive explanatory data to Architect for review. 1 .6 COORDINATION A. Coordinate installation of manufactured roof specialties with interfacing and adjoining construction to provide a leakproof, secure, and noncorrosive installation. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 EXPOSED METALS A. Copper Sheet: ASTM B 370, Temper H00 or H01 , cold rolled, mill finished. 2.2 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. General: Provide materials and types of fasteners, protective coatings, separators, sealants, and other miscellaneous items required by manufacturer for a complete installation. B. Fasteners: Manufacturer's recommended fasteners, suitable for application and designed to withstand design loads. 1 . Exposed Penetrating Fasteners: Gasketed screws with hex washer heads matching color of sheet metal. C. Elastomeric Sealant: ASTM C 920, elastomeric polysulfide polymer sealant; of type, grade, class, and use classifications required to seal joints in sheet metal flashing and trim and remain watertight. D. Butyl Sealant: ASTM C 1311 , single-component, solvent-release butyl rubber sealant, polyisobutylene plasticized, heavy bodied for hooked-type expansion joints with limited movement. E. Asphalt Roofing Cement: ASTM D 4586, asbestos free, of consistency required for application. 077100 ROOF SPECIALTIES Page 3 of 7 Project No. 01091 Proposed Renovations March 6, 2009 Park House Smith College, Northampton, MA engineering calculation on surface temperatures of materials due to both solar heat gain and nighttime-sky heat loss. 1 . Temperature Change (Range): 120 deg F, ambient; 180 deg F, material surfaces. C. Water Infiltration: Provide manufactured roof specialties that do not allow water infiltration to building interior. 1 .4 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes. B. Shop Drawings: Show layouts of manufactured roof specialties, including plans and elevations. Identify factory- vs. field-assembled work. Include the following: 1 . Details for fastening, joining, supporting, and anchoring manufactured roof specialties including fasteners, clips, cleats, and attachments to adjoining work. 2. Details for expansion and contraction. C. Fabrication Samples: For roof caps and roof edge drainage systems made from 12-inch lengths of full-size components including fasteners, cover joints, accessories, and attachments. 1 .5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Product Options: Information on Drawings and in Specifications establishes requirements for system's aesthetic effects and performance characteristics. Aesthetic effects are indicated by dimensions, arrangements, alignment, and profiles of components and assemblies as they relate to sightlines, to one another, and to adjoining construction. Performance characteristics are indicated by criteria subject to verification by one or more methods including preconstruction testing, field testing, and in-service performance. 077100 ROOF SPECIALTIES Page 2 of 7 Project No. 01091 Proposed Renovations March 6, 2009 Park House Smith College, Northampton, MA SECTION 077100 - ROOF SPECIALTIES PART 1 - GENERAL 1 .1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1 .2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following manufactured roof specialties: 1 . Metal cap for existing chimney. 2. Roof edge drainage systems. ** 3. Counterflashings and reglets. B. Related Sections include the following: 1 . Division 06 Section "Rough Carpentry" for wood nailers, curbs, and blocking. 2. Division 07 Section ",Joint Sealants" for field-applied sealants. 1 .3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. General: Manufacture and install manufactured roof specialties to resist thermally induced movement and exposure to weather without failing, rattling, leaking, and fastener disengagement. B. Thermal Movements: Provide manufactured roof specialties that allow for thermal movements resulting from the following maximum change (range) in ambient and surface temperatures by preventing buckling, opening of joints, hole elongation, overstressing of components, failure of joint sealants, failure of connections, and other detrimental effects. Provide clips that resist rotation and avoid shear stress as a result of thermal movements. Base 077100 ROOF SPECIALTIES Page 1 of 7 Project No. 01091 Proposed Renovations March 6, 2009 Park House Smith College, Northampton, MA low* C. Remove temporary protective coverings and strippable films as sheet metal flashing and trim are installed unless otherwise indicated in manufacturer's written installation instructions. END OF SECTION 076200 076200 SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM Page 7 of 7 Project No. 01091 Proposed Renovations March 6, 2009 Park House Smith College, Northampton, MA D. Fastener Sizes: Use fasteners of sizes that will penetrate wood sheathing not less than 1 -1 /4 inches (32 mm) for nails and not less than 3/4 inch (19 mm) for wood screws <Insert size requirement>. E. Seal joints as shown and as required for watertight construction. F. Soldered joints: Clean surfaces to be soldered, removing oils and foreign matter. Pre-tin edges of sheets to be soldered to a width of 1 -1 12 inches (38 mm), except reduce pre-tinning where pre-tinned surface would show in completed Work. 1 . Do not use torches for soldering. Heat surfaces to receive solder and flow solder into joint. Fill joint completely. Completely remove flux and spatter from exposed surfaces. 2. Copper Soldering: Tin edges of uncoated copper sheets using solder for copper. 3.3 WALL FLASHING INSTALLATION A. General: Install sheet metal wall flashing to intercept and exclude ow% penetrating moisture according to SMACNA recommendations and as indicated. Coordinate installation of wall flashing with installation of wall- opening components such as windows, doors, and louvers. B. Through-Wall Flashing: Installation of through-wall flashing is specified in Division 04 Section "Unit Masonry." C. Opening Flashings in Frame Construction: Replace continuous head, sill, jamb, and similar flashings to extend 4 inches (100 mm) beyond wall openings. 3.4 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Clean exposed metal surfaces of substances that interfere with uniform oxidation and weathering. B. Clean and neutralize flux materials. Clean off excess solder and sealants. 076200 SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM Page 6 of 7 Project No. 01091 Proposed Renovations March 6, 2009 Park House Smith College, Northampton, MA 3.2 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. General: Anchor sheet metal flashing and trim and other components of the Work securely in place, with provisions for thermal and structural movement so that completed sheet metal flashing and trim shall not rattle, leak, or loosen, and shall remain watertight. Use fasteners, solder, welding rods, protective coatings, separators, sealants, and other miscellaneous items as required to complete sheet metal flashing and trim system. 1 . Install sheet metal flashing and trim true to line and levels indicated. Provide uniform, neat seams with minimum exposure of solder, welds, and sealant. 2. Install sheet metal flashing and trim to fit substrates and to result in watertight performance. Verify shapes and dimensions of surfaces to be covered before fabricating sheet metal. 3. Space cleats not more than 12 inches (300 mm) apart. Anchor each cleat with two fasteners. Bend tabs over fasteners. 4. Install exposed sheet metal flashing and trim without excessive oil canning, buckling, and tool marks. S. Install sealant tape where indicated. 6. Torch cutting of sheet metal flashing and trim is not permitted. B. Metal Protection: Where dissimilar metals will contact each other or corrosive substrates, protect against galvanic action by painting contact surfaces with bituminous coating or by other permanent separation as recommended by SMACNA. 1 . Underlayment: Where installing metal flashing directly on cementitious or wood substrates, install a course of felt underlayment and cover with a slip sheet or install a course of polyethylene sheet. C. Expansion Provisions: Provide for thermal expansion of exposed flashing and trim. Space movement joints at a maximum of 10 feet (3 m) with no joints allowed within 24 inches (600 mm) of corner or intersection. Where lapped expansion provisions cannot be used or would not be sufficiently watertight, form expansion joints of intermeshing hooked flanges, not less than 1 inch (25 mm) deep, filled with sealant concealed within joints. 076200 SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM Page 5 of 7 Project No. 01091 Proposed Renovations March 6, 2009 Park House Smith College, Northampton, MA E. Seams: Fabricate nonmoving seams with flat-lock seams. Tin edges to be seamed, form seams, and solder. 2.5 WALL SHEET METAL FABRICATIONS A. Through-Wall Flashing: Fabricate continuous flashings in minimum 96-inch- (2400-mm-) long, but not exceeding 12-foot- (3.6-m-) long, sections, under copings, at shelf angles, and where indicated. Fabricate discontinuous lintel, sill, and similar flashings to extend 6 inches (150 mm) beyond each side of wall openings. Form with 2-inch- (50-mm-) high, end dams where flashing is discontinuous. Fabricate from the following materials: 1 . Copper: 26 oz./sq. ft. B. Opening Flashings in Frame Construction: Fabricate head, sill, and similar flashings to extend 4 inches (100 mm) beyond wall openings. Form head and sill flashing with 2-inch- (50-mm-) high, end dams. Fabricate from the following materials: 1 . Copper: 26 oz./sq. ft. — PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 UNDERLAYMENT INSTALLATION A. Felt Underlayment: Install felt underlayment with adhesive for temporary anchorage. Apply in shingle fashion to shed water, with lapped joints of not less than 2 inches (50 mm). B. Self-Adhering Sheet Underlayment: Install self-adhering sheet underlayment, wrinkle free. Comply with temperature restrictions of underlayment manufacturer for installation; use primer rather than nails for installing underlayment at low temperatures. Apply in shingle fashion to shed water, with end laps of not less than 6 inches (150 mm) staggered 24 inches (600 mm) between courses. Overlap side edges not less than 3-1 /2 inches (90 mm). Roll laps with roller. Cover underlayment within 14 days. 076200 SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM Page 4 of 7 Project No. 01091 Proposed Renovations March 6, 2009 Park House Smith College, Northampton, MA 2. Fasteners for Copper Sheet: Copper, hardware bronze or Series 300 stainless steel. C. Solder: 1 . For Copper: ASTM B 32, Grade Sn50, 50 percent tin and 50 percent lead. D. Elastomeric Sealant: ASTM C 920, elastomeric polymer sealant; low modulus; of type, grade, class, and use classifications required to seal joints in sheet metal flashing and trim and remain watertight. E. Bituminous Coating: Cold-applied asphalt emulsion complying with ASTM D 1187. 2.4 FABRICATION, GENERAL A. General: Custom fabricate sheet metal flashing and trim to comply with recommendations in SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" that apply to design, dimensions, geometry, metal thickness, and other characteristics of item indicated. Fabricate items at the shop to greatest extent possible. 1 . Obtain field measurements for accurate fit before shop fabrication. 2. Form sheet metal flashing and trim without excessive oil canning, buckling, and tool marks and true to line and levels indicated, with exposed edges folded back to form hems. 3. Conceal fasteners and expansion provisions where possible. Exposed fasteners are not allowed on faces exposed to view. B. Sealed joints: Form nonexpansion but movable joints in metal -to accommodate elastomeric sealant. C. Expansion Provisions: Where lapped expansion provisions cannot be used, form expansion joints of intermeshing hooked flanges, not less than 1 inch (25 mm) deep, filled with butyl sealant concealed within joints. D. Fabricate cleats and attachment devices from same material as accessory being anchored or from compatible, noncorrosive metal. 076200 SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM Page 3 of 7 Project No. 01091 Proposed Renovations March 6, 2009 Park House Smith College, Northampton, MA 1 . Non-Patinated Exposed Finish: Mill. 2.2 UNDERLAYMENT MATERIALS A. Felt: ASTM D 226, Type II (No. 30), asphalt-saturated organic felt, nonperforated. B. Self-Adhering, High-Temperature Sheet: Minimum 30 to 40 mils (0.76 to 1 .0 mm) thick, consisting of slip-resisting polyethylene-film top surface laminated to layer of butyl or SBS-modified asphalt adhesive, with release- paper backing; cold applied. Provide primer when recommended by underlayment manufacturer. 1 . Thermal Stability: ASTM D 1970; stable after testing at 240 deg F (1 16 deg Q. 2. Low-Temperature Flexibility: ASTM D 1970; passes after testing at minus 20 deg F (29 deg Q. C. Slip Sheet: Building paper, 3-lb/100 sq. ft. (0.16-kg/sq. m) minimum, rosin sized. 2.3 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. General: Provide materials and types of fasteners, solder, welding rods, protective coatings, separators, sealants, and other miscellaneous items as required for complete sheet metal flashing and trim installation and recommended by manufacturer of primary sheet metal unless otherwise indicated. B. Fasteners: Wood screws, annular threaded nails, self-tapping screws, self- locking rivets and bolts, and other suitable fasteners designed to withstand design loads and recommended by manufacturer of primary sheet metal. 1 . General: Blind fasteners or self-drilling screws, gasketed, with hex- washer head. a. Blind Fasteners: High-strength aluminum or stainless-steel rivets suitable for metal being fastened. 076200 SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM Page 2 of 7 Project No. 01091 Proposed Renovations March 6, 2009 Park House Smith College, Northampton, MA SECTION 076200 - SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM PART 1 - GENERAL 1 .1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1 . Formed wall sheet metal fabrications. 1 .2 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. B. Samples: For each exposed product and for each finish specified. C. Maintenance data. D. Warranty: Sample of special warranty. 1 .3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim Standard: Comply with SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" unless more stringent requirements are specified or shown on Drawings. B. Copper Sheet Metal Standard: Comply with CDA's "Copper in Architecture Handbook." Conform to dimensions and profiles shown unless moire stringent requirements are indicated. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 SHEET METALS A. General: Protect mechanical and other finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a strippable, temporary protective film before shipping. '"m' B. Copper Sheet: ASTM B 370, cold-rolled copper sheet, H00 or H01 temper. 076200 SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM Page 1 of 7 Project No. 01091 Proposed Renovations March 6, 2009 Park House Smith College, Northampton, MA 1 . Authorized Signature: <Insert signature. 2. Name: <Insert name. 3. Title: <Insert title. END OF SECTION 076100 076100 SHEET METAL ROOFING Page 15 of 15 Project No. 01091 Proposed Renovations March 6, 2009 Park House Smith College, Northampton, MA Installer and until cost and expense thereof have been paid by Owner or by another responsible party so designated. 3. Roofing Installer is responsible for damage to work covered by this Warranty but is not liable for consequential damages to building or building contents resulting from leaks or faults or defects of work. 4. During Warranty Period, if Owner allows alteration of work by anyone other than Roofing Installer, including cutting, patching, and maintenance in connection with penetrations, attachment of other work, and positioning of anything on roof, this Warranty shall become null and void on date of said alterations, but only to the extent said alterations affect work covered by this Warranty. If Owner engages Roofing Installer to perform said alterations, Warranty shall not become null and void unless Roofing Installer, before starting said work, shall have notified Owner in writing, showing reasonable cause for claim, that said alterations would likely damage or deteriorate work, thereby reasonably justifying a limitation or termination of this Warranty. 5. During Warranty Period, if original use of roof is changed and it becomes used for, but was not originally specified for, a promenade, work deck, spray-cooled surface, flooded basin, or other use or service more severe than originally specified, this Warranty shall become null and void on date of said change, but only to the extent said change affects work covered by this Warranty. 6. Owner shall promptly notify Roofing Installer of observed, known, or suspected leaks, defects, or deterioration and shall afford reasonable opportunity for Roofing Installer to inspect work and to examine evidence of such leaks, defects, or deterioration. 7. This Warranty is recognized to be the only warranty of Roofing Installer on said work and shall not operate to restrict or cut off Owner from other remedies and resources lawfully available to Owner in cases of roofing failure. Specifically, this Warranty shall not operate to relieve Roofing Installer of responsibility for performance of original work according to requirements of the Contract Documents, regardless of whether Contract was a contract directly with Owner or a subcontract with Owner's General Contractor. E. IN WITNESS THEREOF, this instrument has been duly executed this <Insert day> day of <Insert month>, <Insert year>. 076100 SHEET METAL ROOFING Page 14 of 15 Project No. 01091 Proposed Renovations March 6, 2009 Park House Smith College, Northampton, MA 1 . Owner: <Insert name of Owner>. 2. Address: <Insert address>. 3. Building Name/Type: <Insert information>. 4. Address: <Insert address>. 5. Area of Work: <Insert information>. 6. Acceptance Date: <Insert date>. 7. Warranty Period: <Insert time>. 8. Expiration Date: <Insert date>. B. AND WHEREAS Roofing Installer has contracted (either directly with Owner or indirectly as a subcontractor) to warrant said work against leaks and faulty or defective materials and workmanship for designated Warranty Period, C. NOW THEREFORE Roofing Installer hereby warrants, subject to terms and conditions herein set forth, that during Warranty Period he will, at his own cost and expense, make or cause to be made such repairs to or replacements of said work as are necessary to correct faulty and defective work and as are necessary to maintain said work in a watertight condition. D. This Warranty is made subject to the following terms and conditions: 1 . Specifically excluded from this Warranty are damages to work and other parts of the building, and to building contents, caused by: a. Lightning; b. Peak gust wind speed exceeding <Insert wind speed> mph; C. Fire; d. Failure of roofing system substrate, including cracking, settlement, excessive deflection, deterioration, and decomposition; e. Faulty construction of parapet walls, copings, chimneys, skylights, vents, equipment supports, and other edge conditions and penetrations of the work; f. Vapor condensation on bottom of roofing; and g. Activity on roofing by others, including construction contractors, maintenance personnel, other persons, and animals, whether authorized or unauthorized by Owner. 2. When work has been damaged by any of foregoing causes, Warranty shall be null and void until such damage has been repaired by Roofing 076100 SHEET METAL ROOFING Page 13 of 15 Project No. 01091 Proposed Renovations March 6, 2009 Park House Smith College, Northampton, MA 3. Install exposed flashing and trim without excessive oil canning, buckling, and tool marks and true to line and levels indicated, with exposed edges folded back to form hems. Install sheet metal flashing and trim to fit substrates and to result in waterproof and weather- resistant performance. 4. Expansion Provisions: Provide for thermal expansion of exposed flashing and trim. Space movement joints at a maximum of 10 feet with no joints allowed within 24 inches of corner or intersection. Where lapped expansion provisions cannot be used or would not be sufficiently weather resistant and waterproof, form expansion joints of intermeshing hooked flanges, not less than 1 inch deep, and filled with butyl sealant concealed within joints. 3.6 ERECTION TOLERANCES A. Installation Tolerances: Shim and align sheet metal roofing within installed tolerance of 1 /4 inch in 20 feet on slope and location lines as indicated and within 1 /8-inch offset of adjoining faces and of alignment of matching profiles. ,,,w*k 3.7 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Clean exposed metal surfaces of substances that interfere with uniform oxidation and weathering. B. Clean and neutralize flux materials. Clean off excess solder. C. Clean off excess sealants. D. Replace sheet metal roofing components that have been damaged or have deteriorated beyond successful repair by finish touchup or similar minor repair procedures. 3.8 ROOFING INSTALLER'S WARRANTY A. WHEREAS <Insert name> of <Insert address>, herein called the "Roofing Installer," has performed roofing and associated work ("work") on the following project: 076100 SHEET METAL ROOFING Page 12 of 15 Project No. 01091 Proposed Renovations March 6, 2009 Park House Smith College, Northampton, MA E. Standing-Seam Roofing: Attach standing-seam metal panels to substrate with cleats, double fastened at 12 inches o.c. Install panels reaching from eave to ridge before moving to adjacent panels. Before panels are interlocked, apply continuous bead of sealant to top of flange of lower panel. Lock standing seams by folding over twice so cleat and panel edges are completely engaged. 1 . Loose-lock panels at eave edges to continuous cleats and flanges at roof edge at gutters. 2. Fold over seams after locking at ridges and hips. 3.5 ACCESSORY INSTALLATION A. General: Install accessories with positive anchorage to building and weathertight mounting and provide for thermal expansion. Coordinate installation with flashings and other components. 1 . Install components required for a complete sheet metal roofing assembly including trim, copings, seam covers, flashings, sealants, gaskets, fillers, metal closures, closure strips, and similar items. 2. Install accessories integral to sheet metal roofing that are specified in Division 07 Section "Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim" to comply with that Section's requirements. B. Flashing and Trim: Comply with performance requirements, manufacturer's written installation instructions, and SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual." Provide concealed fasteners where possible, and set units true to line and level as indicated. Install work with laps, joints, and seams that will be permanently watertight and weather resistant. 1. Install flashing and trim as required to seal against weather and to provide finished appearance. Locations include, but are not limited to, eaves, rakes, corners, bases, framed openings, ridges, fasciae, and fillers. 2. Install continuous strip of self-adhering underlayment at edge of continuous flashing overlapping self-adhering underlayment, where "continuous seal strip" is indicated in SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual," and where indicated on Drawings. 076100 SHEET METAL ROOFING Page 11 of 1 5 Project No. 01091 Proposed Renovations March 6, 2009 Park House Smith College, Northampton, MA 1 . Install cleats to hold sheet metal panels in position. Attach each cleat with two fasteners to prevent rotation. 2. Fasten cleats not more than 12 inches o.c. Bend tabs over fastener head. 3. Provide expansion-type cleats and clips for roof panels that exceed 30 feet in length. B. Seal joints as shown and as required for watertight construction. For roofing with 3:12 slopes or less, use cleats at transverse seams. 1 . Where sealant-filled joints are used, embed hooked flanges of joint members not less than 1 inch into sealant. Form joints to completely conceal sealant. When ambient temperature at time of installation is moderate, between 40 and 70 deg F, set joint members for 50 percent movement each way. Adjust setting proportionately for installation at higher ambient temperatures. Do not install sealant-type joints at temperatures below 40 deg F. 2. Prepare joints and apply sealants to comply with requirements in Division 07 Section "joint Sealants." C. Soldered joints: Clean surfaces to be soldered, removing oils and foreign matter. Pre-tin edges of sheets to be soldered to a width of 1 -1 /2 inches, except reduce pre-tinning where pre-tinned surface would show in completed Work. 1 . Do not use torches for soldering. Heat surfaces to receive solder and flow solder into joint. Fill joint completely. Completely remove flux and spatter from exposed surfaces. 2. Copper Roofing: Tin edges of uncoated copper sheets, using solder for copper. D. Flat-Seam Roofing: Attach flat-seam metal panels to substrate with cleats, starting at eave and working upward toward ridge. After panels are in place, mallet seams and solder. 1 . Attach roofing panels with cleats spaced not more than 16 inches o.c. Lock and solder panels to base flashing. 2. Attach edge flashing to face of roof edge with continuous cleat fastened to roof substrate at 12 inches o.c. Lock panels to edge flashing and solder. 076100 SHEET METAL ROOFING Page 10 of 15 Project No. 01091 Proposed Renovations March 6, 2009 Park House Smith College, Northampton, MA 3.3 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. General: Anchor sheet metal roofing and other components of the Work securely in place, with provisions for thermal and structural movement. Install fasteners, solder, welding rods, protective coatings, separators, sealants, and other miscellaneous items as required for a complete roofing system and as recommended by fabricator for sheet metal roofing. 1 . Field cutting of sheet metal roofing by torch is not permitted. 2. Provide metal closures at rake edges, rake walls, and eaves. 3. Flash and seal sheet metal roofing with closure strips at eaves, rakes, and perimeter of all openings. Fasten with self-tapping screws. 4. Locate and space fastenings in uniform vertical and horizontal alignment. Predrill panels for fasteners. 5. Lap metal flashing over sheet metal roofing to allow moisture to run over and off the material. B. Fasteners: Use fasteners of sizes that will penetrate wood sheathing not less than 1 -1 /4 inches for nails and not less than 3/4 inch for wood screws. C. Metal Protection: Where dissimilar metals will contact each other or corrosive substrates, protect against galvanic action by painting contact surfaces with bituminous coating, by applying self-adhering sheet underlayment to each contact surface, or by other permanent separation as recommended by SMACNA. D. Conceal fasteners and expansion provisions where possible in exposed work and locate to minimize possibility of leakage. Cover and seal fasteners and anchors as required for a tight installation. 3.4 CUSTOM-FABRICATED SHEET METAL ROOFING INSTALLATION A. Fabricate and install work with lines and corners of exposed units true and accurate. Form exposed faces flat and free of buckles, excessive waves, and avoidable tool marks, considering temper and reflectivity of metal. Provide uniform, neat seams with minimum exposure of solder, welds, and sealant. Fold back sheet metal to form a hem on concealed side of exposed edges unless otherwise indicated. 076100 SHEET METAL ROOFING Page 9 of 15 Project No. 01091 Proposed Renovations March 6, 2009 Park House Smith College, Northampton, MA PART 3 - EXECUTION .. 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances, substrate, and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. 1 . Examine solid roof sheathing to verify that sheathing joints are supported by framing or blocking, that tops of fasteners are flush with surface, and that installation is within flatness tolerances required for finished roofing installation. 2. Verify that substrate is sound, dry, smooth, clean, sloped for drainage, and completely anchored, and that provision has been made for drainage, flashings, and penetrations through sheet metal roofing. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 UNDERLAYMENT INSTALLATION A. Felt Underlayment: Install felt underlayment on roof sheathing under sheet metal roofing. Use adhesive for temporary anchorage to minimize use of mechanical fasteners under sheet metal roofing. Apply at locations indicated on Drawings, in shingle fashion to shed water, with lapped joints of not less than 2 inches. 1 . Apply from eave to ridge. 2. Apply on roof not covered by self-adhering sheet underlayment. Lap edges of self-adhering sheet underlayment not less than 3 inches, in shingle fashion to shed water. B. Install flashings to cover underlayment to comply with requirements in Division 07 Section "Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim." C. Apply slip sheet before installing sheet metal roofing. 076100 SHEET METAL ROOFING Page 8 of 15 Project No. 01091 Proposed Renovations March 6, 2009 Park House Smith College, Northampton, MA E. Sealant joints: Where movable, nonexpans ion-type joints are indicated or required to produce weathertight seams, form metal to provide for proper installation of elastomeric sealant in compliance with SMACNA standards. F. Metal Protection: Where dissimilar metals will contact each other, protect against galvanic action by painting contact surfaces with bituminous coating, by applying self-adhering sheet underlayment to each contact surface, or by other permanent separation as recommended by fabricator of sheet metal roofing or manufacturers of the metals in contact. G. Sheet Metal Accessories: Custom fabricate flashings and trim to comply with recommendations in SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" that apply to design, dimensions, metal, and other characteristics of item indicated. Obtain field measurements for accurate fit before shop fabrication. 1 . Form exposed sheet metal accessories without excessive oil canning, buckling, and tool marks and true to line and levels indicated, with exposed edges folded back to form hems. 2. Seams: Fabricate nonmoving seams with flat-lock seams. Tin edges to be seamed, form seams, and solder. 3. Seams: Fabricate nonmoving seams with flat-lock seams. Form seams and seal with elastomeric sealant unless otherwise recommended by sealant manufacturer for intended use. 4. Sealed joints: Form nonexpansion but movable joints in metal to accommodate elastomeric sealant. 5. Conceal fasteners and expansion provisions where possible. Exposed fasteners are not allowed on faces of accessories exposed to view. 6. Fabricate cleats and attachment devices of sizes as recommended by SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" for application, but not less than thickness of metal being secured. H. Do not use graphite pencils to mark metal surfaces. Oak 076100 SHEET METAL ROOFING Page 7 of 15 Project No. 01091 Proposed Renovations March 6, 2009 Park House Smith College, Northampton, MA 2. Flashing and Trim: Formed from same material and with same finish as sheet metal roofing, minimum thickness matching the sheet metal roofing. 2.5 FABRICATION A. General: Custom fabricate sheet metal roofing to comply with details shown and recommendations in SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" that apply to the design, dimensions (panel width and seam height), geometry, metal thickness, and other characteristics of installation indicated. Fabricate sheet metal roofing and accessories at the shop to greatest extent possible. 1 . Flat-Seam Roofing: Form flat-seam panels from metal sheets 20 by 28 inches with 1 /2-inch notched and folded edges. 2. Standing-Seam Roofing: Form standing-seam panels with finished seam height of 1 inch. B. Fabrication Tolerances: Fabricate sheet metal roofing that is capable of installation to a tolerance of 1 /4 inch in 20 feet on slope and location lines as Amw indicated and within 1 /8-inch offset of adjoining faces and of alignment of matching profiles. C. Form exposed sheet metal work to fit substrates without excessive oil canning, buckling, and tool marks; true to line and levels indicated; and with exposed edges folded back to form hems. 1 . Lay out sheet metal roofing so transverse seams, if required, are made in direction of flow with higher panels overlapping lower panels. 2. Fold and cleat eaves and transverse seams in the shop. 3. Form and fabricate sheets, seams, strips, cleats, valleys, ridges, edge treatments, integral flashings, and other components of metal roofing to profiles, patterns, and drainage arrangements shown on Drawings and as required for leakproof construction. D. Expansion Provisions: Fabricate sheet metal roofing to allow for expansion in running work sufficient to prevent leakage, damage, and deterioration of the Work. Where lapped expansion provisions cannot be used, form expansion joints of intermeshing hooked flanges, not less than 1 inch deep, filled with butyl sealant concealed within joints. 076100 SHEET METAL ROOFING Page 6 of 15 Project No. 01091 Proposed Renovations March 6, 2009 Park House Smith College, Northampton, MA 2.3 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. General: Provide materials and types of fasteners, solder, welding rods, protective coatings, separators, sealants, and other miscellaneous items as required for a complete roofing system and as recommended by primary sheet metal manufacturer unless otherwise indicated. B. Fasteners: Wood screws, annular-threaded nails, self-tapping screws, self- locking rivets and bolts, and other suitable fasteners designed to withstand design loads. 1 . Fasteners for Copper Sheet: Copper, hardware bronze, or Series 300 stainless steel. C. Solder: 1 . For Copper: ASTM B 32, Grade Sn50, 50 percent tin and 50 percent lead. D. Elastomeric Sealant: ASTM C 920, elastomeric polysulfide polymer sealant; low modulus; of type, grade, class, and use classifications required to seal joints in sheet metal roofing and remain watertight. E. Butyl Sealant: ASTM C 1311 , single-component, solvent-release butyl rubber sealant; polyisobutylene plasticized; heavy bodied for hooked-type expansion joints with limited movement. F. Bituminous Coating: Cold-applied asphalt emulsion complying with ASTM D 1187. 2.4 ACCESSORIES A. Sheet Metal Accessories: Provide components required for a complete sheet metal roofing assembly including trim, copings, fasciae, corner units, clips, flashings, sealants, gaskets, fillers, metal closures, closure strips, and similar items. Match material and finish of sheet metal roofing unless otherwise indicated. 1 . Cleats: For mechanically seaming into joints and formed from the following materials: a. Copper Roofing: 20-oz./sq. ft. copper sheet. 076100 SHEET METAL ROOFING Page 5 of' 15 Project No. 01091 Proposed Renovations March 6, 2009 Park House Smith College, Northampton, MA 1 .8 WARRANTY ,,,,,,k A. Special Warranty: Warranty form at the end of this Section in which installer agrees to repair or replace components of sheet metal roofing that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 1 . Failures include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Structural failures, including but not limited to rupturing, cracking, or puncturing. b. Wrinkling or buckling. C. Loose parts. d. Failure to remain weathertight, including uncontrolled water leakage. e. Deterioration of metals, metal finishes, and other materials beyond normal weathering, including non-uniformity of color or finish. f. Galvanic action between sheet metal roofing and dissimilar materials. 2. Warranty Period: Two years from date of Substantial Completion. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 ROOFING SHEET METALS A. General: Protect mechanical and other finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a strippable, temporary protective film before shipping. B. Copper Sheet: ASTM B 370, cold-rolled copper sheet, H00 temper, 24 oz./sq. ft. unless otherwise indicated. 1 . Non-Patinated Exposed Finish: Mill 2.2 UNDERLAYMENT MATERIALS A. Felts: ASTM D 226, Type II (No. 30), asphalt-saturated organic felts. B. Slip Sheet: Building paper, 3-lb/100 sq. ft. minimum, rosin sized. 076100 SHEET METAL ROOFING Page 4 of 15 Project No. 01091 Proposed Renovations March 6, 2009 Park House Smith College, Northampton, MA . sheet metal roofing including installers of roof accessories and roof-- mounted equipment. 2. Review and finalize construction schedule and verify availability of materials, Installer's personnel, equipment, and facilities needed to make progress and avoid delays. 3. Review methods and procedures related to sheet metal roofing installation. 4. . Examine conditions for compliance with requirements, including flatness and attachment to structural members. 5. Review flashings, special roofing details, roof drainage, roof penetrations, equipment curbs, and condition of other construction that will affect sheet metal roofing. 6. Review governing regulations and requirements for insurance, certificates, and testing and inspecting if applicable. 7. Review temporary protection requirements for sheet metal roofing during and after roofing installation. 8. Review roof observation and repair procedures after sheet metal roofing installation. 9. Document proceedings, including corrective measures and actions required, and furnish copy of record to each participant. 1 .6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Do not store sheet metal roofing materials in contact with other materials that might cause staining, denting, or other surface damage. Store sheet metal roofing materials away from uncured concrete and masonry. 1 .7 COORDINATION A. Coordinate sheet metal roofing with rain drainage work, flashing, trim, and construction of other adjoining work to provide a leakproof, secure, and noncorrosive installation. OPW 076100 SHEET METAL ROOFING Page 3 of 15 Project No. 01091 Proposed Renovations March 6, 2009 Park House Smith College, Northampton, MA calculations on surface temperatures of materials due to both solar heat gain and nighttime-sky heat loss. 1 . Temperature Change (Range): 120 deg F, ambient; 180 deg F, material surfaces. 1 .4 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes for each manufactured product and accessory. B. Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by a qualified testing agency, for each product. C. Maintenance Data: For roofing sheet metals and accessories to include in maintenance manuals. D. Warranties: Sample of special warranties. 1 .5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Custom-Fabricated Sheet Metal Roofing Fabricator Qualifications: Shop that employs skilled workers who custom fabricate sheet metal roofing similar to that required for this Project and whose products have a record of successful in-service performance. B. Sheet Metal Roofing Standard: Comply with SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" unless more stringent requirements are specified or shown on Drawings. C. Copper Roofing Standard: Comply with CDA's "Copper in Architecture Handbook." Conform to dimensions and profiles shown unless more stringent requirements are indicated. D. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site. 1 . Meet with Owner, Architect, Owner's insurer if applicable, sheet metal roofing Installer, and installers whose work interfaces with or affects Amw 076100 SHEET METAL ROOFING Page 2 of 15 Project No. 01091 Proposed Renovations March 6, 2009 Park House Smith College, Northampton, MA SECTION 076100 - SHEET METAL ROOFING PART 1 - GENERAL 1 .1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1 .2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1 . Flat-seam metal roofing, custom fabricated. 2. Standing-seam metal roofing, custom fabricated. B. Related Sections: 1 . Division 07 Section "Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim" for gutters, downspouts, and flashings that are not part of sheet metal roofing. 2. Division 07 Section "Roof Accessories" for manufactured roof accessories. 3. Division 07 Section "Joint Sealants" for field-applied sealants adjoining sheet metal roofing. 1 .3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. General Performance: Sheet metal roofing system including, but not limited to, metal roof panels, cleats, clips, anchors and fasteners, sheet metal flashing integral with sheet metal roofing, fascia panels, trim, underlayment, and accessories shall comply with requirements indicated without failure due to defective manufacture, fabrication, installation, or other defects in construction. Sheet metal roofing shall remain watertight. B. Thermal Movements: Provide sheet metal roofing that allows for thermal movements from ambient and surface temperature changes. Base O 076100 SHEET METAL ROOFING Page 1 of' 15 Project No. 01091 Proposed Renovations March 6, 2009 Park House Smith College, Northampton, MA END OF SECTION 075323 Oak 075323 ETHYLENE-PROPYLENE-DIENE-MONOMER (EPDM) ROOFINGPage 1 I of 11 Project No. 01091 Proposed Renovations March 6, 2009 Park House Smith College, Northampton, MA E. Terminate and seal top of sheet flashings and mechanically anchor to ''"f substrate through termination bars. 3.5 WALKWAY INSTALLATION A. Flexible Walkways: Install walkway products in locations indicated. Adhere walkway products to substrate with compatible adhesive according to roofing system manufacturer's written instructions. 3.6 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Final Roof Inspection: Arrange for roofing system manufacturer's technical personnel to inspect roofing installation on completion and submit report to Architect. 1 . Notify Architect or Owner 48 hours in advance of date and time of inspection. B. Repair or remove and replace components of membrane roofing system ,to* where test results or inspections indicate that they do not comply with specified requirements. C. Additional testing and inspecting, at Contractor's expense, will be performed to determine compliance of replaced or additional work with specified requirements. 3.7 PROTECTING AND CLEANING A. Protect membrane roofing system from damage and wear during remainder of construction period. When remaining construction will not affect or endanger roofing, inspect roofing for deterioration and damage, describing its nature and extent in a written report, with copies to Architect and Owner. B. Correct deficiencies in or remove membrane roofing system that does not comply with requirements, repair substrates and repair or reinstall membrane roofing system to a condition free of damage and deterioration at time of Substantial Completion and according to warranty requirements. 075323 ETHYLENE-PROPYLENE-DIENE-MONOMER (EPDM) ROOFINGPage 10 of 11 Project No. 01091 Proposed Renovations March 6, 2009 Park House Smith College, Northampton, MA Apo* installation. Apply lap sealant and seal exposed edges of roofing membrane terminations. 1 . Apply a continuous bead of in-seam sealant before closing splice if required by membrane roofing system manufacturer. F. Tape Seam Installation: Clean and prime both faces of splice areas, apply splice tape, and firmly roll side and end laps of overlapping roofing membranes according to manufacturer's written instructions to ensure a watertight seam installation. Apply lap sealant and seal exposed edges of roofing membrane terminations. G. Repair tears, voids, and lapped seams in roofing that does not meet requirements. H. Spread sealant or mastic bed over deck drain flange at deck drains and securely seal roofing membrane in place with clamping ring. I. Install roofing membrane and auxiliary materials to tie in to existing roofing. J. Apply epichlorohydrin sheet over roofing membrane at locations indicated. 3.4 BASE FLASHING INSTALLATION A. Install sheet flashings and preformed flashing accessories and adhere to substrates according to membrane roofing system manufacturer's written instructions. B. Apply bonding adhesive to substrate and underside of sheet flashing at required rate and allow to partially dry. Do not apply bonding adhesive to seam area of flashing. C. Flash penetrations and field-formed inside and outside corners with cured or uncured sheet flashing. D. Clean splice areas, apply splicing cement, and firmly roll side and end laps of overlapping sheets to ensure a watertight seam installation. Apply lap sealant and seal exposed edges of sheet flashing terminations. 075323 ETHYLENE-PROPYLENE-DIENE-MONOMER (EPDM) ROOFINGPage 9 of 11 Project No. 01091 Proposed Renovations March 6, 2009 Park House Smith College, Northampton, MA 2. Verify that wood blocking, curbs, and nailers are securely anchored to roof deck at penetrations and terminations and that nailers match thicknesses of insulation. 3. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Clean substrate of dust, debris, moisture, and other substances detrimental to roofing installation according to roofing system manufacturer's written instructions. Remove sharp projections. B. Prevent materials from entering and clogging roof drains and conductors and from spilling or migrating onto surfaces of other construction. Remove roof- drain plugs when no work is taking place or when rain is forecast. C. Complete terminations and base flashings and provide temporary seals to prevent water from entering completed sections of roofing system at the end of the workday or when rain is forecast. Remove and discard temporary seals before beginning work on adjoining roofing. 3.3 ADHERED ROOFING MEMBRANE INSTALLATION A. Installroofing membrane over area to receive roofing according to membrane roofing system manufacturer's written instructions. Unroll roofing membrane and allow to relax before installing. B. Accurately align roofing membrane and maintain uniform side and end laps of minimum dimensions required by manufacturer. Stagger end laps. C. Mechanically or adhesively fasten roofing membrane securely at terminations, penetrations, and perimeter of roofing. D. Apply roofing membrane with side laps shingled with slope of roof deck where possible. E. Adhesive Seam Installation: Clean both faces of splice areas, apply splicing cement, and firmly roll side and end laps of overlapping roofing membranes according to manufacturer's written instructions to ensure a watertight seam 075323 ETHYLENE-PROPYLENE-DIENE-MONOMER (EPDM) ROOFINGPage 8 of 1 1 Project No. 01091 Proposed Renovations March 6, 2009 Park House Smith College, Northampton, MA 6. Resistance to Oil Aging: 15 percent maximum mass change after 168 hours' immersion in diesel fuel No. 2 at 158 deg F; ASTM D 471 . D. Bonding Adhesive: Manufacturer's standard bonding adhesive. E. Seaming Material: Manufacturer's standard synthetic-rubber polymer primer and 3-inch- wide minimum, butyl splice tape with release film. F. Lap Sealant: Manufacturer's standard single-component sealant, color to match roofing membrane. G. Water Cutoff Mastic: Manufacturer's standard butyl mastic sealant. H. Metal Termination Bars: Manufacturer's standard predrilled stainless-steel or aluminum bars, approximately 1 by 1 /8 inch thick; with anchors. I. Miscellaneous Accessories: Provide pourable sealers, preformed cone and vent sheet flashings, preformed inside and outside corner sheet flashings, T- joint covers, in-seam sealants, termination reglets, cover strips, and other accessories. 2.3 WALKWAYS A. Flexible Walkways: Factory-formed, nonporous, heavy-duty, solid-rubber, slip-resisting, surface-textured walkway pads or rolls, approximately 3/16 inch thick, and acceptable to membrane roofing system manufacturer. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with the following requirements and other conditions affecting performance of roofing system: 1 . Verify that roof openings and penetrations are in place and set and braced and that roof drains are securely clamped in place. 075323 ETHYLENE-PROPYLENE-DIENE-MONOMER (EPDM) ROOFINGPage 7 of 11 Project No. 01091 Proposed Renovations March 6, 2009 Park House Smith College, Northampton, MA 1 . Special warranty includes roofing membrane, base flashings, fasteners lowk walkway products and other components of membrane roofing system. 2. Warranty Period: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 EPDM ROOFING MEMBRANE A. EPDM Roofing Membrane: ASTM D 4637, Type I, nonreinforced uniform, flexible sheet made from EPDM, and as follows: 1 . Manufacturer: a. Carlisle SynTec Incorporated. 2. Thickness: 60 mils, nominal. 3. Exposed Face Color: Black. 2.2 AUXILIARY MATERIALS low A. General: Auxiliary materials recommended by roofing system manufacturer for intended use and compatible with membrane roofing. 1 . Liquid-type auxiliary materials shall meet VOC limits of authorities having jurisdiction. B. Sheet Flashing: 60-mil- thick EPDM, partially cured or cured, according to application. C. Epichlorohydrin Sheet: 60-mil- thick, unreinforced flexible sheet with the following typical properties as determined per ASTM test method indicated: 1 . Tensile Strength: 1500 psi; ASTM D 412. 2. Ultimate Elongation: 200 percent; ASTM D 412. 3. Tear Resistance: 1 50 Ibf/in.; ASTM D 412. 4. Brittleness Temperature: Minus 20 deg F; ASTM D 746. S. Resistance to Ozone Aging: No cracks after 168 hours' exposure of 50 percent elongated sample at 104 deg F and 100-pphm ozone; ASTM D 1149. 075323 ETHYLENE-PROPYLENE-DIENE-MONOMER (EPDM) ROOFINGPage 6 of 1 1 Project No. 01091 Proposed Renovations March 6, 2009 Park House Smith College, Northampton, MA 8. Review temporary protection requirements for roofing system during and after installation. 9. Review roof observation and repair procedures after roofing installation. 1 .7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver roofing materials to Project site in original containers with seals unbroken and labeled with manufacturer's name, product brand name and type, date of manufacture, and directions for storing and mixing with other components. B. Store liquid materials in their original undamaged containers in a clean, dry, protected location and within the temperature range required by roofing system manufacturer. Protect stored liquid material from direct sunlight. 1 . Discard and legally dispose of liquid material that cannot be applied within its stated shelf life. C. Protect roof insulation materials from physical damage and from deterioration by sunlight, moisture, soiling, and other sources. Store in a dry location. Comply with insulation manufacturer's written instructions for handling, storing, and protecting during installation. D. Handle and store roofing materials and place equipment in a manner to avoid permanent deflection of deck. 1 .8 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Weather Limitations: Proceed with installation only when existing and forecasted weather conditions permit roofing system to be installed according to manufacturer's written instructions and warranty requirements,. 1 .9 WARRANTY A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form, without monetary limitation, in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of membrane roofing system that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. Failure includes roof leaks. 075323 ETHYLENE-PROPYLENE-DIENE-MONOMER (EPDM) ROOFINGPage 5 of 1 1 Project No. 01091 Proposed Renovations March 6, 2009 Park House Smith College, Northampton, MA 3. Examine deck substrate conditions and finishes for compliance with requirements, including flatness and fastening. 4. Review structural loading limitations of roof deck during and after roofing. 5. Review base flashings, special roofing details, roof drainage, roof penetrations, equipment curbs, and condition of other construction that will affect roofing system. 6. Review governing regulations and requirements for insurance and certificates if applicable. 7. Review temporary protection requirements for roofing system during and after installation. 8. Review roof observation and repair procedures after roofing installation. F. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site. Comply with requirements in Division 01 Section "Project Management and Coordination." Review methods and procedures related to roofing system including, but not limited to, the following: 1 . Meet with Owner; Architect; Owner's insurer if applicable; testing and inspecting agency representative; roofing Installer; roofing system manufacturer's representative; deck Installer; and installers whose work interfaces with or affects roofing, including installers of roof accessories and roof-mounted equipment. 2. Review methods and procedures related to roofing installation, including manufacturer's written instructions. 3. Review and finalize construction schedule and verify availability of materials, Installer's personnel, equipment, and facilities needed to make progress and avoid delays. 4. Examine deck substrate conditions and finishes for compliance with requirements, including flatness and fastening. 5. Review structural loading limitations of roof deck during and after roofing. 6. Review base flashings, special roofing details, roof drainage, roof penetrations, equipment curbs, and condition of other construction that will affect roofing system. 7. Review governing regulations and requirements for insurance and certificates if applicable. 075323 ETHYLENE-PROPYLENE-DIENE-MONOMER (EPDM) ROOFINGPage 4 of 1 1 Project No. 01091 Proposed Renovations March 6, 2009 Park House Smith College, Northampton, MA E. Maintenance Data: For roofing system to include in maintenance manuals. F. Warranties: Special warranties specified in this Section. 1 .6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: A qualified firm that is approved, authorized, or licensed by roofing system manufacturer to install manufacturer's product: and that is eligible to receive manufacturer's warranty. B. Manufacturer Qualifications: A qualified manufacturer that has FMG approval for membrane roofing system identical to that used for this Project. C. Source Limitations: Obtain components for membrane roofing system from same manufacturer as roofing membrane. D. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Provide membrane roofing materials with the fire-test-response characteristics indicated as determined by testing identical products per test method below by UL, FMG, or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Materials shall be identified with appropriate markings of applicable testing and inspecting agency. 1 . Exterior Fire-Test Exposure: Class A; ASTM E 108, for application and roof slopes indicated. 2. Fire-Resistance Ratings: ASTM E 119, for fire-resistance-rated roof assemblies of which roofing system is a part. E. Preliminary Roofing Conference: Before starting roof deck construction, conduct conference at Project site. Comply with requirements for preinstallation conferences in Division 01 Section Project Management and Coordination." Review methods and procedures related to roof deck construction and roofing system including, but not limited to, the following: 1 . Review methods and procedures related to roofing installation, including manufacturer's written instructions. 2. Review and finalize construction schedule and verify availability of materials, Installer's personnel, equipment, and facilities needed to make progress and avoid delays. 075323 ETHYLENE-PROPYLENE-DIENE-MONOMER (EPDM) ROOFINGPage 3 of 1 1 Project No. 01091 Proposed Renovations March 6, 2009 Park House Smith College, Northampton, MA Mechanically Fastened Roofing Systems," after multiplication by a safety factor. 1 .4 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. General: Provide installed roofing membrane and base flashings that remain watertight; do not permit the passage of water; and resist specified uplift pressures, thermally induced movement, and exposure to weather without failure. B. Material Compatibility: Provide roofing materials that are compatible with one another under conditions of service and application required, as demonstrated by roofing membrane manufacturer based on testing and field experience. C. FMG Listing: Provide roofing membrane, base flashings, and component materials that comply with requirements in FMG 4450 and FMG 4470 as part of a membrane roofing system and that are listed in FMG's "Approval Guide" for Class 1 or noncombustible construction, as applicable. Identify materials Aff* with FMG markings. 1 . Fire/Windstorm Classification: Class ]A- 90. 2. Hail Resistance: MH. 1 .5 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. B. Manufacturer Certificates: Signed by roofing manufacturer certifying that roofing system complies with requirements specified in "Performance Requirements" Article. 1 . Submit evidence of meeting performance requirements. C. Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by manufacturer and witnessed by a qualified testing agency, for components of roofing system. D. Research/Evaluation Reports: For components of membrane roofing system. 075323 ETHYLENE-PROPYLENE-DIENE-MONOMER (EPDM) ROOFINGPage 2 of 1 1 Project No. 01 091 Proposed Renovations March 6, 2009 Park House Smith College, Northampton, MA SECTION 075323 - ETHYLENE-PROPYLENE-DIENE-MONOMER (EPDM) ROOFING PART 1 - GENERAL 1 .1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1 .2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1 . Adhered membrane roofing system. B. Related Sections include the following: 1 . Division 06 Section "Rough Carpentry" for wood nailers, curbs, and blocking; and for wood-based, structural-use roof deck panels. 2. Division 07 Section "Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim" for metal roof penetration flashings, flashings, and counterflashings. 3. Division 07 Section "Joint Sealants." 1 .3 DEFINITIONS A. Roofing Terminology: Refer to ASTM D 1079 and glossary of NRCA's "The NRCA Roofing and Waterproofing Manual" for definition of terms related to roofing work in this Section. B. Design Uplift Pressure: The uplift pressure, calculated according to procedures in SPRI's "Wind Load Design Guide for Fully Adhered and Mechanically Fastened Roofing Systems," before multiplication by a safety factor. C. Factored Design Uplift Pressure: The uplift pressure, calculated according to procedures in SPRI's "Wind Load Design Guide for Fully Adhered and 075323 ETHYLENE-PROPYLENE-DIENE-MONOMER (EPDM) ROOFINGPage 1 of 1 1 Project No. 01091 Proposed Renovations March 6, 2009 Park House Smith College, Northampton, MA 1 . Authorized Signature: <Insert signature. 2. Name: <Insert name. 3. Title: <Insert title. END OF SECTION 073126 073126 SLATE SHINGLES Page 11 of 1 1 Project No. 01091 Proposed Renovations March 6, 2009 Park House Smith College, Northampton, MA Installer and until cost and expense thereof have been paid by Owner or by another responsible party so designated. 3. Roofing Installer is responsible for damage to work covered by this Warranty but is not liable for consequential damages to building or building contents resulting from leaks or faults or defects of work. 4. During Warranty Period, if Owner allows alteration of work by anyone other than Roofing Installer, including cutting, patching, and maintenance in connection with penetrations, attachment of other work, and positioning of anything on roof, this Warranty shall become null and void on date of said alterations, but only to the extent said alterations affect work covered by this Warranty. If Owner engages Roofing Installer to perform said alterations, Warranty shall not become null and void unless Roofing Installer, before starting said work, shall have notified Owner in writing, showing reasonable cause for claim, that said alterations would likely damage or deteriorate work, thereby reasonably justifying a limitation or termination of this Warranty. 5. During Warranty Period, if original use of roof is changed and it becomes used for, but was not originally specified for, a promenade, work deck, spray-cooled surface, flooded basin, or other use or service Agw more severe than originally specified, this Warranty shall become null and void on date of said change, but only to the extent said change affects work covered by this Warranty. 6. Owner shall promptly notify Roofing Installer of observed, known, or suspected leaks, defects, or deterioration and shall afford reasonable opportunity for Roofing Installer to inspect work and to examine evidence of such leaks, defects, or deterioration. 7. This Warranty is recognized to be the only warranty of Roofing Installer on said work and shall not operate to restrict or cut off Owner from other remedies and resources lawfully available to Owner in cases of roofing failure. Specifically, this Warranty shall not operate to relieve Roofing Installer of responsibility for performance of original work according to requirements of the Contract Documents, regardless of whether Contract was a contract directly with Owner or a subcontract with Owner's General Contractor. E. IN WITNESS THEREOF, this instrument has been duly executed this <Insert day> day of <Insert month>, <Insert year>. 073126 SLATE SHINGLES Page 10 of 11 Project No. Ol 091 Proposed Renovations March 6, 2009 Park House Smith College, Northampton, MA 2. Address: <Insert address>. 3. Building Name/Type: <Insert information>. 4. Address: <Insert address>. 5. Area of Work: <Insert information>. 6. Acceptance Date: <Insert date>. 7. Warranty Period: <Insert time>. 8. Expiration Date: <Insert date>. B. AND WHEREAS Roofing Installer has contracted (either directly with Owner or indirectly as a subcontractor) to warrant said work against leaks and faulty or defective materials and workmanship for designated Warranty Period, C. NOW THEREFORE Roofing Installer hereby warrants, subject to terms and conditions herein set forth, that during Warranty Period he will, at his own cost and expense, make or cause to be made such repairs to or replacements of said work as are necessary to correct faulty and defective work and as are necessary to maintain said work in a watertight condition. D. This Warranty is made subject to the following terms and conditions: 1 . Specifically excluded from this Warranty are damages to work and other parts of the building, and to building contents, caused by: a. Lightning; b. Peak gust wind speed exceeding 80 mph; C. Fire; d. Failure of roofing system substrate, including cracking, settlement, excessive deflection, deterioration, and decomposition; e. Faulty construction of parapet walls, copings, chimneys, skylights, vents, equipment supports, and other edge conditions and penetrations of the work; f. Vapor condensation on bottom of roofing; and g. Activity on roofing by others, including construction contractors, maintenance personnel, other persons, and animals, whether authorized or unauthorized by Owner. 2. When work has been damaged by any of the foregoing causes, Warranty shall be null and void until such damage has been repaired by Roofing 073126 SLATE SHINGLES Page 9 oi- 1 1 Project No. 01091 Proposed Renovations March 6, 2009 Park House Smith College, Northampton, MA F. Extend shingle starter course and succeeding courses 1 inch over fasciae at rakes. G. Cut and fit slate neatly around roof vents, pipes, ventilators, and other projections through roof. H. Hang slate with two slating nails for each shingle with nail heads lightly touching slate. Do not drive nails home drawing slates downward or leave nail head protruding enough to interfere with overlapping shingle above. I. Open Valleys: Cut slate shingles to form straight lines at open valleys, trimming upper concealed corners of shingles. Maintain uniform width of exposed open valley from highest to lowest point. 1 . Do not nail shingles to valley metal flashings. 3.5 SNOW-GUARD INSTALLATION A. Snow-Guard Rails: Install rows of snow-guard rails at existing locations according to manufacturer's written installation instructions. 1 . Document existing snow guard locations during existing slate removal. Confirm anchorage location for new rails and existence of adequate blocking and anchorage for installation. 3.6 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Remove and replace damaged or broken slate shingles. B. Remove excess slate and debris from Project site. 3.7 ROOFING INSTALLER'S WARRANTY A. WHEREAS <Insert name> of <Insert address>, herein called the "Roofing Installer," has performed roofing and associated work ("work") on the following project: I . Owner: <Insert name of Owner>. 073126 SLATE SHINGLES Page 8 of 1 1 Project No. 01091 Proposed Renovations March 6, 2009 Park House Smith College, Northampton, MA D. Cricket Flashings: Install against the roof-penetrating element, extending concealed flange beneath upslope slate shingles and beyond each side. E. Open-Valley Flashings: Install centrally in valleys, lapping ends at least 8 inches in direction to shed water. Fasten upper end of each length to roof deck beneath overlap. 1 . Secure hemmed flange edges into metal cleats spaced 12 inches apart and fastened to roof deck. 2. Adhere 9-inch- wide strips of self-adhering sheet to metal flanges and to self-adhering sheet underlayment. F. Eave Drip Edges: Install beneath underlayment and fasten to roof deck. G. Pipe Flashings: Form flashing around pipe penetrations and slate shingles. Fasten and seal to slate shingles. 3.4 SLATE-SHINGLE INSTALLATION a A. General: Beginning at eaves, install slate shingles according to manufacturer's written instructions and to details and recommendations in NRCA's "The NRCA Roofing and Waterproofing Manual." 1 . install wood nailer strip cant at eave edges. 2. Install shingle starter course chamfered face down. B. Install first and succeeding shingle courses with chamfered face up. Install full-width first course at rake edge. 1 . Offset joints of uniform-width slate shingles by half the shingle width in succeeding courses. 2. Offset joints of random-width slate shingles a minimum of 3 inches in succeeding courses. C. Maintain a 4-inch- minimum head lap between succeeding shingle courses. D. Maintain uniform exposure of shingle courses between eaves and ridge. E. Extend shingle starter course and first course 1 inch over fasciae at eaves. 073126 SLATE SHINGLES Page 7 of 1 1 Project No. 01091 Proposed Renovations March 6, 2009 Park House Smith College, Northampton, MA 3.2 UNDERLAYMENT INSTALLATION A. General: Comply with underlayment manufacturer's written installation instructions applicable to products and applications indicated unless more stringent requirements apply. B. Self-Adhering Sheet Underlayment: Install, wrinkle free, on roof deck. Comply with low-temperature installation restrictions of underlayment manufacturer if applicable. Install at locations indicated, lapped in direction to shed water. Lap sides not less than 3-1 /2 inches. Lap ends not less than 6 inches, staggered 24 inches between courses. Roll laps with roller. Cover underlayment within seven days. 1 . Prime concrete and masonry surfaces to receive self-adhering sheet underlayment. 2. Valleys: Extend from lowest to highest point 18 inches on each side. 3. Hips: Extend 18 inches on each side. 4. Ridges: Extend 36 inches on each side. 5. Dormers, Chimneys, Skylights, and Other Roof-Penetrating Elements: Extend 18 inches beyond penetrating elements and return vertically against penetrating elements not less than 4 inches. 6. Roof-Slope Transitions: Extend 18 inches on each roof slope. 3.3 METAL FLASHING INSTALLATION A. General: Install metal flashings and other sheet metal to comply with requirements in Division 07 Section "Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim." 1 . Install metal flashings according to recommendations in NRCA's "The NRCA Roofing and Waterproofing Manual." B. Apron Flashings: Extend lower flange over and beyond each side of downslope slate shingles and up the vertical surface. C. Step Flashings: Install with a head lap of 3 inches and extend both horizontally and vertically. Install with lower edge of flashing just upslope of, and concealed by, butt of overlying slate shingle. Fasten to roof deck only. 073126 SLATE SHINGLES Page 6 of 1 1 Project No. 01091 Proposed Renovations March 6, 2009 Park House Smith College, Northampton, MA 2. Step Flashings: Fabricate with a head lap of 3 inches and a minimum extension of 5 inches both horizontally and vertically. 3. Cricket Flashings: Fabricate with concealed flange extending a minimum of 24 inches beneath upslope slate shingles and 6 inches beyond each side of chimney and 6 inches above the roof plane. 4. Open-Valley Flashings: Fabricate in lengths not exceeding 10 feet with 1 -inch- high, inverted-V profile at center of valley and equal flange widths of 10 inches. 5. Drip Edges: Fabricate in lengths not exceeding 10 feet with 2-inch roof-deck flange and 1-1 /2-inch fascia flange with 3/8-inch hemmed drip at lower edge. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Existing slate removal: Refer to Division 2 Section "Selective Demolition" for ook procedures regarding removal of existing slate and protection of the building. B. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. 1 . Examine roof sheathing to verify that sheathing joints are supported by framing and blocking or metal clips and that installation is within flatness tolerances. 2. Verify that substrate is sound, dry, smooth, clean, sloped for drainage, and completely anchored and that provision has been made for flashings and penetrations through roofing. C. Prepare written report, endorsed by Installer, listing conditions detrimental 'to performance of the Work. D. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 073126 SLATE SHINGLES Page 5 of 11 Project No. 01091 Proposed Renovations March 6, 2009 Park House Smith College, Northampton, MA a. Carlisle Coatings & Waterproofing, Inc. b. Grace, W. R. & Co. - Conn. C. Henry Company. 2.3 ACCESSORIES A. Asphalt Roofing Cement: ASTM D 4586, Type II, asbestos free. B. Butyl Sealant: ASTM C 1311 , single-component, solvent-release butyl rubber sealant; polyisobutylene plasticized; heavy bodied. C. Elastomeric Sealant: ASTM C 920, elastomeric polysulfide polymer sealant; of type, grade, class, and use classifications required to seal joints in slate- shingle roofing and remain watertight. D. Slating Nails: ASTM F 1667, copper, smooth shanked, wire nails; 0.135-inch minimum thickness; sharp pointed; with 3/8-inch- minimum diameter flat head; of sufficient length to penetrate a minimum of 3/4 inch into sheathing. 1 . Where nails are in contact with metal flashing, use nails made from same metal as flashing. E. Wood Nailer Strips: Comply with requirements in Division 06 Section "Rough Carpentry." 2.4 METAL FLASHING AND TRIM A. General: Comply with requirements in Division 07 Section "Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim." 1 . Sheet Metal: 26 oz. Copper. B. Fabricate sheet metal flashing and trim to comply with recommendations that apply to design, dimensions, metal, and other. characteristics of the item in SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual." 1 . Apron Flashings: Fabricate with lower flange extending a minimum of 6 inches over and 4 inches beyond each side of downslope slate shingles and 6 inches up the vertical surface. ,M#k, 073126 SLATE SHINGLES Page 4 of 1 1 Project No. 01091 Proposed Renovations March 6, 2009 Park House Smith College, Northampton, MA PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 SLATE SHINGLES A. Slate Shingles: ASTM C 406, Grade S1 ; hard, dense, and sound; chamfered edges, with nail holes machine punched or drilled and countersunk. No broken or cracked slates, no broken exposed corners, and no broken corners on covered ends that could sacrifice nailing strength or laying of a watertight roof. 1 . Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the following: a. New England Slate Company (The). 2. Thickness: Nominal 3/16 inch 1 /4 to 3/8 inch. 3. Surface Texture: Smooth. 4. Size: Match existing. 5. Nail Holes: Two per shingle. 6. Butt Shape: Standard square cut. 7. Color: To be selected by Architect. 8. Weather-Exposure Color Change: Unfading. B. Starter Slate: Slate shingles with chamfered nail holes front-side punched. 1 . Length: Exposure of slate shingle plus head lap. 2.2 UNDERLAYMENT MATERIALS A. Self-Adhering Sheet Underlayment, High Temperature: Minimum of 30- to 40-mil- thick, slip-resisting, polyethylene-film-reinforced top surface laminated to layer of butyl or SBS-modified asphalt adhesive, with release paper backing; cold applied. Provide primer for adjoining concrete or masonry surfaces to receive underlayment. 1 . Thermal Stability: Stable after testing at 240 deg F; ASTM D 1970. 2. Low-Temperature Flexibility: Passes after testing at minus 20 deg F; ASTM D 1970. 00W 3. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 073126 SLATE SHINGLES Page 3 of 1 1 Project No. 01091 Proposed Renovations March 6, 2009 Park House Smith College, Northampton, MA 3. Exposed Valley Lining: 12 inches square. ""ft' C. Warranty: Sample of special warranty. 1 .5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Source Limitations: Obtain each color of slate shingle from single quarry capable of producing slate of consistent quality in appearance and physical properties. B. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site. 1 .6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Store underlayment rolls on end, on pallets or other raised surfaces. Do not double stack rolls. 1 . Handle, store, and place roofing materials in a manner to avoid significant or permanent damage to roof deck or structural supporting members. B. Protect unused underlayment from weather, sunlight, and moisture when left overnight or when roofing work is not in progress. 1 .7 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Limitations: Proceed with installation of self-adhering sheet underlayment only within the range of ambient and substrate temperatures recommended by manufacturer. 1 .8 WARRANTY A. Special Warranty: Standard form in which roofing Installer agrees to repair or replace slate roofing that fails in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 1 . Warranty Period: Two years from date of Substantial Completion. 073126 SLATE SHINGLES Page 2 of 1 1 Project No. 01091 Proposed Renovations March 6, 2009 Park House Smith College, Northampton, MA SECTION 073126 - SLATE SHINGLES PART 1 - GENERAL 1 .1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1 .2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1 . Slate shingles. 2. Underlayment. B. Related Sections: 1 . Division 01 Section "Allowances" for unit price for roofing slate. 2. Division 06 Section "Sheathing" for roof sheathing. 3. Division 07 Section "Roof Accessories" for set-on ridge vents. 1 .3 DEFINITIONS A. Roofing Terminology: See ASTM D 1079 and glossary in NRCA's 'The NRCA Roofing and Waterproofing Manual" for definitions of terms related to roofing work in this Section. 1 .4 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. B. Samples for Verification: For the following products, of sizes indicated, to verify color selected: 1 . Slate Shingle: Full size, of each color, size, texture, and shape. ,AOW 2. Fasteners: Three fasteners of each type, length, and finish. 073126 SLATE SHINGLES Page 1 of 11 Project No. 01091 Proposed Renovations March 6, 2009 Park House Smith College, Northampton, MA 3.6 INSTALLATION OF INSULATION FOR SOUND ATTENUATION A. Install 3-inch- (76-mm-) thick, unfaced slag-wool-fiber/rock-wool-fiber blanket insulation at partitions and floor/ceiling assemblies designated to receive sound attenuation and the following locations: 1 . Student room walls. 2. Bathroom ceilings under student rooms. 3. Student room ceilings. 3.7 INSTALLATION OF VAPOR RETARDERS A. General: Extend vapor retarder to extremities of areas to be protected from vapor transmission. Secure in place with adhesives or other anchorage system as indicated. Extend vapor retarder to cover miscellaneous voids in insulated substrates, including those filled with loose-fiber insulation. B. Seal vertical joints in vapor retarders over framing by lapping not less than two wall studs. Fasten vapor retarders to wood framing at top, end, and bottom edges; at perimeter of wall openings; and at lap joints. Space fasteners 16 inches (400 mm) o.c. C. Seal joints caused by pipes, conduits, electrical boxes, and similar items penetrating vapor retarders with vapor-retarder tape to create an airtight seal between penetrating objects and vapor retarder. D. Repair tears or punctures in vapor retarders immediately before concealment by other work. Cover with vapor-retarder tape or another layer of vapor retarder. 3.8 PROTECTION A. Protect installed insulation and vapor retarders from damage due to harmful weather exposures, physical abuse, and other causes. Provide temporary coverings or enclosures where insulation is subject to abuse and cannot be concealed and protected by permanent construction immediately after installation. END OF SECTION 072100 072100 THERMAL INSULATION Page 8 of 8 Project No. 01091 Proposed Renovations March 6, 2009 Park House Smith College, Northampton, MA 2. Place insulation in cavities formed by framing members to produce a friction fit between edges of insulation and adjoining framing members, 3. Maintain 3-inch (76-mm) clearance of insulation around recessed lighting fixtures. 4. For wood-framed construction, install mineral-fiber blankets according to ASTM C 1320. a. With faced blankets having stapling flanges, lap blanket flange over flange of adjacent blanket to maintain continuity of vapor retarder once finish material is installed over it. C. Place loose-fill insulation into spaces indicated, by machine blowing, to comply with ASTM C 1015. Level horizontal applications to uniform thickness as indicated, lightly settle to uniform density, but do not compact excessively. 1 . For cellulosic-fiber loose-fill insulation, comply with the Cellulose Insulation Manufacturers Association's Special Report #3, "Standard Practice for Installing Cellulose Insulation." 2. Install insulation troughs at eaves of rafters to receive loose-fill insulation extending four inches higher than indicated thickness. 3. Install loose-fill insulation to existing walls from the exterior. Remove and reinstall siding after filling wall cavities. 4. Install loose-fill insulation in rafter and wall cavities that are schedule for slate replacement after slate has been remove and prior to installation of underlayment. Coordinate work with roofing contractor. Only install in cavities that will be protected the same day. D. Stuff glass-fiber loose-fill insulation into miscellaneous voids and cavity spaces where shown. Compact to approximately 40 percent of normal maximum volume equaling a density of approximately 2.5 lb/cu. ft. (40 kg/cu. m). 072100 THERMAL INSULATION Page 7 of 8 Project No. 01091 Proposed Renovations March 6, 2009 Park House Smith College, Northampton, MA C. Extend insulation in thickness indicated to envelop entire area to be insulated. Cut and fit tightly around obstructions and fill voids with insulation. Remove projections that interfere with placement. D. Water-Piping Coordination: If water piping is located within insulated exterior walls, coordinate location of piping to ensure that it is placed on warm side of insulation and insulation encapsulates piping. E. For preformed insulating units, provide sizes to fit applications indicated and selected from manufacturer's standard thicknesses, widths, and lengths. Apply single layer of insulation units to produce thickness indicated unless multiple layers are otherwise shown or required to make up total thickness. 3.4 INSTALLATION OF PERIMETER AND UNDER-SLAB INSULATION A. On vertical surfaces, set insulation units in adhesive applied according to manufacturer's written instructions. Use adhesive recommended by insulation manufacturer. B. On horizontal surfaces, loosely lay insulation units according to manufacturer's written instructions. Stagger end joints and tightly abut insulation units. C. Protect top surface of horizontal insulation from damage during concrete work by applying protection course with joints butted. 3.5 INSTALLATION OF GENERAL BUILDING INSULATION A. Apply insulation units to substrates by method indicated, complying with manufacturer's written instructions. If no specific method is indicated, bond units to substrate with adhesive or use mechanical anchorage to provide permanent placement and support of units. B. Install mineral-fiber insulation in cavities formed by framing members according to the following requirements: 1 . Use insulation widths and lengths that fill the cavities formed by framing members. If more than one length is required to fill cavity, provide lengths that will produce a snug fit between ends. 072100 THERMAL INSULATION Page 6 of 8 Project No. 01091 Proposed Renovations March 6, 2009 Park House Smith College, Northampton, MA b. Reef Industries, Inc.; Griffolyn T-65. 2.6 AUXILIARY INSULATING MATERIALS A. Adhesive for Bonding Insulation: Product with demonstrated capability to bond insulation securely to substrates indicated without damaging insulation and substrates. B. Eave Ventilation Troughs: Preformed, rigid fiberboard or plastic sheets designed and sized to fit between roof framing members and to provide cross ventilation between insulated attic spaces and vented eaves. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements of Sections in which substrates and related work are specified and for other conditions affecting performance. 1 . Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Clean substrates of substances harmful to insulation or vapor retarders, including removing projections capable of puncturing vapor retarders or of interfering with insulation attachment. 3.3 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Comply with insulation manufacturer's written instructions applicable to products and application indicated. B. Install insulation that is undamaged, dry, and unsoiled and that has not been left exposed at any time to ice, rain, and snow. 072100 THERMAL INSULATION Page 5 of 8 Project No. 0 109 1 Proposed Renovations March 6, 2009 Park House Smith College, Northampton, MA 2.3 GLASS-FIBER BLANKET INSULATION A. Available Manufacturers: 1 . CertainTeed Corporation. 2. Guardian Fiberglass, Inc. 3. ,Johns Manville. 4. Knauf Fiber Glass. 5. Owens Corning. B. Unfaced, Glass-Fiber Blanket Insulation: ASTM C 665, Type I (blankets without membrane facing); consisting of fibers; with maximum flame-spread and smoke-developed indexes of 25 and 50, respectively; passing ASTM E 136 for combustion characteristics. C. Where glass-fiber blanket insulation is indicated by the following thicknesses, provide blankets in batt or roll form with thermal resistances indicated: 1 . 3-1 /2 inches (89 mm) thick with a thermal resistance of 13 deg F x h x sq. ft./Btu at 75 deg F (2.3 K x sq. m/W at 24 deg Q. 2. 5-1 /2 inches (140 mm) thick with a thermal resistance of 21 deg F x h x sq. ft./Btu at 75 deg F (3.7 K x sq. m/W at 24 deg Q. 2.4 LOOSE-FILL INSULATION A. Cellulosic-Fiber Loose-Fill Insulation: ASTM C 739, chemically treated for flame-resistance, processing, and handling characteristics. 2.5 VAPOR RETARDERS A. Reinforced-Polyethylene Vapor Retarders: 2 outer layers of polyethylene film laminated to an inner reinforcing layer consisting of either nylon cord or polyester scrim and weighing not less than 25 lb/1000 sq. ft. (12 kg/100 sq. m), with maximum permeance rating of 0.0507 perm (2.9 ng/Pa x s x sq. m). 1 . Available Products: a. Raven Industries Inc.; DURA-SKRIM 6WW. 072100 THERMAL INSULATION Page 4 of 8 Project No. 01091 Proposed Renovations March 6, 2009 Park House Smith College, Northampton, MA 2. Protect against ignition at all times. Do not deliver plastic insulating materials to Project site before installation time. 3. Complete installation and concealment of plastic materials as rapidly as possible in each area of construction. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. In other Part 2 articles where titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply to product selection: 1 . Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, products specified. 2. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the products specified. 3. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, manufacturers specified. 4. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the manufacturers specified. 2.2 FOAM-PLASTIC BOARD INSULATION A. Extruded-Polystyrene Board Insulation: ASTM C 578, of type and density indicated below, with maximum flame-spread and smoke-developed indexes of 75 and 450, respectively: 1 . Available Manufacturers: a. DiversiFoam Products. b. Dow Chemical Company. C. Owens Corning. d. Pactiv Building Products Division. 2. Type IV, 1 .60 lb/cu. ft. (26 kg/cu. m), unless otherwise indicated. 072100 THERMAL INSULATION Page 3 of 8 Project No. 01091 Proposed Renovations March 6, 2009 Park House Smith College, Northampton, MA 1 .4 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. B. Samples for Verification: Full-size units for each type of exposed insulation indicated. C. Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by a qualified testing agency for insulation products. D. Research/Evaluation Reports: For foam-plastic insulation. 1 .5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of building insulation through one source from a single manufacturer. B. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Provide insulation and related materials with the fire-test-response characteristics indicated, as determined by testing identical products per test method indicated below by UL or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Identify materials with appropriate markings of applicable testing and inspecting agency. 1 . Surface-Burning Characteristics: ASTM E 84. 2. Fire-Resistance Ratings: ASTM E 119. 3. Combustion Characteristics: ASTM E 136. 1 .6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Protect insulation materials from physical damage and from deterioration by moisture, soiling, and other sources. Store inside and in a dry location. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for handling, storing, and protecting during installation. B. Protect plastic insulation as follows: 1 . Do not expose to sunlight, except to extent necessary for period of installation and concealment. 072100 THERMAL INSULATION Page 2 of 8 Project No. 01091 Proposed Renovations March 6, 2009 Park House Smith College, Northampton, MA *. SECTION 072100 - THERMAL INSULATION PART 1 - GENERAL 1 .1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1 .2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1 . Perimeter insulation under slabs-on-grade. 2. Concealed building insulation. 3. Exposed building insulation. 4. Loose-fill building insulation. 5. Vapor retarders. 6. Sound attenuation insulation. B. Related Sections include the following: 1 . Division 09 Section "Gypsum Board Shaft-Wall Assemblies" for installation in metal-framed assemblies of insulation specified by referencing this Section. 2. Division 22 Section "Plumbing Insulation." 3. Division 23 Section "HVAC Insulation." 1 .3 DEFINITIONS A. Mineral-Fiber Insulation: Insulation composed of rock-wool fibers, slag-wool fibers, or glass fibers; produced in boards and blanket with latter formed into batts (flat-cut lengths) or rolls. 072100 THERMAL INSULATION Page 1 of 8 Project No. 01091 Proposed Renovations March 6, 2009 Park House Smith College, Northampton, MA 3.3 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Repair damaged and defective woodwork, where possible, to eliminate functional and visual defects; where not possible to repair, replace woodwork. Adjust joinery for uniform appearance. B. Clean, lubricate, and adjust hardware. C. Clean woodwork on exposed and semiexposed surfaces. Touch up shop- applied finishes to restore damaged or soiled areas. END OF SECTION 064023 064023 INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK Page 12 of 12 Project No. 01091 Proposed Renovations March 6, 2009 Park House Smith College, Northampton, MA 1 . Fill gaps, if any, between top of base and wall with plastic wood filler, sand smooth, and finish same as wood base if finished. 2. Install wall railings on indicated metal brackets securely fastened to wall framing. G. Railings: 1 . General: Install rails with no more than 1 /8 inch in 96-inch (3 mm in 2400-mm) variation from a straight line. 2. Wall Rails: Support rails on indicated metal brackets securely fastened to wall framing. a. Space rail brackets not more than 48 inches o.c. H. Cabinets: Install without distortion so doors and drawers fit openings properly and are accurately aligned. Adjust hardware to center doors and drawers in openings and to provide unencumbered operation. Complete installation of hardware and accessory items as indicated. I . Install cabinets with no more than 1 /8 inch in 96-inch (3 mm in 2400-- mm) sag, bow, or other variation from a straight line. I. Countertops: Anchor securely by screwing through corner blocks of base cabinets or other supports into underside of countertop. 1 . Align adjacent solid-surfacing-material countertops and form seams to comply with manufacturer's written recommendations using adhesive in color to match countertop. Carefully dress joints smooth, remove surface scratches, and clean entire surface. 2. Install countertops with no more than 1 /8 inch in 96-inch (3 mm in 2400-mm) sag, bow, or other variation from a straight line. 3. Secure backsplashes to walls with adhesive. 4. Calk space between backsplash and wall with sealant specified in Division 07 Section "Joint Sealants." J. Touch up finishing work specified in this Section after installation of woodwork. Fill nail holes with matching filler where exposed. K. Refer to Division 09 Sections for final finishing of installed architectural woodwork not indicated to be shop finished. 064023 INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK Page 1 1 of 12 Project No. 01091 Proposed Renovations March 6, 2009 Park House Smith College, Northampton, MA PART 3 - EXECUTION 4"Ok, 3.1 PREPARATION A. Before installation, condition woodwork to average prevailing humidity conditions in installation areas. B. Before installing architectural woodwork, examine shop-fabricated work for completion and complete work as required, including removal of packing and backpriming. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Grade: Install woodwork to comply with requirements for the same grade specified in Part 2 for fabrication of type of woodwork involved. B. Assemble woodwork and complete fabrication at Project site to comply with requirements for fabrication in Part 2, to extent that it was not completed in the shop. C. Install woodwork level, plumb, true, and straight. Shim as required with concealed shims. Install level and plumb (including tops) to a tolerance of 1 /8 inch in 96 inches (3 mm in 2400 mm). D. Scribe and cut woodwork to fit adjoining work, refinish cut surfaces, and repair damaged finish at cuts. E. Anchor woodwork to anchors or blocking built in or directly attached to substrates. Secure with countersunk, concealed fasteners and blind nailing as required for complete installation. Use fine finishing nails or finishing screws for exposed fastening, countersunk and filled flush with woodwork and matching final finish if transparent finish is indicated. F. Standing and Running Trim: Install with minimum number of joints possible, using full-length pieces (from maximum length of lumber available) to greatest extent possible. Do not use pieces less than 60 inches (1500 mm) long, except where shorter single-length pieces are necessary. Scarf running joints and stagger in adjacent and related members. 064023 INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK Page 10 of 12 Project No. 01091 Proposed Renovations March 6, 2009 Park House Smith College, Northampton, MA C. Colors, Patterns, and Finishes: Provide materials and products that result in colors and textures of exposed laminate surfaces complying with the following requirements: 1 . As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range in the following categories: a. Solid colors, matte finish. b. Patterns, matte finish. D. Edge Treatment: Same as laminate cladding on horizontal surfaces. E. Core Material: Particleboard or medium-density fiberboard made with exterior glue. F. Backer Sheet: Provide plastic-laminate backer sheet, Grade BKL, on underside of countertop substrate. 2.10 SOLID-SURFACING-MATERIAL COUNTERTOPS A. Grade: Premium. B. Solid-Surfacing-Material Thickness: 1 /2 inch (13 mm). C. Colors, Patterns, and Finishes: Provide materials and products that result in colors of solid-surfacing material complying with the following requirements: D. Fabricate tops in one piece, unless otherwise indicated. Comply with solid- surfacing-material manufacturer's written recommendations for adhesives, sealers, fabrication, and finishing. 1 . Fabricate tops with shop-applied edges of materials and configuration indicated. 2. Fabricate tops with shop-applied backsplashes and loose side splashes for field application. E. Install integral sink bowls in countertops in shop. F. Drill holes in countertops for plumbing fittings in shop. 064023 INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK Page 9 of 12 Project No. 01091 Proposed Renovations March 6, 2009 Park House Smith College, Northampton, MA 2.8 PLASTIC-LAMINATE CABINETS A. Grade: Premium. B. AWI Type of Cabinet Construction: As indicated. C. Reveal Dimension: As indicated. D. Laminate Cladding for Exposed Surfaces: High-pressure decorative laminate complying with the following requirements: 1 . Horizontal Surfaces Other Than Tops: Grade HGS. 2. Vertical Surfaces: Grade HGS VGS. 3. Edges: Grade HGS. E. Materials for Semiexposed Surfaces: 1 . Surfaces Other Than Drawer Bodies: High-pressure decorative laminate, Grade VGS. a. Edges of Plastic-Laminate Shelves: PVC edge banding,0.12 inch (3 mm) thick, matching laminate in color, pattern, and finish. F. Concealed Backs of Panels with Exposed Plastic Laminate Surfaces: High- pressure decorative laminate, Grade BKL. G. Colors, Patterns, and Finishes: Provide materials and products that result in colors and textures of exposed laminate surfaces complying with the following requirements: 1 . As selected by Architect from laminate manufacturer's full range in the following categories: a. Solid colors, matte finish. b. Patterns, matte finish. 2.9 PLASTIC-LAMINATE COUNTERTOPS A. Grade: Premium. B. High-Pressure Decorative Laminate Grade: HGS. 064023 INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK Page 8 of 12 Project No. 01091 Proposed Renovations March 6, 2009 Park House Smith College, Northampton, MA that various parts fit as intended and check measurements of assemblies against field measurements indicated on Shop Drawings before disassembling for shipment. E. Shop-cut openings to maximum extent possible to receive hardware, appliances, plumbing fixtures, electrical work, and similar items. Locate openings accurately and use templates or roughing-in diagrams to produce accurately sized and shaped openings. Sand edges of cutouts to remove splinters and burrs. 1 . Seal edges of openings in countertops with a coat of varnish. 2.5 INTERIOR FRAMES AND JAMBS FOR OPAQUE FINISH A. Grade: Premium. B. Wood Species: Any closed-grain hardwood. 2.6 STAIR RAILS A. Grade: Premium. B. Grade: C. Wood Species and Cut for Transparent Finish: Hard maple, plain sawn. D. Finishes for Stair Parts: As follows: 1 . Handrails: Tranparent. 2.7 WOOD CABINETS FOR OPAQUE FINISH A. Grade: Premium. B. AWI Type of Cabinet Construction: As indicated. C. Species for Exposed Lumber Surfaces: Any closed-grain hardwood. D. Panel Product for Exposed Surfaces: Medium-density fiberboard. 064023 INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK Page 7 of 12 Project No. 01091 Proposed Renovations March 6, 2009 Park House Smith College, Northampton, MA C. Adhesives, General: Do not use adhesives that contain urea formaldehyde. D. VOC Limits for Installation Adhesives and Glues: Use installation adhesives that comply with the following limits for VOC content when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24): 1 . Wood Glues: 30 g/L. 2. Contact Adhesive: 250 g/L. 2.4 FABRICATION, GENERAL A. Interior Woodwork Grade: Unless otherwise indicated, provide Premium- grade interior woodwork complying with referenced quality standard. B. Wood Moisture Content: Comply with requirements of referenced quality standard for wood moisture content in relation to ambient relative humidity during fabrication and in installation areas. C. Fabricate woodwork to dimensions, profiles, and details indicated. Ease edges to radius indicated for the following: 1 . Corners of Cabinets and Edges of Solid-Wood (Lumber) Members 3/4 Inch 0 9 mm) Thick or Less: 1 /16 inch (1 .5 mm). 2. Edges of Rails and Similar Members More Than 3/4 Inch (19 mm) Thick: 1 /8 inch (3 mm). 3. Corners of Cabinets and Edges of Solid-Wood (Lumber) Members and Rails: 1 /16 inch (1 .5 mm). D. Complete fabrication, including assembly and hardware application, to maximum extent possible before shipment to Project site. Disassemble components only as necessary for shipment and installation. Where necessary for fitting at site, provide ample allowance for scribing, trimming, and fitting. 1 . Notify Architect seven days in advance of the dates and times woodwork fabrication will be complete. 2. Trial fit assemblies at fabrication shop that cannot be shipped completely assembled. Install dowels, screws, bolted connectors, and other fastening devices that can be removed after trial fitting. Verify 064023 INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK Page 6 of 12 Project No. 01091 Proposed Renovations March 6, 2009 Park House Smith College, Northampton, MA 1 . Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. E. I. du Pont de Nemours and Company. 2. Colors and Patterns: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full' range in Category B & C. 3. Integral Bowls: 830. 2.2 CABINET HARDWARE AND ACCESSORIES A. General: Provide cabinet hardware and accessory materials associated with architectural cabinets, except for items specified in Division 08 Section "Door Hardware (Scheduled by Describing Products)." B. Butt Hinges: 2-3/4-inch (70-mm), 5-knuckle steel hinges made from 0.095-inch- (2.4-mm-) thick metal, and as follows: 1 . Finish: Stainless Steel C. Butt Hinges: 2-3/4-inch (70-mm), 5-knuckle steel hinges made from 0.095-inch- (2.4-mm-) thick metal, and as follows: D. Catches: Sugatsune draw latches, stainless steel. E. Towel Hooks: Sugatsune HT50, stainless steel finish. F. Exposed Hardware Finishes: For exposed hardware, provide finish that complies with BHMA Al 56.18 for BHMA finish number indicated. 1 . Satin Stainless Steel: BHMA 630. G. For concealed hardware, provide manufacturer's standard finish that complies with product class requirements in BHMA Al 56 2.3 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Furring, Blocking, Shims, and Hanging Strips: Softwood or hardwood lumber„ kiln dried to less than 15 percent moisture content. B. Furring, Blocking, Shims, and Hanging Strips: Fire-retardant-treated softwood lumber, kiln dried to less than 15 percent moisture content. 064023 INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK Page 5 of 12 Project No. 01091 Proposed Renovations March 6, 2009 Park House Smith College, Northampton, MA 1 .8 COORDINATION A. Coordinate sizes and locations of framing, blocking, furring, reinforcements, and other related units of Work specified in other Sections to ensure that interior architectural woodwork can be supported and installed as indicated. B. Hardware Coordination: Distribute copies of approved hardware schedule specified in Division 08 Section "Door Hardware (Scheduled by Describing Products)" to fabricator of architectural woodwork; coordinate Shop Drawings and fabrication with hardware requirements. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. General: Provide materials that comply with requirements of AWI's quality standard for each type of woodwork and quality grade specified, unless otherwise indicated. B. Wood Species for Opaque Finish: Any closed-grain hardwood. C. Wood Products: Comply with the following: 1 . Medium-Density Fiberboard: ANSI A208.2, Grade MD, made with binder containing no urea formaldehyde. 2. Particleboard: ANSI A208.1 , Grade M-2-Exterior Glue. D. High-Pressure Decorative Laminate: NEMA LD 3, grades as indicated or, if not indicated, as required by woodwork quality standard. 1 . Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide high- pressure decorative laminates by one of the following: a. Formica Corporation. b. Nevamar Company, LLC; Decorative Products Div. C. Westinghouse Electric Corp.; Specialty Products Div. d. Wilsonart International; Div. of Premark International, Inc. E. Solid-Surfacing Material: Homogeneous solid sheets of filled plastic resin complying with ISSFA-2. 064023 INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK Page 4 of 12 Project No. 01091 Proposed Renovations March 6, 2009 Park House Smith College, Northampton, MA ' AM, C. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements in Division 01 Section "Project Management and Coordination." 1 .6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Do not deliver woodwork until painting and similar operations that could damage woodwork have been completed in installation areas. If woodwork. must be stored in other than installation areas, store only in areas where environmental conditions comply with requirements specified in "Project Conditions" Article. 1 .7 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install woodwork until building is enclosed, wet work is complete, and HVAC system is operating and maintaining temperature and relative humidity at occupancy levels during the remainder of the construction period. "** B. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install woodwork until building is enclosed, wet work is complete. C. Field Measurements: Where woodwork is indicated to fit to other construction, verify dimensions of other construction by field measurements before fabrication, and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid delaying the Work. 1 . Locate concealed framing, blocking, and reinforcements that support: woodwork by field measurements before being enclosed, and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings. 2. Established Dimensions: Where field measurements cannot be made without delaying the Work, establish dimensions and proceed with fabricating woodwork without field measurements. Provide allowance for trimming at site, and coordinate construction to ensure that actual dimensions correspond to established dimensions. 064023 INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK Page 3 of 12 Project No. 01091 Proposed Renovations March 6, 2009 Park House Smith College, Northampton, MA B. Rough carriages for stairs are a part of interior architectural woodwork. Platform framing, headers, partition framing, and other rough framing associated with stairwork are specified in Division 06 Section "Rough Carpentry." 1 .4 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated, including cabinet hardware and accessories and handrail brackets. B. Shop Drawings: Show location of each item, dimensioned plans and elevations, large-scale details, attachment devices, and other components. 1 . Show details full size. 2. Show locations and sizes of furring, blocking, and hanging strips, including concealed blocking and reinforcement specified in other Sections. 3. Show locations and sizes of cutouts and holes for plumbing fixtures faucets and other items installed in architectural woodwork. , C. Samples for Initial Selection: 1 . Plastic laminates. 2. PVC edge material. 3. Solid-surfacing materials. D. Woodwork Quality Standard Compliance Certificates: AWI Quality Certification Program certificates. 1 .5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Fabricator Qualifications: Shop that employs skilled workers who custom- fabricate products similar to those required for this Project and whose products have a record of successful in-service performance. Shop is a certified participant in AWI's Quality Certification Program. B. Quality Standard: Unless otherwise indicated, comply with AWI's "Architectural Woodwork Quality Standards" for grades of interior architectural woodwork indicated for construction, finishes, installation, and -low other requirements. 064023 INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK Page 2 of 12 Project No. 01091 Proposed Renovations March 6, 2009 Park House Smith College, Northampton, MA SECTION 064023 - INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK PART 1 - GENERAL 1 .1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1 .2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1 . Interior frames and jambs. 2. Stair rails 3. Wood cabinets. 4. Plastic-laminate cabinets. 5. Plastic-laminate countertops. 6. Solid-surfacing-material countertops. B. Related Sections include the following: 1 . Division 06 Section "Rough Carpentry" for wood furring, blocking, shims, and hanging strips required for installing woodwork and concealed within other construction before woodwork installation. 2. Division 06 Section "Finish Carpentry' for interior carpentry exposed to view that is not specified in this Section. 3. Division 06 Section "Wood Paneling." 4. Division 09 Section "Stone Facing" for stone countertops. 1 .3 DEFINITIONS A. Interior architectural woodwork includes wood furring, blocking, shims, and hanging strips for installing woodwork items unless concealed within other construction before woodwork installation. 064023 INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK Page 1 of 12 Project No. 01091 Proposed Renovations March 6, 2009 Park House Smith College, Northampton, MA D. Preservative-Treated Wood: Where cut or drilled in field, treat cut ends and drilled holes according to AWPA M4. E. Anchor woodwork to anchors or blocking built in or directly attached to substrates. Secure to grounds, stripping and blocking with countersunk concealed fasteners and blind nailing. Use fine finishing nails for exposed nailing, countersunk and filled flush with woodwork. F. Complete finishing work specified in this Section to extent not completed at shop or before installation of woodwork. Fill nail and screw holes with matching filler where exposed. G. Refer to Division 09 Sections for final finishing of installed architectural woodwork. 3.3 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Repair damaged and defective woodwork, where possible, to eliminate functional and visual defects; replace woodwork where not possible to repair. Adjust joinery for uniform appearance. B. Clean woodwork on exposed and semiexposed surfaces. Touch up shop-- applied finishes to restore damaged or soiled areas. END OF SECTION 064013 064013 EXTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK Page 7 of 7 Project No. 01091 Proposed Renovations March 6, 2009 Park House Smith College, Northampton, MA 2.7 SHOP PRIMING .AW` A. Woodwork for Opaque Finish: Shop prime woodwork for paint finish with one coat of wood primer specified in Division 09 painting Sections. B. Preparations for Finishing: Comply with referenced quality standard for sanding, filling countersunk fasteners, sealing concealed surfaces, and similar preparations for finishing architectural woodwork, as applicable to each unit of work. 1 . Backpriming: Apply one coat of sealer or primer, compatible with finish coats, to concealed surfaces of woodwork. Apply two coats to surfaces installed in contact with concrete or masonry and to end-grain surfaces. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A. Before installation, condition woodwork to average prevailing humidity ►, conditions in installation areas. B. Before installing architectural woodwork, examine shop-fabricated work for completion and complete work as required, including removal of packing and backpriming. C. Inspect substrates to receive woodwork. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Quality Standard: Install woodwork to comply with same grade specified in Part 2 for type of woodwork involved. B. Install woodwork true and straight with no distortions. Shim as required with concealed shims. Install level and plumb to a tolerance of 1 /8 inch in 96 inches. C. Scribe and cut woodwork to fit adjoining work, and refinish cut surfaces or repair damaged finish at cuts. 064013 EXTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK Page 6 of 7 Project No. 01091 Proposed Renovations March 6, 2009 Park House Smith College, Northampton, MA 1 . Edges of Solid-Wood (Lumber) Members 3/4 Inch Thick or Less: 1 /16 inch. 2. Edges of Rails and Similar Members More Than 3/4 Inch Thick: 1 /8 inch. C. Complete fabrication, including assembly, finishing, and hardware application, to maximum extent possible before shipment to Project site, Disassemble components only as necessary for shipment and installation. Where necessary for fitting at site, provide ample allowance for scribing, trimming, and fitting. D. Shop cut openings, to maximum extent possible, to receive hardware, electrical work, and similar items. Locate openings accurately and use templates or roughing-in diagrams to produce accurately sized and shaped openings. Smooth edges of cutouts and seal with a water-resistant coating suitable for exterior applications. 2.5 EXTERIOR FRAMES AND JAMBS FOR OPAQUE FINISH A. Grade: Premium. B. Wood Species: Western red cedar. 2.6 EXTERIOR ORNAMENTAL WORK FOR OPAQUE FINISH A. Exterior ornamental work for opaque finish includes the following: 1 . Balustrades. 2. Railings B. Grade: Premium. C. Wood Species: Ponderosa pine or Eastern white pine, sugar pine, or western white pine. 1 . Do not use plain-sawn lumber with exposed, flat surfaces more than 3 inches wide. D. Match existing wood railings. 064013 EXTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK Page 5 of 7 Project No. 01091 Proposed Renovations March 6, 2009 Park House Smith College, Northampton, MA 3. Mark each treated item with treatment quality mark of an inspection agency approved by the American Lumber Standards Committee Board of Review. C. Extent of Treatment: Treat blocking and nailers by pressure process and treat other exterior architectural woodwork either by nonpressure process. 1 . Items fabricated from the following wood species need not be treated: a. Western red cedar. b. Teak. C. African mahogany. 2.3 INSTALLATION MATERIALS A. Blocking, Shims, and Nailers: Softwood or hardwood lumber, pressure- preservative treated, kiln dried to less than 15 percent moisture content. B. Nails: Stainless steel. C. Screws: Bronze or stainless steel. 1 . Provide self-drilling screws for metal framing supports, as recommended by metal-framing manufacturer. D. Anchors: Select material, type, size, and finish required for each substrate for secure anchorage. Provide nonferrous-metal or hot-dip galvanized anchors and inserts, unless otherwise indicated. Provide toothed-steel or lead expansion sleeves for drilled-in-place anchors. 2.4 FABRICATION, GENERAL A. Wood Moisture Content: 9 to 15 percent. B. Fabricate woodwork to dimensions, profiles, and details indicated. Ease edges to radius indicated for the following: Aw 064013 EXTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK Page 4 of 7 Project No. 01091 Proposed Renovations March 6, 2009 Park House Smith College, Northampton, MA 1 .6 COORDINATION A. Coordinate sizes and locations of framing, blocking, reinforcements, and other related units of Work specified in other Sections to ensure that exterior' architectural woodwork can be supported and installed as indicated. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. General: Provide materials that comply with requirements of AWI's quality standard for each type of woodwork and quality grade specified, unless otherwise indicated. 2.2 WOOD-PRESERVATIVE-TREATED MATERIALS A. Preservative Treatment by Nonpressure Process: Comply with AWPA N1 using the following preservative for woodwork items indicated to receive water- repellent preservative treatment: 1 . Water-Repellent Preservative/Insecticide: Formulation made specifically for dip treatment of woodwork items and containing 3-iodo-2-propynyl butyl carbamate (IPBC) as its active ingredient, combined with an insecticide containing chlorpyrifos as its active ingredient, both complying with AWPA P8. B. Preservative Treatment by Pressure Process: AWPA C2 (lumber) and AWPA C9 (plywood) and the following: 1 . Preservative Chemicals: Acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction and containing no arsenic or chromium. Use chemical formulations that do not bleed through or otherwise adversely affect finishes. Do not use colorants to distinguish treated materials from untreated materials. 2. Kiln-dry lumber and plywood after treatment to a maximum moisture content, respectively, of 19 and 15 percent. Do not use materials that are warped or do not comply with requirements for untreated materials. 064013 EXTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK Page 3 of 7 Project No. 01091 Proposed Renovations March 6, 2009 Park House Smith College, Northampton, MA C. Woodwork Quality Standard Compliance Certificates: AWI Quality "" Certification Program certificates. D. Qualification Data: For fabricator. 1 .4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Fabricator Qualifications: Shop that employs skilled workers who custom- fabricate products similar to those required for this Project and whose products have a record of successful in-service performance. Shop is a certified participant in AWI's Quality Certification Program. B. Quality Standard: Unless otherwise indicated, comply with AWI's "Architectural Woodwork Quality Standards" for grades of exterior architectural woodwork indicated for construction, finishes, installation, and other requirements. 1 .5 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Weather Limitations: Proceed with installation of exterior woodwork only when existing and forecasted weather conditions permit work to be performed and at least one coat of specified finish to be applied without exposure to rain, snow, or dampness. B. Field Measurements: Where woodwork is indicated to fit to other construction, verify dimensions of other construction by field measurements before fabrication and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid delaying the Work. 1 . Locate concealed framing, blocking, and reinforcements that support woodwork by field measurements before being enclosed and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings. 2. Established Dimensions: Where field measurements cannot be made without delaying the Work, establish dimensions and proceed with fabricating woodwork without field measurements. Provide allowance for trimming at site, and coordinate construction to ensure that actual dimensions correspond to established dimensions. 064013 EXTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK Page 2 of 7 Project No. 01091 Proposed Renovations March 6, 2009 Park House Smith College, Northampton, MA Aak SECTION 064013 - EXTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK PART 1 - GENERAL 1 .1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1 .2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the matching existing profiles and details for replacement of existing and new exterior woodwork for the following: 1 . Exterior frames and jambs. 2. Exterior ornamental work. B. Related Sections include the following: 1 . Division 06 Section "Finish Carpentry" for exterior carpentry exposed to view that is not specified in this Section. 1 .3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product and process indicated and incorporated into items of exterior architectural woodwork during fabrication, finishing, and installation. 1 . Include data for wood-preservative treatment from chemical treatment manufacturer and certification by treating plant that treated materials comply with requirements. B. Shop Drawings: Show location of each item, dimensioned plans and elevations, large-scale details, attachment devices, and other components. 1 . Show locations and sizes of blocking and nailers, including concealed blocking and reinforcement specified in other Sections. 064013 EXTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK Page 1 of 7 Project No. 01091 Proposed Renovations March 6, 2009 Park House Smith College, Northampton, MA '" B. Remove and replace finish carpentry materials that are wet, moisture damaged, and mold damaged. 1 . Indications that materials are wet or moisture damaged include, but are not limited to, discoloration, sagging, or irregular shape. 2. Indications that materials are mold damaged include, but are not limited to, fuzzy or splotchy surface contamination and discoloration. END OF SECTION 062023 ROW- 062023 INTERIOR FINISH CARPENTRY Page 9 of 9 Project No. 01091 Proposed Renovations March 6, 2009 Park House Smith College, Northampton, MA 1 . Apply a bead of multipurpose construction adhesive to back of shelf cleats right before installing. Remove adhesive that is squeezed out immediately after fastening shelf cleats in place. C. Install shelves, fully seated on cleats, brackets, and supports. 1 . Fasten utility shelves to cleats to fix in place. 2. Cut closet shelves to neatly fit openings with only enough gap to allow shelves to be removed and reinstalled. D. Install rod flanges for rods as indicated. Fasten to shelf cleats, framing members, blocking, or metal backing, or use toggle bolts or hollow wall anchors. Install rods in rod flanges. 3.7 RELOCATION OF EXISTING STAIR AND RAILING A. Disassemble existing stair using care to mark pieces and parts for reassembly. Where stair parts are damaged during disassembly provide replacement parts of equivalent character and profile. B. Reinstall stair and railing in location indicated on plans. 3.8 ADJUSTING A. Replace interior finish carpentry that is damaged or does not comply with requirements. Interior finish carpentry may be repaired or refinished if work complies with requirements and shows no evidence of repair or refinishing. Adjust joinery for uniform appearance. 3.9 CLEANING A. Clean interior finish carpentry on exposed and semiexposed surfaces. Touch up factory-applied finishes to restore damaged or soiled areas. 3.10 PROTECTION A. Protect installed products from damage from weather and other causes during remainder of the construction period. 062023 INTERIOR FINISH CARPENTRY Page 8 of 9 Project No. 01091 Proposed Renovations March 6, 2009 Park House Smith College, Northampton, MA (0.8-mm) maximum offset for flush installation and 1 /16-inch (1 .5-- mm) maximum offset for reveal installation. 4. Coordinate interior finish carpentry with materials and systems in or adjacent to it. Provide cutouts for mechanical and electrical items that penetrate interior finish carpentry. 3.4 STANDING AND RUNNING TRIM INSTALLATION A. Install with minimum number of joints practical, using full-length pieces from maximum lengths of lumber available. Do not use pieces less than 24 inches (610 mm) long, except where necessary. Stagger joints in adjacent and related standing and running trim. Cope at returns and miter at corners to produce tight-fitting joints with full-surface contact throughout length of joint. Use scarf joints for end-to-end joints. Plane backs of casings to provide uniform thickness across joints where necessary for alignment. 1 . Install trim after veneer plaster finishing operations are completed. 2. Drill pilot holes in hardwood before fastening to prevent splitting. Fasten to prevent movement or warping. Countersink fastener heads on exposed carpentry work and fill holes. 3.5 PANELING INSTALLATION A. Plywood Paneling: Install with uniform tight joints between panels. 1 . Attach panels to supports with manufacturer's recommended panel adhesive and fasteners. Space fasteners as recommended by panel manufacturer. 3.6 SHELVING AND CLOTHES ROD INSTALLATION A. Cut shelf cleats at ends of shelves about 112 inch (13 mm) less than width of shelves and sand exposed ends smooth. B. Install shelf cleats by fastening to framing or backing with finish nails or trim screws, set below face and filled. Space fasteners not more than 16 inches (400 mm) o.c. Use 2 fasteners at each framing member or fastener location for cleats 4 inches nominal (89 mm actual) in width and wider. 062023 INTERIOR FINISH CARPENTRY Page 7 of 9 Project No. 01091 Proposed Renovations March 6, 2009 Park House Smith College, Northampton, MA PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance. B. Examine finish carpentry materials before installation. Reject materials that are wet, moisture damaged, and mold damaged. C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Clean substrates of projections and substances detrimental to application. B. Before installing interior finish carpentry, condition materials to average prevailing humidity in installation areas for a minimum of 24 hours. look 3.3 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Do not use materials that are unsound, warped, improperly treated or finished, inadequately seasoned, or too small to fabricate with proper jointing arrangements. 1 . Do not use manufactured units with defective surfaces, sizes, or patterns. B. Install interior finish carpentry level, plumb, true, and aligned with adjacent materials. Use concealed shims where necessary for alignment. 1 . Scribe and cut interior finish carpentry to fit adjoining work. Refinish and seal cuts as recommended by manufacturer. 2. Countersink fasteners, fill surface flush, and sand where face fastening is unavoidable. 3. Install to tolerance of 1 /8 inch in 96 inches (3 mm in 2438 mm) for level and plumb. Install adjoining interior finish carpentry with 1 /32-inch 062023 INTERIOR FINISH CARPENTRY Page 6 of 9 Project No. 01091 Proposed Renovations March 6, 2009 Park House Smith College, Northampton, MA Awk ` F. Clothes Rods: 1 -5/16-inch- (33-mm-) diameter, chrome-plated steel tubes. G. Rod Flanges: Chrome-plated steel. 2.5 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Fasteners for Interior Finish Carpentry: Nails, screws, and other anchoring devices of type, size, material, and finish required for application indicated to provide secure attachment, concealed where possible. 1 . Where galvanized finish is indicated, provide fasteners and anchorages with hot-dip galvanized coating complying with ASTM A 153/A 153M. B. Glue: Aliphatic-resin, polyurethane, or resorcinol wood glue recommended by manufacturer for general carpentry use. 1 . Use wood glue that has a VOC content of 30 g/L or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24). w C. Multipurpose Construction Adhesive: Formulation complying with ASTM D 3498 that is recommended for indicated use by adhesive manufacturer. 1 . Use adhesive that has a VOC content of 70 g/L or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24). D. Wire Fabric for Mesh Partitions: 2"x4"x 14 gauge welded wire fencing in 48" roll width. 1 . Provide cut wire staples to attach to framings. 2.6 FABRICATION A. Back out or kerf backs of the following members except those with ends exposed in finished work: 1 . Interior standing and running trim except shoe and crown molds. B. Ease edges of lumber less than 1 inch (25 mm) in nominal thickness to 1 /16-- inch (1 .5-mm) radius and edges of lumber 1 inch (25 mm) or more in nominal thickness to 1 /8-inch (3-mm) radius. 062023 INTERIOR FINISH CARPENTRY Page 5 of 9 Project No. 01091 Proposed Renovations March 6, 2009 Park House Smith College, Northampton, MA 2. Fingerjointing: Not allowed. 2.3 PANELING A. Hardwood Veneer Plywood Paneling: Manufacturer's stock hardwood plywood panels complying with HPVA HP-1 , made without urea-formaldehyde adhesive. 1 . Face Veneer Species and Cut: Rotary-cut white birch. 2. Backing Veneer Species: Any hardwood compatible with face species. 3. Construction: Veneer core. 4. Thickness: 1 /2 inch (13 mm). S. Panel Size: 48 by 96 inches (1219 by 2438 mm). 6. Glue Bond: Type I (exterior). 7. Face Pattern: Smooth. 2.4 SHELVING AND CLOTHES RODS A. Utility Shelving: Made from, 3/4 inch 0 9 mm) thick. Do not use particleboard or MDF that contains urea formaldehyde. 1 . Melamine-faced particleboard with applied PVC front edge. 2. Shelf Cleats: 3/4-by-3-1 /2-inch (19-by-89-mm) boards on any softwood. 3. B. Closet Shelving: Made from the following material, 3/4 inch (19 mm) thick. 1 . Wood boards as specified above for lumber trim for opaque finish. C. Shelf Cleats: 3/4-by-5-1 /2-inch (19-by-140-mm) boards, as specified above for lumber trim for opaque finish. D. Shelf Brackets with Rod Support: BHMA Al 56.16, B04051 ; prime-painted formed steel. E. Shelf Brackets without Rod Support: BHMA Al 56.16, B04041 ; prime-painted formed steel. 062023 INTERIOR FINISH CARPENTRY Page 4 of 9 Project No. 01091 Proposed Renovations March 6, 2009 Park House Smith College, Northampton, MA PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS, GENERAL A. Lumber: DOC PS 20 and applicable grading rules of inspection agencies certified by ALSC's Board of Review. 1 . Factory mark each piece of lumber with grade stamp of inspection agency indicating grade, species, moisture content at time of surfacing„ and mill. 2. For exposed lumber, mark grade stamp on end or back of each piece. B. Softwood Plywood: DOC PS 1 . C. Melamine-Faced Particleboard: Particleboard complying with ANSI A208.1 Grade M-2, finished on both faces with thermally fused, melamine-- impregnated decorative paper complying with LMA SAT-1 . 1 . Color: White. 2.2 STANDING AND RUNNING TRIM A. Hardwood Lumber Trim for Opaque Finish (Painted): 1 . Species and Grade: Aspen, basswood, cottonwood, sap gum, sycamore„ white maple, or yellow poplar; A finish; NHLA. 2. Maximum Moisture Content: 13 10 9 Insert value percent. 3. Finger jointing: Not allowed. 4. Gluing for Width: Not allowed. 5. Face Surface: Surfaced (smooth). B. Moldings for Opaque Finish (Painted): Made to patterns included in WMMPA WM 12. 1 . Hardwood Moldings: WMMPA HWM 2, P-grade. a. Species: Aspen, basswood, cottonwood, gum, magnolia, soft maple, tupelo, or yellow poplar. b. Maximum Moisture Content: 9 percent. 062023 INTERIOR FINISH CARPENTRY Page 3 of 9 Project No. 01091 Proposed Renovations March 6, 2009 Park House Smith College, Northampton, MA 6. WWPA: Western Wood Products Association. B. MDO Plywood: Plywood with a medium-density overlay on the face. 1 .4 SUBMITTALS 1 .5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Protect materials against weather and contact with damp or wet surfaces. Stack lumber, plywood, and other panels flat with spacers between each bundle to provide air circulation. Provide for air circulation within and around stacks and under temporary coverings. B. Deliver interior finish carpentry materials only when environmental conditions meet requirements specified for installation areas. If interior finish carpentry materials must be stored in other than installation areas, store only where environmental conditions meet requirements specified for installation areas. 1 .6 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install interior finish carpentry materials until building is enclosed and weatherproof, wet work in space is completed and nominally dry, and HVAC system is operating and maintaining temperature and relative humidity at occupancy levels during the remainder of the construction period. B. Do not install finish carpentry materials that are wet, moisture damaged, or mold damaged. 1 . Indications that materials are wet or moisture damaged include, but are not limited to, discoloration, sagging, or irregular shape. 2. Indications that materials are mold damaged include, but are not limited to, fuzzy or splotchy surface contamination and discoloration. 062023 INTERIOR FINISH CARPENTRY Page 2 of 9 Project No. 01091 Proposed Renovations March 6, 2009 Park House Smith College, Northampton, MA SECTION 062023 - INTERIOR FINISH CARPENTRY PART 1 - GENERAL 1 .1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1 .2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1 . Interior standing and running trim. 2. Shelving and clothes rods. 3. Interior stairs and railings. B. Related Sections include the following: 1 . Division 06 Section "Rough Carpentry" for furring, blocking, and other carpentry work not exposed to view. 2. Division 06 Section "Interior Architectural Woodwork" for shop- fabricated interior woodwork and interior woodwork not specified in this Section. 3. Division 09 Section "Interior Painting" for priming and backpriming of interior finish carpentry. 1 .3 DEFINITIONS A. Lumber grading agencies, and the abbreviations used to reference them, include the following: 1 . NeLMA: Northeastern Lumber Manufacturers' Association. 2. NHLA: National Hardwood Lumber Association. 3. NLGA: National Lumber Grades Authority. 4. SPIB: The Southern Pine Inspection Bureau. 5. WCLIB: West Coast Lumber Inspection Bureau. 062023 INTERIOR FINISH CARPENTRY Page 1 of 9 Project No. 01091 Proposed Renovations March 6, 2009 Park House Smith College, Northampton, MA 3.7 EXISTING OPENING MODIFICATIONS A. Relocated Window Frames: Remove existing window frame with trim and sill as a unit for reinstallation in new locations where indicated. Install in newly framed opening plumb and square aligned with adjacent window openings. B. Modified Door Frames for New Windows: Cut existing casings and trim and install new sill aligned with adjacent window sills on same floor. Install blind stops to simulate existing window openings for typical replacement window installation. Infill and patch siding below modified opening. 3.8 ADJUSTING A. Replace exterior finish carpentry that is damaged or does not comply with requirements. Exterior finish carpentry may be repaired or refinished if work complies with requirements and shows no evidence of repair or refinishing. Adjust joinery for uniform appearance. 3.9 CLEANING A. Clean exterior finish carpentry on exposed and semiexposed surfaces. Touch up factory-applied finishes to restore damaged or soiled areas. 3.10 PROTECTION A. Protect installed products from damage from weather and other causes during construction. B. Remove and replace finish carpentry materials that are wet, moisture damaged, and mold damaged. 1 . Indications that materials are wet or moisture damaged include, but are not limited to, discoloration, sagging, or irregular shape. 2. Indications that materials are mold damaged include, but are not limited to, fuzzy or splotchy surface contamination and discoloration. END OF SECTION 062013 062013 EXTERIOR FINISH CARPENTRY Page 10 of 10 Project No. 01091 Proposed Renovations March 6, 2009 Park House Smith College, Northampton, MA C. Sill Repair: Remove rotted and unsound areas back to sound wood. Apply wood hardener according to manufacturer's instructions. Fill with epoxy and sand smooth. 3.6 SIDING INSTALLATION A. Install siding to comply with manufacturer's written instructions and warranty requirements. B. Horizontal Siding: Apply starter strip along bottom edge of sheathing or sill. Install first course of siding with lower edge at least 1 /8 inch (3 mm) below starter strip and subsequent courses lapped 1 inch (25 mm) over course below. Nail at each stud. Do not allow nails to penetrate more than one thickness of siding. 1 . Seal cut joints at inside and outside corners and at trim locations. 2. Install butt joints with factory sealed ends. 3. Match existing coursing. ' C. Panel Siding: Install panels with edges over framing or blocking. Nail at 6 inches (150 mm) o.c. at panel perimeter and 12 inches (300 mm) o.c. at intermediate supports unless manufacturer recommends closer spacing. Leave 1 /16-inch (1 .5-mm) gap between adjacent panels and 1 /8-inch (3-- mm) gap at perimeter, openings, and horizontal joints unless otherwise recommended by panel manufacturer. 1 . Apply trim as indicated. Countersink nail heads, fill flush, and sand filler. D. Shingle Siding: Install single-coursed wood wall shingles according to manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations in CSSB's "Design and Application Manual for Exterior and Interior Walls." 1 . Maintain weather exposure of existing siding. 062013 EXTERIOR FINISH CARPENTRY Page 9 of 10 Project No. 01091 Proposed Renovations March 6, 2009 Park House Smith College, Northampton, MA 3.4 STANDING AND RUNNING TRIM INSTALLATION A. Install flat grain lumber with bark side exposed to weather. B. Install trim with minimum number of joints practical, using full-length pieces from maximum lengths of lumber available. Do not use pieces less than 24 inches (610 mm) long except where necessary. 1 . Use scarf joints for end-to-end joints. 2. Stagger end joints in adjacent and related members. C. Fit exterior joints to exclude water. Cope at returns and miter at corners to produce tight-fitting joints with full-surface contact throughout length of joint. Plane backs of casings to provide uniform thickness across joints, where necessary for alignment. D. Unless otherwise indicated, countersink fasteners, fill surface flush, and sand where face fastening is unavoidable. 3.5 SILL REPLACEMENT AND REPAIR .• , A. General: Inspect all wood sills prior to removal of sash for replacement of windows to determine condition of existing wood. 1 . Prepare a report listing unsound and / or rotted sills with the following information: a. Room Number b. Elevation reference C. Replacement window type mark. d. Condition of sill. (i.e. repair or replacement). B. Sill Replacement: Carefully remove existing sill with care not to disturb remaining frame and casing back to beyond blind stop. Prepare surface of remaining sill for new replacement sill to align for tight weather protected joint that will be covered by replacement window frame. I . Screw and glue replacement sill to remaining sill. Countersink screws and fill with wood epoxy and sand smooth. 062013 EXTERIOR FINISH CARPENTRY Page 8 of 10 Project No. 01091 Proposed Renovations March 6, 2009 Park House Smith College, Northampton, MA B. Examine finish carpentry materials before installation. Reject materials that are wet, moisture damaged, and mold damaged. C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. D. Inspect siding and trim where repairs are indicated to ascertain scope of repair. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Clean substrates of projections and substances detrimental to application. B. Prime lumber to be painted, including both faces and edges. Cut to required lengths and prime ends. Comply with requirements in Division 09 Section "Exterior Painting." 3.3 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Do not use materials that are unsound, warped, improperly treated or finished, inadequately seasoned, or too small to fabricate with proper jointing arrangements. 1 . Do not use manufactured units with defective surfaces, sizes, or patterns. B. Install exterior finish carpentry level, plumb, true, and aligned with adjacent materials. Use concealed shims where necessary for alignment. 1 . Scribe and cut exterior finish carpentry to fit adjoining work. Refinish and seal cuts as recommended by manufacturer. 2. Install to tolerance of 1 /8 inch in 96 inches (3 mm in 2438 mm) for level and plumb. Install adjoining exterior finish carpentry with 1 /32-inch (0.8-mm) maximum offset for flush installation and 1 /16-inch (1 .5-- mm) maximum offset for reveal installation. 3. Coordinate exterior finish carpentry with materials and systems in or adjacent to it. Provide cutouts for mechanical and electrical items that penetrate exterior finish carpentry. 062013 EXTERIOR FINISH CARPENTRY Page 7 of 10 Project No. 01091 Proposed Renovations March 6, 2009 Park House Smith College, Northampton, MA 2.6 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Fasteners for Exterior Finish Carpentry: Provide nails or screws, in sufficient length to penetrate not less than 1 -1 /2 inches (38 mm) into wood substrate. 1 . For applications not otherwise indicated, provide stainless-steel or aluminum fasteners. B. Wood Glue: Waterproof resorcinol glue recommended by manufacturer for exterior carpentry use. C. Epoxy repair and hardener: Wood hardener treatment for rotted and decayed wood and two-part epoxy filler. D. Flashing: Comply with requirements in Division 07 Section "Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim" for flashing materials installed in exterior finish carpentry. E. Bi-Metal Crawl Space Vents: Series Six vent with bi-metal spring at automatically close vent when temperature reaches 40 degrees designed to fit into 8"x16" masonry opening as manufactured by Temp-Vent Corp.; Dallas, TX. 1 . Color: Black. 2.7 FABRICATION A. Back out or kerf backs of standing and running trim wider than 5 inches (125 mm), except members with ends exposed in finished work. B. Ease edges of lumber less than 1 inch (25 mm) in nominal thickness to 1 /16- inch (1 .5-mm) radius and edges of lumber 1 inch (25 mm) or more in nominal thickness to 1 /8-inch (3-mm) radius. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance. 062013 EXTERIOR FINISH CARPENTRY Page 6 of 10 Project No. 01091 Proposed Renovations March 6, 2009 Park House Smith College, Northampton, MA C. Pattern: Beaded siding, smooth-faced tongue-and-groove pattern, actual overall dimensions of 5-1 /2 by 11 /16 inch (140 by 17 mm), measured on the face and thick edge at 19 percent moisture content. 2.4 FIBER CEMENT SIDING A. Fiber-Cement Siding: Siding made from fiber-cement board that complies with ASTM C 1186, Type A, Grade II; is classified as noncombustible when tested according to ASTM E 136; and has a flame-spread index of 25 or less when tested according to ASTM E 84. 1 . Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: a. James Hardie Inc.; Hardiplank. 2. Horizontal Pattern: Boards 6-1 /4 to 6-1 /2 inches (159 to 165 mm) wide in plain style and smooth texture. 3. Factory Priming: Manufacturer's standard acrylic primer. *OP* B. Fiber-Cement Panels: Panels with smooth texture, made by same manufacturer fiber-cement siding that complies with ASTM C 1186, Type A, Grade II; is classified as noncombustible when tested according to ASTM E 136; and has a flame-spread index of 25 or less when tested according to ASTM E 84. 2.5 WOOD SHINGLES A. Cedar Wall Shingles: Smooth-sawn western red cedar shingles. 1 . Grading Standards: CSSB's "Grading Rules for Certigrade Red Cedar Shingles." 2. Grade: No. 1 . 3. Size: 16 inches (405 mm) long; 0.40 inch (10 mm) thick at butt. 4. Undercourse Grade: No. 2. 5. Undercourse Size: 16 inches (405 mm) long; 0.40 inch (10 mm) thick at butt. 062013 EXTERIOR FINISH CARPENTRY Page 5 of 10 Project No. 01091 Proposed Renovations March 6, 2009 Park House Smith College, Northampton, MA 2.2 STANDING AND RUNNING TRIM A. Lumber Trim for Painted Finish: 1 . Species and Grade: Eastern white pine, eastern hemlock-balsam fir- tamarack, eastern spruce, or white woods; Prime-lok; NeLMA, NLGA, WCLIB, or WWPA. 2. Maximum Moisture Content: 19 percent. 3. Finger jointing: Allowed if made with wet-use adhesive complying with ASTM D 5572. 4. Face Surface: Surfaced (smooth). 5. Finish: Factory primed on all surfaces. B. Moldings for Painted Finish: WMMPA WM 4, P-grade wood moldings. Made from kiln-dried stock to patterns included in WMMPA WM 12. 1 . Species: Eastern white, Idaho white, lodgepole, ponderosa, radiata, or sugar pine. 2. Fingerjointing: Not allowed. 3. Replacement trim profiles: Match existing. (Standard patterns that closely match existing p rofiles will be acceptable when approved by Architect.) 4. Bed-Mold Pattern: WM 75, 9/16 by 1 -5/8 inches (14 by 41 mm). C. Replacement Sills: 1 . Species and Grade: Eastern white pine, eastern hemlock-balsam fir- tamarack, eastern spruce, or white woods; Prime-lok; NeLMA, NLGA, WCLIB, or WWPA. 2. Maximum Moisture Content: 19 percent. 3. Match existing profile 4. Provide with rabbet to receive wood siding or shingle course below sill. 2.3 LUMBER SOFFITS A. Provide kiln-dried lumber siding complying with DOC PS 20. B. Species and Grade: Grade A western red cedar; NLGA, WCLIB, or WWPA. 062013 EXTERIOR FINISH CARPENTRY Page 4 of 10 Project No. 01091 Proposed Renovations March 6, 2009 Park House Smith College, Northampton, MA 1 .6 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Weather Limitations: Proceed with installation only when existing and forecasted weather conditions permit work to be performed and at least one coat of specified finish can be applied without exposure to rain, snow, or dampness. B. Do not install finish carpentry materials that are wet, moisture damaged, or mold damaged. 1 . Indications that materials are wet or moisture damaged include, but are not limited to, discoloration, sagging, or irregular shape. 2. Indications that materials are mold damaged include, but are not limited to, fuzzy or splotchy surface contamination and discoloration. 1 .7 WARRANTY A. Special Warranty for Fiber Cement Siding: Manufacturer's standard form, signed by manufacturer, Installer, and Contractor, in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace siding that fails in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. Failures include, but are not limited to, deformation or deterioration beyond normal weathering. 1 . Warranty Period for Siding (Excluding Finish): 25 years from date of Substantial Completion. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS, GENERAL A. Lumber: DOC PS 20 and applicable grading rules of inspection agencies certified by ALSC's Board of Review. 1 . Factory mark each piece of lumber with grade stamp of inspection agency indicating grade, species, moisture content at time of surfacing, and mill. 2. For exposed lumber, mark grade stamp on end or back of each piece, or omit grade stamp and provide certificates of grade compliance issued by inspection agency. 062013 EXTERIOR FINISH CARPENTRY Page 3 of 10 Project No. 01091 Proposed Renovations March 6, 2009 Park House Smith College, Northampton, MA 1 .4 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of process and factory-fabricated product. Indicate component materials, dimensions, profiles, textures, and colors and include construction and application details. 1 . Include data for wood-preservative treatment from chemical treatment manufacturer and certification by treating plant that treated materials comply with requirements. Indicate type of preservative used and net amount of preservative retained. Include chemical treatment manufacturer's written instructions for finishing treated material. 2. Include data for fire-retardant treatment from chemical treatment manufacturer and certification by treating plant that treated materials comply with requirements. 3. For products receiving a waterborne treatment, include statement that moisture content of treated materials was reduced to levels specified before shipment to Project site. 4. Include copies of warranties from chemical treatment manufacturers for each type of treatment. B. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of siding indicated. C. Compliance Certificates: 1 . For lumber that is not marked with grade stamp. 2. For preservative-treated wood that is not marked with treatment quality mark. 3. For fire-retardant-treated wood that is not marked with classification marking of testing and inspecting agency. D. Warranties: Special warranties specified in this Section. 1 .5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Protect materials against weather and contact with damp or wet surfaces. Stack lumber, plywood, and other panels flat with spacers between each bundle to provide air circulation. Provide for air circulation within and around stacks and under temporary coverings. 062013 EXTERIOR FINISH CARPENTRY Page 2 of 10 Project No. 01091 Proposed Renovations March 6, 2009 Park House Smith College, Northampton, MA SECTION 062013 - EXTERIOR FINISH CARPENTRY PART 1 - GENERAL 1 .1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1 .2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1 . Exterior standing and running trim. 2. Wood shingle and fiber cement siding. 3. Wood soffits. 4. Modifications and repairs to existing siding and trim. 5. Repair and replacement of rotted sills B. Related Sections include the following: 1 . Division 01 Section "Unit Prices" for instructions related to sill replacement. 2. Division 06 Section "Rough Carpentry" for furring, blocking, and other carpentry work not exposed to view. 1 .3 DEFINITIONS A. Lumber grading agencies, and the abbreviations used to reference them, include the following: 1 . NeLMA: Northeastern Lumber Manufacturers' Association. 2. NLGA: National Lumber Grades Authority. 3. RIS: Redwood Inspection Service. 4. SPIB: The Southern Pine Inspection Bureau. 5. WCLIB: West Coast Lumber Inspection Bureau. 6. WWPA: Western Wood Products Association. 062013 EXTERIOR FINISH CARPENTRY Page 1 of 10 Project No. 01 091 Proposed Renovations March 6, 2009 Park House Smith College, Northampton, MA 2. Wall and Roof Sheathing: °'o a. Nail to wood framing. Apply a continuous bead of glue to framing members at edges of wall sheathing panels. b. Space panels 1 /8 inch apart at edges and ends. END OF SECTION 061600 , 061600 SHEATHING Page 4 of 4 Project No. 01091 Proposed Renovations March 6, 2009 Park House Smith College, Northampton, MA 2.5 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Adhesives for Field Gluing Panels to Framing: Formulation complying with APA AFG-01 that is approved for use with type of construction panel indicated by manufacturers of both adhesives and panels. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Do not use materials with defects that impair quality of sheathing or pieces that are too small to use with minimum number of joints or optimum joint arrangement. B. Cut panels at penetrations, edges, and other obstructions of work; fit tightly against abutting construction, unless otherwise indicated. C. Securely attach to substrate by fastening as indicated, complying with the following: 1 . Table 2305.2, "Fastening Schedule," in BOCA's "BOCA National Building Code." D. Use common wire nails, unless otherwise indicated. Select fasteners of size that will not fully penetrate members where opposite side will be exposed to view or will receive finish materials. Make tight connections. Install fasteners without splitting wood. 3.2 WOOD STRUCTURAL PANEL INSTALLATION A. General: Comply with applicable recommendations in APA Form No. E30S, "Engineered Wood Construction Guide," for types of structural-use panels and applications indicated. B. Fastening Methods: Fasten panels as indicated below: 1 . Combination Subfloor-Underlayment: a. Glue and nail to wood framing. b. Space panels 1 /8 inch apart at edges and ends. 061600 SHEATHING Page 3 of 4 Project No. 01091 Proposed Renovations March 6, 2009 Park House Smith College, Northampton, MA B. Thickness: As needed to comply with requirements specified, but not less Ank than thickness indicated. C. Factory mark panels to indicate compliance with applicable standard. 2.2 ROOF SHEATHING A. Plywood Roof Sheathing: Exterior, Structural I sheathing. 1 . Span Rating: Not less than 32/16. 2. Nominal Thickness: Not less than 5/8 inch. 2.3 SUBFLOORING AND UNDERLAYMENT A. Plywood Combination Subfloor-Underlayment: DOC PS 1 , Exposure 1 , Structural I, Underlayment single-floor panels. 1 . Span Rating: Not less than 16 o.c. 2. Nominal Thickness: Not less than 23/32 inch. 3. Edge Detail: Tongue and groove. 4. Surface Finish: Fully sanded face. B. Underlayment, General: Provide 3-ply poplar underlayment in nominal thicknesses indicated or, if not indicated, not less than 1 /4 inch. 1 . Product: Multi-ply. 2.4 FASTENERS A. General: Provide fasteners of size and type indicated that comply with requirements specified in this Article for material and manufacture. B. Nails, Brads, and Staples: ASTM F 1667. C. Power-Driven Fasteners: NES NER-272. D. Wood Screws: ASME B18.6.1 . 061600 SHEATHING Page 2 of 4 Project No. 01091 Proposed Renovations March 6, 2009 Park House Smith College, Northampton, MA SECTION 061600 - SHEATHING PART 1 - GENERAL 1 .1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1 .2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1 . Roof sheathing. 2. Subflooring. 3. Underlayment. 00*- B. Related Sections include the following: 1 .3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of process and factory-fabricated product. Indicate component materials and dimensions and include construction and application details. 1 .4 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Stack plywood and other panels flat with spacers between each bundle to provide air circulation. Provide for air circulation around stacks and under coverings. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 WOOD PANEL PRODUCTS, GENERAL A. Plywood: Either DOC PS 1 or DOC PS 2, unless otherwise indicated. 061600 SHEATHING Page 1 of 4 Project No. 01091 Proposed Renovations March 6, 2009 Park House Smith College, Northampton, MA 2. For load-bearing walls, provide double-jamb studs for openings 60 inches (1500 mm) and less in width, and triple-jamb studs for wider openings. Provide headers of depth indicated. 3.5 LAMINATED-VENEER FRAMING INSTALLATION A. Provide not less than 4 inches (102 mm) of bearing on supports. B. Use engineered beam hangers where members frame into adjacent members. C. Attach beams to wood posts using metal anchors. D. Where wood posts are built into existing walls provide laminated veneer plate over existing plate for the full width of stud cavity. 3.6 PROTECTION A. Protect wood that has been treated with inorganic boron (SBX) from weather. If, despite protection, inorganic boron-treated wood becomes wet, apply EPA-registered borate treatment. Apply borate solution by spraying to comply with EPA-registered label. B. Protect rough carpentry from weather. If, despite protection, rough carpentry becomes wet, apply EPA-registered borate treatment. Apply borate solution by spraying to comply with EPA-registered label. END OF SECTION 061000 061000 ROUGH CARPENTRY Page 12 of 12 Project No. 01091 Proposed Renovations March 6, 2009 Park House Smith College, Northampton, MA B. Furring to Receive Plywood or Hardboard Paneling: Install 1-by-4-inch nominal- (19-by-88-mm actual-) size furring horizontally at [24 inches (610 mMA o.c. C. Furring to Receive veneer plaster base: Install 1 -by-3-inch nominal- (19-by-- 63-mm actual-) size furring vertically at 16 inches (406 mm) o.c. 3.4 WALL AND PARTITION FRAMING INSTALLATION A. General: Provide single bottom plate and double top plates using members of 2-inch nominal (38-mm actual) thickness whose widths equal that of studs, except single top plate may be used for non-load-bearing partitions. Fasten plates to supporting construction, unless otherwise indicated. 1 . For exterior walls, provide 2-by-6-inch nominal- (38-by-140-mm actual-) size wood studs spaced 16 inches (406 mm) o.c., unless otherwise indicated. 2. For interior partitions and walls, provide 2-by-4-inch nominal- (38-by-- Am% 89-mm actual-) size wood studs spaced 16 inches (406 mm) o.c., unless otherwise indicated. 3. Provide continuous horizontal blocking at midheight of partitions more than 96 inches (2438 mm) high, using members of 2-inch nominal (38- mm actual) thickness and of same width as wall or partitions. B. Construct corners and intersections with three or more studs, except that two studs may be used for interior non-load-bearing partitions. C. Frame openings with multiple studs and headers. Provide nailed header members of thickness equal to width of studs. Support headers on jamb studs. 1 . For non-load-bearing partitions, provide double-jamb studs and headers not less than 4-inch nominal (89-mm actual) depth for openings 48 inches (1200 mm) and less in width, 6-inch nominal (140- mm actual) depth for openings 48 to 72 inches (1200 to 1800 mm) in width, 8-inch nominal (184-mm actual) depth for openings 72 to 120 inches (1800 to 3000 mm) in width, and not less than 10-inch nominal (235-mm actual) depth for openings 10 to 12 feet (3 to 3.6 m) in width. 061000 ROUGH CARPENTRY Page 1 1 of 12 Project No. 01091 Proposed Renovations March 6, 2009 Park House Smith College, Northampton, MA I. Comply with AWPA M4 for applying field treatment to cut surfaces of preservative-treated lumber. 1 . Use inorganic boron for items that are continuously protected from liquid water. J. Securely attach rough carpentry work to substrate by anchoring and fastening as indicated, complying with the following: 1 . NES NER-272 for power-driven fasteners. 2. Table 5602.3(1), "Fastening Schedule," in 780 CMR - Seventh Edition, Massachusetts State Building Code (One and Two Family Dwelling Code). K. Use common wire nails, unless otherwise indicated. Select fasteners of size that will not fully penetrate members where opposite side will be exposed to view or will receive finish materials. Make tight connections between members. Install fasteners without splitting wood; do not countersink nail heads, unless otherwise indicated. L. For multiply engineered veneer lumber, arrange fasteners in straight rows parallel with edges of members, with fasteners evenly spaced, and with adjacent rows staggered. 1 . Comply with approved fastener patterns where applicable. 3.2 WOOD BLOCKING, AND NAILER INSTALLATION A. Install where indicated and where required for attaching other work. Form to shapes indicated and cut as required for true line and level of attached work. Coordinate locations with other work involved. B. Attach items to substrates to support applied loading. Recess bolts and nuts flush with surfaces, unless otherwise indicated. 3.3 WOOD FURRING INSTALLATION A. Install level and plumb with closure strips at edges and openings. Shim with wood as required for tolerance of finish work. Awk 061000 ROUGH CARPENTRY Page 10 of 12 Project No. 01091 Proposed Renovations March 6, 2009 Park House Smith College, Northampton, MA cope as needed for accurate fit. Locate furring, nailers, blocking, and similar supports to comply with requirements for attaching other construction. B. Framing Standard: Comply with AF&PA's "Details for Conventional Wood Frame Construction," unless otherwise indicated. C. Framing with Engineered Wood Products: Install engineered wood products to comply with manufacturer's written instructions. D. Metal Framing Anchors: Install metal framing to comply with manufacturer's written instructions. E. Do not splice structural members between supports, unless otherwise indicated. F. Provide blocking and framing as indicated and as required to support facing materials, fixtures, specialty items, and trim. 1 . Provide metal clips for fastening gypsum board or lath at corners and low intersections where framing or blocking does not provide a surface for fastening edges of panels. Space clips not more than 16 inches (406 mm) o.c. G. Provide fire blocking in furred spaces, stud spaces, and other concealed cavities as indicated and as follows: 1 . Fire block furred spaces of walls, at each floor level, at ceiling, and at not more than 96 inches (2438 mm) o.c. with solid wood blocking or noncombustible materials accurately fitted to close furred spaces. 2. Fire block concealed spaces of wood-framed walls and partitions at each floor level, at ceiling line of top story, and at not more than 96 inches (2438 mm) o.c. Where fire blocking is not inherent in framing system used, provide closely fitted solid wood blocks of same width as framing members and 2-inch nominal- (38-mm actual-) thickness. H. Sort and select lumber so that natural characteristics will not interfere with installation or with fastening other materials to lumber. Do not use materials with defects that interfere with function of member or pieces that are too small to use with minimum number of joints or optimum joint arrangement. 061000 ROUGH CARPENTRY Page 9 of 12 Project No. 01091 Proposed Renovations March 6, 2009 Park House Smith College, Northampton, MA 4. KC Metals Products, Inc. -AWN 5. Simpson Strong-Tie Co., Inc. 6. Southeastern Metals Manufacturing Co., Inc. 7. USP Structural Connectors. B. Galvanized Steel Sheet: Hot-dip, zinc-coated steel sheet complying with ASTM A 653/A 653M, G60 (Z180) coating designation. 1 . Use for interior locations where stainless steel is not indicated. C. Joist Hangers: U-shaped joist hangers with 2-inch- (50-mm-) long seat and 1 -1 /4-inch- (32-mm-) wide nailing flanges at least 85 percent of joist depth. 1 . Thickness: 0.050 inch (1 .3 mm). D. Post Bases: Adjustable-socket type for bolting in place with standoff plate to raise post 1 inch (25 mm) above base and with 2-inch- (50-mm-) minimum side cover, socket 0.062 inch (1 .6 mm) thick, and standoff and adjustment plates 0.108 inch (2.8 mm) thick. 2.9 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Sill-Sealer Gaskets: Closed-cell neoprene foam, 1 /4 inch (6.4 mm) thick, selected from manufacturer's standard widths to suit width of sill members indicated. B. Water-Repellent Preservative: NWWDA-tested and -accepted formulation containing 3-iodo-2-propynyl butyl carbamate, combined with an insecticide containing chloropyrifos as its active ingredient. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Set rough carpentry to required levels and lines, with members plumb, true to line, cut, and fitted. Fit rough carpentry to other construction; scribe and 061000 ROUGH CARPENTRY Page 8 of 12 Project No. 01091 Proposed Renovations March 6, 2009 Park House Smith College, Northampton, MA 2.7 FASTENERS A. General: Provide fasteners of size and type indicated that comply with requirements specified in this Article for material and manufacture. 1 . Where rough carpentry is exposed to weather, in ground contact, pressure-preservative treated, or in area of high relative humidity, provide fasteners of Type 304 stainless steel. B. Nails, Brads, and Staples: ASTM F 1667. C. Power-Driven Fasteners: NES NER-272. D. Wood Screws: ASME B1 8.6.1 . E. Lag Bolts: ASME 1318.2.1 (ASME BI 8.2.3.8M). F. Bolts: Steel bolts complying with ASTM A 307, Grade A (ASTM F 568M, Property Class 4.6); with ASTM A 563 (ASTM A 563M) hex nuts and, where indicated, flat washers. G. Expansion Anchors: Anchor bolt and sleeve assembly of material indicated below with capability to sustain, without failure, a load equal to 6 times the load imposed when installed in unit masonry assemblies and equal to 4 times the load imposed when installed in concrete as determined by testing per ASTM E 488 conducted by a qualified independent testing and inspecting agency. 1 . Material: Carbon-steel components, zinc plated to comply with ASTM B 633, Class Fe/Zn 5. 2.8 METAL FRAMING ANCHORS A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1 . Alpine Engineered Products, Inc. 2. Cleveland Steel Specialty Co. AM, 3. Harlen Metal Products, Inc. 061000 ROUGH CARPENTRY Page 7 of 12 Project No. 01091 Proposed Renovations March 6, 2009 Park House Smith College, Northampton, MA C. For exposed boards, provide lumber with 15 percent maximum moisture ' content and the following species and grades: 1 . Eastern white pine, Idaho white, lodgepole, ponderosa, or sugar pine; Premium or 2 Common (Sterling) grade; NeLMA, NLGA, WCLIB, or WWPA. 2. Hem-fir or hem-fir (north), Select Merchantable or No. 1 Common grade; NLGA, WCLIB, or WWPA. 3. Spruce-pine-fir (south) or spruce-pine-fir, Select Merchantable or No. 1 Common grade; NeLMA, NLGA, WCLIB, or WWPA. D. For concealed boards, provide lumber with 15 percent maximum moisture content and any of the following species and grades: 1 . Mixed southern pine, No. 2 grade; SPIB. 2. Hem-fir or hem-fir (north), Construction or 2 Common grade; NLGA, WCLIB, or WWPA. 3. Spruce-pine-fir (south) or spruce-pine-fir, Construction or 2 Common grade; NeLMA, NLGA, WCLIB, or WWPA. 4. Eastern softwoods, No. 2 Common grade; NeLMA. 5. Northern species, No. 2 Common grade; NLGA. -lo E. For blocking not used for attachment of other construction, Utility, Stud, or No. 3 grade lumber of any species may be used provided that it is cut and selected to eliminate defects that will interfere with its attachment and purpose. F. For blocking and nailers used for attachment of other construction, select and cut lumber to eliminate knots and other defects that will interfere with attachment of other work. G. For furring strips for installing plywood or hardboard paneling, select boards with no knots capable of producing bent-over nails and damage to paneling. 2.6 PLYWOOD BACKING PANELS A. Pex Header, Telephone and Electrical Equipment Backing Panels: DOC PS 1 , Exposure 1 , C-D Plugged, in thickness indicated or, if not indicated, not less than 3/4-inch 0 9-mm) nominal thickness. 061000 ROUGH CARPENTRY Page 6 of 12 Project No. 01091 Proposed Renovations March 6, 2009 Park House Smith College, Northampton, MA type adhesive complying with ASTM D 2559 and containing no urea formaldehyde. 1 . Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide. products by one of the following: a. Boise Cascade Corporation. b. Georgia-Pacific. C. Louisiana-Pacific Corporation. d. Pacific Woodtech Corporation. e. Roseburg Forest Products Co. f. Weldwood of Canada Limited; Subsidiary of International Paper Corporation. g. Weyerhaeuser Company. 2. Extreme Fiber Stress in Bending, Edgewise: 2600 psi (17.9 MPa) for 12- inch nominal- (286-mm actual-) depth members. 3. Modulus of Elasticity, Edgewise: 1 ,900,000 psi (13 000 MPa). B. Laminated-Veneer Columns: Structural composite lumber made from wood veneers with grain primarily parallel to member lengths, evaluated and monitored according to ASTM D 5456 and manufactured with an exterior- type adhesive complying with ASTM D 2559 and containing no urea formaldehyde. 1 . Manufacturers: Same as laminated-veneer lumber. 2. Modulus of Elasticity: 1 ,800,000 psi (12 000 MPa). 2.5 MISCELLANEOUS LUMBER A. General: Provide miscellaneous lumber indicated and lumber for support or attachment of other construction, including the following: 1 . Blocking. 2. Nailers. 3. Rooftop equipment bases and support curbs. 4. Furring. 5. Utility shelving. B. For items of dimension lumber size, provide Construction or No. 2 grade lumber with 19 percent maximum moisture content of any species. 061000 ROUGH CARPENTRY Page 5 of 12 Project No. 01 091 Proposed Renovations March 6, 2009 Park House Smith College, Northampton, MA B. Kiln-dry lumber after treatment to a maximum moisture content of 19 percent. Do not use material that is warped or does not comply with requirements for untreated material. C. Mark lumber with treatment quality mark of an inspection agency approved by the ALSC Board of Review. D. Application: Treat items indicated on Drawings, and the following: 1 . Wood cants, nailers, curbs, equipment support bases, blocking, stripping, and similar members in connection with roofing, flashing, vapor barriers, and waterproofing. 2. Wood sills, sleepers, blocking, and similar concealed members in contact with masonry or concrete. 3. Wood framing and furring attached directly to the interior of below- grade exterior masonry or concrete walls. 4. Wood floor plates that are installed over concrete slabs-on-grade. 2.3 DIMENSION LUMBER FRAMING A. Maximum Moisture Content: 19 percent. B. Non-Load-Bearing Interior Partitions: Construction or No. 2 Construction, Stud, or No. 3 grade of any species. C. Ceiling ,Joists (Non-Load-Bearing): Construction, Stud, or No. 3 grade of any species. D. Joists, Rafters, and Other Framing Not Listed Above: Any species and grade with a modulus of elasticity of at least 1 ,300,000 psi (8970 MPa) and an extreme fiber stress in bending of at least 1000 psi (6.9 MPa) for 2-inch nominal (38-mm actual) thickness and 12-inch nominal (286-mm actual) width for single-member use. 2.4 ENGINEERED WOOD PRODUCTS A. Laminated-Veneer Lumber: Structural composite lumber made from wood veneers with grain primarily parallel to member lengths, evaluated and monitored according to ASTM D 5456 and manufactured with an exterior- 061000 ROUGH CARPENTRY Page 4 of 12 Project No. 01091 Proposed Renovations March 6, 2009 Park House Smith College, Northampton, MA PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 WOOD PRODUCTS, GENERAL A. Lumber: DOC PS 20 and applicable rules of grading agencies indicated. If no grading agency is indicated, provide lumber that complies with the applicable rules of any rules-writing agency certified by the ALSC Board of Review. Provide lumber graded by an agency certified by the ALSC Board of Review to inspect and grade lumber under the rules indicated. 1 . Factory mark each piece of lumber with grade stamp of grading agency. 2. Where nominal sizes are indicated, provide actual sizes required by DOC PS 20 for moisture content specified. Where actual sizes are indicated, they are minimum dressed sizes for dry lumber. 3. Provide dressed lumber, S4S, unless otherwise indicated. B. Engineered Wood Products: Provide engineered wood products acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction and for which current model code research or i0w evaluation reports exist that show compliance with building code in effect for Project. 1 . Allowable Design Stresses: Provide engineered wood products with allowable design stresses, as published by manufacturer, that meet or exceed those indicated. Manufacturer's published values shall be determined from empirical data or by rational engineering analysis and demonstrated by comprehensive testing performed by a qualified independent testing agency. 2.2 WOOD-PRESERVATIVE-TREATED LUMBER A. Preservative Treatment by Pressure Process: AWPA C2, except that lumber that is not in contact with the ground and is continuously protected from liquid water may be treated according to AWPA C31 with inorganic boron (SBX). 1 . Preservative Chemicals: Acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction and containing no arsenic or chromium. 061000 ROUGH CARPENTRY Page 3 of 12 Project No. 01091 Proposed Renovations March 6, 2009 Park House Smith College, Northampton, MA 3. SPIB: The Southern Pine Inspection Bureau. 4. WCLIB: West Coast Lumber Inspection Bureau. 5. WWPA: Western Wood Products Association. 1 .4 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of process and factory-fabricated product. Indicate component materials and dimensions and include construction and application details. 1 . Include data for wood-preservative treatment from chemical treatment manufacturer and certification by treating plant that treated materials comply with requirements. Indicate type of preservative used and net amount of preservative retained. 2. For products receiving a waterborne treatment, include statement that moisture content of treated materials was reduced to levels specified before shipment to Project site. B. Research/Evaluation Reports: For the following, showing compliance with building code in effect for Project: 1 . Wood-preservative-treated wood. 2. Engineered wood products. 3. Expansion anchors. 4. Metal framing anchors. 1 .5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Source Limitations for Engineered Wood Products: Obtain each type of engineered wood product through one source from a single manufacturer. 1 .6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Stack lumber flat with spacers between each bundle to provide air circulation. Provide for air circulation around stacks and under coverings. 061000 ROUGH CARPENTRY Page 2 of 12 Project No. 01091 Proposed Renovations March 6, 2009 Park House Smith College, Northampton, MA SECTION 061000 - ROUGH CARPENTRY PART 1 - GENERAL 1 .1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1 .2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1 . Framing with dimension lumber. 2. Framing with engineered wood products. 3. Wood blocking and nailers. #OW 4. Wood furring. 5. Wood sleepers. 6. Utility shelving. 7. Plywood backing panels. B. Related Sections include the following: 1 . Division 06 Section "Sheathing." 1 .3 DEFINITIONS A. Exposed Framing: Framing not concealed by other construction. B. Dimension Lumber: Lumber of 2 inches nominal (38 mm actual) or greater but less than 5 inches nominal (1 14 mm actual) in least dimension. C. Lumber grading agencies, and the abbreviations used to reference them, include the following: 1 . NeLMA: Northeastern Lumber Manufacturers' Association. 2. NLGA: National Lumber Grades Authority. 061000 ROUGH CARPENTRY Page 1 of 12 Project No. 01091 Proposed Renovations March 6, 2009 Park House Smith College, Northampton, MA B. Locate brackets as indicated or, if not indicated, at spacing required to support structural loads. C. Secure wall brackets to building construction as follows: 1 . For concrete and solid masonry anchorage, use drilled-in expansion shields and hanger or lag bolts. 2. For hollow masonry anchorage, use toggle bolts. 3. For wood stud partitions, use hanger or lag bolts set into wood backing between studs. Coordinate with carpentry work to locate backing members. 3.6 CLEANING A. Clean wood rails by wiping with a damp cloth and then wiping dry. B. Touchup Painting: Cleaning and touchup painting of field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas of shop paint are specified in Division 09 painting Sections. C. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and repair galvanizing to comply with ASTM A 780. 3.7 PROTECTION A. Protect finishes of railings from damage during construction period with temporary protective coverings approved by railing manufacturer. Remove protective coverings at time of Substantial Completion. B. Restore finishes damaged during installation and construction period so no evidence remains of correction work. Return items that cannot be refinished in field to shop; make required alterations and refinish entire unit, or provide new units. END OF SECTION 057300 057300 DECORATIVE METAL RAILINGS Page 12 of 12 Project No. 0 109 1 Proposed Renovations March 6, 2009 Park House Smith College, Northampton, MA 3.3 RAILING CONNECTIONS A. Nonwelded Connections: Use mechanical or adhesive joints for permanently connecting railing components. Use wood blocks and padding to prevent damage to railing members and fittings. Seal recessed holes of exposed locking screws using plastic cement filler colored to match finish of railings. B. Expansion .Joints: Install expansion joints at locations indicated but not farther apart than required to accommodate thermal movement. Provide slip-joint internal sleeve extending 2 inches beyond joint on either side, fasten internal sleeve securely to 1 side, and locate joint within 6 inches of post. 3.4 ANCHORING POSTS A. Form or core-drill holes not less than 5 inches deep and 3/4 inch larger than OD of post for installing posts in concrete. Clean holes of loose material, insert posts, and fill annular space between post and concrete with nonshrink, nonmetallic grout, mixed and placed to comply with anchoring material manufacturer's written instructions. B. Leave anchorage joint exposed; wipe off surplus anchoring material; and leave 1 /8-inch buildup, sloped away from post. C. Anchor steel posts to steel with flanges, angle or floor type as required by conditions, welded to posts and bolted to wood supporting members where indicated. D. Anchor posts to metal surfaces with flanges, angle type, or floor type as required by conditions, connected to posts and to metal supporting members as follows: 1 . For steel railings, weld flanges to posts and bolt to metal-supporting surfaces. 3.5 ATTACHING HANDRAILS TO WALLS A. Attach handrails to walls with wall brackets. Provide brackets with 2-inch clearance from inside face of handrail and finished wall surface. 057300 DECORATIVE METAL RAILINGS Page 11 of 12 Project No. 01091 Proposed Renovations March 6, 2009 Park House Smith College, Northampton, MA 2. Stripe paint corners, crevices, bolts, welds, and sharp edges. -O G. Painted Finish: Comply with Division 09 painting Sections. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine plaster and gypsum board assemblies, where reinforced to receive anchors, to verify that locations of concealed reinforcements have been clearly marked for Installer. Locate reinforcements and mark locations if not already done. 3.2 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Fit exposed connections together to form tight, hairline joints. B. Perform cutting, drilling, and fitting required for installing railings. Set railings accurately in location, alignment, and elevation; measured from established lines and levels and free of rack. 1 . Do not weld, cut, or abrade surfaces of railing components that have been coated or finished after fabrication and that are intended for field connection by mechanical or other means without further cutting or fitting. 2. Set posts plumb within a tolerance of 1 /16 inch in 3 feet. 3. Align rails so variations from level for horizontal members and variations from parallel with rake of steps and ramps for sloping members do not exceed 1 /4 inch in 12 feet. C. Adjust railings before anchoring to ensure matching alignment at abutting joints. D. Fastening to In-Place Construction: Use anchorage devices and fasteners where necessary for securing railings and for properly transferring loads to in-place construction. 057300 DECORATIVE METAL RAILINGS Page 10 of 12 Project No. 01091 Proposed Renovations March 6, 2009 Park House Smith College, Northampton, MA 2.7 STEEL AND IRON FINISHES A. Galvanized Railings: 1 . Hot-dip galvanize exterior steel and iron railings, including hardware, after fabrication. a. Provide galvanizing with architectural finish. b. "Colorgaly" by Duncan Galvanizing. 2. Comply with ASTM A 123/A 123M for hot-dip galvanized railings. 3. Comply with ASTM A 153/A 153M for hot-dip galvanized hardware. B. Fill vent and drain holes that will be exposed in finished Work, unless indicated to remain as weep holes, by plugging with zinc solder and filing off smooth. C. For galvanized railings, provide hot-dip galvanized fittings, brackets, fasteners, sleeves, and other ferrous components. D. For nongalvanized steel railings, provide nongalvanized ferrous-metal fittings, brackets, fasteners, and sleeves, except galvanize anchors to be embedded in exterior concrete or masonry. E. Preparation for Shop Priming: Prepare uncoated ferrous-metal surfaces to comply with minimum requirements indicated below for SSPC surface preparation specifications and environmental exposure conditions of installed railings: 1 . Exterior Railings (SSPC Zone 1 B): SSPC-SP 6/NACE No. 3, "Commercial Blast Cleaning." 2. Interior Railings (SSPC Zone 1A): SSPC-SP 7/NACE No. 4, "Brush-off Blast Cleaning." F. Apply shop primer to prepared surfaces of railings, unless otherwise indicated. Comply with requirements in SSPC-PA 1 , "Paint Application Specification No. 1 : Shop, Field, and Maintenance Painting of Steel," for shop painting. Primer need not be applied to surfaces to be embedded in concrete or masonry. 1 . Do not apply primer to galvanized surfaces. 057300 DECORATIVE METAL RAILINGS Page 9 of 12 Project No. 01091 Proposed Renovations March 6, 2009 Park House Smith College, Northampton, MA L. Close exposed ends of hollow railing members with prefabricated end " fittings. M. Provide wall returns at ends of wall-mounted handrails, unless otherwise indicated. Close ends of returns, unless clearance between end of rail and wall is 1 /4 inch or less. N. Brackets, Flanges, Fittings, and Anchors: Provide wall brackets, flanges, miscellaneous fittings, and anchors to interconnect railing members to other work, unless otherwise indicated. 1 . At brackets and fittings fastened to plaster or gypsum board partitions, provide fillers made from crush-resistant material, or other means to transfer wall loads through wall finishes to structural supports and prevent bracket or fitting rotation and crushing of substrate. 0. Provide inserts and other anchorage devices for connecting railings to concrete or masonry work. Fabricate anchorage devices capable of withstanding loads imposed by railings. Coordinate anchorage devices with supporting structure. P. For railing posts set in concrete, provide steel sleeves not less than 6 inches long with inside dimensions not less than 112 inch greater than outside dimensions of post, with steel plate forming bottom closure. 2.6 FINISHES, GENERAL A. Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for recommendations for applying and designating finishes. B. Protect mechanical finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a strippable, temporary protective covering before shipment. C. Appearance of Finished Work: Variations in appearance of abutting or adjacent pieces are acceptable if they are within one-half of the range of approved Samples. Noticeable variations in same piece are not acceptable. Variations in appearance of other components are acceptable if they are within the range of approved Samples and are assembled or installed to minimize contrast. 057300 DECORATIVE METAL RAILINGS Page 8 of 12 Project No. 01091 Proposed Renovations March 6, 2009 Park House Smith College, Northampton, MA D. Cut, drill, and punch metals cleanly and accurately. Remove burrs and ease edges to a radius of approximately 1 /32 inch, unless otherwise indicated. Remove sharp or rough areas on exposed surfaces. E. Form work true to line and level with accurate angles and surfaces. F. Fabricate connections that will be exposed to weather in a manner to exclude water. Provide weep holes where water may accumulate. G. Cut, reinforce, drill, and tap as indicated to receive finish hardware, screws, and similar items. H. Welded Connections: Cope components at connections to provide close fit, or use fittings designed for this purpose. Weld all around at connections, including at fittings. 1 . Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and corrosion resistance of base metals. 2. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap. 3. Remove flux immediately. 4. At exposed connections, finish exposed surfaces smooth and blended so no roughness shows after finishing and welded surface matches contours of adjoining surfaces. I. Mechanical Connections: Connect members with concealed mechanical fasteners and fittings. Fabricate members and fittings to produce flush, smooth, rigid, hairline joints. 1 . Fabricate splice joints for field connection using an epoxy structural adhesive if this is manufacturer's standard splicing method. J. Form changes in direction as follows: 1 . As detailed. 2. By bending or by inserting prefabricated elbow fittings. K. Form simple and compound curves by bending members in jigs to produce uniform curvature for each repetitive configuration required; maintain cross section of member throughout entire bend without buckling, twisting, cracking, or otherwise deforming exposed surfaces of components. 057300 DECORATIVE METAL RAILINGS Page 7 of 12 Project No. 01091 Proposed Renovations March 6, 2009 Park House Smith College, Northampton, MA C. Universal Shop Primer: Fast-curing, lead- and chromate-free, universal modified-alkyd primer complying with MPI#79. 1 . Use primer with a VOC content of 420 g/L (3.5 lb/gal.) or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24). D. Shop Primer for Galvanized Steel: Zinc-dust, zinc-oxide primer formulated for priming zinc-coated steel and for compatibility with finish paint systems indicated, and complying with SSPC-Paint 5. E. Galvanizing Repair Paint: High-zinc-dust-content paint for regalvanizing welds in steel, complying with SSPC-Paint 20. F. Nonshrink, Nonmetallic Grout: Factory-packaged, nonstaining, noncorrosive, nongaseous grout complying with ASTM C 1107. Provide grout specifically recommended by manufacturer for interior and exterior applications. G. Anchoring Cement: Factory-packaged, nonshrink, nonstaining, hydraulic- controlled expansion cement formulation for mixing with water at Project site to create pourable anchoring, patching, and grouting compound. , 2.5 FABRICATION A. General: Fabricate railings to comply with requirements indicated for design, dimensions, member sizes and spacing, details, finish, and anchorage, but not less than that required to support structural loads. B. Assemble railings in the shop to greatest extent possible to minimize field splicing and assembly. Disassemble units only as necessary for shipping and handling limitations. Clearly mark units for reassembly and coordinated installation. Use connections that maintain structural value of joined pieces. C. Make up wire-rope assemblies in the shop to field-measured dimensions with fittings machine swaged. Minimize amount of turnbuckle take-up used for dimensional adjustment so maximum amount is available for tensioning wire ropes. Tag wire-rope assemblies and fittings to identify installation locations and orientations for coordinated installation. 057300 DECORATIVE METAL RAILINGS Page 6 of 12 Project No. 01091 Proposed Renovations March 6, 2009 Park House Smith College, Northampton, MA B. Bars: Hot-rolled, carbon steel complying with ASTM A 29/A 29M, Grade 1010. C. Plates, Shapes, and Bars: ASTM A 36/A 36M. D. Castings: Either gray or malleable iron, unless otherwise indicated. 1 . Gray Iron: ASTM A 48/A 48M, Class 30, unless another class is indicated or required by structural loads. 2. Malleable Iron: ASTM A 47/A 47M. 2.3 FASTENERS A. General: Provide the following: B. Fasteners for Anchoring Railings to Other Construction: Select fasteners of type, grade, and class required to produce connections suitable for anchoring railings to other types of construction indicated and capable of withstanding design loads. C. Provide concealed fasteners for interconnecting railing components and for attaching railings to other work, unless exposed fasteners are unavoidable. 1 . Provide square or hex socket flat-head machine screws for exposed fasteners, unless otherwise indicated. 2.4 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Wood Rails: Hardwood rails of species and profile indicated or, if not indicated, as selected by Architect from manufacturer's standard, with manufacturer's standard transparent finish, and secured to recessed metal subrail. 1 . Species and Finish: Maple with clear conversion varnish finish. 2. Profile: Round shape, 1 1 /2-inch diameter. B. Welding Rods and Bare Electrodes: Select according to AWS specifications for metal alloy welded. Opw 057300 DECORATIVE METAL RAILINGS Page 5 of 12 Project No. 01091 Proposed Renovations March 6, 2009 Park House Smith College, Northampton, MA 1 .8 COORDINATION AND SCHEDULING A. Coordinate installation of anchorages for railings. Furnish setting drawings, templates, and directions for installing anchorages, including sleeves, concrete inserts, anchor bolts, and items with integral anchors, that are to be embedded in concrete or masonry. Deliver such items to Project site in time for installation. B. Schedule installation so wall attachments are made only to completed walls. Do not support railings temporarily by any means that do not satisfy structural performance requirements. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 METALS, GENERAL A. Metal Surfaces, General: Provide materials with smooth surfaces, without seam marks, roller marks, rolled trade names, stains, discolorations, or blemishes. •ow B. Brackets, Flanges, and Anchors: Same metal and finish as supported rails, unless otherwise indicated. 1 . Provide cast-metal brackets with flange tapped for concealed anchorage to threaded hanger bolt. 2. Provide either formed- or cast-metal brackets with predrilled hole for exposed bolt anchorage. 3. Provide formed-steel brackets with predrilled hole for bolted anchorage and with snap-on cover that matches rail finish and conceals bracket base and bolt head. 4. Provide extruded-aluminum brackets with interlocking pieces that conceal anchorage. Locate set screws on bottom of bracket. 2.2 STEEL AND IRON A. Tubing: ASTM A 500 (cold formed) or ASTM A 513, Type 5 (mandrel drawn). 057300 DECORATIVE METAL RAILINGS Page 4 of 12 Project No. 01091 Proposed Renovations March 6, 2009 Park House Smith College, Northampton, MA B. Mill Certificates: Signed by manufacturers of stainless-steel products certifying that products furnished comply with requirements. C. Welding certificates. 1 .6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of railing through one source from a single manufacturer. B. Product Options: Information on Drawings and in Specifications establishes requirements for system's aesthetic effects and performance characteristics. Aesthetic effects are indicated by dimensions, arrangements, alignment, and profiles of components and assemblies as they relate to sightlines, to one another, and to adjoining construction. Performance characteristics are indicated by criteria subject to verification by one or more methods including structural analysis, preconstruction testing, field testing, and in-service performance. C. Product Options: Drawings indicate size, profiles, and dimensional requirements of railings and are based on the specific system indicated. Refer to Division 01 Section "Product Requirements." 1 . Do not modify intended aesthetic effects, as judged solely by Architect, except with Architect's approval. If modifications are proposed, submit comprehensive explanatory data to Architect for review. D. Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to the following: 1 . AWS D1 .1 , "Structural Welding Code--Steel." 1 .7 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Field Measurements: Verify actual locations of walls and other construction contiguous with railings by field measurements before fabrication and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings. 1 . Provide allowance for trimming and fitting at site. 057300 DECORATIVE METAL RAILINGS Page 3 of 12 Project No. 0 109 1 Proposed Renovations March 6, 2009 Park House Smith College, Northampton, MA 1 . Steel: 72 percent of minimum yield strength. B. Structural Performance: Provide railings capable of withstanding the effects of gravity loads and the following loads and stresses within limits and under conditions indicated: 1 . Handrails: a. Uniform load of 50 Ibf/ ft. applied in any direction. b. Concentrated load of 200 lbf applied in any direction. C. Uniform and concentrated loads need not be assumed to act concurrently. 2. Top Rails of Guards: a. Uniform load of 50 Ibf/ ft. applied horizontally and concurrently with 100 Ibf/ ft. applied vertically downward. b. Concentrated load of 200 Ibf applied in any direction. C. Uniform and concentrated loads need not be assumed to act concurrently. C. Thermal Movements: Provide exterior railings that allow for thermal movements resulting from the following maximum change (range) in ambient and surface temperatures by preventing buckling, opening of joints, overstressing of components, failure of connections, and other detrimental effects. Base engineering calculation on surface temperatures of materials due to both solar heat gain and nighttime-sky heat loss. 1 . Temperature Change (Range): 120 deg F, ambient; 180 deg F, material surfaces. D. Control of Corrosion: Prevent galvanic action and other forms of corrosion by insulating metals and other materials from direct contact with incompatible materials. 1 .5 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work. 057300 DECORATIVE METAL RAILINGS Page 2 of 12 Project No. 01091 Proposed Renovations March 6, 2009 Park House Smith College, Northampton, MA SECTION 057300 - DECORATIVE METAL RAILINGS PART 1 - GENERAL 1 .1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1 .2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1 . Steel and iron ornamental railings. B. Related Sections include the following: 1 . Division 05 Section "Metal Stairs" for steel tube railings included with metal stairs. 2. Division 05 Section "Pipe and Tube Railings" for railings fabricated from pipe and tube components. 3. Division 06 Section "Rough Carpentry" for wood blocking for anchoring railings. 4. Division 06 Section " Interior Architectural Woodwork" for wood railings. 1 .3 DEFINITIONS A. Railings: Guards, handrails, and similar devices used for protection of occupants at open-sided floor areas, pedestrian guidance and support, visual separation, or wall protection. 1 .4 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. General: In engineering railings to withstand structural loads indicated, determine allowable design working stresses of railing materials based on the following: 057300 DECORATIVE METAL RAILINGS Page 1 of 12 Project No. 01091 Proposed Renovations March 6, 2009 Park House Smith College, Northampton, MA C. Secure wall brackets to building construction as follows: I"* 1 . For wood stud partitions, use hanger or lag bolts set into wood backing between studs. Coordinate with carpentry work to locate backing members. 3.6 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Touchup Painting: Immediately after erection, clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas of shop paint, and paint exposed areas with same material as used for shop painting to comply with SSPC-PA 1 for touching up shop-painted surfaces. END OF SECTION 055213 055213 PIPE AND TUBE RAILINGS Page 8 of 8 Project No. 01091 Proposed Renovations March 6, 2009 Park House Smith College, Northampton, MA C. Adjust railings before anchoring to ensure matching alignment at abutting joints. D. Fastening to In-Place Construction: Use anchorage devices and fasteners where necessary for securing railings and for properly transferring loads to in-place construction. 3.3 RAILING CONNECTIONS A. Nonwelded Connections: Use mechanical or adhesive joints for permanently connecting railing components. Use wood blocks and padding to prevent damage to railing members and fittings. Seal recessed holes of exposed locking screws using plastic cement filler colored to match finish of railings. B. Welded Connections: Use fully welded joints for permanently connecting railing components. Comply with requirements for welded connections in Part 2 "Fabrication" Article whether welding is performed in the shop or in the field. 3.4 ANCHORING POSTS A. Anchor posts to metal surfaces with oval flanges, angle type, or floor type as required by conditions, connected to posts and to metal supporting members as follows: 1 . For steel pipe railings, weld flanges to post and bolt to metal supporting surfaces. B. Install removable railing sections, where indicated, in slip-fit metal sockets cast in concrete. 3.5 ATTACHING HANDRAILS TO WALLS A. Attach handrails to wall with wall brackets. Provide brackets with 1 -1 /2-inch clearance from inside face of handrail and finished wall surface. 1 . Use type of bracket with predrilled hole for exposed bolt anchorage. B. Locate brackets as indicated or, if not indicated, at spacing required to *. support structural loads. 055213 PIPE AND TUBE RAILINGS Page 7 of 8 Project No. 01091 Proposed Renovations March 6, 2009 Park House Smith College, Northampton, MA M. Provide wall returns at ends of wall-mounted handrails, unless otherwise indicated. Close ends of returns unless clearance between end of rail and wall is 1 /4 inch or less. N. Brackets, Flanges, Fittings, and Anchors: Provide wall brackets, flanges, miscellaneous fittings, and anchors to interconnect railing members to other work, unless otherwise indicated. 1 . At brackets and fittings fastened to plaster or gypsum board partitions, provide fillers made from crush-resistant material, or other means to transfer wall loads through wall finishes to structural supports and prevent bracket or fitting rotation and crushing of substrate. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine plaster and gypsum board assemblies, where reinforced to receive anchors, to verify that locations of concealed reinforcements have been clearly marked for Installer. Locate reinforcements and mark locations if not already done. 3.2 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Fit exposed connections together to form tight, hairline joints. B. Perform cutting, drilling, and fitting required for installing railings. Set railings accurately in location, alignment, and elevation; measured from established lines and levels and free of rack. 1 . Do not weld, cut, or abrade surfaces of railing components that have been coated or finished after fabrication and that are intended for field connection by mechanical or other means without further cutting or fitting. 2. Set posts plumb within a tolerance of 1 /16 inch in 3 feet. 3. Align rails so variations from level for horizontal members and variations from parallel with rake of steps and ramps for sloping members do not exceed 1 /4 inch in 12 feet. 055213 PIPE AND TUBE RAILINGS Page 6 of 8 Project No. 01091 Proposed Renovations March 6, 2009 Park House Smith College, Northampton, MA D. Form work true to line and level with accurate angles and surfaces. E. Fabricate connections that will be exposed to weather in a manner to exclude water. Provide weep holes where water may accumulate. F. Cut, reinforce, drill, and tap as indicated to receive finish hardware, screws, and similar items. G. Connections: Fabricate railings with either welded or nonwelded connections, unless otherwise indicated. H. Welded Connections: Cope components at connections to provide close fit, or use fittings designed for this purpose. Weld all around at connections, including at fittings. 1 . Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and corrosion resistance of base metals. 2. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap. 3. Remove flux immediately. 4. At exposed connections, finish exposed surfaces smooth and blended so no roughness shows after finishing and welded surface matches contours of adjoining surfaces. I. Nonwelded Connections: Connect members with concealed mechanical fasteners and fittings. Fabricate members and fittings to produce flush, smooth, rigid, hairline joints. 1 . Fabricate splice joints for field connection using an epoxy structural adhesive if this is manufacturer's standard splicing method. J. Form changes in direction as follows: 1 . By bending or by inserting prefabricated elbow fittings. K. Form simple and compound curves by bending members in jigs to produce uniform curvature for each repetitive configuration required; maintain cross section of member throughout entire bend without buckling, twisting, cracking, or otherwise deforming exposed surfaces of components. L. Close exposed ends of railing members with prefabricated end fittings. 055213 PIPE AND TUBE RAILINGS Page 5 of 8 Project No. 01091 Proposed Renovations March 6, 2009 Park House Smith College, Northampton, MA B. Fasteners for Anchoring Railings to Other Construction: Select fasteners of '" " type, grade, and class required to produce connections suitable for anchoring railings to other types of construction indicated and capable of withstanding design loads. C. Fasteners for Interconnecting Railing Components: 1 . Provide concealed fasteners for interconnecting railing components and for attaching them to other work, unless exposed fasteners are unavoidable or are the standard fastening method for railings indicated. 2.4 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Welding Rods and Bare Electrodes: Select according to AWS specifications for metal alloy welded. B. Universal Shop Primer: Fast-curing, lead- and chromate-free, universal modified-alkyd primer complying with MPI#79. 2.5 FABRICATION A. General: Fabricate railings to comply with requirements indicated for design, dimensions, member sizes and spacing, details, finish, and anchorage and as follows: 1 . Horizontal rails, cornerposts and intermediates for spans greater than 60 inches (1 500mm): 1 1 /4 inch nominal diameter 2. Vertical Balusters: 5/8 inch diameter bars @ 4 1 /2 inches center to center. 3. Flat vertical base plates: 1 /4 inch thick plate for anchoring to face of stringers and openings. B. Assemble railings in the shop to greatest extent possible to minimize field splicing and assembly. Disassemble units only as necessary for shipping and handling limitations. Clearly mark units for reassembly and coordinated installation. Use connections that maintain structural value of joined pieces. C. Cut, drill, and punch metals cleanly and accurately. Remove burrs and ease edges to a radius of approximately 1 /32 inch, unless otherwise indicated. Remove sharp or rough areas on exposed surfaces. 055213 PIPE AND TUBE RAILINGS Page 4 of 8 Project No. 01091 Proposed Renovations March 6, 2009 Park House Smith College, Northampton, MA B. Schedule installation so wall attachments are made only to completed walls. Do not support railings temporarily by any means that do not satisfy structural performance requirements. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 METALS, GENERAL A. Metal Surfaces, General: Provide materials with smooth surfaces, without seam marks, roller marks, rolled trade names, stains, discolorations, or blemishes. B. Brackets, Flanges, and Anchors: Cast or formed metal of same type of material and finish as supported rails, unless otherwise indicated. 2.2 STEEL AND IRON A. Tubing: ASTM A 500, Grade B. B. Pipe: ASTM A 53/A 53M, Type F or Type S, Grade A, Standard Weight (Schedule 40), unless another grade and weight are required by structural loads. 1 . Provide galvanized finish for exterior installations and where indicated. C. Plates, Shapes, and Bars: ASTM A 36/A 36M. D. Castings: Either gray or malleable iron, unless otherwise indicated. 1 . Gray Iron: ASTM A 48/A 48M, Class 30, unless another class is indicated or required by structural loads. 2. Malleable Iron: ASTM A 47/A 47M. 2.3 FASTENERS A. General: Provide the following: 1 . Steel Railings: Plated steel fasteners complying with ASTM B 633, Class Fe/Zn 25 for electrodeposited zinc coating. 055213 PIPE AND TUBE RAILINGS Page 3 of 8 Project No. 01091 Proposed Renovations March 6, 2009 Park House Smith College, Northampton, MA 2. Top Rails of Guards: a. Uniform load of 50 Ibf/ ft. applied in any direction. b. Concentrated load of 200 Ibf applied in any direction. C. Uniform and concentrated loads need not be assumed to act concurrently. 1 .4 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work. 1 .5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to the following: 1 . AWS D1 .1 , "Structural Welding Code--Steel." 1 .6 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Field Measurements: Verify actual locations of walls and other construction contiguous with railings by field measurements before fabrication and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings. 1 . Established Dimensions: Where field measurements cannot be made without delaying the Work, establish dimensions and proceed with fabricating railings without field measurements. Coordinate wall and other contiguous construction to ensure that actual dimensions correspond to established dimensions. 2. Provide allowance for trimming and fitting at site. 1 .7 COORDINATION AND SCHEDULING A. Coordinate installation of anchorages for railings. Furnish setting drawings, templates, and directions for installing anchorages, including sleeves, concrete inserts, anchor bolts, and items with integral anchors, that are to be embedded in concrete or masonry. Deliver such items to Project site in time 'Auk for installation. 055213 PIPE AND TUBE RAILINGS Page 2 of 8 Project No. 01091 Proposed Renovations March 6, 2009 Park House Smith College, Northampton, MA SECTION 055213 - PIPE AND TUBE RAILINGS PART 1 - GENERAL 1 .1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1 .2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1 . Steel pipe railings. B. Related Sections include the following: 1 . Division 06 Section "Rough Carpentry" for wood blocking for anchoring railings. 1 .3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. General: In engineering railings to withstand structural loads indicated, determine allowable design working stresses of railing materials based on the following: 1 . Steel: 72 percent of minimum yield strength. B. Structural Performance: Provide railings capable of withstanding the effects of gravity loads and the following loads and stresses within limits and under conditions indicated: 1 . Handrails: a. Uniform load of 50 Ibf/ ft. applied in any direction. b. Concentrated load of 200 Ibf applied in any direction. C. Uniform and concentrated loads need not be assumed to act concurrently. 055213 PIPE AND TUBE RAILINGS Page 1 of 8 Project No. 01091 Proposed Renovations March 6, 2009 Park House Smith College, Northampton, MA D. Field Welding: Comply with the following requirements: 1 . Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and corrosion resistance of base metals. 2. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap. 3. Remove welding flux immediately. 4. At exposed connections, finish exposed welds and surfaces smooth and blended so no roughness shows after finishing and contour of welded surface matches that of adjacent surface. 5. Maintain a fire watch for four hours after field welding is completed E. Place and finish concrete fill for treads and platforms to comply with Division 03 Section "Cast-in-Place Concrete." 3.2 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Touchup Painting: Immediately after erection, clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas of shop paint, and paint exposed areas with the same material as used for shop painting to comply with SSPC-PA 1 for touching up shop-painted surfaces. 1 . Apply by brush or spray to provide a minimum 2.0-mil dry film thickness. END OF SECTION 055100 055100 METAL STAIRS Page 7 of 7 Project No. 01091 Proposed Renovations March 6, 2009 Park House Smith College, Northampton, MA 2.6 FINISHES A. Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for recommendations for applying and designating finishes. B. Finish metal stairs after assembly. C. Preparation for Shop Priming: Prepare uncoated ferrous-metal surfaces to comply with minimum requirements indicated below for SSPC surface preparation specifications and environmental exposure conditions of installed products: 1 . Interior Stairs (SSPC Zone 1 A): SSPC-SP 3, "Power Tool Cleaning." D. Apply shop primer to uncoated surfaces of metal stair components, except those with galvanized finishes and those to be embedded in concrete or masonry unless otherwise indicated. Comply with SSPC-PA 1 , "Paint Application Specification No. 1 : Shop, Field, and Maintenance Painting of Steel," for shop painting. 1 . Stripe paint corners, crevices, bolts, welds, and sharp edges. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Fastening to In-Place Construction: Provide anchorage devices and fasteners where necessary for securing metal stairs to in-place construction. Include threaded fasteners for concrete and masonry inserts, through-bolts, lag bolts, and other connectors. B. Cutting, Fitting, and Placement: Perform cutting, drilling, and fitting required for installing metal stairs. Set units accurately in location, alignment, and elevation, measured from established lines and levels and free of rack. C. Fit exposed connections accurately together to form hairline joints. Weld connections that are not to be left as exposed joints but cannot be shop welded because of shipping size limitations. Do not weld, cut, or abrade surfaces of exterior units that have been hot-dip galvanized after fabrication and are for bolted or screwed field connections. OSS100 METAL STAIRS Page 6 of 7 Project No. 01091 Proposed Renovations March 6, 2009 Park House Smith College, Northampton, MA 2.5 FABRICATION, GENERAL A. Provide complete stair assemblies, including metal framing, hangers, struts, clips, brackets, bearing plates, and other components necessary to support and anchor stairs and platforms on supporting structure. 1 . join components by welding, unless otherwise indicated. 2. Use connections that maintain structural value of joined pieces. B. Preassembled Stairs: Assemble stairs in shop to greatest extent possible. Disassemble units only as necessary for shipping and handling limitations. Clearly mark units for reassembly and coordinated installation. C. Cut, drill, and punch metals cleanly and accurately. Remove burrs and ease edges to a radius of approximately 1 /32 inch, unless otherwise indicated. Remove sharp or rough areas on exposed surfaces. D. Form bent-metal corners to smallest radius possible without causing grain separation or otherwise impairing work. E. Form exposed work true to line and level with accurate angles and surfaces and straight edges. F. Weld connections to comply with the following: 1 . Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and corrosion resistance of base metals. 2. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap. 3. Remove welding flux immediately. 4. At exposed connections, finish exposed welds and surfaces smooth and blended so no roughness shows after finishing and contour of welded surface matches that of adjacent surface. G. Form exposed connections with hairline joints, flush and smooth, using concealed fasteners where possible. Where exposed fasteners are required, use Phillips flat-head (countersunk) screws or bolts unless otherwise indicated. Locate joints where least conspicuous. H. Fabricate joints that will be exposed to weather in a manner to exclude water. Provide weep holes where water may accumulate. 055100 METAL STAIRS Page 5 of 7 Project No. 01091 Proposed Renovations March 6, 2009 Park House Smith College, Northampton, MA F. Plain Washers: Round, ASME 1318.22.1 . G. Lock Washers: Helical, spring type, ASME 1318.21 .1 . H. Expansion Anchors: Anchor bolt and sleeve assembly with capability to sustain, without failure, a load equal to six times the load imposed when installed in unit masonry and four times the load imposed when installed in concrete, as determined by testing according to ASTM E 488, conducted by a qualified independent testing agency. 1 . Material for Anchors in Interior Locations: Carbon-steel components zinc-plated to comply with ASTM B 633, Class Fe/Zn 5. 2. Material for Anchors in Exterior Locations: Alloy Group 1 stainless-steel bolts complying with ASTM F 593 and nuts complying with ASTM F 594. 2.4 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Welding Rods and Bare Electrodes: Select according to AWS specifications for metal alloy welded. B. Universal Shop Primer: Fast-curing, lead- and chromate-free, universal modified-alkyd primer complying with MPI#79. 1 . Use primer with a VOC content of 420 g/L (3.5 lb/gal.) or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24). C. Nonshrink, Nonmetallic Grout: Factory-packaged, nonstaining, noncorrosive, nongaseous grout complying with ASTM C 1107. Provide grout specifically recommended by manufacturer for interior and exterior applications. D. Concrete Materials and Properties: Comply with requirements in Division 03 Section "Cast-in-Place Concrete" for normal-weight, air-entrained, ready-mix concrete with a minimum 28-day compressive strength of 3000 psi, unless otherwise indicated. E. Welded Wire Fabric: ASTM A 185, 6 by 6 inches--W1 .4 by W1 .4, unless otherwise indicated. 055100 METAL STAIRS Page 4 of 7 Project No. 01091 Proposed Renovations March 6, 2009 Park House Smith College, Northampton, MA low B. Coordinate locations of hanger rods and struts with other work so that they will not encroach on required stair width and will be within the fire.- resistance-rated stair enclosure. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 METALS, GENERAL A. Metal Surfaces, General: Provide materials with smooth, flat surfaces, unless otherwise indicated. For components exposed to view in the completed Work, provide materials without seam marks, roller marks, rolled trade names, or blemishes. 2.2 FERROUS METALS A. Steel Plates, Shapes, and Bars: ASTM A 36/A 36M. B. Rolled-Steel Floor Plate: ASTM A 786/A 786M, rolled from plate complying with ASTM A 36/A 36M or ASTM A 283/A 283M, Grade C or D. C. Uncoated, Hot-Rolled Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1011 /A 1011 M, either commercial steel, Type B, or structural steel, Grade 30, unless another grade is required by design loads. 2.3 FASTENERS A. General: Provide zinc-plated fasteners with coating complying with ASTM B 633, Class Fe/Zn 25 for exterior use, and Class Fe/Zn 5 where built into exterior walls. Select fasteners for type, grade, and class required. B. Bolts and Nuts: Regular hexagon-head bolts, ASTM A 307, Grade A; with hex nuts, ASTM A 563; and, where indicated, flat washers. C. Anchor Bolts: ASTM F 1554, Grade 36. D. Machine Screws: ASME B18.6.3. AO * E. Lag Bolts: ASME B18.2.1 . 055100 METAL STAIRS Page 3 of 7 Project No. 01091 Proposed Renovations March 6, 2009 Park House Smith College, Northampton, MA 5. Limit deflection of treads, platforms, and framing members to L/360 or 1 /4 inch, whichever is less. 1 .4 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work. 1 . For installed products indicated to comply with design loads, include structural analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation. B. Welding certificates. C. Qualification Data: For professional engineer. 1 .5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: Fabricator of products. B. NAAMM Stair Standard: Comply with "Recommended Voluntary Minimum Standards for Fixed Metal Stairs" in NAAMM AMP 510, "Metal Stairs Manual," for class of stair designated, unless more stringent requirements are indicated. 1 . Preassembled Stairs: Commercial class. C. Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to the following: 1 . AWS D1 .1 , "Structural Welding Code--Steel." 2. AWS D1 .3, "Structural Welding Code--Sheet Steel." 1 .6 COORDINATION A. Coordinate installation of anchorages for metal stairs. Furnish setting drawings, templates, and directions for installing anchorages, including sleeves, concrete inserts, anchor bolts, and items with integral anchors, that are to be embedded in concrete or masonry. Deliver such items to Project site in time for installation. Awk 055100 METAL STAIRS Page 2 of 7 Project No. 01091 Proposed Renovations March 6, 2009 Park House Smith College, Northampton, MA SECTION 055100 - METAL STAIRS PART 1 - GENERAL 1 .1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1 .2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1 . Preassembled steel stairs with concrete-filled treads. B. Related Sections include the following: 1 . Division 03 Section "Cast-in-Place Concrete" for concrete fill for stair treads and platforms. 2. Division 05 Section "Metal Fabrications" for metal treads and nosings not installed in metal stairs. 3. Division 05 Section "Decorative Metal Railings" for ornamental metal railings. 1 .3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Structural Performance of Stairs: Provide metal stairs capable of withstanding the effects of gravity loads and the following loads and stresses within limits and under conditions indicated: 1 . Uniform Load: 100 Ibf/sq. ft.. 2. Concentrated Load: 300 lbf applied on an area of 4 sq. in.. 3. Uniform and concentrated loads need not be assumed to act concurrently. 4. Stair Framing: Capable of withstanding stresses resulting from railing loads in addition to loads specified above. 055100 METAL STAIRS Page 1 of 7 Project No. 01091 Proposed Renovations March 6, 2009 Park House Smith College, Northampton, MA OOW B. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and repair galvanizing to comply with ASTM A 780. END OF SECTION 055000 055000 METAL FABRICATIONS Page 13 of 13 Project No. 01091 Proposed Renovations March 6, 2009 Park House Smith College, Northampton, MA 3.3 INSTALLING BEARING AND LEVELING PLATES A. Clean concrete and masonry bearing surfaces of bond-reducing materials, and roughen to improve bond to surfaces. Clean bottom surface of plates. B. Set bearing and leveling plates on wedges, shims, or leveling nuts. After bearing members have been positioned and plumbed, tighten anchor bolts. Do not remove wedges or shims but, if protruding, cut off flush with edge of bearing plate before packing with grout. 1 . Use nonshrink, nonmetallic grout, unless otherwise indicated. 2. Pack grout solidly between bearing surfaces and plates to ensure that no voids remain. 3.4 INSTALLING METAL BOLLARDS A. Anchor bollards in place with concrete footings. Center and align bollards in holes 3 inches (75 mm) above bottom of excavation. Place concrete and vibrate or tamp for consolidation. Support and brace bollards in position until concrete has cured. B. Fill bollards solidly with concrete, mounding top surface to shed water. 3.5 INSTALLING BICYCLE RACKS A. Anchor bicycle racks to existing construction with expansion anchors. Provide four 1 /2-inch (12.7-mm) bolts at each end post. 3.6 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Touchup Painting: Immediately after erection, clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas. Paint uncoated and abraded areas with the same material as used for shop painting to comply with SSPC-PA 1 for touching up shop-painted surfaces. 1 . Apply by brush or spray to provide a minimum 2.0-mil (0.05-mm) dry film thickness. 055000 METAL FABRICATIONS Page 12 of 13 Project No. 01091 Proposed Renovations March 6, 2009 Park House Smith College, Northampton, MA 4. At exposed connections, finish exposed welds and surfaces smooth and blended so no roughness shows after finishing and contour of welded surface matches that of adjacent surface. D. Fastening to In-Place Construction: Provide anchorage devices and fasteners where metal fabrications are required to be fastened to in-place construction. Provide threaded fasteners for use with concrete and masonry inserts, toggle bolts, through bolts, lag bolts, wood screws, and other connectors. E. Provide temporary bracing or anchors in formwork for items that are to be built into concrete, masonry, or similar construction. F. Corrosion Protection: Coat concealed surfaces of aluminum that will come into contact with grout, concrete, masonry, wood, or dissimilar metals with a heavy coat of bituminous paint. 3.2 INSTALLING MISCELLANEOUS FRAMING AND SUPPORTS A. General: Install framing and supports to comply with requirements of items being supported, including manufacturers' written instructions and requirements indicated on Shop Drawings. B. Anchor supports for operable partitions securely to and rigidly brace from building structure. C. Support steel girders on solid grouted masonry, concrete, or steel pipe columns. Secure girders with anchor bolts embedded in grouted masonry or concrete or with bolts through top plates of pipe columns. 1 . Where grout space under bearing plates is indicated for girders supported on concrete or masonry, install as specified in "Installing Bearing and Leveling Plates" Article. D. Install pipe columns with grouted baseplates. Position and grout column baseplates as specified in "Installing Bearing and Leveling Plates" Article. 1 . Grout baseplates of columns supporting steel girders after girders are installed and leveled. 055000 METAL FABRICATIONS Page 1 1 of 13 Project No. 01091 Proposed Renovations March 6, 2009 Park House Smith College, Northampton, MA with SSPC-PA 1 , "Paint Application Specification No. 1 : Shop, Field, and 4fth,' Maintenance Painting of Steel," for shop painting. 1 . Stripe paint corners, crevices, bolts, welds, and sharp edges. 2.13 STAINLESS-STEEL FINISHES A. Remove tool and die marks and stretch lines or blend into finish. B. Grind and polish surfaces to produce uniform, directionally textured, polished finish indicated, free of cross scratches. Run grain with long dimension of each piece. C. Dull Satin Finish: No. 6. D. When polishing is completed, passivate and rinse surfaces. Remove embedded foreign matter and leave surfaces chemically clean. PART 3 - EXECUTION Aa 3.1 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Cutting, Fitting, and Placement: Perform cutting, drilling, and fitting required for installing metal fabrications. Set metal fabrications accurately in location, alignment, and elevation; with edges and surfaces level, plumb, true, and free of rack; and measured from established lines and levels. B. Fit exposed connections accurately together to form hairline joints. Weld connections that are not to be left as exposed joints but cannot be shop welded because of shipping size limitations. Do not weld, cut, or abrade surfaces of exterior units that have been hot-dip galvanized after fabrication and are for bolted or screwed field connections. C. Field Welding: Comply with the following requirements: 1 . Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and corrosion resistance of base metals. 2. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap. AW 3. Remove welding flux immediately. 055000 METAL FABRICATIONS Page 10 of 13 Project No. 01091 Proposed Renovations March 6, 2009 Park House Smith College, Northampton, MA �Ow* B. Make top rails 36 inches (900 mm) above pavement/floor and bottom rails 4 inches (100 mm) above pavement/floor. C. Galvanize bicycle racks after fabrication. 2.10 METAL DOWNSPOUT BRACKETS A. Fabricate downspout brackets from stainless steel plate as indicated on Drawings. 1 . Provide stainless steel lag screws for affixing to building. 2.11 FINISHES, GENERAL A. Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for recommendations for applying and designating finishes. B. Finish metal fabrications after assembly. 2.12 STEEL AND IRON FINISHES A. Galvanizing: Hot-dip galvanize items as indicated to comply with applicable standard listed below: 1 . ASTM A 123/A 123M, for galvanizing steel and iron products. 2. ASTM A 153/A 153M, for galvanizing steel and iron hardware. B. Preparation for Shop Priming: Prepare uncoated ferrous-metal surfaces to comply with minimum requirements indicated below for SSPC surface preparation specifications and environmental exposure conditions of installed metal fabrications: 1 . Exteriors (SSPC Zone 1 B): SSPC-SP 6/NACE No. 3, "Commercial Blast Cleaning." 2. Interiors (SSPC Zone 1 A): SSPC-SP 3, "Power Tool Cleaning." C. Shop Priming: Apply shop primer to uncoated surfaces of metal fabrications, except those with galvanized finishes and those to be embedded in concrete, sprayed-on fireproofing, or masonry, unless otherwise indicated. Comply 055000 METAL FABRICATIONS Page 9 of 13 Project No. 01091 Proposed Renovations March 6, 2009 Park House Smith College, Northampton, MA C. Galvanize loose steel lintels in exterior walls. D. Prime loose steel lintels located in interior walls with zinc-rich primer. 2.7 METAL LADDERS A. General: 1 . Comply with ANSI Al 4.3, unless otherwise indicated. 2. Space siderails 18 inches (457 mm) apart, unless otherwise indicated. 3. Support each ladder at top and bottom and not more than 60 inches (1500 mm) o.c. with welded or bolted brackets, made from same metal as ladder. B. Steel Ladders: 1 . Siderails: Continuous, 3/8-by-2-1 /2-inch (9.5-by-64-mm) steel flat bars, with eased edges. 2. Rungs: 3/4-inch- (19-mm-) diameter steel bars. 3. Fit rungs in centerline of siderails; plug-weld and grind smooth on outer rail faces. 4. Provide nonslip surfaces on top of each rung by coating with abrasive material metallically bonded to rung by a proprietary process. S. Available Products: a. IKG Industries, a Harsco company; Mebac. b. W. S. Molnar Company; SlipNOT. 2.8 METAL BOLLARDS A. Fabricate metal bollards from Schedule 80 steel pipe. 1 . Cap bollards with 1 /4-inch- (6.4-mm-) thick steel plate. 2.9 BICYCLE RACKS A. Fabricate from Schedule 40 steel pipe, fully welded together, to lengths indicated. 055000 METAL FABRICATIONS Page 8 of 13 Project No. 01091 Proposed Renovations March 6, 2009 Park House Smith College, Northampton, MA 1 . Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and corrosion resistance of base metals. 2. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap. 3. Remove welding flux immediately. 4. At exposed connections, finish exposed welds and surfaces smooth and blended so no roughness shows after finishing and contour of welded surface matches that of adjacent surface. F. Form exposed connections with hairline joints, flush and smooth, using concealed fasteners where possible. Where exposed fasteners are required, use Phillips flat-head (countersunk) screws or bolts, unless otherwise indicated. Locate joints where least conspicuous. G. Fabricate seams and other connections that will be exposed to weather in a manner to exclude water. Provide weep holes where water may accumulate. H. Cut, reinforce, drill, and tap metal fabrications as indicated to receive finish hardware, screws, and similar items. I. Provide for anchorage of type indicated; coordinate with supporting structure. Space anchoring devices to secure metal fabrications rigidly in place and to support indicated loads. 1 . Where units are indicated to be cast into concrete or built into masonry, equip with integrally welded steel strap anchors, 1 /8 by 1 -1 /2 inches (3.2 by 38 mm), with a minimum 6-inch (150-mm) embedment and 2- inch (50-mm) hook, not less than 8 inches (200 mm) from ends and corners of units and 24 inches (600 mm) o.c., unless otherwise indicated. 2.6 LOOSE STEEL LINTELS A. Fabricate loose steel lintels from steel angles and shapes of size indicated for openings and recesses in masonry walls and partitions at locations indicated. Weld adjoining members together to form a single unit where indicated. B. Size loose lintels to provide bearing length at each side of openings equal to 1 /12 of clear span but not less than 4 inches (100 mm), unless otherwise indicated. 055000 METAL FABRICATIONS Page 7 of 13 Project No. 01091 Proposed Renovations March 6, 2009 Park House Smith College, Northampton, MA 1 . Use primer containing pigments that make it easily distinguishable from zinc-rich primer. C. Zinc-Rich Primer: Complying with SSPC-Paint 20 or SSPC-Paint 29 and compatible with topcoat. D. Galvanizing Repair Paint: High-zinc-dust-content paint for regalvanizing welds in steel, complying with SSPC-Paint 20. E. Bituminous Paint: Cold-applied asphalt emulsion complying with ASTM D 1187. F. Nonshrink, Nonmetallic Grout: Factory-packaged, nonstaining, noncorrosive, nongaseous grout complying with ASTM C 1107. Provide grout specifically recommended by manufacturer for interior and exterior applications. G. Concrete Materials and Properties: Comply with requirements in Division 03 Section "Cast-in-Place Concrete" for normal-weight, air-entrained, ready-mix concrete with a minimum 28-day compressive strength of 3000 psi (20 MPa), unless otherwise indicated. 2.5 FABRICATION, GENERAL A. Shop Assembly: Preassemble items in the shop to greatest extent possible. Disassemble units only as necessary for shipping and handling limitations. Use connections that maintain structural value of joined pieces. Clearly mark units for reassembly and coordinated installation. B. Cut, drill, and punch metals cleanly and accurately. Remove burrs and ease edges to a radius of approximately 1 /32 inch (1 mm), unless otherwise indicated. Remove sharp or rough areas on exposed surfaces. C. Form bent-metal corners to smallest radius possible without causing grain separation or otherwise impairing work. D. Form exposed work true to line and level with accurate angles and surfaces and straight edges. E. Weld corners and seams continuously to comply with the following: 055000 METAL FABRICATIONS Page 6 of 13 Project No. 01091 Proposed Renovations March 6, 2009 Park House Smith College, Northampton, MA w (ASTM F 738M) for bolts and ASTM F 594 (ASTM F 836M) for nuts, Alloy Group [1 (Al)] [2 (A4)]. D. Anchor Bolts: ASTM F 1554, Grade 36. 1 . Provide hot-dip or mechanically deposited, zinc-coated anchor bolts where item being fastened is indicated to be galvanized. E. Eyebolts: ASTM A 489. F. Machine Screws: ASME B18.6.3 (ASME 1318.6.7M). G. Lag Bolts: ASME 1318.2.1 (ASME B1 8.2.3.8M). H. Wood Screws: Flat head, ASME B18.6.1 . I. Plain Washers: Round, ASME B18.22.1 (ASME 1318.22M). J. Lock Washers: Helical, spring type, ASME 1318.21 .1 (ASME BI 8.21 .2M). K. Expansion Anchors: Anchor bolt and sleeve assembly with capability to ?` sustain, without failure, a load equal to six times the load imposed when installed in unit masonry and four times the load imposed when installed in concrete, as determined by testing according to ASTM E 488, conducted by a qualified independent testing agency. 1 . Material for Anchors in Interior Locations: Carbon-steel components zinc-plated to comply with ASTM B 633, Class Fe/Zn 5. 2. Material for Anchors in Exterior Locations: Alloy Group 1 (Al) stainless- steel bolts complying with ASTM F 593 (ASTM F 738M) and nuts complying with ASTM F 594 (ASTM F 836M). 2.4 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Welding Rods and Bare Electrodes: Select according to AWS specifications for metal alloy welded. B. Universal Shop Primer: Fast-curing, lead- and chromate-free, universal modified-alkyd primer complying with MPI#79. 055000 METAL FABRICATIONS Page 5 of 13 Project No. 01091 Proposed Renovations March 6, 2009 Park House Smith College, Northampton, MA PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 METALS, GENERAL A. Metal Surfaces, General: Provide materials with smooth, flat surfaces, unless otherwise indicated. For metal fabrications exposed to view in the completed Work, provide materials without seam marks, roller marks, rolled trade names, or blemishes. 2.2 FERROUS METALS A. Steel Plates, Shapes, and Bars: ASTM A 36/A 36M. B. Stainless-Steel Sheet, Strip, Plate, and Flat Bars: ASTM A 666, Type 304. C. Stainless-Steel Bars and Shapes: ASTM A 276, Type 304. D. Steel Tubing: ASTM A 500, cold-formed steel tubing. E. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53/A 53M, standard weight (Schedule 40), unless another weight is indicated or required by structural loads. F. Cast Iron: ASTM A 48/A 48M, Class 30, unless another class is indicated or required by structural loads. 2.3 FASTENERS A. General: Unless otherwise indicated, provide Type 304 stainless-steel fasteners for exterior use and zinc-plated fasteners with coating complying with ASTM B 633, Class Fe/Zn 5, at exterior walls. Provide stainless-steel fasteners for fastening aluminum. Select fasteners for type, grade, and class required. B. Steel Bolts and Nuts: Regular hexagon-head bolts, ASTM A 307, Grade A (ASTM F 568M, Property Class 4.6); with hex nuts, ASTM A 563 (ASTM A 563M); and, where indicated, flat washers. C. Stainless-Steel Bolts and Nuts: Regular hexagon-head annealed stainless- steel bolts, nuts and, where indicated, flat washers; ASTM F 593 055000 METAL FABRICATIONS Page 4 of 13 Project No. 01091 Proposed Renovations March 6, 2009 Park House Smith College, Northampton, MA 1 .5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to the following: 1 . AWS D1 .1 , "Structural Welding Code--Steel." 2. AWS D1 .2, "Structural Welding Code--Aluminum." 3. AWS D1 .3, "Structural Welding Code--Sheet Steel." 4. AWS D1 .6, "Structural Welding Code--Stainless Steel." 1 .6 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Field Measurements: Verify actual locations of walls and other construction contiguous with metal fabrications by field measurements before fabrication and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings. 1 . Established Dimensions: Where field measurements cannot be made without delaying the Work, establish dimensions and proceed with fabricating metal fabrications without field measurements. Coordinate wall and other contiguous construction to ensure that actual dimensions correspond to established dimensions. 2. Provide allowance for trimming and fitting at site. 1 .7 COORDINATION A. Coordinate installation of anchorages for metal fabrications. Furnish setting drawings, templates, and directions for installing anchorages, including sleeves, concrete inserts, anchor bolts, and items with integral anchors, that are to be embedded in concrete or masonry. Deliver such items to Project site in time for installation. B. Coordinate installation of steel weld plates and angles for casting into concrete that are specified in this Section but required for work of another Section. Deliver such items to Project site in time for installation. 055000 METAL FABRICATIONS Page 3 of 13 Project No. 01091 Proposed Renovations March 6, 2009 Park House Smith College, Northampton, MA 7. Division 07 Section "Roof Specialties" for standard downspout brackets. 1 .3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Structural Performance of Ladders: Provide ladders capable of withstanding the effects of loads and stresses within limits and under conditions specified in ANSI A14.3. B. Thermal Movements: Provide exterior metal fabrications that allow for thermal movements resulting from the following maximum change (range) in ambient and surface temperatures by preventing buckling, opening of joints, overstressing of components, failure of connections, and other detrimental effects. Base engineering calculation on surface temperatures of materials due to both solar heat gain and nighttime-sky heat loss. 1 . Temperature Change (Range): 120 deg F (67 deg C), ambient; 180 deg F (100 deg C), material surfaces. 1 .4 SUBMITTALS ,Oak A. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation details for metal fabrications. 1 . Include plans, elevations, sections, and details of metal fabrications and their connections. Show anchorage and accessory items. 2. Provide templates for anchors and bolts specified for installation under other Sections. 3. For installed products indicated to comply with design loads, include structural analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation. B. Samples for Verification: For custom fabricated mounting bracket.. C. Mill Certificates: Signed by manufacturers of stainless-steel sheet certifying that products furnished comply with requirements. D. Welding certificates. E. Qualification Data: For professional engineer. , 055000 METAL FABRICATIONS Page 2 of 13 Project No. 01091 Proposed Renovations March 6, 2009 Park House Smith College, Northampton, MA SECTION 055000 - METAL FABRICATIONS PART 1 - GENERAL 1 .1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1 .2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1 . Custom mounting brackets for downspouts. 2. Loose Lintels. 3. Bicycle Racks. 4. Metal ladders. 5. Metal bollards. B. Products furnished, but not installed, under this Section include the following: 1 . Loose steel lintels. 2. Anchor bolts, steel pipe sleeves, and wedge-type inserts indicated to be cast into concrete or built into unit masonry. C. Related Sections include the following: 1 . Division 03 Section "Cast-in-Place Concrete" for installing anchor bolts, steel pipe sleeves, wedge-type inserts and other items indicated to be cast into concrete. 2. Division 04 Section "Unit Masonry" for installing loose lintels, anchor bolts, and other items indicated to be built into unit masonry. 3. Division 05 Section "Metal Stairs." 4. Division 05 Section "Pipe and Tube Railings." 5. Division 05 Section "Decorative Metal Railings." 6. Division 06 Section "Rough Carpentry" for metal framing anchors. 055000 METAL FABRICATIONS Page 1 of 13 Project No. 01091 Proposed Renovations March 6, 2009 Park House Smith College, Northampton, MA APO* 1 . Remove mortar fins and smears before tooling joints. 2. Remove excess sealant immediately, including spills, smears, and spatter. D. Final Cleaning: After mortar is thoroughly set and cured, clean exposed cast stone as follows: 1 . Remove large mortar particles by hand with wooden paddles and nonmetallic scrape hoes or chisels. 2. Test cleaning methods on sample; leave one sample uncleaned for comparison purposes. Obtain Architect's approval of sample cleaning before proceeding with cleaning of cast stone. 3. Protect adjacent surfaces from contact with cleaner by covering them with liquid strippable masking agent or polyethylene film and waterproof masking tape. 4. Wet surfaces with water before applying cleaners; remove cleaners promptly by rinsing thoroughly with clear water. 5. Clean cast stone by bucket-and-brush hand-cleaning method described in BIA Technical Notes No. 20. 6. Clean cast stone with proprietary acidic cleaner applied according to manufacturer's written instructions. END OF SECTION 047200 047200 CAST STONE MASONRY Page 1 1 of 11 Project No. 01091 Proposed Renovations March 6, 2009 Park House Smith College, Northampton, MA E. Rake out joints for pointing with mortar to depths of not less than 3/4 inch 0 9 mm). Rake joints to uniform depths with square bottoms and clean sides. Scrub faces of units to remove excess mortar as joints are raked. F. Point mortar joints by placing and compacting mortar in layers not greater than 3/8 inch (10 mm). Compact each layer thoroughly and allow it to become thumbprint hard before applying next layer. G. Tool exposed joints slightly concave when thumbprint hard, using a jointer larger than joint thickness, unless otherwise indicated. 3.3 INSTALLATION TOLERANCES A. Variation from Plumb: Do not exceed 1 /8 inch in 10 feet (3 mm in 3 m), 1 /4 inch in 20 feet (6 mm in 6 m), or 1 /2 inch (12 mm) maximum. B. Variation from Level: Do not exceed 1 /8 inch in 10 feet (3 mm in 3 m), 1 /4 inch in 20 feet (6 mm in 6 m), or 1 /2 inch 0 2 mm) maximum. C. Variation in Joint Width: Do not vary joint thickness more than 1 /8 inch in 36 inches (3 mm in 900 mm) or one-fourth of nominal joint width, whichever is less. D. Variation in Plane between Adjacent Surfaces (Lipping): Do not vary from flush alignment with adjacent units or adjacent surfaces indicated to be flush with units by more than 1 /16 inch (1 .5 mm), except due to warpage of units within tolerances specified. 3.4 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Remove and replace stained and otherwise damaged units and units not matching approved Samples. Cast stone may be repaired if methods and results are approved by Architect. B. Replace units in a manner that results in cast stone matching approved Samples, complying with other requirements, and showing no evidence of replacement. C. In-Progress Cleaning: Clean cast stone as work progresses. 047200 CAST STONE MASONRY Page 10 of 11 Project No. 01091 Proposed Renovations March 6, 2009 Park House Smith College, Northampton, MA AOW 1 . For setting mortar, use Type N. 2. For pointing mortar, use Type N. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of cast stone. 1 . Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 SETTING CAST STONE IN MORTAR A. Install cast stone units to comply with requirements in Division 04 Section "Unit Masonry." B. Set cast stone as indicated on Drawings. Set units accurately in locations indicated with edges and faces aligned according to established relationships and indicated tolerances. 1 . Install anchors, supports, fasteners, and other attachments indicated or necessary to secure units in place. C. Wet joint surfaces thoroughly before applying mortar or setting in mortar. D. Set units in full bed of mortar with full head joints, unless otherwise indicated. 1 . If not indicated, set units with joints 1 /4 to 3/8 inch (6 to 10 mm) wide. 2. Build anchors and ties into mortar joints as units are set. 3. Fill dowel holes and anchor slots with mortar. 4. Fill collar joints solid as units are set. 5. Build concealed flashing into mortar joints as units are set. 6. Keep head joints in coping and other units with exposed horizontal surfaces open to receive sealant. 047200 CAST STONE MASONRY Page 9 of 1 1 Project No. 01 091 Proposed Renovations March 6, 2009 Park House Smith College, Northampton, MA 1 . Formulate blend as required to produce color indicated or, if not indicated, as selected from manufacturer's standard colors. 2. Pigments shall not exceed 10 percent of portland cement by weight. 3. Pigments shall not exceed 5 percent of masonry cement or mortar cement by weight. I. Aggregate for Mortar: ASTM C 144. 1 . For mortar that is exposed to view, use washed aggregate consisting of natural sand or crushed stone. 2. For joints less than 1 /4 inch (6 mm) thick, use aggregate graded with 100 percent passing the No. 16 (1 .18-mm) sieve. 3. White-Mortar Aggregates: Natural white sand or crushed white stone. 4. Colored-Mortar Aggregates: Natural sand or crushed stone of color necessary to produce required mortar color. J. Water: Potable. 2.5 ACCESSORIES A. Anchors: Type and size indicated, fabricated from stainless steel complying with ASTM A 240/A 240M, ASTM A 276, or ASTM A 666, Type 304. B. Dowels: Round stainless-steel bars complying with ASTM A 276, Type 304, and 1 /2-inch (12-mm) diameter. 2.6 MORTAR MIXES A. Comply with requirements in Division 04 Section "Unit Masonry" for mortar mixes. B. Do not use admixtures, including pigments, air-entraining agents, accelerators, retarders, water-repellent agents, antifreeze compounds, or other admixtures, unless otherwise indicated. 1 . Do not use calcium chloride in mortar. C. Comply with ASTM C 270, Proportion Specification. 047200 CAST STONE MASONRY Page 8 of 1 1 Project No. 01091 Proposed Renovations March 6, 2009 Park House Smith College, Northampton, MA E. Cure units by one of the following methods: 1 . Cure units with steam in enclosed curing room at temperature of 105 deg F (41 deg C) or above and 95 to 100 percent relative humidity for 6 hours. 2. Cure units with dense fog and water spray in enclosed warm curing room at 95 to 100 percent relative humidity for 24 hours. F. Acid etch units after curing to remove cement film from surfaces to be exposed to view. G. Colors and Textures: Match existing units. 2.4 MORTAR MATERIALS A. Provide mortar materials that comply with Division 04 Section "Unit Masonry." B. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, Type I or II, except Type III may be used for cold-weather construction. Provide natural color or white cement as required to produce mortar color indicated. C. Hydrated Lime: ASTM C 207, Type S. D. Portland Cement-Lime Mix: Packaged blend of portland cement complying with ASTM C 150, Type I or Type III, and hydrated lime complying with ASTM C 207, Type S. E. Masonry Cement: ASTM C 91 . F. Mortar Cement: ASTM C 1329. G. Mortar Pigments: Natural and synthetic iron oxides and chromium oxides, compounded for use in mortar mixes. Use only pigments with a record of satisfactory performance in masonry mortar. H. Colored Cement Product: Packaged blend made from portland cement and lime, masonry cement or mortar cement and mortar pigments, all complying with specified requirements and containing no other ingredients. 047200 CAST STONE MASONRY Page 7 of 1 1 Project No. 01091 Proposed Renovations March 6, 2009 Park House Smith College, Northampton, MA 13. Miller Precast, Inc. 14. Plasticrete Architectural Concrete Products. 15. Precision Development. 16. Siteworks, Inc. 17. Southern Cast Stone Manufacturing, Inc. 18. Stonco. 19. Stone Castle Industries, Inc. 20. Techcrete Architectural Precast. B. Provide cast stone units complying with ASTM C 1364 using the vibrant dry tamp or wet-cast method. 1 . Provide units that are resistant to freezing and thawing as determined by laboratory testing according to ASTM C 666, Procedure A, as modified by ASTM C 1364, or are made from cast stone that has a history of successful resistance to freezing and thawing. C. Fabricate units with sharp arris and details accurately reproduced with indicated texture on all exposed surfaces, unless otherwise indicated. 1 . Slope exposed horizontal surfaces 1 :12, unless otherwise indicated. 2. Provide raised fillets at backs of sills and at ends indicated to be built into jambs. 3. Provide drips on projecting elements, unless otherwise indicated. D. Fabrication Tolerances: 1 . Variation in Cross Section: Do not vary from indicated dimensions by more than 1 /8 inch (3 mm). 2. Variation in Length: Do not vary from indicated dimensions by more than 1 /360 of the length of unit or 1 /8 inch (3 mm), whichever is greater, but in no case by more than 1 /4 inch (6 mm). 3. Warp, Bow, and Twist: Not to exceed 1 /360 of the length of unit or 1 /8 inch (3 mm), whichever is greater. 4. Location of Grooves, False joints, Holes, Anchorages, and Similar Features: Do not vary from indicated position by more than 1 /8 inch (3 mm) on formed surfaces of units and 3/8 inch (10 mm) on unformed surfaces. 047200 CAST STONE MASONRY Page 6 of 1 1 Project No. 01091 Proposed Renovations March 6, 2009 Park House Smith College, Northampton, MA ''" 1 . Do not use admixtures that contain more than 0.1 percent water- soluble chloride ions by mass of cementitious materials. Do not use admixtures containing calcium chloride. 2. Use only admixtures that are certified by manufacturer to be compatible with cement and other admixtures used. 3. Air-Entraining Admixture: ASTM C 260. Add to mixes for units exposed to the exterior at manufacturer's prescribed rate to result in an air content of 4 to 6 percent, except do not add to zero-slump concrete mixes. 4. Water-Reducing Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type A. S. Water-Reducing, Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type D. 6. Water-Reducing, Accelerating Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type E. G. Reinforcement: Deformed steel bars complying with ASTM A 61 5/A 61 5M. Use galvanized or epoxy-coated reinforcement when covered with less than 1 -1 /2 inches (38 mm) of cast stone material. 1 . Epoxy Coating: ASTM A 775/A 775M. H. Embedded Anchors and Other Inserts: Fabricated from stainless steel complying with ASTM A 240/A 240M, ASTM A 276, or ASTM A 666, Type 304. 2.3 CAST STONE UNITS A. Manufacturers: 1 . Advanced Cast Stone, Inc. 2. AHI Supply, Inc. 3. Architectural Art Stone, Inc. 4. Architectural Cast Stone, Inc. 5. Architectural Concrete Company, Inc. 6. Architectural Ornaments, Inc. 7. Artisan Stone Company, Inc. 8. Cast Stone Systems, Inc. 9. DuraStone. 10. Edwards Cast Stone Company. 11 . Fritchman & Associates Cast Stone. 12. Hoyle Stone Products. 047200 CAST STONE MASONRY Page 5 of 11 Project No. 01091 Proposed Renovations March 6, 2009 Park House Smith College, Northampton, MA 1 .7 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Hot-Weather Requirements: Comply with hot-weather construction requirements contained in ACI 530.1 /ASCE 6/TMS 602. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. In other Part 2 articles where titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply to product selection: 1 . Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the products specified. 2. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the manufacturers specified. 2.2 CAST STONE MATERIALS A. General: Comply with ASTM C 1364 and the following: B. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, Type I, containing not more than 0.60 percent total alkali when tested according to ASTM C 114. C. Coarse Aggregates: Granite, quartz, or limestone complying with ASTM C 33; gradation as needed to produce required textures and colors as needed to produce required cast stone colors. D. Fine Aggregates: Natural sand or crushed stone complying with ASTM C 33, gradation as needed to produce required textures and colors as needed to produce required cast stone colors. E. Color Pigment: ASTM C 979, synthetic mineral-oxide pigments or colored water-reducing admixtures; color stable, free. of carbon black, nonfading, and resistant to lime and other alkalis. F. Admixtures: Do not use admixtures unless specified or approved in writing by Architect. 047200 CAST STONE MASONRY Page 4 of 1 1 Project No. 01091 Proposed Renovations March 6, 2009 Park House Smith College, Northampton, MA 1 .5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer Qualifications: A qualified manufacturer of cast stone units similar to those indicated for this Project, with sufficient production capacity to manufacture required units. 1 . Manufacturer is a producing member of the Cast Stone Institute. B. Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent testing agency qualified according to ASTM E 329 for testing indicated, as documented according to ASTM E 548. C. Source Limitations for Cast Stone: Obtain cast stone units through one source from a single manufacturer. D. Source Limitations for Mortar Materials: Obtain mortar ingredients of a uniform quality, including color, from one manufacturer for each cementitious component and from one source or producer for each aggregate. 1 .6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Coordinate delivery of cast stone with unit masonry work to minimize the need for on-site storage and to avoid delaying the Work. B. Pack, handle, and ship cast stone units in suitable packs or pallets. 1 . Lift with wide-belt slings; do not use wire rope or ropes that might cause staining. Move cast stone units, if required, using dollies with wood supports. 2. Store cast stone units on wood skids or pallets with nonstaining, waterproof covers. Arrange to distribute weight evenly and to prevent damage to units. Ventilate under covers to prevent condensation. C. Store installation materials on elevated platforms, under cover, and in a dry location. D. Store mortar aggregates where grading and other required characteristics can be maintained and contamination can be avoided. 047200 CAST STONE MASONRY Page 3 of 1 1 Project No. 01091 Proposed Renovations March 6, 2009 Park House Smith College, Northampton, MA 1 . Include building elevations showing layout of units and locations of joints and anchors. C. Samples for Initial Selection: For colored mortar. D. Samples for Verification: 1 . For each color and texture of cast stone required, 10 inches (250 mm) square in size. 2. For colored mortar. Make Samples using same sand and mortar ingredients to be used on Project. E. Mockup Samples: Furnish sample units for each color and texture of cast stone required, 10 inches (250 mm) square in size for installation in mockups. F. Full-Size Samples: For each type of cast stone unit required. 1 . Make available for Architect's review at Project site. 2. Make Samples from materials to be used for units used on Project. 3. Approved Samples may be installed in the Work. G. Qualification Data: For manufacturer. 1 . Include copies of material test reports for completed projects, indicating compliance of cast stone with ASTM C 1364. H. Quality-Control Plan: Manufacturer's written quality-control plan that includes all elements of the Cast Stone Institute's "Quality Control Procedures Required for Plant Inspection." 1 . Provide copies of documentation showing compliance with quality- control plan as requested by Architect. I. Material Test Reports: For each mix required to produce cast stone, based on testing according to ASTM C 1364, including test for resistance to freezing and thawing. 1 . Provide test reports based on testing within previous two years. 047200 CAST STONE MASONRY Page 2 of 1 1 Project No. 01091 Proposed Renovations March 6, 2009 Park House Smith College, Northampton, MA SECTION 047200 - CAST STONE MASONRY PART 1 - GENERAL 1 .1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1 .2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1 . Cast stone trim for restoration of existing damaged or missing stone units including the following: a. Coping. b. Coping Trim Caps B. Related Sections include the following: 1 . Division 04 Section "Unit Masonry" for installing cast stone units in unit masonry. 1 .3 DEFINITIONS A. Cast Stone: Architectural precast concrete building units intended to simulate natural cut stone. 1 .4 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes for cast stone units. B. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation details for cast stone units. Include dimensions, details of reinforcement and anchorages if any, and indication of finished faces. AOW 047200 CAST STONE MASONRY Page 1 of 11 Project No. 01091 Proposed Renovations March 6, 2009 Park House Smith College, Northampton, MA B. Waste Disposal as Fill Material: Dispose of clean masonry waste, including excess or soil-contaminated sand, waste mortar, and broken masonry units, by crushing and mixing with fill material as fill is placed. 1 . Crush masonry waste to less than 4 inches (100 mm) in each dimension. 2. Mix masonry waste with at least two parts of specified fill material for each part of masonry waste. Fill material is specified in Division 31 Section "Earth Moving." 3. Do not dispose of masonry waste as fill within 18 inches (450 mm) of finished grade. C. Excess Masonry Waste: Remove excess clean masonry waste that cannot be used as fill, as described above, and other masonry waste, and legally dispose of off Owner's property. END OF SECTION 042000 A"k 042000 UNIT MASONRY Page 18 of 18 Project No. 01091 Proposed Renovations March 6, 2009 Park House Smith College, Northampton, MA 3.10 REPAIRING, POINTING, AND CLEANING A. Remove and replace masonry units that are loose, chipped, broken, stained, or otherwise damaged or that do not match adjoining units. Install new units to match adjoining units; install in fresh mortar, pointed to eliminate evidence of replacement. B. Pointing: During the tooling of joints, enlarge voids and holes, except weep holes, and completely fill with mortar. Point up joints, including corners, openings, and adjacent construction, to provide a neat, uniform appearance. Prepare joints for sealant application, where indicated. C. In-Progress Cleaning: Clean unit masonry as work progresses by dry brushing to remove mortar fins and smears before tooling joints. D. Final Cleaning: After mortar is thoroughly set and cured, clean exposed masonry as follows: 1 . Remove large mortar particles by hand with wooden paddles and nonmetallic scrape hoes or chisels. 2. Test cleaning methods on sample wall panel; leave one-half of panel uncleaned for comparison purposes. Obtain Architect's approval of sample cleaning before proceeding with cleaning of masonry. 3. Protect adjacent stone and nonmasonry surfaces from contact with cleaner by covering them with liquid strippable masking agent or polyethylene film and waterproof masking tape. 4. Clean brick by bucket-and-brush hand-cleaning method described in BIA Technical Notes 20. 5. Clean cast stone trim to comply with stone supplier's written instructions. 3.11 MASONRY WASTE DISPOSAL A. Salvageable Materials: Unless otherwise indicated, excess masonry materials are Contractor's property. At completion of unit masonry work, remove from Project site. 042000 UNIT MASONRY Page 17 of 18 Project No. 01091 Proposed Renovations March 6, 2009 Park House Smith College, Northampton, MA C. Cut and bend reinforcing units as directed by manufacturer for continuity at corners, returns, offsets, and other special conditions. 3.7 ANCHORING MASONRY TO STRUCTURAL MEMBERS A. Anchor masonry to structural members where masonry abuts or faces structural members to comply with the following: 1 . Provide an open space not less than 1 /2 inch (1 3 mm) in width between masonry and structural member, unless otherwise indicated. Keep open space free of mortar and other rigid materials. 2. Anchor masonry to structural members with anchors embedded in masonry joints and attached to structure. 3. Space anchors as indicated, but not more than 16 inches (400 mm) o.c. vertically and 24 inches (600 mm) o.c. horizontally. 3.8 LINTELS A. Install steel lintels where indicated. B. Provide minimum bearing of 4 inches (200 mm) at each jamb, unless otherwise indicated. 3.9 REINFORCED UNIT MASONRY INSTALLATION A. Placing Reinforcement: Comply with requirements in ACI 530.1 /ASCE 6/TMS 602. B. Grouting: Do not place grout until entire height of masonry to be grouted has attained enough strength to resist grout pressure. 1 . Comply with requirements in ACI 530.1 /ASCE 6/TMS 602 for cleanouts and for grout placement, including minimum grout space and maximum pour height. 042000 UNIT MASONRY Page 16 of 18 Project No. 01091 Proposed Renovations March 6, 2009 Park House Smith College, Northampton, MA D. Tool exposed joints slightly concave when thumbprint hard, using a jointer larger than joint thickness, unless otherwise indicated. 3.5 COMPOSITE MASONRY A. Bond wythes of composite masonry together using one the following method; 1 . Masonry joint Reinforcement: Installed in horizontal mortar joints. a. Where bed joints of both wythes align, use ladder-type reinforcement extending across both wythes. 2. Header Bonding: Provide rowlock brick headers extending the full width of the wall. B. Collar Joints: Solidly fill collar joints by parging face of first wythe that is laid and shoving units of other wythe into place. C. Corners: Provide interlocking masonry unit bond in each wythe and course at corners, unless otherwise indicated. 1 . Provide continuity with masonry joint reinforcement at corners by using prefabricated L-shaped units as well as masonry bonding. D. Intersecting and Abutting Walls: Unless vertical expansion or control joints are shown at juncture, bond walls together as follows: 1 . Provide individual metal ties not more than 16 inches (406 mm) o.c. 3.6 MASONRY JOINT REINFORCEMENT A. General: Install entire length of longitudinal side rods in mortar with a minimum cover of 5/8 inch (16 mm) on exterior side of walls, 112 inch (13 mm) elsewhere. Lap reinforcement a minimum of 6 inches (150 mm). 1 . Space reinforcement not more than 16 inches (406 mm) o.c. B. Provide continuity at corners by using prefabricated L-shaped units. 042000 UNIT MASONRY Page 15 of 18 Project No. 01091 Proposed Renovations March 6, 2009 Park House Smith College, Northampton, MA C. Lay concealed masonry with all units in a wythe in running bond or bonded by lapping not less than 2 inches (50 mm). Bond and interlock each course of each wythe at corners. Do not use units with less than nominal 4-inch (100- mm) horizontal face dimensions at corners or jambs. D. Stopping and Resuming Work: Stop work by racking back units in each course from those in course below; do not tooth. When resuming work, clean masonry surfaces that are to receive mortar, remove loose masonry units and mortar, and wet brick if required before laying fresh masonry. E. Fill cores in hollow concrete masonry units with grout 24 inches (600 mm) under bearing plates, beams, lintels, posts, and similar items, unless otherwise indicated. 3.4 MORTAR BEDDING AND JOINTING A. Lay hollow brick and concrete masonry units as follows: 1 . With face shells fully bedded in mortar and with head joints of depth equal to bed joints. Avw 2. With webs fully bedded in mortar in all courses of piers, columns, and pilasters. 3. With webs fully bedded in mortar in grouted masonry, including starting course on footings. 4. With entire units, including areas under cells, fully bedded in mortar at starting course on footings where cells are not grouted. B. Lay solid masonry units with completely filled bed and head joints; butter ends with sufficient mortar to fill head joints and shove into place. Do not deeply furrow bed joints or slush head joints. C. Set cast-stone trim units in full bed of mortar with full vertical joints. Fill dowel, anchor, and similar holes. 1 . Clean soiled surfaces with fiber brush and soap powder and rinse thoroughly with clear water. 2. Allow cleaned surfaces to dry before setting. 3. Wet joint surfaces thoroughly before applying mortar. 042000 UNIT MASONRY Page 14 of 18 Project No. 01091 Proposed Renovations March 6, 2009 Park House Smith College, Northampton, MA E. Comply with construction tolerances in ACI 530.1 /ASCE 6/TMS 602 and with the following: 1 . For conspicuous vertical lines, such as external corners, door jambs, reveals, and expansion and control joints, do not vary from plumb by more than 1 /8 inch in 10 feet (3 mm in 3 m), 1 /4 inch in 20 feet (6 mm in 6 m), or 112 inch (12 mm) maximum. 2. For vertical alignment of exposed head joints, do not vary from plumb by more than 1 /4 inch in 10 feet (6 mm in 3 m), or 1 /2 inch (12 mm) maximum. 3. For conspicuous horizontal lines, such as lintels, sills, parapets, and reveals, do not vary from level by more than 1 /8 inch in 10 feet (3 mm in 3 m), 1 /4 inch in 20 feet (6 mm in 6 m), or 1 /2 inch (12 mm) maximum. 4. For exposed bed joints, do not vary from thickness indicated by more than plus or minus 1 /8 inch (3 mm), with a maximum thickness limited to 1 /2 inch (12 mm). Do not vary from bed-joint thickness of adjacent courses by more than 1 /8 inch (3 mm). 5. For exposed head joints, do not vary from thickness indicated by more than plus or minus 1 /8 inch (3 mm). Do not vary from adjacent bed- joint and head-joint thicknesses by more than 1 /8 inch (3 mm). 6. For faces of adjacent exposed masonry units, do not vary from flush alignment by more than 1 /16 inch (1 .5 mm) except due to warpage of masonry units within tolerances specified for warpage of units. 7. For exposed bed joints and head joints of stacked bond, do not vary from a straight line by more than 1 /16 inch (1 .5 mm) from one masonry unit to the next. 3.3 LAYING MASONRY WALLS A. Lay out walls in advance for accurate spacing of surface bond patterns with uniform joint thicknesses and for accurate location of openings, movement- type joints, returns, and offsets. Avoid using less-than-half-size units, particularly at corners, jambs, and, where possible, at other locations. B. Bond Pattern for Exposed Masonry: Unless otherwise indicated, lay exposed masonry in running bond; do not use units with less than nominal 4-inch (100-mm) horizontal face dimensions at corners or jambs. 042000 UNIT MASONRY Page 13 of 18 Project No. 0 109 1 Proposed Renovations March 6, 2009 Park House Smith College, Northampton, MA 1 . Use grout of type indicated or, if not otherwise indicated, of type (fine or coarse) that will comply with Table 1 .1 S.1 in ACI 530.1 /ASCE 6/TMS 602 for dimensions of grout spaces and pour height. 2. Provide grout with a slump of 8 to 11 inches (200 to 280 mm) as measured according to ASTM C 143/C 143M. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of work. 1 . Verify that foundations are within tolerances specified. 2. Verify that reinforcing dowels are properly placed. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Thickness: Build cavity and composite walls and other masonry construction to full thickness shown. Build single-wythe walls to actual widths of masonry units, using units of widths indicated. B. Use full-size units without cutting if possible. If cutting is required to provide a continuous pattern or to fit adjoining construction, cut units with motor-driven saws; provide clean, sharp, unchipped edges. Allow units to dry before laying unless wetting of units is specified. Install cut units with cut surfaces and, where possible, cut edges concealed. C. Matching Existing Masonry: Match coursing, bonding, color, and texture of existing masonry. D. Wetting of Brick: Wet brick before laying if initial rate of absorption exceeds 30 g/30 sq. in. (30 g/194 sq. cm) per minute when tested per ASTM C 67. Allow units to absorb water so they are damp but not wet at time of laying. '' 042000 UNIT MASONRY Page 12 of 18 Project No. 01091 Proposed Renovations March 6, 2009 Park House Smith College, Northampton, MA 2.10 MISCELLANEOUS MASONRY ACCESSORIES 2.11 MORTAR AND GROUT MIXES A. General: Do not use admixtures, including pigments, air-entraining agents, accelerators, retarders, water-repellent agents, antifreeze compounds, or other admixtures, unless otherwise indicated. 1 . Do not use calcium chloride in mortar or grout. 2. Limit cementitious materials in mortar to portland cement, mortar cement, and lime. B. Mortar for Unit Masonry: Comply with ASTM C 270 and BIA Technical Notes 8A, Proportion Specification. Provide the following types of mortar for applications stated unless another type is indicated. 1 . For masonry below grade or in contact with earth, use Type S. 2. For reinforced masonry, use Type N. 3. For exterior, above-grade, load-bearing and non-load-bearing walls ' and parapet walls; for interior load-bearing walls; for interior non-load- bearing partitions; and for other applications where another type is not indicated, use Type N. C. Pigmented Mortar: Use colored cement product or select and proportion pigments with other ingredients to produce color required. Do not add pigments to colored cement products. 1 . Pigments shall not exceed 10 percent of portland cement by weight. 2. Pigments shall not exceed 5 percent of masonry cement by weight. 3. Mix to match Architect's sample. D. Colored-Aggregate Mortar: Produce required mortar color by using colored aggregates and natural color or white cement as necessary to produce required mortar color. 1 . Mix to match existing mortar. E. Grout for Unit Masonry: Comply with ASTM C 476. 042000 UNIT MASONRY Page 11 of 18 Project No. 0 109 1 Proposed Renovations March 6, 2009 Park House Smith College, Northampton, MA 2) Keystone Flashing Company, Inc.; Keystone 3-Way Interlocking Thruwall Flashing. 4. Fabricate metal drip edges for ribbed metal flashing from plain metal flashing of same metal as ribbed flashing and extending at least 3 inches (75 mm) into wall with hemmed inner edge to receive ribbed flashing and form a hooked seam. Form hem on upper surface of metal so that completed seam will shed water. B. Flexible Flashing: For flashing not exposed to the exterior, use the following, unless otherwise indicated: 1 . Copper-Laminated Flashing: 7-oz./sq. ft. (2-kg/sq. m) copper sheet bonded with asphalt between 2 layers of glass-fiber cloth. Use only where flashing is fully concealed in masonry. a. Available Products: 1) Advanced Building Products Inc.; Copper Fabric Flashing. 2) AFCO Products Inc.; Copper Fabric. 3) Hohmann & Barnard, Inc.; H & B C-Fab Flashing. 4) Phoenix Building Products; Type FCC-Fabric Covered Copper. 5) Polytite Manufacturing Corp.; Copper Fabric Flashing. 6) Sandell Manufacturing Co., Inc.; Copper Fabric Flashing. 7) York Manufacturing, Inc.; York Copper Fabric Flashing. C. Solder and Sealants for Sheet Metal Flashings: As specified in Division 07 Section "Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim." 1 . Elastomeric Sealant: ASTM C 920, chemically curing polysulfide sealant; of type, grade, class, and use classifications required to seal joints in sheet metal flashing and trim and remain watertight. D. Adhesives, Primers, and Seam Tapes for Flashings: Flashing manufacturer's standard products or products recommended by flashing manufacturer for bonding flashing sheets to each other and to substrates. 042000 UNIT MASONRY Page 10 of 18 Project No. 01091 Proposed Renovations March 6, 2009 Park House Smith College, Northampton, MA 1 . Connector Section for Concrete: Dovetail tabs for inserting into dovetail slots in concrete and attached to tie section; formed from 0.097-inch- (2.5-mm-) thick, steel sheet, galvanized after fabrication. C. Stone Anchors: Fabricate dowels, cramps, and other stone anchors from stainless steel. 2.8 MISCELLANEOUS ANCHORS A. Dovetail Slots in Concrete: Furnish dovetail slots with filler strips, of slot size indicated, fabricated from 0.034-inch (0.9-mm), galvanized steel sheet. B. Anchor Bolts: Headed steel bolts complying with ASTM A 307, Grade A (ASTM F 568M, Property Class 4.6); with ASTM A 563 (ASTM A 563M) hex nuts and, where indicated, flat washers; hot-dip galvanized to comply with ASTM A 153/A 153M, Class C; of dimensions indicated. 2.9 EMBEDDED FLASHING MATERIALS A. Metal Flashing: Provide metal flashing, where flashing is exposed or partly exposed and where indicated, complying with SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual Division 07 Section "Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim" and as follows: 1 . Copper: ASTM B 370, Temper H00 or H01 , cold-rolled copper sheet, 10-oz./sq. ft. (3-kg/sq. m) weight or 0.0135 inch (0.34 mm) thick for fully concealed flashing; 16-oz./sq. ft. (5-kg/sq. m) weight or 0.0216 inch (0.55 mm) thick elsewhere. 2. Fabricate continuous flashings in sections 96 inches (2400 mm) long minimum, but not exceeding 12 feet (3.6 m). Provide splice plates at joints of formed, smooth metal flashing. 3. Fabricate through-wall metal flashing embedded in masonry from copper, with ribs at 3-inch (75-mm) intervals along length of flashing to provide an integral mortar bond. a. Available Products: 1) Cheney Flashing Company; Cheney 3-Way Flashing (Sawtooth). 042000 UNIT MASONRY Page 9 of 18 Project No. 01091 Proposed Renovations March 6, 2009 Park House Smith College, Northampton, MA 2.6 REINFORCEMENT A. Galvanized Steel Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 615/A 615M or ASTM A 996/A 996M, Grade 60 (Grade 420), Class Il zinc coated after fabrication and bending. B. Masonry joint Reinforcement, General: ASTM A 951 . 1 . Exterior Walls: Hot-dip galvanized, carbon steel. 2. Wire Size for Side Rods: W2.8 or 0.188-inch (4.8-mm) diameter. 3. Wire Size for Cross Rods: W1 .7 or 0.148-inch (3.8-mm) diameter. 4. Spacing of Cross Rods, Tabs, and Cross Ties: Not more than 16 inches (407 mm) o.c. 5. Provide in lengths of not less than 10 feet (3 m). C. Masonry joint Reinforcement for Single-Wythe Masonry: Either ladder or truss type with single pair of side rods. D. Masonry joint Reinforcement for Multiwythe Masonry: 1 . Ladder type with 1 side rod at each face shell of hollow masonry units more than 4 inches 0 00 mm) in width, plus 1 side rod at each wythe of masonry 4 inches (100 mm) or less in width. 2.7 TIES AND ANCHORS A. Materials: Provide ties and anchors specified in subsequent paragraphs that are made from materials that comply with eight subparagraphs below, unless otherwise indicated. 1 . Galvanized Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M, Commercial Steel, G60 (21 80) zinc coating. 2. Steel Sheet, Galvanized after Fabrication: ASTM A 1008/A 1008M, Commercial Steel, hot-dip galvanized after fabrication to comply with ASTM A 153/A 153M. 3. Steel Plates, Shapes, and Bars: ASTM A 36/A 36M. B. Adjustable Anchors for Connecting to Structure: Provide anchors that allow vertical or horizontal adjustment but resist tension and compression forces perpendicular to plane of wall. 042000 UNIT MASONRY Page 8 of 18 Project No. 01091 Proposed Renovations March 6, 2009 Park House Smith College, Northampton, MA E. Mortar Cement: ASTM C 1329. F. Mortar Pigments: Natural and synthetic iron oxides and chromium oxides, compounded for use in mortar mixes. Use only pigments with a record of satisfactory performance in masonry mortar. G. Colored Cement Product: Packaged blend made from portland cement and lime and mortar pigments, all complying with specified requirements, and containing no other ingredients. 1 . Formulate blend as required to produce color indicated or, if not indicated, as selected from manufacturer's standard colors. 2. Pigments shall not exceed 10 percent of portland cement by weight. 3. Available Products: a. Colored Portland Cement-Lime Mix: 1) Capital Materials Corporation; Riverton Portland Cement Lime Custom Color. 2) Holcim (US) Inc.; Rainbow Mortamix Custom Color Cement/Lime. 3) Lafarge North America Inc.; Eaglebond. 4) Lehigh Cement Company; Lehigh Custom Color Portland/Lime Cement. H. Aggregate for Mortar: ASTM C 144. 1 . For mortar that is exposed to view, use washed aggregate consisting of natural sand or crushed stone. 2. For joints less than 1 /4 inch (6.5 mm) thick, use aggregate graded with 100 percent passing the No. 16 (1 .18-mm) sieve. 3. Colored-Mortar Aggregates: Natural sand or crushed stone of color necessary to produce required mortar color. I. Aggregate for Grout: ASTM C 404. J. Water: Potable. 042000 UNIT MASONRY Page 7 of 18 Project No. 01091 Proposed Renovations March 6, 2009 Park House Smith College, Northampton, MA 1 . Unit Compressive Strength: Provide units with minimum average net- area compressive strength of 2500 psi (17.3 MPa). 2. Weight Classification: Normal weight. 3. Size (Actual Dimensions): 3-5/8 inches (92 mm) wide by 2-1 /4 inches (57 mm) high by 7-5/8 inches (194 mm) long. 2.4 BRICK A. General: Provide shapes indicated and as follows: 1 . For ends of sills and caps and for similar applications that would otherwise expose unfinished brick surfaces, provide units without cores or frogs and with exposed surfaces finished. B. Face Brick: ASTM C 216, Grade SW, Type FBS. 1 . Unit Compressive Strength: Provide units with minimum average net- area compressive strength of 3000 psi (20.7 MPa). 2. Efflorescence: Provide brick that has been tested according to ASTM C 67 and is rated "not effloresced." 3. Size (Actual Dimensions): 3-5/8 inches (92 mm) wide by 2-1 /4 inches (57 mm) high by 7-5/8 inches (194 mm) long. 4. Application: Use where brick is exposed, unless otherwise indicated. 5. Provide face brick matching color range, texture, and size of existing adjacent brickwork. 2.5 MORTAR AND GROUT MATERIALS A. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, Type I or 11, except Type 111 may be used for cold-weather construction. Provide natural color or white cement as required to produce mortar color indicated. B. Hydrated Lime: ASTM C 207, Type S. C. Portland Cement-Lime Mix: Packaged blend of portland cement complying with ASTM C 150, Type I or Type III, and hydrated lime complying with ASTM C 207, Type S. D. Masonry Cement: ASTM C 91 . 042000 UNIT MASONRY Page 6 of 18 Project No. 01091 Proposed Renovations March 6, 2009 Park House Smith College, Northampton, MA 1 . Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, products specified. 2. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the products specified. 3. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, manufacturers specified. 4. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the manufacturers specified. 2.2 MASONRY UNITS, GENERAL A. Defective Units: Referenced masonry unit standards may allow a certain percentage of units to exceed tolerances and to contain chips, cracks, or other defects exceeding limits stated in the standard. Do not uses units where such defects, including dimensions that vary from specified dimensions by more than stated tolerances, will be exposed in the completed elk Work or will impair the quality of completed masonry. 2.3 CONCRETE MASONRY UNITS (CMUs) A. Shapes: Provide shapes indicated and as follows: 1 . Provide special shapes for lintels, corners, jambs, sashes, movement joints, headers, bonding, and other special conditions. 2. Provide square-edged units for outside corners, unless otherwise indicated. B. Concrete Masonry Units: ASTM C 90. 1 . Unit Compressive Strength: Provide units with minimum average net- area compressive strength of 1900 psi (13.1 MPa). 2. Weight Classification: Normal weight. 3. Size (Width): Manufactured to dimensions 3/8 inch less than nominal dimensions. , * C. Concrete Building Brick: ASTM C 55. 042000 UNIT MASONRY Page 5 of 18 Project No. 01091 Proposed Renovations March 6, 2009 Park House Smith College, Northampton, MA D. Deliver preblended, dry mortar mix in moisture-resistant containers designed for lifting and emptying into dispensing silo. Store preblended, dry mortar mix in delivery containers on elevated platforms, under cover, and in a dry location or in a metal dispensing silo with weatherproof cover. E. Store masonry accessories, including metal items, to prevent corrosion and accumulation of dirt and oil. 1 .7 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Protection of Masonry: During construction, cover tops of walls, projections, and sills with waterproof sheeting at end of each day's work. Cover partially completed masonry when construction is not in progress. 1 . Extend cover a minimum of 24 inches (600 mm) down both sides and hold cover securely in place. 2. Where 1 wythe of multiwythe masonry walls is completed in advance of other wythes, secure cover a minimum of 24 inches (600 mm) down face next to unconstructed wythe and hold cover in place. .•■� B. Stain Prevention: Prevent grout, mortar, and soil from staining the face of masonry to be left exposed or painted. Immediately remove grout, mortar, and soil that come in contact with such masonry. 1 . Protect base of walls from rain-splashed mud and from mortar splatter by spreading coverings on ground and over wall surface. 2. Protect sills, ledges, and projections from mortar droppings. C. Hot-Weather Requirements: Comply with hot-weather construction requirements contained in ACI 530.1 /ASCE 6/TMS 602. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. In other Part 2 articles where titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply to product selection: 042000 UNIT MASONRY Page 4 of 18 Project No. 01091 Proposed Renovations March 6, 2009 Park House Smith College, Northampton, MA AOW manufacturer for each cementitious component and from one source or producer for each aggregate. C. Sample Panels: Build sample panels to verify selections made under sample submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects. 1 . Build sample panels for typical exterior wall in sizes approximately 36 inches (900 mm) long by 36 inches (900 mm) high in a single wythe. 2. Erect panels adjacent and parallel to existing surface. 3. Clean exposed faces of panels with masonry cleaner indicated. 4. Protect approved sample panels from the elements with weather- resistant membrane. 5. Approval of sample panels is for color, texture, and blending of masonry units; relationship of mortar and sealant colors to masonry unit colors; tooling of joints; aesthetic qualities of workmanship; and other material and construction qualities specifically approved by Architect in writing. a. Approval of sample panels does not constitute approval of deviations from the Contract Documents contained in sample panels unless such deviations are specifically approved by Architect in writing. D. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements in Division 01 Section "Project Management and Coordination." 1 .6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Store masonry units on elevated platforms in a dry location. If units are not stored in an enclosed location, cover tops and sides of stacks with waterproof sheeting, securely tied. If units become wet, do not install until they are dry. B. Store cementitious materials on elevated platforms, under cover, and in a dry location. Do not use cementitious materials that have become damp. C. Store aggregates where grading and other required characteristics can be maintained and contamination avoided. 042000 UNIT MASONRY Page 3 of 18 Project No. 01091 Proposed Renovations March 6, 2009 Park House Smith College, Northampton, MA 1 . Cast-stone trim, furnished under Division 04 Section "Cast Stone , Masonry." 2. Steel lintels for unit masonry, furnished under Division 05 Section "Metal Fabrications." E. Allowances: The following are included under the allowances indicated as specified in Division 01 Section "Allowances": 1 . Face brick under the Face Brick Allowances. 1 .3 DEFINITIONS A. Reinforced Masonry: Masonry containing reinforcing steel in grouted cells. 1 .4 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. B. Samples for Initial Selection: For the following: 1 . Face brick, in the form of straps of five or more bricks. 2. Colored mortar. C. Mix Designs: For each type of mortar and grout. Include description of type and proportions of ingredients. 1 . Include test reports, per ASTM C 780, for mortar mixes required to comply with property specification. 2. Include test reports, per ASTM C 1019, for grout mixes required to comply with compressive strength requirement. 1 .5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Source Limitations for Masonry Units: Obtain exposed masonry units of a uniform texture and color, or a uniform blend within the ranges accepted for these characteristics, through one source from a single manufacturer for each product required. B. Source Limitations for Mortar Materials: Obtain mortar ingredients of a uniform quality, including color for exposed masonry, from a single 042000 UNIT MASONRY Page 2 of 18 Project No. 01091 Proposed Renovations March 6, 2009 Park House Smith College, Northampton, MA SECTION 042000 - UNIT MASONRY PART 1 - GENERAL 1 .1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1 .2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes unit masonry assemblies consisting of the following: 1 . Concrete masonry units (CMUs). 2. Concrete brick. 3. Face brick. 4. Mortar and grout. 5. Reinforcing steel. 6. Masonry joint reinforcement. 7. Ties and anchors. 8. Embedded flashing. B. Related Sections include the following: 1 . Division 04 Section "Cast Stone" for cast stone trim installed as part of this section. 2. Division 07 Section "Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim" for exposed sheet metal flashing. C. Products furnished, but not installed, under this Section include the following: 1 . Dovetail slots for masonry anchors, installed under Division 03 Section "Cast-in-Place Concrete." D. Products installed, but not furnished, under this Section include the following: 042000 UNIT MASONRY Page 1 of 18 Project No. 01091 Proposed Renovations March 6, 2009 Park House Smith College, Northampton, MA 2. Do not use acidic or alkaline cleaners. B. Wash adjacent woodwork and other nonmasonry surfaces. Use detergent and soft brushes or cloths. C. Clean mortar and debris from roof; remove debris from gutters and downspouts. Rinse off roof and flush gutters and downspouts. D. Sweep and rake adjacent pavement and grounds to remove mortar and debris. Where necessary, pressure wash pavement surfaces to remove mortar, dust, dirt, and stains. 3.10 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Architect's Project Representatives: Architect will assign Project representatives to help carry out Architect's responsibilities at the site, including observing progress and quality of portion of the Work completed. Allow Architect's Project representatives use of lift devices and scaffolding, as needed, to observe progress and quality of portion of the Work completed. B. Notify Architect's Project representatives in advance of times when lift devices and scaffolding will be relocated. Do not relocate lift devices and scaffolding until Architect's Project representatives have had reasonable opportunity to make inspections and observations of work areas at lift device or scaffold location. END OF SECTION 040120 040120 MAINTENANCE OF UNIT MASONRY Page 21 of 21 Project No. 01091 Proposed Renovations March 6, 2009 Park House Smith College, Northampton, MA 2. Apply pointing mortar first to areas where existing mortar was removed to depths greater than surrounding areas. Apply in layers not greater than 3/8 inch (9 mm) until a uniform depth is formed. Fully compact each layer thoroughly and allow it to become thumbprint hard before applying next layer. 3. After low areas have been filled to same depth as remaining joints, point all joints by placing mortar in layers not greater than 3/8 inch (9 mm). Fully compact each layer and allow to become thumbprint hard before applying next layer. Where existing masonry units have worn or rounded edges, slightly recess finished mortar surface below face of masonry to avoid widened joint faces. Take care not to spread mortar beyond joint edges onto exposed masonry surfaces or to featheredge the mortar. 4. When mortar is thumbprint hard, tool joints to match original appearance of joints as demonstrated in approved mockup. Remove excess mortar from edge of joint by brushing. 5. Cure mortar by maintaining in thoroughly damp condition for at least 72 consecutive hours including weekends and holidays. a. Acceptable curing methods include covering with wet burlap and plastic sheeting, periodic hand misting, and periodic mist spraying using system of pipes, mist heads, and timers. b. Adjust curing methods to ensure that pointing mortar is damp throughout its depth without eroding surface mortar. 6. Hairline cracking within the mortar or mortar separation at edge of a joint is unacceptable. Completely remove such mortar and repoint. F. Where repointing work precedes cleaning of existing masonry, allow mortar to harden at least 30 days before beginning cleaning work. 3.9 FINAL CLEANING A. After mortar has fully hardened, thoroughly clean exposed masonry surfaces of excess mortar and foreign matter; use wood scrapers, stiff-nylon or -fiber brushes, and clean water, spray applied at low pressure. 1 . Do not use metal scrapers or brushes. ,,,k 040120 MAINTENANCE OF UNIT MASONRY Page 20 of 21 Project No. 0 109 1 Proposed Renovations March 6, 2009 Park House Smith College, Northampton, MA 4. Cracked joints where cracks are 1 /8 inch (3 mm) or more in width and of any depth. 5. Joints where they sound hollow when tapped by metal object. 6. Joints where they are worn back 1 /4 inch (6 mm) or more from surface. 7. Joints where they are deteriorated to point that mortar can be easily removed by hand, without tools. 8. Joints where they have been filled with substances other than mortar. 9. Joints indicated as sealant-filled joints. B. Do not rake out and repoint joints where not required. C. Rake out joints as follows, according to procedures demonstrated in approved mockup: 1 . Remove mortar from joints to depth of 2 times joint width, but not less than 1 /2 inch (13 mm) or not less than that required to expose sound, unweathered mortar. 2. Remove mortar from masonry surfaces within raked-out joints to provide reveals with square backs and to expose masonry for contact with pointing mortar. Brush, vacuum, or flush joints to remove dirt and loose debris. 3. Do not spall edges of masonry units or widen joints. Replace or patch damaged masonry units as directed by Architect. a. Cut out mortar by hand with chisel and resilient mallet. Do not use power-operated grinders without Architect's written approval based on approved quality-control program. D. Notify Architect of unforeseen detrimental conditions including voids in mortar joints, cracks, loose masonry units, rotted wood, rusted metal, and other deteriorated items. E. Pointing with Mortar: 1 . Rinse joint surfaces with water to remove dust and mortar particles. Time rinsing application so, at time of pointing, joint surfaces are damp but free of standing water. If rinse water dries, dampen joint surfaces before pointing. 040120 MAINTENANCE OF UNIT MASONRY Page 19 of 21 Project No. 01091 Proposed Renovations March 6, 2009 Park House Smith College, Northampton, MA 3.6 PAINT REMOVAL A. Paint Removal with Alkaline Paste Paint Remover: 1 . Remove loose and peeling paint using low-pressure spray, scrapers, stiff brushes, or a combination of these. Let surface dry thoroughly. 2. Apply paint remover to dry, painted masonry with brushes. 3. Allow paint remover to remain on surface for period recommended by manufacturer. 4. Rinse with cold water applied by low-pressure spray to remove chemicals and paint residue. 5. Repeat process if necessary to remove all paint. 3.7 CLEANING BRICKWORK A. Nonacidic Liquid Chemical Cleaning: 1 . Wet masonry with cold water applied by low-pressure spray. 2. Apply cleaner to masonry by brush or low-pressure spray. Let cleaner remain on surface for period indicated below: a. As recommended by chemical-cleaner manufacturer and established by mockup. 3. Rinse with cold water applied by low-pressure spray to remove chemicals and soil. 4. Repeat cleaning procedure above where required to produce cleaning effect established by mockup. Do not repeat more than once. If additional cleaning is required, use steam cleaning. 3.8 REPOINTING MASONRY A. Rake out and repoint joints to the following extent: 1 . All joints in areas indicated. 2. Joints where mortar is missing or where they contain holes. 3. Cracked joints where cracks can be penetrated at least 1 /4 inch (6 mm) by a knife blade 0.027 inch (0.7 mm) thick. 040120 MAINTENANCE OF UNIT MASONRY Page 18 of 21 Project No. 01091 Proposed Renovations March 6, 2009 Park House Smith College, Northampton, MA F. Rinse off chemical residue and soil by working upward from bottom to top of each treated area at each stage or scaffold setting. Periodically during each rinse, test pH of rinse water running off of cleaned area to determine that chemical cleaner is completely removed. 1 . Apply neutralizing agent and repeat rinse if necessary to produce tested pH of between 6.7 and 7.5. G. After cleaning is complete, remove protection no longer required. Remove tape and adhesive marks. 3.5 PRELIMINARY CLEANING A. Removing Plant Growth: Completely remove visible plant, moss, and shrub growth from masonry surfaces. Carefully remove plants, creepers, and vegetation by cutting at roots and allowing to dry as long as possible before removal. Remove loose soil and debris from open masonry joints to whatever depth they occur. B. Preliminary Cleaning: Before beginning general cleaning, remove extraneous substances that are resistant to cleaning methods being used. Extraneous substances include paint, calking, asphalt, and tar. 1 . Carefully remove heavy accumulations of material from surface of masonry with a sharp chisel. Do not scratch or chip masonry surface. 2. Remove paint and calking with alkaline paint remover. a. Comply with requirements in "Paint Removal" Article. b. Repeat application up to two times if needed. 3. Remove asphalt and tar with solvent-type paint remover. a. Comply with requirements in "Paint Removal" Article. b. Apply paint remover only to asphalt and tar by brush without prewetting. C. Allow paint remover to remain on surface for 10 to 30 minutes. d. Repeat application if needed. 040120 MAINTENANCE OF UNIT MASONRY Page 17 of 21 Project No. 01 091 Proposed Renovations March 6, 2009 Park House Smith College, Northampton, MA 1 . Do not use wire brushes or brushes that are not resistant to chemical cleaner being used. Do not use plastic-bristle brushes if natural-fiber brushes will resist chemical cleaner being used. 2. Use spray equipment that provides controlled application at volume and pressure indicated, measured at spray tip. Adjust pressure and volume to ensure that cleaning methods do not damage masonry. a. Equip units with pressure gages. 3. For chemical-cleaner spray application, use low-pressure tank or chemical pump suitable for chemical cleaner indicated, equipped with cone-shaped spray tip. 4. For water-spray application, use fan-shaped spray tip that disperses water at an angle of 25 to 50 degrees. C. Perform each cleaning method indicated in a manner that results in uniform coverage of all surfaces, including corners, moldings, and interstices, and that produces an even effect without streaking or damaging masonry surfaces. D. Water Application Methods: 1 . Water-Soak Application: Soak masonry surfaces by applying water continuously and uniformly to limited area for time indicated. Apply water at low pressures and low volumes in multiple fine sprays using perforated hoses or multiple spray nozzles. Erect a protective enclosure constructed of polyethylene sheeting to cover area being sprayed. 2. Water-Spray Applications: Unless otherwise indicated, hold spray nozzle at least 6 inches (150 mm) from surface of masonry and apply water in horizontal back and forth sweeping motion, overlapping previous strokes to produce uniform coverage. E. Chemical-Cleaner Application Methods: Apply chemical cleaners to masonry surfaces to comply with chemical-cleaner manufacturer's written instructions; use brush or spray application. Do not spray apply at pressures exceeding 50 psi (345 kPa). Do not allow chemicals to remain on surface for periods longer than those indicated or recommended by manufacturer. 040120 MAINTENANCE OF UNIT MASONRY Page 16 of 21 Project No. 01091 Proposed Renovations March 6, 2009 Park House Smith College, Northampton, MA B. Remove and replace existing patches unless otherwise indicated or approved by Architect. C. Patching Bricks: 1 . Remove loose material from masonry surface. Carefully remove additional material so patch will not have feathered edges but will have square or slightly undercut edges on area to be patched and will be at least 1 /4 inch (6 mm) thick, but not less than recommended by patching compound manufacturer. 2. Mask adjacent mortar joint or rake out for repointing if patch will extend to edge of masonry unit. 3. Mix patching compound in individual batches to match each unit being patched. Combine one or more colors of patching compound, as needed, to produce exact match. 4. Rinse surface to be patched and leave damp, but without standing wate r. 5. Brush-coat surfaces with slurry coat of patching compound according to manufacturer's written instructions. 6. Place patching compound in layers as recommended by patching compound manufacturer, but not less than 1 /4 inch (6 mm) or more than 2 inches (50 mm) thick. Roughen surface of each layer to provide a key for next layer. 7. Trowel, scrape, or carve surface of patch to match texture and surrounding surface plane or contour of the masonry unit. Shape and finish surface before or after curing, as determined by testing, to best match existing masonry unit. 8. Keep each layer damp for 72 hours or until patching compound has set. 3.4 CLEANING MASONRY, GENERAL A. Proceed with cleaning in an orderly manner; work from top to bottom of each scaffold width and from one end of each elevation to the other. Ensure that dirty residues and rinse water will not wash over cleaned, dry surfaces. B. Use only those cleaning methods indicated for each masonry material and location. d0"' 040120 MAINTENANCE OF UNIT MASONRY Page 15 of 21 Project No. 01091 Proposed Renovations March 6, 2009 Park House Smith College, Northampton, MA F. Replace removed damaged brick with other removed brick and salvaged brick " in good quality, where possible, or with new brick matching existing brick, including size. Do not use broken units unless they can be cut to usable size. G. Install replacement brick into bonding and coursing pattern of existing brick. If cutting is required, use a motor-driven saw designed to cut masonry with clean, sharp, unchipped edges. 1 . Maintain joint width for replacement units to match existing joints. 2. Use setting buttons or shims to set units accurately spaced with uniform joints. H. Lay replacement brick with completely filled bed, head, and collar joints. Butter ends with sufficient mortar to fill head joints and shove into place. Wet both replacement and surrounding bricks that have ASTM C 67 initial rates of absorption (suction) of more than 30 g/30 sq. in. per min. (30 g/194 sq. cm per min.). Use wetting methods that ensure that units are nearly saturated but surface is dry when laid. 1 . Tool exposed mortar joints in repaired areas to match joints of surrounding existing brickwork. 2. Rake out mortar used for laying brick before mortar sets and point new mortar joints in repaired area to comply with requirements for repointing existing masonry, and at same time as repointing of surrounding area. 3. When mortar is sufficiently hard to support units, remove shims and other devices interfering with pointing of joints. 3.3 MASONRY UNIT PATCHING A. Patch the following masonry units unless another type of replacement or repair is indicated: 1 . Units indicated to be patched. 2. Units with holes. 3. Units with chipped edges or corners. 4. Units with small areas of deep deterioration. 040120 MAINTENANCE OF UNIT MASONRY Page 14 of 21 Project No. 01091 Proposed Renovations March 6, 2009 Park House Smith College, Northampton, MA O'° 1 . Cover sills, ledges, and projections to protect from mortar droppings. 2. Keep wall area wet below rebuilding and pointing work to discourage mortar from adhering. 3. Immediately remove mortar in contact with exposed masonry and other surfaces. 4. Clean mortar splatters from scaffolding at end of each day. 3.2 BRICK REMOVAL AND REPLACEMENT A. At locations indicated, remove bricks that are damaged, spalled, or deteriorated. Carefully demolish or remove entire units from joint to joint, without damaging surrounding masonry, in a manner that permits replacement with full-size units. 1 . When removing single bricks, remove material from center of brick and work toward outside edges. B. Support and protect remaining masonry that surrounds removal area. ow Maintain flashing, reinforcement, lintels, and adjoining construction in an undamaged condition. C. Notify Architect of unforeseen detrimental conditions including voids, cracks, bulges, and loose units in existing masonry backup, rotted wood, rusted metal, and other deteriorated items. D. Remove in an undamaged condition as many whole bricks as possible. 1 . Remove mortar, loose particles, and soil from brick by cleaning with hand chisels, brushes, and water. 2. Remove sealants by cutting close to brick with utility knife and cleaning with solvents. 3. Store brick for reuse. Store off ground, on skids, and protected from weather. 4. Deliver cleaned brick not required for reuse to Owner unless otherwise indicated. E. Clean bricks surrounding removal areas by removing mortar, dust, and loose particles in preparation for replacement. 040120 MAINTENANCE OF UNIT MASONRY Page 13 of 21 Project No. 01091 Proposed Renovations March 6, 2009 Park House Smith College, Northampton, MA PART 3 - EXECUTION , 3.1 PROTECTION A. Protect persons, motor vehicles, surrounding surfaces of building being restored, building site, plants, and surrounding buildings from harm resulting from masonry restoration work. 1 . Erect temporary protective covers over walkways and at points of pedestrian and vehicular entrance and exit that must remain in service during course of restoration and cleaning work. B. Comply with chemical-cleaner manufacturer's written instructions for protecting building and other surfaces against damage from exposure to its products. Prevent chemical-cleaning solutions from coming into contact with people, motor vehicles, landscaping, buildings, and other surfaces that could be harmed by such contact. 1 . Cover adjacent surfaces with materials that are proven to resist chemical cleaners used unless chemical cleaners being used will not damage adjacent surfaces. Use materials that contain only waterproof, UV- resistant adhesives. Apply masking agents to comply with manufacturer's written instructions. Do not apply liquid masking agent to painted or porous surfaces. When no longer needed, promptly remove masking to prevent adhesive staining. 2. Keep wall wet below area being cleaned to prevent streaking from runoff. 3. Do not clean masonry during winds of sufficient force to spread cleaning solutions to unprotected surfaces. 4. Neutralize and collect alkaline and acid wastes for disposal off Owner's property. 5. Dispose of runoff from cleaning operations by legal means and in a manner that prevents soil erosion, undermining of paving and foundations, damage to landscaping, and water penetration into building interiors. C. Prevent mortar from staining face of surrounding masonry and other surfaces. look 040120 MAINTENANCE OF UNIT MASONRY Page 12 of 21 Project No. 01091 Proposed Renovations March 6, 2009 Park House Smith College, Northampton, MA a. Remove, alter, or in any way harm the present condition or future preservation of existing surfaces, including surrounding surfaces not in contract. b. Leave a residue on surfaces. 2.6 MORTAR MIXES A. Preparing Lime Putty: Slake quicklime and prepare lime putty according to appendix to ASTM C 5 and manufacturer's written instructions. B. Measurement and Mixing: Measure cementitious materials and sand in a dry condition by volume or equivalent weight. Do not measure by shovel; use known measure. Mix materials in a clean, mechanical batch mixer. 1 . Mixing Pointing Mortar: Thoroughly mix cementitious materials and sand together before adding any water. Then mix again adding only enough water to produce a damp, unworkable mix that will retain its form when pressed into a ball. Maintain mortar in this dampened condition for 15 to 30 minutes. Add remaining water in small portions until mortar reaches desired consistency. Use mortar within one hour of final mixing; do not retemper or use partially hardened material. C. Colored Mortar: Produce mortar of color required by using specified ingredients. Do not alter specified proportions without Architect's approval. 1 . Mortar Pigments: Where mortar pigments are indicated, do not exceed a pigment-to-cement ratio of 1 :10 by weight. D. Do not use admixtures in mortar unless otherwise indicated. 2.7 CHEMICAL CLEANING SOLUTIONS A. Dilute chemical cleaners with water to produce solutions not exceeding concentration recommended by chemical-cleaner manufacturer. 040120 MAINTENANCE OF UNIT MASONRY Page 1 1 of 21 Project No. 01091 Proposed Renovations March 6, 2009 Park House Smith College, Northampton, MA 2.5 ACCESSORY MATERIALS A. Stone Anchors: Type and size indicated or, if not indicated, to match existing anchors in size and type. Fabricate anchors from Type 304 stainless steel. B. Sealant Materials: 1 . Provide manufacturer's standard chemically curing, elastomeric sealants) of base polymer and characteristics indicated below that comply with applicable requirements in Division 07 Section "Joint Sealants." a. Single-component, nonsag urethane sealant. 2. Colors: Provide colors of exposed sealants to match colors of masonry adjoining installed sealant unless otherwise indicated. C. Joint-Sealant Backing: 1 . Cylindrical Sealant Backings: ASTM C 1330, Type C (closed-cell material with a surface skin), and of size and density to control sealant depth and otherwise contribute to producing optimum sealant performance. 2. Bond-Breaker Tape: Polyethylene tape or other plastic tape recommended by sealant manufacturer for preventing sealant from adhering to rigid, inflexible joint-filler materials or joint surfaces at back of joint where such adhesion would result in sealant failure. Provide self-adhesive tape where acceptable. D. Masking Tape: Nonstaining, nonabsorbent material, compatible with pointing mortar, joint primers, sealants, and surfaces adjacent to joints; that will easily come off entirely, including adhesive. E. Miscellaneous Products: Select materials and methods of use based on the following, subject to approval of a mockup: 1 . Previous effectiveness in performing the work involved. 2. Little possibility of damaging exposed surfaces. 3. Consistency of each application. 4. Uniformity of the resulting overall appearance. 5. Do not use products or tools that could do the following: 040120 MAINTENANCE OF UNIT MASONRY Page 10 of 21 Project No. 01091 Proposed Renovations March 6, 2009 Park House Smith College, Northampton, MA 40*- 1 . Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. ABR Products, Inc.; 800 Brush Grade. b. Diedrich Technologies Inc.; 606 Multi-Layer Paint Remover or 606X Extra Thick Multi-Layer Paint Remover. C. Hydroclean, Hydrochemical Techniques, Inc.; Hydroclean HT-716 Heavy Duty Paint Remover. d. Price Research, Ltd.; Price Heavy Duty Paint Stripper. e. PROSOCO; Enviro Klean Safety Peel 2. 2.4 CLEANING MATERIALS A. Water: Potable. B. Hot Water: Water heated to a temperature of 140 to 160 deg F (60 to 71 deg Q. C. Nonacidic Liquid Cleaner: Manufacturer's standard mildly alkaline liquid cleaner formulated for removing mold, mildew, and other organic soiling from ordinary building materials, including polished stone, brick, aluminum, plastics, and wood. 1 . Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Diedrich Technologies Inc.; Diedrich 910PM Polished Marble Cleaner. b. Dominion Restoration Products, Inc.; Bio-Cleanse. C. Dumond Chemicals, Inc.; Safe n' Easy Architectural Cleaner/Restorer. d. Price Research, Ltd.; Price Non-Acid Masonry Cleaner. e. PROSOCO; Enviro Klean 2010 All Surface Cleaner. 040120 MAINTENANCE OF UNIT MASONRY Page 9 of 21 Project No. 01091 Proposed Renovations March 6, 2009 Park House Smith College, Northampton, MA a. For Architect's sample that exhibits a range of colors or color variation within units, provide brick that proportionally matches that range rather than brick that matches an individual color within that range. B. Salvaged Brick: Obtain salvaged brick from demolition locations shown on Drawings. Clean off residual mortar. 2.2 MORTAR MATERIALS A. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, Type I or Type II, white or gray or both where required for color matching of exposed mortar. 1 . Provide cement containing not more than 0.60 percent total alkali when tested according to ASTM C 114. B. Hydrated Lime: ASTM C 207, Type S. C. Factory-Prepared Lime Putty: ASTM C 1489. D. Quicklime: ASTM C 5, pulverized lime. E. Mortar Sand: ASTM C 144 unless otherwise indicated. 1 . Color: Provide natural sand of color necessary to produce required mortar color. 2. For pointing mortar, provide sand with rounded edges. 3. Match size, texture, and gradation of existing mortar sand as closely as possible. Blend several sands if necessary to achieve suitable match. F. Mortar Pigments: Natural and synthetic iron oxides, compounded for mortar mixes. Use only pigments with a record of satisfactory performance in masonry mortars. G. Water: Potable. 2.3 PAINT REMOVERS A. Alkaline Paste Paint Remover: Manufacturer's standard alkaline paste formulation for removing paint coatings from masonry. 040120 MAINTENANCE OF UNIT MASONRY Page 8 of 21 Project No. 01091 Proposed Renovations March 6, 2009 Park House Smith College, Northampton, MA 5. Rake out mortar from joints surrounding masonry to be replaced and from joints adjacent to masonry repairs along joints. 6. Repair masonry, including replacing existing masonry with new masonry materials. 7. Rake out mortar from joints to be repointed. 8. Point mortar joints. 9. After repairs and repointing have been completed and cured, perform a final cleaning to remove residues from this work. 10. Inspect for open mortar joints and repair before cleaning to prevent the intrusion of water and other cleaning materials into the wall. 1 1 . Remove paint. 12. Clean masonry surfaces. C. As scaffolding is removed, patch anchor holes used to attach scaffolding. Patch holes in masonry units to comply with "Masonry Unit Patching" Article. Patch holes in mortar joints to comply with "Repointing Masonry" Article. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MASONRY MATERIALS A. Face Brick: Provide face brick, including specially molded, ground, cut, or sawed shapes where required to complete masonry restoration work. 1 . Provide units with colors, color variation within units, surface texture, size, and shape to match existing brickwork and with physical properties. a. For existing brickwork that exhibits a range of colors or color variation within units, provide brick that proportionally matches that range and variation rather than brick that matches an individual color within that range. 2. Provide units with colors, color variation within units, surface texture, and physical properties to match Architect's sample. Match existing units in size and shape. look 040120 MAINTENANCE OF UNIT MASONRY Page 7 of 21 Project No. 01091 Proposed Renovations March 6, 2009 Park House Smith College, Northampton, MA E. Store lime putty covered with water in sealed containers. F. Store sand where grading and other required characteristics can be maintained and contamination avoided. 1 .7 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Weather Limitations: Proceed with installation only when existing and forecasted weather conditions permit masonry restoration and cleaning work to be performed according to manufacturers' written instructions and specified requirements. B. Repair masonry units and repoint mortar joints only when air temperature is between 40 and 90 deg F (4 and 32 deg C) and is predicted to remain so for at least 7 days after completion of the Work unless otherwise indicated. C. Hot-Weather Requirements: Protect masonry repair and mortar-joint pointing when temperature and humidity conditions produce excessive evaporation of water from mortar and repair materials. Provide artificial shade and wind breaks and use cooled materials as required to minimize 1. evaporation. Do not apply mortar to substrates with temperatures of 90 deg F (32 deg C) and above unless otherwise indicated. D. For manufactured repair materials, perform work within the environmental limits set by each manufacturer. 1 .8 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING A. Order replacement materials at earliest possible date to avoid delaying completion of the Work. B. Perform masonry restoration work in the following sequence: 1 . Remove plant growth. 2. Inspect for open mortar joints and repair before cleaning to prevent the intrusion of water and other cleaning materials into the wall. 3. Remove paint. 4. Clean masonry surfaces. AW 040120 MAINTENANCE OF UNIT MASONRY Page 6 of 21 Project No. 01091 Proposed Renovations March 6, 2009 Park House Smith College, Northampton, MA a. Test cleaners and methods on samples of adjacent materials for possible adverse reactions. Do not use cleaners and methods known to have deleterious effect. b. Allow a waiting period of not less than seven days after completion of sample cleaning to permit a study of sample panels for negative reactions. 4. Approval of mockups does not constitute approval of deviations from the Contract Documents contained in mockups unless Architect specifically approves such deviations in writing. 5. Approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of Substantial Completion. H. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site. 1 . Review methods and procedures related to masonry restoration and cleaning including, but not limited to, the following: a. Construction schedule. Verify availability of materials, Restoration Specialist's personnel, equipment, and facilities needed to make progress and avoid delays. b. Materials, material application, sequencing, tolerances, and required clearances. 1 .6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver masonry units to Project site strapped together in suitable packs or pallets or in heavy-duty cartons. B. Deliver other materials to Project site in manufacturer's original and unopened containers, labeled with manufacturer's name and type of products. C. Store cementitious materials on elevated platforms, under cover, and in a dry location. Do not use cementitious materials that have become damp. D. Store hydrated lime in manufacturer's original and unopened containers. Discard lime if containers have been damaged or have been opened for more than two days. 040120 MAINTENANCE OF UNIT MASONRY Page 5 of' 21 Project No. 01091 Proposed Renovations March 6, 2009 Park House Smith College, Northampton, MA E. Cleaning Program: Prepare a written cleaning program that describes cleaning process in detail, including materials, methods, and equipment to be used, protection of surrounding materials, and control of runoff during operations. 1 . if materials and methods other than those indicated are proposed for any phase of restoration work, add to the Quality-Control Program a written description of such materials and methods, including evidence of successful use on comparable projects, and demonstrations to show their effectiveness for this Project and worker's ability to use such materials and methods properly. F. Cleaning and Repair Appearance Standard: Cleaned and repaired surfaces are to have a uniform appearance as viewed from 20 feet (6 m) away by Architect. Perform additional paint and stain removal, general cleaning, and spot cleaning of small areas that are noticeably different, so that surface blends smoothly into surrounding areas. G. Mockups: Prepare mockups of restoration and cleaning to demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for materials and execution and for fabrication and installation. 1 . Masonry Repair: Prepare sample areas for each type of masonry material indicated to have repair work performed. If not otherwise indicated, size each mockup not smaller than 2 adjacent whole units or approximately 48 inches (1200 mm) in least dimension. Erect sample areas in existing walls unless otherwise indicated, to demonstrate quality of materials, workmanship, and blending with existing work. Include the following as a minimum: a. Replacement: 1) Four brick units replaced. 2. Repointing: Rake out joints in 2 separate areas, each approximately 36 inches (900 mm) high by 48 inches (1200 mm) wide for each type of repointing required and repoint one of the areas. 3. Cleaning: Clean an area approximately 25 sq. ft. (2.3 sq. m) for each type of masonry and surface condition. .� 040120 MAINTENANCE OF UNIT MASONRY Page 4 of 21 Project No. 01091 Proposed Renovations March 6, 2009 Park House Smith College, Northampton, MA OOW D. Restoration Program. E. Cleaning Program. 1 .5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Restoration Specialist Qualifications: Engage an experienced masonry restoration and cleaning firm to perform work of this Section. Firm shall have completed work similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project with a record of successful in-service performance. Experience installing standard unit masonry is not sufficient experience for masonry restoration work. 1 . At Contractor's option, work may be divided between two specialist firms: one for cleaning work and one for repair work. 2. Field Supervision: Restoration specialist firms shall maintain experienced full-time supervisors on Project site during times that clay masonry restoration and cleaning work is in progress. Supervisors shall not be changed during Project except for causes beyond the control of restoration specialist firm. 3. Restoration Worker Qualifications: Persons who are experienced in restoration work of types they will be performing. B. Chemical-Cleaner Manufacturer Qualifications: A firm regularly engaged in producing masonry cleaners that have been used for similar applications with successful results, and with factory-trained representatives who are available for consultation and Project-site inspection and assistance at no additional cost. C. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of material for masonry restoration (face brick, cement, sand, etc.) from one source with resources to provide materials of consistent quality in appearance and physical properties. D. Quality-Control Program: Prepare a written quality-control program for this Project to systematically demonstrate the ability of personnel to properly follow methods and use materials and tools without damaging masonry. Include provisions for supervising performance and preventing damage due to worker fatigue. 040120 MAINTENANCE OF UNIT MASONRY Page 3 of 21 Project No. 01 091 Proposed Renovations March 6, 2009 Park House Smith College, Northampton, MA B. Low-Pressure Spray: 100 to 400 psi (690 to 2750 kPa); 4 to 6 gpm (0.25 to 0.4 L/s). C. Saturation Coefficient: Ratio of the weight of water absorbed during immersion in cold water to weight absorbed during immersion in boiling water; used as an indication of resistance of masonry units to freezing and thawing. 1 .4 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include recommendations for application and use. Include test data substantiating that products comply with requirements. B. Samples for Initial Selection: For the following: 1 . Pointing Mortar: Submit sets of mortar for pointing in the form of sample mortar strips, 6 inches (150 mm) long by 112 inch (13 mm) wide, set in aluminum or plastic channels. a. Have each set contain a close color range of at least three Samples of different mixes of colored sands and cements that produce a mortar matching the cleaned masonry when cured and dry. 2. Patching Compound: Submit sets of patching compound Samples in the form of plugs (patches in drilled holes) in sample units of masonry representative of the range of masonry colors on the building. a. Have each set contain a close color range of at least three Samples of different mixes of patching compound that matches the variations in existing masonry when cured and dry. C. Samples for Verification: For the following: 1 . Each type of masonry unit to be used for replacing existing units. Include sets of Samples as necessary to show the full range of shape, color, and texture to be expected. a. For each brick type, provide straps or panels containing at least four bricks. Include multiple straps for brick with a wide range. 040120 MAINTENANCE OF UNIT MASONRY Page 2 of 21 Project No. 01091 Proposed Renovations March 6, 2009 Park House Smith College, Northampton, MA SECTION 040120 - MAINTENANCE OF UNIT MASONRY PART 1 - GENERAL 1 .1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. B. Related Documents: 1 . See Division 01 Section "Unit Prices" for instructions regarding unit prices fpr additional repointing. 1 .2 SUMMARY A. Section includes maintenance of unit masonry consisting of brick clay masonry restoration and cleaning as follows: 1 . Unused anchor removal. 2. Repairing unit masonry, including replacing units. 3. Repointing joints. 4. Preliminary cleaning, including removing plant growth. 5. Cleaning exposed unit masonry surfaces. B. Related Sections: 1 . Division 04 Section "Unit Masonry" for new clay masonry construction. 2. Division 04 Section "Cast Stone" for cast stone unit to replace missing and broken units in existing clay masonry construction. 3. Division 07 Section "Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim" for metal flashing installed in or on restored clay masonry. 1 .3 DEFINITIONS A. Very Low-Pressure Spray: Under 100 psi (690 kPa). 040120 MAINTENANCE OF UNIT MASONRY Page 1 of 21 Project No. 01091 Proposed Renovations March 6, 2009 Park House Smith College, Northampton, MA 3. Air Content: ASTM C 231 , pressure method, for normal-weight concrete; one test for each composite sample, but not less than one test for each day's pour of each concrete mixture. 4. Compression Test Specimens: ASTM C 31 /C 31 M. a. Cast and laboratory cure two sets of two standard cylinder specimens for each composite sample. 5. Compressive-Strength Tests: ASTM C 39/C 39M; test one set of two laboratory-cured specimens at 7 days and one set of two specimens at 28 days. a. A compressive-strength test shall be the average compressive strength from a set of two specimens obtained from same composite sample and tested at age indicated. 6. Strength of each concrete mixture will be satisfactory if every average of any three consecutive compressive-strength tests equals or exceeds specified compressive strength and no compressive-strength test value falls below specified compressive strength by more than 500 psi (14 MPa). 7. Test results shall be reported in writing to Owner, Architect, concrete manufacturer, and Contractor within 48 hours of testing. Reports of compressive-strength tests shall contain Project identification name and number, date of concrete placement, name of concrete testing and inspecting agency, location of concrete batch in Work, design compressive strength at 28 days, concrete mixture proportions and materials, compressive breaking strength, and type of break for both l- and 28-day tests. 8. Additional Tests: Testing and inspecting agency shall make additional tests of concrete when test results indicate that slump, air entrainment, compressive strengths, or other requirements have not been met. 9. Correct deficiencies in the Work that test reports and inspections indicate dos not comply with the Contract Documents. END OF SECTION 033000 033000 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE Page 19 of 19 Project No. 01091 Proposed Renovations March 6, 2009 Park House Smith College, Northampton, MA around. Dampen concrete surfaces in contact with patching concrete and apply bonding agent. Mix patching concrete of same materials and mixture as original concrete except without coarse aggregate. Place, compact, and finish to blend with adjacent finished concrete. Cure in same manner as adjacent concrete. 5. Repair random cracks and single holes 1 inch (25 mm) or less in diameter with patching mortar. Groove top of cracks and cut out holes to sound concrete and clean off dust, dirt, and loose particles. Dampen cleaned concrete surfaces and apply bonding agent. Place patching mortar before bonding agent has dried. Compact patching mortar and finish to match adjacent concrete. Keep patched area continuously moist for at least 72 hours. D. Repair materials and installation not specified above may be used, subject to Architect's approval. 3.13 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Testing and Inspecting: Engage a qualified testing and inspecting agency to perform tests and inspections and to submit reports. B. Concrete Tests: Testing of composite samples of fresh concrete obtained according to ASTM C 172 shall be performed according to the following requirements: 1 . Testing Frequency: Obtain one composite sample for each day's pour of each concrete mixture exceeding 3 cu. yd. (2 cu. m), but less than 25 cu. yd. (19 cu. m) but not less than the following: a. Foundation walls: One test. b. Exterior slabs: One test. C. Interior slabs: One test (may be omitted if part of exterior slab pour). 2. Slump: ASTM C 143/C 143M; one test at point of placement for each composite sample, but not less than one test for each day's pour of each concrete mixture. Perform additional tests when concrete consistency appears to change. 033000 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE Page 18 of 19 Project No. 01091 Proposed Renovations March 6, 2009 Park House Smith College, Northampton, MA B. Remove dirt, debris, saw cuttings, curing compounds, and sealers from joints; leave contact faces of joint clean and dry. C. Install semirigid joint filler full depth in saw-cut joints and at least 2 inches (50 mm) deep in formed joints. Overfill joint and trim joint filler flush with top of joint after hardening. 3.12 CONCRETE SURFACE REPAIRS A. Defective Concrete: Repair and patch defective areas when approved by Architect. Remove and replace concrete that cannot be repaired and patched to Architect's approval. B. Patching Mortar: Mix dry-pack patching mortar, consisting of one part portland cement to two and one-half parts fine aggregate passing a No. 16 (1 .18-mm) sieve, using only enough water for handling and placing. C. Repairing Unformed Surfaces: Test unformed surfaces, such as floors and slabs, for finish and verify surface tolerances specified for each surface. Correct low and high areas. Test surfaces sloped to drain for trueness of slope and smoothness; use a sloped template. 1 . Repair finished surfaces containing defects. Surface defects include spalls, popouts, honeycombs, rock pockets, crazing and cracks in excess of 0.01 inch (0.25 mm) wide or that penetrate to reinforcement or completely through unreinforced sections regardless of width, and other objectionable conditions. 2. After concrete has cured at least 14 days, correct high areas by grinding. 3. Correct other low areas scheduled to receive floor coverings with a repair underlayment. Prepare, mix, and apply repair underlayment and primer according to manufacturer's written instructions to produce a smooth, uniform, plane, and level surface. Feather edges to match adjacent floor elevations. 4. Repair defective areas, except random cracks and single holes 1 inch (25 mm) or less in diameter, by cutting out and replacing with fresh concrete. Remove defective areas with clean, square cuts and expose steel reinforcement with at least a 3/4-inch (19-mm) clearance all 033000 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE Page 17 of 19 Project No. 01091 Proposed Renovations March 6, 2009 Park House Smith College, Northampton, MA according to manufacturer's written instructions after placing, screeding, and bull floating or darbying concrete, but before float finishing. C. Formed Surfaces: Cure formed concrete surfaces. If forms remain during curing period, moist cure after loosening forms. If removing forms before end of curing period, continue curing for the remainder of the curing period. D. Unformed Surfaces: Begin curing immediately after finishing concrete. Cure unformed surfaces, including floors and slabs, concrete floor toppings, and other surfaces. E. Cure concrete according to ACI 308.1 , by one or a combination of the following methods: 1 . Moisture Curing: Keep surfaces continuously moist for not less than seven days with the following materials: a. Water. b. Continuous water-fog spray. C. Absorptive cover, water saturated, and kept continuously wet. Cover concrete surfaces and edges with 12-inch (300-mm) lap over adjacent absorptive covers. 2. Curing Compound: Apply uniformly in continuous operation by power spray or roller according to manufacturer's written instructions. Recoat areas subjected to heavy rainfall within three hours after initial application. Maintain continuity of coating and repair damage during curing period. a. After curing period has elapsed, remove curing compound without damaging concrete surfaces by method recommended by curing compound manufacturer. 3.11 JOINT FILLING A. Prepare, clean, and install joint filler according to manufacturer's written instructions. 1 . Defer joint filling until concrete has aged at least one month(s). Do not „dw fill joints until construction traffic has permanently ceased. 033000 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE Page 16 of 19 Project No. 01091 Proposed Renovations March 6, 2009 Park House Smith College, Northampton, MA 2. Finish and measure surface so gap at any point between concrete surface and an unleveled, freestanding, 10-foot- (3.05-m-) long straightedge resting on 2 high spots and placed anywhere on the surface does not exceed 3/16 inch (4.8 mm) D. Broom Finish: Apply a broom finish to exterior concrete platforms, steps, and ramps, and elsewhere as indicated. 1 . Immediately after float finishing, slightly roughen trafficked surface by brooming with fiber-bristle broom perpendicular to main traffic route. Coordinate required final finish with Architect before application. 3.9 MISCELLANEOUS CONCRETE ITEMS A. Filling In: Fill in holes and openings left in concrete structures, unless otherwise indicated, after work of other trades is in place. Mix, place, and cure concrete, as specified, to blend with in-place construction. Provide other miscellaneous concrete filling indicated or required to complete the Work. B. Equipment Bases and Foundations: Provide machine and equipment bases and foundations as shown on Drawings. Set anchor bolts for machines and equipment at correct elevations, complying with diagrams or templates from manufacturer furnishing machines and equipment. C. Steel Pan Stairs: Provide concrete fill for steel pan stair treads, landings, and associated items. Cast-in inserts and accessories as shown on Drawings. Screed, tamp, and trowel-finish concrete surfaces. 3.10 CONCRETE PROTECTING AND CURING A. General: Protect freshly placed concrete from premature drying and excessive cold or hot temperatures. Comply with ACI 306.1 for cold-weather protection and ACI 301 for hot-weather protection during curing. B. Evaporation Retarder: Apply evaporation retarder to unformed concrete surfaces if hot, dry, or windy conditions cause moisture loss approaching 0.2 ow lb/sq. ft. x h (1 kg/sq. m x h) before and during finishing operations. Apply 033000 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE Page 15 of 19 Project No. 01091 Proposed Renovations March 6, 2009 Park House Smith College, Northampton, MA 2. Fog-spray forms, steel reinforcement, and subgrade just before placing concrete. Keep subgrade uniformly moist without standing water, soft Spots, or dry areas. 3.7 FINISHING FORMED SURFACES A. Rough-Formed Finish: As-cast concrete texture imparted by form-facing material with tie holes and defects repaired and patched. Remove fins and other projections that exceed specified limits on formed-surface irregularities. 1 . Apply to concrete surfaces not exposed to public view. B. Related Unformed Surfaces: At tops of walls, horizontal offsets, and similar unformed surfaces adjacent to formed surfaces, strike off smooth and finish with a texture matching adjacent formed surfaces. Continue final surface treatment of formed surfaces uniformly across adjacent unformed surfaces, unless otherwise indicated. 3.8 FINISHING FLOORS AND SLABS A. General: Comply with ACI 302.1 R recommendations for screeding, restraightening, and finishing operations for concrete surfaces. Do not wet concrete surfaces. B. Float Finish: Consolidate surface with power-driven floats or by hand floating if area is small or inaccessible to power driven floats. Restraighten, cut down high spots, and fill low spots. Repeat float passes and restraightening until surface is left with a uniform, smooth, granular texture. C. Trowel Finish: After applying float finish, apply first troweling and consolidate concrete by hand or power-driven trowel. Continue troweling passes and restraighten until surface is free of trowel marks and uniform in texture and appearance. Grind smooth any surface defects that would telegraph through applied coatings or floor coverings. 1 . Apply a trowel finish to surfaces to be covered with resilient flooring, carpet, ceramic or quarry tile set over a cleavage membrane, paint, or another thin-film-finish coating system. 033000 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE Page 14 of 19 Project No. 01091 Proposed Renovations March 6, 2009 Park House Smith College, Northampton, MA 3.6 CONCRETE PLACEMENT A. Before placing concrete, verify that installation of formwork, reinforcement, and embedded items is complete and that required inspections have been performed. B. Do not add water to concrete during delivery, at Project site, or during placement unless approved by Architect. C. Before test sampling and placing concrete, water may be added at Project site, subject to limitations of ACI 301 . D. Deposit concrete continuously in one layer or in horizontal layers of such thickness that no new concrete will be placed on concrete that has hardened enough to cause seams or planes of weakness. If a section cannot be placed continuously, provide construction joints as indicated. Deposit concrete to avoid segregation. 1 . Deposit concrete in horizontal layers of depth to not exceed formwork design pressures and in a manner to avoid inclined construction joints. 2. Consolidate placed concrete with mechanical vibrating equipment according to ACI 301 . 3. Do not use vibrators to transport concrete inside forms. Insert and withdraw vibrators vertically at uniformly spaced locations to rapidly penetrate placed layer and at least 6 inches (150 mm) into preceding layer. Do not insert vibrators into lower layers of concrete that have begun to lose plasticity. At each insertion, limit duration of vibration 'to time necessary to consolidate concrete and complete embedment of reinforcement and other embedded items without causing mixture constituents to segregate. E. Hot-Weather Placement: Comply with ACI 301 and as follows: 1 . Maintain concrete temperature below 90 deg F (32 deg C) at time of placement. Chilled mixing water or chopped ice may be used to control temperature, provided water equivalent of ice is calculated to total amount of mixing water. Using liquid nitrogen to cool concrete is Contractor's option. look 033000 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE Page 13 of 19 Project No. 0 109 1 Proposed Renovations March 6, 2009 Park House Smith College, Northampton, MA 3.5 .JOINTS A. General: Construct joints true to line with faces perpendicular to surface plane of concrete. B. Construction joints: Install so strength and appearance of concrete are not impaired, at locations indicated or as approved by Architect. 1 . Place joints perpendicular to main reinforcement. Continue reinforcement across construction joints, unless otherwise indicated. Do not continue reinforcement through sides of strip placements of floors and slabs. 2. Use epoxy-bonding adhesive at locations where fresh concrete is placed against hardened or partially hardened concrete surfaces. C. Contraction joints in Slabs-on-Grade: Form weakened-plane contraction joints, sectioning concrete into areas as indicated. Construct contraction joints for a depth equal to at least one-fourth of concrete thickness as follows: I . Grooved joints: Form contraction joints after initial floatin g by grooving AOk and finishing each edge of joint to a radius of 1 /8 inch (3.2 mm). Repeat grooving of contraction joints after applying surface finishes. Eliminate groover tool marks on concrete surfaces. D. Isolation joints in Slabs-on-Grade: After removing formwork, install joint- filler strips at slab junctions with vertical surfaces, such as column pedestals, foundation walls, grade beams, and other locations, as indicated. 1 . Extend joint-filler strips full width and depth of joint, terminating flush with finished concrete surface, unless otherwise indicated. 2. Terminate full-width joint-filler strips not less than 1 /2 inch (13 mm) or more than 1 inch (25 mm) below finished concrete surface where joint sealants, specified in Division 07 Section ')oint Sealants," are indicated. 3. Install joint-filler strips in lengths as long as practicable. Where more than one length is required, lace or clip sections together. E. Doweled joints: Install dowel bars and support assemblies at joints where indicated. Lubricate or asphalt coat one-half of dowel length to prevent concrete bonding to one side of joint. 033000 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE Page 12 of 19 Project No. 01091 Proposed Renovations March 6, 2009 Park House Smith College, Northampton, MA 3.3 VAPOR RETARDERS A. Plastic Vapor Retarders: Place, protect, and repair vapor retarders according to ASTM E 1643 and manufacturer's written instructions. 1 . Lap joints 6 inches (150 mm) and seal with manufacturer's recommended tape. 3.4 STEEL REINFORCEMENT A. General: Comply with CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice" for placing reinforcement. 1 . Do not cut or puncture vapor retarder. Repair damage and reseal vapor retarder before placing concrete. B. Clean reinforcement of loose rust and mill scale, earth, ice, and other foreign materials that would reduce bond to concrete. C. Accurately position, support, and secure reinforcement against displacement. Locate and support reinforcement with bar supports to maintain minimum concrete cover. Do not tack weld crossing reinforcing bars. D. Set wire ties with ends directed into concrete, not toward exposed concrete surfaces. E. Install welded wire reinforcement in longest practicable lengths on bar supports spaced to minimize sagging. Lap edges and ends of adjoining sheets at least one mesh spacing. Offset laps of adjoining sheet widths to prevent continuous laps in either direction. Lace overlaps with wire. F. Epoxy-Coated Reinforcement: Repair cut and damaged epoxy coatings with epoxy repair coating according to ASTM D 3963/D 3963M. Use epoxy- coated steel wire ties to fasten epoxy-coated steel reinforcement. G. Zinc-Coated Reinforcement: Repair cut and damaged zinc coatings with zinc repair material according to ASTM A 780. Use galvanized steel wire ties to fasten zinc-coated steel reinforcement. 033000 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE Page 1 1 of 19 Project No. 01091 Proposed Renovations March 6, 2009 Park House Smith College, Northampton, MA E. Fabricate forms for easy removal without hammering or prying against concrete surfaces. Provide crush or wrecking plates where stripping may damage cast concrete surfaces. Provide top forms for inclined surfaces steeper than 1 .5 horizontal to 1 vertical. 1 . install keyways, reglets, recesses, and the like, for easy removal. 2. Do not use rust-stained steel form-facing material. F. Set edge forms, bulkheads, and intermediate screed strips for slabs to achieve required elevations and slopes in finished concrete surfaces. Provide and secure units to support screed strips; use strike-off templates or compacting-type screeds. G. Provide temporary openings for cleanouts and inspection ports where interior area of formwork is inaccessible. Close openings with panels tightly fitted to forms and securely braced to prevent loss of concrete mortar. Locate temporary openings in forms at inconspicuous locations. H. Clean forms and adjacent surfaces to receive concrete. Remove chips, wood, sawdust, dirt, and other debris just before placing concrete. I. Retighten forms and bracing before placing concrete, as required, to prevent mortar leaks and maintain proper alignment. J. Coat contact surfaces of forms with form-release agent, according to manufacturer's written instructions, before placing reinforcement. 3.2 EMBEDDED ITEMS A. Place and secure anchorage devices and other embedded items required for adjoining work that is attached to or supported by cast-in-place concrete. Use setting drawings, templates, diagrams, instructions, and directions furnished with items to be embedded. 1 . Install anchor rods, accurately located, to elevations required and complying with tolerances in Section 7.5 of AISC's "Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges." 2. Install dovetail anchor slots in concrete structures as indicated. low 033000 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE Page 10 of 19 Project No. 01091 Proposed Renovations March 6, 2009 Park House Smith College, Northampton, MA 5. Air Content: Do not allow air content of troweled finished floors to exceed 3 percent. 2.12 FABRICATING REINFORCEMENT A. Fabricate steel reinforcement according to CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice." 2.13 CONCRETE MIXING A. Ready-Mixed Concrete: Measure, batch, mix, and deliver concrete according to ASTM C 94/C 94M, and furnish batch ticket information. 1 . When air temperature is between 85 and 90 deg F (30 and 32 deg C), reduce mixing and delivery time from 1 -1 /2 hours to 75 minutes; when air temperature is above 90 deg F (32 deg C), reduce mixing and delivery time to 60 minutes. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 FORMWORK A. Design, erect, shore, brace, and maintain formwork, according to ACI 301 , to support vertical, lateral, static, and dynamic loads, and construction loads that might be applied, until structure can support such loads. B. Construct formwork so concrete members and structures are of size, shape, alignment, elevation, and position indicated, within tolerance limits of ACI 117. C. Limit concrete surface irregularities, designated by ACI 347R as abrupt or gradual, as follows: 1 . Class A, 1 /8 inch (3.2 mm) for smooth-formed finished surfaces. 2. Class C, 1 /2 inch (13 mm) for rough-formed finished surfaces. D. Construct forms tight enough to prevent loss of concrete mortar. 033000 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE Page 9 of 19 Project No. 01091 Proposed Renovations March 6, 2009 Park House Smith College, Northampton, MA 1 . Use a qualified independent testing agency for preparing and reporting proposed mixture designs based on laboratory trial mixtures. B. Admixtures: Use admixtures according to manufacturer's written instructions. 1 . Use water-reducing or plasticizing admixture in concrete, as required, for placement and workability. 2. Use water-reducing and retarding admixture when required by high temperatures, low humidity, or other adverse placement conditions. 3. Use water-reducing admixture in concrete for exterior slabs and concrete with a water-cementitious materials ratio below 0.50. 2.11 CONCRETE MIXTURES FOR BUILDING ELEMENTS A. Footings: Proportion normal-weight concrete mixture as follows: 1 . Minimum Compressive Strength: 4000 psi (27.6 MPa) at 28 days. 2. Maximum Water-Cementitious Materials Ratio: 0.50. 3. Slump Limit: 4 inches (100 mm) plus or minus 1 inch (25mm). 4. Air Content: 6 percent, plus or minus 1 .5 percent at point of delivery for 1 -inch (25-mm) nominal maximum aggregate size. B. Foundation Walls: Proportion normal-weight concrete mixture as follows: 1 . Minimum Compressive Strength: 4000 psi (27.6 MPa) at 28 days. 2. Maximum Water-Cementitious Materials Ratio: 0.50. 3. Slump Limit: 4 inches (100 mm), plus or minus 1 inch (25 mm). 4. Air Content: 6 percent, plus or minus 1 .5 percent at point of delivery for 1 -inch (25-mm) nominal maximum aggregate size. C. Slabs-on-Grade: Proportion normal-weight concrete mixture as follows: 1 . Minimum Compressive Strength: 4000 psi (27.6 MPa) at 28 days. 2. Minimum Cementitious Materials Content: 520 lb/cu. yd. (309 kg/cu. m). 3. Slump Limit: 4 inches (100 mm), plus or minus 1 inch (25 mm). 4. Air Content: 6 percent, plus or minus 1 .5 percent at point of delivery for 1 -inch (25-mm) nominal maximum aggregate size. ANk 033000 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE Page 8 of 19 Project No. 01091 Proposed Renovations March 6, 2009 Park House Smith College, Northampton, MA b. Raven Industries Inc.; Dura Skrim 8. C. Reef Industries, Inc.; Griffolyn Type- 85. d. Stego Industries, LLC; Stego Wrap, 10 mils. 2.8 CURING MATERIALS A. Moisture-Retaining Cover: ASTM C 171 , polyethylene film or white burlap- polyethylene sheet. B. Water: Potable. C. Clear, Waterborne, Membrane-Forming Curing and Sealing Compound: ASTM C 1315, Type 1 , Class A. 1 . Products: a. Burke by Edoco; Cureseal 1315 WB. b. Euclid Chemical Company (The); Super Diamond Clear VOX. C. Kaufman Products, Inc.; Sure Cure 25 Emulsion. d. Lambert Corporation; UV Safe Seal. e. L&M Construction Chemicals, Inc.; Lumiseal WB Plus. f. Meadows, W. R., Inc.; Vocomp-30. g. Vexcon Chemicals, Inc.; Vexcon Starseal 1315. 2.9 RELATED MATERIALS A. Expansion- and Isolation-joint-Filler Strips: ASTM D 1752, cork or self- expanding cork. B. Dovetail Anchor Slots: Hot-dip galvanized steel sheet, not less than 0.0336 inch (0.85 mm) thick, with bent tab anchors. Temporarily fill or cover face opening of slots to prevent intrusion of concrete or debris. 2.10 CONCRETE MIXTURES, GENERAL A. Prepare design mixtures for each type and strength of concrete, proportioned on the basis of laboratory trial mixture or field test data, or both, according to ACI 301 . 033000 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE Page 7 of 19 Project No. 01091 Proposed Renovations March 6, 2009 Park House Smith College, Northampton, MA 2.5 CONCRETE MATERIALS " * A. Cementitious Material: Use the following cementitious materials, of the same type, brand, and source, throughout Project: 1 . Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, Type 1/II, gray. B. Normal-Weight Aggregates: ASTM C 33, Class 3S coarse aggregate or better, graded. Provide aggregates from a single source. 1 . Maximum Coarse-Aggregate Size: 1 inch (25 mm) nominal. 2. Fine Aggregate: Free of materials with deleterious reactivity to alkali in cement. C. Water: ASTM C 94/C 94M and potable. 2.6 ADMIXTURES A. Air-Entraining Admixture: ASTM C 260. B. Chemical Admixtures: Provide admixtures certified by manufacturer to be compatible with other admixtures and that will not contribute water-soluble chloride ions exceeding those permitted in hardened concrete. Do not use calcium chloride or admixtures containing calcium chloride. 1 . Water-Reducing Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type A. 2. Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type B. 3. Water-Reducing and Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type D. 4. Plasticizing and Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 1017/C 1017M, Type II. 2.7 VAPOR RETARDERS A. Plastic Vapor Retarder: ASTM E 1745, Class C, or polyethylene sheet, ASTM D 4397, not less than 10 mils (0.25 mm) thick. Include manufacturer's recommended adhesive or pressure-sensitive joint tape. 1 . Products: a. Fortifiber Corporation; Moistop Plus. 033000 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE Page 6 of 19 Project No. 01091 Proposed Renovations March 6, 2009 Park House Smith College, Northampton, MA B. Epoxy-Coated Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 615/A 615M, Grade 60 (Grade 420), deformed bars, ASTM A 775/A 775M, epoxy coated, with less than 2 percent damaged coating in each 12-inch (300-mm) bar length. C. Plain-Steel Wire: ASTM A 82, galvanized. D. Epoxy-Coated Wire: ASTM A 884/A 884M, Class A, Type 1 coated, as-drawn, plain-steel wire, with less than 2 percent damaged coating in each 12-inch (300-mm) wire length. E. Galvanized-Steel Welded Wire Reinforcement: ASTM A 185, plain, fabricated from galvanized steel wire into flat sheets. 2.4 REINFORCEMENT ACCESSORIES A. Epoxy-Coated Joint Dowel Bars: ASTM A 615/A 615M, Grade 60 (Grade 420), plain-steel bars, ASTM A 775/A 775M epoxy coated. B. Epoxy Repair Coating: Liquid, two-part, epoxy repair coating; compatible ** with epoxy coating on reinforcement and complying with ASTM A 775/A 775M. C. Zinc Repair Material: ASTM A 780, zinc-based solder, paint containing zinc dust, or sprayed zinc. D. Bar Supports: Bolsters, chairs, spacers, and other devices for spacing, supporting, and fastening reinforcing bars and welded wire reinforcement in place. Manufacture bar supports from steel wire, plastic, or precast concrete according to CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice," of greater compressive strength than concrete and as follows: 1 . For concrete surfaces exposed to view where legs of wire bar supports contact forms, use CRSI Class 1 plastic-protected steel wire or CRSI Class 2 stainless-steel bar supports. 2. For epoxy-coated reinforcement, use epoxy-coated or other dielectric- polymer-coated wire bar supports. 3. For zinc-coated reinforcement, use galvanized wire or dielectric- polymer-coated wire bar supports. 033000 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE Page 5 of 19 Project No. 01091 Proposed Renovations March 6, 2009 Park House Smith College, Northampton, MA 2.2 FORM-FACING MATERIALS , A. Smooth-Formed Finished Concrete: Form-facing panels that will provide continuous, true, and smooth concrete surfaces. Furnish in largest practicable sizes to minimize number of joints. 1 . Plywood, metal, or other approved panel materials. 2. Exterior-grade plywood panels, suitable for concrete forms, complying with DOC PS 1 . B. Rough-Formed Finished Concrete: Plywood, lumber, metal, or another approved material. Provide lumber dressed on at least two edges and one side for tight fit. C. Void Forms: Biodegradable paper surface, treated for moisture resistance, structurally sufficient to support weight of plastic concrete and other superimposed loads. D. Form-Release Agent: Commercially formulated form-release agent that will not bond with, stain, or adversely affect concrete surfaces and will not impair subsequent treatments of concrete surfaces. "" "' 1 . Formulate form-release agent with rust inhibitor for steel form-facing materials. E. Form Ties: Factory-fabricated, removable or snap-off metal or glass-fiber- reinforced plastic form ties designed to resist lateral pressure of fresh concrete on forms and to prevent spalling of concrete on removal. 1 . Furnish units that will leave no corrodible metal closer than 1 inch (25 mm) to the plane of exposed concrete surface. 2. Furnish ties that, when removed, will leave holes no larger than 1 inch (25 mm) in diameter in concrete surface. 2.3 STEEL REINFORCEMENT A. Galvanized Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 615/A 615M, Grade 60 (Grade 420), deformed bars, ASTM A 767/A 767M, Class II zinc coated after fabrication and bending. 033000 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE Page 4 of 19 Project No. 01091 Proposed Renovations March 6, 2009 Park House Smith College, Northampton, MA source, and obtain admixtures through one source from a single manufacturer. E. ACI Publications: Comply with the following unless modified by requirements in the Contract Documents: 1 . ACI 301 , "Specification for Structural Concrete," Sections 1 through 5. 2. ACI 117, "Specifications for Tolerances for Concrete Construction and Materials." F. Concrete Testing Service: Engage a qualified independent testing agency to perform material evaluation tests and to design concrete mixtures. 1 .6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Steel Reinforcement: Deliver, store, and handle steel reinforcement to prevent bending and damage. Avoid damaging coatings on steel reinforcement. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. In other Part 2 articles where titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply to product selection: 1 . Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, products specified. 2. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the products specified. 3. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that maybe incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, manufacturers specified. 4. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the manufacturers specified. 033000 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE Page 3 of 19 Project No. 01091 Proposed Renovations March 6, 2009 Park House Smith College, Northampton, MA B. Design Mixtures: For each concrete mixture. Submit alternate design mixtures when characteristics of materials, Project conditions, weather, test results, or other circumstances warrant adjustments. 1 . Indicate amounts of mixing water to be withheld for later addition at Project site. C. Steel Reinforcement Shop Drawings: Placing drawings that detail fabrication, bending, and placement. Include bar sizes, lengths, material, grade, bar schedules, stirrup spacing, bent bar diagrams, bar arrangement, splices and laps, mechanical connections, tie spacing, hoop spacing, and supports for concrete reinforcement. D. Field quality-control test reports. 1 .5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: A qualified installer who employs on Project personnel qualified as ACI-certified Flatwork Technician and Finisher and a supervisor who is an ACI-certified Concrete Flatwork Technician. B. Manufacturer Qualifications: A firm experienced in manufacturing ready- mixed concrete products and that complies with ASTM C 94/C 94M requirements for production facilities and equipment. C. Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent agency, qualified according to ASTM C 1077 and ASTM E 329 for testing indicated, as documented according to ASTM E 548. 1 . Personnel conducting field tests shall be qualified as ACI Concrete Field Testing Technician, Grade 1 , according to ACI CP-01 or an equivalent certification program. 2. Personnel performing laboratory tests shall be ACI-certified Concrete Strength Testing Technician and Concrete Laboratory Testing Technician - Grade I. Testing Agency laboratory supervisor shall be an ACI- certified Concrete Laboratory Testing Technician - Grade II. D. Source Limitations: Obtain each type or class of cementitious material of the same brand from the same manufacturer's plant, obtain aggregate from one 033000 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE Page 2 of 19 Project No. 01091 Proposed Renovations March 6, 2009 Park House Smith College, Northampton, MA SECTION 033000 - CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE PART 1 - GENERAL 1 .1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1 .2 SUMMARY A. This Section specifies cast-in place concrete, including formwork, reinforcement, concrete materials, mixture design, placement procedures, and finishes, for the following: 1 . Footings. !ems 2. Foundation walls. 3. Slabs-on-grade. B. Related Sections include the following: 1 . Division 31 Section "Earth Moving" for drainage fill under slabs-on- grade. 1 .3 DEFINITIONS A. Cementitious Materials: Portland cement alone or in combination with one or more of the following: blended hydraulic cement, fly ash and other pozzolans, ground granulated blast-furnace slag, and silica fume; subject to compliance with requirements. 1 .4 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. 033000 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE Page 1 of' 19 Project No. 0 109 1 Proposed Renovations March 6, 2009 Park House Smith College, Northampton, MA 3.7 CLEANING A. Clean adjacent structures and improvements of dust, dirt, and debris caused by selective demolition operations. Return adjacent areas to condition existing before selective demolition operations began. 3.8 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION SCHEDULE A. Existing Items to Be Removed and Salvaged: 1 . Door Hardware 2. Mechanical and Electrical Equipment and Fixtures. B. Existing Items to Be Removed and Reinstalled: 1 . Doors on third floor as scheduled. 2. Site improvements as indicated on the drawings. END OF SECTION 024119 024119 SELECTIVE STRUCTURE DEMOLITION Page 10 of 10 Project No. 01091 Proposed Renovations March 6, 2009 Park House Smith College, Northampton, MA C. Concrete Slabs-on-Grade: Saw-cut perimeter of area to be demolished, then break up and remove. D. Resilient Floor Coverings: Remove floor coverings and adhesive according to recommendations in RFCI-WP and its Addendum. 1 . Remove residual adhesive and prepare substrate for new floor coverings by one of the methods recommended by RFCI. E. Roofing: Remove no more existing roofing than can be covered in one day by new roofing and so that building interior remains watertight and weathertight. Refer to Division 07 Sections for new roofing requirements. 1 . Remove existing roof membrane, flashings, copings, and roof accessories. 2. Remove existing roofing system down to substrate. 3.6 DISPOSAL OF DEMOLISHED MATERIALS A. General: Except for items or materials indicated to be recycled, reused, salvaged, reinstalled, or otherwise indicated to remain Owner's property, remove demolished materials from Project site and legally dispose of them in an EPA-approved landfill. 1 . Do not allow demolished materials to accumulate on-site. 2. Remove and transport debris in a manner that will prevent spillage on adjacent surfaces and areas. 3. Remove debris from elevated portions of building by chute, hoist, or other device that will convey debris to grade level in a controlled descent. 4. Comply with requirements specified in Division 01 Section "Construction Waste Management and Disposal." B. Burning: Do not burn demolished materials. C. Disposal: Transport demolished materials off Owner's property and legally dispose of them. 024119 SELECTIVE STRUCTURE DEMOLITION Page 9 of' 10 Project No. 01091 Proposed Renovations March 6, 2009 Park House Smith College, Northampton, MA B. Removed and Salvaged Items: 1 . Clean salvaged items. 2. Pack or crate items after cleaning. Identify contents of containers. 3. Store items in a secure area until delivery to Owner. 4. Transport items to Owner's storage area off-site. 5. Protect items from damage during transport and storage. C. Removed and Reinstalled Items: 1 . Clean and repair items to functional condition adequate for intended reuse. Paint equipment to match new equipment. 2. Pack or crate items after cleaning and repairing. Identify contents of containers. 3. Protect items from damage during transport and storage. 4. Reinstall items in locations indicated. Comply with installation requirements for new materials and equipment. Provide connections, supports, and miscellaneous materials necessary to make item functional for use indicated. D. Existing Items to Remain: Protect construction indicated to remain against damage and soiling during selective demolition. When permitted by Architect, items may be removed to a suitable, protected storage location during selective demolition and cleaned and reinstalled in their original locations after selective demolition operations are complete. 3.5 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION PROCEDURES FOR SPECIFIC MATERIALS A. Concrete: Demolish in small sections. Cut concrete to a depth of at least 3/4 inch (19 mm) at junctures with construction to remain, using power-driven saw. Dislodge concrete from reinforcement at perimeter of areas being demolished, cut reinforcement, and then remove remainder of concrete indicated for selective demolition. Neatly trim openings to dimensions indicated. B. Masonry: Demolish in small sections. Cut masonry at junctures with construction to remain, using power-driven saw, then remove masonry between saw cuts. Aw 024119 SELECTIVE STRUCTURE DEMOLITION Page 8 of 10 Project No. 01091 Proposed Renovations March 6, 2009 Park House Smith College, Northampton, MA 1 . Strengthen or add new supports pports when required during progress of selective demolition. 3.4 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION, GENERAL A. General: Demolish and remove existing construction only to the extent required by new construction and as indicated. Use methods required to complete the Work within limitations of governing regulations and as follows: 1 . Proceed with selective demolition systematically, from higher to lower level. Complete selective demolition operations above each floor or tier before disturbing supporting members on the next lower level. 2. Neatly cut openings and holes plumb, square, and true to dimensions required. Use cutting methods least likely to damage construction to remain or adjoining construction. Use hand tools or small power tools designed for sawing or grinding, not hammering and chopping, to minimize disturbance of adjacent surfaces. Temporarily cover openings to remain. 3. Cut or drill from the exposed or finished side into concealed surfaces to avoid marring existing finished surfaces. 4. Do not use cutting torches until work area is cleared of flammable materials. At concealed spaces, such as duct and pipe interiors, verify condition and contents of hidden space before starting flame-cutting operations. Maintain fire watch and portable fire-suppression devices during flame-cutting operations. 5. Maintain adequate ventilation when using cutting torches. 6. Remove decayed, vermin-infested, or otherwise dangerous or unsuitable materials and promptly dispose of off-site. 7. Remove structural framing members and lower to ground by method suitable to avoid free fall and to prevent ground impact or dust generation. 8. Locate selective demolition equipment and remove debris and materials so as not to impose excessive loads on supporting walls, floors, or framing. 9. Dispose of demolished items and materials promptly. Comply with requirements in Division 01 Section "Construction Waste Management Aomk and Disposal." 024119 SELECTIVE STRUCTURE DEMOLITION Page 7 of 10 Project No. 01 091 Proposed Renovations March 6, 2009 Park House Smith College, Northampton, MA temporary services/systems that bypass area of selective demolition and that maintain continuity of services/systems to other parts of building. 2. Cut off pipe or conduit in walls or partitions to be removed. Cap, valve, or plug and seal remaining portion of pipe or conduit after bypassing. a. Where entire wall is to be removed, existing services/systems may be removed with removal of the wall. 3.3 PREPARATION A. Site Access and Temporary Controls: Conduct selective demolition and debris-removal operations to ensure minimum interference with roads, streets, walks, walkways, and other adjacent occupied and used facilities. 1 . Comply with requirements for access and protection specified in Division 01 Section "Temporary Facilities and Controls." B. Temporary Facilities: Provide temporary barricades and other protection required to prevent injury to people and damage to adjacent buildings and facilities to remain. 1 . Provide protection to ensure safe passage of people around selective demolition area and to and from occupied portions of building. 2. Provide temporary weather protection, during interval between selective demolition of existing construction on exterior surfaces and new construction, to prevent water leakage and damage to structure and interior areas. 3. Protect walls, ceilings, floors, and other existing finish work that are to remain or that are exposed during selective demolition operations. 4. Cover and protect furniture, furnishings, and equipment that have not been removed. 5. Comply with requirements for temporary enclosures, dust control, heating, specified in Division 01 Section "Temporary Facilities and Controls." C. Temporary Shoring: Provide and maintain shoring, bracing, and structural supports as required to preserve stability and prevent movement, settlement, or collapse of construction and finishes to remain, and to prevent unexpected or uncontrolled movement or collapse of construction being demolished. 024119 SELECTIVE STRUCTURE DEMOLITION Page 6 of 10 Project No. 01091 Proposed Renovations March 6, 2009 Park House Smith College, Northampton, MA B. Survey existing conditions and correlate with requirements indicated to determine extent of selective demolition required. C. Inventory and record the condition of items to be removed and reinstalled and items to be removed and salvaged. D. When unanticipated mechanical, electrical, or structural elements that conflict with intended function or design are encountered, investigate and measure the nature and extent of conflict. Promptly submit a written report to Architect. E. Engage a professional engineer to survey condition of building to determine whether removing any element might result in structural deficiency or unplanned collapse of any portion of structure or adjacent structures during selective demolition operations. F. Survey of Existing Conditions: Record existing conditions by use of preconstruction photographs. low 1 . Comply with requirements specified in Division 01 Section "Photographic Documentation." 2. Before selective demolition or removal of existing building elements that will be reproduced or duplicated in final Work, make permanent record of measurements, materials, and construction details required to make exact reproduction. G. Perform surveys as the Work progresses to detect hazards resulting from selective demolition activities. 3.2 UTILITY SERVICES AND MECHANICAL/ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS A. Existing Services/Systems: Maintain services/systems indicated to remain and protect them against damage during selective demolition operations. B. Service/System Requirements: Locate, identify, disconnect, and seal or cap off indicated utility services and mechanical/electrical systems serving areas to be selectively demolished. 1 . If services/systems are required to be removed, relocated, or abandoned, before proceeding with selective demolition provide 024119 SELECTIVE STRUCTURE DEMOLITION Page 5 of 10 Project No. 01091 Proposed Renovations March 6, 2009 Park House Smith College, Northampton, MA 1 .7 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Owner will occupy buildings immediately adjacent to selective demolition area. Conduct selective demolition so Owner's operations will not be disrupted. 1 . Comply with requirements specified in Division 01 Section "Summary." B. Conditions existing at time of inspection for bidding purpose will be maintained by Owner as far as practical. C. Notify Architect of discrepancies between existing conditions and Drawings before proceeding with selective demolition. D. Hazardous Materials: It is not expected that hazardous materials will be encountered in the Work. 1 . Hazardous materials will be removed by Owner before start of the Work. 2. If materials suspected of containing hazardous materials are encountered, do not disturb; immediately notify Architect and Owner. gw Owner will remove hazardous materials under a separate contract. • E. Storage or sale of removed items or materials on-site is not permitted. F. Utility Service: Maintain existing utilities indicated to remain in service and protect them against damage during selective demolition operations. 1 . Maintain fire-protection facilities in service during selective demolition operations. PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify that utilities have been disconnected and capped. 024119 SELECTIVE STRUCTURE DEMOLITION Page 4 of 10 Project No. 01091 Proposed Renovations March 6, 2009 Park House Smith College, Northampton, MA D. Predemolition Photographs: Show existing conditions of adjoining construction and site improvements, including finish surfaces, that might be misconstrued as damage caused by selective demolition operations. Submit before Work begins. 1 .6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Demolition Firm Qualifications: An experienced firm that has specialized in demolition work similar in material and extent to that indicated for this Project. B. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with governing EPA notification regulations before beginning selective demolition. Comply with hauling and disposal regulations of authorities having jurisdiction. C. Standards: Comply with ANSI A10.6 and NFPA 241 . D. Predemolition Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements in Division 01 Section "Project Management and Coordination." E. Predemolition Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements in Division 01 Section "Project Management and Coordination," Review methods and procedures related to selective demolition including, but not limited to, the following: 1 . Inspect and discuss condition of construction to be selectively demolished. 2. Review structural load limitations of existing structure. 3. Review and finalize selective demolition schedule and verify availability of materials, demolition personnel, equipment, and facilities needed to make progress and avoid delays. 4. Review requirements of work performed by other trades that rely on substrates exposed by selective demolition operations. 5. Review areas where existing construction is to remain and requires protection. 024119 SELECTIVE STRUCTURE DEMOLITION Page 3 of 10 Project No. 01091 Proposed Renovations March 6, 2009 Park House Smith College, Northampton, MA B. Remove and Salvage: Detach items from existing construction and deliver them to Owner. C. Remove and Reinstall: Detach items from existing construction, prepare them for reuse, and reinstall them where indicated. D. Existing to Remain: Existing items of construction that are not to be removed and that are not otherwise indicated to be removed, removed and salvaged, or removed and reinstalled. 1 .4 MATERIALS OWNERSHIP A. Historic items, relics, and similar objects including, but not limited to, cornerstones and their contents, commemorative plaques and tablets, antiques, and other items of interest or value to Owner that may be encountered during selective demolition remain Owner's property. Carefully remove and salvage each item or object in a manner to prevent damage and deliver promptly to Owner. 1 .5 SUBMITTALS A. Copies of DEP Notification BWP AQ 06 filed ten days prior to construction / demoltion activities. B. Schedule of Selective Demolition Activities: Indicate the following: 1 . Detailed sequence of selective demolition and removal work, with starting and ending dates for each activity. 2. Interruption of utility services. Indicate how long utility services will be interrupted. 3. Coordination for shutoff, capping, and continuation of utility services. 4. Use of stairs. 5. Means of protection for items to remain and items in path of waste removal from building. C. Inventory: After selective demolition is complete, submit a list of items that have been removed and salvaged. 024119 SELECTIVE STRUCTURE DEMOLITION Page 2 of 10 Project No. 01091 Proposed Renovations March 6, 2009 Park House Smith College, Northampton, MA SECTION 024119 - SELECTIVE STRUCTURE DEMOLITION PART 1 - GENERAL 1 .1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1 .2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1 . Demolition and removal of selected portions of building or structure. 2. Demolition and removal of selected site elements. 3. Salvage of existing items to be reused or recycled. B. Related Sections include the following: 1 . Division 01 Section "Summary" for use of premises and Owner- occupancy requirements. 2. Division 01 Section "Temporary Facilities and Controls" for temporary construction and environmental-protection measures for selective demolition operations. 3. Division 01 Section "Cutting and Patching" for cutting and patching procedures. 4. Division 01 Section "Construction Waste Management and Disposal" for disposal of demolished materials. 1 .3 DEFINITIONS A. Remove: Detach items from existing construction and legally dispose of them off-site, unless indicated to be removed and salvaged or removed and reinstalled. 024119 SELECTIVE STRUCTURE DEMOLITION Page 1 of 10 Project No. 01091 Proposed Renovations March 6, 2009 Park House Smith College, Northampton, MA 1 . Give particular attention to information on concealed products and installations that cannot be readily identified and recorded later. 2. Include significant changes in the product delivered to Project site and changes in manufacturer's written instructions for installation. 3. Note related Change Orders and Record Drawings where applicable. 2.4 MISCELLANEOUS RECORD SUBMITTALS A. Assemble miscellaneous records required by other Specification Sections for miscellaneous record keeping and submittal in connection with actual performance of the Work. Bind or file miscellaneous records and identify each, ready for continued use and reference. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 RECORDING AND MAINTENANCE A. Recording: Maintain one copy of each submittal during the construction period for Project Record Document purposes. Post changes and modifications to Project Record Documents as they occur; do not wait until the end of Project. B. Maintenance of Record Documents and Samples: Store Record Documents and Samples in the field office apart from the Contract Documents used for construction. Do not use Project Record Documents for construction purposes. Maintain Record Documents in good order and in a clean, dry, legible condition, protected from deterioration and loss. Provide access to Project Record Documents for Architect's reference during normal working hours. END OF SECTION 017839 017839 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS Page 5 of �i Project No. 01091 Proposed Renovations March 6, 2009 Park House Smith College, Northampton, MA C. Format: Identify and date each Record Drawing; include the designation "PROJECT RECORD DRAWING" in a prominent location. 1 . Layer assignments: Assign layers for record drawing notations with the prefix CTR. Add suffix designations for dimensions, notes and categories of work so modifications can be readily identified from original CAD file. 2. Record Prints: Organize Record Prints and newly prepared Record Drawings into manageable sets. Bind each set with durable paper cover sheets. Include identification on cover sheets. 3. Record CAD Drawings: Organize CAD information into separate electronic files that correspond to each sheet of the Contract Drawings. Name each file with the sheet identification. Include identification in each CAD file. 2.2 RECORD SPECIFICATIONS A. Preparation: Mark Specifications to indicate the actual product installation where installation varies from that indicated in Specifications, addenda, and contract modifications. 1 . Give particular attention to information on concealed products and installations that cannot be readily identified and recorded later. 2. Mark copy with the proprietary name and model number of products, materials, and equipment furnished, including substitutions and product options selected. 3. Record the name of manufacturer, supplier, Installer, and other information necessary to provide a record of selections made. 4. For each principal product, indicate whether Record Product Data has been submitted in operation and maintenance manuals instead of submitted as Record Product Data. 5. Note related Change Orders and Record Drawings where applicable. 2.3 RECORD PRODUCT DATA A. Preparation: Mark Product Data to indicate the actual product installation where installation varies substantially from that indicated in Product Data submittal. 017839 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS Page 4 of 5 Project No. 01091 Proposed Renovations March 6, 2009 Park House Smith College, Northampton, MA 2. Content: Types of items requiring marking include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Dimensional changes to Drawings. b. Revisions to routing of piping and conduits. C. Revisions to electrical circuitry. d. Actual equipment locations. e. Duct size and routing. f. Locations of concealed internal utilities. g. Changes made by Change Order or Construction Change Directive. h. Record information on the Work that is shown only schematically. 3. Mark the Contract Drawings or Shop Drawings, whichever is most capable of showing actual physical conditions, completely and accurately. If Shop Drawings are marked, show cross-reference on the Contract Drawings. 4. Mark record plots with colored high-lighter marker or clouded with color pencil. Use other colors to distinguish between changes for different categories of the Work at same location. 5. Mark important additional information that was either shown schematically or omitted from original Drawings. 6. Note Construction Change Directive numbers, alternate numbers, Change Order numbers, and similar identification, where applicable. B. Record CAD Drawings: Immediately before inspection for Certificate of Substantial Completion, review marked-up Record Prints with Architect. When authorized, prepare a full set of corrected CAD Drawings of the Contract Drawings, as follows: 1 . Format: DWG, AutoCad 2004 Version , operating in Microsoft Windows operating system. 2. Incorporate changes and additional information previously marked on Record Prints. Delete, redraw, and add details and notations where applicable. 3. Architect will furnish Contractor one set of CAD Drawings of the Contract Drawings for use in recording information. a. Architect makes no representations as to the accuracy or completeness of CAD Drawings as they relate to the Contract Drawings. 017839 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS Page 3 of 5 Project No. 01091 Proposed Renovations March 6, 2009 Park House Smith College, Northampton, MA drafting are acceptable. Architect will return plots and prints for organizing into sets, printing, binding, and final submittal. b. Final Submittal: Submit one set of Record CAD Drawing files, one set(s) of Record CAD Drawing plots, and one copy printed from record plots. Plot and print each Drawing, whether or not changes and additional information were recorded. 1) Electronic Media: CD-R. B. Record Specifications: Submit one copy of Project's Specifications, including addenda and contract modifications. C. Record Product Data: Submit one copy of each Product Data submittal. 1 . Where Record Product Data is required as part of operation and maintenance manuals, submit marked-up Product Data as an insert in manual instead of submittal as Record Product Data. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 RECORD DRAWINGS A. Record Prints: Maintain one set of blue- or black-line white prints of the Contract Drawings and Shop Drawings. 1 . Preparation: Mark Record Prints to show the actual installation where installation varies from that shown originally. Require individual or entity who obtained record data, whether individual or entity is Installer, subcontractor, or similar entity, to prepare the marked-up Record Prints. a. Give particular attention to information on concealed elements that would be difficult to identify or measure and record later. b. Accurately record information in an understandable drawing technique. C. Record data as soon as possible after obtaining it. Record and check the markup before enclosing concealed installations. 017839 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS Page 2 of 5 Project No. 01091 Proposed Renovations March 6, 2009 Park House Smith College, Northampton, MA SECTION 017839 - PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS PART 1 - GENERAL 1 .1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1 .2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for Project Record Documents, including the following: 1 . Record Drawings. 2. Record Specifications. A'"'' 3. Record Product Data. B. Related Sections include the following: 1 . Division 01 Section "Closeout Procedures" for general closeout procedures. 2. Division 01 Section "Operation and Maintenance Data" for operation and maintenance manual requirements. 3. Divisions 02 through 49 Sections for specific requirements for Project Record Documents of the Work in those Sections. 1 .3 SUBMITTALS A. Record Drawings: Comply with the following: 1 . Number of Copies: Submit copies of Record Drawings as follows: a. Initial Submittal: Submit one set(s) of plots from corrected Record CAD Drawings and one set(s) of marked-up Record Prints. Architect will initial and date each plot and mark whether general scope of changes, additional information recorded, and quality of 017839 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS Page 1 of 5 Project No. 01091 Proposed Renovations March 6, 2009 Park House Smith College, Northampton, MA 1 . Prepare supplementary text if manufacturers' standard printed data are not available and where the information is necessary for proper operation and maintenance of equipment or systems. F. Drawings: Prepare drawings supplementing manufacturers' printed data to illustrate the relationship of component parts of equipment and systems and to illustrate control sequence and flow diagrams. Coordinate these drawings with information contained in Record Drawings to ensure correct illustration of completed installation. 1 . Do not use original Project Record Documents as part of operation and maintenance manuals. 2. Comply with requirements of newly prepared Record Drawings in Division 01 Section "Project Record Documents." G. Comply with Division 01 Section "Closeout Procedures" for schedule for submitting operation and maintenance documentation. END OF SECTION 017823 017823 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA Page 10 of 10 Project No. 01091 Proposed Renovations March 6, 2009 Park House Smith College, Northampton, MA 1 . Include procedures to follow and required notifications for warranty claims. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 MANUAL PREPARATION A. Operation and Maintenance Documentation Directory: Prepare a separate manual that provides an organized reference to emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. B. Emergency Manual: Assemble a complete set of emergency information indicating procedures for use by emergency personnel and by Owner's operating personnel for types of emergencies indicated. C. Product Maintenance Manual: Assemble a complete set of maintenance data indicating care and maintenance of each product, material, and finish incorporated into the Work. D. Operation and Maintenance Manuals: Assemble a complete set of operation and maintenance data indicating operation and maintenance of each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment not part of a system. 1 . Engage a factory-authorized service representative to assemble and prepare information for each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment not part of a system. 2. Prepare a separate manual for each system and subsystem, in the form of an instructional manual for use by Owner's operating personnel. E. Manufacturers' Data: Where manuals contain manufacturers' standard printed data, include only sheets pertinent to product or component installed. Mark each sheet to identify each product or component incorporated into the Work. If data include more than one item in a tabular format, identify each item using appropriate references from the Contract Documents. Identify data applicable to the Work and delete references to information not applicable. 017823 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA Page 9 of 10 Project No. 01091 Proposed Renovations March 6, 2009 Park House Smith College, Northampton, MA 1 . Standard printed maintenance instructions and bulletins. 2. Drawings, diagrams, and instructions required for maintenance, including disassembly and component removal, replacement, and assembly. 3. Identification and nomenclature of parts and components. 4. List of items recommended to be stocked as spare parts. D. Maintenance Procedures: Include the following information and items that detail essential maintenance procedures: 1 . Test and inspection instructions. 2. Troubleshooting guide. 3. Precautions against improper maintenance. 4. Disassembly; component removal, repair, and replacement; and reassembly instructions. 5. Aligning, adjusting, and checking instructions. 6. Demonstration and training videotape, if available. E. Maintenance and Service Schedules: Include service and lubrication requirements, list of required lubricants for equipment, and separate schedules for preventive and routine maintenance and service with standard time allotment. 1 . Scheduled Maintenance and Service: Tabulate actions for daily, weekly, monthly, quarterly, semiannual, and annual frequencies. 2. Maintenance and Service Record: Include manufacturers' forms for recording maintenance. F. Spare Parts List and Source Information: Include lists of replacement and repair parts, with parts identified and cross-referenced to manufacturers' maintenance documentation and local sources of maintenance materials and related services. G. Maintenance Service Contracts: Include copies of maintenance agreements with name and telephone number of service agent. H. Warranties and Bonds: Include copies of warranties and bonds and lists of circumstances and conditions that would affect validity of warranties or bonds. 017823 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA Page 8 of 10 Project No. 01091 Proposed Renovations March 6, 2009 Park House Smith College, Northampton, MA 4. Material and chemical composition. 5. Reordering information for specially manufactured products. D. Maintenance Procedures: Include manufacturer's written recommendations and the following: 1 . Inspection procedures. 2. Types of cleaning agents to be used and methods of cleaning. 3. List of cleaning agents and methods of cleaning detrimental to product. 4. Schedule for routine cleaning and maintenance. 5. Repair instructions. E. Repair Materials and Sources: Include lists of materials and local sources of materials and related services. F. Warranties and Bonds: Include copies of warranties and bonds and lists of circumstances and conditions that would affect validity of warranties or bonds. 1 . Include procedures to follow and required notifications for warranty claims. 2.5 SYSTEMS AND EQUIPMENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL A. Content: For each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment not part of a system, include source information, manufacturers' maintenance documentation, maintenance procedures, maintenance and service schedules, spare parts list and source information, maintenance service contracts, and warranty and bond information, as described below. B. Source Information: List each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment included in manual, identified by product name and arranged to match manual's table of contents. For each product, list name, address, and telephone number of Installer or supplier and maintenance service agent, and cross-reference Specification Section number and title in Project Manual. C. Manufacturers' Maintenance Documentation: Manufacturers' maintenance documentation including the following information for each component part or piece of equipment: 017823 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA Page 7 of 10 Project No. 01091 Proposed Renovations March 6, 2009 Park House Smith College, Northampton, MA 8. Engineering data and tests. A 9. Complete nomenclature and number of replacement parts. C. Operating Procedures: Include the following, as applicable: 1 . Startup procedures. 2. Equipment or system break-in procedures. 3. Routine and normal operating instructions. 4. Regulation and control procedures. S. Instructions on stopping. 6. Normal shutdown instructions. 7. Seasonal and weekend operating instructions. 8. Required sequences for electric or electronic systems. 9. Special operating instructions and procedures. D. Systems and Equipment Controls: Describe the sequence of operation, and diagram controls as installed. E. Piped Systems: Diagram piping as installed, and identify color-coding where required for identification. Awk 2.4 PRODUCT MAINTENANCE MANUAL A. Content: Organize manual into a separate section for each product, material, and finish. Include source information, product information, maintenance procedures, repair materials and sources, and warranties and bonds, as described below. B. Source Information: List each product included in manual, identified by product name and arranged to match manual's table of contents. For each product, list name, address, and telephone number of Installer or supplier and maintenance service agent, and cross-reference Specification Section number and title in Project Manual. C. Product Information: Include the following, as applicable: 1 . Product name and model number. 2. Manufacturer's name. 3. Color, pattern, and texture. .+ g 017823 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA Page 6 of 10 Project No. 01091 Proposed Renovations March 6, 2009 Park House Smith College, Northampton, MA 3. Protective Plastic Sleeves: Transparent plastic sleeves designed to enclose diagnostic software diskettes for computerized electronic equipment. 4. Supplementary Text: Prepared on 8-1 /2-by-1 1 -inch white bond paper. 5. Drawings: Attach reinforced, punched binder tabs on drawings and bind with text. a. If drawings are too large to be used as foldouts, fold and place drawings in labeled envelopes and bind envelopes in rear of manual. At appropriate locations in manual, insert typewritten pages indicating drawing titles, descriptions of contents, and drawing locations. 2.3 OPERATION MANUALS A. Content: In addition to requirements in this Section, include operation data required in individual Specification Sections and the following information: 1 . System, subsystem, and equipment descriptions. 2. Performance and design criteria if Contractor is delegated design responsibility. 3. Operating standards. 4. Operating procedures. 5. Operating logs. 6. Wiring diagrams. 7. Control diagrams. 8. Piped system diagrams. 9. Precautions against improper use. 10. License requirements including inspection and renewal dates. B. Descriptions: Include the following: 1 . Product name and model number. 2. Manufacturer's name. 3. Equipment identification with serial number of each component. 4. Equipment function. S. Operating characteristics. 6. Limiting conditions. ow 7. Performance curves. 017823 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA Page 5 of 10 Project No. 01091 Proposed Renovations March 6, 2009 Park House Smith College, Northampton, MA 6. Name and address of Architect. 7. Cross-reference to related systems in other operation and maintenance manuals. C. Table of Contents: List each product included in manual, identified by product name, indexed to the content of the volume, and cross-referenced to Specification Section number in Project Manual. 1 . If operation or maintenance documentation requires more than one volume to accommodate data, include comprehensive table of contents for all volumes in each volume of the set. D. Manual Contents: Organize into sets of manageable size. Arrange contents alphabetically by system, subsystem, and equipment. If possible, assemble instructions for subsystems, equipment, and components of one system into a single binder. 1 . Binders: Heavy-duty, 3-ring, vinyl-covered, loose-leaf binders, in thickness necessary to accommodate contents, sized to hold 8-1 /2-by- 11 -inch paper; with clear plastic sleeve on spine to hold label describing contents and with pockets inside covers to hold folded oversize sheets. a. If two or more binders are necessary to accommodate data of a system, organize data in each binder into groupings by subsystem and related components. Cross-reference other binders if necessary to provide essential information for proper operation or maintenance of equipment or system. b. Identify each binder on front and spine, with printed title "OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL," Project title or name, and subject matter of contents. Indicate volume number for multiple-volume sets. 2. Dividers: Heavy-paper dividers with plastic-covered tabs for each section. Mark each tab to indicate contents. Include typed list of products and major components of equipment included in the section on each divider, cross-referenced to Specification Section number and title of Project Manual. 017823 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA Page 4 of 10 Project No. 01091 Proposed Renovations March 6, 2009 Park House Smith College, Northampton, MA 4. Table of contents. B. List of Systems and Subsystems: List systems alphabetically. Include references to operation and maintenance manuals that contain information about each system. C. List of Equipment: List equipment for each system, organized alphabetically by system. For pieces of equipment not part of system, list alphabetically in separate list. D. Tables of Contents: Include a table of contents for each emergency, operation, and maintenance manual. E. Identification: In the documentation directory and in each operation and maintenance manual, identify each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment with same designation used in the Contract Documents. If no designation exists, assign a designation according to ASHRAE Guideline 4, "Preparation of Operating and Maintenance Documentation for Building Systems." 2.2 MANUALS, GENERAL A. Organization: Unless otherwise indicated, organize each manual into a separate section for each system and subsystem, and a separate section for each piece of equipment not part of a system. Each manual shall contain the following materials, in the order listed: 1 . Title page. 2. Table of contents. 3. Manual contents. B. Title Page: Enclose title page in transparent plastic sleeve. Include the following information: 1 . Subject matter included in manual. 2. Name and address of Project. 3. Name and address of Owner. 4. Date of submittal. 5. Name, address, and telephone number of Contractor. 017823 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA Page 3 of 10 Project No. 01091 Proposed Renovations March 6, 2009 Park House Smith College, Northampton, MA 1 .3 DEFINITIONS A. System: An organized collection of parts, equipment, or subsystems united by regular interaction. B. Subsystem: A portion of a system with characteristics similar to a system. 1 .4 SUBMITTALS A. Initial Submittal: Submit 2 draft copies of each manual at least 15 days before requesting inspection for Substantial Completion. Include a complete operation and maintenance directory. Architect will return one copy of draft and mark whether general scope and content of manual are acceptable. B. Final Submittal: Submit one copy of each manual in final form at least 15 days before final inspection. Architect will return copy with comments within 15 days after final inspection. 1 . Correct or modify each manual to comply with Architect's comments. Submit final copy of each corrected manual within 15 days of receipt of Architect's comments. 1 .5 COORDINATION A. Where operation and maintenance documentation includes information on installations by more than one factory-authorized service representative, assemble and coordinate information furnished by representatives and prepare manuals. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DOCUMENTATION DIRECTORY A. Organization: Include a section in the directory for each of the following: 1 . List of documents. 2. List of systems. 3. List of equipment. 017823 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA Page 2 of 10 Project No. 01091 Proposed Renovations March 6, 2009 Park House Smith College, Northampton, MA SECTION 017823 - OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA PART 1 - GENERAL 1 .1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1 .2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for preparing operation and maintenance manuals, including the following: 1 . Operation and maintenance documentation directory. 2. Operation manuals for systems, subsystems, and equipment. 3. Maintenance manuals for the care and maintenance of products, materials, and finishes, systems and equipment. B. Related Sections include the following: 1 . Division 01 Section "Multiple Contract Summary" for coordinating operation and maintenance manuals covering the Work of multiple contracts. 2. Division 01 Section "Submittal Procedures" for submitting copies of submittals for operation and maintenance manuals. 3. Division 01 Section "Closeout Procedures" for submitting operation and maintenance manuals. 4. Division 01 Section "Project Record Documents" for preparing Record Drawings for operation and maintenance manuals. 5. Divisions 02 through 49 Sections for specific operation and maintenance manual requirements for the Work in those Sections. 017823 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA Page 1 of 10 Project No. 01091 Proposed Renovations March 6, 2009 Park House Smith College, Northampton, MA n. Clean plumbing fixtures to a sanitary condition, free of stains, including stains resulting from water exposure. o. Replace disposable air filters and clean permanent air filters. Clean exposed surfaces of diffusers, registers, and grills. p. Clean ducts, blowers, and coils if units were operated without filters during construction. q. Clean light fixtures, lamps, globes, and reflectors to function with full efficiency. Replace burned-out bulbs, and those noticeably dimmed by hours of use, and defective and noisy starters in fluorescent and mercury vapor fixtures to comply with requirements for new fixtures. r. Leave Project clean and ready for occupancy. C. Comply with safety standards for cleaning. Do not burn waste materials. Do not bury debris or excess materials on Owner's property. Do not discharge volatile, harmful, or dangerous materials into drainage systems. Remove waste materials from Project site and dispose of lawfully. END OF SECTION 017700 017700 CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES Page 7 of 7 Project No. 01091 Proposed Renovations March 6, 2009 Park House Smith College, Northampton, MA a. Clean Project site, yard, and grounds, in areas disturbed by construction activities, including landscape development areas, of rubbish, waste material, litter, and other foreign substances. b. Sweep paved areas broom clean. Remove petrochemical spills, stains, and other foreign deposits. C. Rake grounds that are neither planted nor paved to a smooth, even-textured surface. d. Remove tools, construction equipment, machinery, and surplus material from Project site. e. Clean exposed interior hard-surfaced finishes to a dirt-free condition, free of stains, films, and similar foreign substances. Avoid disturbing natural weathering of exterior surfaces. Restore reflective surfaces to their original condition. f. Remove debris and surface dust from limited access spaces, including roofs, plenums, shafts, trenches, equipment vaults, manholes, attics, and similar spaces. g. Sweep concrete floors broom clean in unoccupied spaces. h. Vacuum carpet and similar soft surfaces, removing debris and excess nap; shampoo if visible soil or stains remain. i. Clean transparent materials, including mirrors and glass in doors and windows. Remove glazing compounds and other noticeable, vision-obscuring materials. Replace chipped or broken glass and other damaged transparent materials. Polish mirrors and glass, taking care not to scratch surfaces. j. Remove labels that are not permanent. k. Touch up and otherwise repair and restore marred, exposed finishes and surfaces. Replace finishes and surfaces that cannot be satisfactorily repaired or restored or that already show evidence of repair or restoration. 1) Do not paint over "UL" and similar labels, including mechanical and electrical nameplates. I. Wipe surfaces of mechanical and electrical equipment and similar equipment. Remove excess lubrication, paint and mortar droppings, and other foreign substances. m. Replace parts subject to unusual operating conditions. 017700 CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES Page 6 of 7 Project No. 01091 Proposed Renovations March 6, 2009 Park House Smith College, Northampton, MA 4. Identify and repair any failed products or finishes that are not related to normal wear and tear, such peeling paint, delaminating surfaces, swelling due to moisture penetration or sealant failures. S. Inspect entire building envelope including roofing. B. Review with Owner any identified deficiencies and proposed corrective action. 1 . Submit proposed schedule for repairs (if any). C. Submit final Application for Payment. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Cleaning Agents: Use cleaning materials and agents recommended by manufacturer or fabricator of the surface to be cleaned. Do not use cleaning • agents that are potentially hazardous to health or property or that might damage finished surfaces. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 FINAL CLEANING A. General: Provide final cleaning. Conduct cleaning and waste-removal operations to comply with local laws and ordinances and Federal and local environmental and antipollution regulations. B. Cleaning: Employ experienced workers or professional cleaners for final cleaning. Clean each surface or unit to condition expected in an average commercial building cleaning and maintenance program. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions. 1 . Complete the following cleaning operations before requesting inspection for certification of Substantial Completion for entire Project or for a portion of Project: 017700 CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES Page 5 of 7 Project No. 01091 Proposed Renovations March 6, 2009 Park House Smith College, Northampton, MA a. Project name. b. Date. C. Name of Architect. d. Name of Contractor. e. Page number. 1 .6 WARRANTI ES A. Submittal Time: Submit written warranties on request of Architect for designated portions of the Work where commencement of warranties other than date of Substantial Completion is indicated. B. Organize warranty documents into an orderly sequence based on the table of contents of the Project Manual. 1 . Bind warranties and bonds in heavy-duty, 3-ring, vinyl-covered, loose- leaf binders, thickness as necessary to accommodate contents, and sized to receive 8-1 /2-by-1 1 -inch paper. 2. Provide heavy paper dividers with plastic-covered tabs for each separate warranty. Mark tab to identify the product or installation. Provide a typed description of the product or installation, including the name of the product and the name, address, and telephone number of Installer. 3. Identify each binder on the front and spine with the typed or printed title "WARRANTIES," Project name, and name of Contractor. C. Provide additional copies of each warranty to include in operation and maintenance manuals. 1 .7 END OF SCHOOL YEAR INSPECTION - ONE YEAR WARRANTY FOLLOW-UP. A. Schedule with Owner and Architect a walk-thru of completed project following commencement of academic year. Include representatives from key trades that were involved with the execution of.the Work. 1 . Inspect and adjust door hardware. 2. Inspect and adjust windows and window hardware. 3. Inspect and adjust mechanical equipment. 017700 CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES Page 4 of 7 Project No. 01091 Proposed Renovations March 6, 2009 Park House Smith College, Northampton, MA 1 .4 FINAL COMPLETION A. Preliminary Procedures: Before requesting final inspection for determining date of Final Completion, complete the following: 1 . Submit a final Application for Payment according to Division 01 Section "Payment Procedures." 2. Submit certified copy of Architect's Substantial Completion inspection list of items to be completed or corrected (punch list), endorsed and dated by Architect. The certified copy of the list shall state that each item has been completed or otherwise resolved for acceptance. 3. Submit evidence of final, continuing insurance coverage complying with insurance requirements. 4. Instruct Owner's personnel in operation, adjustment, and maintenance of products, equipment, and systems. B. Inspection: Submit a written request for final inspection for acceptance. On receipt of request, Architect will either proceed with inspection or notify Contractor of unfulfilled requirements. Architect will prepare a final Certificate for Payment after inspection or will notify Contractor of construction that must be completed or corrected before certificate will be issued. 1 . Reinspection: Request reinspection when the Work identified in previous inspections as incomplete is completed or corrected. 1 .5 LIST OF INCOMPLETE ITEMS (PUNCH LIST) A. Preparation: Submit three copies of list. Include name and identification of each space and area affected by construction operations for incomplete items and items needing correction including, if necessary, areas disturbed by Contractor that are outside the limits of construction. 1 . Organize list of spaces in sequential order, starting with exterior staging areas first and proceeding from lowest floor to highest floor. 2. Organize items applying to each space by major element, including categories for ceiling, individual walls, floors, equipment, and building systems. 3. Include the following information at the top of each page: 017700 CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES Page 3 of 7 Project No. 01091 Proposed Renovations March 6, 2009 Park House Smith College, Northampton, MA 1 . Prepare a list of items to be completed and corrected (punch list), the value of items on the list, and reasons why the Work is not complete. 2. Advise Owner of pending insurance changeover requirements. 3. Submit specific warranties, workmanship bonds, maintenance service agreements, final certifications, and similar documents. 4. Obtain and submit releases permitting Owner unrestricted use of the Work and access to services and utilities. Include occupancy permits, operating certificates, and similar releases. 5. Prepare and submit Project Record Documents, operation and maintenance manuals, and similar final record information. 6. Deliver tools, spare parts, extra materials, and similar items to location designated by Owner. Label with manufacturer's name and model number where applicable. 7. Make final changeover of permanent locks and deliver keys to Owner. Advise Owner's personnel of changeover in security provisions. 8. Complete startup testing of systems. 9. Submit test/adjust/balance records. 10. Terminate and remove temporary facilities from Project site, along with mockups, construction tools, and similar elements. 11 . Submit changeover information related to Owner's occupancy, use, operation, and maintenance. 12. Complete final cleaning requirements, including touchup painting. 13. Touch up and otherwise repair and restore marred exposed finishes to eliminate visual defects. B. Inspection: Submit a written request for inspection for Substantial Completion. On receipt of request, Architect will either proceed with inspection or notify Contractor of unfulfilled requirements. Architect will prepare the Certificate of Substantial Completion after inspection or will notify Contractor of items, either on Contractor's list or additional items identified by Architect, that must be completed or corrected before certificate will be issued. 1 . Reinspection: Request reinspection when the Work identified in previous inspections as incomplete is completed or corrected. 2. Results of completed inspection will form the basis of requirements for Final Completion. 01 7700 CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES Page 2 of 7 Project No. 01091 Proposed Renovations March 6, 2009 Park House Smith College, Northampton, MA SECTION 01 7700 - CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES PART 1 - GENERAL 1 .1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1 .2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for contract closeout, including, but not limited to, the following: 1 . Inspection procedures. 2. Warranties. 3. Final cleaning. 4. End of school year inspection and adjustments. B. Related Sections include the following: 1 . Division 01 Section "Payment Procedures" for requirements for Applications for Payment for Substantial and Final Completion. 2. Division 01 Section "Execution" for progress cleaning of Project site. 3. Division 01 Section "Project Record Documents" for submitting Record Drawings, Record Specifications, and Record Product Data. 4. Division 01 Section "Operation and Maintenance Data" for operation and maintenance manual requirements. 5. Divisions 02 through 49 Sections for specific closeout and special cleaning requirements for the Work in those Sections. 1 .3 SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION A. Preliminary Procedures: Before requesting inspection for determining date of Substantial Completion, complete the following. List items below that are incomplete in request. 017700 CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES Page 1 of 7 Project No. 01091 Proposed Renovations March 6, 2009 Park House Smith College, Northampton, MA B. Wood Materials: . 1 . Clean Cut-Offs of Lumber: Salvage pieces greater than 16 inches long for re-use as blocking. Bag or crate cut-offs too short for use. 2. Clean Sawdust: Bag sawdust that does not contain painted or treated wood. 3.6 DISPOSAL OF WASTE A. General: Except for items or materials to be salvaged, recycled, or otherwise reused, remove waste materials from Project site and legally dispose of them in a landfill or incinerator acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 1 . Except as otherwise specified, do not allow waste materials that are to be disposed of accumulate on-site. 2. Remove and transport debris in a manner that will prevent spillage on adjacent surfaces and areas. B. Burning: Do not burn waste materials. C. Disposal: Transport waste materials off Owner's property and legally dispose of them. END OF SECTION 017419 017419 CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT AND DISPOSAL Page 8 of 8 Project No. 01091 Proposed Renovations March 6, 2009 Park House Smith College, Northampton, MA B. Wood Materials: Sort and stack members according to size, type, and length. Separate lumber, engineered wood products, panel products, and treated wood materials. C. Metals: Separate metals by type. 1 . Remove and dispose of bolts, nuts, washers, and other rough hardware. D. Acoustical Ceiling Panels and Tile: Stack large clean pieces on wood pallets and store in a dry location. 1 . Separate suspension system, trim, and other metals from panels and tile and sort with other metals. E. Plumbing Fixtures: Separate by type and size. F. Piping: Reduce piping to straight lengths and store by type and size. Separate supports, hangers, valves, sprinklers, and other components by type and size. G. Lighting Fixtures: Separate lamps by type and protect from breakage. H. Electrical Devices: Separate switches, receptacles, switchgear, transformers, meters, panelboards, circuit breakers, and other devices by type. I. Conduit: Reduce conduit to straight lengths and store by type and size. 3.5 RECYCLING CONSTRUCTION WASTE A. Packaging: 1 . Cardboard and Boxes: Break down packaging into flat sheets. Bundle and store in a dry location. 2. Polystyrene Packaging: Separate and bag materials. 3. Pallets: As much as possible, require deliveries using pallets to remove pallets from Project site. For pallets that remain on-site, break down pallets into component wood pieces and comply with requirements for recycling wood. 4. Crates: Break down crates into component wood pieces and comply with requirements for recycling wood. 017419 CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT AND DISPOSAL Page 7 of 8 Project No. 01091 Proposed Renovations March 6, 2009 Park House Smith College, Northampton, MA 3.3 RECYCLING DEMOLITION AND CONSTRUCTION WASTE, GENERAL A. General: Recycle paper and beverage containers used by on-site workers. B. Recycling Receivers and Processors: List below is provided for information only; available recycling receivers and processors include, but are not limited to, the following: C. Recycling Incentives: Revenues, savings, rebates, tax credits, and other incentives received for recycling waste materials shall accrue to Contractor. D. Procedures: Separate recyclable waste from other waste materials, trash, and debris. Separate recyclable waste by type at Project site to the maximum extent practical. 1 . Provide appropriately marked containers or bins for controlling recyclable waste until they are removed from Project site. Include list of acceptable and unacceptable materials at each container and bin. a. Inspect containers and bins for contamination and remove contaminated materials if found. 2. Stockpile processed materials on-site without intermixing with other materials. Place, grade, and shape stockpiles to drain surface water. Cover to prevent windblown dust. 3. Stockpile materials away from construction area. Do not store within drip line of remaining trees. 4. Store components off the ground and protect from the weather. 5. Remove recyclable waste off Owner's property and transport to recycling receiver or processor. 3.4 RECYCLING DEMOLITION WASTE A. Masonry: Remove metal reinforcement, anchors, and ties from masonry and sort with other metals. 1 . Clean and stack undamaged, whole masonry units on wood pallets. 017419 CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT AND DISPOSAL Page 6 of 8 Project No. 01091 Proposed Renovations March 6, 2009 Park House Smith College, Northampton, MA B. Training: Train workers, subcontractors, and suppliers on proper waste management procedures, as appropriate for the Work occurring at Project site. 1 . Distribute waste management plan to entities when they first begin work on-site. Review plan procedures and locations established for salvage, recycling, and disposal. C. Site Access and Temporary Controls: Conduct waste management operations to ensure minimum interference with roads, streets, walks, walkways, and other adjacent occupied and used facilities. 1 . Designate and label specific areas on Project site necessary for separating materials that are to be salvaged, recycled, reused, donated, and sold. 2. Comply with Division 01 Section "Temporary Facilities and Controls" for controlling dust and dirt, environmental protection, and noise control. 3.2 SALVAGING DEMOLITION WASTE A. Salvaged Items for Reuse in the Work: 1 . Clean salvaged items. 2. Pack or crate items after cleaning. Identify contents of containers. 3. Store items in a secure area until installation. 4. Protect items from damage during transport and storage. 5. Install salvaged items to comply with installation requirements for new materials and equipment. Provide connections, supports, and miscellaneous materials necessary to make items functional for use indicated. B. Salvaged Items for Sale and Donation: Not permitted on Project site. C. Salvaged Items for Owner's Use: 1 . Clean salvaged items. 2. Pack or crate items after cleaning. Identify contents of containers. 3. Store items in a secure area until delivery to Owner. 4. Transport items to Owner's storage area on-site. 5. Protect items from damage. 017419 CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT AND DISPOSAL Page 5 of 8 Project No. 01091 Proposed Renovations March 6, 2009 Park House Smith College, Northampton, MA 1 .6 WASTE MANAGEMENT PLAN " A. General: Develop plan consisting of waste identification, waste reduction work plan, and on site procedures. B. Waste Reduction Work Plan: List each type of waste and whether it will be salvaged, recycled, or disposed of in landfill. 1 . Salvaged Materials for Reuse: For materials that will be salvaged and reused in this Project, describe methods for preparing salvaged materials before incorporation into the Work. 2. Salvaged Materials for Sale: For materials that will be sold, transport materials off-site. 3. Salvaged Materials for Donation: For materials that will be donated to individuals and organizations arrange for receipt. 4. Recycled Materials: Include list of local receivers and processors and type of recycled materials each will accept. 5. Disposed Materials: Indicate how and where materials will be disposed of. Include name, address, and telephone number of each landfill and incinerator facility. 6. Handling and Transportation Procedures: Include method that will be used for separating recyclable waste including sizes of containers, container labeling, and designated location on Project site where materials separation will be located. PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PLAN IMPLEMENTATION A. General: Implement waste management plan as approved by Architect and Owner. Provide handling, containers, storage, signage, transportation, and other items as required to implement waste management plan during the entire duration of the Contract. 1 . Comply with Division 01 Section "Temporary Facilities and Controls" for ,tom operation, termination, and removal requirements. 017419 CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT AND DISPOSAL Page 4 of 8 Project No. 01091 Proposed Renovations March 6, 2009 Park House Smith College, Northampton, MA ", a. Site-clearing waste. b. Masonry and CMU. C. Lumber. d. Wood sheet materials. e. Wood trim. f. Metals. g. Carpet and pad. h. Gypsum board. i. Piping. j. Electrical conduit. k. Packaging: Regardless of salvage/recycle goal indicated above, salvage or recycle 100 percent of the following uncontaminated packaging materials: 1) Paper. 2) Cardboard. 3) Boxes. 4) Wood crates. 5) Plastic pails. 1 .5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with hauling and disposal regulations of authorities having jurisdiction. B. Waste Management Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements in Division 01 Section "Project Management and Coordination." Review methods and procedures related to waste management including, but not limited to, the following: 1 . Review and discuss waste management plan including responsibilities of Waste Management Coordinator. 2. Review and finalize procedures for materials separation and verify availability of containers and bins needed to avoid delays. 3. Review procedures for periodic waste collection and transportation to recycling and disposal facilities. 4. Review waste management requirements for each trade. 017419 CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT AND DISPOSAL Page 3 of 8 Project No. 01091 Proposed Renovations March 6, 2009 Park House Smith College, Northampton, MA C. Disposal: Removal off-site of demolition and construction waste and subsequent sale, recycling, reuse, or deposit in landfill or incinerator acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. D. Recycle: Recovery of demolition or construction waste for subsequent processing in preparation for reuse. E. Salvage: Recovery of demolition or construction waste and subsequent sale or reuse in another facility. F. Salvage and Reuse: Recovery of demolition or construction waste and subsequent incorporation into the Work. 1 .4 PERFORMANCE GOALS A. General: Develop waste management plan that results in end-of-Project rates for salvage/recycling of 50 percent by weight of total waste generated by the Work. 1 . Demolition Waste: a. Brick. b. Wood studs. C. Wood paneling. d. Wood trim. e. Doors and frames. f. Door hardware. g. Windows. h. Glazing. i. Carpet. j. Cabinets. k. Piping. I. Supports and hangers. m. Copper wiring. n. Lighting fixtures. o. Ballasts. p. Electrical devices. q. Switchgear and panelboards. 2. Construction Waste: 017419 CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT AND DISPOSAL Page 2 of 8 Project No. 01091 Proposed Renovations March 6, 2009 Park House Smith College, Northampton, MA SECTION 017419 - CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT AND DISPOSAL PART 1 - GENERAL 1 .1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1 .2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for the following: 1 . Salvaging nonhazardous demolition and construction waste. 2. Recycling nonhazardous demolition and construction waste. #""° 3. Disposing of nonhazardous demolition and construction waste. B. Related Sections include the following: 1 . Division 01 Section "Temporary Facilities and Controls" for environmental-protection measures during construction. 2. Division 04 Section "Unit Masonry" for disposal requirements for masonry waste. 3. Division 31 Section "Site Clearing" for disposition of waste resulting from site clearing and removal of above- and below-grade improvements. 1 .3 DEFINITIONS A. Construction Waste: Building and site improvement materials and other solid waste resulting from construction, remodeling, renovation, or repair operations. Construction waste includes packaging. B. Demolition Waste: Building and site improvement materials resulting from demolition or selective demolition operations. 017419 CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT AND DISPOSAL Page 1 of 8 Project No. 01091 Proposed Renovations March 6, 2009 Park House Smith College, Northampton, MA with new materials, if necessary, to achieve uniform color and appearance. a. Where patching occurs in a painted surface, apply primer and intermediate paint coats over the patch and apply final paint coat over entire unbroken surface containing the patch. Provide additional coats until patch blends with adjacent surfaces. 4. Ceilings: Patch, repair, or rehang in-place ceilings as necessary to provide an even-plane surface of uniform appearance. 5. Exterior Building Enclosure: Patch components in a manner that restores enclosure to a weathertight condition. D. Cleaning: Clean areas and spaces where cutting and patching are performed. Completely remove paint, mortar, oils, putty, and similar materials. END OF SECTION 017329 Awk 017329 CUTTING AND PATCHING Page 6 of 6 Project No. 01091 Proposed Renovations March 6, 2009 Park House Smith College, Northampton, MA review proposed procedures with original Installer; comply with original Installer's written recommendations. 1 . In general, use hand or small power tools designed for sawing and grinding, not hammering and chopping. Cut holes and slots as small as possible, neatly to size required, and with minimum disturbance of adjacent surfaces. Temporarily cover openings when not in use. 2. Finished Surfaces: Cut or drill from the exposed or finished side into concealed surfaces. 3. Concrete and Masonry: Cut using a cutting machine, such as an abrasive saw or a diamond-core drill. 4. Excavating and Backfilling: Comply with requirements in applicable Division 31 Sections where required by cutting and patching operations. 5. Mechanical and Electrical Services: Cut off pipe or conduit in walls or partitions to be removed. Cap, valve, or plug and seal remaining portion of pipe or conduit to prevent entrance of moisture or other foreign matter after cutting. 6. Proceed with patching after construction operations requiring cutting are complete. C. Patching: Patch construction by filling, repairing, refinishing, closing up, and similar operations following performance of other Work. Patch with durable seams that are as invisible as possible. Provide materials and comply with installation requirements specified in other Sections. 1 . Inspection: Where feasible, test and inspect patched areas after completion to demonstrate integrity of installation. 2. Exposed Finishes: Restore exposed finishes of patched areas and extend finish restoration into retained adjoining construction in a manner that will eliminate evidence of patching and refinishing. a. Clean piping, conduit, and similar features before applying paint or other finishing materials. b. Restore damaged pipe covering to its original condition. 3. Floors and Walls: Where walls or partitions that are removed extend one finished area into another, patch and repair floor and wall surfaces in the new space. Provide an even surface of uniform finish, color, texture, and appearance. Remove in-place floor and wall coverings and replace 017329 CUTTING AND PATCHING Page 5 of 6 Project No. 01091 Proposed Renovations March 6, 2009 Park House Smith College, Northampton, MA PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine surfaces to be cut and patched and conditions under which cutting and patching are to be performed. 1 . Compatibility: Before patching, verify compatibility with and suitability of substrates, including compatibility with in-place finishes or primers. 2. Proceed with installation only after unsafe or unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Temporary Support: Provide temporary support of Work to be cut. B. Protection: Protect in-place construction during cutting and patching to prevent damage. Provide protection from adverse weather conditions for portions of Project that might be exposed during cutting and patching operations. C. Adjoining Areas: Avoid interference with use of adjoining areas or interruption of free passage to adjoining areas. 3.3 PERFORMANCE A. General: Employ skilled workers to perform cutting and patching. Proceed with cutting and patching at the earliest feasible time, and complete without delay. 1 . Cut in-place construction to provide for installation of other components or performance of other construction, and subsequently patch as required to restore surfaces to their original condition. B. Cutting: Cut in-place construction by sawing, drilling, breaking, chipping, grinding, and similar operations, including excavation, using methods least likely to damage elements retained or adjoining construction. If possible, 017329 CUTTING AND PATCHING Page 4 of 6 Project No. 01091 Proposed Renovations March 6, 2009 Park House Smith College, Northampton, MA 5. Noise- and vibration-control elements and systems. D. Visual Requirements: Do not cut and patch construction in a manner that results in visual evidence of cutting and patching. Do not cut and patch construction exposed on the exterior or in occupied spaces in a manner that would, in Architect's opinion, reduce the building's aesthetic qualities. Remove and replace construction that has been cut and patched in a visually unsatisfactory manner. 1 . Mock-ups: Where methods impacting visual elements may affect aesthetic qualities of building's appearance provide mock-up of proposed methods for review. 1 .6 WARRANTY A. Existing Warranties: Remove, replace, patch, and repair materials and surfaces cut or damaged during cutting and patching operations, by methods and with materials so as not to void existing warranties. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. General: Comply with requirements specified in other Sections. B. In-Place Materials: Use materials identical to in-place materials. For exposed surfaces, use materials that visually match in-place adjacent surfaces to the fullest extent possible. 1 . If identical materials are unavailable or cannot be used, use materials that, when installed, will match the visual and functional performance of in-place materials. 017329 CUTTING AND PATCHING Page 3 of 6 Project No. 01091 Proposed Renovations March 6, 2009 Park House Smith College, Northampton, MA 1 . Extent: Describe cutting and patching, show how they will be performed, and indicate why they cannot be avoided. 2. Changes to In-Place Construction: Describe anticipated results. Include changes to structural elements and operating components as well as changes in building's appearance and other significant visual elements. 3. Products: List products to be used and firms or entities that will perform the Work. 4. Architect's Approval: Obtain approval of cutting and patching proposal before cutting and patching. Approval does not waive right to later require removal and replacement of unsatisfactory work. 1 .5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Structural Elements: Do not cut and patch structural elements in a manner that could change their load-carrying capacity or load-deflection ratio. B. Operational Elements: Do not cut and patch operating elements and related components in a manner that results in reducing their capacity to perform as intended or that results in increased maintenance or decreased operational life or safety. Operating elements include the following: 1 . Primary operational systems and equipment. 2. Fire-suppression systems. 3. Mechanical systems piping and ducts. 4. Control systems. 5. Communication systems. 6. Electrical wiring systems. C. Miscellaneous Elements: Do not cut and patch miscellaneous elements or related components in a manner that could change their load-carrying capacity, that results in reducing their capacity to perform as intended, or that result in increased maintenance or decreased operational life or safety. Miscellaneous elements include but are.not limited to the following: 1 . Water, moisture, or vapor barriers. 2. Membranes and flashings. 3. Equipment supports. 4. Piping, ductwork, vessels, and equipment. Aw 017329 CUTTING AND PATCHING Page 2 of 6 Project No. 01 091 Proposed Renovations March 6, 2009 Park House Smith College, Northampton, MA SECTION 017329 - CUTTING AND PATCHING PART 1 - GENERAL 1 .1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1 .2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes procedural requirements for cutting and patching. B. Related Sections include the following: 1 . Division 01 Section "Selective Structure Demolition" for demolition of selected portions of the building. 2. Divisions 2 through 49 Sections for specific requirements and limitations applicable to cutting and patching individual parts of the Work. 3. Division 07 Section "Penetration Firestopping" for patching fire-rated construction. 1 .3 DEFINITIONS A. Cutting: Removal of in-place construction necessary to permit installation or performance of other Work. B. Patching: Fitting and repair work required to restore surfaces to original conditions after installation of other Work. 1 .4 SUBMITTALS A. Cutting and Patching Proposal: Submit a proposal describing procedures at least 7 days before the time cutting and patching will be performed, requesting approval to proceed. Include the following information: 017329 CUTTING AND PATCHING Page 1 of 6 Project No. 01091 Proposed Renovations March 6, 2009 Park House Smith College, Northampton, MA 3.8 CORRECTION OF THE WORK A. Repair or remove and replace defective construction. Restore damaged substrates and finishes. Comply with requirements in Division 01 Section "Cutting and Patching." 1 . Repairing includes replacing defective parts, refinishing damaged surfaces, touching up with matching materials, and properly adjusting operating equipment. B. Restore permanent facilities used during construction to their specified condition. C. Remove and replace damaged surfaces that are exposed to view if surfaces cannot be repaired without visible evidence of repair. D. Repair components that do not operate properly. Remove and replace operating components that cannot be repaired. E. Remove and replace chipped, scratched, and broken glass or reflective surfaces. END OF SECTION 017300 017300 EXECUTION Page 7 of 7 Project No. 01091 Proposed Renovations March 6, 2009 Park House Smith College, Northampton, MA H. During handling and installation, clean and protect construction in progress and adjoining materials already in place. Apply protective covering where required to ensure protection from damage or deterioration at Substantial Completion. I. Clean and provide maintenance on completed construction as frequently as necessary through the remainder of the construction period. Adjust and lubricate operable components to ensure operability without damaging effects. J. Limiting Exposures: Supervise construction operations to assure that no part of the construction, completed or in progress, is subject to harmful, dangerous, damaging, or otherwise deleterious exposure during the construction period. 3.6 STARTING AND ADJUSTING A. Start equipment and operating components to confirm proper operation. Remove malfunctioning units, replace with new units, and retest. B. Adjust operating components for proper operation without binding. Adjust equipment for proper operation. C. Test each piece of equipment to verify proper operation. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and equipment. D. Manufacturer's Field Service: If a factory-authorized service representative is required to inspect field-assembled components and equipment installation, comply with qualification requirements in Division 01 Section "Quality Requirements." 3.7 PROTECTION OF INSTALLED CONSTRUCTION A. Provide final protection and maintain conditions that ensure installed Work is without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion. B. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for temperature and relative Aaw humidity. 017300 EXECUTION Page 6 of 7 Project No. 01091 Proposed Renovations March 6, 2009 Park House Smith College, Northampton, MA 3.5 PROGRESS CLEANING A. General: Clean Project site and work areas daily, including common areas. Coordinate progress cleaning for joint-use areas where more than one installer has worked. Enforce requirements strictly. Dispose of materials lawfully. 1 . Comply with requirements in NFPA 241 for removal of combustible waste materials and debris. 2. Do not hold materials more than 7 days during normal weather or 3 days if the temperature is expected to rise above 80 deg F. 3. Containerize hazardous and unsanitary waste materials separately from other waste. Mark containers appropriately and dispose of legally, according to regulations. B. Site: Maintain Project site free of waste materials and debris. C. Work Areas: Clean areas where work is in progress to the level of cleanliness necessary for proper execution of the Work. 1 . Remove liquid spills promptly. 2. Where dust would impair proper execution of the Work, broom-clean or vacuum the entire work area, as appropriate. D. Installed Work: Keep installed work clean. Clean installed surfaces according to written instructions of manufacturer or fabricator of product installed, using only cleaning materials specifically recommended. If specific cleaning materials are not recommended, use cleaning materials that are not hazardous to health or property and that will not damage exposed surfaces. E. Concealed Spaces: Remove debris from concealed spaces before enclosing the space. F. Exposed Surfaces in Finished Areas: Clean exposed surfaces and protect as necessary to ensure freedom from damage and deterioration at time of Substantial Completion. G. Waste Disposal: Burying or burning waste materials on-site will not be permitted. Washing waste materials down sewers or into waterways will not be permitted. 017300 EXECUTION Page 5 of 7 Project No. 0 109 1 Proposed Renovations March 6, 2009 Park House Smith College, Northampton, MA B. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations for installing products in applications indicated. C. Install products at the time and under conditions that will ensure the best possible results. Maintain conditions required for product performance until Substantial Completion. D. Conduct construction operations so no part of the Work is subjected to damaging operations or loading in excess of that expected during normal conditions of occupancy. E. Tools and Equipment: Do not use tools or equipment that produce harmful noise levels. F. Templates: Obtain and distribute to the parties involved templates for work specified to be factory prepared and field installed. Check Shop Drawings of other work to confirm that adequate provisions are made for locating and installing products to comply with indicated requirements. G. Anchors and Fasteners: Provide anchors and fasteners as required to anchor each component securely in place, accurately located and aligned with other portions of the Work. 1 . Mounting Heights: Where mounting heights are not indicated, mount components at heights directed by Architect. 2. Allow for building movement, including thermal expansion and contraction. 3. Coordinate installation of anchorages. Furnish setting drawings, templates, and directions for installing anchorages, including sleeves, concrete inserts, anchor bolts, and items with integral anchors, that are to be embedded in concrete or masonry. Deliver such items to Project site in time for installation. H. ,Joints: Make joints of uniform width. Where joint locations in exposed work are not indicated, arrange joints for the best visual effect. Fit exposed connections together to form hairline joints. I. Hazardous Materials: Use products, cleaners, and installation materials that are not considered hazardous. 01 7300 EXECUTION Page 4 of 7 Project No. 01091 Proposed Renovations March 6, 2009 Park House Smith College, Northampton, MA 3.2 PREPARATION A. Field Measurements: Take field measurements as required to fit the Work properly. Recheck measurements before installing each product. Where portions of the Work are indicated to fit to other construction, verify dimensions of other construction by field measurements before fabrication. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid delaying the Work. B. Space Requirements: Verify space requirements and dimensions of items shown diagrammatically on Drawings. 3.3 CONSTRUCTION LAYOUT A. Verification: Before proceeding to lay out the Work, verify layout information shown on Drawings, in relation existing conditions. If discrepancies are discovered, notify Architect promptly. 1 . Establish dimensions within tolerances indicated. Do not scale AOW Drawings to obtain required dimensions. 2. Inform installers of lines and levels to which they must comply. 3. Check the location, level and plumb, of every major element as the Work progresses. 4. Notify Architect when deviations from required lines and levels exceed allowable tolerances. 3.4 INSTALLATION A. General: Locate the Work and components of the Work accurately, in correct alignment and elevation, as indicated. 1 . Make vertical work plumb and make horizontal work level. 2. Where space is limited, install components to maximize space available for maintenance and ease of removal for replacement. 3. Conceal pipes, ducts, and wiring in finished areas, unless otherwise indicated. 4. Maintain minimum headroom clearance of 7 feet in spaces without a suspended ceiling. ?OW 017300 EXECUTION Page 3 of 7 Project No. 01091 Proposed Renovations March 6, 2009 Park House Smith College, Northampton, MA PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used) "" PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Existing Conditions: The existence and location of site improvements, utilities, and other construction indicated as existing are not guaranteed. Before beginning work, investigate and verify the existence and location of mechanical and electrical systems and other construction affecting the Work. B. Acceptance of Conditions: Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer or Applicator present where indicated, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance. Record observations. 1 . Written Report: Where a written report listing conditions detrimental to performance of the Work is required by other Sections, include the following: look a. Description of the Work. b. List of detrimental conditions, including substrates. C. List of unacceptable installation tolerances. d. Recommended corrections. 2. Verify compatibility with and suitability of substrates, including compatibility with existing finishes or primers. 3. Examine roughing-in for mechanical and electrical systems to verify actual locations of connections before equipment and fixture installation. 4. Examine walls, floors, and roofs for suitable conditions where products and systems are to be installed. 5. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. Proceeding with the Work indicates acceptance of surfaces and conditions. Aak 017300 EXECUTION Page 2 of 7 Project No. 01091 Proposed Renovations March 6, 2009 Park House Smith College, Northampton, MA look SECTION 017300 - EXECUTION PART 1 - GENERAL 1 .1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1 .2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes general procedural requirements governing execution of the Work including, but not limited to, the following: 1 . Construction layout. 2. General installation of products. 3. Progress cleaning. 4. Starting and adjusting. 5. Protection of installed construction. 6. Correction of the Work. B. Related Sections include the following: 1 . Division 01 Section "Project Management and Coordination" for procedures for coordinating field engineering with other construction activities. 2. Division 01 Section "Submittal Procedures" for submitting surveys. 3. Division 01 Section "Cutting and Patching" for procedural requirements for cutting and patching necessary for the installation or performance of other components of the Work. 4. Division 01 Section "Closeout Procedures" for submitting final property survey with Project Record Documents, recording of Owner-accepted deviations from indicated lines and levels, and final cleaning. 017300 EXECUTION Page 1 of 7 Project No. 01091 Proposed Renovations March 6, 2009 Park House Smith College, Northampton, MA 2.3 COMPARABLE PRODUCTS A. Conditions: Architect will consider Contractor's request for comparable product when the following conditions are satisfied. If the following conditions are not satisfied, Architect will return requests without action, except to record noncompliance with these requirements: 1 . Evidence that the proposed product does not require extensive revisions to the Contract Documents, that it is consistent with the Contract Documents and will produce the indicated results, and that it is compatible with other portions of the Work. 2. Detailed comparison of significant qualities of proposed product with those named in the Specifications. Significant qualities include attributes such as performance, weight, size, durability, visual effect, and specific features and requirements indicated. 3. Evidence that proposed product provides specified warranty. 4. List of similar installations for completed projects with project names and addresses and names and addresses of architects and owners, if requested. 5. Samples, if requested. PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used) END OF SECTION 016000 Aswk 016000 PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS Page 10 of 10 Project No. 01091 Proposed Renovations March 6, 2009 Park House Smith College, Northampton, MA O%l 2.2 PRODUCT SUBSTITUTIONS A. Timing: Architect will consider requests for substitution if received within 60 days after the Notice of Award. Requests received after that time may be considered or rejected at discretion of Architect. B. Conditions: Architect will consider Contractor's request for substitution when the following conditions are satisfied. If the following conditions are not satisfied, Architect will return requests without action, except to record noncompliance with these requirements: 1 . Requested substitution offers Owner a substantial advantage in cost, time, energy conservation, or other considerations, after deducting additional responsibilities Owner must assume. Owner's additional responsibilities may include compensation to Architect for redesign and evaluation services, increased cost of other construction by Owner, and similar considerations. 2. Requested substitution does not require extensive revisions to the Contract Documents. 3. Requested substitution is consistent with the Contract Documents and will produce indicated results. 4. Substitution request is fully documented and properly submitted. 5. Requested substitution will not adversely affect Contractor's Construction Schedule. 6. Requested substitution has received necessary approvals of authorities having jurisdiction. 7. Requested substitution is compatible with other portions of the Work. 8. Requested substitution has been coordinated with other portions of the Work. 9. Requested substitution provides specified warranty. 10. If requested substitution involves more than one contractor, requested substitution has been coordinated with other portions of the Work, is uniform and consistent, is compatible with other products, and is acceptable to all contractors involved. 016000 PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS Page 9 of 10 Project No. 0 109 1 Proposed Renovations March 6, 2009 Park House Smith College, Northampton, MA with provisions in Part 2 "Comparable Products" Article for consideration Aqw of an unnamed product. 7. Product Options: Where Specifications indicate that sizes, profiles, and dimensional requirements on Drawings are based on a specific product or system, provide the specified product or system. Comply with provisions in Part 2 "Product Substitutions" Article for consideration of an unnamed product or system. 8. Basis-of-Design Product: Where Specifications name a product and include a list of manufacturers, provide the specified product or a comparable product by one of the other named manufacturers. Drawings and Specifications indicate sizes, profiles, dimensions, and other characteristics that are based on the product named. Comply with provisions in Part 2 "Comparable Products" Article for consideration of an unnamed product by the other named manufacturers. 9. Visual Matching Specification: Where Specifications require matching an established Sample, select a product that complies with requirements and matches Architect's sample. Architect's decision will be final on whether a proposed product matches. a. If no product available within specified category matches and complies with other specified requirements, comply with provisions in Part 2 "Product Substitutions" Article for proposal of product. 10. Visual Selection Specification: Where Specifications include the phrase "as selected from manufacturer's colors, patterns, textures" or a similar phrase, select a product that complies with other specified requirements. a. Standard Range: Where Specifications include the phrase "standard range of colors, patterns, textures" or similar phrase, Architect will select color, pattern, density, or texture from manufacturer's product line that does not include premium items. b. Full Range: Where Specifications include the phrase "full range of colors, patterns, textures" or similar phrase, Architect will select color, pattern, density, or texture from manufacturer's product line that includes both standard and premium items. 016000 PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS Page 8 of 10 Project No. 01091 Proposed Renovations March 6, 2009 Park House Smith College, Northampton, MA 1 . Provide products complete with accessories, trim, finish, fasteners, and other items needed for a complete installation and indicated use and effect. 2. Standard Products: If available, and unless custom products or nonstandard options are specified, provide standard products of types that have been produced and used successfully in similar situations on other projects. 3. Owner reserves the right to limit selection to products with warranties not in conflict with requirements of the Contract Documents. 4. Where products are accompanied by the term "as selected," Architect will make selection. 5. Where products are accompanied by the term "match sample," sample to be matched is Architect's. 6. Descriptive, performance, and reference standard requirements in the Specifications establish "salient characteristics" of products. B. Product Selection Procedures: AOP%- 1 . Product: Where Specifications name a single product and manufacturer, provide the named product that complies with requirements. 2. Manufacturer/Source: Where Specifications name a single manufacturer or source, provide a product by the named manufacturer or source that complies with requirements. 3. Products: Where Specifications include a list of names of both products and manufacturers, provide one of the products listed that complies with requirements. 4. Manufacturers: Where Specifications include a list of manufacturers' names, provide a product by one of the manufacturers listed that complies with requirements. 5. Available Products: Where Specifications include a list of names of both products and manufacturers, provide one of the products listed, or an unnamed product, that complies with requirements. Comply with provisions in Part 2 "Comparable Products" Article for consideration of an unnamed product. 6. Available Manufacturers: Where Specifications include a list of manufacturers, provide a product by one of the manufacturers listed, or an unnamed manufacturer, that complies with requirements. Comply 016000 PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS Page 7 of 10 Project No. 01091 Proposed Renovations March 6, 2009 Park House Smith College, Northampton, MA 1 .7 PRODUCT WARRANTIES A. Warranties specified in other Sections shall be in addition to, and run concurrent with, other warranties required by the Contract Documents. Manufacturer's disclaimers and limitations on product warranties do not relieve Contractor of obligations under requirements of the Contract Documents. 1 . Manufacturer's Warranty: Preprinted written warranty published by individual manufacturer for a particular product and specifically endorsed by manufacturer to Owner. 2. Special Warranty: Written warranty required by or incorporated into the Contract Documents, either to extend time limit provided by manufacturer's warranty or to provide more rights for Owner. B. Special Warranties: Prepare a written document that contains appropriate terms and identification, ready for execution. Submit a draft for approval before final execution. 1 . Manufacturer's Standard Form: Modified to include Project-specific information and properly executed. 2. Specified Form: When specified forms are included with the Specifications, prepare a written document using appropriate form properly executed. 3. Refer to Divisions 02 through 49 Sections for specific content requirements and particular requirements for submitting special warranties. C. Submittal Time: Comply with requirements in Division 01 Section "Closeout Procedures." PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PRODUCT SELECTION PROCEDURES A. General Product Requirements: Provide products that comply with the Contract Documents, that are undamaged and, unless otherwise indicated, that are new at time of installation. 016000 PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS Page 6 of 10 Project No. 01091 Proposed Renovations March 6, 2009 Park House Smith College, Northampton, MA 1 .6 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver, store, and handle products using means and methods that will prevent damage, deterioration, and loss, including theft. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions. B. Delivery and Handling: 1 . Schedule delivery to minimize long-term storage at Project site and to prevent overcrowding of construction spaces. 2. Coordinate delivery with installation time to ensure minimum holding time for items that are flammable, hazardous, easily damaged, or sensitive to deterioration, theft, and other losses. 3. Deliver products to Project site in an undamaged condition in manufacturer's original sealed container or other packaging system, complete with labels and instructions for handling, storing, unpacking, protecting, and installing. 4. Inspect products on delivery to ensure compliance with the Contract Documents and to ensure that products are undamaged and properly protected. C. Storage: 1 . Store products to allow for inspection and measurement of quantity or counting of units. 2. Store materials in a manner that will not endanger Project structure. 3. Store products that are subject to damage by the elements, under cover in a weathertight enclosure above ground, with ventilation adequate to prevent condensation. 4. Store cementitious products and materials on elevated platforms. 5. Store foam plastic from exposure to sunlight, except to extent necessary for period of installation and concealment. 6. Comply with product manufacturer's written instructions for temperature, humidity, ventilation, and weather-protection requirements for storage. 7. Protect stored products from damage and liquids from freezing. 8. Provide a secure location and enclosure at Project site for storage of materials and equipment by Owner's construction forces. Coordinate low location with Owner. 016000 PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS Page 5 of 10 Project No. 01091 Proposed Renovations March 6, 2009 Park House Smith College, Northampton, MA a. Form of Acceptance: Change Order. b. Use product specified if Architect cannot make a decision on use of a proposed substitution within time allocated. B. Comparable Product Requests: Submit three copies of each request for consideration. Identify product or fabrication or installation method to be replaced. Include Specification Section number and title and Drawing numbers and titles. 1 . Architect's Action: If necessary, Architect will request additional information or documentation for evaluation within one week of receipt of a comparable product request. Architect will notify Contractor of approval or rejection of proposed comparable product request within 15 days of receipt of request, or 7 days of receipt of additional information or documentation, whichever is later. a. Form of Approval: As specified in Division 01 Section "Submittal Procedures." b. Use product specified if Architect cannot make a decision on use of a comparable product request within time allocated. C. Basis-of-Design Product Specification Submittal: Comply with requirements in Division 01 Section "Submittal Procedures." Show compliance with requirements. 1 .5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Compatibility of Options: If Contractor is given option of selecting between two or more products for use on Project, product selected shall be compatible with products previously selected, even if previously selected products were also options. 1 . Each contractor is responsible for providing products and construction methods compatible with products and construction methods of other contractors. 2. If a dispute arises between contractors over concurrently selectable but incompatible products, Architect will determine which products shall be used. 016000 PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS Page 4 of 10 Project No. 01091 Proposed Renovations March 6, 2009 Park House Smith College, Northampton, MA construction performed by Owner and separate contractors, that will be necessary to accommodate proposed substitution. d. Detailed comparison of significant qualities of proposed substitution with those of the Work specified. Significant qualities may include attributes such as performance, weight, size, durability, visual effect, and specific features and requirements indicated. e. Product Data, including drawings and descriptions of products and fabrication and installation procedures. f. Samples, where applicable or requested. g. List of similar installations for completed projects with project names and addresses and names and addresses of architects and owners. h. Material test reports from a qualified testing agency indicating and interpreting test results for compliance with requirements indicated. i. Research/evaluation reports evidencing compliance with building code in effect for Project, from a model code organization acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. j. Detailed comparison of Contractor's Construction Schedule using proposed substitution with products specified for the Work, including effect on the overall Contract Time. If specified product or method of construction cannot be provided within the Contract Time, include letter from manufacturer, on manufacturer's letterhead, stating lack of availability or delays in delivery. k. Contractor's certification that proposed substitution complies with requirements in the Contract Documents and is appropriate for applications indicated. I. Contractor's waiver of rights to additional payment or time that may subsequently become necessary because of failure of proposed substitution to produce indicated results. 2. Architect's Action: If necessary, Architect will request additional information or documentation for evaluation within 7 days of receipt of a request for substitution. Architect will notify Contractor of acceptance or rejection of proposed substitution within 7 days of receipt of request, or 7 days of receipt of additional information or documentation, whichever is later. 016000 PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS Page 3 of 10 Project No. 01 091 Proposed Renovations March 6, 2009 Park House Smith College, Northampton, MA 2. New Products: Items that have not previously been incorporated into another project or facility, except that products consisting of recycled- content materials are allowed, unless explicitly stated otherwise. Products salvaged or recycled from other projects are not considered new products. 3. Comparable Product: Product that is demonstrated and approved through submittal process, or where indicated as a product substitution, to have the indicated qualities related to type, function, dimension, in- service performance, physical properties, appearance, and other characteristics that equal or exceed those of specified product. B. Substitutions: Changes in products, materials, equipment, and methods of construction from those required by the Contract Documents and proposed by Contractor. C. Basis-of-Design Product Specification: Where a specific manufacturer's product is named and accompanied by the words "basis of design," including make or model number or other designation, to establish the significant qualities related to type, function, dimension, in-service performance, physical properties, appearance, and other characteristics for purposes of evaluating comparable products of other named manufacturers. 1 .4 SUBMITTALS A. Substitution Requests: Submit three copies of each request for consideration. Identify product or fabrication or installation method to be replaced. Include Specification Section number and title and Drawing numbers and titles. 1 . Documentation: Show compliance with requirements for substitutions and the following, as applicable: a. Statement indicating why specified material or product cannot be provided. b. Cost information, including a proposal of change, if any, in the Contract Sum. C. Coordination information, including a list of changes or modifications needed to other parts of the Work and to 016000 PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS Page 2 of 10 Project No. 01091 Proposed Renovations March 6, 2009 Park House Smith College, Northampton, MA a!s" SECTION 016000 - PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS PART 1 - GENERAL 1 .1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1 .2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for selection of products for use in Project; product delivery, storage, and handling; manufacturers' standard warranties on products; special warranties; product substitutions; and comparable products. "'"'" B. Related Sections include the following: 1 . Division 01 Section "Alternates" for products selected under an alternate. 2. Division 01 Section "Closeout Procedures" for submitting warranties for Contract closeout. 3. Divisions 02 through 49 Sections for specific requirements for warranties on products and installations specified to be warranted. 1 .3 DEFINITIONS A. Products: Items purchased for incorporating into the Work, whether purchased for Project or taken from previously purchased stock. The term "product" includes the terms "material," "equipment," "system," and terms of similar intent. 1 . Named Products: Items identified by manufacturer's product name, including make or model number or other designation shown or listed in manufacturer's published product literature, that is current as of date of the Contract Documents. 016000 PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS Page 1 of 10 Project No. 01091 Proposed Renovations March 6, 2009 Park House Smith College, Northampton, MA D. Termination and Removal: Remove each temporary facility when need for its service has ended, when it has been replaced by authorized use of a permanent facility, or no later than Substantial Completion. Complete or, if necessary, restore permanent construction that may have been delayed because of interference with temporary facility. Repair damaged Work, clean exposed surfaces, and replace construction that cannot be satisfactorily repaired. 1 . Materials and facilities that constitute temporary facilities are property of Contractor. Owner reserves right to take possession of Project identification signs. 2. Remove temporary paving not intended for or acceptable for integration into permanent paving. Where area is intended for landscape development, remove soil and aggregate fill that do not comply with requirements for fill or subsoil. Remove materials contaminated with road oil, asphalt and other petrochemical compounds, and other substances that might impair growth of plant materials or lawns. Repair or replace street paving, curbs, and sidewalks at temporary entrances, as required by authorities having jurisdiction. 3. At Substantial Completion, clean and renovate permanent facilities used during construction period. Comply with final cleaning requirements specified in Division 01 Section "Closeout Procedures." END OF SECTION 015000 015000 TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS Page 12 of 12 Project No. 01091 Proposed Renovations March 6, 2009 Park House Smith College, Northampton, MA length of joints. Cover floor 1 /4 inch fire-retardant plywood or tempered hardboard with rough side up. a. Construct temporary treads to cover existing stairs. 2. Provide furniture pads to protect wood railings and balusters. M. Temporary Fire Protection: Maintain existing fire-protection facilities to the greatest extent possible to protect against reasonably predictable and controllable fire losses. 1 . Prohibit smoking in construction areas. 2. Supervise welding operations, combustion-type temporary heating units, and similar sources of fire ignition according to requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. 3. Develop and supervise an overall fire-prevention and -protection program for personnel at Project site. Review needs with local fire department and establish procedures to be followed. Instruct personnel in methods and procedures. Post warnings and information. 4. Provide temporary standpipes and hoses for fire protection. Hang hoses with a warning sign stating that hoses are for fire-protection purposes only and are not to be removed. Match hose size with outlet size and equip with suitable nozzles. 3.5 OPERATION, TERMINATION, AND REMOVAL A. Supervision: Enforce strict discipline in use of temporary facilities. To minimize waste and abuse, limit availability of temporary facilities to essential and intended uses. B. Maintenance: Maintain facilities in good operating condition until removal. 1 . Maintain operation of temporary enclosures, heating, cooling, humidity control, ventilation, and similar facilities on a 24-hour basis where required to achieve indicated results and to avoid possibility of damage. C. Temporary Facility Changeover: Do not change over from using temporary security and protection facilities to permanent facilities until Substantial Completion. 015000 TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS Page 1 1 of 12 Project No. 01091 Proposed Renovations March 6, 2009 Park House Smith College, Northampton, MA G. Pest Control: Engage pest-control service to recommend practices to minimize attraction and harboring of rodents, roaches, and other pests and to perform extermination and control procedures at regular intervals so Project will be free of pests and their residues at Substantial Completion. Obtain extended warranty for Owner. Perform control operations lawfully, using environmentally safe materials. H. Site Enclosure Fence: Before construction operations begin, furnish and install site enclosure fence in a manner that will prevent people and animals from easily entering site except by entrance gates. 1 . Extent of Fence: As required to enclose entire Project site or portion determined sufficient to accommodate construction operations and as indicated on Drawings. 2. Maintain security by limiting number of keys and restricting distribution to authorized personnel. I. Security Enclosure and Lockup: Install substantial temporary enclosure around partially completed areas of construction. Provide lockable entrances to prevent unauthorized entrance, vandalism, theft, and similar violations of security. J. Barricades, Warning Signs, and Lights: Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction for erecting structurally adequate barricades, including warning signs and lighting. K. Temporary Enclosures: Provide temporary enclosures for protection of construction, in progress and completed, from exposure, foul weather, other construction operations, and similar activities. Provide temporary weathertight enclosure for building exterior. 1 . Where heating or cooling is needed and permanent enclosure is not complete, insulate temporary enclosures. L. Temporary Protection of Existing Finishes: Provide protection to floors, stairs, railings and guards as needed for finishes indicated as existing to remain. 1 . Cover floor with 1 layer 6-mil (0.14-mm) polyethylene sheet, extending sheets 18 inches (460 mm) up the sidewalls. Overlap and tape full 015000 TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS Page 10 of 12 Project No. 01091 Proposed Renovations March 6, 2009 Park House Smith College, Northampton, MA despite such protection, stairs become damaged, restore damaged areas so no evidence remains of correction work. N. Temporary Use of Permanent Stairs: Cover finished, permanent stairs with protective covering of plywood or similar material so finishes will be undamaged at time of acceptance. 3.4 SECURITY AND PROTECTION FACILITIES INSTALLATION A. Environmental Protection: Provide protection, operate temporary facilities, and conduct construction in ways and by methods that comply with environmental regulations and that minimize possible air, waterway, and subsoil contamination or pollution or other undesirable effects. 1 . Comply with work restrictions specified in Division 01 Section "Summary." B. Temporary Erosion and Sedimentation Control: Comply with requirements specified in Division 31 Section "Site Clearing." C. Temporary Erosion and Sedimentation Control: Provide measures to prevent soil erosion and discharge of soil-bearing water runoff and airborne dust to adjacent properties and walkways, according to requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. 1 . Inspect, repair, and maintain erosion- and sedimentation-control measures during construction until permanent vegetation has been established. D. Stormwater Control: Comply with authorities having jurisdiction. Provide barriers in and around excavations and subgrade construction to prevent flooding by runoff of stormwater from heavy rains. E. Tree and Plant Protection: Comply with requirements specified in Division 31 Section "Clearing and Grubbing." F. Tree and Plant Protection: Install temporary fencing located as indicated or outside the drip line of trees to protect vegetation from damage from construction operations. Protect tree root systems from damage, flooding, and erosion. 015000 TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS Page 9 of 12 Project No. 01091 Proposed Renovations March 6, 2009 Park House Smith College, Northampton, MA 1 . Provide temporary, directional signs for construction personnel and visitors. 2. Maintain and touchup signs so they are legible at all times. H. Waste Disposal Facilities: Comply with requirements specified in Division 01 Section "Construction Waste Management and Disposal." I. Lifts and Hoists: Provide facilities necessary for hoisting materials and personnel. 1 . Truck cranes and similar devices used for hoisting materials are considered "tools and equipment" and not temporary facilities. J. Temporary Elevator Use: Refer to Division 14 Sections for temporary use of new elevators. K. Existing Elevator Use: Use of Owner's existing elevators will be permitted, as long as elevators are cleaned and maintained in a condition acceptable to Owner. At Substantial Completion, restore elevators to condition existing before initial use, including replacing worn cables, guide shoes, and similar , items of limited life. 1 . Do not load elevators beyond their rated weight capacity. 2. Provide protective coverings, barriers, devices, signs, or other procedures to protect elevator car and entrance doors and frame. If, despite such protection, elevators become damaged, engage elevator Installer to restore damaged work so no evidence remains of correction work. Return items that cannot be refinished in field to the shop, make required repairs and refinish entire unit, or provide new units as required. L. Temporary Stairs: Until permanent stairs are available, provide temporary stairs where ladders are not adequate. M. Existing Stair Usage: Use of Owner's existing stairs will be permitted, as long as stairs are cleaned and maintained in a condition acceptable to Owner. At Substantial Completion, restore stairs to condition existing before initial use. 1 . Provide protective coverings, barriers, devices, signs, or other procedures to protect stairs and to maintain means of egress. If, 015000 TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS Page 8 of 12 Project No. 01091 Proposed Renovations March 6, 2009 Park House Smith College, Northampton, MA B. Temporary Roads and Paved Areas: Construct and maintain temporary roads and paved areas adequate for construction operations. Locate temporary roads and paved areas within construction limits indicated on Drawings. 1 . Provide dust-control treatment that is nonpolluting and nontracking. Reapply treatment as required to minimize dust. C. Temporary Roads and Paved Areas: Construct and maintain temporary roads and paved areas adequate for construction operations. Locate temporary roads and paved areas in same location as permanent roads and paved areas. Extend temporary roads and paved areas, within construction limits indicated, as necessary for construction operations. 1 . Prepare subgrade and install subbase and base for temporary roads and paved areas according to Division 31 Section "Earth Moving." 2. Recondition base after temporary use, including removing contaminated material, regrading, proofrolling, compacting, and testing. D. Traffic Controls: Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. 1 . Protect existing site improvements to remain including curbs, pavement, and utilities. 2. Maintain access for fire-fighting equipment and access to fire hydrants. E. Parking: Use only designated areas of Owner's existing parking areas for construction personnel. F. Dewatering Facilities and Drains: Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. Maintain Project site, excavations, and construction free of water. 1 . Dispose of rainwater in a lawful manner that will not result in flooding Project or adjoining properties nor endanger permanent Work or temporary facilities. 2. Remove snow and ice as required to minimize accumulations. G. Project Identification and Temporary Signs: Provide signs to inform public and individuals seeking entrance to Project. Unauthorized signs are not permitted. 015000 TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS Page 7 of 12 Project No. 01091 Proposed Renovations March 6, 2009 Park House Smith College, Northampton, MA J. Telephone Service: Provide temporary telephone service in common-use facilities for use by all construction personnel. 1 . Provide additional telephone lines for the following: a. Owner will provide a dedicated telephone line for each facsimile machine and computer in each field office. 2. At each telephone, post a list of important telephone numbers. a. Police and fire departments. b. Ambulance service. C. Contractor's home office. d. Architect's office. e. Engineers' offices. f. Owner's office. g. Principal subcontractors' field and home offices. 3. Provide superintendent with cellular telephone or portable two-way radio for use when away from field office. , K. Electronic Communication Service: Provide temporary electronic communication service, including electronic mail, in common-use facilities. 1 . Owner will provide DSL in primary field office. 3.3 SUPPORT FACILITIES INSTALLATION A. General: Comply with the following: 1 . Provide incombustible construction for offices, shops, and sheds located within construction area or within 30 feet (9 m) of building lines. Comply with NFPA 241 . 2. Maintain support facilities until near Substantial Completion. Remove before Substantial Completion. Personnel remaining after Substantial Completion will be permitted to use permanent facilities, under conditions acceptable to Owner. 015000 TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS Page 6 of 12 Project No. 01091 Proposed Renovations March 6, 2009 Park House Smith College, Northampton, MA D. Water Service: Use of Owner's existing water service facilities will be permitted, as long as facilities are cleaned and maintained in a condition acceptable to Owner. At Substantial Completion, restore these facilities to condition existing before initial use. 1 . Where installations below an outlet might be damaged by spillage or leakage, provide a drip pan of suitable size to minimize water damage. Drain accumulated water promptly from pans. E. Sanitary Facilities: Provide temporary toilets, wash facilities, and drinking water for use of construction personnel. Comply with authorities having jurisdiction for type, number, location, operation, and maintenance of fixtures and facilities. 1 . Toilets: Use of Owner's existing toilet facilities will not be permitted. F. Ventilation and Humidity Control: Provide temporary ventilation required by construction activities for curing or drying of completed installations or for protecting installed construction from adverse effects of high humidity. Select equipment that will not have a harmful effect on completed installations or elements being installed. Coordinate ventilation requirements to produce ambient condition required and minimize energy consumption. G. Electric Power Service: Use of Owner's existing electric power service will be permitted, as long as equipment is maintained in a condition acceptable to Owner. H. Electric Power Service: Provide electric power service and distribution system of sufficient size, capacity, and power characteristics required for construction operations. 1 . Connect temporary service to Owner's existing power source, as directed by Owner. I. Lighting: Provide temporary lighting with local switching that provides adequate illumination for construction operations, observations, inspections, and traffic conditions. 1 . install and operate temporary lighting that fulfills security and protection requirements without operating entire system. 2. Install lighting for Project identification sign. 015000 TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS Page 5 of 12 Project No. 01091 Proposed Renovations March 6, 2009 Park House Smith College, Northampton, MA B. Storage and Fabrication Sheds: Provide sheds sized, furnished, and equipped to accommodate materials and equipment for construction operations. 1 . Store combustible materials apart from building. 2.3 EQU I PM ENT A. Fire Extinguishers: Portable, UL rated; with class and extinguishing agent as required by locations and classes of fire exposures. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Locate facilities where they will serve Project adequately and result in minimum interference with performance of the Work. Relocate and modify facilities as required by progress of the Work. B. Provide each facility ready for use when needed to avoid delay. Do not remove until facilities are no longer needed or are replaced by authorized use of completed permanent facilities. 3.2 TEMPORARY UTILITY INSTALLATION A. General: Install temporary service or connect to existing service. 1 . Arrange with utility company, Owner, and existing users for time when service can be interrupted, if necessary, to make connections for temporary services. B. Sewers and Drainage: Provide temporary utilities to remove effluent lawfully. 1 . Connect temporary sewers to municipal system as directed by authorities having jurisdiction. C. Water Service: Install water service and distribution piping in sizes and pressures adequate for construction. 015000 TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS Page 4 of 12 Project No. 01091 Proposed Renovations March 6, 2009 Park House Smith College, Northampton, MA PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Portable Chain-Link Fencing: Minimum 2-inch (50-mm), 9-gage, galvanized steel, chain-link fabric fencing; minimum 6 feet (1 .8 m) high with galvanized steel pipe posts; minimum 2-3/8-inch- (60-mm-) OD line posts and 2-7/8- inch- (73-mm-) OD corner and pull posts, with 1 -5/8-inch- (42-mm-) OD top and bottom rails. Provide concrete or galvanized steel bases for supporting posts. B. Lumber and Plywood: Comply with requirements in Division 06 Section "Rough Carpentry." C. Gypsum Board: Minimum 1 /2 inch (12.7 mm) thick by 48 inches (1219 mm) wide by maximum available lengths; regular-type panels with tapered edges. Comply with ASTM C 36/C 36M. D. Insulation: Unfaced mineral-fiber blanket, manufactured from glass, slag wool, or rock wool; with maximum flame-spread and smoke-developed indexes of 25 and 50, respectively. E. Paint: Comply with requirements in Division 09 painting Sections. 2.2 TEMPORARY FACILITIES A. Common-Use Field Office: Locate and assign space within the existing building of sufficient size to accommodate needs of construction personnel. Keep office clean and orderly. Furnish and equip offices as follows: 1 . Furniture required for Project-site documents including file cabinets, plan tables, plan racks, and bookcases. 2. Drinking water. 3. Lighting fixtures capable of maintaining average illumination of 20 fc (21 5 Ix) at desk height. 4. Telephone and FAX machine. a. Owner will provide telephone and data line for contractor's use. 015000 TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS Page 3 of 1 ;2 Project No. 0 109 1 Proposed Renovations March 6, 2009 Park House Smith College, Northampton, MA 1 .4 USE CHARGES ' A. General: Cost or use charges for temporary facilities shall be included in the Contract Sum. Allow other entities to use temporary services and facilities without cost, including, but not limited to, Owner's construction forces, Architect, occupants of Project, testing agencies, and authorities having jurisdiction. B. Water Service: Water from Owner's existing water system is available for use without metering and without payment of use charges. Provide connections and extensions of services as required for construction operations. C. Electric Power Service: Electric power from Owner's existing system is available for use without metering and without payment of use charges. Provide connections and extensions of services as required for construction operations. 1 .5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Electric Service: Comply with NECA, NEMA, and UL standards and regulations for temporary electric service. Install service to comply with NFPA 70. B. Tests and Inspections: Arrange for authorities having jurisdiction to test and inspect each temporary utility before use. Obtain required certifications and permits. 1 .6 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Temporary Use of Permanent Facilities: Installer of each permanent service shall assume responsibility for operation, maintenance, and protection of each permanent service during its use as a construction facility before Owner's acceptance, regardless of previously assigned responsibilities. 015000 TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS Page 2 of 12 Project No. 01091 Proposed Renovations March 6, 2009 Park House Smith College, Northampton, MA SECTION 015000 - TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS PART 1 - GENERAL 1 .1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1 .2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes requirements for temporary utilities, support facilities, and security and protection facilities. B. Related Sections include the following: 1 . Division 01 Section "Summary" for limitations on utility interruptions and other work restrictions. 2. Division 01 Section "Submittal Procedures" for procedures for submitting copies of implementation and termination schedule and utility reports. 3. Division 01 Section "Execution" for progress cleaning requirements. 4. Divisions 02 through 49 Sections for temporary heat, ventilation, and humidity requirements for products in those Sections. 1 .3 DEFINITIONS A. Permanent Enclosure: As determined by Architect, permanent or temporary roofing is complete, insulated, and weathertight; exterior walls are insulated and weathertight; and all openings are closed with permanent construction or substantial temporary closures. 015000 TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS Page 1 of 12 Project No. 01091 Proposed Renovations March 6, 2009 Park House Smith College, Northampton, MA 1 . Schedule times for tests, inspections, obtaining samples, and similar activities. PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 TEST AND INSPECTION LOG A. Prepare a record of tests and inspections. Include the following: 1 . Date test or inspection was conducted. 2. Description of the Work tested or inspected. 3. Date test or inspection results were transmitted to Architect. 4. Identification of testing agency or special inspector conducting test or inspection. B. Maintain log at Project site. Post changes and modifications as they occur. Provide access to test and inspection log for Architect's reference during normal working hours. END OF SECTION 01 4000 014000 QUALITY REQUIREMENTS Page 7 of 7 Project No. 01091 Proposed Renovations March 6, 2009 Park House Smith College, Northampton, MA 5. Submit additional copies of each written report directly to authorities having jurisdiction, when they so direct. C. Retesting/Reinspecting: Regardless of whether original tests or inspections were Contractor's responsibility, provide quality-control services, including retesting and reinspecting, for construction that replaced Work that failed to comply with the Contract Documents. D. Testing Agency Responsibilities: Cooperate with Architect and Contractor in performance of duties. Provide qualified personnel to perform required tests and inspections. 1 . Notify Architect and Contractor promptly of irregularities or deficiencies observed in the Work during performance of its services. 2. Determine the location from which test samples will be taken and in which in-situ tests are conducted. 3. Conduct and interpret tests and inspections and state in each report whether tested and inspected work complies with or deviates from requirements. 4. Submit a certified written report, in duplicate, of each test, inspection, '" and similar quality-control service through Contractor. 5. Do not release, revoke, alter, or increase the Contract Document requirements or approve or accept any portion of the Work. 6. Do not perform any duties of Contractor. E. Associated Services: Cooperate with agencies performing required tests, inspections, and similar quality-control services, and provide reasonable auxiliary services as requested. Notify agency sufficiently in advance of operations to permit assignment of personnel. Provide the following: 1 . Access to the Work. 2. Incidental labor and facilities necessary to facilitate tests and inspections. F. Coordination: Coordinate sequence of activities to accommodate required quality-assurance and -control services with a minimum of delay and to avoid necessity of removing and replacing construction to accommodate testing and inspecting. 014000 QUALITY REQUIREMENTS Page 6 of 7 Project No. 01091 Proposed Renovations March 6, 2009 Park House Smith College, Northampton, MA 1 . NRTL: A nationally recognized testing laboratory according to 29 CFR 1910.7. 2. NVLAP: A testing agency accredited according to NIST's National Voluntary Laboratory Accreditation Program. 1 .7 QUALITY CONTROL A. Owner Responsibilities: Where quality-control services are indicated as Owner's responsibility, Owner will engage a qualified testing agency to perform these services. 1 . Owner will furnish Contractor with names, addresses, and telephone numbers of testing agencies engaged and a description of types of testing and inspecting they are engaged to perform. 2. Costs for retesting and reinspecting construction that replaces or is necessitated by work that failed to comply with the Contract Documents will be charged to Contractor, and the Contract Sum will be adjusted by Change Order. B. Tests and inspections not explicitly assigned to Owner are Contractor's responsibility. Unless otherwise indicated, provide quality-control services specified and those required by authorities having jurisdiction. Perform quality-control services required of Contractor by authorities having jurisdiction, whether specified or not. 1 . Where services are indicated as Contractor's responsibility, engage a qualified testing agency to perform these quality-control services. a. Contractor shall not employ same entity engaged by Owner, unless agreed to in writing by Owner. 2. Notify testing agencies at least 24 hours in advance of time when Work that requires testing or inspecting will be performed. 3. Where quality-control services are indicated as Contractor's responsibility, submit a certified written report, in duplicate, of each quality-control service. 4. Testing and inspecting requested by Contractor and not required by the Contract Documents are Contractor's responsibility. 014000 QUALITY REQUIREMENTS Page 5 of 7 Project No. 01091 Proposed Renovations March 6, 2009 Park House Smith College, Northampton, MA D. Permits, Licenses, and Certificates: For Owner's records, submit copies of low permits, licenses, certifications, inspection reports, releases, jurisdictional settlements, notices, receipts for fee payments, judgments, correspondence, records, and similar documents, established for compliance with standards and regulations bearing on performance of the Work. 1 .6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. General: Qualifications paragraphs in this Article establish the minimum qualification levels required; individual Specification Sections specify additional requirements. B. Installer Qualifications: A firm or individual experienced in installing, erecting, or assembling work similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project, whose work has resulted in construction with a record of successful in-service performance. C. Manufacturer Qualifications: A firm experienced in manufacturing products or systems similar to those indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in-service performance, as well as sufficient production capacity to produce required units. D. Fabricator Qualifications: A firm experienced in producing products similar to those indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in-service performance, as well as sufficient production capacity to produce required units. E. Professional Engineer Qualifications: A professional engineer who is legally qualified to practice in jurisdiction where Project is located and who is experienced in providing engineering services of the kind indicated. Engineering services are defined as those performed for installations of the system, assembly, or product that are similar to those indicated for this Project in material, design, and extent. F. Testing Agency Qualifications: An NRTL, an NVLAP, or an independent agency with the experience and capability to conduct testing and inspecting indicated, as documented according to ASTM E 548; and with additional qualifications specified in individual Sections; and where required by authorities having jurisdiction, that is acceptable to authorities. 014000 QUALITY REQUIREMENTS Page 4 of 7 Project No. 01091 Proposed Renovations March 6, 2009 Park House Smith College, Northampton, MA installation may comply exactly with the minimum quantity or quality specified, or it may exceed the minimum within reasonable limits. To comply with these requirements, indicated numeric values are minimum or maximum, as appropriate, for the context of requirements. Refer uncertainties to Architect for a decision before proceeding. 1 .5 SUBMITTALS A. Qualification Data: For testing agencies specified in "Quality Assurance" Article to demonstrate their capabilities and experience. Include proof of qualifications in the form of a recent report on the inspection of the testing agency by a recognized authority. B. Schedule of Tests and Inspections: Prepare in tabular form and include the following: 1 . Specification Section number and title. 2. Description of test and inspection. 3. Time schedule or time span for tests and inspections. 4. Entity responsible for performing tests and inspections. C. Reports: Prepare and submit certified written reports that include the following: 1 . Date of issue. 2. Project title and number. 3. Name, address, and telephone number of testing agency. 4. Dates and locations of samples and tests or inspections. 5. Names of individuals making tests and inspections. 6. Description of the Work and test and inspection method. 7. Identification of product and Specification Section. 8. Complete test or inspection data. 9. Test and inspection results and an interpretation of test results. 10. Comments or professional opinion on whether tested or inspected Work complies with the Contract Document requirements. 11 . Name and signature of laboratory inspector. 12. Recommendations on retesting and reinspecting. 014000 QUALITY REQUIREMENTS Page 3 of 7 Project No. 01091 Proposed Renovations March 6, 2009 Park House Smith College, Northampton, MA 1 .3 DEFINITIONS A. Quality-Assurance Services: Activities, actions, and procedures performed before and during execution of the Work to guard against defects and deficiencies and substantiate that proposed construction will comply with requirements. B. Quality-Control Services: Tests, inspections, procedures, and related actions during and after execution of the Work to evaluate that actual products incorporated into the Work and completed construction comply with requirements. Services do not include contract enforcement activities performed by Architect. C. Field Quality-Control Testing: Tests and inspections that are performed on- site for installation of the Work and for completed Work. D. Testing Agency: An entity engaged to perform specific tests, inspections, or both. Testing laboratory shall mean the same as testing agency. E. Installer/Applicator/Erector: Contractor or another entity engaged by ,ftk Contractor as an employee, Subcontractor, or Sub-subcontractor, to perform a particular construction operation, including installation, erection, application, and similar operations. F. Experienced: When used with an entity, "experienced" means having successfully completed a minimum of five previous projects similar in size and scope to this Project; being familiar with special requirements indicated; and having complied with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. 1 .4 CONFLICTING REQUIREMENTS A. General: If compliance with two or more standards is specified and the standards establish different or conflicting requirements for minimum quantities or quality levels, comply with the most stringent requirement. Refer uncertainties and requirements that are different, but apparently equal, to Architect for a decision before proceeding. B. Minimum Quantity or Quality Levels: The quantity or quality level shown or specified shall be the minimum provided or performed. The actual 01 4000 QUALITY REQUIREMENTS Page 2 of 7 Project No. 01091 Proposed Renovations March 6, 2009 Park House Smith College, Northampton, MA SECTION 014000 - QUALITY REQUIREMENTS PART 1 - GENERAL 1 .1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1 .2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for quality assurance and quality control. B. Testing and inspecting services are required to verify compliance with requirements specified or indicated. These services do not relieve Contractor of responsibility for compliance with the Contract Document requirements. 1 . Specific quality-assurance and -control requirements for individual construction activities are specified in the Sections that specify those activities. Requirements in those Sections may also cover production of standard products. 2. Specified tests, inspections, and related actions do not limit Contractor's other quality-assurance and -control procedures that facilitate compliance with the Contract Document requirements. 3. Requirements for Contractor to provide quality-assurance and -control services required by Architect, Owner, or authorities having jurisdiction are not limited by provisions of this Section. C. Related Sections include the following: 1 . Division 01 Section "Construction Progress Documentation" for developing a schedule of required tests and inspections. 2. Division 01 Section "Cutting and Patching" for repair and restoration of construction disturbed by testing and inspecting activities. 3. Divisions 02 through 49 Sections for specific test and inspection requirements. 014000 QUALITY REQUIREMENTS Page 1 of 7 Project No. 01091 Proposed Renovations March 6, 2009 Park House Smith College, Northampton, MA E. Submittals not required by the Contract Documents may not be reviewed and AO%�, may be discarded. END OF SECTION 013300 013300 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES Page 14 of 14 Project No. 01091 Proposed Renovations March 6, 2009 Park House Smith College, Northampton, MA 000W. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 CONTRACTOR'S REVIEW A. Review each submittal and check for coordination with other Work of the Contract and for compliance with the Contract Documents. Note corrections and field dimensions. Mark with approval stamp before submitting to Architect. B. Approval Stamp: Stamp each submittal with a uniform, approval stamp. Include Project name and location, submittal number, Specification Section title and number, name of reviewer, date of Contractor's approval, and statement certifying that submittal has been reviewed, checked, and approved for compliance with the Contract Documents. 3.2 ARCHITECT'S ACTION A. General: Architect will not review submittals that do not bear Contractor's approval stamp and will return them without action. B. Action Submittals: Architect will review each submittal, make marks to indicate corrections or modifications required, and return it. Architect will stamp each submittal with an action stamp and will mark stamp appropriately to indicate action taken, as follows: 1 . Approved: No exceptions taken. 2. Approved as Noted: Make corrections noted. 3. Not Approved: Submission is insufficient, does not meet project requirements or unacceptable. 4. Revise and Resubmit: Resubmission required C. Informational Submittals: Architect will review each submittal and will not return it, or will return it if it does not comply with requirements. Architect will forward each submittal to appropriate party. D. Partial submittals are not acceptable, will be considered nonresponsive, and will be returned without review. 01 3300 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES Page 13 of 14 Project No. 01091 Proposed Renovations March 6, 2009 Park House Smith College, Northampton, MA M. Field Test Reports: Prepare reports written by a qualified testing agency, on testing agency's standard form, indicating and interpreting results of field tests performed either during installation of product or after product is installed in its final location, for compliance with requirements in the Contract Documents. N. Maintenance Data: Prepare written and graphic instructions and procedures for operation and normal maintenance of products and equipment. Comply with requirements specified in Division 01 Section "Operation and Maintenance Data." O. Design Data: Prepare written and graphic information, including, but not limited to, performance and design criteria, list of applicable codes and regulations, and calculations. Include list of assumptions and other performance and design criteria and a summary of loads. Include load diagrams if applicable. Provide name and version of software, if any, used for calculations. Include page numbers. P. Manufacturer's Instructions: Prepare written or published information that documents manufacturer's recommendations, guidelines, and procedures for installing or operating a product or equipment. Include name of product and name, address, and telephone number of manufacturer. Include the following, as applicable: 1 . Preparation of substrates. 2. Required substrate tolerances. 3. Sequence of installation or erection. 4. Required installation tolerances. 5. Required adjustments. 6. Recommendations for cleaning and protection. Q. Insurance Certificates and Bonds: Prepare written information indicating current status of insurance or bonding coverage. Include name of entity covered by insurance or bond, limits of coverage, amounts of deductibles, if any, and term of the coverage. 013300 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES Page 12 of 14 Project No. 01091 Proposed Renovations March 6, 2009 Park House Smith College, Northampton, MA projects with project names and addresses, names and addresses of architects and owners, and other information specified. E. Welding Certificates: Prepare written certification that welding procedures and personnel comply with requirements in the Contract Documents. Submit record of Welding Procedure Specification (WPS) and Procedure Qualification Record (PQR) on AWS forms. Include names of firms and personnel certified. F. Installer Certificates: Prepare written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying that Installer complies with requirements in the Contract Documents and, where required, is authorized by manufacturer for this specific Project. G. Manufacturer Certificates: Prepare written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying that manufacturer complies with requirements in the Contract Documents. Include evidence of manufacturing experience where required. H. Product Certificates: Prepare written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying that product complies with requirements in the Contract, Documents. I. Material Certificates: Prepare written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying that material complies with requirements in the Contract Documents. J. Material Test Reports: Prepare reports written by a qualified testing agency, on testing agency's standard form, indicating and interpreting test results of material for compliance with requirements in the Contract Documents. K. Product Test Reports: Prepare written reports indicating current product: produced by manufacturer complies with requirements in the Contract. Documents. Base reports on evaluation of tests performed by manufacturer and witnessed by a qualified testing agency, or on comprehensive tests performed by a qualified testing agency. L. Schedule of Tests and Inspections: Comply with requirements specified in Division 01 Section "Quality Requirements." 013300 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES Page 11 of 14 Project No. 01091 Proposed Renovations March 6, 2009 Park House Smith College, Northampton, MA J. Subcontract List: Prepare a written summary identifying individuals or firms proposed for each portion of the Work, including those who are to furnish products or equipment fabricated to a special design. Include the following information in tabular form: 1 . Name, address, and telephone number of entity performing subcontract or supplying products. 2. Number and title of related Specification Section(s) covered by subcontract. 3. Drawing number and detail references, as appropriate, covered by subcontract. 4. Number of Copies: Submit three copies of subcontractor list, unless otherwise indicated. Architect will return one copy. a. Mark up and retain one returned copy as a Project Record Document. 2.2 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS Atowk A. General: Prepare and submit Informational Submittals required by other Specification Sections. 1 . Number of Copies: Submit three copies of each submittal, unless otherwise indicated. Architect will not return copies. 2. Certificates and Certifications: Provide a notarized statement that includes signature of entity responsible for preparing certification. Certificates and certifications shall be signed by an officer or other individual authorized to sign documents on behalf of that entity. 3. Test and Inspection Reports: Comply with requirements specified in Division 01 Section "Quality Requirements." B. Coordination Drawings: Comply with requirements specified in Division 01 Section "Project Management and Coordination." C. Contractor's Construction Schedule: Comply with requirements specified in Division 01 Section "Construction Progress Documentation." D. Qualification Data: Prepare written information that demonstrates capabilities and experience of firm or person. Include lists of completed 013300 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES Page 10 of 14 Project No. 01091 Proposed Renovations March 6, 2009 Park House Smith College, Northampton, MA small cuts or containers of materials; complete units of repetitively used materials; swatches showing color, texture, and pattern; color range sets; and components used for independent testing and inspection. a. Number of Samples: Submit two sets of Samples. Architect will retain one Sample set; remainder will be returned. 1) Submit a single Sample where assembly details, workmanship, fabrication techniques, connections, operation, and other similar characteristics are to be demonstrated. 2) If variation in color, pattern, texture, or other characteristic is inherent in material or product represented by a Sample, submit at least three sets of paired units that show approximate limits of variations. E. Product Schedule or List: As required in individual Specification Sections, prepare a written summary indicating types of products required for the Work and their intended location. Include the following information in tabular form: 1 . Type of product. Include unique identifier for each product. 2. Number and name of room or space. 3. Location within room or space. 4. Number of Copies: Submit three copies of product schedule or list, unless otherwise indicated. Architect will return two copies. a. Retain one returned copy as a Project Record Document. F. Contractor's Construction Schedule: Comply with requirements specified in Division 01 Section "Construction Progress Documentation" for Construction Manager's action. G. Submittals Schedule: Comply with requirements specified in Division 01 Section "Construction Progress Documentation." H. Application for Payment: Comply with requirements specified in Division 01 Section "Payment Procedures." I. Schedule of Values: Comply with requirements specified in Division 01 Section "Payment Procedures." 013300 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES Page 9 of 14 Project No. 01091 Proposed Renovations March 6, 2009 Park House Smith College, Northampton, MA these characteristics between submittal and actual component as delivered ' and installed. 1 . Transmit Samples that contain multiple, related components such as accessories together in one submittal package. 2. Identification: Attach label on unexposed side of Samples that includes the following: a. Generic description of Sample. b. Product name and name of manufacturer. C. Sample source. d. Number and title of appropriate Specification Section. 3. Disposition: Maintain sets of approved Samples at Project site, available for quality-control comparisons throughout the course of construction activity. Sample sets may be used to determine final acceptance of construction associated with each set. a. Samples that may be incorporated into the Work are indicated in individual Specification Sections. Such Samples must be in an undamaged condition at time of use. b. Samples not incorporated into the Work, or otherwise designated as Owner's property, are the property of Contractor. 4. Samples for Initial Selection: Submit manufacturer's color charts consisting of units or sections of units showing the full range of colors, textures, and patterns available. a. Number of Samples: Submit one full set(s) of available choices where color, pattern, texture, or similar characteristics are required to be selected from manufacturer's product line. Architect will return submittal with options selected. 5. Samples for Verification: Submit full-size units or Samples of size indicated, prepared from same material to be used for the Work, cured and finished in manner specified, and physically identical with material or product proposed for use, and that show full range of color and texture variations expected. Samples include, but are not limited to, the following: partial sections of manufactured or fabricated components; , 013300 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES Page 8 of 14 Project No. 01 091 Proposed Renovations March 6, 2009 Park House Smith College, Northampton, MA 000W C. Shop Drawings: Prepare Project-specific information, drawn accurately to scale. Do not base Shop Drawings on reproductions of the Contract Documents or standard printed data, unless submittal of Architect's CAD Drawings are otherwise permitted. 1 . Preparation: Fully illustrate requirements in the Contract Documents. Include the following information, as applicable: a. Dimensions. b. Identification of products. C. Fabrication and installation drawings. d. Roughing-in and setting diagrams. e. Wiring diagrams showing field-installed wiring, including power, signal, and control wiring. f. Shopwork manufacturing instructions. g. Templates and patterns. h. Schedules. i. Design calculations. j. Compliance with specified standards. k. Notation of coordination requirements. I. Notation of dimensions established by field measurement. m. Relationship to adjoining construction clearly indicated. n. Seal and signature of professional engineer if specified. o. Wiring Diagrams: Differentiate between manufacturer-installed and field-installed wiring. 2. Sheet Size: Except for templates, patterns, and similar full-size drawings, submit Shop Drawings on sheets at least 8-1 /2 by 11 inches but no larger than 24 by 36 inches. 3. Number of Copies: Submit 4 opaque copies of each submittal, unless copies are required for concurrent review or operation and maintenance manuals. Submit 5 copies where copies are required for concurrent review or operation and maintenance manuals. Submit 6 copies where copies are required for concurrent review and operation and maintenance manuals. Architect will retain one copy; remainder will be returned. Retain one returned copy as a Project Record Drawing. D. Samples: Submit Samples for review of kind, color, pattern, and texture for a check of these characteristics with other elements and for a comparison of 013300 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES Page 7 of 1 .4 Project No. 01091 Proposed Renovations March 6, 2009 Park House Smith College, Northampton, MA PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. General: Prepare and submit Action Submittals required by individual Specification Sections. B. Product Data: Collect information into a single submittal for each element of construction and type of product or equipment. 1 . If information must be specially prepared for submittal because standard printed data are not suitable for use, submit as Shop Drawings, not as Product Data. 2. Mark each copy of each submittal to show which products and options are applicable. 3. Include the following information, as applicable: look a. Manufacturer's written recommendations. b. Manufacturer's product specifications. C. Manufacturer's installation instructions. d. Standard color charts. e. Manufacturer's catalog cuts. f. Wiring diagrams showing factory-installed wiring. g. Printed performance curves. h. Operational range diagrams. i. Mill reports. j. Standard product operation and maintenance manuals. k. Compliance with specified referenced standards. I. Testing by recognized testing agency. m. Application of testing agency labels and seals. n. Notation of coordination requirements. 4. Submit Product Data before or concurrent with Samples. 5. Number of Copies: Submit 4 copies of Product Data, unless otherwise indicated. Architect will return two copies. Retain one returned copy as a Project Record Document. " 013300 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES Page 6 of 14 Project No. 01091 Proposed Renovations March 6, 2009 Park House Smith College, Northampton, MA 2. On an attached separate sheet, prepared on Contractor's letterhead, record relevant information, requests for data, revisions other than those requested by Architect on previous submittals, and deviations from requirements in the Contract Documents, including minor variations and limitations. Include same label information as related submittal. I. Resubmittals: Make resubmittals in same form and number of copies as initial submittal. 1 . Note date and content of previous submittal. 2. Note date and content of revision in label or title block and clearly indicate extent of revision. 3. Resubmit submittals until they are marked "Approved " or "Approved as Noted" unless indicated to also "Revise and Resubmit." J. Distribution: Furnish copies of final submittals to manufacturers, subcontractors, suppliers, fabricators, installers, authorities having jurisdiction, and others as necessary for performance of construction activities. Show distribution on transmittal forms. K. Use for Construction: Use only final submittals with mark indicating " Approved " or "Approved as Noted " taken by Architect. 1 .5 CONTRACTOR'S USE OF ARCHITECT'S CAD FILES A. General: At Contractor's written request, copies of Architect's CAD files will be provided to Contractor for Contractor's use in connection with Project, subject to the following conditions: 1 . Format: Drawing will furnished in AutoCad 2004. 2. Contractor shall create layers identified with the prefix "CTR" for all modifications to files. 3. If drawing entities are modified from original file, revisions shall be clouded and noted. 4. Contractor shall not use the files for determining quantities or AOW dimensions related to any portion of the Work. 013300 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES Page 5 of 14 Project No. 01091 Proposed Renovations March 6, 2009 Park House Smith College, Northampton, MA i. Number and title of appropriate Specification Section. j. Drawing number and detail references, as appropriate. k. Location(s) where product is to be installed, as appropriate. I. Other necessary identification. F. Deviations: Highlight, encircle, or otherwise specifically identify deviations from the Contract Documents on submittals. C. Additional Copies: Unless additional copies are required for final submittal, and unless Architect observes noncompliance with provisions in the Contract Documents, initial submittal may serve as final submittal. 1 . Submit one copy of submittal to concurrent reviewer in addition to specified number of copies to Architect. 2. Additional copies submitted for maintenance manuals will not be marked with action taken and will be returned. H. Transmittal: Package each submittal individually and appropriately for transmittal and handling. Transmit each submittal using a transmittal form. Architect will return submittals, without review, received from sources other than Contractor. 1 . Transmittal Form: Provide locations on form for the following information: a. Project name. b. Date. C. Destination (To:). d. Source (From:). e. Names of subcontractor, manufacturer, and supplier. f. Category and type of submittal. g. Submittal purpose and description. h. Specification Section number and title. i. Drawing number and detail references, as appropriate. j. Transmittal number, numbered consecutively. k. Submittal and transmittal distribution record. I. Remarks. m. Signature of transmitter. 013300 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES Page 4 of 14 Project No. 01091 Proposed Renovations March 6, 2009 Park House Smith College, Northampton, MA Architect will advise Contractor when a submittal being processed must be delayed for coordination. 2. Intermediate Review: If intermediate submittal is necessary, process it in same manner as initial submittal. 3. Resubmittal Review: Allow 7 days for review of each resubmittal. 4. Concurrent Consultant Review: Where the Contract Documents indicate that submittals may be transmitted simultaneously to Architect and to Architect's consultants, allow 15 days for review of each submittal. Submittal will be returned to Architect before being returned to Contractor. a. xxxxxxxx E. Identification: Place a permanent label or title block on each submittal for identification. 1 . Indicate name of firm or entity that prepared each submittal on label or title block. 2. Provide a space approximately 3 by 4 inches on label or beside title block to record Contractor's review and approval markings and action taken by Architect. 3. Include the following information on label for processing and recording action taken: a. Project name. b. Date. C. Name and address of Architect. d. Name and address of Contractor. e. Name and address of subcontractor. f. Name and address of supplier. g. Name of manufacturer. h. Submittal number or other unique identifier, including revision identifier. 1) Submittal number shall use Specification Section number followed by a decimal point and then a sequential number (e.g., 06100.01). Resubmittals shall include an alphabetic 100"k suffix after another decimal point (e.g., 06100.01 .A). 013300 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES Page 3 of 14 Project No. 01091 Proposed Renovations March 6, 2009 Park House Smith College, Northampton, MA 1 .3 DEFINITIONS AMk A. Action Submittals: Written and graphic information that requires Architect's responsive action. B. Informational Submittals: Written information that does not require Architect's responsive action. Submittals may be rejected for not complying with requirements. 1 .4 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES A. General: Electronic copies of CAD Drawings of the Contract Drawings will be provided by Architect for Contractor's use in preparing submittals. B. Coordination: Coordinate preparation and processing of submittals with performance of construction activities. 1 . Coordinate each submittal with fabrication, purchasing, testing, delivery, other submittals, and related activities that require sequential activity. ►. 2. Coordinate transmittal of different types of submittals for related parts of the Work so processing will not be delayed because of need to review submittals concurrently for coordination. a. Architect reserves the right to withhold action on a submittal requiring coordination with other submittals until related submittals are received. C. Submittals Schedule: Comply with requirements in Division 01 Section "Construction Progress Documentation" for list of submittals and time requirements for scheduled performance of related construction activities. D. Processing Time: Allow enough time for submittal review, including time for resubmittals, as follows. Time for review shall commence on Architect's receipt of submittal. No extension of the Contract Time will be authorized because of failure to transmit submittals enough in advance of the Work to permit processing, including resubmittals. 1 . Initial Review: Allow 15 days for initial review of each submittal. Allow additional time if coordination with subsequent submittals is required. 013300 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES Page 2 of 14 Project No. 01091 Proposed Renovations March 6, 2009 Park House Smith College, Northampton, MA SECTION 013300 - SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES PART 1 - GENERAL 1 .1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1 .2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for submitting Shop Drawings, Product Data, Samples, and other submittals. B. Related Sections include the following: 1 . Division 01 Section "Payment Procedures" for submitting Applications for Payment and the Schedule of Values. 2. Division 01 Section "Project Management and Coordination" for submitting and distributing meeting and conference minutes and for submitting Coordination Drawings. 3. Division 01 Section "Construction Progress Documentation" for submitting schedules and reports, including Contractor's Construction Schedule and the Submittals Schedule. 4. Division 01 Section "Quality Requirements" for submitting test and inspection reports and for mockup requirements. 5. Division 01 Section "Closeout Procedures" for submitting warranties. 6. Division 01 Section "Project Record Documents" for submitting Record Drawings, Record Specifications, and Record Product Data. 7. Division 01 Section "Operation and Maintenance Data" for submitting operation and maintenance manuals. 8. Division 01 Section "Demonstration and Training" for submitting videotapes of demonstration of equipment and training of Owner's personnel. 9. Divisions 02 through 49 Sections for specific requirements for submittals in those Sections. 013300 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES Page 1 of 14 Project No. 01091 Proposed Renovations March 6, 2009 Park House Smith College, Northampton, MA 4. Changes in activity durations in workdays. 5. Changes in the critical path. 6. Changes in total float or slack time. 7. Changes in the Contract Time. 2.5 REPORTS A. Field Condition Reports: Immediately on discovery of a difference between field conditions and the Contract Documents, prepare and submit a detailed report. Submit with a request for interpretation. Include a detailed description of the differing conditions, together with recommendations for changing the Contract Documents. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 CONTRACTOR'S CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE A. Contractor's Construction Schedule Updating: At monthly intervals, update schedule to reflect actual construction progress and activities. 1 . Include a report with updated schedule that indicates every change, including, but not limited to, changes in logic, durations, actual starts and finishes, and activity durations. 2. As the Work progresses, indicate Actual Completion percentage for each activity. B. Distribution: Distribute copies of approved schedule to Architect Owner, separate contractors, testing and inspecting agencies, and other parties identified by Contractor with a need-to-know schedule responsibility. 1 . Post copies in temporary field offices. 2. When revisions are made, distribute updated schedules to the same parties and post in the same locations. Delete parties from distribution when they have completed their assigned portion of the Work and are no longer involved in performance of construction activities. END OF SECTION 013200 013200 CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION Page 10 of 10 Project No. 01091 Proposed Renovations March 6, 2009 Park House Smith College, Northampton, MA f. Utility interruptions. g. Installation. h. Work by Owner that may affect or be affected by Contractor's activities. i. Testing and commissioning. 2. Critical Path Activities: Identify critical path activities, including those for interim completion dates. Scheduled start and completion dates shall be consistent with Contract milestone dates. 3. Processing: Process data to produce output data on a computer-drawn, time-scaled network. Revise data, reorganize activity sequences, and reproduce as often as necessary to produce the CPM schedule within the limitations of the Contract Time. 4. Format: Mark the critical path. Locate the critical path near center of network; locate paths with most float near the edges. a. Subnetworks on separate sheets are permissible for activities clearly off the critical path. E. Initial Issue of Schedule: Prepare initial network diagram from a list of straight "early start-total float" sort. Identify critical activities. Prepare tabulated reports showing the following: 1 . Contractor or subcontractor and the Work or activity. 2. Description of activity. 3. Principal events of activity. 4. Immediate preceding and succeeding activities. 5. Early and late start dates. 6. Early and late finish dates. 7. Activity duration in workdays. 8. Total float or slack time. 9. Average size of workforce. F. Schedule Updating: Concurrent with making revisions to schedule, prepare tabulated reports showing the following: 1 . Identification of activities that have changed. 2. Changes in early and late start dates. ' 3. Changes in early and late finish dates. 01 3200 CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION Page 9 of 10 Project No. 0 109 1 Proposed Renovations March 6, 2009 Park House Smith College, Northampton, MA 2.4 CONTRACTOR'S CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE (CPM SCHEDULE) A. General: Prepare network diagrams using AON (activity-on-node) format. B. Preliminary Network Diagram: Submit diagram within 14 days of date established for the Notice to Proceed. Outline significant construction activities for the duration of construction. Include skeleton diagram for the remainder of the Work and a cash requirement prediction based on indicated activities. C. CPM Schedule: Prepare Contractor's Construction Schedule using a computerized, time-scaled CPM network analysis diagram for the Work. 1 . Develop network diagram in sufficient time to submit CPM schedule so it can be accepted for use no later than 15 days after date established for commencement of the Work. a. Failure to include any work item required for performance of this Contract shall not excuse Contractor from completing all work within applicable completion dates, regardless of Architect's approval of the schedule. 2. Establish procedures for monitoring and updating CPM schedule and for reporting progress. Coordinate procedures with progress meeting and payment request dates. 3. Use "one workday" as the unit of time. Include list of nonworking days and holidays incorporated into the schedule. D. CPM Schedule Preparation: Prepare a list of all activities required to complete the Work. Using the preliminary network diagram, prepare a skeleton network to identify probable critical paths. 1 . Activities: Indicate the estimated time duration, sequence requirements, and relationship of each activity in relation to other activities. Include estimated time frames for the following activities: a. Preparation and processing of submittals. b. Mobilization and demobilization. C. Purchase of materials. d. Delivery. e. Fabrication. 013200 CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION Page 8 of 10 Project No. 01091 Proposed Renovations March 6, 2009 Park House Smith College, Northampton, MA E. Milestones: Include milestones indicated in the Contract Documents in schedule, including, but not limited to, the Notice to Proceed, Substantial Completion, and Final Completion. F. Cost Correlation: At the head of schedule, provide a cost correlation line, indicating planned and actual costs. On the line, show dollar volume of the Work performed as of dates used for preparation of payment requests. 1 . Refer to Division 01 Section "Payment Procedures" for cost reporting and payment procedures. 2. Contractor shall assign cost to construction activities on the CPM schedule. Costs shall not be assigned to submittal activities unless specified otherwise but may, with Architect's approval, be assigned to fabrication and delivery activities. Costs shall be under required principal subcontracts for testing and commissioning activities, operation and maintenance manuals, punch list activities, Project Record Documents, and demonstration and training (if applicable), in the amount of 5 percent of the Contract Sum. 3. Each activity cost shall reflect an accurate value subject to approval by Architect. 4. Total cost assigned to activities shall equal the total Contract Sum. G. Contract Modifications: For each proposed contract modification and concurrent with its submission, prepare a time-impact analysis using fragnets to demonstrate the effect of the proposed change on the overall project schedule. 2.3 PRELIMINARY CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE A. Bar-Chart Schedule: Submit preliminary horizontal bar-chart-type construction schedule within seven days of date established for the Notice to Proceed. B. Preparation: Indicate each significant construction activity separately. Identify first workday of each week with a continuous vertical line. Outline significant construction activities for first 30 days of construction. Include skeleton diagram for the remainder of the Work and a cash requirement, low prediction based on indicated activities. 013200 CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION Page 7 of 10 Project No. 01091 Proposed Renovations March 6, 2009 Park House Smith College, Northampton, MA 5. Substantial Completion: Indicate completion in advance of date ' established for Substantial Completion, and allow time for Architect's administrative procedures necessary for certification of Substantial Completion. D. Constraints: Include constraints and work restrictions indicated in the Contract Documents and as follows in schedule, and show how the sequence of the Work is affected. 1 . Products Ordered in Advance: Include a separate activity for each product. Include delivery date indicated in Division 01 Section "Summary." Delivery dates indicated stipulate the earliest possible delivery date. 2. Owner-Furnished Products: Include a separate activity for each product. Include delivery date indicated in Division 01 Section "Summary." Delivery dates indicated stipulate the earliest possible delivery date. 3. Work Restrictions: Show the effect of the following items on the schedule: a. Coordination with existing construction. ANON b. Uninterruptible services. C. Use of premises restrictions. d. Environmental control. 4. Work Stages: Indicate important stages of construction for each major portion of the Work, including, but not limited to, the following: a. Subcontract awards. b. Submittals. C. Purchases. d. Mockups. e. Fabrication. f. Sample testing. g. Deliveries. h. Installation. i. Tests and inspections. j. Adjusting. k. Curing. I. Startup and placement into final use and operation. . 013200 CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION Page 6 of 10 Project No. 01 091 Proposed Renovations March 6, 2009 Park House Smith College, Northampton, MA Work and those required early because of long lead time for manufacture or fabrication. a. At Contractor's option, show submittals on the Preliminary Construction Schedule, instead of tabulating them separately. 3. Final Submittal: Submit concurrently with the first complete submittal of Contractor's Construction Schedule. 2.2 CONTRACTOR'S CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE, GENERAL A. Procedures: Comply with procedures contained in ACC's "Construction Planning & Scheduling." B. Time Frame: Extend schedule from date established for commencement of the Work to date of Substantial Completion. 1 . Contract completion date shall not be changed by submission of a schedule that shows an early completion date, unless specifically authorized by Change Order. C. Activities: Treat each story or separate area as a separate numbered activity for each principal element of the Work. Comply with the following: 1 . Activity Duration: Define activities so no activity is longer than 20 days, unless specifically allowed by Architect. 2. Procurement Activities: Include procurement process activities for the following long lead items and major items, requiring a cycle of more than 30 days, as separate activities in schedule. Procurement cycle activities include, but are not limited to, submittals, approvals, purchasing, fabrication, and delivery. 3. Submittal Review Time: Include review and resubmittal times indicated in Division 01 Section "Submittal Procedures" in schedule. Coordinate submittal review times in Contractor's Construction Schedule with Submittals Schedule. 4. Startup and Testing Time: Include not less than seven days for startup and testing. 013200 CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION Page 5 of 10 Project No. 01091 Proposed Renovations March 6, 2009 Park House Smith College, Northampton, MA 5. Review requirements for tests and inspections by independent testing and inspecting agencies. 6. Review time required for completion and startup procedures. 7. Review and finalize list of construction activities to be included in schedule. 8. Review submittal requirements and procedures. 9. Review procedures for updating schedule. 1 .6 COORDINATION A. Coordinate preparation and processing of schedules and reports with performance of construction activities and with scheduling and reporting of separate contractors. B. Coordinate Contractor's Construction Schedule with the Schedule of Values, list of subcontracts, Submittals Schedule, progress reports, payment requests, and other required schedules and reports. 1 . Secure time commitments for performing critical elements of the Work from parties involved. 2. Coordinate each construction activity in the network with other activities and schedule them in proper sequence. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 SUBMITTALS SCHEDULE A. Preparation: Submit a schedule of submittals, arranged in chronological order by dates required by construction schedule. Include time required for review, resubmittal, ordering, manufacturing, fabrication, and delivery when establishing dates. 1 . Coordinate Submittals Schedule with list of subcontracts, the Schedule of Values, and Contractor's Construction Schedule. 2. Initial Submittal: Submit concurrently with preliminary network diagram. Include submittals required during the first 60 days of construction. List those required to maintain orderly progress of the 013200 CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION Page 4 of 10 Project No. 01091 Proposed Renovations March 6, 2009 Park House Smith College, Northampton, MA ' 1 .4 SUBMITTALS A. Qualification Data: For scheduling consultant. B. Submittals Schedule: Submit two copies of schedule. Arrange the following information in a tabular format: 1 . Scheduled date for first submittal. 2. Specification Section number and title. 3. Submittal category (action or informational). 4. Name of subcontractor. 5. Description of the Work covered. 6. Scheduled date for Architect's final release or approval. C. Preliminary Construction Schedule: Submit two opaque copies. 1 . Approval of cost-loaded preliminary construction schedule will not constitute approval of Schedule of Values for cost-loaded activities. D. Contractor's Construction Schedule: Submit two opaque copies of initial schedule, large enough to show entire schedule for entire construction period. E. Field Condition Reports: Submit two copies at time of discovery of differing conditions. 1 .5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Prescheduling Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements in Division 01 Section "Project Management and Coordination." Review methods and procedures related to the Preliminary Construction Schedule and Contractor's Construction Schedule, including, but not limited to, the following: 1 . Verify availability of qualified personnel needed to develop and update schedule. 2. Discuss constraints, including work stages, area separations, interim milestones and partial Owner occupancy. 3. Review delivery dates for Owner-furnished products. Aw*. 4. Review time required for review of submittals and resubmittals. 013200 CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION Page 3 of 10 Project No. 01091 Proposed Renovations March 6, 2009 Park House Smith College, Northampton, MA 1 . Critical activities are activities on the critical path. They must start and finish on the planned early start and finish times. 2. Predecessor Activity: An activity that precedes another activity in the network. 3. Successor Activity: An activity that follows another activity in the network. B. CPM: Critical path method, which is a method of planning and scheduling a construction project where activities are arranged based on activity relationships. Network calculations determine when activities can be performed and the critical path of Project. C. Critical Path: The longest connected chain of interdependent activities through the network schedule that establishes the minimum overall Project duration and contains no float. D. Event: The starting or ending point of an activity. E. Float: The measure of leeway in starting and completing an activity. 1 . Free float is the amount of time an activity can be delayed without " adversely affecting the early start of the successor activity. 2. Total float is the measure of leeway in starting or completing an activity without adversely affecting the planned Project completion date. F. Fragnet: A partial or fragmentary network that breaks down activities into smaller activities for greater detail. G. Major Area: A story of construction, a separate building, or a similar significant construction element. H. Milestone: A key or critical point in time for reference or measurement. I. Network Diagram: A graphic diagram of a network schedule, showing activities and activity relationships. J. Resource Loading: The allocation of manpower and equipment necessary for the completion of an activity as scheduled. 013200 CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION Page 2 of 10 Project No. 01091 Proposed Renovations March 6, 2009 Park House Smith College, Northampton, MA SECTION 013200 - CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION PART 1 - GENERAL 1 .1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1 .2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for documenting the progress of construction during performance of the Work, including the following: 1 . Preliminary Construction Schedule. 2. Contractor's Construction Schedule. 3. Submittals Schedule. 4. Field condition reports. B. Related Sections include the following: 1 . Division 01 Section "Payment Procedures" for submitting the Schedule of Values. 2. Division 01 Section "Project Management and Coordination" for submitting and distributing meeting and conference minutes. 3. Division 01 Section "Submittal Procedures" for submitting schedules and reports. 4. Division 01 Section "Quality Requirements" for submitting a schedule of tests and inspections. 1 .3 DEFINITIONS A. Activity: A discrete part of a project that can be identified for planning, scheduling, monitoring, and controlling the construction project. Activities included in a construction schedule consume time and resources. 013200 CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION Page 1 of 10 Project No. 01091 Proposed Renovations March 6, 2009 Park House Smith College, Northampton, MA PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used) END OF SECTION 013100 013100 PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION Page 10 of 10 Project No. 01091 Proposed Renovations March 6, 2009 Park House Smith College, Northampton, MA 1 . The following RFls will be returned without action: a. Requests for approval of submittals. b. Requests for approval of substitutions. C. Requests for coordination information already indicated in the Contract Documents. d. Requests for adjustments in the Contract Time or the Contract Sum. e. Requests for interpretation of Architect's actions on submittals. f. Incomplete RFls or RFIs with numerous errors. 2. Architect's action may include a request for additional information, in which case Architect's time for response will start again. 3. Architect's action on RFIs that may result in a change to the Contract Sum may be eligible for Contractor to submit Change Proposal according to Division 01 Section "Contract Modification Procedures." a. If Contractor believes the RFI response warrants change in the Contract Sum, notify Architect in writing within 10 days of receipt low of the RFI response. F. On receipt of Architect's action, update the RFI log and immediately distribute the RFI response to affected parties. Review response and notify Architect within two days if Contractor disagrees with response. G. RFI Log: Prepare, maintain, and submit a tabular log of RFIs organized by the RFI number. Review log weekly. 1 . Name and address of Architect and Contractor. 2. RFI number including RFIs that were dropped and not submitted. 3. RFI description. 4. Date the RFI was submitted. 5. Date Architect's response was received. 6. Identification of related Minor Change in the Work, Construction Change Directive, and Proposal Request, as appropriate. 013100 PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION Page 9 of 10 Project No. 01091 Proposed Renovations March 6, 2009 Park House Smith College, Northampton, MA 1 .8 REQUESTS FOR INTERPRETATION (RFIs) A. Procedure: Immediately on discovery of the need for interpretation of the Contract Documents, and if not possible to request interpretation at Project meeting, prepare and submit an RFI in the form specified. 1 . RFIs shall originate with Contractor. RFIs submitted by entities other than Contractor will be returned with no response. 2. Coordinate and submit RFIs in a prompt manner so as to avoid delays in Contractor's work or work of subcontractors. B. Content of the RFI: Include a detailed, legible description of item needing interpretation and the following: 1 . Project name. 2. Date. 3. Name of Architect and Contractor. 4. RFI number, numbered sequentially. 5. Schedule sensitivity 6. Specification Section number and title and related paragraphs, as appropriate. 7. Drawing number and detail references, as appropriate. 8. Field dimensions and conditions, as appropriate. 9. Contractor's suggested solution(s). If Contractor's solution(s) impact the Contract Time or the Contract Sum, Contractor shall state impact in the RFI. 10. Contractor's signature. C. Hard-Copy RFIs: . 1 . Identify each page of attachments with the RFI number and sequential page number. D. Software-Generated RFIs: Software-generated form with substantially the same content as indicated above. E. Architect's Action: Architect will review each RFI, determine action required, and return it. Allow two working days for Architect's response for each RFI. RFIs received after 1 :00 p.m. will be considered as received the following working day. 013100 PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION Page 8 of 10 Project No. 01091 Proposed Renovations March 6, 2009 Park House Smith College, Northampton, MA 7) Progress cleaning. 8) Status of correction of deficient items. 9) Field observations. 10) RFIs. 1 1) Status of proposal requests. 12) Pending changes. 13) Status of Change Orders. 14) Pending claims and disputes. 3. Minutes: Record the meeting minutes. 4. Reporting: Distribute minutes of the meeting to each party present and to parties who should have been present. a. Schedule Updating: Revise Contractor's Construction Schedule after each progress meeting where revisions to the schedule have been made or recognized. Issue revised schedule concurrently with the report of each meeting. E. Coordination Meetings: Conduct Project coordination meetings concurrent with regular project meetungs. Project coordination meetings are in addition to specific meetings held for other purposes, such as progress meetings and preinstallation conferences. 1 . Attendees: In addition to representatives of Owner and Architect, each contractor, subcontractor, supplier, and other entity concerned with current progress or involved in planning, coordination, or performance of future activities shall be represented at these meetings. All participants at the conference shall be familiar with Project and authorized to conclude matters relating to the Work. 2. Agenda: Review and correct or approve minutes of the previous coordination meeting. Review other items of significance that could affect progress. Include topics for discussion as appropriate to status of Project. a. Review present and future needs of each contractor present. 3. Reporting: Record meeting results and distribute copies to everyone in attendance and to others affected by decisions or actions resulting from each meeting. 013100 PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION Page 7 of 10 Project No. 01091 Proposed Renovations March 6, 2009 Park House Smith College, Northampton, MA 4. Reporting: Distribute minutes of the meeting to each party y present and to parties who should have been present. 5. Do not proceed with installation if the conference cannot be successfully concluded. Initiate whatever actions are necessary to resolve impediments to performance of the Work and reconvene the conference at earliest feasible date. D. Progress Meetings: Conduct progress meetings at weekly intervals. Coordinate dates of meetings with preparation of payment requests. 1 . Attendees: In addition to representatives of Owner and Architect, each contractor, subcontractor, supplier, and other entity concerned with current progress or involved in planning, coordination, or performance of future activities shall be represented at these meetings. All participants at the conference shall be familiar with Project and authorized to conclude matters relating to the Work. 2. Agenda: Review and correct or approve minutes of previous progress meeting. Review other items of significance that could affect progress. Include topics for discussion as appropriate to status of Project. a. Contractor's Construction Schedule: Review progress since the last meeting. Determine whether each activity is on time, ahead of schedule, or behind schedule, in relation to Contractor's Construction Schedule. Determine how construction behind schedule will be expedited; secure commitments from parties involved to do so. Discuss whether schedule revisions are required to ensure that current and subsequent activities will be completed within the Contract Time. 1) Review schedule for next period. b. Review present and future needs of each entity present, including the following: 1) Status of submittals. 2) Off-site fabrication. 3) Access. 4) Site utilization. 5) Temporary facilities and controls. 6) Hazards and risks. 013100 PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION Page 6 of 10 Project No. 01091 Proposed Renovations March 6, 2009 Park House Smith College, Northampton, MA U. Progress cleaning. V. Working hours. 3. Minutes: Record and distribute meeting minutes. C. Preinstallation Conferences: Conduct a preinstallation conferences at weekly progress meetings followed by visits to the site before each construction activity that requires coordination with other construction. 1 . Attendees: Installer and representatives of manufacturers and fabricators involved in or affected by the installation and its coordination or integration with other materials and installations that have preceded or will follow, shall attend the meeting. Advise Architect of scheduled meeting dates. 2. Agenda: Review progress of other construction activities and preparations for the particular activity under consideration, including requirements for the following: a. Related RFIs. b. Related Change Orders. C. Deliveries. d. Submittals. e. Review of mockups. f. Possible conflicts. g. Compatibility problems. h. Time schedules. i. Weather limitations. j. Manufacturer's written recommendations. k. Warranty requirements. I. Compatibility of materials. m. Acceptability of substrates. n. Temporary facilities and controls. o. Space and access limitations. p. Testing and inspecting requirements.. q. Required performance results. r. Protection of adjacent work. S. Protection of construction and personnel. 3. Record significant conference discussions, agreements, and disagreements, including required corrective measures and actions. 013100 PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION Page 5 of 10 Project No. 01091 Proposed Renovations March 6, 2009 Park House Smith College, Northampton, MA 3. Minutes: Record significant discussions and agreements achieved. Distribute the meeting minutes to everyone concerned, including Owner and Architect, within seven days of the meeting. B. Preconstruction Conference: Schedule a preconstruction conference before starting construction, at a time convenient to Owner, Construction Manager, and Architect, but no later than 15 days after execution of the Agreement. Hold the conference at Project site or another convenient location. Conduct the meeting to review responsibilities and personnel assignments. 1 . Attendees: Authorized representatives of Owner, Architect, and their consultants; Contractor and its superintendent; major subcontractors; suppliers; and other concerned parties shall attend the conference. All participants at the conference shall be familiar with Project and authorized to conclude matters relating to the Work. 2. Agenda: Discuss items of significance that could affect progress, including the following: a. Tentative construction schedule. b. Critical work sequencing and long-lead items. C. Designation of key personnel and their duties. d. Procedures for processing field decisions and Change Orders. e. Procedures for RFls. f. Procedures for testing and inspecting. g. Procedures for processing Applications for Payment. h. Distribution of the Contract Documents. i. Submittal procedures. j. Preparation of Record Documents. k. Use of the premises and existing building. I. Work restrictions. m. Owner's occupancy requirements. n. Responsibility for temporary facilities and controls. o. Construction waste management and recycling. p. Parking availability. q. Office, work, and storage areas. r. Equipment deliveries and priorities. S. First aid. t. Security. 013100 PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION Page 4 of 10 Project No. 01091 Proposed Renovations March 6, 2009 Park House Smith College, Northampton, MA 1 . Salvage materials and equipment involved in performance of, but not actually incorporated into, the Work. Refer to other Sections for disposition of salvaged materials that are designated as Owner's property. 1 .5 SUBMITTALS A. Key Personnel Names: Within 15 days of starting construction operations, submit a list of key personnel assignments, including superintendent and other personnel in attendance at Project site. Identify individuals and their duties and responsibilities; list addresses and telephone numbers, including home and office telephone numbers. Provide names, addresses, and telephone numbers of individuals assigned as standbys in the absence of individuals assigned to Project. 1 . Post copies of list in Project meeting room, in temporary field office, and by each temporary telephone. Keep list current at all times. 1 .6 ADMINISTRATIVE AND SUPERVISORY PERSONNEL A. General: In addition to Project superintendent, provide other administrative and supervisory personnel as required for proper performance of the Work. 1 . Include special personnel required for coordination of operations with other contractors. 1 .7 PROJECT MEETINGS A. General: Schedule and conduct meetings and conferences at Project site, unless otherwise indicated. 1 . Attendees: Inform participants and others involved, and individuals whose presence is required, of date and time of each meeting. Notify Owner and Architect of scheduled meeting dates and times. 2. Agenda: Prepare the meeting agenda. Distribute the agenda to all invited attendees. 013100 PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION Page 3 of 10 Project No. 01091 Proposed Renovations March 6, 2009 Park House Smith College, Northampton, MA 1 .4 COORDINATION A. Coordination: Coordinate construction operations included in different Sections of the Specifications to ensure efficient and orderly installation of each part of the Work. Coordinate construction operations, included in different Sections, that depend on each other for proper installation, connection, and operation. 1 . Schedule construction operations in sequence required to obtain the best results where installation of one part of the Work depends on installation of other components, before or after its own installation. 2. Coordinate installation of different components with other contractors to ensure maximum accessibility for required maintenance, service, and repair. 3. Make adequate provisions to accommodate items scheduled for later installation. 4. Where availability of space is limited, coordinate installation of different components to ensure maximum performance and accessibility for required maintenance, service, and repair of all components, including Awk mechanical and electrical. B. Administrative Procedures: Coordinate scheduling and timing of required administrative procedures with other construction activities and activities of other contractors to avoid conflicts and to ensure orderly progress of the Work. Such administrative activities include, but are not limited to, the following: 1 . Preparation of Contractor's Construction Schedule. 2. Preparation of the Schedule of Values. 3. Installation and removal of temporary facilities and controls. 4. Delivery and processing of submittals. 5. Progress meetings. 6. Preinstallation conferences. 7. Startup and adjustment of systems. 8. Project closeout activities. C. Conservation: Coordinate construction activities to ensure that operations are carried out with consideration given to conservation of energy, water, and materials. 013100 PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION Page 2 of 10 Project No. 01091 Proposed Renovations March 6, 2009 Park House Smith College, Northampton, MA SECTION 013100 - PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION PART 1 - GENERAL 1 .1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1 .2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes administrative provisions for coordinating construction operations on Project including, but not limited to, the following: 1 . Administrative and supervisory personnel. 2. Project meetings. 3. Requests for Interpretation (RFIs). B. Each contractor shall participate in coordination requirements. Certain areas of responsibility will be assigned to a specific contractor. C. Related Sections include the following: 1 . Division 01 Section "Construction Progress Documentation" for preparing and submitting Contractor's Construction Schedule. 2. Division 01 Section "Execution" for procedures for coordinating general installation and field-engineering services, including establishment of benchmarks and control points. 3. Division 01 Section "Closeout Procedures" for coordinating closeout of the Contract. 1 .3 DEFINITIONS A. RFI: Request from Contractor seeking interpretation or clarification of the Contract Documents. 013100 PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION Page 1 of 10 Project No. 01091 Proposed Renovations March 6, 2009 Park House Smith College, Northampton, MA 5. AIA Document G706A, "Contractor's Affidavit of Release of Liens." Oak L. Final Release of Retainage: Submit Application for Payment showing full release of retainage with documentation supporting completion of the following: 1 . One year Warranty inspection. PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used) END OF SECTION 012900 012900 PAYMENT PROCEDURES Page 6 of 6 Project No. 01091 Proposed Renovations March 6, 2009 Park House Smith College, Northampton, MA I. Initial Application for Payment: Administrative actions and submittals that must precede or coincide with submittal of first Application for Payment include the following: 1 . List of subcontractors. 2. Schedule of Values. 3. Contractor's Construction Schedule (preliminary if not final). 4. Submittals Schedule (preliminary if not final). 5. List of Contractor's staff assignments. 6. List of Contractor's principal consultants. 7. Copies of building permits. 8. Initial progress report. 9. Report of preconstruction conference. 10. Certificates of insurance and insurance policies. J. Application for Payment at Substantial Completion: After issuing the Certificate of Substantial Completion, submit an Application for Payment showing 100 percent completion for portion of the Work claimed as e� substantially complete. 1 . Include documentation supporting claim that the Work is substantially complete and a statement showing an accounting of changes to the Contract Sum. 2. This application shall reflect Certificates of Partial Substantial Completion issued previously for Owner occupancy of designated portions of the Work. K. Final Payment Application: Submit final Application for Payment with releases and supporting documentation not previously submitted and accepted for 100 percent completion of all work except for two percent retainage or $25,000 dollars whichever is less, including, but not limited, to the following: 1 . Evidence of completion of Project closeout requirements. 2. Insurance certificates for products and completed operations where required and proof that taxes, fees, and similar obligations were paid. 3. Updated final statement, accounting for final changes to the Contract Sum. 4. AIA Document G706, "Contractor's Affidavit of Payment of Debts and Claims." 012900 PAYMENT PROCEDURES Page 5 of 6 Project No. 01091 Proposed Renovations March 6, 2009 Park House Smith College, Northampton, MA 1 . Initial Application for Payment, Application for Payment at time of Substantial Completion, and final Application for Payment involve additional requirements. B. Payment Application Times: The date for each progress payment is indicated in the Agreement between Owner and Contractor. The period of construction Work covered by each Application for Payment is the period indicated in the Agreement. C. Pencil Copies: Submit draft Applications for Payment to the Architect seven days prior to the date established for progress payments. D. Payment Application Forms: Use AIA Document G702 and AIA Document G703 Continuation Sheets as form for Applications for Payment. E. Payment Application Forms: Use forms provided by Owner for Applications for Payment. Sample copies are included at end of this Section. F. Application Preparation: Complete every entry on form. Notarize and execute by a person authorized to sign legal documents on behalf of Contractor. Architect will return incomplete applications without action. 1 . Entries shall match data on the Schedule of Values and Contractor's Construction Schedule. Use updated schedules if revisions were made. 2. Include amounts of Change Orders and Construction Change Directives issued before last day of construction period covered by application. G. Transmittal: Submit 3 signed and notarized original copies of each Application for Payment to Architect by a method ensuring receipt. One copy shall include waivers of lien and similar attachments if required. H. Waivers of Mechanic's Lien: With Final Application for Payment, submit waivers of mechanic's lien from every entity who is lawfully entitled to file a mechanic's lien arising out of the Contract and related to the Work covered by the payment. 1 . Owner reserves the right to designate which entities involved in the Work must submit waivers. 2. Waiver Forms: Submit waivers of lien on forms, executed in a manner acceptable to Owner. 012900 PAYMENT PROCEDURES Page 4 of 6 Project No. 01091 Proposed Renovations March 6, 2009 Park House Smith College, Northampton, MA Coordinate with the Project Manual table of contents. Provide several line items for principal subcontract amounts, where appropriate. 5. Round amounts to nearest whole dollar; total shall equal the Contract Sum. 6. Provide a separate line item in the Schedule of Values for each part of' the Work where Applications for Payment may include materials or equipment purchased or fabricated and stored, but not yet installed. a. Differentiate between items stored on-site and items stored off- site. If specified, include evidence of insurance or bonded warehousing. 7. Provide separate line items in the Schedule of Values for initial cost of materials, for each subsequent stage of completion, and for total installed value of that part of the Work. 8. Allowances: Provide a separate line item in the Schedule of Values for each allowance. Show line-item value of unit-cost allowances, as a product of the unit cost, multiplied by measured quantity. Use information indicated in the Contract Documents to determine quantities. 9. Each item in the Schedule of Values and Applications for Payment shall be complete. Include total cost and proportionate share of general overhead and profit for each item. a. Temporary facilities and other major cost items that are not direct: cost of actual work-in-place may be shown either as separate line items in the Schedule of Values or distributed as general overhead expense, at Contractor's option. 10. Schedule Updating: Update and resubmit the Schedule of Values before the next Applications for Payment when Change Orders or Construction Change Directives result in a change in the Contract Sum. 1 .5 APPLICATIONS FOR PAYMENT A. Each Application for Payment shall be consistent with previous applications and payments as certified by Architect and paid for by Owner. 012900 PAYMENT PROCEDURES Page 3 of 6 11 IN Project No. 01091 Proposed Renovations March 6, 2009 Park House Smith College, Northampton, MA b. Submittals Schedule. C. Contractor's Construction Schedule. 2. Submit the Schedule of Values to Architect at earliest possible date but no later than seven days before the date scheduled for submittal of initial Applications for Payment. 3. Subschedules: Where the Work is separated into phases requiring separately phased payments, provide subschedules showing values correlated with each phase of payment. B. Format and Content: Use the Project Manual table of contents as a guide to establish line items for the Schedule of Values. Provide at least one line item for each Specification Section. 1 . Identification: Include the following Project identification on the Schedule of Values: a. Project name and location. b. Name of Owner C. Name of Architect. d. Architect's project number. e. Contractor's name and address. f. Date of submittal. 2. Submit draft of AIA Document G703 Continuation Sheets. 3. Arrange the Schedule of Values in tabular form with separate columns to indicate the following for each item listed: a. Related Specification Section or Division. b. Description of the Work. C. Change Orders (numbers) that affect value. d. Dollar value. 1) Percentage of the Contract Sum to nearest one-hundredth percent, adjusted to total 100 percent. 4. Provide a breakdown of the Contract Sum in enough detail to facilitate continued evaluation of Applications for Payment and progress reports. AMW 012900 PAYMENT PROCEDURES Page 2 of 6 Project No. 01091 Proposed Renovations March 6, 2009 Park House Smith College, Northampton, MA SECTION 012900 - PAYMENT PROCEDURES PART 1 - GENERAL 1 .1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1 .2 SUMMARY A. This Section specifies administrative and procedural requirements necessary to prepare and process Applications for Payment. B. Related Sections include the following: 1 . Division 01 Section "Contract Modification Procedures" for administrative procedures for handling changes to the Contract. 2. Division 01 Section "Construction Progress Documentation" for administrative requirements governing preparation and submittal of Contractor's Construction Schedule and Submittals Schedule. 1 .3 DEFINITIONS A. Schedule of Values: A statement furnished by Contractor allocating portions of the Contract Sum to various portions of the Work and used as the basis for reviewing Contractor's Applications for Payment. 1 .4 SCHEDULE OF VALUES A. Coordination: Coordinate preparation of the Schedule of Values with preparation of Contractor's Construction Schedule. 1 . Correlate line items in the Schedule of Values with other required administrative forms and schedules, including the following: a. Application for Payment forms with Continuation Sheets. 012900 PAYMENT PROCEDURES Page 1 of 6 Project No. 01091 Proposed Renovations March 6, 2009 Park House Smith College, Northampton, MA 1 .6 CONSTRUCTION CHANGE DIRECTIVE A. Construction Change Directive: Architect may issue a Construction Change Directive on AIA Document G714. Construction Change Directive instructs Contractor to proceed with a change in the Work, for subsequent inclusion in a Change Order. 1 . Construction Change Directive contains a complete description of change in the Work. It also designates method to be followed to determine change in the Contract Sum or the Contract Time. B. Documentation: Maintain detailed records on a time and material basis of work required by the Construction Change Directive. 1 . After completion of change, submit an itemized account and supporting data necessary to substantiate cost and time adjustments to the Contract. PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used) END OF SECTION 012600 012600 CONTRACT MODIFICATION PROCEDURES Page 3 of 3 Project No. 01091 Proposed Renovations March 6, 2009 Park House Smith College, Northampton, MA 2. Within 14 days after receipt of Proposal Request, submit a quotation estimating cost adjustments to the Contract Sum and the Contract Time necessary to execute the change. a. Include a list of quantities of products required or eliminated and unit costs, with total amount of purchases and credits to be made. If requested, furnish survey data to substantiate quantities. b. Indicate applicable taxes, delivery charges, equipment rental, and amounts of trade discounts. C. Include costs of labor and supervision directly attributable to the change. B. Contractor-Initiated Proposals: If latent or unforeseen conditions require modifications to the Contract, Contractor may propose changes by submitting a request for a change to Architect. 1 . Include a statement outlining reasons for the change and the effect of the change on the Work. Provide a complete description of the proposed change. Indicate the effect of the proposed change on the Contract Sum and the Contract Time. 2. Include a list of quantities of products required or eliminated and unit costs, with total amount of purchases and credits to be made. If requested, furnish survey data to substantiate quantities. 3. Indicate applicable taxes, delivery charges, equipment rental, and amounts of trade discounts. 4. Include costs of labor and supervision directly attributable to the change. 5. Comply with requirements in Division 01 Section "Product Requirements" if the proposed change requires substitution of one product or system for product or system specified. C. Proposal Request Form: Use AIA Document G709 for Proposal Requests. 1 .5 CHANGE ORDER PROCEDURES A. On Owner's approval of a Proposal Request, Architect will issue a Change Order for signatures of Owner and Contractor on AIA Document G701 . Aft 012600 CONTRACT MODIFICATION PROCEDURES Page 2 of 3 Project No. 01091 Proposed Renovations March 6, 2009 Park House Smith College, Northampton, MA SECTION 012600 - CONTRACT MODIFICATION PROCEDURES PART 1 - GENERAL 1 .1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1 .2 SUMMARY A. This Section specifies administrative and procedural requirements for handling and processing Contract modifications. B. Related Sections include the following: 1 . Division 01 Section "Product Requirements" for administrative procedures .,, for handling requests for substitutions made after Contract award. 1 .3 MINOR CHANGES IN THE WORK A. Architect will issue through Construction Manager supplemental instructions authorizing Minor Changes in the Work, not involving adjustment to the Contract Sum or the Contract Time. 1 .4 PROPOSAL REQUESTS A. Owner-Initiated Proposal Requests: Architect will issue a detailed description of proposed changes in the Work that may require adjustment to the Contract Sum or the Contract Time. If necessary, the description will include supplemental or revised Drawings and Specifications. 1 . Proposal Requests issued by Architect are for information only. Do not consider them instructions either to stop work in progress or to execute the proposed change. 012600 CONTRACT MODIFICATION PROCEDURES Page 1 of 3 Project No. 01091 Proposed Renovations March 6, 2009 Park House Smith College, Northampton, MA B. Notification: Immediately following award of the Contract, notify each party involved, in writing, of the status of each alternate. Indicate if alternates have been accepted, rejected, or deferred for later consideration. Include a complete description of negotiated modifications to alternates. C. Execute accepted alternates under the same conditions as other work of the Contract. D. Schedule: A Schedule of Alternates is included at the end of this Section. Specification Sections referenced in schedule contain requirements for materials necessary to achieve the work described under each alternate. PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 SCHEDULE OF ALTERNATES A. Alternate No. 1 : Deduct construction of accessible ramp to front entrance including automatic door operator for front door. B. Alternate No. 2: Deduct installation of the make-up air system and associated ductwork. C. Alternate No. 3: Deduct the work associated with creating Room 313 on Third Floor. D. Alternate No. 4: Deduct the replacement of sprinkler heads in existing locations. E. Alternate No. 5: Deduct piping and associated work for providing for future solar hot water panels on main roof. END OF SECTION 012300 012300 ALTERNATES Page 2 of 2 Project No. 01091 Proposed Renovations March 6, 2009 Park House Smith College, Northampton, MA SECTION 012300 - ALTERNATES PART 1 - GENERAL 1 .1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1 .2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for alternates. 1 .3 DEFINITIONS A. Alternate: An amount proposed by bidders and stated on the Bid Form for certain work defined in the Bidding Requirements that may be added to or deducted from the Base Bid amount if Owner decides to accept a corresponding change either in the amount of construction to be completed or in the products, materials, equipment, systems, or installation methods described in the Contract Documents. 1 . The cost or credit for each alternate is the net addition to or deduction from the Contract Sum to incorporate alternate into the Work. No other adjustments are made to the Contract Sum. 1 .4 PROCEDURES A. Coordination: Modify or adjust affected adjacent work as necessary to completely integrate work of the alternate into Project. 1 . Include as part of each alternate, miscellaneous devices, accessory objects, and similar items incidental to or required for a complete installation whether or not indicated as part of alternate. 012300 ALTERNATES Page 1 of 2 Project No. 01091 Proposed Renovations March 6, 2009 Park House Smith College, Northampton, MA 40ft, END OF SECTION 012200 012200 UNIT PRICES Page 3 of 3 Project No. 0 109 1 Proposed Renovations March 6, 2009 Park House Smith College, Northampton, MA B. Measurement and Payment: Refer to individual Specification Sections for work that requires establishment of unit prices. Methods of measurement and payment for unit prices are specified in those Sections. C. Owner reserves the right to reject Contractor's measurement of work-in-place that involves use of established unit prices and to have this work measured, at Owner's expense, by an independent surveyor acceptable to Contractor. D. List of Unit Prices: A list of unit prices is included in Part 3. Specification Sections referenced in the schedule contain requirements for materials described under each unit price. PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 LIST OF UNIT PRICES A. Unit Price No. 1 - Masonry Repointing: 1 . Description: Repointing of masonry beyond scope indicted on Drawings according to Division 04 Section "Maintenance of Masonry." 2. Unit of Measurement: Square foot of wall area. B. Unit Price No. 2 - Wood sill replacement: 1 . Description: Replacement of unsound rotted wood window sills in existing openings prior to window replacement according to Division 06 Section "Exterior Finish Carpentry." 2. Unit of Measurement: Per window opening. C. Unit Price No. 3 - Wood sill repair: 1 . Description: Repair rotted areas of otherwise sound wood window sills prior to window replacement with restoration epoxy according to Division 06 Section "Exterior Finish Carpentry." D. Unit of Measurement: Per window opening. 012200 UNIT PRICES Page 2 of 3 Project No. 01091 Proposed Renovations March 6, 2009 Park House Smith College, Northampton, MA SECTION 012200 - UNIT PRICES PART 1 - GENERAL 1 .1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1 .2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for unit prices. B. Related Sections include the following: 1 . Division 01 Section "Allowances" for procedures for using unit prices to adjust quantity allowances. 2. Division 01 Section "Contract Modification Procedures" for procedures for submitting and handling Change Orders. 3. Division 01 Section "Quality Requirements" for general testing and inspecting requirements. 1 .3 DEFINITIONS A. Unit price is an amount proposed by bidders, stated on the Bid Form, as a price per unit of measurement for materials or services added to or deducted from the Contract Sum by appropriate modification, if estimated quantities of Work required by the Contract Documents are increased or decreased. 1 .4 PROCEDURES A. Unit prices include all necessary material, plus cost for delivery, installation, insurance, overhead, and profit. 012200 UNIT PRICES Page 1 of 3 Project No. 01091 Proposed Renovations March 6, 2009 Park House Smith College, Northampton, MA C. Allowance No. 3: Include the lump sum allowance of $175,000.00 providing Aw and installing replacement windows as specified in Division 08 Section "Wood Windows" and as shown on Drawings. 1 . Allowance includes a complete installation including interior trim in existing and modified openings, insulation of sash pockets, exterior sealants and aluminum trim ready for finish painting. 2. Allowance does not include modification to existing openings, relocation of existing window frames or installation of sash units provide for incorporation into sidelights and transoms at new entrance at lower level. END OF SECTION 012100 01 2100 ALLOWANCES Page 4 of 4 Project No. 01091 Proposed Renovations March 6, 2009 Park House Smith College, Northampton, MA A"" 1 .7 UNUSED MATERIALS A. Return unused materials purchased under an allowance to manufacturer or supplier for credit to Owner, after installation has been completed and accepted. 1 . If requested by Architect, prepare unused material for storage by Owner when it is not economically practical to return the material for credit. If directed by Architect, deliver unused material to Owner's storage space. Otherwise, disposal of unused material is Contractor's responsibility. PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine products covered by an allowance promptly on delivery for damage or defects. Return damaged or defective products to manufacturer for replacement. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Coordinate materials and their installation for each allowance with related materials and installations to ensure that each allowance item is completely integrated and interfaced with related work. 3.3 SCHEDULE OF ALLOWANCES A. Allowance No. 1 : Include the unit cost allowance of $750.00 per thousand for face brick to match existing as specified in Division 04 Section "Unit Masonry." B. Allowance No. 2: Include the unit cost allowance of $500.00 per square for purchase and delivery of slate shingles as specified in Division 07 Section "Slate Shingles" and as shown on Drawings. 012100 ALLOWANCES Page 3 of 4 Project No. 01091 Proposed Renovations March 6, 2009 Park House Smith College, Northampton, MA 1 .3 SELECTION AND PURCHASE , A. At the earliest practical date after award of the Contract, advise Architect of the date when final selection and purchase of each product or system described by an allowance must be completed to avoid delaying the Work. B. At Architect's request, obtain proposals for each allowance for use in making final selections. Include recommendations that are relevant to performing the Work. C. Purchase products and systems selected by Architect from the designated supplier. 1 .4 SUBMITTALS A. Submit proposals for purchase of products or systems included in allowances, in the form specified for Change Orders. B. Submit invoices or delivery slips to show actual quantities of materials delivered to the site for use in fulfillment of each allowance. C. Coordinate and process submittals for allowance items in same manner as for other portions of the Work. 1 .5 COORDINATION A. Coordinate allowance items with other portions of the Work. Furnish templates as required to coordinate installation. 1 .6 LUMP-SUM AND UNIT COST ALLOWANCES A. Allowance shall include cost to Contractor of specific products and materials ordered by Owner under allowance and shall include taxes, freight, and delivery to Project site. B. Contractor's costs for receiving and handling at Project site, labor, installation, overhead and profit, and similar costs related to products and materials ordered by Owner under allowance shall be included as part of the Contract Sum and not part of the allowance. 012100 ALLOWANCES Page 2 of 4 Project No. 01091 Proposed Renovations March 6, 2009 Park House Smith College, Northampton, MA SECTION 012100 - ALLOWANCES PART 1 - GENERAL 1 .1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1 .2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements governing allowances. 1 . Certain items are specified in the Contract Documents by allowances. Allowances have been established in lieu of additional requirements and to defer selection of actual materials and equipment to a later date when additional information is available for evaluation. If necessary, additional requirements will be issued by Change Order. B. Types of allowances include the following: 1 . Lump-sum allowances. 2. Unit-cost allowances. C. Related Sections include the following: 1 . Division 01 Section "Contract Modification Procedures" for procedures for submitting and handling Change Orders for allowances. 2. Division 01 Section "Unit Prices" for procedures for using unit prices. 3. Division 01 Section "Quality Requirements" for procedures governing the use of allowances for testing and inspecting. 4. Divisions 02 through 49 Sections for items of Work covered by allowances. 012100 ALLOWANCES Page 1 of 4 Project No. 01091 Proposed Renovations March 6, 2009 Park House Smith College, Northampton, MA 2. Imperative mood and streamlined language are generally used in the Specifications. Requirements expressed in the imperative mood are to be performed by Contractor. Occasionally, the indicative or subjunctive mood may be used in the Section Text for clarity to describe responsibilities that must be fulfilled indirectly by Contractor or by others when so noted. a. The words "shall," "shall be," or "shall comply with," depending on the context, are implied where a colon (:) is used within a sentence or phrase. 1 .12 MISCELLANEOUS PROVISIONS PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used) END OF SECTION 011000 011000 SUMMARY Page 7 of 7 Project No. 0 109 1 Proposed Renovations March 6, 2009 Park House Smith College, Northampton, MA 2. Early Morning Hours: Limit noisy activities to after 9 a.m. except by '"w permission by Owner. 3. Hours for Utility Shutdowns: Coordinate with Owner's requirements. E. Existing Utility Interruptions: Do not interrupt utilities serving facilities occupied by Owner or others unless permitted under the following conditions and then only after arranging to provide temporary utility services according to requirements indicated: 1 . Notify Owner not less than two days in advance of proposed utility interruptions. 2. Do not proceed with utility interruptions without Owner's permission. 1 .11 SPECIFICATION FORMATS AND CONVENTIONS A. Specification Format: The Specifications are organized into Divisions and Sections using the 50-division format and CSI/CSC's "MasterFormat" numbering system. 1 . Section Identification: The Specifications use Section numbers and titles to help cross-referencing in the Contract Documents. Sections in the Project Manual are in numeric sequence; however, the sequence is incomplete because all available Section numbers are not used. Consult the table of contents at the beginning of the Project Manual to determine numbers and names of Sections in the Contract Documents. 2. Division 01 : Sections in Division 01 govern the execution of the Work of all Sections in the Specifications. B. Specification Content: The Specifications use certain conventions for the style of language and the intended meaning of certain terms, words, and phrases when used in particular situations. These conventions are as follows: 1 . Abbreviated Language: Language used in, the Specifications and other Contract Documents is abbreviated. Words and meanings shall be interpreted as appropriate. Words implied, but not stated, shall be inferred as the sense requires. Singular words shall be interpreted as plural, and plural words shall be interpreted as singular where applicable as the context of the Contract Documents indicates. 011000 SUMMARY Page 6 of 7 Project No. 01091 Proposed Renovations March 6, 2009 Park House Smith College, Northampton, MA 1 .9 OWNER'S OCCUPANCY REQUIREMENTS A. Full Owner Occupancy: Owner will occupy site and adjacent building during entire construction period. Cooperate with Owner during construction operations to minimize conflicts and facilitate Owner usage. Perform the Work so as not to interfere with Owner's day-to-day operations. Maintain existing exits, unless otherwise indicated. 1 . Maintain access to existing walkways, corridors, and other adjacent occupied or used facilities. Do not close or obstruct walkways, corridors, or other occupied or used facilities without written permission from Owner and authorities having jurisdiction. 2. Provide not less than 72 hours' notice to Owner of activities that will affect Owner's operations. 1 .10 WORK RESTRICTIONS A. Code of Conduct: All construction personnel shall conduct themselves in a manner consistent with the policies of Smith College. Harassment of students, °I staff or employees including indiscriminate swearing and/or abusive language directed at other co-workers shall be cause for immediate dismissal from the project. B. Boom-boxes: Use of boom boxes, portable radios or other sound producing equipment at sound levels that can be heard beyond the project limits is prohibited. Excessive sound levels as judged by the Owner's representative or Architect on more than three occurrences will result in removal of all such devices for all construction personnel. C. Smoking: Smoking within the building including exterior porches, on scaffolding, ladders or roofs is prohibited. Disposal of smoking materials shall be in receptacles designed for that purpose. D. On-Site Work Hours: Work shall be generally performed inside the existing building during normal business working hours of 7 a.m. to 10 p.m., Monday through Friday, except otherwise indicated. 1 . Weekend Hours: As required to meet schedule. 011000 SUMMARY Page 5 of 7 Project No. 01091 Proposed Renovations March 6, 2009 Park House Smith College, Northampton, MA 9. If Owner-furnished items are damaged as a result of Contractor's operations, Contractor shall repair or replace them. 10. Contractor shall install and otherwise incorporate Owner-furnished items into the Work. B. Owner-Furnished Products: 1 . Shower Bases 2. Shower Doors 3. Light fixtures types B, C and OA. 1 .8 USE OF PREMISES A. General: Contractor shall have full use of the building for construction operations, including use of defined Project site, during construction period. Contractor's use of premises is limited only by Owner's right to perform work or to retain other contractors on portions of Project. B. Use of Site: Limit use of premises to work in areas indicated. Do not disturb portions of Project site beyond areas in which the Work is indicated. 1 . Owner Occupancy: Allow for Owner occupancy of Project site and use by the public. 2. Driveways and Entrances: Keep driveways and entrances serving adjacent premises clear and available to Owner, Owner's employees, and emergency vehicles at all times. Do not use these areas for parking or storage of materials. a. Schedule deliveries to minimize use of driveways and entrances. b. Schedule deliveries to minimize space and time requirements for storage of materials and equipment on-site. C. Use of Existing Building: Maintain existing building in a weathertight condition throughout construction period. Repair damage caused by construction operations. Protect building and its occupants during construction period. 011000 SUMMARY Page 4 of 7 Project No. 01091 Proposed Renovations March 6, 2009 Park House Smith College, Northampton, MA �,. 1 .6 PRODUCTS ORDERED IN ADVANCE A. General: Owner has negotiated Purchase Orders with suppliers of material and equipment to be incorporated into the Work. Owner will assign these Purchase Orders to Contractor. Costs for receiving, handling, storage if required, and installation of material and equipment are included in the Contract Sum. 1 . Contractor's responsibilities are same as if Contractor had negotiated Purchase Orders, including responsibility to renegotiate purchase and to execute final Purchase-Order agreements. B. List of Products Ordered in Advance: 1 . Replacement windows, including complete installation except for painting. 1 .7 OWNER-FURNISHED PRODUCTS A. Owner will furnish products indicated. The Work includes providing support systems to receive Owner's equipment and making plumbing, mechanical, and electrical connections. 1 . Owner will arrange for and deliver Shop Drawings, Product Data, and Samples to Contractor. 2. Owner will arrange and pay for delivery of Owner-furnished items according to Contractor's Construction Schedule. 3. After delivery, Owner will inspect delivered items for damage. Contractor shall be present for and assist in Owner's inspection. 4. If Owner-furnished items are damaged, defective, or missing, Owner will arrange for replacement. 5. Owner will arrange for manufacturer's field services and for delivery of manufacturer's warranties to Contractor. 6. Contractor shall review Shop Drawings, Product Data, and Samples and return them to Architect noting discrepancies or anticipated problems in use of product. 7. Contractor is responsible for receiving, unloading, and handling Owner- furnished items at Project site. 8. Contractor is responsible for protecting Owner-furnished items from damage during storage and handling, including damage from exposure to the elements. 011000 SUMMARY Page 3 of 7 Project No. 01091 Proposed Renovations March 6, 2009 Park House Smith College, Northampton, MA B. Owner: Trustees of Smith College •ow 1 . Owner's Representative: Charlie Conant C. Architect: Archimetrics Design Studio 1 . Project architect: Peter Lapointe D. The Work consists of the following: 1 . The Work includes site improvements, removal of existing fire escapes, window replacement, siding and masonry repairs, metal and slate roofing, interior renovations including construction of new egress stair, new finishes, fire protection, plumbing, heating, ventilating and electrical work/ 1 .4 TYPE OF CONTRACT A. Project will be constructed under a single prime contract. 1 .5 WORK UNDER OTHER CONTRACTS A. General: Cooperate fully with separate contractors so work on those contracts may be carried out smoothly, without interfering with or delaying work under this Contract. Coordinate the Work of this Contract with work performed under separate contracts. B. Preceding Work: Owner will award separate contract(s) for the following construction operations at Project site. Those operations are scheduled to be substantially complete before work under this Contract begins. 1 . Hazardous material abatement in the existing crawl space. C. Concurrent Work: Owner will award separate contract(s) for the following construction operations at Project site. Those operations will be conducted simultaneously with work under this Contract. 1 . Hazardous material abatement in currently occupied areas. 2. Removal of existing window sash concurrent with window replacement. 011000 SUMMARY Page 2 of 7 Project No. 01091 Proposed Renovations March 6, 2009 Park House Smith College, Northampton, MA SECTION 0 1 1000 - SUMMARY PART 1 - GENERAL 1 .1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. B. Hazardous Materials Report: The Owner has tested materials in the building. One copy will be provided to each General Bidder. C. AIA General Conditions A201 -2007 shall be used in Administration of the Contract. 1 .2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1 . Work covered by the Contract Documents. 2. Type of the Contract. 3. Products ordered in advance. 4. Owner-furnished products. 5. Use of premises. 6. Owner's occupancy requirements. 7. Work restrictions. 8. Specification formats and conventions. B. Related Sections include the following: 1 . Division 01 Section "Temporary Facilities and Controls" for limitations and procedures governing temporary use of Owner's facilities. 1 .3 WORK COVERED BY CONTRACT DOCUMENTS A. Project Identification: Renovations to Park House 1 . Project Location: 134 Elm Street, Northampton, MA 011000 SUMMARY Page 1 of 7 Proj. No. 01091 Proposed Renovations March 6, 2009 Park House Smith College, Northampton, MA Millwork Fire Protection Westek Westfield, MA. Allied Fire Protection Springfield, MA Amherst Woodworking Northampton, MA M.J. Moran Haydenville, MA John Carlo Woodworking Westfield, MA H.F.P. Westfield Wright Architectural Northampton, MA Warehouse Mechanical S. Hadley, MA Haydenville Woodwork- ing Amherst, MA Laurel Hill (Peter Dellert) Holyoke, MA Electrical Contractors Bradford Woodworking Florence, MA Collins Electric Chicopee, MA P.A.W. Inc. Ludlow, MA David R. Northup Electric Agawam, MA Haas Electric South Hadley, MA Roofing Contractors M.L. Schmitt, Inc. Springfield, MA Morris Springfield, MA Orchard Electric Northampton, MA Titan Chicopee, MA Coughlin Electrical, Inc. Westborough, MA Granby, MA-467- Maheu, Joe - Sm. proj. 9581 Easthampton Electric Easthampton, MA Westfield, MA- 532- Pelletier, Al - Sm. Proj. 6346 Universal Electric Springfield, MA Ernest Peterson Inc. Hartford, CT Allied Restoration-carlise flats East Hartford, CT Communication Contractors Haas Elec. South Hadley, MA Painting Contractors Hogan Communications Holyoke, MA Lococo, Owen Northampton, MA Coughlin Electrical, Inc. Springfield, MA Angelica Communica- Northeast Northampton, MA tions Holyoke, MA Coffey & Heady Northampton, MA Environmental Contrac- Callahan, Joe Pelham, MA tors Novotny Northampton, MA Abide East Longmeadow ATC Associates West Springfield Flooring Contractors Mercier Carpet W. Springfield, MA Landmark Flooring Con- cept Albany, NY M. Frank Higgins & Co. Newington, CT Ayotte & King Chicopee, MA Dion A & Son Flooring Hadley, MA END OF SECTION ,�,. GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 010000 - 5 Proj. No. 0 109 1 Proposed Renovations March 6, 2009 Park House Smith College, Northampton, MA (or fax to 413-585-2398) You will be required to maintain adequate insurance coverage throughout the entire period of your contract or supplier relationship with the college. The insurance agent must provide new original certificates directly to the college whenever new policies are issued or policies are changed or updated. Failure to have or maintain coverage or to provide original certificates may be cause for cancellation or non-renewal or your con- tract. 1 .7 PREFERRED SUB-CONTRACTORS 9 Elevator Contractors Warner S. Sunderland, MA Schindler Hartford, CT T&M Equipment Corp. Springfield, MA Bay State Chicopee, MA Palmer Paving Palmer, MA Otis W. Springfield, MA Marion Excavating S. Hadley, MA Associated Elevator S. Yarmouth, MA Duffy/Willard Northampton, MA Dietz Const. Corporation Easthampton, MA Truehart Paving & Lands. Southampton, MA Mechanical Contractors Karl's Excavating, Inc. Hadley, MA Harry Grodsky Co. Springfield, MA JC & Company Northampton, MA M.J. Moran Haydenville, MA T.J. Conway Springfield, MA Landscape B-G Mechanical Chicopee, MA Duffy/Willard Northampton, MA Adams Plumbing & Heating Pittsfield, MA K.R. Longtin Northampton, MA Truehart Paving & Lands. Southampton, MA Sheet Metal Fabricators Mt. View Landscapes & Chicopee, MA Kleeberg Sheet Metal Ludlow, MA Amherst Landscaping Amherst, MA Fisher Sheet Metal Springfield, MA Misc. Metals Berkshire Air W. Springfield, MA Accufab Goshen, MA Custom Sheet Metal Haydenville, MA Arrow Welding Hatfield, MA Hurley and David Air Springfield, MA ARC Welding Hadley, MA Ralph's Welding Northampton, MA Automatic Temperature Control SWE Springfield, MA Yankee Technology Ludlow, MA GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 010000 - 4 Proj. No. 01091 Proposed Renovations March 6, 2009 Park House Smith College, Northampton, MA Worker's Compensation Statutory Worker's Compensation Worker's Liability 1 ,000,000 Disease - Policy Limit 500,000 Disease - Each Employee 500,000 Each Accident (Not required of proprietorships and partnerships, which have no employees, if any employees are subcontracted, coverage will be required, even if the employees are considered "independent contractors". A statement via letter must be provided with the certificates or policy copies stating that the firm has no employees other than the proprietor or partners. A certificate showing coverage of Health Insurance is required of all-sole proprietor or partners. A certificate showing coverage of health insurance is required of all-sole proprietors and partners.) Excess Liability 1 ,000,000 Each Occurrence 1 ,000,000 Aggregate Umbrella Form required unless otherwise agreed. You may substitute a higher amount of general liability coverage in lieu of a follow form umbrella, as long as the sum meets or exceeds the amount of general liability coverage as requested. You must indicate on your certificate the full amount of insur- ance carried, even if it is less than the amount requested. PLEASE NOTE: The following wording must appear on every insurance certificate submitted: The Trustees of Smith College and any present or former trustee, director, officer, administer, employee, student, volunteer worker or Agent, is added as an additional insured to the General Liability, Auto, Employers, Liability and Excess Policies, as their interests may appear. This insurance shall not terminate without at least twenty- (20) day's prior written notice to the col- lege. Please add the college to all applicable policies as additional insured and instruct your insurance agent(s) to forward original insurance certificates directly to: Smith College And a Copy To: Charlie Conant Purchasing Department Smith College 126 West Street 126 West Street Northampton, MA 01 063 Northampton, MA 01063 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 010000 - 3 Proj. No. 01091 Proposed Renovations March 6, 2009 Park House Smith College, Northampton, MA 1 .4 PROJECT SCHEDULE A. Start Date: May 19, 2009 1 . Reunion weekend May 23-26: Construction activity subject to acceptance by the Owner. 2. Substantial Completion: August 15, 2009 3. Final Occupancy: August 22, 2008 1 .5 PREFERRED SUB-CONTRACTORS A. Included at the end of this document is the Owner's preferred sub-contractor list. Use of tradespersons for disciplines not listed is at the discretion of the Contractor. Use of sub-contractors for listed trades not on the preferred list is subject to acceptance by the Owner's. 1 .6 INSURANCE REQUIREMENTS SMITH COLLEGE LIABILITY INSURANCE REQUIREMENTS All contractors who routinely transact business on the Smith College Campus must meet the following insurance requirements: General Liability: 2,000,000 General Aggregate 1 ,000,000 Product/Completed Operations 1 ,000,000 Personal & Advertising Injury 50,000 Fire Damage Legal Liability 5,000 Medical Expense Coverage is to include Broad Form Property Damage, XCU hazard (if appropriate), Con- tractual Liability and be Occurrence Form unless otherwise agreed. Auto Liability 1 ,000,000 Combined Single Limit Coverage is to include All Owned Autos or Scheduled Autos and Hired Autos and Non- Owned Autos. GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 010000 - 2 Proj. No. 01091 Proposed Renovations March 6, 2009 Park House Smith College, Northampton, MA SECTION 010000 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS PART 1 - GENERAL 1 .1 BID REQUIREMENTS A. Time and place of Bid: Proposals for the Work shall be received not later than 2:00 pm EST on Thursday, March 26, 2009 at the Smith College Physical Plant, 126 West Street, Northampton, MA. 1 .2 BID PROCEDURES A. The Owner reserves the right to accept or reject any and all proposals, waive any irregularities or take any actions that are in the interest of the College. B. Approved Sub-Contractor List: Contractors may not use sub-contractors other than those on the approved sub-contractor list included at the end of this section without prior approval by the Owner. C. Electronic Communications: Questions and clarifications arising while preparing proposals may directed to the Architect in writing by way of Facsimile or e-mail. Only written responses in the form of an addendum will serve to modify the Contract Documents. 1 . Addenda will be issued electronically with a record copy to be sent by conventional mail. D. Questions received less than 72 hours prior to the time of bid cannot be included in addenda. Verbal clarifications shall be non-binding. 1 .3 PERMITS AND FEES A. The Contractor shall be responsible for the preparing and obtaining all necessary permits. 1 . Demolition Permit: Contractor shall prepare and file BWF AQ06 permit with DEQE prior to any demolition activities. A GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 010000 - 1 additional person or entity shall not constitute consent to arbitration of any claim,dispute or other matter in question AW not described in the written consent. §15.4.4.3 The Owner and Contractor grant to any person or entity made a party to an arbitration conducted under this Section 15.4,whether by joinder or consolidation,the same rights of joinder and consolidation as the Owner and Contractor under this Agreement. Init. AIA Document A201TM—2007.Copyright ©1911,1915,1918,1925,1937,1951,1958,1961,1963,1966,1970,1976,1987,1997 and 2007 by The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING:This AIA" Document is protected by U.S.Copyright Law and International Treaties. 40 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AIA`" Document,or any portion of it,may result in severe civil and criminal penalties,and will be / prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This document was produced by AIA software at 19:38:20 on 03/08/2009 under Order No.1000389496_1 which expires on 2/25/2010,and is not for resale. User Notes: (606649719) §15.2.7 In the event of a Claim against the Contractor,the Owner may,but is not obligated to,notify the surety,if any,of the nature and amount of the Claim.If the Claim relates to a possibility of a Contractor's default,the Owner may,but is not obligated to,notify the surety and request the surety's assistance in resolving the controversy. §15.2.8 If a Claim relates to or is the subject of a mechanic's lien,the party asserting such Claim may proceed in accordance with applicable law to comply with the lien notice or filing deadlines. §15.3 MEDIATION §15.3.1 Claims,disputes,or other matters in controversy arising out of or related to the Contract except those waived as provided for in Sections 9.10.4,9.10.5,and 15.1.6 shall be subject to mediation as a condition precedent to binding dispute resolution. §15.3.2 The parties shall endeavor to resolve their Claims by mediation which,unless the parties mutually agree otherwise,shall be administered by the American Arbitration Association in accordance with its Construction Industry Mediation Procedures in effect on the date of the Agreement.A request for mediation shall be made in writing,delivered to the other party to the Contract,and filed with the person or entity administering the mediation. The request may be made concurrently with the filing of binding dispute resolution proceedings but,in such event, mediation shall proceed in advance of binding dispute resolution proceedings,which shall be stayed pending mediation for a period of 60 days from the date of filing,unless stayed for a longer period by agreement of the parties or court order.If an arbitration is stayed pursuant to this Section 15.3.2,the parties may nonetheless proceed to the selection of the arbitrator(s)and agree upon a schedule for later proceedings. §15.3.3 The parties shall share the mediator's fee and any filing fees equally.The mediation shall be held in the place where the Project is located,unless another location is mutually agreed upon.Agreements reached in mediation shall be enforceable as settlement agreements in any court having jurisdiction thereof. §15.4 ARBITRATION §15.4.1 If the parties have selected arbitration as the method for binding dispute resolution in the Agreement,any Claim subject to,but not resolved by,mediation shall be subject to arbitration which,unless the parties mutually agree otherwise,shall be administered by the American Arbitration Association in accordance with its Construction Industry Arbitration Rules in effect on the date of the Agreement.A demand for arbitration shall be made in writing, delivered to the other party to the Contract,and filed with the person or entity administering the arbitration.The party filing a notice of demand for arbitration must assert in the demand all Claims then known to that party on which arbitration is permitted to be demanded. §15.4.1.1 A demand for arbitration shall be made no earlier than concurrently with the filing of a request for mediation,but in no event shall it be made after the date when the institution of legal or equitable proceedings based on the Claim would be bared by the applicable statute of limitations.For statute of limitations purposes,receipt of a written demand for arbitration by the person or entity administering the arbitration shall constitute the institution of legal or equitable proceedings based on the Claim. §15.4.2 The award rendered by the arbitrator or arbitrators shall be final,and judgment may be entered upon it in accordance with applicable law in any court having jurisdiction thereof. §15.4.3 The foregoing agreement to arbitrate and other agreements to arbitrate with an additional person or entity duly consented to by parties to the Agreement shall be specifically enforceable under applicable law in any court having jurisdiction thereof. §15.4.4 CONSOLIDATION OR JOINDER §15.4.4.1 Either party,at its sole discretion,may consolidate an arbitration conducted under this Agreement with any other arbitration to which it is a party provided that(1)the arbitration agreement governing the other arbitration permits consolidation,(2)the arbitrations to be consolidated substantially involve common questions of law or fact, and(3)the arbitrations employ materially similar procedural rules and methods for selecting arbitrator(s). §15.4.4.2 Either party,at its sole discretion,may include by joinder persons or entities substantially involved in a common question of law or fact whose presence is required if complete relief is to be accorded in arbitration, provided that the party sought to be joined consents in writing to such joinder.Consent to arbitration involving an Init. AIA Document A201 TM—2007.Copyright ©1911,1915,1918,1925,1937,1951,1958,1961,1963,1966,1970,1976,1987,1997 and 2007 by The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING:This AiA" Document is protected by U.S.Copyright Law and International Treaties. 39 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AIAW' Document,or any portion of it,may result in severe civil and criminal penalties,and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the lave. This document was produced by AIA software at 19:38:20 on 03/08/2009 under Order No.1000389496_1 which expires on 2/25/2010,and is not for resale. User Notes: (606649'719) ownpommomw §15.1.6 CLAIMS FOR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES ,Mk The Contractor and Owner waive Claims against each other for consequential damages arising out of or relating to this Contract.This mutual waiver includes .1 damages incurred by the Owner for rental expenses,for losses of use,income,profit,financing, business and reputation,and for loss of management or employee productivity or of the services of such persons;and .2 damages incurred by the Contractor for principal office expenses including the compensation of personnel stationed there,for losses of financing,business and reputation,and for loss of profit except anticipated profit arising directly from the Work. This mutual waiver is applicable,without limitation,to all consequential damages due to either party's termination in accordance with Article 14.Nothing contained in this Section 15.1.6 shall be deemed to preclude an award of liquidated damages,when applicable,in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents. §15.2 INITIAL DECISION §15.2.1 Claims,excluding those arising under Sections 10.3, 10.4, 11.3.9,and 11.3.10,shall be referred to the Initial Decision Maker for initial decision.The Architect will serve as the Initial Decision Maker,unless otherwise indicated in the Agreement.Except for those Claims excluded by this Section 15.2.1,an initial decision shall be required as a condition precedent to mediation of any Claim arising prior to the date final payment is due,unless 30 days have passed after the Claim has been referred to the Initial Decision Maker with no decision having been rendered. Unless the Initial Decision Maker and all affected parties agree,the Initial Decision Maker will not decide disputes between the Contractor and persons or entities other than the Owner. §15.2.2 The Initial Decision Maker will review Claims and within ten days of the receipt of a Claim take one or more of the following actions: (1)request additional supporting data from the claimant or a response with supporting data from the other party,(2)reject the Claim in whole or in part,(3)approve the Claim,(4)suggest a compromise, or(5)advise the parties that the Initial Decision Maker is unable to resolve the Claim if the Initial Decision Maker lacks sufficient information to evaluate the merits of the Claim or if the Initial Decision Maker concludes that,in the Initial Decision Maker's sole discretion,it would be inappropriate for the Initial Decision Maker to resolve the , Claim. §15.2.3 In evaluating Claims,the Initial Decision Maker may,but shall not be obligated to,consult with or seek information from either party or from persons with special knowledge or expertise who may assist the Initial Decision Maker in rendering a decision.The Initial Decision Maker may request the Owner to authorize retention of such persons at the Owner's expense. §15.2.4 If the Initial Decision Maker requests a party to provide a response to a Claim or to furnish additional supporting data,such party shall respond,within ten days after receipt of such request,and shall either(1)provide a response on the requested supporting data,(2)advise the Initial Decision Maker when the response or supporting data will be furnished or(3)advise the Initial Decision Maker that no supporting data will be furnished.Upon receipt of the response or supporting data,if any,the Initial Decision Maker will either reject or approve the Claim in whole or in part. §15.2.5 The Initial Decision Maker will render an initial decision approving or rejecting the Claim,or indicating that the Initial Decision Maker is unable to resolve the Claim.This initial decision shall(1)be in writing;(2)state the reasons therefor;and(3)notify the parties and the Architect,if the Architect is not serving as the Initial Decision Maker,of any change in the Contract Sum or Contract Time or both.The initial decision shall be final and binding on the parties but subject to mediation and,if the parties fail to resolve their dispute through mediation,to binding dispute resolution. §15.2.6 Either party may file for mediation of an initial decision at any time,subject to the terms of Section 15.2.6.1. §15.2.6.1 Either party may,within 30 days from the date of an initial decision,demand in writing that the other party file for mediation within 60 days of the initial decision.If such a demand is made and the party receiving the demand fails to file for mediation within the time required,then both parties waive their rights to mediate or pursue binding dispute resolution proceedings with respect to the initial decision. Init. AIA Document A201 r"—2007.Copyright ©1911,1915,1918,1925,1937,1951,1958,1961,1963,1966,1970,1976,1987,1997 and 2007 by The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING:This AIA" Document is protected by U.S.Copyright Law and International Treaties. 38 Unauthorized reproduction,or distribution of this AIA" Document,or any portion of it,may result in severe civil and criminal penalties,and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This document was produced by AIA software at 19:38:20 on 03/08/2009 under Order No.1000389496_1 which expires on 2/25/2010,and is not for resale. User Notes: (606649719) §14.3.2 The Contract Sum and Contract Time shall be adjusted for increases in the cost and time caused by suspension,delay or interruption as described in Section 14.3.1.Adjustment of the Contract Sum shall include profit.No adjustment shall be made to the extent .1 that performance is,was or would have been so suspended,delayed or interrupted by another cause for which the Contractor is responsible;or .2 that an equitable adjustment is made or denied under another provision of the Contract. §14.4 TERMINATION BY THE OWNER FOR CONVENIENCE §14.4.1 The Owner may,at any time,terminate the Contract for the Owner's convenience and without cause. §14.4.2 Upon receipt of written notice from the Owner of such termination for the Owner's convenience,the Contractor shall .1 cease operations as directed by the Owner in the notice; .2 take actions necessary,or that the Owner may direct,for the protection and preservation of the Work; and .3 except for Work directed to be performed prior to the effective date of termination stated in the notice,terminate all existing subcontracts and purchase orders and enter into no further subcontracts and purchase orders. §14.4.3 In case of such termination for the Owner's convenience,the Contractor shall be entitled to receive payment for Work executed,and costs incurred by reason of such termination,along with reasonable overhead and profit on the Work not executed. ARTICLE 15 CLAIMS AND DISPUTES §15.1 CLAIMS §15.1.1 DEFINITION A Claim is a demand or assertion by one of the parties seeking,as a matter of right,payment of money,or other relief with respect to the terms of the Contract.The term"Claim"also includes other disputes and matters in question between the Owner and Contractor arising out of or relating to the Contract.The responsibility to substantiate Claims shall rest with the party making the Claim. §15.1.2 NOTICE OF CLAIMS Claims by either the Owner or Contractor must be initiated by written notice to the other party and to the Initial Decision Maker with a copy sent to the Architect,if the Architect is not serving as the Initial Decision Maker. Claims by either party must be initiated within 21 days after occurrence of the event giving rise to such Claim or within 21 days after the claimant first recognizes the condition giving rise to the Claim,whichever is later. §15.1.3 CONTINUING CONTRACT PERFORMANCE Pending final resolution of a Claim,except as otherwise agreed in writing or as provided in Section 9.7 and Article 14,the Contractor shall proceed diligently with performance of the Contract and the Owner shall continue to make payments in accordance with the Contract Documents.The Architect will prepare Change Orders and issue Certificates for Payment in accordance with the decisions of the Initial Decision Maker. §15.1.4 CLAIMS FOR ADDITIONAL COST If the Contractor wishes to make a Claim for an increase in the Contract Sum,written notice as provided herein shall be given before proceeding to execute the Work.Prior notice is not required for Claims relating to an emergency endangering life or property arising under Section 10.4. §15.1.5 CLAIMS FOR ADDITIONAL TIME §15.1.5.1 If the Contractor wishes to make a Claim for an increase in the Contract Time,written notice as provided herein shall be given.The Contractor's Claim shall include an estimate of cost and of probable effect of delay on progress of the Work.In the case of a continuing delay,only one Claim is necessary. §15.1.5.2 If adverse weather conditions are the basis for a Claim for additional time,such Claim shall be documented by data substantiating that weather conditions were abnormal for the period of time,could not have been reasonably anticipated and had an adverse effect on the scheduled construction. Init. AIA Document A201"m—2007.Copyright C 1911,1915,1918,1925,1937,1951,1958,1961,1963,1966,1970,1976,1987,1997 and 2007 by The Init. American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING:This AIA` Document is protected by U.S.Copyright Law and International Treaties. 37 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AIA" Document,or any portion of it,may result in severe civil and criminal penalties.and will be / prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the iaw. This document was produced by AIA software at 19:38:20 on 03/08/2009 under Order No.1000389496_1 which expires on 2/25/2010,and is not for resale. User Notes: (606649'719) .3 Because the Architect has not issued a Certificate for Payment and has not notified the Contractor of Awk the reason for withholding certification as provided in Section 9.4.1,or because the Owner has not made payment on a Certificate for Payment within the time stated in the Contract Documents;or .4 The Owner has failed to furnish to the Contractor promptly,upon the Contractor's request,reasonable evidence as required by Section 2.2.1. §14.1.2 The Contractor may terminate the Contract if,through no act or fault of the Contractor or a Subcontractor, Sub-subcontractor or their agents or employees or any other persons or entities performing portions of the Work under direct or indirect contract with the Contractor,repeated suspensions,delays or interruptions of the entire Work by the Owner as described in Section 14.3 constitute in the aggregate more than 100 percent of the total number of days scheduled for completion,or 120 days in any 365-day period,whichever is less. §14.1.3 If one of the reasons described in Section 14.1.1 or 14.1.2 exists,the Contractor may,upon seven days' written notice to the Owner and Architect,terminate the Contract and recover from the Owner payment for Work executed,including reasonable overhead and profit,costs incurred by reason of such termination,and damages. §14.1.4 If the Work is stopped for a period of 60 consecutive days through no act or fault of the Contractor or a Subcontractor or their agents or employees or any other persons performing portions of the Work under contract with the Contractor because the Owner has repeatedly failed to fulfill the Owner's obligations under the Contract Documents with respect to matters important to the progress of the Work,the Contractor may,upon seven additional days' written notice to the Owner and the Architect,terminate the Contract and recover from the Owner as provided in Section 14.1.3. §14.2 TERMINATION BY THE OWNER FOR CAUSE §14.2.1 The Owner may terminate the Contract if the Contractor .1 repeatedly refuses or fails to supply enough properly skilled workers or proper materials; .2 fails to make payment to Subcontractors for materials or labor in accordance with the respective agreements between the Contractor and the Subcontractors; .3 repeatedly disregards applicable laws,statutes,ordinances,codes,rules and regulations,or lawful orders of a public authority;or .4 otherwise is guilty of substantial breach of a provision of the Contract Documents. §14.2.2 When any of the above reasons exist,the Owner,upon certification by the Initial Decision Maker that sufficient cause exists to justify such action,may without prejudice to any other rights or remedies of the Owner and after giving the Contractor and the Contractor's surety,if any,seven days' written notice,terminate employment of the Contractor and may, subject to any prior rights of the surety: .1 Exclude the Contractor from the site and take possession of all materials,equipment,tools,and construction equipment and machinery thereon owned by the Contractor; .2 Accept assignment of subcontracts pursuant to Section 5.4;and .3 Finish the Work by whatever reasonable method the Owner may deem expedient.Upon written request of the Contractor,the Owner shall furnish to the Contractor a detailed accounting of the costs incurred by the Owner in finishing the Work. §14.2.3 When the Owner terminates the Contract for one of the reasons stated in Section 14.2.1,the Contractor shall not be entitled to receive further payment until the Work is finished. §14.2.4 If the unpaid balance of the Contract Sum exceeds costs of finishing the Work,including compensation for the Architect's services and expenses made necessary thereby,and other damages incurred by the Owner and not expressly waived,such excess shall be paid to the Contractor.If such costs and damages exceed the unpaid balance, the Contractor shall pay the difference to the Owner.The amount to be paid to the Contractor or Owner,as the case may be,shall be certified by the Initial Decision Maker,upon application,and this obligation for payment shall survive termination of the Contract. §14.3 SUSPENSION BY THE OWNER FOR CONVENIENCE §14.3.1 The Owner may,without cause,order the Contractor in writing to suspend,delay or interrupt the Work in whole or in part for such period of time as the Owner may determine. Init. AIA Document A201 TO—2007.Copyright ©1911,1915,1918,1925,1937,1951,1958,1961,1963,1966,1970,1976,1987,1997 and 2007 by The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING:This AIA"Document is protected by U.S.Copyright Law and International Treaties. 36 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AIA'' Document,or any portion of it,may result in severe civil and criminal penalties,and will be 1 prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law, This document was produced by AIA software at 19:38:20 on 03/08/2009 under Order No.1000389496_1 which expires on 2/25/2010,and is not for resale. User Notes: (606649719) §13.5 TESTS AND INSPECTIONS §13.5.1 Tests,inspections and approvals of portions of the Work shall be made as required by the Contract Documents and by applicable laws,statutes,ordinances,codes,rules and regulations or lawful orders of public authorities.Unless otherwise provided,the Contractor shall make arrangements for such tests,inspections and approvals with an independent testing laboratory or entity acceptable to the Owner,or with the appropriate public authority,and shall bear all related costs of tests,inspections and approvals.The Contractor shall give the Architect timely notice of when and where tests and inspections are to be made so that the Architect may be present for such procedures.The Owner shall bear costs of(1)tests,inspections or approvals that do not become requirements until after bids are received or negotiations concluded,and(2)tests,inspections or approvals where building codes or applicable laws or regulations prohibit the Owner from delegating their cost to the Contractor. §13.5.2 If the Architect,Owner or public authorities having jurisdiction determine that portions of the Work require additional testing,inspection or approval not included under Section 13.5.1,the Architect will,upon written authorization from the Owner,instruct the Contractor to make arrangements for such additional testing,inspection or approval by an entity acceptable to the Owner,and the Contractor shall give timely notice to the Architect of when and where tests and inspections are to be made so that the Architect may be present for such procedures.Such costs,except as provided in Section 13.5.3,shall be at the Owner's expense. §13.5.3 If such procedures for testing,inspection or approval under Sections 13.5.1 and 13.5.2 reveal failure of the portions of the Work to comply with requirements established by the Contract Documents,all costs made necessary by such failure including those of repeated procedures and compensation for the Architect's services and expenses shall be at the Contractor's expense. §13.5.4 Required certificates of testing,inspection or approval shall,unless otherwise required by the Contract Documents,be secured by the Contractor and promptly delivered to the Architect. §13.5.5 If the Architect is to observe tests,inspections or approvals required by the Contract Documents,the Architect will do so promptly and,where practicable,at the normal place of testing. §13.5.6 Tests or inspections conducted pursuant to the Contract Documents shall be made promptly to avoid unreasonable delay in the Work. §13.6 INTEREST Payments due and unpaid under the Contract Documents shall bear interest from the date payment is due at such rate as the parties may agree upon in writing or,in the absence thereof,at the legal rate prevailing from time to time at the place where the Project is located. §13.7 TIME LIMITS ON CLAIMS The Owner and Contractor shall commence all claims and causes of action,whether in contract,tort,breach of warranty or otherwise,against the other arising out of or related to the Contract in accordance with the requirements of the final dispute resolution method selected in the Agreement within the time period specified by applicable law, but in any case not more than 10 years after the date of Substantial Completion of the Work.The Owner and Contractor waive all claims and causes of action not commenced in accordance with this Section 13.7. ARTICLE 14 TERMINATION OR SUSPENSION OF THE CONTRACT §14.1 TERMINATION BY THE CONTRACTOR §14.1.1 The Contractor may terminate the Contract if the Work is stopped for a period of 30 consecutive days through no act or fault of the Contractor or a Subcontractor,Sub-subcontractor or their agents or employees or any other persons or entities performing portions of the Work under direct or indirect contract with the Contractor,for any of the following reasons: .1 Issuance of an order of a court or other public authority having jurisdiction that requires all Work to be stopped; .2 An act of government, such as a declaration of national emergency that requires all Work to be stopped; AIA Document A201 TM—2007.Copyright ©1911,1915,1918,1925,1937,1951,1958,1961,1963,1966,1970,1976,1987,1997 and 2007 by The Init. American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING:This AIA" Document is protected by U.S.Copyright Law and International Treaties. 35 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AIA" Document,or any portion of it,may result in severe civil and criminal penalties,and will be / prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This document was produced by AIA software at 19:38:20 on 03/08/2009 under Order No.1000389496_1 which expires on 2/25/2010,and is not for resale. User Notes: (606649'719) §12.2.2.2 The one-year period for correction of Work shall be extended with respect to portions of Work first ,,,.k performed after Substantial Completion by the period of time between Substantial Completion and the actual completion of that portion of the Work. §12.2.2.3 The one-year period for correction of Work shall not be extended by corrective Work performed by the Contractor pursuant to this Section 12.2. §12.2.3 The Contractor shall remove from the site portions of the Work that are not in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents and are neither corrected by the Contractor nor accepted by the Owner. §12.2.4 The Contractor shall bear the cost of correcting destroyed or damaged construction,whether completed or partially completed,of the Owner or separate contractors caused by the Contractor's correction or removal of Work that is not in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents. §12.2.5 Nothing contained in this Section 12.2 shall be construed to establish a period of limitation with respect to other obligations the Contractor has under the Contract Documents.Establishment of the one-year period for correction of Work as described in Section 12.2.2 relates only to the specific obligation of the Contractor to correct the Work,and has no relationship to the time within which the obligation to comply with the Contract Documents may be sought to be enforced,nor to the time within which proceedings may be commenced to establish the Contractor's liability with respect to the Contractor's obligations other than specifically to correct the Work. §12.3 ACCEPTANCE OF NONCONFORMING WORK If the Owner prefers to accept Work that is not in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents,the Owner may do so instead of requiring its removal and correction,in which case the Contract Sum will be reduced as appropriate and equitable.Such adjustment shall be effected whether or not final payment has been made. ARTICLE 13 MISCELLANEOUS PROVISIONS §13.1 GOVERNING LAW The Contract shall be governed by the law of the place where the Project is located except that,if the parties have selected arbitration as the method of binding dispute resolution,the Federal Arbitration Act shall govern Section 15.4. §13.2 SUCCESSORS AND ASSIGNS §13.2.1 The Owner and Contractor respectively bind themselves,their partners,successors,assigns and legal representatives to covenants,agreements and obligations contained in the Contract Documents.Except as provided in Section 13.2.2,neither party to the Contract shall assign the Contract as a whole without written consent of the other.If either party attempts to make such an assignment without such consent,that party shall nevertheless remain legally responsible for all obligations under the Contract. §13.2.2 The Owner may,without consent of the Contractor,assign the Contract to a lender providing construction financing for the Project,if the lender assumes the Owner's rights and obligations under the Contract Documents. The Contractor shall execute all consents reasonably required to facilitate such assignment. §13.3 WRITTEN NOTICE Written notice shall be deemed to have been duly served if delivered in person to the individual,to a member of the firm or entity,or to an officer of the corporation for which it was intended;or if delivered at,or sent by registered or certified mail or by courier service providing proof of delivery to,the last business address known to the party giving notice. §13.4 RIGHTS AND REMEDIES §13.4.1 Duties and obligations imposed by the Contract Documents and rights and remedies available thereunder shall be in addition to and not a limitation of duties,obligations,rights and remedies otherwise imposed or available by law. §13.4.2 No action or failure to act by the Owner,Architect or Contractor shall constitute a waiver of a right or duty afforded them under the Contract,nor shall such action or failure to act constitute approval of or acquiescence in a breach there under,except as may be specifically agreed in writing. Init. AIA Document A201 TM—2007.Copyright ©1911,1915,1918,1925,1937,1951,1958,1961,1963,1966,1970,1976,1987,1997 and 2007 by The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING:This AW' Document is protected by U.S.Copyright Law and International Treaties, S4 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AIA" Document..or any portion of it,may result in severe civil and criminal penalties,and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the lava. This document was produced by AIA software at 19:38:20 on 03/08/2009 under Order No.1000389496_1 which expires on 2/25/2010,and is not for resale. User Notes: (606649719) Owner shall distribute in accordance with such agreement as the parties in interest may reach,or as determined in accordance with the method of binding dispute resolution selected in the Agreement between the Owner and Contractor.If after such loss no other special agreement is made and unless the Owner terminates the Contract for convenience,replacement of damaged property shall be performed by the Contractor after notification of a Change in the Work in accordance with Article 7. §11.3.10 The Owner as fiduciary shall have power to adjust and settle a loss with insurers unless one of the parties in interest shall object in writing within five days after occurrence of loss to the Owner's exercise of this power;if such objection is made,the dispute shall be resolved in the manner selected by the Owner and Contractor as the method of binding dispute resolution in the Agreement.If the Owner and Contractor have selected arbitration as the method of binding dispute resolution,the Owner as fiduciary shall make settlement with insurers or,in the case of a dispute over distribution of insurance proceeds,in accordance with the directions of the arbitrators. §11.4 PERFORMANCE BOND AND PAYMENT BOND §11.4.1 The Owner shall have the right to require the Contractor to furnish bonds covering faithful performance of the Contract and payment of obligations arising thereunder as stipulated in bidding requirements or specifically required in the Contract Documents on the date of execution of the Contract. §11.4.2 Upon the request of any person or entity appearing to be a potential beneficiary of bonds covering payment of obligations arising under the Contract,the Contractor shall promptly furnish a copy of the bonds or shall authorize a copy to be furnished. ARTICLE 12 UNCOVERING AND CORRECTION OF WORK §12.1 UNCOVERING OF WORK §12.1.1 If a portion of the Work is covered contrary to the Architect's request or to requirements specifically expressed in the Contract Documents,it must,if requested in writing by the Architect,be uncovered for the Architect's examination and be replaced at the Contractor's expense without change in the Contract Time. §12.1.2 If a portion of the Work has been covered that the Architect has not specifically requested to examine prior to its being covered,the Architect may request to see such Work and it shall be uncovered by the Contractor.If such Work is in accordance with the Contract Documents,costs of uncovering and replacement shall,by appropriate Change Order,be at the Owner's expense.If such Work is not in accordance with the Contract Documents,such costs and the cost of correction shall be at the Contractor's expense unless the condition was caused by the Owner or a separate contractor in which event the Owner shall be responsible for payment of such costs. §12.2 CORRECTION OF WORK §12.2.1 BEFORE OR AFTER SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION The Contractor shall promptly correct Work rejected by the Architect or failing to conform to the requirements of the Contract Documents, whether discovered before or after Substantial Completion and whether or not fabricated, installed or completed.Costs of correcting such rejected Work,including additional testing and inspections,the cost of uncovering and replacement,and compensation for the Architect's services and expenses made necessary thereby,shall be at the Contractor's expense. §12.2.2 AFTER SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION §12.2.2.1 In addition to the Contractor's obligations under Section 3.5,if,within one year after the date of Substantial Completion of the Work or designated portion thereof or after the date for commencement of warranties established under Section 9.9.1,or by terms of an applicable special warranty required by the Contract Documents, any of the Work is found to be not in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents,the Contractor shall correct it promptly after receipt of written notice from the Owner to do so unless the Owner has previously given the Contractor a written acceptance of such condition.The Owner shall give such notice promptly after discovery of the condition.During the one-year period for correction of Work,if the Owner fails to notify the Contractor and give the Contractor an opportunity to make the correction,the Owner waives the rights to require correction by the Contractor and to make a claim for breach of warranty.If the Contractor fails to correct nonconforming Work within a reasonable time during that period after receipt of notice from the Owner or Architect,the Owner may correct it in accordance with Section 2.4. Init. AIA Document A201 Tm—2007.Copyright ©1911,1915,1918,1925,1937,1951,1958,1961,1963,1966,1970,1976,1987,1997 and 2007 by The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING:This AIA" Document is protected by U.S.Copyright Law and International Treaties. 33 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AfA"' Document,or any portion of it,may result in severe civil and criminal penalties,and will be / prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This document was produced by AIA software at 19:38:20 on 03/08/2009 under Order No.1000389496_1 which expires on 2/25/2010,and is not for resale. User Notes: (606649719) otherwise.The Owner and the Contractor shall take reasonable steps to obtain consent of the insurance company or , companies and shall, without mutual written consent,take no action with respect to partial occupancy or use that would cause cancellation,lapse or reduction of insurance. §11.3.2 BOILER AND MACHINERY INSURANCE The Owner shall purchase and maintain boiler and machinery insurance required by the Contract Documents or by law,which shall specifically cover such insured objects during installation and until final acceptance by the Owner; this insurance shall include interests of the Owner,Contractor,Subcontractors and Sub-subcontractors in the Work, and the Owner and Contractor shall be named insureds. §11.3.3 LOSS OF USE INSURANCE The Owner,at the Owner's option,may purchase and maintain such insurance as will insure the Owner against loss of use of the Owner's property due to fire or other hazards,however caused.The Owner waives all rights of action against the Contractor for loss of use of the Owner's property,including consequential losses due to fire or other hazards however caused. §11.3.4 If the Contractor requests in writing that insurance for risks other than those described herein or other special causes of loss be included in the property insurance policy,the Owner shall,if possible,include such insurance,and the cost thereof shall be charged to the Contractor by appropriate Change Order. §11.3.5 If during the Project construction period the Owner insures properties,real or personal or both,at or adjacent to the site by property insurance under policies separate from those insuring the Project,or if after final payment property insurance is to be provided on the completed Project through a policy or policies other than those insuring the Project during the construction period,the Owner shall waive all rights in accordance with the terms of Section 11.3.7 for damages caused by fire or other causes of loss covered by this separate property insurance.All separate policies shall provide this waiver of subrogation by endorsement or otherwise. §11.3.6 Before an exposure to loss may occur,the Owner shall file with the Contractor a copy of each policy that includes insurance coverages required by this Section 11.3.Each policy shall contain all generally applicable AAW conditions,definitions,exclusions and endorsements related to this Project.Each policy shall contain a provision that the policy will not be canceled or allowed to expire,and that its limits will not be reduced,until at least 30 days' prior written notice has been given to the Contractor. §11.31 WAIVERS OF SUBROGATION The Owner and Contractor waive all rights against(1)each other and any of their subcontractors,sub- subcontractors,agents and employees,each of the other,and(2)the Architect,Architect's consultants,separate contractors described in Article 6,if any,and any of their subcontractors,sub-subcontractors,agents and employees, for damages caused by fire or other causes of loss to the extent covered by property insurance obtained pursuant to this Section 11.3 or other property insurance applicable to the Work,except such rights as they have to proceeds of such insurance held by the Owner as fiduciary.The Owner or Contractor,as appropriate,shall require of the Architect,Architect's consultants,separate contractors described in Article 6,if any,and the subcontractors,sub- subcontractors,agents and employees of any of them,by appropriate agreements,written where legally required for validity, similar waivers each in favor of other parties enumerated herein.The policies shall provide such waivers of subrogation by endorsement or otherwise.A waiver of subrogation shall be effective as to a person or entity even though that person or entity would otherwise have a duty of indemnification,contractual or otherwise,did not pay the insurance premium directly or indirectly,and whether or not the person or entity had an insurable interest in the property damaged. §11.3.8 A loss insured under the Owner's property insurance shall be adjusted by the Owner as fiduciary and made payable to the Owner as fiduciary for the insureds,as their interests may appear,subject to requirements of any applicable mortgagee clause and of Section 11.3.10.The Contractor shall pay Subcontractors their just shares of insurance proceeds received by the Contractor,and by appropriate agreements,written where legally required for validity,shall require Subcontractors to make payments to their Sub-subcontractors in similar manner. §11.3.9 If required in writing by a party in interest,the Owner as fiduciary shall,upon occurrence of an insured loss, give bond for proper performance of the Owner's duties.The cost of required bonds shall be charged against proceeds received as fiduciary.The Owner shall deposit in a separate account proceeds so received,which the *�'* Init. AIA Document A201 Tµ—2007.Copyright ©1911,1915,1918,1925,1937,1951,1958,1961,1963,1966,1970,1976,1987,1997 and 2007 by The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING:This AIA" Document is protected by U.S.Copyright Law and international Treaties. 32 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AIA` Document,or any portion of it,may result in severe civil and criminal penalties,and will be / prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This document was produced by AIA software at 19:38:20 on 03/08/2009 under Order No.1000389496_1 which expires on 2/25/2010,and is not for resale. User Notes: (606649719) of Work or for such other period for maintenance of completed operations coverage as specified in the Contract Documents. §11.1.3 Certificates of insurance acceptable to the Owner shall be filed with the Owner prior to commencement of the Work and thereafter upon renewal or replacement of each required policy of insurance.These certificates and the insurance policies required by this Section 11.1 shall contain a provision that coverages afforded under the policies will not be canceled or allowed to expire until at least 30 days' prior written notice has been given to the Owner.An additional certificate evidencing continuation of liability coverage,including coverage for completed operations, shall be submitted with the final Application for Payment as required by Section 9.10.2 and thereafter upon renewal or replacement of such coverage until the expiration of the time required by Section 11.1.2.Information concerning reduction of coverage on account of revised limits or claims paid under the General Aggregate,or both,shall be furnished by the Contractor with reasonable promptness. §11.1.4 The Contractor shall cause the commercial liability coverage required by the Contract Documents to include (1)the Owner,the Architect and the Architect's Consultants as additional insureds for claims caused in whole or in part by the Contractor's negligent acts or omissions during the Contractor's operations;and(2)the Owner as an additional insured for claims caused in whole or in part by the Contractor's negligent acts or omissions during the Contractor's completed operations. §11.2 OWNER'S LIABILITY INSURANCE The Owner shall be responsible for purchasing and maintaining the Owner's usual liability insurance. §11.3 PROPERTY INSURANCE §11.3.1 Unless otherwise provided,the Owner shall purchase and maintain,in a company or companies lawfully authorized to do business in the jurisdiction in which the Project is located,property insurance written on a builder's risk"all-risk"or equivalent policy form in the amount of the initial Contract Sum,plus value of subsequent Contract Modifications and cost of materials supplied or installed by others,comprising total value for the entire Project at the site on a replacement cost basis without optional deductibles.Such property insurance shall be maintained, unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents or otherwise agreed in writing by all persons and entities who are beneficiaries of such insurance,until final payment has been made as provided in Section 9.10 or until no person or entity other than the Owner has an insurable interest in the property required by this Section 11.3 to be covered, whichever is later.This insurance shall include interests of the Owner,the Contractor,Subcontractors and Sub- subcontractors in the Project. §11.3.1.1 Property insurance shall be on an "all-risk"or equivalent policy form and shall include,without limitation, insurance against the perils of fire(with extended coverage)and physical loss or damage including,without duplication of coverage,theft,vandalism,malicious mischief,collapse,earthquake,flood,windstorm,falsework, testing and startup,temporary buildings and debris removal including demolition occasioned by enforcement of any applicable legal requirements,and shall cover reasonable compensation for Architect's and Contractor's services and expenses required as a result of such insured loss. §11.3.1.2 If the Owner does not intend to purchase such property insurance required by the Contract and with all of the coverages in the amount described above,the Owner shall so inform the Contractor in writing prior to commencement of the Work.The Contractor may then effect insurance that will protect the interests of the Contractor,Subcontractors and Sub-subcontractors in the Work,and by appropriate Change Order the cost thereof shall be charged to the Owner.If the Contractor is damaged by the failure or neglect of the Owner to purchase or maintain insurance as described above,without so notifying the Contractor in writing,then the Owner shall bear all reasonable costs properly attributable thereto. §11.3.1.3 If the property insurance requires deductibles,the Owner shall pay costs not covered because of such deductibles. §11.3.1.4 This property insurance shall cover portions of the Work stored off the site,and also portions of the Work in transit. §11.3.1.5 Partial occupancy or use in accordance with Section 9.9 shall not commence until the insurance company Ir.. or companies providing property insurance have consented to such partial occupancy or use by endorsement or Init. AIA Document A201 Tm—20D7.Copyright ©1911,1915,1918,1925,1937,1951,1958,1961,1963,1966,1970,1976,1987,1997 and 2007 by The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING:This AIA' Document is protected by U.S.Copyright Law and International Treaties. 31 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AIA` Document,or any portion of it,may result in severe civil and criminal penalties.and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This document was produced by AIA software at 19:38:20 on 03/0812009 under Order No.1000389496_1 which expires on 2/25/2010,and is not for resale. User Notes: (606649719) §10.3.3 To the fullest extent permitted by law,the Owner shall indemnify and hold harmless the Contractor, Subcontractors,Architect,Architect's consultants and agents and employees of any of them from and against claims,damages,losses and expenses,including but not limited to attorneys' fees,arising out of or resulting from performance of the Work in the affected area if in fact the material or substance presents the risk of bodily injury or death as described in Section 10.3.1 and has not been rendered harmless,provided that such claim,damage,loss or expense is attributable to bodily injury,sickness,disease or death,or to injury to or destruction of tangible property (other than the Work itself),except to the extent that such damage,loss or expense is due to the fault or negligence of the party seeking indemnity. §10.3.4 The Owner shall not be responsible under this Section 10.3 for materials or substances the Contractor brings to the site unless such materials or substances are required by the Contract Documents.The Owner shall be responsible for materials or substances required by the Contract Documents,except to the extent of the Contractor's fault or negligence in the use and handling of such materials or substances. §10.3.5 The Contractor shall indemnify the Owner for the cost and expense the Owner incurs(1)for remediation of a material or substance the Contractor brings to the site and negligently handles,or(2)where the Contractor fails to perform its obligations under Section 10.3.1,except to the extent that the cost and expense are due to the Owner's fault or negligence. §10.3.6 If,without negligence on the part of the Contractor,the Contractor is held liable by a government agency for the cost of remediation of a hazardous material or substance solely by reason of performing Work as required by the Contract Documents,the Owner shall indemnify the Contractor for all cost and expense thereby incurred. §10.4 EMERGENCIES In an emergency affecting safety of persons or property,the Contractor shall act,at the Contractor's discretion,to prevent threatened damage,injury or loss.Additional compensation or extension of time claimed by the Contractor on account of an emergency shall be determined as provided in Article 15 and Article 7. ARTICLE 11 INSURANCE AND BONDS Aak §11.1 CONTRACTOR'S LIABILITY INSURANCE §11.1.1 The Contractor shall purchase from and maintain in a company or companies lawfully authorized to do business in the jurisdiction in which the Project is located such insurance as will protect the Contractor from claims set forth below which may arise out of or result from the Contractor's operations and completed operations under the Contract and for which the Contractor may be legally liable,whether such operations be by the Contractor or by a Subcontractor or by anyone directly or indirectly employed by any of them,or by anyone for whose acts any of them may be liable: .1 Claims under workers' compensation,disability benefit and other similar employee benefit acts that are applicable to the Work to be performed; .2 Claims for damages because of bodily injury,occupational sickness or disease,or death of the Contractor's employees; .3 Claims for damages because of bodily injury,sickness or disease,or death of any person other than the Contractor's employees; .4 Claims for damages insured by usual personal injury liability coverage; .5 Claims for damages,other than to the Work itself,because of injury to or destruction of tangible property,including loss of use resulting therefrom; .6 Claims for damages because of bodily injury,death of a person or property damage arising out of ownership,maintenance or use of a motor vehicle; .7 Claims for bodily injury or property damage arising out of completed operations;and .8 Claims involving contractual liability insurance applicable to the Contractor's obligations under Section 3.18. §11.1.2 The insurance required by Section 11.1.1 shall be written for not less than limits of liability specified in the Contract Documents or required by law,whichever coverage is greater.Coverages, whether written on an occurrence or claims-made basis,shall be maintained without interruption from the date of commencement of the Work until the date of final payment and termination of any coverage required to be maintained after final payment, and,with respect to the Contractor's completed operations coverage,until the expiration of the period for correction Init. AIA Document A201 TM—2007.Copyright ©1911,1915,1918,1925,1937,1951,1958,1961,1963,1966,1970,1976,1987,1997 and 2007 by The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING:This AIA" Document is protected by U.S.Copyright Law and International Treaties. 30 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AIA``' Document.or any portion of it,may result in severe civil and criminal penalties,and will be / prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This document was produced by AIA software at 19:38:20 on 03/08/2009 under Order No.1000389496_1 which expires on 2/25/2010,and is not for resale. User Notes: (606649719) §10.2.2 The Contractor shall comply with and give notices required by applicable laws,statutes,ordinances,codes, rules and regulations,and lawful orders of public authorities bearing on safety of persons or property or their protection from damage,injury or loss. §10.2.3 The Contractor shall erect and maintain,as required by existing conditions and performance of the Contract, reasonable safeguards for safety and protection,including posting danger signs and other warnings against hazards, promulgating safety regulations and notifying owners and users of adjacent sites and utilities. §10.2.4 When use or storage of explosives or other hazardous materials or equipment or unusual methods are necessary for execution of the Work,the Contractor shall exercise utmost care and carry on such activities under supervision of properly qualified personnel. §10.2.5 The Contractor shall promptly remedy damage and loss(other than damage or loss insured under property insurance required by the Contract Documents)to property referred to in Sections 10.2.1.2 and 10.2.1.3 caused in whole or in part by the Contractor,a Subcontractor,a Sub-subcontractor,or anyone directly or indirectly employed by any of them,or by anyone for whose acts they may be liable and for which the Contractor is responsible under Sections 10.2.1.2 and 10.2.1.3,except damage or loss attributable to acts or omissions of the Owner or Architect or anyone directly or indirectly employed by either of them,or by anyone for whose acts either of them may be liable, and not attributable to the fault or negligence of the Contractor.The foregoing obligations of the Contractor are in addition to the Contractor's obligations under Section 3.18. §10.2.6 The Contractor shall designate a responsible member of the Contractor's organization at the site whose duty shall be the prevention of accidents.This person shall be the Contractor's superintendent unless otherwise designated by the Contractor in writing to the Owner and Architect. §10.2.7 The Contractor shall not permit any part of the construction or site to be loaded so as to cause damage or create an unsafe condition. §10.2.8 INJURY OR DAMAGE TO PERSON OR PROPERTY If either party suffers injury or damage to person or property because of an act or omission of the other party,or of others for whose acts such party is legally responsible,written notice of such injury or damage,whether or not insured,shall be given to the other party within a reasonable time not exceeding 21 days after discovery.The notice shall provide sufficient detail to enable the other party to investigate the matter. §10.3 HAZARDOUS MATERIALS §10.3.1 The Contractor is responsible for compliance with any requirements included in the Contract Documents regarding hazardous materials.If the Contractor encounters a hazardous material or substance not addressed in the Contract Documents and if reasonable precautions will be inadequate to prevent foreseeable bodily injury or death to persons resulting from a material or substance,including but not limited to asbestos or polychlorinated biphenyl (PCB),encountered on the site by the Contractor,the Contractor shall,upon recognizing the condition,immediately stop Work in the affected area and report the condition to the Owner and Architect in writing. §10.3.2 Upon receipt of the Contractor's written notice,the Owner shall obtain the services of a licensed laboratory to verify the presence or absence of the material or substance reported by the Contractor and,in the event such material or substance is found to be present,to cause it to be rendered harmless.Unless otherwise required by the Contract Documents,the Owner shall furnish in writing to the Contractor and Architect the names and qualifications of persons or entities who are to perform tests verifying the presence or absence of such material or substance or who are to perform the task of removal or safe containment of such material or substance.The Contractor and the Architect will promptly reply to the Owner in writing stating whether or not either has reasonable objection to the persons or entities proposed by the Owner.If either the Contractor or Architect has an objection to a person or entity proposed by the Owner,the Owner shall propose another to whom the Contractor and the Architect have no reasonable objection.When the material or substance has been rendered harmless,Work in the affected area shall resume upon written agreement of the Owner and Contractor.By Change Order,the Contract Time shall be extended appropriately and the Contract Sum shall be increased in the amount of the Contractor's reasonable additional costs of shut-down,delay and start-up. AIA Document A201 TM—2007.Copyright ©1911,1915,1918,1925,1937,1951,1958,1961,1963,1966,1970,1976,1987,1997 and 2007 by The Init. American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING:This Alk" Document is protected by U.S.Copyright Law and International Treaties. 29 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AW Document.or any portion of it;may result in severe civil and criminal penalties,and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This document was produced by AIA software at 19:38:20 on 03/08/2009 under Order No.1000389496_1 which expires on 2/25/2010,and is not for resale. User Notes: (606649719) Architect finds the Work acceptable under the Contract Documents and the Contract fully performed,the Architect , will promptly issue a final Certificate for Payment stating that to the best of the Architect's knowledge,information and belief,and on the basis of the Architect's on-site visits and inspections,the Work has been completed in accordance with terms and conditions of the Contract Documents and that the entire balance found to be due the Contractor and noted in the final Certificate is due and payable.The Architect's final Certificate for Payment will constitute a further representation that conditions listed in Section 9.10.2 as precedent to the Contractor's being entitled to final payment have been fulfilled. §9.10.2 Neither final payment nor any remaining retained percentage shall become due until the Contractor submits to the Architect(1)an affidavit that payrolls,bills for materials and equipment,and other indebtedness connected with the Work for which the Owner or the Owner's property might be responsible or encumbered(less amounts withheld by Owner)have been paid or otherwise satisfied,(2)a certificate evidencing that insurance required by the Contract Documents to remain in force after final payment is currently in effect and will not be canceled or allowed to expire until at least 30 days'prior written notice has been given to the Owner,(3)a written statement that the Contractor knows of no substantial reason that the insurance will not be renewable to cover the period required by the Contract Documents,(4)consent of surety,if any,to final payment and(5),if required by the Owner,other data establishing payment or satisfaction of obligations,such as receipts,releases and waivers of liens,claims,security interests or encumbrances arising out of the Contract,to the extent and in such form as may be designated by the Owner.If a Subcontractor refuses to furnish a release or waiver required by the Owner,the Contractor may furnish a bond satisfactory to the Owner to indemnify the Owner against such lien.If such lien remains unsatisfied after payments are made,the Contractor shall refund to the Owner all money that the Owner may be compelled to pay in discharging such lien,including all costs and reasonable attorneys' fees. §9.10.3 If,after Substantial Completion of the Work,final completion thereof is materially delayed through no fault of the Contractor or by issuance of Change Orders affecting final completion,and the Architect so confirms,the Owner shall,upon application by the Contractor and certification by the Architect,and without terminating the Contract,make payment of the balance due for that portion of the Work fully completed and accepted.If the remaining balance for Work not fully completed or corrected is less than retainage stipulated in the Contract Documents,and if bonds have been furnished,the written consent of surety to payment of the balance due for that , portion of the Work fully completed and accepted shall be submitted by the Contractor to the Architect prior to certification of such payment. Such payment shall be made under terms and conditions governing final payment, except that it shall not constitute a waiver of claims. §9.10.4 The making of final payment shall constitute a waiver of Claims by the Owner except those arising from .1 liens,Claims,security interests or encumbrances arising out of the Contract and unsettled; .2 failure of the Work to comply with the requirements of the Contract Documents;or .3 terms of special warranties required by the Contract Documents. §9.10.5 Acceptance of final payment by the Contractor,a Subcontractor or material supplier shall constitute a waiver of claims by that payee except those previously made in writing and identified by that payee as unsettled at the time of final Application for Payment. ARTICLE 10 PROTECTION OF PERSONS AND PROPERTY §10.1 SAFETY PRECAUTIONS AND PROGRAMS The Contractor shall be responsible for initiating,maintaining and supervising all safety precautions and programs in connection with the performance of the Contract. §10.2 SAFETY OF PERSONS AND PROPERTY §10.2.1 The Contractor shall take reasonable precautions for safety of,and shall provide reasonable protection to prevent damage,injury or loss to .1 employees on the Work and other persons who may be affected thereby; .2 the Work and materials and equipment to be incorporated therein,whether in storage on or off the site,under care,custody or control of the Contractor or the Contractor's Subcontractors or Sub- subcontractors;and .3 other property at the site or adjacent thereto, such as trees, shrubs,lawns, walks,pavements, roadways,structures and utilities not designated for removal,relocation or replacement in the course of construction. Init. AIA Document A201 T"'—2007.Copyright C 1911,1915,1918,1925,1937,1951,1958,1961,1963,1966,1970,1976,1987,1997 and 2007 by The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING:This AtA" Document is protected by U.S.Copyright Law and International Treaties. 28 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AIA"' Document.or any portion of it,may result in severe civil and criminal penalties,and will be / prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This document was produced by AIA software at 19:38:20 on 03/08/2009 under Order No.1000389496_1 which expires on 2/25/2010,and is not for resale. User Notes: (606649719) stop the Work until payment of the amount owing has been received.The Contract Time shall be extended appropriately and the Contract Sum shall be increased by the amount of the Contractor's reasonable costs of shut- down,delay and start-up,plus interest as provided for in the Contract Documents. §9.8 SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION §9.8.1 Substantial Completion is the stage in the progress of the Work when the Work or designated portion thereof is sufficiently complete in accordance with the Contract Documents so that the Owner can occupy or utilize the Work for its intended use. §9.8.2 When the Contractor considers that the Work,or a portion thereof which the Owner agrees to accept separately,is substantially complete,the Contractor shall prepare and submit to the Architect a comprehensive list of items to be completed or corrected prior to final payment.Failure to include an item on such list does not alter the responsibility of the Contractor to complete all Work in accordance with the Contract Documents. §9.8.3 Upon receipt of the Contractor's list,the Architect will make an inspection to determine whether the Work or designated portion thereof is substantially complete.If the Architect's inspection discloses any item,whether or not included on the Contractor's list,which is not sufficiently complete in accordance with the Contract Documents so that the Owner can occupy or utilize the Work or designated portion thereof for its intended use,the Contractor shall,before issuance of the Certificate of Substantial Completion,complete or correct such item upon notification by the Architect.In such case,the Contractor shall then submit a request for another inspection by the Architect to determine Substantial Completion. §9.8.4 When the Work or designated portion thereof is substantially complete,the Architect will prepare a Certificate of Substantial Completion that shall establish the date of Substantial Completion,shall establish responsibilities of the Owner and Contractor for security,maintenance,heat,utilities,damage to the Work and insurance,and shall fix the time within which the Contractor shall finish all items on the list accompanying the Certificate.Warranties required by the Contract Documents shall commence on the date of Substantial Completion of the Work or designated portion thereof unless otherwise provided in the Certificate of Substantial Completion. AORWI §9.8.5 The Certificate of Substantial Completion shall be submitted to the Owner and Contractor for their written acceptance of responsibilities assigned to them in such Certificate.Upon such acceptance and consent of surety,if any,the Owner shall make payment of retainage applying to such Work or designated portion thereof.Such payment shall be adjusted for Work that is incomplete or not in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents. §9.9 PARTIAL OCCUPANCY OR USE §9.9.1 The Owner may occupy or use any completed or partially completed portion of the Work at any stage when such portion is designated by separate agreement with the Contractor,provided such occupancy or use is consented to by the insurer as required under Section 11.3.1.5 and authorized by public authorities having jurisdiction over the Project.Such partial occupancy or use may commence whether or not the portion is substantially complete,provided the Owner and Contractor have accepted in writing the responsibilities assigned to each of them for payments, retainage,if any,security,maintenance,heat,utilities,damage to the Work and insurance,and have agreed in writing concerning the period for correction of the Work and commencement of warranties required by the Contract Documents.When the Contractor considers a portion substantially complete,the Contractor shall prepare and submit a list to the Architect as provided under Section 9.8.2.Consent of the Contractor to partial occupancy or use shall not be unreasonably withheld.The stage of the progress of the Work shall be determined by written agreement between the Owner and Contractor or,if no agreement is reached,by decision of the Architect. §9.9.2 Immediately prior to such partial occupancy or use,the Owner,Contractor and Architect shall jointly inspect the area to be occupied or portion of the Work to be used in order to determine and record the condition of the Work. §9.9.3 Unless otherwise agreed upon,partial occupancy or use of a portion or portions of the Work shall not constitute acceptance of Work not complying with the requirements of the Contract Documents. §9.10 FINAL COMPLETION AND FINAL PAYMENT §9.10.1 Upon receipt of the Contractor's written notice that the Work is ready for final inspection and acceptance ms's` and upon receipt of a final Application for Payment,the Architect will promptly make such inspection and,when the AIA Document A201 T"'—2007.Copyright ©1911,1915,1918,1925,1937,1951,1958,1961,1963,1966,1970,1976,1987,1997 and 2007 by The Init. American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING:This AIA" Document is protected by U.S.Copyright Law and International Treaties. 27 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AIA' Document,or any portion of it,may result in severe civil and criminal penalties..and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This document was produced by AIA software at 19:38:20 on 03/0812009 under Order No.1000389496_1 which expires on 2/25/2010,and is not for resale. U (606649719) User Notes: .3 failure of the Contractor to make payments properly to Subcontractors or for labor,materials or 00110 equipment; .4 reasonable evidence that the Work cannot be completed for the unpaid balance of the Contract Sum; .5 damage to the Owner or a separate contractor; .6 reasonable evidence that the Work will not be completed within the Contract Time,and that the unpaid balance would not be adequate to cover actual or liquidated damages for the anticipated delay; or .7 repeated failure to carry out the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents. §9.5.2 When the above reasons for withholding certification are removed,certification will be made for amounts previously withheld. §9.5.3 If the Architect withholds certification for payment under Section 9.5.1.3,the Owner may,at its sole option, issue joint checks to the Contractor and to any Subcontractor or material or equipment suppliers to whom the Contractor failed to make payment for Work properly performed or material or equipment suitably delivered.If the Owner makes payments by joint check,the Owner shall notify the Architect and the Architect will reflect such payment on the next Certificate for Payment. §9.6 PROGRESS PAYMENTS §9.6.1 After the Architect has issued a Certificate for Payment,the Owner shall make payment in the manner and within the time provided in the Contract Documents,and shall so notify the Architect. §9.6.2 The Contractor shall pay each Subcontractor no later than seven days after receipt of payment from the Owner the amount to which the Subcontractor is entitled,reflecting percentages actually retained from payments to the Contractor on account of the Subcontractor's portion of the Work.The Contractor shall,by appropriate agreement with each Subcontractor,require each Subcontractor to make payments to Sub-subcontractors in a similar manner. §9.6.3 The Architect will,on request,furnish to a Subcontractor,if practicable,information regarding percentages of ,ffllllj�, completion or amounts applied for by the Contractor and action taken thereon by the Architect and Owner on account of portions of the Work done by such Subcontractor. §9.6.4 The Owner has the right to request written evidence from the Contractor that the Contractor has properly paid Subcontractors and material and equipment suppliers amounts paid by the Owner to the Contractor for subcontracted Work.If the Contractor fails to furnish such evidence within seven days,the Owner shall have the right to contact Subcontractors to ascertain whether they have been properly paid.Neither the Owner nor Architect shall have an obligation to pay or to see to the payment of money to a Subcontractor,except as may otherwise be required by law. §9.6.5 Contractor payments to material and equipment suppliers shall be treated in a manner similar to that provided in Sections 9.6.2,9.6.3 and 9.6.4. §9.6.6 A Certificate for Payment,a progress payment,or partial or entire use or occupancy of the Project by the Owner shall not constitute acceptance of Work not in accordance with the Contract Documents. §9.6.7 Unless the Contractor provides the Owner with a payment bond in the full penal sum of the Contract Sum, payments received by the Contractor for Work properly performed by Subcontractors and suppliers shall be held by the Contractor for those Subcontractors or suppliers who performed Work or furnished materials,or both,under contract with the Contractor for which payment was made by the Owner.Nothing contained herein shall require money to be placed in a separate account and not commingled with money of the Contractor,shall create any fiduciary liability or tort liability on the part of the Contractor for breach of trust or shall entitle any person or entity to an award of punitive damages against the Contractor for breach of the requirements of this provision. §9.7 FAILURE OF PAYMENT If the Architect does not issue a Certificate for Payment,through no fault of the Contractor, within seven days after receipt of the Contractor's Application for Payment,or if the Owner does not pay the Contractor within seven days after the date established in the Contract Documents the amount certified by the Architect or awarded by binding dispute resolution,then the Contractor may,upon seven additional days' written notice to the Owner and Architect, Init. AIA Document A201TM—2007.Copyright ©1911,1915,1918,1925,1937,1951,1958,1961,1963,1966,1970,1976,1987,1997 and 2007 by The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING:This AIA' Document is protected by U.S.Copyright Law and international Treaties. 26 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AIA" Document,or any portion of it,may result in severe civil and criminal penalties,and will be / prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the lava. This document was produced by AIA software at 19:38:20 on 03/08/2009 under Order No.1000389496_1 which expires on 2/25/2010,and is not for resale. User Notes: (606649719) §9.3,1.1 As provided in Section 7.3.9,such applications may include requests for payment on account of changes in the Work that have been properly authorized by Construction Change Directives,or by interim determinations of the Architect,but not yet included in Change Orders. §9.3.1.2 Applications for Payment shall not include requests for payment for portions of the Work for which the Contractor does not intend to pay a Subcontractor or material supplier,unless such Work has been performed by others whom the Contractor intends to pay. §9.3.2 Unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents,payments shall be made on account of materials and equipment delivered and suitably stored at the site for subsequent incorporation in the Work.If approved in advance by the Owner,payment may similarly be made for materials and equipment suitably stored off the site at a location agreed upon in writing.Payment for materials and equipment stored on or off the site shall be conditioned upon compliance by the Contractor with procedures satisfactory to the Owner to establish the Owner's title to such materials and equipment or otherwise protect the Owner's interest,and shall include the costs of applicable insurance,storage and transportation to the site for such materials and equipment stored off the site. §9.3,3 The Contractor warrants that title to all Work covered by an Application for Payment will pass to the Owner no later than the time of payment.The Contractor further warrants that upon submittal of an Application for Payment all Work for which Certificates for Payment have been previously issued and payments received from the Owner shall,to the best of the Contractor's knowledge,information and belief,be free and clear of liens,claims, security interests or encumbrances in favor of the Contractor,Subcontractors,material suppliers,or other persons or entities making a claim by reason of having provided labor,materials and equipment relating to the Work. §9.4 CERTIFICATES FOR PAYMENT §9.4,1 The Architect will,within seven days after receipt of the Contractor's Application for Payment,either issue to the Owner a Certificate for Payment,with a copy to the Contractor,for such amount as the Architect determines is properly due,or notify the Contractor and Owner in writing of the Architect's reasons for withholding certification in whole or in part as provided in Section 9.5.1. §9.4.2 The issuance of a Certificate for Payment will constitute a representation by the Architect to the Owner, based on the Architect's evaluation of the Work and the data comprising the Application for Payment,that,to the best of the Architect's knowledge,information and belief,the Work has progressed to the point indicated and that the quality of the Work is in accordance with the Contract Documents.The foregoing representations are subject to an evaluation of the Work for conformance with the Contract Documents upon Substantial Completion,to results of subsequent tests and inspections,to correction of minor deviations from the Contract Documents prior to completion and to specific qualifications expressed by the Architect.The issuance of a Certificate for Payment will further constitute a representation that the Contractor is entitled to payment in the amount certified.However,the issuance of a Certificate for Payment will not be a representation that the Architect has(1)made exhaustive or continuous on- site inspections to check the quality or quantity of the Work,(2)reviewed construction means,methods,techniques, sequences or procedures, (3)reviewed copies of requisitions received from Subcontractors and material suppliers and other data requested by the Owner to substantiate the Contractor's right to payment,or(4)made examination to ascertain how or for what purpose the Contractor has used money previously paid on account of the Contract Sum. §9.5 DECISIONS TO WITHHOLD CERTIFICATION §9.5.1 The Architect may withhold a Certificate for Payment in whole or in part,to the extent reasonably necessary to protect the Owner,if in the Architect's opinion the representations to the Owner required by Section 9.4.2 cannot be made.If the Architect is unable to certify payment in the amount of the Application,the Architect will notify the Contractor and Owner as provided in Section 9.4.1.If the Contractor and Architect cannot agree on a revised amount,the Architect will promptly issue a Certificate for Payment for the amount for which the Architect is able to make such representations to the Owner.The Architect may also withhold a Certificate for Payment or,because of subsequently discovered evidence,may nullify the whole or a part of a Certificate for Payment previously issued,to such extent as may be necessary in the Architect's opinion to protect the Owner from loss for which the Contractor is responsible,including loss resulting from acts and omissions described in Section 3.3.2,because of .1 defective Work not remedied; .2 third party claims filed or reasonable evidence indicating probable filing of such claims unless security acceptable to the Owner is provided by the Contractor; Init. AIA Document A201 TM—2007.Copyright ©1911,1915,1918,1925,1937,1951,1958,1961,1963,1966,1970,1976,1987,1997 and 2007 by The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING:This Atk' Document is protected by U,S.Copyright Law and International Treaties. 25 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AIA" Document,or any portion of it,may result in severe civil and criminal penalties,and will be / prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This document was produced by AIA software at 19:38:20 on 03/0812009 under Order No.1000389496_1 which expires on 2/25/2010,and is not for resale. User Notes: (606649719) ARTICLE 8 TIME §8.1 DEFINITIONS ''` §8.1.1 Unless otherwise provided,Contract Time is the period of time, including authorized adjustments,allotted in the Contract Documents for Substantial Completion of the Work. §8.1.2 The date of commencement of the Work is the date established in the Agreement. §8.1.3 The date of Substantial Completion is the date certified by the Architect in accordance with Section 9.8. §8.1.4 The term"day"as used in the Contract Documents shall mean calendar day unless otherwise specifically defined. §8.2 PROGRESS AND COMPLETION §8.2.1 Time limits stated in the Contract Documents are of the essence of the Contract.By executing the Agreement the Contractor confirms that the Contract Time is a reasonable period for performing the Work. §8.2.2 The Contractor shall not knowingly,except by agreement or instruction of the Owner in writing,prematurely commence operations on the site or elsewhere prior to the effective date of insurance required by Article 11 to be furnished by the Contractor and Owner.The date of commencement of the Work shall not be changed by the effective date of such insurance. §8.2.3 The Contractor shall proceed expeditiously with adequate forces and shall achieve Substantial Completion within the Contract Time. §8.3 DELAYS AND EXTENSIONS OF TIME §8.3.1 If the Contractor is delayed at any time in the commencement or progress of the Work by an act or neglect of the Owner or Architect,or of an employee of either,or of a separate contractor employed by the Owner;or by changes ordered in the Work;or by labor disputes,fire,unusual delay in deliveries,unavoidable casualties or other causes beyond the Contractor's control;or by delay authorized by the Owner pending mediation and arbitration;or .mow, by other causes that the Architect determines may justify delay,then the Contract Time shall be extended by Change Order for such reasonable time as the Architect may determine. §8.3.2 Claims relating to time shall be made in accordance with applicable provisions of Article 15. §8.3.3 This Section 8.3 does not preclude recovery of damages for delay by either party under other provisions of the Contract Documents. ARTICLE 9 PAYMENTS AND COMPLETION §9.1 CONTRACT SUM The Contract Sum is stated in the Agreement and,including authorized adjustments,is the total amount payable by the Owner to the Contractor for performance of the Work under the Contract Documents. §9.2 SCHEDULE OF VALUES Where the Contract is based on a stipulated sum or Guaranteed Maximum Price,the Contractor shall submit to the Architect,before the first Application for Payment,a schedule of values allocating the entire Contract Sum to the various portions of the Work and prepared in such form and supported by such data to substantiate its accuracy as the Architect may require.This schedule,unless objected to by the Architect,shall be used as a basis for reviewing the Contractor's Applications for Payment. §9.3 APPLICATIONS FOR PAYMENT §9.3.1 At least ten days before the date established for each progress payment,the Contractor shall submit to the Architect an itemized Application for Payment prepared in accordance with the schedule of values,if required under Section 9.2.,for completed portions of the Work. Such application shall be notarized,if required,and supported by such data substantiating the Contractor's right to payment as the Owner or Architect may require,such as copies of requisitions from Subcontractors and material suppliers,and shall reflect retainage if provided for in the Contract Documents. Init. AIA Document A201 TM—2007.Copyright ©1911,1915,1918,1925,1937,1951,1958,1961,1963,1966,1970,1976,1987,1997 and 2007 by The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING:This AIA"Document is protected by U.S.Copyright Law and International Treaties. 24 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AIA'" Document..or any portion of it,may result in severe civil and criminal penalties,and will be 1 prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This document was produced by AIA software at 19:38:20 on 03/08/2009 under Order No.1 00038 94 96_1 which expires on 2/25/2010,and is not for resale. User Notes: (606649719) .4 As provided in Section 7.3.7. §7.3.4 If unit prices are stated in the Contract Documents or subsequently agreed upon,and if quantities originally contemplated are materially changed in a proposed Change Order or Construction Change Directive so that application of such unit prices to quantities of Work proposed will cause substantial inequity to the Owner or Contractor,the applicable unit prices shall be equitably adjusted. §7.3.5 Upon receipt of a Construction Change Directive,the Contractor shall promptly proceed with the change in the Work involved and advise the Architect of the Contractor's agreement or disagreement with the method,if any, provided in the Construction Change Directive for determining the proposed adjustment in the Contract Sum or Contract Time. §7.3.6 A Construction Change Directive signed by the Contractor indicates the Contractor's agreement therewith, including adjustment in Contract Sum and Contract Time or the method for determining them. Such agreement shall be effective immediately and shall be recorded as a Change Order. §7.3.7 If the Contractor does not respond promptly or disagrees with the method for adjustment in the Contract Sum, the Architect shall determine the method and the adjustment on the basis of reasonable expenditures and savings of those performing the Work attributable to the change,including,in case of an increase in the Contract Sum,an amount for overhead and profit as set forth in the Agreement,or if no such amount is set forth in the Agreement,a reasonable amount.In such case,and also under Section 7.3.3.3,the Contractor shall keep and present,in such form as the Architect may prescribe,an itemized accounting together with appropriate supporting data.Unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents,costs for the purposes of this Section 7.3.7 shall be limited to the following: .1 Costs of labor,including social security,old age and unemployment insurance,fringe benefits required by agreement or custom,and workers' compensation insurance; .2 Costs of materials,supplies and equipment,including cost of transportation,whether incorporated or consumed; .3 Rental costs of machinery and equipment,exclusive of hand tools,whether rented from the Contractor or others; .4 Costs of premiums for all bonds and insurance,permit fees,and sales,use or similar taxes related to the Work;and .5 Additional costs of supervision and field office personnel directly attributable to the change. §7.3.8 The amount of credit to be allowed by the Contractor to the Owner for a deletion or change that results in a net decrease in the Contract Sum shall be actual net cost as confirmed by the Architect.When both additions and credits covering related Work or substitutions are involved in a change,the allowance for overhead and profit shall be figured on the basis of net increase,if any,with respect to that change. §7.3.9 Pending final determination of the total cost of a Construction Change Directive to the Owner,the Contractor may request payment for Work completed under the Construction Change Directive in Applications for Payment. The Architect will make an interim determination for purposes of monthly certification for payment for those costs and certify for payment the amount that the Architect determines,in the Architect's professional judgment,to be reasonably justified.The Architect's interim determination of cost shall adjust the Contract Sum on the same basis as a Change Order,subject to the right of either party to disagree and assert a Claim in accordance with Article 15. §7.3.10 When the Owner and Contractor agree with a determination made by the Architect concerning the adjustments in the Contract Sum and Contract Time,or otherwise reach agreement upon the adjustments,such agreement shall be effective immediately and the Architect will prepare a Change Order.Change Orders may be issued for all or any part of a Construction Change Directive. §7.4 MINOR CHANGES IN THE WORK The Architect has authority to order minor changes in the Work not involving adjustment in the Contract Sum or extension of the Contract Time and not inconsistent with the intent of the Contract Documents. Such changes will be effected by written order signed by the Architect and shall be binding on the Owner and Contractor. Init. AIA Document A201 TM—2007.Copyright ©1911,1915,1918,1925,1937,1951,1958,1961,1963,1966,1970,1976,1987,1997 and 2007 by The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING:This AIA" Document is protected by U.S.Copyright Law and International Treaties, 23 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AIA" Document.or any portion of it,may result in severe civil and criminal penalties,and will be / prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This document was produced by AIA software at 19:38:20 on 03/08/2009 under Order No.1000389496_1 which expires on 2/25/2010,and is not for resale. User Notes: (606649719) the Owner's or separate contractor's completed or partially completed construction is fit and proper to receive the Contractor's Work,except as to defects not then reasonably discoverable. §6.2.3 The Contractor shall reimburse the Owner for costs the Owner incurs that are payable to a separate contractor because of the Contractor's delays,improperly timed activities or defective construction.The Owner shall be responsible to the Contractor for costs the Contractor incurs because of a separate contractor's delays,improperly timed activities,damage to the Work or defective construction. §6.2.4 The Contractor shall promptly remedy damage the Contractor wrongfully causes to completed or partially completed construction or to property of the Owner,separate contractors as provided in Section 10.2.5. §6.2.5 The Owner and each separate contractor shall have the same responsibilities for cutting and patching as are described for the Contractor in Section 3.14. §6.3 OWNER'S RIGHT TO CLEAN UP If a dispute arises among the Contractor,separate contractors and the Owner as to the responsibility under their respective contracts for maintaining the premises and surrounding area free from waste materials and rubbish,the Owner may clean up and the Architect will allocate the cost among those responsible. ARTICLE 7 CHANGES IN THE WORK §7.1 GENERAL §7.1.1 Changes in the Work may be accomplished after execution of the Contract,and without invalidating the Contract,by Change Order,Construction Change Directive or order for a minor change in the Work subject to the limitations stated in this Article 7 and elsewhere in the Contract Documents. §7.1.2 A Change Order shall be based upon agreement among the Owner,Contractor and Architect;a Construction Change Directive requires agreement by the Owner and Architect and may or may not be agreed to by the Contractor;an order for a minor change in the Work may be issued by the Architect alone. §7.1.3 Changes in the Work shall be performed under applicable provisions of the Contract Documents,and the Contractor shall proceed promptly,unless otherwise provided in the Change Order,Construction Change Directive or order for a minor change in the Work. §7.2 CHANGE ORDERS §7.2.1 A Change Order is a written instrument prepared by the Architect and signed by the Owner,Contractor and Architect stating their agreement upon all of the following: .1 The change in the Work; .2 The amount of the adjustment,if any,in the Contract Sum;and .3 The extent of the adjustment,if any,in the Contract Time. §7.3 CONSTRUCTION CHANGE DIRECTIVES §7.3.1 A Construction Change Directive is a written order prepared by the Architect and signed by the Owner and Architect,directing a change in the Work prior to agreement on adjustment,if any,in the Contract Sum or Contract Time,or both.The Owner may by Construction Change Directive,without invalidating the Contract,order changes in the Work within the general scope of the Contract consisting of additions,deletions or other revisions,the Contract Sum and Contract Time being adjusted accordingly. §7.3.2 A Construction Change Directive shall be used in the absence of total agreement on the terms of a Change Order. §7.3.3 If the Construction Change Directive provides for an adjustment to the Contract Sum,the adjustment shall be based on one of the following methods: .1 Mutual acceptance of a lump sum properly itemized and supported by sufficient substantiating data to permit evaluation; .2 Unit prices stated in the Contract Documents or subsequently agreed upon; .3 Cost to be determined in a manner agreed upon by the parties and a mutually acceptable fixed or percentage fee;or , Init. AIA Document A201TM—2007.Copyright ©1911,1915,1918,1925,1937,1951,1958,1961,1963,1966,1970,1976,1987,1997 and 2007 by The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING:This Alk" document is protected by U.S.Copyright Law and International Treaties. 22 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AIA" Document,or any portion of it,may result in severe civil and criminal penalties,and will be / prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This document was produced by AIA software at 19:38:20 on 03/08/2009 under Order No.1000389496_1 which expires on 2/25/2010,and is not for resale. User Notes: (606649719) be at variance with the Contract Documents. Subcontractors will similarly make copies of applicable portions of such documents available to their respective proposed Sub-subcontractors. §5.4 CONTINGENT ASSIGNMENT OF SUBCONTRACTS §5.4.1 Each subcontract agreement for a portion of the Work is assigned by the Contractor to the Owner,provided that .1 assignment is effective only after termination of the Contract by the Owner for cause pursuant to Section 14.2 and only for those subcontract agreements that the Owner accepts by notifying the Subcontractor and Contractor in writing;and .2 assignment is subject to the prior rights of the surety,if any,obligated under bond relating to the Contract. When the Owner accepts the assignment of a subcontract agreement,the Owner assumes the Contractor's rights and obligations under the subcontract. §5.4,2 Upon such assignment,if the Work has been suspended for more than 30 days,the Subcontractor's compensation shall be equitably adjusted for increases in cost resulting from the suspension. §5.4.3 Upon such assignment to the Owner under this Section 5.4,the Owner may further assign the subcontract to a successor contractor or other entity.If the Owner assigns the subcontract to a successor contractor or other entity, the Owner shall nevertheless remain legally responsible for all of the successor contractor's obligations under the subcontract. ARTICLE 6 CONSTRUCTION BY OWNER OR BY SEPARATE CONTRACTORS §6.1 OWNER'S RIGHT TO PERFORM CONSTRUCTION AND TO AWARD SEPARATE CONTRACTS §6.1,1 The Owner reserves the right to perform construction or operations related to the Project with the Owner's own forces,and to award separate contracts in connection with other portions of the Project or other construction or operations on the site under Conditions of the Contract identical or substantially similar to these including those portions related to insurance and waiver of subrogation.If the Contractor claims that delay or additional cost is involved because of such action by the Owner,the Contractor shall make such Claim as provided in Article 15. §6.1,2 When separate contracts are awarded for different portions of the Project or other construction or operations on the site,the term"Contractor"in the Contract Documents in each case shall mean the Contractor who executes each separate Owner-Contractor Agreement. §6.1.3 The Owner shall provide for coordination of the activities of the Owner's own forces and of each separate contractor with the Work of the Contractor,who shall cooperate with them.The Contractor shall participate with other separate contractors and the Owner in reviewing their construction schedules.The Contractor shall make any revisions to the construction schedule deemed necessary after a joint review and mutual agreement.The construction schedules shall then constitute the schedules to be used by the Contractor,separate contractors and the Owner until subsequently revised. §6.1.4 Unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents,when the Owner performs construction or operations related to the Project with the Owner's own forces,the Owner shall be deemed to be subject to the same obligations and to have the same rights that apply to the Contractor under the Conditions of the Contract,including,without excluding others,those stated in Article 3,this Article 6 and Articles 10, 11 and 12. §6.2 MUTUAL RESPONSIBILITY §6.2.1 The Contractor shall afford the Owner and separate contractors reasonable opportunity for introduction and storage of their materials and equipment and performance of their activities,and shall connect and coordinate the Contractor's construction and operations with theirs as required by the Contract Documents. §6.2.2 If part of the Contractor's Work depends for proper execution or results upon construction or operations by the Owner or a separate contractor,the Contractor shall,prior to proceeding with that portion of the Work,promptly report to the Architect apparent discrepancies or defects in such other construction that would render it unsuitable for such proper execution and results.Failure of the Contractor so to report shall constitute an acknowledgment that Init. AIA Document A201 T"'—2007.Copyright ©1911,1915,1918,1925,1937,1951,1958,1961,1963,1966,1970,1976,1987,1997 and 2007 by The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING:This AIA"' Document is protected by U.S.Copyright Law and International Treaties. 21 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AIA` Document,or any portion of it,may result in severe civil and criminal penalties,and will be / prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law, This document was produced by AIA software at 19:38:20 on 03108/2009 under Order No.1000389496_1 which expires on 2/25/2010,and is not for resale. User Notes: (606649719) §4.2.14 The Architect will review and respond to requests for information about the Contract Documents.The AMW Architect's response to such requests will be made in writing within any time limits agreed upon or otherwise with reasonable promptness.If appropriate,the Architect will prepare and issue supplemental Drawings and Specifications in response to the requests for information. ARTICLE SUBCONTRACTORS §5.1 DEFINITIONS §5.1.1 A Subcontractor is a person or entity who has a direct contract with the Contractor to perform a portion of the Work at the site.The term"Subcontractor"is referred to throughout the Contract Documents as if singular in number and means a Subcontractor or an authorized representative of the Subcontractor.The term"Subcontractor" does not include a separate contractor or subcontractors of a separate contractor. §5.1.2 A Sub-subcontractor is a person or entity who has a direct or indirect contract with a Subcontractor to perform a portion of the Work at the site.The term"Sub-subcontractor"is referred to throughout the Contract Documents as if singular in number and means a Sub-subcontractor or an authorized representative of the Sub- subcontractor. §5.2 AWARD OF SUBCONTRACTS AND OTHER CONTRACTS FOR PORTIONS OF THE WORK §5.2.1 Unless otherwise stated in the Contract Documents or the bidding requirements,the Contractor,as soon as practicable after award of the Contract,shall furnish in writing to the Owner through the Architect the names of persons or entities(including those who are to furnish materials or equipment fabricated to a special design) proposed for each principal portion of the Work.The Architect may reply within 14 days to the Contractor in writing stating(1)whether the Owner or the Architect has reasonable objection to any such proposed person or entity or(2)that the Architect requires additional time for review.Failure of the Owner or Architect to reply within the 14 day period shall constitute notice of no reasonable objection. §5.2.2 The Contractor shall not contract with a proposed person or entity to whom the Owner or Architect has made reasonable and timely objection.The Contractor shall not be required to contract with anyone to whom the Contractor has made reasonable objection. §5.2.3 If the Owner or Architect has reasonable objection to a person or entity proposed by the Contractor,the Contractor shall propose another to whom the Owner or Architect has no reasonable objection.If the proposed but rejected Subcontractor was reasonably capable of performing the Work,the Contract Sum and Contract Time shall be increased or decreased by the difference,if any,occasioned by such change,and an appropriate Change Order shall be issued before commencement of the substitute Subcontractor's Work.However,no increase in the Contract Sum or Contract Time shall be allowed for such change unless the Contractor has acted promptly and responsively in submitting names as required. §5.2.4 The Contractor shall not substitute a Subcontractor,person or entity previously selected if the Owner or Architect makes reasonable objection to such substitution. §5.3 SUBCONTRACTUAL RELATIONS By appropriate agreement,written where legally required for validity,the Contractor shall require each Subcontractor,to the extent of the Work to be performed by the Subcontractor,to be bound to the Contractor by terms of the Contract Documents,and to assume toward the Contractor all the obligations and responsibilities, including the responsibility for safety of the Subcontractor's Work,which the Contractor,by these Documents, assumes toward the Owner and Architect.Each subcontract agreement shall preserve and protect the rights of the Owner and Architect under the Contract Documents with respect to the Work to be performed by the Subcontractor so that subcontracting thereof will not prejudice such rights,and shall allow to the Subcontractor,unless specifically provided otherwise in the subcontract agreement,the benefit of all rights,remedies and redress against the Contractor that the Contractor,by the Contract Documents,has against the Owner.Where appropriate,the Contractor shall require each Subcontractor to enter into similar agreements with Sub-subcontractors.The Contractor shall make available to each proposed Subcontractor,prior to the execution of the subcontract agreement, copies of the Contract Documents to which the Subcontractor will be bound,and,upon written request of the Subcontractor,identify to the Subcontractor terms and conditions of the proposed subcontract agreement that may Init. AIA Document A201Ta—2007.Copyright©1911,1915,1918,1925,1937,1951,1958,1961,1963,1966,1970,1976,1987,1997 and 2007 by The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING:This AIA' Document is protected by U.S.Copyright taw and International Treaties. 2O Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AIA" Document,or any portion of it,may result in severe civil and criminal penalties,and will be / prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This document was produced by AIA software at 19:38:20 on 03108/2009 under Order No.1000389496_1 which expires on 2/25/2010,and is not for resale. User Notes: (606649719) §4.2,4 COMMUNICATIONS FACILITATING CONTRACT ADMINISTRATION Except as otherwise provided in the Contract Documents or when direct communications have been specially authorized,the Owner and Contractor shall endeavor to communicate with each other through the Architect about matters arising out of or relating to the Contract.Communications by and with the Architect's consultants shall be through the Architect.Communications by and with Subcontractors and material suppliers shall be through the Contractor.Communications by and with separate contractors shall be through the Owner. §4.2,5 Based on the Architect's evaluations of the Contractor's Applications for Payment,the Architect will review and certify the amounts due the Contractor and will issue Certificates for Payment in such amounts. §4.2.6 The Architect has authority to reject Work that does not conform to the Contract Documents.Whenever the Architect considers it necessary or advisable,the Architect will have authority to require inspection or testing of the Work in accordance with Sections 13.5.2 and 13.5.3,whether or not such Work is fabricated,installed or completed, However,neither this authority of the Architect nor a decision made in good faith either to exercise or not to exercise such authority shall give rise to a duty or responsibility of the Architect to the Contractor,Subcontractors, material and equipment suppliers,their agents or employees,or other persons or entities performing portions of the Work. §4.2.7 The Architect will review and approve,or take other appropriate action upon,the Contractor's submittals such as Shop Drawings,Product Data and Samples,but only for the limited purpose of checking for conformance with information given and the design concept expressed in the Contract Documents.The Architect's action will be taken in accordance with the submittal schedule approved by the Architect or,in the absence of an approved submittal schedule,with reasonable promptness while allowing sufficient time in the Architect's professional judgment to permit adequate review.Review of such submittals is not conducted for the purpose of determining the accuracy and completeness of other details such as dimensions and quantities,or for substantiating instructions for installation or performance of equipment or systems,all of which remain the responsibility of the Contractor as required by the Contract Documents.The Architect's review of the Contractor's submittals shall not relieve the Contractor of the obligations under Sections 3.3,3.5 and 3.12.The Architect's review shall not constitute approval of safety precautions or,unless otherwise specifically stated by the Architect,of any construction means,methods, techniques,sequences or procedures.The Architect's approval of a specific item shall not indicate approval of an assembly of which the item is a component. §4.2.8 The Architect will prepare Change Orders and Construction Change Directives,and may authorize minor changes in the Work as provided in Section 7.4.The Architect will investigate and make determinations and recommendations regarding concealed and unknown conditions as provided in Section 3.7.4. §4.2.9 The Architect will conduct inspections to determine the date or dates of Substantial Completion and the date of final completion;issue Certificates of Substantial Completion pursuant to Section 9.8;receive and forward to the Owner,for the Owner's review and records,written warranties and related documents required by the Contract and assembled by the Contractor pursuant to Section 9.10;and issue a final Certificate for Payment pursuant to Section 9.10. §4.2.10 If the Owner and Architect agree,the Architect will provide one or more project representatives to assist in carrying out the Architect's responsibilities at the site.The duties,responsibilities and limitations of authority of such project representatives shall be as set forth in an exhibit to be incorporated in the Contract Documents. §4.2.11 The Architect will interpret and decide matters concerning performance under,and requirements of,the Contract Documents on written request of either the Owner or Contractor.The Architect's response to such requests will be made in writing within any time limits agreed upon or otherwise with reasonable promptness. §4,2.12 Interpretations and decisions of the Architect will be consistent with the intent of,and reasonably inferable from,the Contract Documents and will be in writing or in the form of drawings.When making such interpretations and decisions,the Architect will endeavor to secure faithful performance by both Owner and Contractor,will not show partiality to either and will not be liable for results of interpretations or decisions rendered in good faith. §4.2.13 The Architect's decisions on matters relating to aesthetic effect will be final if consistent with the intent expressed in the Contract Documents. Init. AIA Document A201 T""—2007.Copyright©1911,1915,1918,1925,1937,1951,1958,1961,1963,1966,1970,1976,1987,1997 and 2007 by The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING:This AIA" Document is protected by U.S.Copyright Law and International Treaties. 19 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AIA" Document,or any portion of it,may result in severe civil and criminal penalties,and w&bee / prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law, This document was produced by AIA software at 19:38:20 on 03/08/2009 under Order No.1000389496_1 which expires on 2/25/2010,and is not for resale. User Notes: (606649719) §3.18 INDEMNIFICATION §3.18.1 To the fullest extent permitted by law the Contractor shall indemnify and hold harmless the Owner, 0001* Architect,Architect's consultants,and agents and employees of any of them from and against claims,damages, losses and expenses,including but not limited to attorneys' fees,arising out of or resulting from performance of the Work,provided that such claim,damage,loss or expense is attributable to bodily injury,sickness,disease or death, or to injury to or destruction of tangible property(other than the Work itself),but only to the extent caused by the negligent acts or omissions of the Contractor,a Subcontractor,anyone directly or indirectly employed by them or anyone for whose acts they may be liable,regardless of whether or not such claim,damage,loss or expense is caused in part by a party indemnified hereunder. Such obligation shall not be construed to negate,abridge,or reduce other rights or obligations of indemnity which would otherwise exist as to a party or person described in this Section 3.18. §3.18.2 In claims against any person or entity indemnified under this Section 3.18 by an employee of the Contractor, a Subcontractor,anyone directly or indirectly employed by them or anyone for whose acts they may be liable,the indemnification obligation under Section 3.18.1 shall not be limited by a limitation on amount or type of damages, compensation or benefits payable by or for the Contractor or a Subcontractor under workers'compensation acts, disability benefit acts or other employee benefit acts. ARTICLE 4 ARCHITECT §4.1 GENERAL §4.1.1 The Owner shall retain an architect lawfully licensed to practice architecture or an entity lawfully practicing architecture in the jurisdiction where the Project is located.That person or entity is identified as the Architect in the Agreement and is referred to throughout the Contract Documents as if singular in number. §4.1.2 Duties,responsibilities and limitations of authority of the Architect as set forth in the Contract Documents shall not be restricted,modified or extended without written consent of the Owner,Contractor and Architect. Consent shall not be unreasonably withheld. §4.1.3 If the employment of the Architect is terminated,the Owner shall employ a successor architect as to whom the Contractor has no reasonable objection and whose status under the Contract Documents shall be that of the Architect. §4.2 ADMINISTRATION OF THE CONTRACT §4.2.1 The Architect will provide administration of the Contract as described in the Contract Documents and will be an Owner's representative during construction until the date the Architect issues the final Certificate For Payment. The Architect will have authority to act on behalf of the Owner only to the extent provided in the Contract Documents. §4.2.2 The Architect will visit the site at intervals appropriate to the stage of construction,or as otherwise agreed with the Owner,to become generally familiar with the progress and quality of the portion of the Work completed, and to determine in general if the Work observed is being performed in a manner indicating that the Work,when fully completed,will be in accordance with the Contract Documents.However,the Architect will not be required to make exhaustive or continuous on-site inspections to check the quality or quantity of the Work.The Architect will not have control over,charge of,or responsibility for,the construction means,methods,techniques,sequences or procedures,or for the safety precautions and programs in connection with the Work,since these are solely the Contractor's rights and responsibilities under the Contract Documents,except as provided in Section 3.3.1. §4.2.3 On the basis of the site visits,the Architect will keep the Owner reasonably informed about the progress and quality of the portion of the Work completed,and report to the Owner(1)known deviations from the Contract Documents and from the most recent construction schedule submitted by the Contractor,and(2)defects and deficiencies observed in the Work.The Architect will not be responsible for the Contractor's failure to perform the Work in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents.The Architect will not have control over or charge of and will not be responsible for acts or omissions of the Contractor,Subcontractors,or their agents or employees,or any other persons or entities performing portions of the Work. Init. AIA Document A201 TM—2007.Copyright ©1911,1915,1918,1925,1937,1951,1958,1961,1963,1966,1970,1976,1987,1997 and 2007 by The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING:This AIA" Document is protected by U.S.Copyright Law and International Treaties. �8 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AIA`" Document.or any portion of it,may result in severe civil and criminal penalties,and will be / prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This document was produced by AIA software at 19:38:20 on 03/0812009 under Order No.1000389496_1 which expires on 2/25/2010,and is not for resale. User Notes: (606649719) required to provide professional services in violation of applicable law.If professional design services or certifications by a design professional related to systems,materials or equipment are specifically required of the Contractor by the Contract Documents,the Owner and the Architect will specify all performance and design criteria that such services must satisfy.The Contractor shall cause such services or certifications to be provided by a properly licensed design professional,whose signature and seal shall appear on all drawings,calculations, specifications,certifications,Shop Drawings and other submittals prepared by such professional. Shop Drawings and other submittals related to the Work designed or certified by such professional,if prepared by others,shall bear such professional's written approval when submitted to the Architect.The Owner and the Architect shall be entitled to rely upon the adequacy,accuracy and completeness of the services,certifications and approvals performed or provided by such design professionals,provided the Owner and Architect have specified to the Contractor all performance and design criteria that such services must satisfy.Pursuant to this Section 3.12.10,the Architect will review,approve or take other appropriate action on submittals only for the limited purpose of checking for conformance with information given and the design concept expressed in the Contract Documents.The Contractor shall not be responsible for the adequacy of the performance and design criteria specified in the Contract Documents. §3.13 USE OF SITE The Contractor shall confine operations at the site to areas permitted by applicable laws,statutes,ordinances,codes, rules and regulations,and lawful orders of public authorities and the Contract Documents and shall not unreasonably encumber the site with materials or equipment. §3.14 CUTTING AND PATCHING §3.14.1 The Contractor shall be responsible for cutting,fitting or patching required to complete the Work or to make its parts fit together properly.All areas requiring cutting, fitting and patching shall be restored to the condition existing prior to the cutting,fitting and patching,unless otherwise required by the Contract Documents. §3.14.2 The Contractor shall not damage or endanger a portion of the Work or fully or partially completed construction of the Owner or separate contractors by cutting,patching or otherwise altering such construction,or by excavation.The Contractor shall not cut or otherwise alter such construction by the Owner or a separate contractor except with written consent of the Owner and of such separate contractor;such consent shall not be unreasonably withheld.The Contractor shall not unreasonably withhold from the Owner or a separate contractor the Contractor's consent to cutting or otherwise altering the Work. §3.15 CLEANING UP §3.15.1 The Contractor shall keep the premises and surrounding area free from accumulation of waste materials or rubbish caused by operations under the Contract.At completion of the Work,the Contractor shall remove waste materials,rubbish,the Contractor's tools,construction equipment,machinery and surplus materials from and about the Project. §3.15.2 If the Contractor fails to clean up as provided in the Contract Documents,the Owner may do so and Owner shall be entitled to reimbursement from the Contractor. §3.16 ACCESS TO WORK The Contractor shall provide the Owner and Architect access to the Work in preparation and progress wherever located. §3.17 ROYALTIES,PATENTS AND COPYRIGHTS The Contractor shall pay all royalties and license fees.The Contractor shall defend suits or claims for infringement of copyrights and patent rights and shall hold the Owner and Architect harmless from loss on account thereof,but shall not be responsible for such defense or loss when a particular design,process or product of a particular manufacturer or manufacturers is required by the Contract Documents,or where the copyright violations are contained in Drawings,Specifications or other documents prepared by the Owner or Architect.However,if the Contractor has reason to believe that the required design,process or product is an infringement of a copyright or a patent,the Contractor shall be responsible for such loss unless such information is promptly furnished to the Architect. Init. AIA Document A201 T11—2007.Copyright ©1911,1915,1918,1925,1937,1951,1958,1961,1963,1966,1970,1976,1987,1997 and 2007 by The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING:This AIA` Document is protected by U.S.Copyright Law and International Treat'es. 17 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AIA"' Document,or any portion of it,may result in severe civil and criminal penalties,and wil be / prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This document was produced by AIA software at 19:38:20 on 03/08/2009 under Order No.1000389496_1 which expires on 2/25/2010,and is not for resale. User Notes: (606649719) §3.11 DOCUMENTS AND SAMPLES AT THE SITE OW The Contractor shall maintain at the site for the Owner one copy of the Drawings,Specifications,Addenda,Change Orders and other Modifications,in good order and marked currently to indicate field changes and selections made during construction,and one copy of approved Shop Drawings,Product Data,Samples and similar required submittals.These shall be available to the Architect and shall be delivered to the Architect for submittal to the Owner upon completion of the Work as a record of the Work as constructed. §3.12 SHOP DRAWINGS,PRODUCT DATA AND SAMPLES §3.12.1 Shop Drawings are drawings,diagrams,schedules and other data specially prepared for the Work by the Contractor or a Subcontractor,Sub-subcontractor,manufacturer,supplier or distributor to illustrate some portion of the Work. §3.12.2 Product Data are illustrations,standard schedules,performance charts,instructions,brochures,diagrams and other information furnished by the Contractor to illustrate materials or equipment for some portion of the Work. §3.12.3 Samples are physical examples that illustrate materials,equipment or workmanship and establish standards by which the Work will be judged. §3.12.4 Shop Drawings,Product Data,Samples and similar submittals are not Contract Documents.Their purpose is to demonstrate the way by which the Contractor proposes to conform to the information given and the design concept expressed in the Contract Documents for those portions of the Work for which the Contract Documents require submittals.Review by the Architect is subject to the limitations of Section 4.2.7.Informational submittals upon which the Architect is not expected to take responsive action may be so identified in the Contract Documents. Submittals that are not required by the Contract Documents may be returned by the Architect without action. §3.12.5 The Contractor shall review for compliance with the Contract Documents,approve and submit to the Architect Shop Drawings,Product Data,Samples and similar submittals required by the Contract Documents in accordance with the submittal schedule approved by the Architect or,in the absence of an approved submittal schedule,with reasonable promptness and in such sequence as to cause no delay in the Work or in the activities of ,,ems the Owner or of separate contractors. §3.12.6 By submitting Shop Drawings,Product Data,Samples and similar submittals,the Contractor represents to the Owner and Architect that the Contractor has(1)reviewed and approved them,(2)determined and verified materials,field measurements and field construction criteria related thereto,or will do so and(3)checked and coordinated the information contained within such submittals with the requirements of the Work and of the Contract Documents. §3.12.7 The Contractor shall perform no portion of the Work for which the Contract Documents require submittal and review of Shop Drawings,Product Data,Samples or similar submittals until the respective submittal has been approved by the Architect. §3.12.8 The Work shall be in accordance with approved submittals except that the Contractor shall not be relieved of responsibility for deviations from requirements of the Contract Documents by the Architect's approval of Shop Drawings,Product Data,Samples or similar submittals unless the Contractor has specifically informed the Architect in writing of such deviation at the time of submittal and(1)the Architect has given written approval to the specific deviation as a minor change in the Work,or(2)a Change Order or Construction Change Directive has been issued authorizing the deviation.The Contractor shall not be relieved of responsibility for errors or omissions in Shop Drawings,Product Data,Samples or similar submittals by the Architect's approval thereof. §3.12.9 The Contractor shall direct specific attention,in writing or on resubmitted Shop Drawings,Product Data, Samples or similar submittals,to revisions other than those requested by the Architect on previous submittals.In the absence of such written notice,the Architect's approval of a resubmission shall not apply to such revisions. §312.10 The Contractor shall not be required to provide professional services that constitute the practice of architecture or engineering unless such services are specifically required by the Contract Documents for a portion of the Work or unless the Contractor needs to provide such services in order to carry out the Contractor's responsibilities for construction means,methods,techniques,sequences and procedures.The Contractor shall not be Init. AIA Document A201 TM—2007.Copyright ©1911,1915,1918,1925,1937,1951,1958,1961,1963,1966,1970,1976,1987,1997 and 2007 by The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING:This AIA' Document is protected by U.S.Copyright Law and International Treaties. 's Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AiA`" Document.or any portion of it,may result in severe civil and criminal penalties,and will be / prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This document was produced by AIA software at 19:38:20 on 03/08/2009 under Order No.1000389496_1 which expires on 2/25/2010,and is not for resale. User Notes: (606649719) the operations.The Contractor shall continue to suspend such operations until otherwise instructed by the Owner but shall continue with all other operations that do not affect those remains or features.Requests for adjustments in the Contract Sum and Contract Time arising from the existence of such remains or features may be made as provided in Article 15. §3.8 ALLOWANCES §3.8.1 The Contractor shall include in the Contract Sum all allowances stated in the Contract Documents.Items covered by allowances shall be supplied for such amounts and by such persons or entities as the Owner may direct, but the Contractor shall not be required to employ persons or entities to whom the Contractor has reasonable objection. §3.8.2 Unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents, .1 allowances shall cover the cost to the Contractor of materials and equipment delivered at the site and all required taxes,less applicable trade discounts; .2 Contractor's costs for unloading and handling at the site,labor,installation costs,overhead,profit and other expenses contemplated for stated allowance amounts shall be included in the Contract Sum but not in the allowances;and .3 whenever costs are more than or less than allowances,the Contract Sum shall be adjusted accordingly by Change Order.The amount of the Change Order shall reflect(1)the difference between actual costs and the allowances under Section 3.8.2.1 and(2)changes in Contractor's costs under Section 3.8.2.2. §3.8.3 Materials and equipment under an allowance shall be selected by the Owner with reasonable promptness. §3.9 SUPERINTENDENT §3.9.1 The Contractor shall employ a competent superintendent and necessary assistants who shall be in attendance at the Project site during performance of the Work.The superintendent shall represent the Contractor,and communications given to the superintendent shall be as binding as if given to the Contractor. §3.9.2 The Contractor,as soon as practicable after award of the Contract,shall furnish in writing to the Owner through the Architect the name and qualifications of a proposed superintendent.The Architect may reply within 14 days to the Contractor in writing stating(1)whether the Owner or the Architect has reasonable objection to the proposed superintendent or(2)that the Architect requires additional time to review.Failure of the Architect to reply within the 14 day period shall constitute notice of no reasonable objection. §3.9.3 The Contractor shall not employ a proposed superintendent to whom the Owner or Architect has made reasonable and timely objection.The Contractor shall not change the superintendent without the Owner's consent, which shall not unreasonably be withheld or delayed. §3.10 CONTRACTOR'S CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULES §3.10.1 The Contractor,promptly after being awarded the Contract,shall prepare and submit for the Owner's and Architect's information a Contractor's construction schedule for the Work.The schedule shall not exceed time limits current under the Contract Documents,shall be revised at appropriate intervals as required by the conditions of the Work and Project,shall be related to the entire Project to the extent required by the Contract Documents,and shall provide for expeditious and practicable execution of the Work. §3.10.2 The Contractor shall prepare a submittal schedule,promptly after being awarded the Contract and thereafter as necessary to maintain a current submittal schedule,and shall submit the schedule(s)for the Architect's approval. The Architect's approval shall not unreasonably be delayed or withheld.The submittal schedule shall(1)be coordinated with the Contractor's construction schedule,and(2)allow the Architect reasonable time to review submittals.If the Contractor fails to submit a submittal schedule,the Contractor shall not be entitled to any increase in Contract Sum or extension of Contract Time based on the time required for review of submittals. §3.10.3 The Contractor shall perform the Work in general accordance with the most recent schedules submitted to the Owner and Architect. AIA Document A201 TM—2007.Copyright ©1911,1915,1918,1925,1937,1951,1958,1961,1963,1966,1970,1976,1987,1997 and 2007 by The Init. American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING:This AIA" Document is protected by U.S.Copyright Law and international Treaties. 15 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AIA" Document,or any portion of it,may result in severe civil and criminal penalties,and will be prosecuted 10 the maximum extent possible under the law. This document was produced by AIA software at 19:38:20 on 03/08/2009 under Order No.1000389496_1 which expires on 2/25/2010,and is not for resale. User Notes: (60664f1719) facilities and services necessary for proper execution and completion of the Work, whether temporary or permanent AOINJA and whether or not incorporated or to be incorporated in the Work. §3.4.2 Except in the case of minor changes in the Work authorized by the Architect in accordance with Sections 3.12.8 or 7.4,the Contractor may make substitutions only with the consent of the Owner,after evaluation by the Architect and in accordance with a Change Order or Construction Change Directive. §3.4.3 The Contractor shall enforce strict discipline and good order among the Contractor's employees and other persons carrying out the Work.The Contractor shall not permit employment of unfit persons or persons not properly skilled in tasks assigned to them. §3.5 WARRANTY The Contractor warrants to the Owner and Architect that materials and equipment furnished under the Contract will be of good quality and new unless the Contract Documents require or permit otherwise.The Contractor further warrants that the Work will conform to the requirements of the Contract Documents and will be free from defects, except for those inherent in the quality of the Work the Contract Documents require or permit.Work,materials,or equipment not conforming to these requirements may be considered defective.The Contractor's warranty excludes remedy for damage or defect caused by abuse,alterations to the Work not executed by the Contractor,improper or insufficient maintenance,improper operation,or normal wear and tear and normal usage.If required by the Architect,the Contractor shall furnish satisfactory evidence as to the kind and quality of materials and equipment. §3.6 TAXES The Contractor shall pay sales,consumer,use and similar taxes for the Work provided by the Contractor that are legally enacted when bids are received or negotiations concluded,whether or not yet effective or merely scheduled to go into effect. §3.7 PERMITS,FEES,NOTICES,AND COMPLIANCE WITH LAWS §3.7.1 Unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents,the Contractor shall secure and pay for the building permit as well as for other permits,fees,licenses,and inspections by government agencies necessary for proper A"k execution and completion of the Work that are customarily secured after execution of the Contract and legally required at the time bids are received or negotiations concluded. §3.7.2 The Contractgr shall comply with and give notices required by applicable laws,statutes,ordinances,codes, rules and regulations,and lawful orders of public authorities applicable to performance of the Work. §3.7.3 If the Contractor performs Work knowing it to be contrary to applicable laws,statutes,ordinances,codes, rules and regulations,or lawful orders of public authorities,the Contractor shall assume appropriate responsibility for such Work and shall bear the costs attributable to correction. §3.7.4 Concealed or Unknown Conditions.If the Contractor encounters conditions at the site that are(1) subsurface or otherwise concealed physical conditions that differ materially from those indicated in the Contract Documents or(2)unknown physical conditions of an unusual nature,that differ materially from those ordinarily found to exist and generally recognized as inherent in construction activities of the character provided for in the Contract Documents,the Contractor shall promptly provide notice to the Owner and the Architect before conditions are disturbed and in no event later than 21 days after first observance of the conditions.The Architect will promptly investigate such conditions and,if the Architect determines that they differ materially and cause an increase or decrease in the Contractor's cost of,or time required for,performance of any part of the Work,will recommend an equitable adjustment in the Contract Sum or Contract Time,or both.If the Architect determines that the conditions at the site are not materially different from those indicated in the Contract Documents and that no change in the terms of the Contract is justified,the Architect shall promptly notify the Owner and Contractor in writing,stating the reasons.If either party disputes the Architect's determination or recommendation,that party may proceed as provided in Article 15. §3.7.5 If,in the course of the Work,the Contractor encounters human remains or recognizes the existence of burial markers,archaeological sites or wetlands not indicated in the Contract Documents,the Contractor shall immediately suspend any operations that would affect them and shall notify the Owner and Architect.Upon receipt of such notice,the Owner shall promptly take any action necessary to obtain governmental authorization required to resume Init. AIA Document A201 Tµ—2007.Copyright ©1911,1915,1918,1925,1937,1951,1958,1961,1963,1966,1970,1976,1987,1997 and 2007 by The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING:This AW Document is protected by U.S.Copyright Law and International Treaties. 4 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AIA`" Document,or any portion of it,may result in severe civil and criminal penalties,and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This document was produced by AIA software at 19:38:20 on 03/08!2009 under Order No.1000389496_1 which expires on 2/25/2010,and is not for resale. User Notes: (606649719) §3.2 REVIEW OF CONTRACT DOCUMENTS AND FIELD CONDITIONS BY CONTRACTOR §3.2.1 Execution of the Contract by the Contractor is a representation that the Contractor has visited the site, become generally familiar with local conditions under which the Work is to be performed and correlated personal observations with requirements of the Contract Documents. §3.2.2 Because the Contract Documents are complementary,the Contractor shall,before starting each portion of the Work,carefully study and compare the various Contract Documents relative to that portion of the Work,as well as the information furnished by the Owner pursuant to Section 2.2.3,shall take field measurements of any existing conditions related to that portion of the Work,and shall observe any conditions at the site affecting it.These obligations are for the purpose of facilitating coordination and construction by the Contractor and are not for the purpose of discovering errors,omissions,or inconsistencies in the Contract Documents;however,the Contractor shall promptly report to the Architect any errors,inconsistencies or omissions discovered by or made known to the Contractor as a request for information in such form as the Architect may require.It is recognized that the Contractor's review is made in the Contractor's capacity as a contractor and not as a licensed design professional, unless otherwise specifically provided in the Contract Documents. §3.2.3 The Contractor is not required to ascertain that the Contract Documents are in accordance with applicable laws,statutes,ordinances,codes,rules and regulations,or lawful orders of public authorities,but the Contractor shall promptly report to the Architect any nonconformity discovered by or made known to the Contractor as a request for information in such form as the Architect may require. §3.2,4 If the Contractor believes that additional cost or time is involved because of clarifications or instructions the Architect issues in response to the Contractor's notices or requests for information pursuant to Sections 3.2.2 or 3.2.3,the Contractor shall make Claims as provided in Article 15.If the Contractor fails to perform the obligations of Sections 3.2.2 or 3.2.3,the Contractor shall pay such costs and damages to the Owner as would have been avoided if the Contractor had performed such obligations.If the Contractor performs those obligations,the Contractor shall not be liable to the Owner or Architect for damages resulting from errors,inconsistencies or omissions in the Contract Documents,for differences between field measurements or conditions and the Contract Documents,or for nonconformities of the Contract Documents to applicable laws,statutes,ordinances,codes,rules and regulations,and lawful orders of public authorities. §3.3 SUPERVISION AND CONSTRUCTION PROCEDURES §3.3.1 The Contractor shall supervise and direct the Work,using the Contractor's best skill and attention.The Contractor shall be solely responsible for,and have control over,construction means,methods,techniques, sequences and procedures and for coordinating all portions of the Work under the Contract,unless the Contract Documents give other specific instructions concerning these matters.If the Contract Documents give specific instructions concerning construction means,methods,techniques,sequences or procedures,the Contractor shall evaluate the jobsite safety thereof and,except as stated below,shall be fully and solely responsible for the jobsite safety of such means,methods,techniques, sequences or procedures.If the Contractor determines that such means, methods,techniques,sequences or procedures may not be safe,the Contractor shall give timely written notice to the Owner and Architect and shall not proceed with that portion of the Work without further written instructions from the Architect.If the Contractor is then instructed to proceed with the required means,methods,techniques, sequences or procedures without acceptance of changes proposed by the Contractor,the Owner shall be solely responsible for any loss or damage arising solely from those Owner-required means,methods,techniques,sequences or procedures. §3.3.2 The Contractor shall be responsible to the Owner for acts and omissions of the Contractor's employees, Subcontractors and their agents and employees,and other persons or entities performing portions of the Work for,or on behalf of,the Contractor or any of its Subcontractors. §3.3,3 The Contractor shall be responsible for inspection of portions of Work already performed to determine that such portions are in proper condition to receive subsequent Work. §3.4 LABOR AND MATERIALS §3.4.1 Unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents,the Contractor shall provide and pay for labor, materials,equipment,tools,construction equipment and machinery, water,heat,utilities,transportation,and other Init. AIA Document A201 TM—2007.Copyright O 1911,1915,1918,1925,1937,1951,1958,1961,1963,1966,1970,1976,1987,1997 and 2007 by The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING:This AIA" Document is protected by U.S.copyright Law and International Treaties. 13 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AIA" Document,or any portion of it,may result in severe civil and criminal penalties,and will be / prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This document was produced by AIA software at 19:38:20 on 03/08/2009 under Order No.1000389496_1 which expires on 2/25/2010,and is not for resale. User Notes: (606649719) the portion of the Work affected by a material change.After the Owner furnishes the evidence,the Owner shall not +rte materially vary such financial arrangements without prior notice to the Contractor. §2.2.2 Except for permits and fees that are the responsibility of the Contractor under the Contract Documents, including those required under Section 3.7.1,the Owner shall secure and pay for necessary approvals,easements, assessments and charges required for construction, use or occupancy of permanent structures or for permanent changes in existing facilities. §2.2.3 The Owner shall furnish surveys describing physical characteristics,legal limitations and utility locations for the site of the Project,and a legal description of the site.The Contractor shall be entitled to rely on the accuracy of information furnished by the Owner but shall exercise proper precautions relating to the safe performance of the Work. §2,2.4 The Owner shall furnish information or services required of the Owner by the Contract Documents with reasonable promptness.The Owner shall also furnish any other information or services under the Owner's control and relevant to the Contractor's performance of the Work with reasonable promptness after receiving the Contractor's written request for such information or services. §2.2.5 Unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents,the Owner shall furnish to the Contractor one copy of the Contract Documents for purposes of making reproductions pursuant to Section 1.5.2. §2.3 OWNER'S RIGHT TO STOP THE WORK If the Contractor fails to correct Work that is not in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents as required by Section 12.2 or repeatedly fails to carry out Work in accordance with the Contract Documents,the Owner may issue a written order to the Contractor to stop the Work,or any portion thereof,until the cause for such order has been eliminated;however,the right of the Owner to stop the Work shall not give rise to a duty on the part of the Owner to exercise this right for the benefit of the Contractor or any other person or entity,except to the extent required by Section 6.1.3. §2.4 OWNER'S RIGHT TO CARRY OUT THE WORK If the Contractor defaults or neglects to carry out the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents and fails within a ten-day period after receipt of written notice from the Owner to commence and continue correction of such default or neglect with diligence and promptness,the Owner may, without prejudice to other remedies the Owner may have,correct such deficiencies.In such case an appropriate Change Order shall be issued deducting from payments then or thereafter due the Contractor the reasonable cost of correcting such deficiencies,including Owner's expenses and compensation for the Architect's additional services made necessary by such default,neglect or failure. Such action by the Owner and amounts charged to the Contractor are both subject to prior approval of the Architect.If payments then or thereafter due the Contractor are not sufficient to cover such amounts,the Contractor shall pay the difference to the Owner. ARTICLE 3 CONTRACTOR §3.1 GENERAL §3.1.1 The Contractor is the person or entity identified as such in the Agreement and is referred to throughout the Contract Documents as if singular in number.The Contractor shall be lawfully licensed,if required in the jurisdiction where the Project is located.The Contractor shall designate in writing a representative who shall have express authority to bind the Contractor with respect to all matters under this Contract.The term"Contractor" means the Contractor or the Contractor's authorized representative. §3.1.2 The Contractor shall perform the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents. §3.1.3 The Contractor shall not be relieved of obligations to perform the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents either by activities or duties of the Architect in the Architect's administration of the Contract,or by tests, inspections or approvals required or performed by persons or entities other than the Contractor. Init. AIA Document A201 TM-2007.Copyright ©1911,1915,1918,1925,1937,1951,1958,1961,1963,1966,1970,1976,1987,1997 and 2007 by The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING:This AIA" Document is protected by U.S.Copyright Law and international Treaties. 2 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AIA`' Document,or any portion of it,may result in severe civil and criminal penalties,and will be / prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This document was produced by AiA software at 19:38:20 on 03/08/2009 under Order No.1000389496_1 which expires on 2/25/2010,and is not for resale. User Notes: (606649719) §1.2.2 Organization of the Specifications into divisions,sections and articles,and arrangement of Drawings shall not control the Contractor in dividing the Work among Subcontractors or in establishing the extent of Work to be performed by any trade. §1.2.3 Unless otherwise stated in the Contract Documents,words that have well-known technical or construction industry meanings are used in the Contract Documents in accordance with such recognized meanings. §1.3 CAPITALIZATION Terms capitalized in these General Conditions include those that are(1)specifically defined,(2)the titles of numbered articles or(3)the titles of other documents published by the American Institute of Architects. §1.4 INTERPRETATION In the interest of brevity the Contract Documents frequently omit modifying words such as"all" and"any" and articles such as"the"and"an,"but the fact that a modifier or an article is absent from one statement and appears in another is not intended to affect the interpretation of either statement. §1.5 OWNERSHIP AND USE OF DRAWINGS,SPECIFICATIONS AND OTHER INSTRUMENTS OF SERVICE §1.5.1 The Architect and the Architect's consultants shall be deemed the authors and owners of their respective Instruments of Service,including the Drawings and Specifications,and will retain all common law,statutory and other reserved rights,including copyrights.The Contractor,Subcontractors,Sub-subcontractors,and material or equipment suppliers shall not own or claim a copyright in the Instruments of Service. Submittal or distribution to meet official regulatory requirements or for other purposes in connection with this Project is not to be construed as publication in derogation of the Architect's or Architect's consultants'reserved rights. §1.5.2 The Contractor,Subcontractors,Sub-subcontractors and material or equipment suppliers are authorized to use and reproduce the Instruments of Service provided to them solely and exclusively for execution of the Work.All copies made under this authorization shall bear the copyright notice,if any,shown on the Instruments of Service. The Contractor,Subcontractors,Sub-subcontractors,and material or equipment suppliers may not use the Instruments of Service on other projects or for additions to this Project outside the scope of the Work without the specific written consent of the Owner,Architect and the Architect's consultants. §1.6 TRANSMISSION OF DATA IN DIGITAL FORM If the parties intend to transmit Instruments of Service or any other information or documentation in digital form, they shall endeavor to establish necessary protocols governing such transmissions,unless otherwise already provided in the Agreement or the Contract Documents. ARTICLE 2 OWNER §2.1 GENERAL §2,1.1 The Owner is the person or entity identified as such in the Agreement and is referred to throughout the Contract Documents as if singular in number.The Owner shall designate in writing a representative who shall have express authority to bind the Owner with respect to all matters requiring the Owner's approval or authorization. Except as otherwise provided in Section 4.2.1,the Architect does not have such authority.The term"Owner"means the Owner or the Owner's authorized representative. §2.1.2 The Owner shall furnish to the Contractor within fifteen days after receipt of a written request,information necessary and relevant for the Contractor to evaluate,give notice of or enforce mechanic's lien rights. Such information shall include a correct statement of the record legal title to the property on which the Project is located, usually referred to as the site,and the Owner's interest therein. §2.2 INFORMATION AND SERVICES REQUIRED OF THE OWNER §2.2.1 Prior to commencement of the Work,the Contractor may request in writing that the Owner provide reasonable evidence that the Owner has made financial arrangements to fulfill the Owner's obligations under the Contract.Thereafter,the Contractor may only request such evidence if(1)the Owner fails to make payments to the Contractor as the Contract Documents require;(2)a change in the Work materially changes the Contract Sum;or(3) the Contractor identifies in writing a reasonable concern regarding the Owner's ability to make payment when due. The Owner shall furnish such evidence as a condition precedent to commencement or continuation of the Work or AIA Document A201 rm—2007.Copyright©1911,1915,1918,1925,1937,1951,1958,1961,1963,1966,1970,1976,1987,1997 and 2007 by The Init. American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING:This AIA" Document is protected by U.S.Copyright Law and International Treaties. 1 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AIAW' Document,or any portion of it,may result in severe civil and criminal penalties,and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This document was produced by AIA software at 19:38:20 on 03/0 1112009 under Order No.1000389496_1 which expires on 2/25/2010,and is not for resale. U (606649719) User Notes: ARTICLE 1 GENERAL PROVISIONS Aak §1.1 BASIC DEFINITIONS §1.1.1 THE CONTRACT DOCUMENTS The Contract Documents are enumerated in the Agreement between the Owner and Contractor(hereinafter the Agreement)and consist of the Agreement,Conditions of the Contract(General,Supplementary and other Conditions),Drawings,Specifications,Addenda issued prior to execution of the Contract,other documents listed in the Agreement and Modifications issued after execution of the Contract.A Modification is(1)a written amendment to the Contract signed by both parties,(2)a Change Order,(3)a Construction Change Directive or(4)a written order for a minor change in the Work issued by the Architect.Unless specifically enumerated in the Agreement,the Contract Documents do not include the advertisement or invitation to bid,Instructions to Bidders,sample forms, other information furnished by the Owner in anticipation of receiving bids or proposals,the Contractor's bid or proposal,or portions of Addenda relating to bidding requirements. §1.1.2 THE CONTRACT The Contract Documents form the Contract for Construction.The Contract represents the entire and integrated agreement between the parties hereto and supersedes prior negotiations,representations or agreements,either written or oral.The Contract may be amended or modified only by a Modification.The Contract Documents shall not be construed to create a contractual relationship of any kind(1)between the Contractor and the Architect or the Architect's consultants,(2)between the Owner and a Subcontractor or a Sub-subcontractor,(3)between the Owner and the Architect or the Architect's consultants or(4)between any persons or entities other than the Owner and the Contractor.The Architect shall,however,be entitled to performance and enforcement of obligations under the Contract intended to facilitate performance of the Architect's duties. §1.1.3 THE WORK The term"Work"means the construction and services required by the Contract Documents,whether completed or partially completed,and includes all other labor,materials,equipment and services provided or to be provided by the Contractor to fulfill the Contractor's obligations.The Work may constitute the whole or a part of the Project. §1.1,4 THE PROJECT ,■„� The Project is the total construction of which the Work performed under the Contract Documents may be the whole or a part and which may include construction by the Owner and by separate contractors. §1.1.5 THE DRAWINGS The Drawings are the graphic and pictorial portions of the Contract Documents showing the design,location and dimensions of the Work,generally including plans,elevations,sections,details,schedules and diagrams. §1.1.6 THE SPECIFICATIONS The Specifications are that portion of the Contract Documents consisting of the written requirements for materials, equipment,systems,standards and workmanship for the Work,and performance of related services. §1.1.7 INSTRUMENTS OF SERVICE Instruments of Service are representations,in any medium of expression now known or later developed,of the tangible and intangible creative work performed by the Architect and the Architect's consultants under their respective professional services agreements.Instruments of Service may include,without limitation,studies, surveys,models,sketches,drawings,specifications,and other similar materials. §1.1.8 INITIAL DECISION MAKER The Initial Decision Maker is the person identified in the Agreement to render initial decisions on Claims in accordance with Section 15.2 and certify termination of the Agreement under Section 14.2.2. §1.2 CORRELATION AND INTENT OF THE CONTRACT DOCUMENTS §1.2.1 The intent of the Contract Documents is to include all items necessary for the proper execution and completion of the Work by the Contractor.The Contract Documents are complementary,and what is required by one shall be as binding as if required by all;performance by the Contractor shall be required only to the extent consistent with the Contract Documents and reasonably inferable from them as being necessary to produce the indicated results. Init. AIA Document A201 TM—2007.Copyright ©1911,1915,1918,1925,1937,1951,1958,1961,1963,1966,1970,1976,1987,1997 and 2007 by The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING:This AIA" (Document is protected by U.S.Copyright Law and international Treaties. 10 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AIAL` Document,or any portion of it,may result in severe civil and criminal penalties,and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This document was produced by AIA software at 19:38:20 on 03/08/2009 under Order No.1000389496_1 which expires on 2/25/2010,and is not for resale. User Notes: (606649719) 4.2.11,4.2.12 Written Orders Written Notice 1.1.1,2.3,3.9,7,8.2.2, 11.4.9, 12.1, 12.2, 13.5.2, 2.3,2.4,3.3.1,3.9,3.12.9,3.12.10,5.2.1,8.2.2,9.7, 14.3.1, 15.1.2 9.10, 10.2.2, 10.3, 11.1.3, 11.4.6, 12.2.2, 12.2.4,13.3, 14, 15.4.1 Init. AIA Document A201 TM—2007.Copyright ©1911,1915,1918,1925,1937,1951,1958,1961,1963,1966,1970,1976,1987,1997 and 2007 by The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING:This AIA" Document is protected by U.S.Copyright Law and international Treaties. 9 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AIA' Document,or any portion of it,may result in severe civil and criminal penalties.and ME be / prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This document was produced by AIA software at 19:38:20 on 03/06/2009 under Order No.1000389496_1 which expires on 2/25/2010,and is not for resale. User Notes: (606649719) Submittals 3.1.3,3.3.3,4.2.2,4.2.6,4.2.9,9.4.2,9.8.3,9.9.2, A01k 3.10,3.11,3.12,4.2.7,5.2.1,5.2.3,7.3.7,9.2,9.3, 9.10.1, 10.3.2, 11.4.1.1, 12.2.1,13.5 9.8,9.9.1,9.10.2,9.10.3, 11.1.3 TIME Submittal Schedule 8 3.10.2,3.12.5,4.2.7 Time,Delays and Extensions of Subrogation,Waivers of 3.2.4,3.7.4,5.2.3,7.2.1,7.3.1,7.4.1,8.3,9.5.1,9.7.1, 6.1.1, 11.4.5, 113.7 10.3.2, 10.4.1, 14.3.2, 15.1.5, 15.2.5 Substantial Completion Time Limits 4.2.9,8.1.1,8.1.3,8.2.3,9.4.2,9.8,9.9.1,9.10.3, 2.1.2,2.2,2.4,3.2.2,3.10,3.11,3.12.5,3.15.1,4.2, 12.2, 13.7 4.4,4.5,5.2,5.3,5.4,6.2.4,7.3,7.4,8.2,9.2,9.3.1, Substantial Completion,Definition of 9.3.3,9.4.1,9.5,9.6,9.7,9.8,9.9,9.10, 11.1.3, 9.8.1 11.4.1.5, 11.4.6, 11.4.10, 12.2, 13.5, 13.7, 14, 15.1.2, Substitution of Subcontractors 15.4 5.2.3,5.2.4 Time Limits on Claims Substitution of Architect 3.7.4, 10.2.8,13.7, 15.1.2 4.1.3 Title to Work Substitutions of Materials 9.3.2,9.3.3 3.4.2,3.5.1,7.3.8 Transmission of Data in Digital Form Sub-subcontractor,Definition of 1.6 5.1.2 UNCOVERING AND CORRECTION OF Subsurface Conditions WORK 3.7.4 12 Successors and Assigns Uncovering of Work 13.2 12.1 Superintendent Unforeseen Conditions,Concealed or Unknown 3.9, 10.2.6 3.7.4,8.3.1, 10.3 Supervision and Construction Procedures Unit Prices 1.2.2,3.3,3.4,3.12.10,4.2.2,4.2.7,6.1.3,6.2.4, 7.3.3.2,7.3.4 7.1.3,7.3.7,8.2,8.3.1,9.4.2, 10, 12, 14, 15.1.3 Use of Documents ,,W Surety 1.1.1, 1.5,2.2.5,3.12.6,5.3 5.4.1.2,9.8.5, 9.10.2,9.10.3, 14.2.2, 15.2.7 Use of Site Surety,Consent of 3.13,6.1.1,6.2.1 9.10.2,9.10.3 Values,Schedule of Surveys 9.2,9.3.1 2.2.3 Waiver of Claims by the Architect Suspension by the Owner for Convenience 13.4.2 143 Waiver of Claims by the Contractor Suspension of the Work 9.10.5, 11.4.7, 13.4.2, 15.1.6 5.4.2, 14.3 Waiver of Claims by the Owner Suspension or Termination of the Contract 9.9.3,9.10.3,9.10.4, 11.4.3, 11.4.5, 11.4.7, 12.2.2.1, 5.4.1.1, 11.4.9, 14 13.4.2, 14.2.4, 15.1.6 Taxes Waiver of Consequential Damages 3.6,3.8.2.1,7.3.7.4 14.2.4, 15.1.6 Termination by the Contractor Waiver of Liens 14.1, 15.1.6 9.10.2,9.10.4 Termination by the Owner for Cause Waivers of Subrogation 5.4.1.1,14.2, 15.1.6 6.1.1, 11.4.5,11.3.7 Termination by the Owner for Convenience Warranty 14.4 3.5,4.2.9, 9.3.3,9.8.4,9.9.1,9.10.4, 12.2.2, 13.7.1 Termination of the Architect Weather Delays 4.1.3 15.1.5.2 Termination of the Contractor Work,Definition of 14.2.2 1.1.3 TERMINATION OR SUSPENSION OF THE Written Consent CONTRACT 1.5.2,3.4.2,3.7.4,3.12.8,3.14.2,4.1.2,9.3.2,9.8.5, 14 9.9.1,9.10.2,9.10.3, 11.4.1, 13.2, 13.4.2, 15.4.4.2 Tests and Inspections Written Interpretations „ Init. AIA Document A201 TM—2007.Copyright ©1911,1915,1918,1925,1937,1951,1958,1961,1963,1966,1970,1976,1987,1997 and 2007 by The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING:This AIA" Document is protected by U.S.copyright Law and international Treaties. Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AIA"' Document,or any portion of it,may result in severe civil and criminal penalties..and will be / prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law, This document was produced by AIA software at 19:38:20 on 03/08/2009 under Order No.1000389496_1 which expires on 2/25/2010,and is not for resale. User Notes: (606649719) Payments to Subcontractors Rights and Remedies 5.4.2,9.5.1.3,9.6.2,9.6.3,9.6.4,9.6.7, 11.4.8, 1.1.2,2.3,2.4,3.5.1,3.7.4,3.15.2,4.2.6,4.5,5.3,5.4, 14.2.1.2 6.1,6.3,7.3.1, 8.3,9.5.1,9.7, 10.2.5, 10.3, 12.2.2, PCB 12.2.4,13.4, 14, 15.4 10.3.1 Royalties,Patents and Copyrights Performance Bond and Payment Bond 3.17 7.3.7.4,9.6.7,9.10.3, 11.4.9,11.4 Rules and Notices for Arbitration Permits,Fees,Notices and Compliance with Laws 15.4.1 2.2.2,3.7,3.13,7.3.7.4, 10.2.2 Safety of Persons and Property PERSONS AND PROPERTY,PROTECTION 10.2, 10.4 OF Safety Precautions and Programs 10 3.3.1,4.2.2,4.2.7,5.3.1, 10.1, 10.2, 10.4 Polychlorinated Biphenyl Samples,Definition of 10.3.1 3.12.3 Product Data,Definition of Samples,Shop Drawings,Product Data and 3.12.2 3.11,3.12,4.2.7 Product Data and Samples,Shop Drawings Samples at the Site,Documents and 3.11,3.12,4.2.7 3.11 Progress and Completion Schedule of Values 4.2.2,8.2,9.8,9.9.1,14.1.4,15.1.3 9.2,9.3.1 Progress Payments Schedules,Construction 9.3,9.6,9.8.5,9.10.3, 13.6, 14.2.3, 15.1.3 1.4.1.2,3.10,3.12.1,3.12.2,6.1.3, 15.1.5.2 Project,Definition of the Separate Contracts and Contractors 1.1.4 1.1.4,3.12.5,3.14.2,4.2.4,4.2.7,6,8.3.1, 11.4.7, Project Representatives 12.1.2 4.2.10 Shop Drawings,Definition of Property Insurance 3.12.1 10.2.5,11.3 Shop Drawings,Product Data and Samples PROTECTION OF PERSONS AND PROPERTY 3.11,3.12,4.2.7 10 Site,Use of Regulations and Laws 3.13,6.1.1,6.2.1 1.5,3.2.3,3.6,3.7,3.12.10,3.13,4.1.1,9.6.4,9.9.1, Site Inspections 10.2.2, 11.1, 11.4, 13.1, 13.4, 13.5.1, 13.5.2, 13.6, 14, 3.2.2,3.3.3,3.7.1,3.7.4,4.2,9.4.2,9.10.1, 13.5 15.2.8, 15.4 Site Visits,Architect's Rejection of Work 3.7.4,4.2.2,4.2.9,9.4.2,9.5.1,9.9.2,9.10.1, 13.5 3.5.1,4.2.6, 12.2.1 Special Inspections and Testing Releases and Waivers of Liens 4.2.6, 12.2.1, 13.5 9.10.2 Specifications,Definition of the Representations 1.1.6 3.2.1,3.5.1,3.12.6,6.2.2,8.2.1,9.3.3,9.4.2,9.5.1, Specifications,The 9.8.2,9.10.1 1.1.1,1.1.6, 1.2.2, 1.5,3.11,3.12.10,3.17,4.2.14 Representatives Statute of Limitations 2.1.1,3.1.1,3.9,4.1.1,4.2.1,4.2.2,4.2.10,5.1.1, 13.7, 15.4.1.1 5.1.2, 13.2.1 Stopping the Work Responsibility for Those Performing the Work 2.3,9.7, 10.3, 14.1 3.3.2,3.18,4.2.3,5.3.1,6.1.3,6.2,6.3,9.5.1, 10 Stored Materials Retainage 6.2.1,9.3.2, 10.2.1.2, 10.2.4, 11.4.1.4 9.3.1,9.6.2,9.8.5,9.9.1,9.10.2,9.10.3 Subcontractor,Definition of Review of Contract Documents and Field 5.1.1 Conditions by Contractor SUBCONTRACTORS 3.2,3.12.7,6.1.3 5 Review of Contractor's Submittals by Owner and Subcontractors,Work by Architect 1.2.2,3.3.2,3.12.1,4.2.3,5.2.3,5.3,5.4,9.3.1.2, 3.10.1,3.10.2,3.11,3.12,4.2,5.2,6.1.3,9.2,9.8.2 9.6.7 Review of Shop Drawings,Product Data and Subcontractual Relations Samples by Contractor 5.3,5.4,9.3.1.2,9.6,9.10, 10.2.1, 11.4.7, 11.4.8, 3.12 14.1, 14.2.1 AIA Document A201 TM—2007.Copyright ©1911,1915,1918,1925,1937,1951,1958,1961,1963,1966,1970,1976,1987,1997 and 2007 by The Init. American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING:This AIA` Document is protected by J.S.Copyright Law and International Treaties. 7 unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AiA'�' Document,or any portion of it,may result in severe civil and criminal penalties.and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the taw. This document was produced by AIA software at 19:38:20 on 03/08/2009 under Order No.1000389496_1 which expires on 2/25/2010,and is not for resale. (606649719) User Notes: Material Suppliers 2.1.2,2.2,3.2.2,3.12.10,6.1.3,6.1.4,6.2.5,9.3.2, 1.5,3.12.1,4.2.4,4.2.6,5.2.1,9.3,9.4.2,9.6,9.10.5 9.6.1,9.6.4,9.9.2,9.10.3, 10.3.3, 11.2.1, 11.3, 13.5.1, Materials,Hazardous 13.5.2, 14.1.1.4, 14.1.4, 15.1.3 10.2.4,10.3 Owner's Authority Materials,Labor,Equipment and 1.5,2.1.1,2.3.1,2.4.1,3.4.2,3.8.1,3.12.10,3.14.2, 1.1.3, 1.1.6, 1.5.1,3.4.1,3.5.1,3.8.2,3.8.3,3.12, 4.1.2,4.1.3,4.2.4,4.2.9,5.11,5.2.4,5.4.1,6.1,6.3.1, 3.13.1,3.15.1,4.2.6,4.2.7,5.2.1,6.2.1,7.3.7,9.3.2, 7.2.1,7.3.1,8.2.2, 8.3.1,9.3.1,9.3.2,9.5.1,9.6.4, 9.3.3,9.5.1.3,9.10.2, 10.2.1.2, 10.2.4, 14.2.1.1, 9.9.1,9.10.2, 10.3.2, 11.1.3, 11.3.3, 11.3.10, 12.2.2, 14.2.1.2 12.3.1, 13.2.2, 14.3, 14.4, 15.2.7 Means,Methods,Techniques,Sequences and Owner's Financial Capability Procedures of Construction 2.2.1, 13.2.2, 14.1.1.4 3.3.1,3.12.10,4.2.2,4.2.7,9.4.2 Owner's Liability Insurance Mechanic's Lien 11.2 2.1.2, 15.2.8 Owner's Loss of Use Insurance Mediation 11.3.3 8.3.1, 10.3.5, 10.3.6, 15.2.1, 15.2.5, 15.2.6,15.3, Owner's Relationship with Subcontractors 15.4.1 1.1.2,5.2,5.3,5.4,9.6.4,9.10.2, 14.2.2 Minor Changes in the Work Owner's Right to Carry Out the Work 1.1.1,3.12.8,4.2.8,7.1,7.4 2.4, 14.2.2 MISCELLANEOUS PROVISIONS Owner's Right to Clean Up 13 6.3 Modifications,Definition of Owner's Right to Perform Construction and to 1.1.1 Award Separate Contracts Modifications to the Contract 6.1 1.1.1, 1.1.2,3.11,4.1.2,4.2.1,5.2.3,7,8.3.1,9.7.1, Owner's Right to Stop the Work 10.3.2, 11.3.1 2,3 Mutual Responsibility Owner's Right to Suspend the Work 6.2 14.3 Nonconforming Work,Acceptance of Owner's Right to Terminate the Contract 9.6.6,9.9.3,12.3 14.2 Nonconforming Work,Rejection and Correction of Ownership and Use of Drawings,Specifications 2.3.1,2.4.1,3.5.1,4.2.6,6.2.4,9.5.1,9.8.2,9.9.3, and Other Instruments of Service 9.10.4, 12.2.1 L1.1, 1.1.6, 1.1.7,1.5,2.2.5,3.2.2,3.11.1,3.17.1, Notice 4.2.12,5.3.1 2.2.1,2.3.1,2.4.1,3.2.4,3.3.1,3.7.2,3.12.9,5.2.1, Partial Occupancy or Use 9.7.1,9.10, 10.2.2, 11.1.3, 11.4.6, 12.2.2.1, 13.3, 9.6.6,9.9, 11.3.1.5 13.5.1, 13.5.2, 141, 14.2, 15.2.8, 15.4.1 Patching,Cutting and Notice,Written 3.14,6.2.5 2.3.1,2.4.1,3.3.1,3.9.2,3.12.9,3.12.10,5.2.1,9.7.1, Patents 9.10, 10.2.2, 10.3, 11.1.3, 11.3.6, 12.2.2.1,13.3, 14, 3.17 15.2.8, 15.4.1 Payment,Applications for Notice of Claims 4.2.5,7.3.9,9.2.1,9.3,9.4,9.5,9.6.3,9.7.1,9.8.5, 3.7.4,4.5, 10.2.8, 15.1.2, 15.4 9.10.1, 14.2.3, 14.2.4, 14.4.3 Notice of Testing and Inspections Payment,Certificates for 13.5.1, 13.5.2 4.2.5,4.2.9,9.3.3,9.4,9.5,9.6.1,9.6.6,9.7.1,9.10.1, Observations,Contractor's 9.10.3, 13.7, 14.1.1.3, 14.2.4 3.2,3.7.4 Payment,Failure of Occupancy 9.5.1.3,9.7,9.10.2, 13.6, 14.1.1.3, 14.2.1.2 2.2.2,9.6.6,9.8, 11.3.1.5 Payment,Final Orders,Written 4.2.1,4.2.9,9:8.2,9.10, 11.1.2, 11.1.3, 11.4.1, 11.4.5, 1.1.1,2.3,3.9.2,7,8.2.2, 11.3.9, 12.1, 12.2.2.1, 12.3.1, 13.7, 14.2.4, 14.4.3 13.5.2, 14.3.1 Payment Bond,Performance Bond and OWNER 7.3.7.4,9.6.7,9.10.3, 11.4.9,11.4 2 Payments,Progress Owner,Definition of 9.3,9.6,9.8.5,9.10.3, 13.6, 14.2.3, 15.1.3 2.1.1 PAYMENTS AND COMPLETION Owner,Information and Services Required of the 9 Init. AIA Document A201 TM—2007.Copyright ©1911,1915,1918,1925,1937,1951,1958,1961,1963,1966,1970,1976,1987,1997 and 2007 by The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING:This AIA" is protected by U.S.Copyright Law and International Treaties. Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AIA"'Document,or any portion of it,may result in severe civil and criminal penalties,and will be 1') / prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the taw. This document was produced by AIA software at 19:38:20 on 03/08/2009 under Order No.1000389496_1 which expires on 2/25/2010,and is not for resale. User Notes: (606649719) 1.1.3, 1.1.6,3.4,3.5.1,3.8.2,3.8.3,3.12,3.13.1, Insurance 3.15.1,4.2.6,4.2.7,5.2.1,6.2.1,7.3.7,9.3.2,9.3.3, 3.18.1,6.1.1,7.3.7,9.3.2,9.8.4,9.9.1,9.10.2,11 9.5.1.3,9.10.2, 10.2.1, 10.2.4, 14.2.1.1, 14.2.1.2 Insurance,Boiler and Machinery Execution and Progress of the Work 11.3.2 1.1.3, 1.2.1, 1.2.2,2.2.3,2.2.5,3.1,3.3.1,3.4.1,3.5.1, Insurance,Contractor's Liability 3.7.1,3.10.1,3.12,3.14,4.2,6.2.2,7.1.3,7.3.5,8.2, 11.1 9.5.1,9.9.1, 10.2, 10.3, 12.2, 14.2, 14.3.1, 15.1.3 Insurance,Effective Date of Extensions of Time 8.2.2, 11.1.2 3.2.4,3.7.4,5.2.3,7.2.1,7.3,7.4.1,9.5.1,9.7.1, Insurance,Loss of Use 10.3.2, 10.4.1, 14.3, 15.1.5, 15.2.5 11.3.3 Failure of Payment Insurance,Owner's Liability 9.5.1.3,9.7,9.10.2, 13.6, 14.1.1.3, 14.2.1.2 11.2 Faulty Work Insurance,Property (See Defective or Nonconforming Work) 10.2.5,11.3 Final Completion and Final Payment Insurance,Stored Materials 4.2.1,4.2.9,9.8.2,9.10, 11.1.2, 11.1.3, 11.3.1, 11.3.5, 9.3.2, 11.4.1.4 12.3.1, 14.2.4, 14.4.3 INSURANCE AND BONDS Financial Arrangements,Owner's 11 2.2.1, 13.2.2, 14.1.1.4 Insurance Companies,Consent to Partial Occupancy Fire and Extended Coverage Insurance 9.9.1, 11.4.1.5 11.3.1.1 Insurance Companies,Settlement with GENERAL PROVISIONS 11.4.10 1 Intent of the Contract Documents Governing Law 1.2.1,4.2.7,4.2.12,4.2.13,7.4 13.1 Interest Guarantees(See Warranty) 13.6 Hazardous Materials Interpretation 10.2.4,10.3 1.2.3,1.4,4.1.1,5.1,6.1.2, 15.1.1 Identification of Subcontractors and Suppliers Interpretations,Written 5.2.1 4.2.11,4.2.12, 15.1.4 Indemnification Judgment on Final Award 3.17.1,3.18,9.10.2, 10.3.3,10.3.5, 10.3.6, 11.3.1.2, 15.4.2 11.3.7 Labor and Materials,Equipment Information and Services Required of the Owner 1.1.3, 1.1.6,3.4,3.5.1,3.8.2,3.8.3,3.12,3.13,3.15.1, 2.1.2,2.2,3.2.2,3.12.4,3.12.10,6.1.3,6.1.4,6.2.5, 4.2.6,4.2.7,5.2.1,6.2.1,7.3.7,9.3.2,9.3.3,9.5.1.3, 9.6.1,9.6.4,9.9.2,9.10.3, 10.3.3, 11.2.1, 11.4, 13.5.1, 9.10.2, 10.2.1, 10.2.4, 14.2.1.1, 14.2.1.2 13.5.2, 14.1.1.4, 14.1.4, 15.1.3 Labor Disputes Initial Decision 8.3.1 15.2 Laws and Regulations Initial Decision Maker,Definition of 1.5,3.2.3,3.6,3.7,3.12.10,3.13.1,4.1.1,9.6.4,9.9.1, 1.1.8 10.2.2, 11.1.1, 11.3, 13.1.1, 13.4, 13.5.1, 13.5.2, Initial Decision Maker,Decisions 13.6.1, 14, 15.2.8, 15.4 14.2.2, 14.2.4, 15.2.1, 15.2.2,15.2.3, 15.2.4, 15.2.5 Liens Initial Decision Maker,Extent of Authority 2.1.2,9.3.3,9.10.2,9.10.4,15.2.8 14.2.2, 14.2.4, 15.1.3, 15.2.1, 15.2.2, 15.2.3, 15.2.4, Limitations,Statutes of 15.2.5 12.2.5, 13.7, 15.4.1.1 Injury or Damage to Person or Property Limitations of Liability 10.2.8, 10.4.1 2.3.1,3.2.2,3.5.1,3.12.10,3.17.1,3.18.1,4.2.6, Inspections 4.2.7,4.2.12,6.2.2,9.4.2,9.6.4,9.6.7, 10.2.5, 10.3.3, 3.1.3,3.3.3,3.7.1,4.2.2,4.2.6,4.2.9,9.4.2,9.8.3, 11.1.2, 11.2.1;11.3.7, 12.2.5, 13.4.2 9.9.2,9.10.1, 12.2.1, 13.5 Limitations of Time Instructions to Bidders 2.1.2,2.2,2.4,3.2.2,3.10,3.11,3.12.5,3.15.1,4.2.7, 1.1.1 5.2,5.3.1,5.4.1,6.2.4,7.3,7.4,8.2,9.2.1,9.3.1, Instructions to the Contractor 9.3.3,9.4.1,9.5,9.6,9.7.1,9.8,9.9,9.10, 11.1.3, 3.2.4,3.3.1,3.8.1,5.2.1,7,8.2.2, 12, 13.5.2 11.3.1.5, 11.3.6, 11.3.10, 12.2, 13.5, 13.7, 14, 15 Instruments of Service,Definition of Loss of Use Insurance 1.1.7 11.3.3 111t. AIA Document A201 Tm—2007.copyright g ©1911,1915,1918,1925,1937,1951,1958,1961,1963,1966,1970,1976,1987,1997 and 2007 by The 1 American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING:This AIA" Document is protected by U.S.Copyright Law and international Treaties. 5 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AIA"' Document,or any portion of it,may result in severe civil and criminal penalties,and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This document was produced by AIA software at 19:38:20 on 03/08/2009 under Order N0.1000389496_1 which expires on 2/25/2010,and is not for resale. (606649719) User Notes: 8.1.1 Costs CONTRACTOR 2.4.1,3.2.4,3.7.3,3.8.2,3.15.2,5.4.2,6.1.1,6.2.3, - 3 7.3.3.3,7.3.7,7.3.8,7.3.9,9.10.2, 10.3.2, 10.3.6, Contractor,Definition of 11.3, 12.1.2, 12.2.1, 12.2.4, 13.5, 14 3.1,6.1.2 Cutting and Patching Contractor's Construction Schedules 3.14,6.2.5 3.10,3.12.1,3.12.2,6.1.3, 15.1.5.2 Damage to Construction of Owner or Separate Contractor's Employees Contractors 3.3.2,3.4.3,3.8.1,3.9,3.18.2,4.2.3,4.2.6, 10.2, 10.3, 3.14.2,6.2.4, 10.2.1.2, 10.2.5, 10.4, 11.1.1, 11.3, 11.1.1, 11.3.79 14.1, 14.2.1.1, 12.2.4 Contractor's Liability Insurance Damage to the Work 11.1 3.14.2,9.9.1, 10.2.1.2, 10.2.5, 10.4.1, 11.3.1, 12.2.4 Contractor's Relationship with Separate Contractors Damages,Claims for and Owner's Forces 3.2.4,3.18,6.1.1,8.3.3,9.5.1,9.6.7, 10.3.3, 11.1.1, 3.12.5,3.14.2,4.2.4,6, 11.3.7, 12.1.2, 12.2.4 11.3.5, 11.3.7, 14.1.39 14.2.4, 15.1.6 Contractor's Relationship with Subcontractors Damages for Delay 1.2.2,3.3.2,3.18.1,3.18.2,5,9.6.2,9.6.7,9.10.2, 6.1.1,8.3.3,9.5.1.6,9.7, 10.3.2 11.3.1.2, 11.3.79 11.3.8 Date of Commencement of the Work,Definition of Contractor's Relationship with the Architect 8,1,2 1.1.2, 1.5, 3.1.3,3.2.2,3.2.3,3.2.4,3.3.1,3.4.2,3.5.1, Date of Substantial Completion,Definition of 3.7.4,3.10,3.11,3.12,3.16,3.18,4.1.3,4.2,5.2, 8.1.3 6.2.2,7,8.3.1,9.2,9.3,9.4,9.5,9.7,9.8,9.9, 10.2.6, Day,Definition of 10.3, 11.3.7, 12, 13.5, 15.1.2, 15.2.1 8.1.4 Contractor's Representations Decisions of the Architect 3.2.1,3.2.29 3.5.1,3.12.6,6.2.29 8.2.1,9.3.3,9.8.2 3.7.4,4.2.6,4.2.7,4.2.11,4.2.12,4.2.13, 15.2,6.3, Contractor's Responsibility for Those Performing the 7.3.7,7.3.9,8.1.3, 8.3.1,9.2.1,9.4,9.5.1,9.8.49 9.9.1, Work 13.5.2, 14.2.2, 14.2.4, 15.1, 15.2 3.3.2,3.18,5.3.1,6.1.3,6.2,9.5.1, 10.2.8 Decisions to Withhold Certification Contractor's Review of Contract Documents 9.4.19 9.5,9.7, 14.1.1.3 3.2 Defective or Nonconforming Work,Acceptance, Awk Contractor's Right to Stop the Work Rejection and Correction of 9.7 2.3.1,2.4.1,3.5.1,4.2.6,6.2.59 9.5.1,9.5.2,9.6.6, Contractor's Right to Terminate the Contract 9.8.2,9.9.3,9.10.4, 12.2.1 14.1, 15.1.6 Defective Work,Definition of Contractor's Submittals 3.5.1 3.10,3.11, 3.12.4,4.2.7,5.2.1,5.2.3,9.2,9.3,9.8.2, Definitions 9.8.3,9.9.1,9.10.2,9.10.3, 11.1.39 11.4.2 1.1,2.1.1, 3.1.1,3.5.1,3.12.1,3.12.2,3.12.3,4.1.1, Contractor's Superintendent 15.1.1,5.1,6.1.2,7.2.1,7.3.1,8.1,9.1,9.8.1 3.9, 10.2.6 Delays and Extensions of Time Contractor's Supervision and Construction 3.2.,3.7.4,5.2.3,7.2.1,7.3.1,7.4.1,8.3,9.5.1,9.7.1, Procedures 10.3.2, 10.4.1, 14.3.2, 15.1.5, 15.2.5 1.2.2,3.3,3.4,3.12.10,4.2.2,4.2.7,6.1.3,6.2.4, Disputes 7.1.3,7.3.5,7.3.7, 8.2, 10, 12, 14, 15.1.3 6.3.1,7.3.9, 15.1, 15.2 Contractual Liability Insurance Documents and Samples at the Site 11.1.1.8, 11.2 3.11 Coordination and Correlation Drawings,Definition of 1.2,3.2.1,3.3.1,3.10,3.12.6,6.1.3,6.2.1 1.1.5 Copies Furnished of Drawings and Specifications Drawings and Specifications,Use and Ownership of 1.5,2.2.5,3.11 3.11 Copyrights Effective Date of Insurance 1.5,3.17 8.2.2, 11.1.2 Correction of Work Emergencies 2.3,2.4,3.7.3,9.4.2,9.8.2,9.8.3,9.9.1, 12.1.2,12.2 10.4, 14.1.1.2, 15.1.4 Correlation and Intent of the Contract Documents Employees, Contractor's 1.2 3.3.2,3.4.3,3.8.1,3.9,3.18.2,4.2.3,4.2.6, 10.2, Cost,Definition of 10.3.3, 11.1.1, 11.3.7, 14.1, 14.2.1.1 7'3'7 Equipment,Labor,Materials or Init. AIA Document A201 TM—2007.Copyright ©1911,1915,1918,1925,1937,1951,1958,1961,1963,1966,1970,1976,1987,1997 and 2007 by The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING:This AIA" Document is protected by U.&Copyright Law and International Treaties. Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AIA'"' Document,or any portion of it,may result in severe civil and criminal penalties..and will be 4 / prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This document was produced by AIA software at 19:38:20 on 03/08/2009 under Order No.1000389496_1 which expires on 2/25/2010,and is not for resale. User Notes: (606649719) Building Permit Completion,Substantial ` 3.7.1 4.2.9,8.1.1,8.1.3,8.2.3,9.4.2,9.8,9.9.1,9.10.3, Capitalization 12.2, 13.7 1.3 Compliance with Laws Certificate of Substantial Completion 1.6.1,3.2.3,3.6,3.7,3.12.10,3.13,4.1.1,9.6.4, 9.8.3,9.8.4,9.8.5 10.2.2, 11.1, 11.3, 13.1, 13.4, 13.5.1, 13.5.2, 13.6, Certificates for Payment 14.1.1, 14.2.1.3,15.2.8, 15.4.2, 15.4.3 4.2.1,4.2.5,4.2.9,9.3.3,9.4,9.5,9.6.1,9.6.6,9.7.1, Concealed or Unknown Conditions 9.10.1,9.10.3, 14.1.1.3, 14.2.4, 15.1.3 3.7.4,4.2.8,8.3.1, 10.3 Certificates of Inspection,Testing or Approval Conditions of the Contract 13.5.4 1.1.1,6.1.1,6.1.4 Certificates of Insurance Consent,Written 9.10.2, 11.1.3 3.4.2,3.7.4,3.12.8,3.14.2,4.1.2,9.3.2,9.8.5,9.9.1, Change Orders 9.10.2,9.10.3, 11.3.1, 13.2, 13.4.2, 15.4.4.2 1.1.1,2.4.1,3.4.2,3.7.4,3.8.2.3,3.11.1,3.12.8,4.2.8, Consolidation or Joinder 5.2.3,7.1.2,7.1.3,7.2,7.3.2,7.3.6,7.3.9,7.3.10, 15.4.4 8.3.1,9.3.1.1,9.10.3, 10.3.2, 11.3.1.2, 11.3.4, 11.3.9, CONSTRUCTION BY OWNER OR BY 12.1.2, 15.1.3 SEPARATE CONTRACTORS Change Orders,Definition of 1.1.4,6 7.2.1 Construction Change Directive,Definition of CHANGES IN THE WORK 7.3.1 2.2.1,3.11,4.2.8,7,7.2.1,7.3.1,7.4,7.4.1,8.3.1, Construction Change Directives 9.3.1.1, 11.3.9 1.1.1,3.4.2,3.12.8,4.2.8,7.1.1,7.1.2,7.1.3,7.3, Claims,Definition of 9.3.1.1 15.1.1 Construction Schedules,Contractor's CLAIMS AND DISPUTES 3.10,3.12.1,3.12.2,6.1.3, 15.1.5.2 3.2.4,6.1.1,6.3.1,7.3.9,9.3.3,9.10.4, 10.3.3, 15, Contingent Assignment of Subcontracts 15.4 5.4, 14.2.2.2 Claims and Timely Assertion of Claims Continuing Contract Performance 15.4.1 15.1.3 Claims for Additional Cost Contract,Definition of 3.2.4,3.7.4,6.1.1,7.3.9, 10.3.2,15.1.4 1.1.2 Claims for Additional Time CONTRACT,TERMINATION OR 3.2.4,3.7.46.1.1,8.3.2, 10.3.2,15.1.5 SUSPENSION OF THE Concealed or Unknown Conditions,Claims for 5.4.1.1, 11.3.9,14 3.7.4 Contract Administration Claims for Damages 3.1.3,4,9.4,9.5 3.2.4,3.18,6.1.1,8.3.3,9.5.1,9.6.7, 10.3.3, 11.1.1, Contract Award and Execution,Conditions Relating 11.3.5, 11.3.7, 14.1.3, 14.2.4, 15.1.6 to Claims Subject to Arbitration 3.7.1,3.10,5.2,6.1, 11.1.3, 11.3.6, 11.4.1 15.3.1, 15.4.1 Contract Documents,The Cleaning Up 1.1.1 3.15,6.3 Contract Documents,Copies Furnished and Use of Commencement of the Work,Conditions Relating to 1.5.2,2.2.5,5.3 2.2.1,3.2.2,3.4.1,3.7.1,3.10.1,3.12.6,5.2.1,5.2.3, Contract Documents,Definition of 6.2.2,8.1.2,8.2.2,8.3.1, 11.1, 11.3.1, 11.3.6, 11.4.1, 1.1.1 15.1.4 Contract Sum Commencement of the Work,Definition of 3.7.4,3.8,5.2.3,7.2,7.3,7.4,9.1,9.4.2,9.5.1.4, 8.1.2 9.6.7,9.7, 10.3.2, 11.3.1, 14.2.4, 14.3.2, 15.1.4, Communications Facilitating Contract 15.2.5 Administration Contract Sum,Definition of 3.9.1,4.2.4 9.1 Completion,Conditions Relating to Contract Time 3.4.1,3.11,3.15,4.2.2,4.2.9,8.2,9.4.2,9.8,9.9.1, 3.7.4,3.7.5,3.10.2,5.2.3,7.2.1.3,7.3.1,7.3.5,7.4, 9.10, 12.2, 13.7, 14.1.2 8.1.1,8.2.1,8.3.1,9.5.1,9.7.1, 10.3.2, 12.1.1, 14.3.2, COMPLETION,PAYMENTS AND 15.1.5.1, 15.2.5 9 Contract Time,Definition of Init. AIA Document A201 TM—2007.copyright ©1911,1915,1918,1925,1937,1951,1958,1961,1963,1966,1970,1976,1987,1997 and 2007 by The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING:This AIA` Document is protected by U.S.Copyright Law and International Treaties. 3 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AIA'' Document,or any portion of it,may result in severe civil and criminal penalties,and wifi be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This document was produced by AIA software at 19:38:20 on 03/0812009 under Order No.1000389496_1 which expires on 2/25/2010,and is not for resale. (606649719) User Notes: INDEX Architect's Additional Services and Expenses Awk (Numbers and Topics in Bold are Section Headings) 2.4.1, 11.3.1.1, 12.2.1, 13.5.2, 13.5.3, 14.2.4 Architect's Administration of the Contract 3.1.3,4.2,3.7.4, 15.2,9.4.1,9.5 Acceptance of Nonconforming Work Architect's Approvals 9.6.6,9.9.3,12.3 2.4.1,3.1.3,3.5.1,3.10.2,4.2.7 Acceptance of Work Architect's Authority to Reject Work 9.6.6,9.8.2,9.9.3,9.10.1,9.10.3, 12.3 3.5.1,4.2.6, 12.1.2, 12.2.1 Access to Work Architect's Copyright 3.16,6.2.1, 12.1 1.1.7, 1.5 Accident Prevention Architect's Decisions 10 3.7.4,4.2.6,4.2.7,4.2.11,4.2.12,4.2.13,4.2.14, Acts and Omissions 6.3.1,7.3.7,7.3.9,8.1.3,8.3.1,9.2.1,9.4.1,9.5,9.8.4, 3.2,3.3.2,3.12.8,3.18,4.2.3,8.3.1,9.5.1, 10.2.5, 9.9.1, 13.5.2, 15.2, 15.3 10.2.8, 13.4.2, 13.7.1, 14.1, 15.2 Architect's Inspections Addenda 3.7.4,4.2.2,4.2.9,9.4.2,9.8.3,9.9.2,9.10.1, 13.5 1.1.1,3.11.1 Architect's Instructions Additional Costs,Claims for 3.2.4,3.3.1,4.2.6,4.2.7, 13.5.2 3.7.4,3.7.5,6.1.1,7.3.7.5, 10.3, 15.1.4 Architect's Interpretations Additional Inspections and Testing 4.2.11,4.2.12 9.4.2,9.8.3, 12.2.1,13.5 Architect's Project Representative Additional Insured 4.2.10 11.1.4 Architect's Relationship with Contractor Additional Time,Claims for 1.1.2, 1.5, 3.1.3,3.2.2,3.2.3,3.2.4,3.3.1,3.4.2,3.5.1, 3.2.4,3.7.4,3.7.5,3.10.2,8.3.2,15.1.5 3.7.4,3.7.5,3.9.2,3.9.3,3.10,3.11,3.12,3.16,3.18, Administration of the Contract 4.1.2,4.1.3,4.2,5.2,6.2.2,7,8.3.1,9.2,9.3,9.4,9.5, 3.1.3,4.2,9.4,9.5 9.7,9.8,9.9, 10.2.6, 10.3, 11.3.7, 12, 13.4.2, 13.5, Advertisement or Invitation to Bid 15.2 1.1.1 Architect's Relationship with Subcontractors Aesthetic Effect 1.1.2,4.2.3,4.2.4,4.2.6,9.6.3,9.6.4, 11.3.7 4.2.13 Architect's Representations Allowances 9.4.2,9.5.1,9.10.1 3.8,7.3.8 Architect's Site Visits All-risk Insurance 3.7.4,4.2.2,4.2.9,9.4.2,9.5.1,9.9.2,9.10.1, 13.5 11.3.1, 11.3.1.1 Asbestos Applications for Payment 10.3.1 4.2.5,7.3.9,9.2,9.3,9.4, 9.5.1,9.6.3,9.7.1,9.10, Attorneys' Fees 11.1.3 3.18.1,9.10.2, 10.3.3 Approvals Award of Separate Contracts 2.1.1,2.2.2,2.4,3.1.3,3.10.2,3.12.8,3.12.9,3.12.10, 6.1.1,6.1.2 4.2.7,9.3.2, 13.5.1 Award of Subcontracts and Other Contracts for Arbitration Portions of the Work 8.3.1, 11.3.10, 13.1.1, 15.3.2,15.4 5.2 ARCHITECT Basic Definitions 4 1.1 Architect,Definition of Bidding Requirements 4.1.1 1.1.1,5.2.1, 11.4.1 Architect,Extent of Authority Binding Dispute Resolution 2.4.1,3.12.7,4.1,4.2,5.2,6.3.1,7.1.2,7.3.7,7.4, 9.7.1, 11.3.9, 11.3.10, 13.1.1, 15.2.5, 15.2.6.1, 15.3.1, 9.2.1,9.3.1,9.4,9.5,9.6.3,9.8,9.10.1,9.10.3, 12.1, 15.3.2, 15.4.1 12.2.1, 13.5.1, 13.5.2, 14.2.2, 14.2.4, 15.1.3, 15.2.1 Boiler and Machinery Insurance Architect,Limitations of Authority and 11.3.2 Responsibility Bonds,Lien 2.1.1,3.12.4,3.12.8,3.12.10,4.1.2,4.2.1,4.2.2, 7.3.7.4,9.10.2,9.10.3 4.2.3,4.2.6,4.2.7,4.2.10,4.2.12,4.2.13,5.2.1,7.4.1, Bonds,Performance,and Payment 9.4.2,9.5.3,9.6.4, 15.1.3, 15.2 7.3.7.4,9.6.7,9.10.3, 11.3.9,11.4 Init. AIA Document A201 T""—2007.copyright ©1911,1915,1918,1925,1937,1951,1958,1961,1963,1966,1970,1976,1987,1997 and 2007 by The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING:This AIA`"' Document is protected by U.S.copyright Law and International Treaties. Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AIA''' Document,or any portion of it,may result in severe civil and criminal penalties,and will be 2 / prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This document was produced by AIA software at 19:38:20 on 03/08/2009 under Order No.1000389496_i which expires on 2/25/2010,and is not for resale. User Notes: (606649719) 11 )it TO Document A201 - 2007 General Conditions of the Contract for Construction for the following PROJECT: (Name and location or address) ADDITIONS AND DELETIONS: IPark House The author of this document has 134 Elm Street,Northampton,MA 01060 added information needed for its completion.The author may also THE OWNER: have revised the text of the original (Name and address) AIA standard form.An Additions and Trustees of Smith College,Institution Deletions Report that notes added 26 West Street information as well as revisions to Northampton,MA 01060 the standard form text is available from the author and should be THE ARCHITECT: reviewed.A vertical line in the left (Name and address) margin of this document indicates Archimetrics Design Studio where the author has added 28 North Maple Street necessary information and where the author has added to or deketed Unit B from the original AIA text. Florence,MA 01062 This document has important legal TABLE OF ARTICLES consequences.Consultation with an attorney is encouraged with respect 1 GENERAL PROVISIONS to its completion or modification. 2 OWNER ! 3 CONTRACTOR 4 ARCHITECT 5 SUBCONTRACTORS 6 CONSTRUCTION BY OWNER OR BY SEPARATE CONTRACTORS 7 CHANGES IN THE WORK 8 TIME 9 PAYMENTS AND COMPLETION 10 PROTECTION OF PERSONS AND PROPERTY 11 INSURANCE AND BONDS 12 UNCOVERING AND CORRECTION OF WORK 13 MISCELLANEOUS PROVISIONS 14 TERMINATION OR SUSPENSION OF THE CONTRACT 15 CLAIMS AND DISPUTES AIA Document A201 TM—2007.Copyg ght ©1911,1915,1918,1925,1937,1951,1958,1961,1963,1966,1970,1976,1987,1997 and 2007 by The Init. 1 American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING:This AIA''Document is protected by U.&Copyright Law and International Treaties. Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AIA"' Document.or any portion of it,may result in severe civil and criminal penalties,and will be / prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This document was produced by AIA software at 19:38:20 on 03/08/2009 under Order No.1000389496_1 which expires on 2/25/2010,and is not for resale. U (606649719) User Notes: Proj. No 01091 Proposed Renovations Aw March 6, 2009 Park House Smith College, Northampton, MA DIVISION 13 - SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION NOT APPLICABLE DIVISION 14 - CONVEYING EQUIPMENT NOT APPLICABLE DIVISION 21 - FIRE SUPPRESSION 215300 - FIRE PROTECTION..................................... ................................... 24 DIVISION 22 - PLUMBING 225400 - PLUMBING ................................................ ................................... 37 DIVISION 23 - HEATING VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING 235500 - HVAC ....................................................... ................................... 72 DIVISION 26 - ELECTRICAL 266100 - ELECTRICAL.............................................. ................................... 44 DIVISION 31 - EARTHWORK 311000 - SITE CLEARING.......................................... ................................... 7 312000 - EARTH MOVING ........................................ ................................... 17 DIVISION 32 - EXTERIOR IMPROVEMENTS 321216 - ASPHALT PAVING...................................... ................................... 8 321400 - UNIT PAVING ............................................ ................................... 3 DIVISION 33 - UTILITIES 334600 - SUBDRAINAGE ...................................... ................................ 6 TABLE OF CONTENTS 4of4 Proj. No 01091 Proposed Renovations March 6, 2009 Park House Smith College, Northampton, MA DIVISION 08 - OPENINGS 081 1 13 - HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES....... ................................... 8 081416 - FLUSH WOOD DOORS................................ ................................... 7 081433 - STILE AND RAIL WOOD DOORS ................. ................................... 8 085200 - WOOD WINDOWS...................................... ................................... 13 087100 - DOOR HARDWARE .................................... ................................... 19 DIVISION 09 - FINISHES 0921 16.23 - GYPSUM BOARD SHAFT WALL ASSEMBLIES................................. 6 092613 - GYPSUM VENEER PLASTERING ................... ................................... 10 095113 - ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS................... ................................... 10 096400 - WOOD FLOORING ..................................... ................................... 5 096516 - RESILIENT SHEET FLOORING...................... ................................... 7 096516.13 - LINOLEUM FLOORING........................... ................................... 7 096519 - RESILIENT TILE FLOORING......................... ................................... 6 096816 - SHEET CARPETING .................................... ................................... 7 097200 - WALL COVERINGS ..................................... ................................... 5 097500 - PVC WALL COVERINGS .............................. ................................... 4 099113 - EXTERIOR PAINTING.................................. ................................... 7 099123 - INTERIOR PAINTING .................................. ................................... 9 DIVISION 10 - SPECIALTIES 102113 - TOILET COMPARTMENTS........................... ................................... 5 102800 - TOILET, BATH, AND LAUNDRY ACCESSORIES................................. 6 DIVISION 1 1 - EQUIPMENT NOT APPLICABLE DIVISION 12 - FURNISHINGS 122413 - ROLLER WINDOW SHADES ......................... ................................... 4 124813 - ENTRANCE FLOOR MATS AND FRAMES...... ................................... 3 AOW TABLE OF CONTENTS 3 of 4 Proj. No 01091 Proposed Renovations March 6, 2009 Park House Smith College, Northampton, MA 033000 - CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE...................... ................................... 19 DIVISION 04 - MASONRY 040120 - MAINTENANCE OF UNIT MASONRY............ ................................... 21 042000 - UNIT MASONRY ........................................ ................................... 18 047200 - CAST STONE MASONRY ............................ ................................... 11 DIVISION 05 - METALS 055000 - METAL FABRICATIONS .............................. ................................... 13 055100 - METAL STAIRS .......................................... ................................... 7 055213 - PIPE AND TUBE RAILINGS .......................... ................................... 8 057300 - DECORATIVE METAL RAILINGS .................. ................................... 12 DIVISION 06 - WOOD, PLASTICS, AND COMPOSITES 061000 - ROUGH CARPENTRY.................................. ................................... 12 061600 - SHEATHING .............................................. ................................... 4 062013 - EXTERIOR FINISH CARPENTRY ................... ................................... 10 062023 - INTERIOR FINISH CARPENTRY.................... ................................... 9 064013 - EXTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK... ................................... 7 064023 - INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK... ................................... 12 DIVISION 07 - THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION 072100 - THERMAL INSULATION.............................. ................................... 8 073126 - SLATE SHINGLES ....................................... ................................... 11 075323 - ETHYLENE-PROPYLENE-DIENE-MONOMER (EPDM) ROOFING.......... 11 076100 - SHEET METAL ROOFING ............................ ................................... is 076200 - SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM........... ................................... 7 077100 - ROOF SPECIALTIES........................:........... ................................... 7 079200 -JOINT SEALANTS....................................... ................................... 9 TABLE OF CONTENTS 2 of 4 At"*- Proj. No 01091 Proposed Renovations March 6, 2009 Park House Smith College, Northampton, MA TABLE OF CONTENTS Division ...................................................................Section Title................ Pages AIA A201 -1997.....General Conditions ..................... ................................... 40 010000 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS.......................... ................................... 5 011000 - SUMMARY................................................. ................................... 7 012100 - ALLOWANCES ........................................... .................................... 4 012200 - UNIT PRICES ............................................. ................................... 3 012300 - ALTERNATES............................................. ................................... 2 012600 - CONTRACT MODIFICATION PROCEDURES.. ................................... 3 012900 - PAYMENT PROCEDURES ............................ ................................... 6 40W 013100 - PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION .............................. 10 013200 - CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION.............................. 10 013300 - SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES.......................... ................................... 14 014000 - QUALITY REQUIREMENTS .......................... ................................... 7 015000 - TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS... ................................... 12 016000 - PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS......................... ................................... 10 017300 - EXECUTION............................................... ................................... 7 017329 - CUTTING AND PATCHING ......................... ..................................,. 6 017419 - CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT AND DISPOSAL ...............,. 8 017700 - CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES........................... ................................... 7 017823 - OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA..... ................................... 10 017839 - PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS................. ............................I...... 5 DIVISION 02 - EXISTING CONDITIONS 024119 - SELECTIVE STRUCTURE DEMOLITION......... ................................... 10 DIVISION 03 - CONCRETE Aoftl TABLE OF CONTENTS 1 of 4 Proj. No. 01091 Proposed Renovations March 6, 2009 Park House Smith College, Northampton, MA For Alternate 4: Delete sprinkler Head Replacement Deduct:-------------------------------------------dollars. $-------------------00 For Alternate 5: Delete Solar Hot Water Deduct:-------------------------------------------dollars. $-------------------00 UNIT PRICES: Unit Price 1 : Add:-------------------dollars per square foot. $-------------00 for additional masonry repointing over 200 square feet. Unit Price 2: Add:-------------------dollars per opening. $-------------00 for mow= replacing rotted wood sills. Unit Price 3: Add:-------------------dollars per opening. $------------,00 for repairing rotted wood sills. Signed--------------------------------------------Title------------------- Date:---------------- Company--------------------------- ---------------- FORM OF GENERAL BID 2 Proj. No. 01091 Proposed Renovations March 6, 2009 Park House �,.. Smith College, Northampton, MA BID FORM I, -------------------------------------------, propose to provide all materials and labor necessary for completing the work as defined in the Construction Documents dated March 6, 2009 for Proposed Renovations to Park House including Addenda (if any) as follows: I acknowledge receipt of Addenda Numbers: 1 2 3 none (circle one) I have received and reviewed a copy of the hazardous materials report.-----(init.) BASE BID ------------------------------------------------------------------------dollars. $------------------------------------00 ALTERNATES: For Alternate 1 : Delete Accessibility Improvements Deduct:-------------------------------------------dollars. $-------------------00 For Alternate 2: Delete Make-up Air Deduct:-------------------------------------------dollars. $-------------------00 For Alternate 3: Delete New Room 313 Deduct:-------------------------------------------dollars. $-------------------00 FORM OF GENERAL BID 1 13IL? — ol� , c Iq Project No. S-110 March 14, 2007 PROJECT MANUAL PROPOSED RENOVATIONS �}3 PARK HOUSE SMITH COLLEGE, NORTHAMPTON, MA 0 0 D ED March 6, 2009 529 �'. hcyh 1w Fa )w m —/ Architect j� rf�of e"~,' ARCHIMETRICS DESIGN STUDIO 28 NORTH MAPLE STREET, FLORENCE, MA O 1062 PH 413.582-9100 FAx 413-582-9101 Consulting Engineers Structural Engineer LINDGREN &SHARPLES RYAN HELLWIG, P.E. 435 COTTAGE STREET 28'ALDRICH STREET SPRINGFIELD, MAO 1 104-4005 NORTHAMPTON, MA O 1060 PH 413-732-4336 PH 413-5844504 FAX 413-731-0786 FAx 413-584-4593 o a�►` MARK w. Q=UA C LES ,' FELGATE P. ELECTRICAL y o SHARPLES =; N0.47531 28940 �' ST m